cu31924021601046

CORNELLUNIVERSITYLIBRARY

FROM

Digitized by Microsoft®

Cornell University Library

PA 258.C98 1871

The student's Greek grammar: a grammar o

3 1924 021 601 046

All books are subject to recall after two weeksOlin/Kroch Library

DATE DUE

JJ^^pl*^®^

PRINTED IN U.S.A.


This book was digitized by Microsoft Corporation in

cooperation with Corneii University Libraries, 2007.

You may use and print this copy in iimited quantity

for your personai purposes, but may not distribute or

provide access to it (or modified or partiai versions of it)

for revenue-generating or other commerciai purposes.


'HE STUDENTS' MANU(Continued).

VIII.-LANGUAGE, LITERATURE, &i!,

THE STUDENT'S ENGLISH LANGUAGE. By GEORGEP. MARSH. Edited with additional Cliapters and Notes.Poat Svo. 7s. (xl.

THE STUDENT'S ENGLISH LITERATURE. By T. B.SHAW, M.A. Edited with Notes and lUiistrations. PostSvo. 7t.6d.

THE STUDENT'S SPECIMENS OP ENGLISH LITE-RATURE, aeleoted from the Best Weiteks. By THOS. B.SHAW, M.A. Edited with Additions. Post Svo. It. 6d.

IX.-GEOGRAPHY.THE STUDENT'S ANCIENT GEOGRAPHY. By Rev.

W. L. B EVAN. M.A. Woodcuts. Post Svo. 7s. ed.

THE STUDENT'S MODERN GEOGRAPHY. By Rev.W. Ij.' BEVAN. Woodcuts. Post Svo. 7a. M.

X.-PHILOSOPHY AND LAW.THE STUDENT'S MORAL PHILOSOPHY. With Quo-

tations and References. By WILLIAM FLEMING, D.D.Post Svo. 7s. ed.

THE STUDENT'S BLACKSTONE. A StstematioAbridgement of the entibe Commentaries, adapted to thePresent State of tiik Law. By E. MALCOLM KEBK,LL.D. Post Svo. 7s. lid.

ELEMENTARY SCHOOL HISTORIES.MRS. MARKHAM'S HISTORY OF ENGLAND. From

the First Inv.asiou by the Romans ; -with Conversations at theend of each Chapter. Nevj Sdition, continued to 1S65. With100 Woodcuts. 12mo. 4s.

MRS. MARKHAM'S HISTORY OF FRANCE. From theConquest by the Ganls ; with Conversations at the end ofeach Chapter. New £dUion, coutiuued to 1S61. With 70Woodcuts. 12n)o. is.

MRS. MARKHAM'S HISTORY OF GERMANY. Fromthe Invasion by the Romans under Marius. New Edition,

continued to 1867. With 50 Woodcuts. 12mo. 4>.

LITTLE ARTHUR'S HISTORY OF ENGLAND. ByLady Callcott. New Edition, continued to the Marriage of thePrince of Wales. Woodcuts. ISmo. 'Is. Qd.

STORIES FOB CHILDREN : selected from the HistortOF England. B^ Mr. Croker. Woodcuts. 16mo. 2«. Qd.

DR. WM. SMITH'S SMALLER SERIES.A SMALLER HISTORY OF GREECK With 74 Wood-

cuts. 16mo. St. 6d.

A SMALLER HISTORY OF ROME. AVith 79 Woodcuts.16mo. U. 6(1.

A SMALLER HISTORY OP ENGLAND. With 63 Wood-cuts. 16mo. 3«L Qd.

A SMALLER CLASSICAL MYTHOLOGY. With Trans-lationfl from tho Ancient Poets, and Questions On the Work.With 90 Woodcuts. 16mo. Ss. id.

A SMALLER HISTORY OF LITERATURE. 16mo. 3s. 6d.

SPECIMENS OP ENGLISH LITERATURE. Selectedfrom the Chief Writers, and arranged Chronologically, withNotes. 16mo. Ss. ad.

A SMALLER SCRIPTURE HISTORY. In Three Parts:Old Testament Histoiy ; Connection of Old and New Testa-

ments ; New Testament History to a.d. 70. With Illustration!^

16mo, 3». M.JOHN MURRAY, ALBEMARLE STREET.

January, 1871.

Cornell University

Library

The original of tliis book is in

tine Cornell University Library.

There are no known copyright restrictions in

the United States on the use of the text.

http://www.archi)ê.ôr^^d^tai^sû31 924021 601 046

The Student's Greek Grammar.

A GEAIMAEOF THE

GEEEK LANGUAGE.

By DE. GEOEGE CUETIUS,PROFESSOR IN THE TTNIVERSITT OF LEIPZIG.

TRANSLATED UNDER THE REVISrON OF THE AUTHOR.

By WILLIAM SMITH, D.C.L., LL.D.,

EDITOR OP THE CLASSICAL AND LATIN DICTIONARIES.

For tbe Uae of Colleges and the Upper Forms in Schools.

FOURTH EDITION.

LONDON:JOHN MUEEAY, ALBEMARLE STREET.

1871.Digitized by Microsoft®

4^ S- S"^1r

CURTIUS' GREEK GRAMMAR EXPLAINED.

Now Beady,

ELUCIDATIONS OF THE STUDENT'S GREEK GRAM-MAR. Translated from the German of Ernest Cuktids, with

the Author's Aid and Sanction. By Evelyn Abbot. Post 8vo.

7s. 6d.

THE STUDENT'S LATIN GRAMMAR. By William Smith,

D.C.L., and Theophilus D. Hall, M.A, New Aditwn. Post

8vo. 6s.

FOR THE MIDDLE AND LOWER FORMS IN SCHOOLS.

A SMALLER LATIN GRAMMAR. By Dr. William Smith.

12mo. 3s. Gd.

A SMALLER GREEK GRAMMAR. Abridged from Cuetius'

Larger Work. 12mo. 3s. 6d.

A FIRST GREEK COURSE. Being a Delectus and Exercise-Book adapted to the Greek Grammar of Dr. GeokcjeCuRTins. 12mo. 3s. 6d.

"'CORr^'ELLUr-ilVERSITY;

/n.o.

LONDON raiKTEiD BT WILLUAM CLOWES AND SONS, STAMFORD STEKF.T.

AMD CHARING CROSS.


EDITOR'S PREFACE.

The Greek Grammar of Dr. Curtius is acknowledged

by the most competent scholars, both in this country

and in Germany, to be the best representative of the

present advanced state of Greek scholarship. It is,

indeed, almost the only Grammar which exhibits the

inflexions of the language in a reaUy scientific form;

while its extensive use in the schools of Germany, and

the high commendations it has received from practical

teachers in that country, are a sufficient proof of its

excellence as a school-book. It is surprising to find

that many of the public and private schools in this

country continue to use Grammars, which ignore all the

improvements and discoveries of modem philology, and

still cling to the division of the substantives into ten

declensions, the designation of the Second Perfect as

the Perfect Middle, and similar exploded errors. Dr.

Curtius has stated so fully in his Preface the principles

on which this Grammar is constructed, that it is^unnec-

essary to say more by way of iutroduction. It only

remains to add, that the translation has been made

from the fifth edition of the original work (1862), with

the author's sanction, and that the proof-sheets have

enjoyed the advantage of his final correction and

revision.

An abridgment for the use of the lower forms is

published simultaneously with the present work.

W. S.

London, March, 1863.

a2


FROM THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE.

The fact that within a few years the present Grammai

has found its way into a large number of schools in

various countries of Europe seems to be a satisfactory

answer to the question whether a thorough knowledge

of Greek is attainable by the method I have adopted.

Much, therefore, of what I thought it necessary to state

on the first appearance of the book does not now re-

quire to be repeated ; but I consider it incumbent

upon me to make some observations upon the objects and

the use of the Grammar, and I beg to recommend

these to the careful consideration of teachers.

Few sciences have within the last half century been

so completely reformed as the science of language.

Not only has our insight into the nature and history of

human speech been greatly advanced, but—and this is

justly regarded as a matter of still greater importance

—

quite a diiferent method in treating language in general

has been discovered, after a new era had been openedup by the philosophical inquiries of William vonHumboldt, and the historical investigations of Francis

Bopp and Jacob Grimm. No one, unless he desires

to exclude schools from the progress thus made, andto confine them to the mechanical repetition of imper-feet and antiquated rules, will probably doubt that thenew knowledge, the principles of which have stood thetest of nearly half a century, ought to exercise its in-

fluence on the teaching of language.

If the teaching of a language in our schools is in-


PREFACE. «

tended to lead not only to a thorough understanding of

the master-works of literature, but at the same time to

cultivate and stir up the youthful mind by indepen-

dent exertion and by occupation with a subject so im-

mensely rich and so harmoniously quickening the most

different mental powers as language, such teaching

cannot possibly continue to keep aloof from the pro-

gress of scientific inquiry, which is, unfortunately, still the

case in many places. The teaching of Greek, however,

seems to be specially called upon to make a commence-

ment. The modern science of language has, indeed, exer-

cised its influence on every part of grammar, but none

has been more affected by it than the first, commonly

called the accidence. In Latin scientific inquiry into the

structure of the forms has not yet reached the same

completeness as in Greek. The structure of the Latin

language is less transparent, and we miss so many aids

which we possess for the Greek in the liigh antiquity of

its literature and in its dialects. A scientific treatment

of the structure of the Latin language in schools is,

moreover, a matter of great practical difficulty, on

account of the early age at which the elements must

necessarily be learnt. We ought not, however, on this

account to separate the teaching of Ijatin from all con-

tact with scientific inquiry, the influence of which can

show itself with advantage, at least, in a more suitable

arrangement and distribution of the matter. Granting,

therefore, that our boys, as heretofore, must commit to

memory a large portion of Latin forms;granting that

the most important object in learning Latin consists,

perhaps, more in the acquisition of fixed laws of syntax,

which obviously form the principal strength of the

Latin language ;—the case of the Greek is different.

The Greeks are justly called an artistic people, and the


Vi PEEFACE.

Greek language is the most ancient work of art whicb

they have reared upon a very primitive basis. The

student, who approaches the Greek after he has already

gone through a considerable preparation by the study

of Latin, ought to be impressed with the idea that the

structure of this language is one of the most marvellous

productions of the intellectual powers acting uncon-

sciously. Everything lies here clear before us: the

sources of our knowledge are more varied, and the

necessity of analysing the given forms is rendered so

absolute, even on account of the Homeric dialect, that

this analysis has, in fact, never been entirely wanting,

and after the first appearance of Buttmann, in 1782,

made considerable progress. The attempt, therefore,

to connect in a still higher degree the practice of the

school with the spirit of science, can here point to

numerous precedents, and it is, no doubt, mainly owingto this circumstance that it has met vsdth so favourable

a reception. My object has been to produce a con-sistent system, a careful selection, and a clear and pre-

cise exposition, rather than an entirely new system.

In selecting and expounding the results of scientiiic

inquiry, I have always kept in view the idea that thebook was intended for practical use in schools. Thefirst requisite, therefore, was not to admit anythingwhich is beyond the sphere of the school, to explain onlythat which is necessary, and to admit only that whichis absolutely certain. For a school-book must speakcategorically, must exclude all matters of mere opinion,and has no space for discussion and inquiry. It is[

however, perfectly indifferent whether a result has beenobtained by special researches into the Greek language,or by the more general inquiries of comparativephilology.


PREFACE. Vli

I was further obliged to admit only those things

which find their explanation in the Greek language

itself, or at most in a comparison with the Latin ; but,

even within these limits, I have confined myself to

such innovations as really afford an important insight

into the structure of the forms, whereas all that belongs

to philological learning and many other things have

been passed over because they seemed unnecessary.

Among such superfluous innovations I include espe-

cially all changes of terminology, and the entire altera-

tion of whole parts of Grammar which are often still

less necessary, but to which formerly too much impor-

tance used to be attached.

The new technical terms I have introduced have

generally been approved of, and the principle stated in

my preface to the first edition, though not followed

with pedantic consistency, "if possible, to put signifi-

cant names in the place of dead numbers," as for e. g.,

A Declension, O Declension, instead of First and

Second Declension, will scarcely be found fault with,

for a name with a meaning at once gives a piece of

information, and therefore facilitates learning. Doubts

have been raised only about the expressions strong and

weak, which I have employed to distinguish the two

Aorists and Perfects. I am as well aware now as I was

at the first that, from the point of view of scientific

inquiry, much may be said against the expressions, but

I nevertheless feel that I cannot give them up. For

the old designation by numbers is unsatisfactory, unless

we are prepared for its sake either to sacrifice a more

consistent arrangement of the verb, or to mislead the

pupil by calling the Aorist which is treated of first the

second, and first the one with which he is made ac-

quainted afterwards. But a common name to distin-


Viii PEEFACE.

guish the two forms of the Aorist Active Middle and

Passive, and of the Perfect Active, is indispensable

in a system of Greek Grammar. An innovation had

here become necessary, for' both negative and posi-

tive reasons. The expressions strong and weah have

this advantage—that after being introduced by Grimminto his German Grammar, they have also been adopted

by English Grammarians ; and though I use them not

quite in the same sense, they are easily intelligible.

It will surely not be difficult to make a pupil under-

stand that those forms are called strong which spring

from the root, as it were, by an internal agency, and

weah those which are formed by syllables added ex-

ternally— especially as he may easily compare the

English take, took, and love, loved. I still know of no

designation which, with so few disadvantages, offers so

many advantages as tliis, and I shall retain it until abetter one is suggested; and, after all, iu necessary

innovations it is often more important that men agree,

than on what they agree.

The fact that the most essential changes I havemade in the arrangements of the subjects—as, for

example, the strict adherence to the system of Stems iu

all the inflexions, and especially the division of theverb according to temporal Stems—have met with theapproval of practical teachers, has been to me a sourceof great gratification, it being a clear proof that thedemands of scientific inquiry are by no means so muchopposed to a right system of teaching as is still imaginedby many. The arrangement of temporal Stems is madeless upon scientific than upon didactic grounds, in sucha manner that kindred forms are joined together, anddue regard is paid to the progress from that which is

easy to that which is more difficult.


PKEFACE. IX

The chapter on the formation of words, though some-

what enlarged, has for the same reasons still been kept

very brief. But, in treating of the verbs, I have directed

attention to the formation of verbal nouns : in treating

of the verbs of the different classes, I have always

directed attention, by a number of characteristic exam-

ples, to the application of the different Stems in the

formation of words. By this means the learner has an

opportunity, during the study of his grammar, of

making himself acquainted with a number of words,

and I have no doubt that teachers will give their sanc-

tion to this arrangement.

In regard to Syntax, the positive results of recent

linguistic inquiries are as yet less numerous. In this

part of the Grammar, therefore, I follow the principle

of stating the essential idioms of the Greek language

with the utmost possible precision, and in the utmost

logical order. Only in some chapters, especially in

that on the use of the tenses, my system presents con-

siderable differences from the usual one. All minute

disquisitions, conjectures, and more or less probable

theories—among them especially the ever-repeated

theory about the original local meaning of the cases,

with which I cannot agree at all—have been rigorously

excluded. In this part, also, I have never neglected to

compare the phenomena of the Greek language with

the corresponding ones of -Latin, and occasionally also

of English, where this could be done with brevity and

advantage; for as the usage of a language must be

mainly comprehended by a feeling of language, I

imagine that every appeal to a Latin usage already

embodied with our feeling of language, or to an EngKsh

usage familiar to us from childhood, advances our

knowledge much more than philosophical definitions or


X PREFACE.

technical terms of vague or various meanings. For the

same reason I everywhere attach great importance to

an accurate translation of a Greek idiom into English

or Latin. I need hardly guard myself against the

opinion as if I considered such a translation to be a

philosophical explanation of a linguistic phenomenon.

A real explanation is beyond the problem of a

Grammar.

I scarcely need repeat here that the present book is

not intended, like an Elementary Grammar, to be com-

mitted to memory paragraph by paragraph; but, in

teaching, a suitable selection, according to the degree

of the pupil's advancement, should be made by the

teacher. By a difference in type I have myself, at

least partially, indicated this.

It may be remarked in general that the first business

everywhere is that of memory, and only when the

actual forms, with the aid of the paradigms, have been

committed to memory, analysis may be added. First

knowledge, then understanding—this ought to be the

leading principle ; but, as I have said in another place,

" Memory can neither accurately grasp the great variety

of Greek forms nor retain them, unless it be supported

by an analysing and combining intelligence, whichfurnishes, as it were, the hooks and cement to strengthen

that which has been learned, and permanently to im-press it upon the mind." If details learned at different

times and carefully committed to memory, during asubsequent repetition variously combine with one an-

other, and form various groups ; if, then, many things

at first sight strange, appear to the pupil in the light of

a law pervading the language, such insight is certainly

not a mere support of memory, but animates the desire

to learn, and incites to exercise the power of thought in


PKEPACE. Xi

a variety of ways. The present book offers to teachers

abundant opportunities for such exercises, and acquires

its highest efiBcacy under the guidance of thinking

teachers who are truly famihar with it, and take a

delight in its subjects. That the book has actually

found such teachers has been proved to me in various

ways, and caused me sincere gratification.

G. C.


TABLE OF CONTENTS.

INTRODUCTION.

The Greek Lanquage and its Diaiectb.

FIEST PAET.— ETYMOLOGY.

I. Letters and Sounds.

Chap. I.

—

The Greek Characters. Sec.

A. Letters 1—

9

B. Other Characters 10—160. Accents 17—22D. Punctuation 23

Chap. II.

—

The Sounds.

A. The Vowels 24—29B. The Consonants 30—34

Chap. III.

—

Combinations and Changes op Sotjnds.

A. Vowels in Combination

B. Other kinds of Vowel Changes

C. Consonants in Comhination with one another

D. Other Changes in the middle of a word

B. Changes of Sound at the end of a word

35—3940—4344—5455—6263—69

Chap. IV.

—

Division of Syllables and their Quantity.

A. Division of Syllables 70—7'3

B. Quantity 74—78

Chap. V.—Accents 79—99


KJT CONTENTS.

II. Inflexion.

A. Inflexion of Nouns and PBONOtnrs.

Chap. VI.

—

Declension op Substantives and Adjec-

tives.

First Principal, (or Vowel) Declension. Sec.

A. The A Declension 112-113

(^Gomnrndy called the First Declension.)

1. Feminines 114—119

2. MascuUnes 120—123

B. The Declension 124^131

(^Commonly called the Second Declension.)

Attic Declension 132—133

Second Principal (oe Consonant) Declension .

.

135—143

( Commonly called the Third Declensiom,.'\

1. Consonant Steins

:

a. Guttural and Labial Stems 144—1456. Dental Stems 146—149c. Liquid Stems 150—153

2. Vowel Stems

:

a. Soft Vowel Stems 154—158J. Diphthong Stems 159—161c. Stems 162—163

3. Stems suffering Elision :

a. Sigma Stems 164—167h. T-Stems 168—169c. K-Stems 170 171

Irregularities in Declension 174 177Case-like Terminations 178 179

Chap. VII.

—

Other Inflexions op the Adjective;

A. Gender 180—191B Comparison 192—2000. Adverbs of Adjectives 201 204

Chap. VIII.

—

Inflexion op PEONouifs 205 219

Chap. IX.

—

The Numerals 220 224


CONTENTS. XV

B. Inplexiok or Verbs. Sec.

General Remarks 225—230

List of Pabadiqms. Table.

'Elfii, I am I.

Synopsis of Xum, 7 loose (exhibiting the meanings of

the Tenses) II.

Verbs in Q.

A. Vowel Stems :

1. Uncontracted, Xum III.

2. Contracted, rtfida, Trotea, dov\6<o . , .

.

IV,

B. Consonant Stems

;

1. Guttural Stems, xXeVia, (êuyo), T-ao-tra .- V.2. Dental Stems, \jf€v8oii,at, weiBa, KOfiiâ .. VI.

3. Labial Stems, ne/imai, Xeiira, KoXuTrrco .. VII.

4. Liquid Stems, dcpa, dyyeXKa, aTreipto .. VIII.

Verbs in MI.

First Class, rlBrffu, bibtoju, larrjiii IX.

Second Class, SeiKw/u X.

IÎTAP. X.—^FiRST Principal Conjugation or Vekbs in Q.

I, The Present-Stem : Sec.

A. Inflexion of the Present-Stem 231—233B. The Augment 234—242C. Contracted Verbs 243—244D. Distinction of the Present-Stem from the

Verbal Stem 245—253

n. The Strong Aorist-Stem 254—257

III. The Future-Stem 258—266

IV. The Weak Aorist-Stem 267—271

V. The Perfect-Stem 272

1. Perfect Active 276—2822. Pluperfect Active 283

3. Perfect Middle and Passive 284—2894. Pluperfect Middle and Passive 290—291

VL Forms of the Strong Passive Stem 292—295

VIL Forms of the Weak Passive Stem 296—299

Verbal Adjectives 300

Verbs which leave their Stem-Vowel short .... 301Digitized by Microsoft®

KVl CONTENTS,

Chap. XI.—Sboond Peincipal Conjugation oe Vbebs

IN MI. SEa

Preliminary Remarks 302—304

1. First Class 305—817

2. Second Glass 318—319

Chap. XII.—Ieeegulae Vbebs of the Fiest Conju-

gation 320—^327

Anomalies in Signification 328—330

Outlines of the Accentuation of Verbal Forms .. 331—333

Peculiar Verbal Forms of the Ionic Dialect . . 334D—338 D

III. Derivation.Chap. XHI.—

A. Simple Derivatives 339—340

1. The most important Suffixes for forming

Substantives 341—3492. The most important Suffixes for forming

Adjectives 350—3523. Derivative Verbs .. .. ., ., .. 353

B. Compound Derivatives

:

1. Form of the Combination 354—358

2. Meaning of Combination .. 359—360

SECOND PAET.—SYNTAX.Preliminary Remarks 361

Chap. XIV.

—

Numbbe and Gendbe 362 367

Chap. XV.

—

The Abticle 368 391

Chap. XVI.

—

Dsb op Cases :

A. Nominative 392 393B. Vocative 3g^C. Accusative ggg ^QgD. Genitive ^qj ^qrE- I^a*'^e '.'.

'.'. 429—443

Chap. XVII.

—

The Peepositions 444General view of the Prepositions 4481. Prepositions which take only One Case .. .. 449 4572. Prepositions which take Two Cases 458 4613. Prepositions which take Three Cases 462 468


CONTENTS. .XVIJ

Sec.

Chap. XVIU.—The Pronouns 469—475

Chap. XIX.

—

The kinds of Verbs 476—483

Chap. XX.

—

"Use of the Tenses 4841. The forms for the Incomplete Action 486—491

2. The forms for the Indefinite (Aorist) Action .. 492—498

3. The Future 499—5014. The forms for the Complete Action 502—506

Chap. XXI.

—

Use of the Moods.

A. In Simple Sentences

:

1. Indicative 507

2. Subjunctive 508—5133. Optative 514—5174. Imperative 518

B. In Compound Sentences :

Connexion of Sentences with one another . . 519—524

1. Dependent, Declarative, and InteiTOgative

Sentences 525—529

2. Sentences expressing a purpose 530—533

3. Conditional Sentences 534—550

4. Relative Sentences 551—555

5. Temporal Sentences 556— 558

Chap. XXII.

—

The Infinitive.

1. Use of the Infinitive in general 559—566

2. The Case of the Subject and Predicate with the

Infinitive 567—572

3. The Infinitive with the Article 573—574

4. The Infinitive with aV 575—576

5. The Infinitive instead of the Imperative .. .. 577

Chap. XXIII.—On Participles.

1. Attributive Use 578

2. Appositive Use 579—583

3. The Participle with an Absolute Case .. .. 584—586

4. Supplements to Participles 587—588

5. The Predicative Participle 589—594

6. The Participle with av 595

7. Verbal Adjectives 596

Chap. XXIV.

—

Some Peculiarities in Relative

Sentences „• ..•• .^ .;• «»••• ax^^'^—^^^

Digitized by Microsoft®j)

XVUl CONTENTS.

Sec.

Chap. XXV.

—

Intbbeogative Sentences 606—611

Chap. XXVI.

—

The Negatives.

1. Use of Simple Negatives .. 612—6182. Several Negatives combined .. .. ... .. 619—6213. Some Negative Phrases 622

Chap. XXVII.—The Paeticles.

A. Conjunctions 623

1. Copulative Conjunctions 624—6252. Disjunctive „ 626—6273. Adversative „ 628—6304. Comparative „ 631—6325. Declarative „ 6336. Temporal „ 634—6357. Causal „ 6368. Inferential „ 6379- Pinal „ 638

10. Hypothetical „ 63911. Concessive „ 640

B. Emphatic Particles 641 643

English Index ^^'*-^'^-

GbEEK InDEH""

nlc


THE

STUDENT'S GEEEK GEAMMAE.

INTEODUCTION.

THE GKEEK LANGUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS.

The Greek language is the language of the AncientHellenes ("EA.Xijves), the inhabitants of Greece, with all

its islands and numerous colonies. It is related to thelanguages of the Indians, Persians, Romans, Slavonians,

Lithuanians, Germans, and Celts. These are all sister-

languages, and together form the Indo-European family.

, The Greeks were early divided into races, each of

which spoke a different ialect. The chief dialects of

the Greek language are the AeoHc, Doric, and Ionic.

At first each race employed its own dialect both in

poetry and in prose.

1. The Ionic dialect was spoken by the Ionic race,

especially in Asia Minor and Attica, in numerousislands, and in the Ionic colonies. It was the first of

the dialects developed by poetry, and produced three

different but nearly related dialects, viz. :

—

a) The Old-Ionic or Mpic dialect, which is preserved

in the poems of Homer and Hesiod as well as of their

followers.

h) The New-Ionic dialect, which we know chiefly

from the history of Herodotus.

Ols.—The Old and New Ionic dialects are also designated by the

common name, Ionic, as distinguished from the Attic.

c) The Attic dialect, in which are written the nume-

rous works in poetry and prose produced at Athens in

B


2 INTEODUCTION.

the time of her glory. The principal writers of the

Attic dialect are—the tragedians, Aeschylus, Sophocles,

Euripides, the comic writer Aristophanes, the historians

Thucydides and Xenophon, the philosopher Plato, the

great orators Lysias, Demosthenes, and Aeschines.

Through the importance of Athens in Greece, and the

excellence of the Attic literature, the Attic became the

chief dialect of the Grreek language.

Ohs.^A less important distinction is made between tte earlier and

later Attic writers. The tragedians and Thucydides belong to

the earlier Attic, and the remaining authors to the later. Thelanguage of Plato is intermediate between the two : that of the

tragedians has also many other peculiarities.

2. The Aeolic dialect was spoken by the Aeolians,

particularly in Asia Minor, Boeotia, and Thessaly.

Alcaeus and Sappho wrote in this dialect.

3. The DoEic dialect was spoken by the Dorians,

chiefly in Northern Greece, in the Peloponnesus, in

Crete, and in the numerous Doric colonies, especially

Sicily and Lower Italy. Doric is essentially the dialect

of Pindar's IjtIc poems and Theocritus' bucolics (herds-

man's poetry). The choruses in the tragedies also con-

tain some Doric forms.

4. After Athens ceased to be the leading city in

Greece, the Attic dialect still remained the language of

educated Greeks. But it soon began to degenerate fromits primitive purity and excellence, and thus from thethird century before Christ the common Greek dialect

(r/ KoivTj SiaXeKTos:) was distinguished from the Attic.

On the boundary-line between the older Attic and the

common Greek dialect stands the great philosopherAristotle. Amongst later authors, the most importantare : the historians PolyUus, Plutarch, Arrian, DionCassius; the geographer Straho; the rhetoricians

Diony&ius of Kalicamassus and Lucian.


Part First.

ETYMOLOGY.I.—LETTERS AJSTD SOUNDS.

4 LETTERS. § 2.

§ 2. For s there is a double sign in the small charac-

ter : <T at the beginning and in the middle, and ? at the

end, of a word. Hence, avv, aeLm, âav, but ttovo';, Kepa<;.

In compound words ? may also stand at the end of the

iirst word in the compound : rrpo^-ep'ô/j.ai,, Bv';-/3aT0';.

§ 3. From the names of the first two letters arose the

expression "Alphabet." The characters of the Greekalphabet do not essentially differ from those of the

Latin and of modern languages. All come from the

alphabet of the Phoenicians.

In regard to pronunciation the following points are

to be observed :

—

§ 4. All Greek letters are always pronounced alike.

But 7 is an exception, since, before y, k, ;i^ or ^, it is

pronounced Tig. Hence in Latin it is represented by n •:

T677(o is pronounced tengo ; avyKokm, syngkOlo ; XoryxTj,

longche ; ôpfjiuy^, phorminx

§ 5. ^ is pronounced like the English s. It is of verydifferent origin in different cases. Compare fj^lâv (for

fieyiav) from /ieâ? ; ^vjov with Latin jugum, Engl.yoke; &c.,

§ 6. ^t) we pronounce as /, but probably the Greekspronounced the p and h separately ; hence ph, not /, is

used in Latin for ^ : (piXoa-oîa, pMlosopMa ; îKokti^ttj';,

PMlootetes.

§ 7. ^ we pronounce like the English fh.

§ 8. Of the diphthongs, at and ei are both pronouncedas ei in height ; oi as oy in boy ; av, as aw in law ; ov, asow in bow ; vi, as wy in why (hwy) ; ev and tjv, as ew innew. The iota subscriptum (underwritten) is nofpro-

§ 3. Dialects.—The Greek language had in the most ancient timesanother letter, F, which was called Digamma (Siyajtiâ = " doublegamma ") from its form, and Vau (Fai) from its pronunciation. Itwas pronounced like the Latin v : Foivos, wine = Lat. vinum. At alater time it was written only by the Aeolians and Dorians.

Digitized by Microsoft®-

§ 14. OTHEK CHAKACTEES. 5

nounced in a, y, a. It is not written under, but after,

capitals, as At, Hi, Hi, but still remains unpronounced.

§ 9. When two vowels, usually pronounced together,

are to be pronounced separately, the latter has over it

a diaeresis, (SLaipecn<!=s&paration) : thus Trat? is pro-

nounced ^o-i's ; avirvo^, a-upnos.

B.

—

Other Characters.

§ 10. Besides the letters, the Greek language has

also the sign ', which is placed over the initial vowel

to which it belongs, and represents the h: e^ is pro-

nounced hex ; oLTra^, hapax. This sign is called spiritus

asper, " rough breathing."

§ 11. For more exact distinction, the Greeks also

mark those initial vowels which have not this b:5eathing

with the sign 'i. e., the spiritus lenis, " gentle breathing."

This sound indicates only the raising of the voice which

is necessary for the pronunciation of a vowel when no

consonant precedes : e« is pronounced ek ; ar/w, ago.

§ 12. In diphthongs the breathing stands over the

second vowel: oiTo<;=-howtos ; elhov=eidon. But whenthe first vowel is in large character, the breathing stands

before it: "AiSri<;=Hades; 'D,iS'^=Ode.

§ 13. Every initial p has the spiritus asper over it:

pwy^(ph6<i, pevfia. In Latin the aspirate is written after

the p : rhapsodus, rheuma. When two ps come together

ia a word, ' is usually placed over the first, and ' over

the second: 'n.vppo^=Pyrrhus ; KaXKipp67]=OaUirrhoe.

Ohs.—Many write the double p without any breathing : Xlippos

;

KakXipporj.

§ 14. As in Latin, so in Greek, the sign " over a

vowel denotes that the vowel is long, " that it is short,

and " that it is sometimes one, sometimes the other.

In Greek they are used only with the vowels a, i, v,

since e, 17, o, a are distinguished by their form.

§ ACCENTS. § 15'

§ 15. The sign ' at the junction of two words indicates

the omission of a Towel or diphthong, and is then called

an apostropJie: -Trap eKeiva for irapot, sKeiv^, with that

one ; /j,^ 'lyco for fir] iyd) (ne ego).

§ 16. The same sign has the name coromis (xopavk)

when it stands over the junction of two words contracted

into one, Touvofia for to ovofia, the name ; KorâQo'i for

Kol arjaQb<i, and good. It indicates that a erask {icpadi'i,

mixture) or contraction of two words has taken place,

and, like the breathing, stands over the second vowel

of a diphthong ; tovto for to avro, the same.

C

—

Accents.

§ 17. The Greeks also indicate the tone or Accent(irpo^wSla) of words. The sign ' over a vowel is called

the acute accent (oêla Tr/aospSt'a), that is, the sharp or

raised tone : 'Koyo';, tovtcov, irapd, eTepo<;. The syllable

thus marked must be raised above the rest.

A word having the acute accent upon the last syllable

is called oxytone (o^vtovov) : irapd, ehre, âcriXein;.

A word having the acute accent upon the last but one-

is called âroa;«/i<me {irapo^vTovov): Xeyco, âivco.

A word having the acute accent upon the last buttwo is called proparoxytone (n-poirapo^vrovov) : T^êraiyeXireTe,

§18. Ohs.—A proparoxytone having a long vowel or diphthongin the second syllable of the word, ought to he pronounced so-

as to give the accent on the third syllable, and yet preserve thelength of the second syllable : j3f/3i)Ka should he pronouncedlebeka ; dn-oâive, apohaine. The accent, however, is usuallydisregarded in the English pronunciation of Greek words.

§ 19. The sign ' over a vowel is called the grave accent

(âpeia Trpo'imBia). It indicates a low tone, that is, thata syllable is not raised in tone. Thus in dvoâlve, thelast two might have the grave accent. The marking ofthem, however, would be superfluous, the absence ofthe acute being a sufficient guide. AU words without

§ 23. PUNCTUATION". 7

an accent on the final syllable are therefore called

barytone (fiapvrovd) : 'kh^co, erepoi.

§ 20. The sign \ however, also denotes a subduedacute, and occupies the place of an acute in every

oxytone not immediately followed by a pause : airo,

from, but airo tovtov, from this ; âaiKev^, a king, but

âcriXev'i iyevero, he became king. Oxytones, therefore,

retain their accent unchanged only at the end of a

sentence.

§ 21. The sign " over a vowel is called the circumflex

accent (irepia-Trcofievr] Trpo<;mhia), from its shape. Thecircumflex is a combination of the acute and the grave ^.

A word having a circumflex on the last syllable is

called 'perispomenon (Trepia-Trdfievov) ; a/âQoh, ctkiS,';.

A word having a circumflex on the last syllable

but one is called properispomenon (TTpoTrepKyn-miievov) :

<f>evye, ^^re.

§ 22. In diphthongs the accent, like the breathing

(§ 12), is put over the second vowel : êvyei, tovto.

When the circumflex accent and the breathing meet

upon the same vowel the accent is placed over the

breathing : ovro'?, ^ffo<;, 'Uto?. The acute, in a similar

case, stands to the right of the breathing : aye, ep'xpfiai,

\.(OV.

Obs.—The acute is placed between the two points of a diaeresis

(9), dffiios, but the circumflex over them, irpavvat.

D.

—

Punctuation.

§ 23. For the purpose of dividing sentences and

periods the Greeks employ the comma and the full-

point. For the sign of interrogation they tise the

semicolon : rl etTra? ; what did you say ? For the

colon or semicolon they place a point at the upper part

of the line : epaTco vfmr tl eTrotija-aTe ; I ask you

:

what did you do? iairipa rjV Tore riXdev w)fyeXo<i, it

was evening ; then a messenger came.

Digitseddiy Minvsoft®

g VOWELS. §24.

Chap. II.—The Sounds.

A.

—

Ttie Vowels.

§ 24. The Greek language, like tlie Latin, has five

vowels, of which the first four are like the Latin,

a, e, 0, i. But instead of the Latin u, the Greeks

have V (pronounced nearly like the French u and the

German U).

§ 25. Th« vowels, apart from the distinction of long

and short, are divided into two classes—^the hard and

the soft vowels : a, e, tj, o, a are hard ; v, i, soft.

§ 26. From the union of hard and soft vowels together

arise diphthongs {hi^doyyoi, i. e., double-sounds). They

are:

—

av from a and v. ov from o and v.

ai „ a „ t. ot „ o „ L.

ev „ e „ V. rjv „ 7] „ V.

et „ 6 „ t,.

§ 27. The union of long hard vowels with t produces

§ 24. Dialects.—The Dialects, in many words and forms, admit

different vowels from those usual in the Attic Dialect. Thus

—

1. The Ionic (Epic and New-Ionic) dialect prefers r], for Attic

a : Att. 6atpa^, Ion. 6i>pr]^, hreastplate : Att. ayopd, Ion. ayopri,

market: Att. vavs. Ion. vijCs, ship: but Ion. (xftrofi/Spi'ij for Att.

Iieartifi^pia, midday.

2. The Doric, on the contrary, prefers a : Att. Stj/ios, Dor. Sap.os,

people : Att. /iijTijp, mother. Dor. (xdnjp (comp. Latin m4ter) : Dor.

'Addva for 'A^ijra, goddess Athena, even in Attic poets.

3. The Ionic dialect often changes c to ei, and o to ou : Att. |eVor,

Ion. ^eij/os, foreign : Att. «/eKa, Ion. eii/cica, on account of: Att.

}i6vos. Ion. fioScos, aZonc ; Att. ovop.a, Ion. oSj/o/io, name. Earely

o to ot, or a to ai : Att. rjyvoria-c, Ion. rfyvoii^tre, he knew not.

§ 26. Dialects.—The New-Ionic dialect has moreover the diphthon<»

v, which, however, only comes in place of av in the other dialects.

Savjia for 6aviia, wonder: etuvrov for tavrov, of himself: av mustbe pronounced as ou.

§ 33. CONSONANTS. 9

the spurioits diphthongs, a, rj, m, in which the under-

Tirritten iota is not heard. (Comp. § 8.)

§ 28. The Greek language also combines v with i, but•only before Towels : fivta, a fly.

§ 29. We further distinguish the obscure o-sound (o, w),

the medium a-sound (a), and the clear e-sound (e, iy),

fl,nd the more obscure v from the clearer t.

B.

—

The Consonants.

§ 30. The consonants are divided : I. According to

the position in the mouth where they are produced, i.e.,

according to their organ (Spyavov, " instrument "),

into :

—

1. Gutturals (throat-sounds) k, y, x-2. Dentals (teeth-sounds) t, S, 6, v, X, p, a.

3. Labials (lip-sounds) it, /3, ^, /x.

§ 31' II. According to their poioer, that is, whether

they can be pronounced with or without a voweiinto :

—

§ 32. 1. Mutes (mutae) :—

(a.) hard (tenues) k, t, tt.

(5.) soft (mediae) 7, h, /8.

(c.) aspirated (aspiratae) X' ^> i>-

Obs.—The aspirated consonants contain each a hard consonant

with the rough breathing, x therefore=K (kh); 5=t (th);

<^=,r' (ph).

§ 33. 2. Vocals (semivocales) :

—

(a.) Liquids (liquidae) A,, p.

(b.) Nasals (nasales) 7 (7 before gutturals, § 4), v, fi,

(e.) Sibilant (sibilans) o- (9).

§ 32. Dialects.—In the Ionic dialect the aspirates often lose the

breathing : hinojiai for Attic Sixofiai, accept; avns for Attic av6is,

again. The New-Ionic sometimes transposes the breathing : kiBwv

for Att. ;^tTa)j', tunic ; ivdeirev for Att, ivrevBfv.

10 VOWELS IN COMBINATION. § 34.

§ 34. The double cmsmants belong to both kinds

:

^, i/r, f : for f=Ko-, \lr='ira, f=S with a soft sibilant

(§5).

OJs.

—

Ko- only occurs in compounds with ck : iKo-wô), I rescue.

Chap. III.

—

Combinations and Changes of

Sounds.

A.— Vowels in Combination.

§ 35. In the inner part of a word not aU vowels may

§ 34. Dialects.—A peculiarity of the Greek language is the want

of the breathing v. The v, however, was not altogether wanting

;

for

1. The digamma (§ 3, D.) occurred in the Homeric dialect in

the beginning of the following words : ayvvfu, break ; SXis, nume-rous; SKiaKOfiai, am caught; ava^, ruler; ava<7tra>, rule; avhava,

please ; apaws, tender ; aarv, city ; eap, spring [yer'] ; eSpos, swarm,people ; eUoan, twenty [Dor. fiKari, Lat. viginti] ; e'lKia, yield ; eiXm,

press; eK-qTi,wiUingly ; cKvpos, father-in-law ; eKoiv, willing ; cX^ro/ioi,

hope; the pronominal Stem e (to, sui) i'oiKa, appear; ciros word;eXnov, spoke ; cpyov, work ; fpya>, close in ; 'dppa, go on ; ipvm, draw ;

epea, shall say ; iuBffs, clothing ; dpa, dress (Stem fes, Latin vestis) ;

eTTjs, relative; rjhis, agreeaUe ;"lXior, city llios ; Icros, equal; oIkos,

house ; olvos, wine (vinum). On the operation of the digamma, see

§ 63 D., 75 D.

2. The f in the middle occurred in ois, sheep, from ofis, (Latinavis') ; vrj-os, of the ship, from vaFos (Latin navis). Gen. of vav-s.

3. The Dorians and Aeolians retained the digamma at the be-ginning of many words : Aeol. feVoy, year. Dor. KSioj, own.

4. In Homer, at the beginning of many words, e stands for f.

U, Mm, self ; ifUo<rt, twenty; eta-r), equal; eeSvov, marriage-gift=:ehvov.

§ 35. Dialects.—The Dialects vary much in regard to the com-binations of vowels. The Epic and New-Ionic leave many syllablesuncontracted : ev=ev, well: otopat=zo'iopaL, I think: jrair=7raTs-loy: t6os=vovs, sense: <(>iKeriTe=(bikiJTe âmetis): aUoivâRav,vnwiUing. Some of the forms usually uncontracted are, on the

§ 37. VOWELS IN COMBINATION. Hcombine. The dissimilar vowels pair with one another

best :

—

1. The soft generally remain unchanged before the

hard vowels : a-oîa, wisdom : Xua, I loosen : lavw, Islumber: vet, it rains: evvoia, benevolence.

2. Sard vowels before soft ones become diphthongs

:

ev, eS, good : Trail?, iral<i, boy : yive'i, yevei, to the race.

Obs.—Diphthongs sometimes lose their second part before vowels

:

ôu-dff becomes |3o-oy (bav-is), nai-a, ica-a, hum. Comp.

§§ 160, 248, Obs.

§ 36. Similar (§ 25) vowels cannot well stand to-

gether, and hence when they meet are often contracted

according to the following laws :

—

1. Two similar vowels melt into one long vowel : \aa<!

becomes A,a?, stone; ^rpway, ^tj'KSi, I am sealous; Xti.09,

Xio?, a Ghian ; tfxXerjTe, {f)iXr]Te, ametis, in which cases

6 and rj, o and co are similar.

Still it must be observed that ee usually become et,.

and o o become ov : irolee, iroLet, do ; ttXoo?, TrXoO?,

passage by sea. Vowels before a similar one beginning,

a diphthong disappear : ttXoov, ttXov, of a passage ;

olKeei, olKei, dwells ; îXerj, (jsiXy, amet.

§ 37. 2. Dissimilar vowels form a compound in which

contrary, contracted in these dialects: ip6s=Upas, holy: j3<!)o-as=

ôfjo-as, one who has called.

2. The abbreviation in the diphthongs ending in 1; is explained bythis letter first becoming F, and then being quite dropped (comp.

§ 34, D. 2) : fiov-os—(3of-o's [bov-is]—Po-6s.

§ 37. Dialects.—1. The Dialects supply many exceptions. Thus

in ITew-Ionic especially, eo and eov are contracted into ev, not into

ov : TTOieo/xei', Troievfiev, we Tnake : Troteoucre, TroteOtre, they make.

2. In the Ionic dialect. So (jio), often changes to fm : 'Arpe/Sao,

'ArpeiSea, of Atrides : tXaos, IXecas, merciful, a before a> is often

changed into the thinner sound e : noo-«de<B»=noo-«8ao»', Att.

Tloa-eihmv, the God Poseidon.

3. In Doric, ao, aa, are contracted into d : 'ATpei8ao='Arpei8a,

Xloa-eiSdav^lIocreibdv, 6eaa>v (dearum)=6eav.

12 VOWELS IN COMBINATION. §38.

a) the obscurer vowel overpowers the clearer

<§ 29).

Thus from

§43. OTHER TOWEL CHANGES. 13

B.

—

Other hinds of Vowel-changes.

§ 40. Another change of the Towels consists in their

being lengthened. Two kinds of lengthening are dis-

tingviished, tIz. :

—

1. Organic kngthening, i. e., that which is required byinflexion or derivation. By organic lengthening

—

a generally becomes i; nnda>, I honour, Fut. Tifufirtt).

o always „ a fijXom, I am jealous, „ ^rjkixra

f ,, )> 1 TToiiui, I make, „ ttoi^o-o).

X either „ I rta, I honour, „ tTo-o).

or „ ci St. X«r, Pres. XeiVo), / leave.

sometimes „ oi „ \ar. Adj. \om6s, remaining,V either „ v \va>, I hose. Put. Xoo-m.

or „ ev St. <pvy, Pres. <pevya>, Jflee.

§ 41. Ohs.—After e, i, and p, a is changed to a instead of ij :,

ida, I leave, allow; fut. cd<Ta ; St. la, hecH; larpds, physician;

St. opa, see; opd/ia, a view. The Attic dialect is altogether

averse to the combinations, eij, iij, pij, cmd frequently puts ea,

la, pa, in their place.

§ 42, 2. Gompensatort/ lengthening, i. e., that which

is used as a compensation for lost consonants. By it d,

even when e, i, or p does not precede, is often changed

to d: Tra?, everi/, from TrdrVT-';—e generally becomes

ei : elfjbi, I am, from icr-ixi (§ 315)—o generally becomes

ov : hiZov<} for St8o-i'T-9 [Lat. cUMtrs'\—I always becomes

I, and V always v : 8ei,Kvv-<} for SeiKw-vr-i;, showing.

Ohs.—Exceptions, in which e becomes ij, and o becomes a>, are

given in § 147, and in which a becomes ij in § 270.

§ 43. The three short hard Towels often interchange

in one and the same Stem, when, generally, e is re-

garded as the Stem-Towel : rpeirco, I turn ; erpairov, I

§ 40. Dialects.—The extension of v to ou appears in flK^Xovda,

am come, from Stem e\v6 (§ 327, 2).

§ 41. Dialects.—The Old and New-Ionic dialect does not avoid the

combinations eij, irj and prj : iTeij=Attic Ired, pasture : lrjTp6s=Att.

larpos, physician : 7rftp^tropai=Att. iveipdaopai, I will try.

The Doric , dialect, on the contrary, regularly lengthens 2 inte

a : nfisa-a=niji^<ra, I vnil honour (§ 24, D. 2).

14 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. §44.

turned; tjoottos, turning : Stem 761/6?, Nom. 76V09, race :

[comp. Lat. generis, Nom. genws] : jiXeyco, I bum;

<f>\6^,flarm.

7] also is at times changed to co : apijyo), I help

;

Apayo';, helper.

C.— Consonants in combination with one another.

§ 44. Consonants, in regard to their combiaation, are

subject to still greater limitation and change than the

vowels. Those which are dissimilar (comp. §§ 32, 33)

agree best with one another, especially the mutes with

the liquids.

That discordant consonants may continue together,

they are either made more like one another (assimilated)

or more unlike (dissimilated). The essential laws for

the necessary changes of consonants are the following

:

§ 45. 1. Before mute dentals (§§ 30, 31) only conso-

nants of other organs which are of the same order (that

is, both hard, both soft, or both aspirated, § 32) can

stand; consequently, the only allowable combinations

of sounds are

—

kt, ttt, 78, ySS, %3-,<f)

.

When a different mute stands before the dental,

through inflexion or derivation, it must be assimilated

to the order of the latter. Consequently,

k8 and ^S become y&. jrS and <^S liecome j8S.

Kd „ yd „ xd- T(9 „ ^e „ ^e.

y » X^ .. tr. ^T „ (flT „ TIT.

Therefore,

irkeK-Brjvai becomes liXexBrivm from TrXe/cto, I weave.Xfy-roy „ XeKTor „ Xeyto, I say

\lectus instead of hg-tus\.\ey-6r)vai „ 'KfxBfjvai „ Xcyoo, I say.

S^x-Tos „ ficKTos ,, Sexajjiai, 1 receive{tractus instead of trah-tus from traho],

TVTT-Orjvai „ TvrjiSfjvai from TvirTa, I strike.

ypa^-Tos „ ypaiTTos „ ypd(f)a, I write.

ypacfi-Sriv „ ypd^Srjv „ „ „OJs.—The preposition ex, out o/(Lat. ex) remains unchanged in

all combinations : eKOfcris, casting out , E/cSpo/iT/, running out.Digitized by Microsoft®

§48. CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. 15

§ 46. 2. Before mute dentals, mute dentals to be audi-

ble are changed into o- {Dissimilation) : therefore,

TT, St, and 6t 1)600116 or

t6, 88, „ 89 „ ir8 : hence

awT-Tos becomes amctTos, accomplished, from avvro), Iaccomplish,

aS-reoK „ aarcov, canendum est „ aSa, I sing.

7rei6-dr]vai „ TTeKrdTJvai, to be persuaded „ ireida 1 persuade.

§ 47. 3. Before n a guttural becomes 7, a dental a-, a

labial //,. Therefore,

huoK-iios becomes SuoyfUs, persecution, from SteoKo), Ipursue.

ê-^pfX-f''"' » ê^pp^juu, I have heen wetted, ixova. ^pc-)(a, I wet.

lS-p.ev „ Xtrp.ev, we know, flora olda, I know.

rimT-fim, „ rjinxTpju, I have heen perfected, I'rom dviru), Iaccomplish.

ire-7rci8-p.evos „ irerreKruevos, persuaded, from 7rel8a>, Ipersuade.KOTT-p-os „ Kopp6s, a striking, from kott-t-o), I strike [summui

from sup-mus'].

Te-Tpt0-pat „ Terpippai, I have heen rubbed, from rpiâ, I rub.

ypa<^-pa „ ypdppa, letter, from ypd<j)a, I write.

Obs.—Sometimes in derivation the gutturals and dentals remain

unchanged : aKpr/, bloom ; pv8p6s, movement, rhythm ; dpidpos,

number.

The preposition ex leaves its k unchanged : iKpdiraa, wipe out.

§ 48. 4. Before o-, as a hard consonant, 7 andjj;

be-

come K, and /3 becomes tt {Assimilation ) : /tois then

written ^, and tto- ilr : therefore,

dy-a-a becomes dn-a-a, written a|-a), I shall lead, from ayu), I lead

[rexi instead of reg-si from reg-o].

Sc;^-i7o/xai ,, 8eK-cro/iai, written 8cô/tat,ZsMZ receive,from Scpfo/iai,

J receive [traxi instead of trah-si from traJi-o].

Tpij'i'O CO „ Tpe7r-o"co, written rpti/rct), Z sâZ2 ^wJ, from rpijSft),

J raJ [sCTi^si instead of scrib-si from sc«6-oJ.

ypa<j)'(ra> „ ypair-irco, 'wvitten ypd^jrco, I shall write,irova.ypd<l)-a,

I write.

Obs.—It is clear from § 34 that every k and 5r with o- must

§47. Dialects.— The change of dentals and gutturals before pis frequently omitted in Ionic : 'U-pfvos, favourable, from St. Ik

(iKava, I come) ; aKaxpevos, pointed, from St. ok, (Lat. acuo)

;

dvTpfj, breath ; oSprj, smell, from St. oS (ofo) lod-orl, Att. 6a--pri

:

iB-pev, we knoy>:= Att. Itr-pev: KeKopv8pivos, equipped, from St.

Kopv8 (^Kopv(ra-a)=MSiitm!iik&fêimofm

16 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. § *»-

become | and ^;r : hence n-XcK-wm becomes" jrXe'|iB from ttXeko),

I weave ; \em-<ra becomes Xeii|f<o from \eiira, I leave.

§ 49. 5. The dentals, when standing separately before

cr, are Aio^êd without compensation; in like manner j»

disappears before ? Therefore,

avvr-a-is becomes Si/uo-ts, accomplishment, from avvTa, I accomplish.

nS-o-ouai „ ija-ofiM, I shall rejoice, from ^So/xai, I rejoice [laesi

for ixed-si from laed-oj.

Kopvd-a-i „ Kopva-t, to the helmets, from Kopvs, Gen. Kopv-Bos,

helmet.

Saifiov-a-i „ Sai'/ioo-j, to the dosmons, from haSfiav, dcerrwn.

irvv-Cvyos „ (ritvyos, yoked together, from a-vv, together, and^vyov, yoke.

Hence er before another o- is lost : Teixâ--(ri becomes reix^-cn, to

walls (from relxos, wall) ; itr-tropLai, e-a-ofjuii.

Ols. 1.

—

V is not always dropped before cr or f in composition.

In the preposition iv the v remains for the sake of clearness i

evardâ, I trickle in ; evêiyvvfu, I harness. The u in nav,

all, every, and ttoXiv, again, either remains unchanged, or is

assimilated to the following a-: navaoiôs, all-wise, jraXiV-

o-uToi from Trdktv-tTVTos, starting hack. The v in a-vv, with,

is dropped before f or n- with a consonant following : a-i^vyos

(see above) ; a-varrjpa, system ; it is assimilated before a simple

<r : avira-inov from irvv-amov, common meal.

2. Sometimes v remains unchanged before o- in the 2d. Pers. Sing,

of the Perf. Mid. ; iri-câv-fTai, thou hast appeared.

3. In exceptional cases compensatory lengthening (§ 42) takes

place wheii a single v is omitted : for instance,

a) In some Nominatives Sing. : jieXa-r, black, for /ieKav-s.

6) In the 3rd Pers. PI. of the chief tenses, where o- has takenthe place of r : \v-ov-a-i, they loosen, instead of Xv-ov-a-t

(originally Xu-ow-ti) (§ 60).

c) Often in derivation : yepovcria, senate, instead of yepovria,

from St. yepovT, Nom. yepav, old man.

§ 50. 6. The combinations vt, vd, v^, are likewise

omitted before a, but cause a compensatory lengthening

navT-a-i'becomesnaa-i, to all, from St. jrai'T- Nom. n-a-s

nOevT-s „ Tideis, putting, „ „ ridevr.

yepovT-tri „ yepovari, to old men, „ „ y^povr Nom. yepaiv.

§ 49. Dialects.—Homer often assimilates a mute to the following o-

:

woo-cri=Att. TToa-t for ttoS-o-i (pedibus). He often preserves one abefore another : cir-a-oucu,.,! shcdl be. „„

T>i0tizedby Microsoft®

§51. CONSONAIITS IN COMBINATION. 17

fi(iKvvvT-cri,hccorResSfiKm(ri,i i „i >,from St.SiiKwvT Nom. SeiKwC-s,

iTncvS-a-a „ o-7rei(r(a,|^^^^ff^J'^ » ., OT^fS Pres. o-TrsVSca.

TrevS-aronat „ ireia-oixai, I shall suffer, „ „ ttcj/S Prea. n-ei,(r;(<B.

Ois. 1.

—

vT disappears, without compensation, in the Dat. PI. of

Stems of Adjectives in evr Nom. ct-s: St. jâpievr, Nom.XapUii, Dat. PI. âpU-m for pâptfi/T-o-i.

2.—Of vfl tefore o-, » remains in eXftiv-s, tape-worm, instead of

i\iuv6-s, St. iKfuvd : Tipvv-s, the city Tiryns, instead of

Tipvvd-s, St. Tipvvd.

§ 505. In later Attic n- is readily assimilated to a preceding p

:

Old Att. x^P^'ovrjo-os, New Att. x^ppdviicror, Peninsula; Old

Att. 6ap<r5>, New Att. dappa, I am courageous.

§ 51. 7. !» remains unchanged before mute dentals;

it becomes the nasal 7 before gutturals (§ 4), /t before

labials, and is assimilated before liquid consonants

:

avv-TiBtjiu, Iput together, is unchanged.

(Tvv-KaKea, I caU together, heoomcs crvyKoKeo.

crvv-xpovos, contemporaneous, „ avyxpoôs.

tv-veipos, experienced,

iu-^jmxos, inspirited,

ev-fierpos, metrical,

o-vv-pca, Iflow together,

•ffuv-Xeyo), I collect.

fliiTfipos from fv and jrelpa, proof[so in-peritus becomes ini-

peritus].

ep.'^Xo^ from iv and v/'ux'7> s"**^-

efLfierpos from ev and fierpov,

measure [so in-modicus be-

comes im-modious].

avppea from crvv and pera, Iflow[so con-ruo becomes cor-ruo].

ffuXXey© from (rvu and Xeyo), /j'oiAer [so con-ligo becomescol-ligo].

Ohs. 1.—v in the preposition iv remains unchanged before p :

cvpvBp^s, rhythmical.

2.

—

V is combined with p by means of S in av-S-p6s Gen. of

avrip, man. So is p, with p by ^ in p^(nip,-P-pia, mid-day,

instead of fuatjpê^pta (jieiros and ^pepa, comp. § 61, c).

§ 51. Dialects.—In the Epic dialect |3 is often inserted between

fi and p, and between p. and X : /it-fi-j3-XoMca, 7 have gone, from Stem/loX, by metathesis (§ 59). p before X or p becomes at the be-

ginning of a word : j3X<o-o-(c<a, I go. Present of the Stem p6K;|3poTds,

mortal, for pporos, from the Stem /tpo or /top [mor-io?-, mortuus sum].

Digitized by Microsoft® q

18 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. § 52,

§ 52. 8. Mard mutes (tenues) unite with a following

rough breathing (spiritus asper) into aspirates (%, 6, «^)

:

hencetV (eVi) and rjfJpa, day, become icftrj/ieposj/or a day.

Sek ISeKo) „ fijiepa, day, „ bexhp-eposifor ten days.

ten

avT (Jlvt'C) „ viraros, Consul „ avBxmoTos, Proconsul.

§ 53. 9. At the end of a word, when the following

word begins with a spiritus asper, the hard mute is

changed into an aspirate

:

ov^ ovTos, not this, for ov< oiros.

a(j) ia-nas, from the hearth, „ an (oTro) iarias.

Koff fijiipav, by day, „ kut (Kara) fj/upav.

Ohs.—If another hard mute stands before the one to be aspirated,

the first mnst also be aspirated (§ 45) : enrd and ^jiepa form

e<t)6fifiepos, for seven days ; vvktu and oXtjv become vvx6' oXiji/,

totam, noctem.

§ 536. 10. Two syllables immediately following one

another caimot both begin with aspirates in the follow-

ing cases:

—

a) In reduplication the corresponding hard mute

takes the place of the aspirate

:

Ke-x^piKa for x«-X'*P'?'"'i I have proceeded, from xp^(a, Iproceed,

n-driiu „ 6i-6rijXi, Iput.Tre-(f>vKa „ <j>e-<j)VKa, I have become.

h) The Aorists Passive of the verbal Stems de (ridrjfii,^

I put), 6v (0VCO, I sacrifice), adopt the same modifica-

tion : e-re-6rjv, I was put, for i-6e-67]v ; i-Tv-O'qv, I was

sacrificed, for i-6v-6rjv. (Comp. § 298.)

e) In the Imperative of the First Aorist Passive

(§ 297), on the contrary, the second aspirate is changed

to a tenuis : a-o)-97]-n, be saved, for cra>-6ri-6i.

d) Isolated instances are : afjiir^ym, embrace, for

afi^ey(a) ; iKC'xeipia, for ej^e'yeipia, armistice, from exeiv,

to hold, and xdp, hand.

§ 52 and 53. Dialects.—^The aspiration is omitted in New Ionic .

iitripepos, for a day ; a.m-q\ii, I send away ; ovk ovTms= oix ovras^

not so; air oS,from the time when, Att. d<p' oi.

§ 55. OTHEE CHANGES OF SOUND. 19

Obs.—Sometimes the spiritus asper is changed to the lenis,

because the following syllable begins with an aspirate : 8-<f>pa,

tiU, for 6-(l>pa from the relative Stem & (§ 213, 217) exa for

eX<o from St. ix (§ 327, 6).

§ 54. Some Stems beginning with t change this letter

to 6 when an aspirate at the end cannot be retained

(§ 45). This happens

:

a) In the Substantive Stem TjOt%, whose Nom. is 6pi^,

hair, Dat. PI. Opi^L The other cases are regular,

formed from the Stem rp^x (Gren. rpixpi, Nom. PLT/jtê?).

5) In raîK;, quic , whose comparative is Bdacroiv

for Taîav (§ 57 ; comp. § 198).

c) In the foUowbg Verbal Stems

:

To^ Pres. 6aT!T, I lury, Put. 6a^<o, Aor. Pass. iTafjiijv,

Subs. Ta(f>6s, grave.

rpecj) „ Tpc(/)<B, I nourish, „ dpeû, Subs. Spcu/ia, cattle

.

'P^X >. •rpi}(a, I run, „ fl/>e|o/iat I

rpv^ „ Bpiirra, I rub to pieces, „ Bpirâ > (§260).

;<^ ,, Tvcjxo, I smoke, ,, 6v\lra> J

Obs.—In the Passive First Aorist (§ 296) and in the Infinitive of

the Perf. Mid. the aspirate of the Stem remains unchanged, yet

the initial tenuis is aspirated, because the Stem-consonant is

not felt to be necessarily an original aspirate, as it might have

been modified by the influence of the 6 after it (§ 45)

:

idpi^BifV, Te6pa<j)dai.

D.

—

Other changes of Consonants and Vowels in the

middle of a word.

§ 55. Important changes of sounds are produced by

the modifications of the soft vowel c in connection with

consonants (comp. §§ 186, 198, 199, 250-253). Fre-

quently, for instance,

1. t after i/ or p is put a syllable farther back,

where it forms a diphthong with the preceding vowel.

Hence,Digitized by Microsoft®

TV'

20 OTHEE CHANGES OF SOUND. §56.

relva from Tev-ia, I stretch, St. rev [tendo].

liaivo/iai „ fiav-iojiai, I rage, „ fJ'OV.

a/ieivaiu „ afiev-iaiv, better, „ a/iev.

Keipia from Kep-ia, I shear, „ Kep.

ioreipa „ horep-ia, the giver, fern. „ borep {hoTr]p, giver).

Xîpaiv „ X^P-"""' '^'>rse, „ X^P-

§ 56. 2. t is assimilated to a preceding X

:

/mXXox from pdK-iov, more, from paka, much.

aWopai „ SX-Copjii, I spring, St. dX. [salip].

aXXos „ ak-1,09, another [alius].

oreXXcB ,, (rrfX-io), / send, St. (TTf\.

§ 57. 3. Gutturals (r and 6 less frequently) coalesce

with a following t to acr (New Att. tt) :

^cra-av from fjn-Mv, less, St. fjK, superl. ^Kia-ra.

Opaa-a-a „ QpaK-ta, Thracian, fem. (masc. 6p5|) St. &paK.

Taa-a-a „ ray-ia, I arrange, St. ray.

iKaa-a-av,, i\ax-i-<ov, smaller, „ eXax, superl. eXapftoTos.

Kprja-a-a „ KprjT-ta Cretan, fem. (masc. Kp^s) St. Kpr/r.

Kopicra-a „ Kopv6-im, I arm, St. Kopi)5 (Kopvs, helmet).

§ 58. 4. S and sometimes 7 coalesce with a following

I to ^.

efo/iot from iS-.op.ai,, I sit, St. tS (to eSoy, f/ie seaf).

Kpafm „ Kpay-ia, I cry, St. Kpay (Perf. Ke-Kpdy-a).

Other changes of sounds are

:

§ 59. 1. Transposition (fieTd9ecn<;), which most fre-

quently occurs with X, p, also with fi, and v

:

6pda-os together with dapa-os, boldness.

Bpcua-Ka from the St. Bop, I spring. Second Aorist edopov.

î-P\r)-Ka „ fidK, I have thrown, „ „ eôKov.

Tf-dvrj-Ka „ 6av, I am, dead, „ „ edavov.

T/iiJ-erif ,, rep, a cut, Pres. rcpvai, I cut.

Ohs.—In the last four examples the vowel is moreover lengthened.

§ 59. Dialects.—Transposition is more frequent in the Homericdialect (comp. § 295, D.) : Kaprepos and Kparepos, strong ; KapTia^Tos=

Att. KpaTKTTOs, the strongest, from Kparos, strength ; rpan-dopev

(comp. § 295, D.) for rapir-eiopev, we desire to rejoice, St. i-epTr (rep-

Tiropai). So also in eSpuKoy, I saw, St. Scpu (Se'pKo/iat) ; eirpadov, Idestroyed, St. jrepfl (Trepda). Homer: aTap7rds= Att. drpanos, path.

§ 62. OTHEE CHANaSS OF SOUND. 21

§ 60. 2. The weakening of single consonants. Themost important weakenings are

:

a) The very frequent one, especially before t, of t to o- :

dvaurdriaia, want offeeling, for avaurBrjna, from dvaiadrjTos,

without feeling,

t^atri fo ^avTt,, they swy.

On the rejection of v and the compensation for it,

which frequently occur in this case, see § 49, 05s. 3, c ;

comp. § 187.

b) The weakening of initial o- before vowels to the

spiritus asper

:

5r, swine, together with <rvs. Comp. Lat. su-s.

1-a-Trj-ii.i, for ai-a-Trj-iu, Iplace. Comp. Lat. si-sto (§§ 308, 327, 5, 6).

§ 61. 3. The entire rejection of sounds. The fol-

lowing cases are important

:

a) cr is rejected where it would have to stand betweentwo consonants in inflexion

:

yeypdcj>-dai for yeypa(j)-a-dai, to be written, St. ypa, Pres. ypd(j)o>.

TcTV^-6e „ Te-Tvcj)-cr6e, be ye struck, „ tvtt, „ TinTa).

b) a- between two vowels is very often rejected

:

Xiye-ai, Xeyi; (§ 38) for Xfyetrat, thou art said, St. Xey, Pr. Xtyo).

ibfiKw-o for e6eiKw<T0, thou wast shewn, Pr. SeUvv/ii.

yive-os for ycvEcror, of the race, St, ycvecr (§ 166).

(?) The rejection of a vowel between consonants in

the middle of a word is called st/ncope (crvyKOTrr])

:

i-TTT-o-iJbTjv for e-n-er-o-fi/qv, I fiew, St. tt^t (§ 326, 34).

Comp. § 51, Obs. 2.

§ 62. 4. The doubling of a consonant. This is rare.

§ 60. Dialects.—The Dorians retain t: (j)avTi=(j)a(ri(y'), they say.

The older Att. less frequently: T^/iepoi'=(7ij/iepoj/, to-day.

§ 61. Dialects.—Syncope is more frequent in Homer : tiVte for

TiTTore, why ever, why? dKeKKeTO=i-Ke-KeKeTo, he called, St. iceX.

§ 62. Dialects.—In Homer simple consonants are readily doubled

;

the mutes more rarely: ojrjr(Bs=Att. on-oir, how; o;r»roios=Att.

diroms, gualis; oT7-4=At.t, ori, that: the vocal consonants often:

22 CHANGES AT THE END OF WOKDS. § 6S,

when it has not arisen through the assimilations men-

tioned above (§§ 47, 505, 51, 56). The liquid p is the

most frequently doubled : eppl-^fra for 6ply}ra, I hurled

;

dppr]KTo<s for a-prjKTO'i, not hreaJcable. The aspirates can

be doubled only by the corresponding tenuis : Ba«%o?,

E.

—

Changes of sound at the end of a word.

§ 63. When a word ending in a vowel is followed by

another beginning with a vowel, whether accompanied

by a spiritus lenis or asper, there is a hiatus. The

Greeks very often suffer the hiatus in prose ; but fre-

quently the hiatus is avoided, especially if the &st word

is a shorter one and of itself of little importance. This

is done in three ways, that is, either by elision (rejec-

tion of the final vowel), or by crasis (contraction of

the two vowels), or by synizesis (collapse of two syllables

into one).

eXXa|3E=Att. eXa|3f, Tie took ; <^tXo;ifiet8^s= Att. (piKo/ieiSfis, readily

smiling ; iiSvvTjTos= Att. fv-myros, well-woven ; 6(r<rov= Att. otTOV,how

great; vcKva'(Ti= Ait. vckvcti, to the corpses; 6iritr<ra= Att. oniaa,

lack. On the contrary, Homer sometimes has a single p where the

Attic has double : a>Kvpoos=aKippoos, swift-flowing. Often also

hoth forms are usual together : 'Ax'Xeuj and 'AxiKKcis, 'OSutreur and'Odv(r(Tevs.

§ 63. Dialects,—^The Homeric dialect admits the hiatus in many-cases : the most important are :

1. The hiatus is only apparent in words with the digamma : KaraoiKov for Kara foiKov, at home.

2. It is allowed after weak vowels in forms with which elision

is not usual : naiSi oiraa-acu, he gave to the son.

3. It is softened by a pause or a csesura after the first shortsyllable of the third foot : Kadtjo-o, iji^ 8' inmetdeo fivBc^, sit down,and obey my word ; rav o» ?| iyevovro eVi fieyapoitri, of which sixwere horn to him in the chambers.

4. A long vowel or diphthong before another in the thesis be-comes short, and causes only an improper or weak hiatus : 'ArpuSaire Kol aXXoi €VKvr]p.iBes 'Ax<"-°'h ^^ Atridae and ye other weU-greavedAchaeans -»--_ Comp. § 75^ j) 2.

§ 65. ElilSION—CEASIS. 23

§ 64, 1. Elision, or the rejection of the final vowel,

of which the apostrophe (§ 15) is the sign, occurs only

with short final vowels, but never with v; most fre-

quently at the end of dissyllabic prepositions, conjunc-

tions, and adverbs : Itt' aiT& , with Mm, for lirl avraj,

ovB' eBvvaro, he could not even, aW' ^\6ev, but he

came ; less frequently at the end of nouns and verbs

:

01 iravr eha/yyeXXovre';, i. e., oi irdma eha'yyeK'KovTe';,

who reported the whole,

Obs. 1.—The prepositions jrepi round, axpi and /lexP' ^^^> ^^^

the conjunction Sn that, never suffer elision.

2. In compounds also the elision occurs, without however heing

indicated by the apostrophe : eTr-epxoiuu from iTn-epôiiai, Icome up ; but ircpiipxoiiai, I go round,

3. On the change of consonants occurring with elision (e'^' fniepa),

see § 52.

§ 65. 2. Cram (Kpaa^, mixing), is governed, on the

§ 64. Dialects.—Elision is much more frequent with the poets

than in prose ; thus, not only f and •, even in nominal and verbal

forms are elided, but also the diphthongs at and oi, in the verbal

terminations /iot, <rai, rat, (rBai, and in the forms \ioi and toi. In

Homer i in on that is also sometimes elided.

A change of the final vowel, occurring only in poets, is the Apo-cope (airoKomi). It is the rejection of a short final vowel before a

word beginning with a consonant. The apocope is frequent in

Homer with the prepositions avd, Kara, itapa, and with the conjunc-

tion apa now, seldom with airb and vno : it takes place in com-pounds as well as at the meeting of two separate words. The v of

av(a) then suffers the changes described in § 51 ; the t of Karâ),

the TT of a5r(d) and vit(o) are made like the following consonant

:

avhveTat^=ava^veTai emerges, Kait jrediov^Kara Tre&lov on the plain,

Ka\X(7re=KarcXure left behind, 7rdp8eTO=^7rapi6€TO put before, djr-

7rip.i^fi. = mroTteiJAJrei, will send away, KarBaveiv := Karadaveiv die.

§ 65. Dialects,—Crasis in Homer is very rare, but very frequent

in the Attic poets : e. g. oi^ = 6 i^, KaiSvperai = Kal oSiperai andlaments, Z)va^^& Sva^ king, x^TFoa'ci^Koi dirocrot andhow many.

—Herod. SiXXoi=oi oXXoi the rest. The loss of a short initial vowel

is sometimes indicated by the apostrophe (§ 15) : p^ 'yi> = pij iya

ne ego, ^St] 'êpx^rai = rjbjj iêpxerai hfi is dkeady coming out.

24 STNIZBSIS. § 66

whole, by the laws given for contraction (§ 36—39). I

occurs chiefly after forms of the article, of the relativ(

pronoun (especially o quod and a quae), after the pre

position irpo, for, before, Lat. pro, and the conjunctior

Kai, and. The syllable produced by crasis is neeessarili,

long. The sign of crasis is the coronis (§ 16) : rop/aOd

bona, from to, ar/a9d, raXKa from to, dWa, the othei

things, rovvofia, the name, from to ovofjua, ravTo, the game,

for TO avTO.

Ohs. 1.—The rough breathing of the article or relative maintains

its place in spite of crasis : ai/ijp the man irregular for 6 avrjp,

in which case the coronis disappears ; in Bolimriov from to

Ijidnov the dress, the spiritus asper has changed r into 6 (§ 52),so also Bdrepov irregular for to irepov tlie other.

2. The new syllable, formed by crasis, has i subscript onlywhen t is the last of the contracted vowels: koI eV arid inbecomes kuu, but koI elra and then becomes Kara.

On the accent with crasis, § 89.

§ 66. 3. Synizeds (sinking, comp. § 39) occurs at themeeting of two words, only after a long vowel, espe-cially after the conjunctions eirei, as, rj, or, rj num, fiij,

not, and after eyo), I: ewel oi,as not; firj dXkoi, ne alii,

eyw^v, I not. It is perceptible only in The poets, whoreckon the two syllables as one.

§ 67. M Greek word ends in any eonsmant except thevocal ones, v, p, and ? (f, -,|r). The only exceptions are :

the negative ou/c (before consonants ov) and the prepo-sition eK, out of (before vowels ef), which attach them-selves so closely to the following word that their « canhardly be looked upon as final.

When any other consonant, except these three, appearsat the end of a word, it is usually rejected

:

p.Oii honey (meT)io-! jieXiT (Gen. fieXiT-os) 1

,r&p.a hody „ crcop.aT (Gen. <ra.ftaT-(ft) f''°™P- § 1^''^'

^o-av they were „ ^jo-avr (comp. Lat. eratit)

§68. MOVEABLE CONSONANTS. 25

But mute Dentals in this case are often changed into

vocal s.

wpo'r for TtpoT from wpori to (Horn.).

80s „ 80B „ S061 give.

Tepas „ repar Gen. repar-os miracle.

§ 68. Certain words and forms have, after a short

vowel at the end, a moveable v (v eêXKvariKov). This

V is used before words which begin with a vowel

—

by which the hiatus is avoided—and before longer

pauses. Poets employ it also before consonants, espe-

cially at the end of the verse, to make it more sonorous.

The words and forms which have a moveable v are

the following :

—

1. The Dat. PI. in cri(v) : iracnv eScoKa, I gave to all

;

but Trao-i hoKel ovtco^ elvai, to all it seems to be so.

2. The designations of place in (7i(v) : 'Adi^vrjaiv ?iVy

he was at -Athens ; but 'Kdrivrjo-t roSe iyevero, this hap-

pened at Athens.

3. The single words eUoa-L{v), twenty ; 7repva-i(v), last

year; audi nravrdTrdai(v), entirely ; e'lKoa-iv dvBpei;, twenty

men ; but eUoav 'yvvaiKe'i, twenty women.

4. The third person Sing, in e(i') : eaaxrev avTov<;, he

saved them, but ea-toa-e tov? 'Aîji/atbu?, he saved the

Athenians.

5. The third person PI. as well as Sing, in a-i(v)

:

XiyovaLv eS they speaJc well, but Xeyova-L tovto, they say-

this; heiKVucnv eKeure, he points there, but Seiicvvcrt tou

dvSpa, he points out the man.

§ 68. Dialects.—To the words which have a moveable v there ar&

added in Homer the adverts of place in 6e(v) : avev6e{v), from

afar; n:apoi6e{v),fromlefore, formerly ; the particles KeXv), êrAops,

and vi(y), now.

The New-Ionic dialect, which admits the immediate succession of

vowels, omits the moveable » On the k in ovk before a spiritus

asper, § 52 D.

26 DIVISION OF SYLLABLES. §69.

§ 69. Ols. 1.—In like manner ov, not, takes k onl^ before vowels,

which becomes x before the spiritus asper (§ 52) : ov tprjo-i, he

says not ; ovk diros, not he himself; oix ovras, not so. The k

appears also in ovuin and jxriKin, no more.

2. ex, out of, is e'l before vowels (Lat. ex) : « rijc voKeas, out of

the city ; e| aKpoTvokeas, out of the acropolis, or castle ; iicKeya,

I speak out ; i^sKeyov, I spoTce out.

3. Without any definite reason the words ovras, thus (adverb

of ovTos, thii), axpis, iiexp's, till, very frequently lose their

final s ; hut TroWaKis, many times, loses it only in the poets

.

Chap. IV.—Division of Syllables and theik

Quantity.

A.

—

Division of Syllables.

§ 70. The Syllables (avkXa^ij, collection) in Greekwords are divided according to the following rules.

Every vowel which stands before another, but does not

form a diphthong with it, or collapse with it by syni-

zesis (§ 39), is reckoned a separate syllable: i-arpoi;,

physician, trisyllabic.

§ 71. A consonant which stands between two vowels,

belongs to the second syllable : e-%6f, has ; ov-to^, this ;

l-KOrvoi;, capahle.

Two or more consonants usually belong to the fol-

lowing vowel : o-ttXoS?, simple ; d-pi,-a-Te-p6<i, on the

left hand; e-axov, I had; a-fiv6<;, lamb; i-y6p6<;, ini-

mical; likewise double consonants: o-yjro-fjt,ai, I shall

see; e-^co, T sit.

§ 72. Exceptions, l. Liquids and nasals join thepreceding vowel: ap-fia carriage; aSe\-(f)6';, brotJier

;

Ka/y-Xa^co, I laugh; ev-Bov, within; d/x-<p(o, loth, ambo.fiv only join the foUowiag vowel: tcd-fivo), I suffer.

2. When a consonant is doubled, the first belongs tothe preceding, the second to the follovsdng syllable:iTT-Tro?, horse ; ^aX-Xo), I throw ; Ilvp-po'i. The same

§ 76. QUANTITY. 27

takes place -when aspirates follow the correspondiDg

tenues : ^Kt-OIs, BaK-jô?, "Zair-^co.

§ 73. Compounds are divided into the elements out

of which they are formed : <7vv-exo>, I Jiold together

;

e^'dyeo, I drive out.

B.

—

Quantity/.

§ 74. With regard to the quantity (length or short-

ness) of syllables, the same rules, in general, hold good

for the Greek as for the Latin. An important excep-

tion, however, consists in one vowel before the other

not needing to be short in Greek : Ow^, penance ; '\d6<;,

people ; êKrfov, better. Nor do the special Latin rules

for final syllables hold good in Greek.

§ 75. A syllable is long by nature when it contains a

long vowel or diphthong : ifiet<;, you ; Kpivw, I decide ;

aha, I sing. The recognition of quantity in Greek is

rendered much easier by the characters : h6fw<;, room,

house; S&fui, hmtse ; in other cases by the accent

(§§ 83, 84) ; the rest can be learnt only by practice,

and from the lexicon.

Ohs.—Every contracted syllable must, of course, he long : aicay.

J^ aiKiov, lp6s = Upos, Iwly.

§ 76. A syllable is long by position, when a vowel is

§ 74. Dialects.—Diphthongs and long vowels are very seldom

shortened before vowels in the same word : Hom. olos '^qualis " "),

and /Se^Xijat, with short tj.

§ 75. Dialects.—1. The' quantity of the common vowels is very

fmcertain generally, but especially in Hom. "tojiev, let us go. Apes

Apes, Ares, Ares.

2. A final syllable ending in a long vowel or diphthong in Hom.

and the tragic choruses is shortened before a following vowel : o«oi

fcrai/, they were at home ('"" '), rjjievri iv, sitting in^'"" '). Comp.

§ 63, D. 4. But those words which began with digamma (§ 34, D.)

leave a preceding vowel long in Hom. : xoXXct re arlXâv koI

tl/uicriv (" " " ""), glittering with beauty and garments.

28 QUANTITY. §77.

followed by two or more consonants, or a double conso-

nant, whetner.

a) both consonants or the double consonant stand mthe same word : x^/'A'"'

ôy {' ")> e'l'?' ^^^ C ")'Ka<rT&j/>

b) the first concludes the first word, and the rest

begin the second : Oeo'i Be, hut God {"' "), iv tovto),

meanwhile ( ), or

c) both or the double consonant stand at the begin-

ning of the second word : to, KTTjfiaTa, the goods ( ),

d i^Syv, the living one ("").

Ohs.—When the vowel thus placed is already long hy nature, this

must be indicated in the pronunciation : the a in TrpSa-a-o), I

act, sounds differently from that of Tatra-m, I arrange, though

both words make a spondee in verse ; that in fiaXKov different

from that of koKKos, beauty, though both form a trochee.

§ 77. When a vowel short by nature stands before a

mute with \, p, v, /m following, the syllable may be long

or short : reKvov, child (' "), tk^Xo?, blind (^"), rt Spa?,

what art thou doing ('')?

The syllable, however, is necessarily long in the fol-

lowing cases

:

§ 78. a) when the mute stands at the end of the first,

the liquid or nasal at the beginning of the second

word : e'/c vrjcav, out of tJie ships( ), and in compounds

in which the mute belongs to the first element : iKXeya,

I speak out( ) ;

b) when a soft mute (/3, 7, S) is followed by X, /a, or v

:

î^Xos, book ( "), Ta/y/j,a, task (

""), e'îZva, snake

( ).

§ 77. Dialects.—In Horn, a mute with X, p, v, fz following,

almost regularly makes position: reKvov ri Kkaieis, child, whyweepest thou ? ( ), vttvos navbafioraip, all-subduing sleep

(" "

"). Nay, even X, p, v, fi, at the beginning of words haveoften the power of lengthening the short final vowel of the pre-

ceding word : KoKrjVTc iieyDiKrjVTe,abeaut'ûlandgreat ( """"Vfi in the St»an Sei (SeTcrai), fear, and in Sijv, long, has the sameeffect.

§ 83. ACCENTS. 29

Chap. Y.—Accents.

§ 79. The general rules for tlie accentuation of words

are the following :

—

1. Every word must have cme and can never have

more than one principal accent, which is called simply

the accent : iroKinrpop/iJLocrvv'q, busy occupation ; atrapa-

<3-KevaaTo<;, unprepared. On the designation of words

according to the accent, see §§ 17, 19, 21.

§ 80. 2. There are two kinds of accents, the sharp

accent or the acute (oêla), and the lengthened or the

circumflex (irepccnrco/jievr]). On the mode of using both,

see §§ 17, 21.

§ 81. 3. The acute may be upon long or short

syllables, the circumflex only on such syllables as are

long hy nature : as, Xeyeo, I say ; X'^jco, I cease ; Ka\6<;,

beautiful ; a\,rjd'^<;, trUiC ; av6pco7ro<;, man ; KSLfievo^,

lying ; Keirai, he lies ; aSi/ia, body ; eS, well.

§ 82. 4. The acute accent can be only on one of the

last three syllables, and on the last but two only

when the last is short: diroiKo<;, colonist, but not

airoiKov (Gen.) ; eXeyov, I said, but not eKeyrjv, I was

said.

§ 83. 5. The circumflex can be only on owe of the last

two syllables, and on the last but one only when the

iMst is short by nature : ctvkov, fig, but not avKov,

(Gen.) ; o-m/jm, body, but not aafjuiTo^ (Gen.) ; irpdî';,

act, but not '7rpaêi<i (Nom. PL).

Ols. 1.—When the last syllahle is long by position, it does not

hinder the circumflex from being on the last syllable but one

:

a?\a^, furrow, Gen. avkaKos, but it does when it is long by

nature as well as by position, 6(i>pd^, hreast-plafe. Gen. Smpaxos.

Comp. § 145.

2. Exceptions to 4 and 5 will be adduced separately in the

chapters on infiexions. It is specially to be observed, thatDigitized by Microsoft®

30 ACCENTS. S 84.

most of the exceptions occur with the final syllables m cu and

01 : ajrotKot, although ot is long, yvmfiai, opinions, rvTrreTai, he is

strucJc. Comp. §§ 108, 122 D. 3, 133, 157, 229, 268.

§ 84. e. A last syllable but one, when long by

nature, can have no other accent but the circumflex, if

the last is short by nature: (pevye, flee, not ^evye:

^PXov, I reigned, not fip^ov : rjKi^, of the same age, not

^\ff, (Gen. ipuKo<;) : 'Kparlvo'i, not 'Kpartvo<;. It may,

however, be without an accent : elTri, speak ; avOpooiro'i,

man.

Obs. 1.—Apparent exceptions, such as more, so that, ^8e, this,

are explained in § 94.

2. So fixed is the rule, apart from these cases, that the quantity

of the final syllable or of the last but one may often be inferred

from the accent : Wi (X), go ; wpSra [prima Nom. PI.] (&)

;

yvvalKas (5), women, Aco. PI.; yvaims (a), opinions. Ace. PI.

§ 85. 7. Compound words have the accent on thelast part but one of the word, as far as is possible

according to § 82, &c. : amOi, go away; a^CKo<;, friend-less ; (j)LK6<yvvo^, friendly to women ; aTroSc;, give back ;7rapev6e^, put in besides. (Comp. § 359, Obs. 2.)

§ 86. The accent of a word is variously altered bythe changes which a word undergoes, as well as by theconnexion of a word with others in a sentence. That is

:

1. Every oxytone subdues its sharp tone when fol-

lowed by another word, so that the grave takes thenlace of the acute. (Comp. § 20.)

§ 87. 2. In a contraction in the middle of a word, thesyllable produced by contraction acquires no accent ifnone of the syllables to be contracted had it: 7ei'eo?yevov;, of the race; rifiae -rlfia, honour. The accentof a contracted last syllable but one is manifest of itselffrom the general rules on accent, hence rifi&vre^,honouring (Norn. PI.) from nfjAovre<!, ti/moivtcov (Gen.PI.) from rifiaovTwv (according to §§83 and 84). Acontracted final syllable has

§ 91- ACCENTS. 31

«) the circumflex, when the first of the uncontractedsyllables was accented : niidei, rt/ia, he honours ; 'xpva-eov

'Xpvcrov, of ffolden ;

b) the acute, when the last was accented: eorai?ecrT(B9, standing.

§ 88. 3. With elision (§ 64) oxytone prepositions andconjunctions entirely lose their accent ; all other kindsof words throw it upon the previous syllable as acutes

:

eV avT&, on him = iirl airS, ovB' iSvvdfj/rjv, I could

not even = ovSe iSvvd/jLrjv, el>' 'OSva-eu<;, I am Odys-seus = elfil 'OSuo-eu?, cttt' ^crav, there were seven = eirTo,

rjaav.

§ 89. 4. With arasis (§ 65) the accent of the first wordis lost : Tar/add, bona = ra wya6d, Oolfidriov, the dress

= TO Ifidriov. Only when paroxytones change the

first syllable by crasis into one long by nature, this

receives a circumflex: ra ak\a, alia, gives raXKa, to

epyov, the work, Totipyov.

On the changes of the accent in declension, see §§ 107-109 ; onthe accent of verbs, see §§ 229, and 331-333.

§ 90. The dissyllabic prepositions, with the exception

of dfi<})l, dvrl,, dvd. Bid, when placed after the noun or verb

to which they belong, throw their accent on to the first

syllable : tovtoiv irepi about those (rrepX Totnav) ; in

like manner when, used adverbially, they include the

substantive verb, as irdpa = irdpean, it is there, near ;

evi = evea-Ti, it is therein, is possible. This drawing

back of the accent is called anastrophe. Comp. § 446.

§ 91. Some words of one and of two syllables unite so

closely with the preceding word, that they throw their

accent on to it. Such words are called enclitics (iyKXtTiical

§ 90. Dialects,—Prepositions, whose final syllable is lost by elision,

have not the accent even when they occupy the position indicated in

§ 90. Horn. T^a-i trap elvdens xoKkcvov, among them Iforged nine

years long.

32 ENCLITICS. § S2

Xe'^et?, i e. inclining words), and the throwing hack of th

accent, is called inclination.

§ 92. The following are enclitics

:

1. The indefinite pronoun rh, tI, some one, something

through all forms (§ 214).

2. The three personal pronouns, in the forms /u,ov

fiol, fi.e, mei, mihi, me; crov, croi, a-e, tui, tibi, te

,

01), ol, e, sui, sibi, se ; crcficoiv, to them two ; and afiai,(v)

to them.

3. The Indicative Pres. of el/Mi, I am, and of (j^Tjfii

inquam, with the exception of the second Pers. Sing

el and<f>y<;.

4. The indefinite adverbs ttou or ttoOl, somewhere.

TTij, somehow ; irol, somewhither ; iroOev, from somewhere

,

irore, sometime ; ttcb?, somehow ; -ttco, yet.

5. The particles 76, qwidem ; re, and ; rot, trulg ; vvv oi

vv, now ; Horn. Keu or /ce, perhaps, Isuppose ; pa, (apa), then ,

Horn, dijv, truly ; -Trip, very ; and Se (meaning towards

and as a demonstrative appendage). Comp. § 212.

§ 93. These words throw their accent back on th(

preceding word, in the following manner

:

a) A preceding oxytone leaves its sharp tone unsubdued (§ 20), and this tnen serves also for the en

clitic : aryaOov ri, something good ; avTo'i ifyrjatv, hi

himself says.

b) After a perispome the accent of the enclitic ii

entirely lost : opo) rti/a?, I see some ; eS iarw, it is well

Ti/J,a> a-e, I honour thee.

c) After a paroxytom, enclitics of one syllable entirelj

lose their accent; but those of two syllables retail

their accent on the last syllable: ^tXo? /aov, my friendXojo^ Tt?, a speech ; but \670t rti/e?, some speeches, XoyanTivojv (Gen. PL).

§ 92. Dialects.—The Ionic additional form of el, e?t is enclitic, si

also <r(i>ias (Ace. PI.) them = Att. o-^as and /xiV, Um, her, § 205 DDigitized by Microsoft®

§ 97. ENCLITICS. 33

d) Proparoxytofms and properispomes retain theii

accent, but receive also from the following enclitic

another accent as acute on the last syllable, whichremains unsubdued: dvOpwirots rt?, a man; êâiol

ela-Lv, they are firm ; a-a/id ye, the body at least ; TratSes

Tti'e?, some boys.

e) Atona (§ 97) receive the accent of following enclitics as

acutes : oil îjo-w, he says not ; as re, and Jioiv.

§ 94. Obs.—Several words of one syllable form one word withenclitics following : thus, asre, so that ; fire, sive ; ovre, neque

;

jirjTc, neque ; owsre, capable ; osris, whoever ; rJToi, truly

;

KaiToi, and yet ; to this also helongs the he mentioned in § 92,

5 : obe, this one ; o'lKaSe, homewards. These words form partly

apparent exceptions to §§ 79 and 84.

§ 95. /) When sereral enchtics follow one another,

each throws its accent upon the preceding : e'i rk fiol

<jyr)cri TTOTe, if any one ever says to me.

§ 96. The enclitics in certain cases retain their accent

(become orthotoned), viz.

:

1. when an enclitic forms the first word in the sen-

tence, and therefore has nothing on which to throw its

accent: rtve? Xer/ovai, some say. This position, how-

ever, is rare.

2. when an encKtic is made emphatic: <re 'kiryco, Imean you—no one else ; el ea-riv, if it is really so. WhenecTTt denotes exist, be allowed, possible, it retains the

accent and that too on the last syllable but one : ea-ri

0eo<!, there is a God; ovk ecmv, it is not allowed, not

possible. Comp. § 315, Obs. 2.

3. After ehsion : ravr ecrrt, yjrevSrj, this 'is false =Tavrd ian iênS^.

4. Enclitics of two syllables, in the case mentioned

§ 93, c.

§ 97. Atona, i. e., words without accent, also called

proclitics or inclinia(g>f&i'i*»]/i(fer(^ce®everal words of one

34 ATONA. § 8

syllable, which have so little independence, that i

regard to accent they combine with the following word

They are the following

:

1. of the article, the forms o, t], ol, al

;

2. the prepositions, ev (in with the Dat.), eV or ei

(into with the Ace), iic or i^ out of ;

3. the conjunctions, el, if, and o)?, how, that, th

latter also in its use as preposition to ;

4. the negative ov or ovk (ovx).

Ots.—ovxi, a more emphatic ov, is always accented.

§ 98. Atona receive the accent only in two cases, viz.

a) when they are at the end of a sentence, and therefon

have no following word on which they can rest : ^^? 5

ov ; Do you say so or not P ; so always ax; when place(

after the word with which a comparison is made : 6eo

d)?, like a god, Horn.

;

b) when followed by an enclitic, which throws badits accent : ov <^<n, he says not. Comp. § 93, c.

§ 99. The following particles are distinguished accord

ing to the accent: rj, as, or, and 5}, truly, or interro-

gative, Lat. num ; dpa, now, consequently, and apa as ai

interrogative ; vvv, now, and enclitic vv(v), now, particle

of transition ; to?, how, and wy, so; ovkovv, therefore, andovKovv, not therefore.

§ 100. DECLENSION. 35

11.—INFLEXION.

A.—INFLEXION OP NOUNS AND PEONOUNS.

Chap. VI.

—

^Declension of Substantives andAdjectives.

§ 100. Inflexion is the change which nouns, pronouns

and verbs undergo, to indicate their relation in a sentence.

A distinction must be made in inflexion between Stemand Termination. Stem is the fixed part, Termination

the changeable part which is appended to the Stem to

indicate the different relations.

. The inflexion of nouns and pronouns is called Declen-

sion. As the nominal and pronominal Stems are modi-

fied according to Cases, the terminations added to themare called Qase-endings. The form, which arises, from a

case-ending being added to a Stem, is called the Case-

form. Thus -Trpa/y/j.aT-o^ is a case-form of the Stem

irpar/fiaT, formed by means of the case-ending -09.

Great care must be taken not to confound the

Stem and the Nominative case. The Nominative is

itself a case-form, often quite different from the Stem.

Thus the Nominative of the Stem irpar/fiuT is wpai^iia,

thing. x6yo<;, speech, is the Nominative of the Stem Xcyo,

which appears, for example, in the compound word Xoyo'

r/paxfyo-g, a writer of speeches.*

The Greeks distinguish in the Declension

:

1. Three Numbers : the Singular for one, the Dual for

two, the Plural for several.

2. Mve Gases: Nominative, Genitive, Dative, Accu-

sative, Vocative. The Dual has only two case-forms,

one for the Nom., Ace, and Voc, the other for the Gen.

and Dat. In the Plur. the Voc. is always like the Nbm.

3. Three Genders: Mascidine, Feminine, Neuter.

Digiluad by Mlcr6S6fe&TliA St-pm -nnll alwavR lip, left unaccented.

36 GEHDEK OF SUBSTANTIVES. § lO'l

^ 101. The gender is known :—1. From certain general characteristics of sex, ii

which the Greek language almost entirely coincidei

with the Latin. Besides the rule founded in the

nature of things, that the designations of male personi

are masculine, those of females feminine, the following

rules are to be observed

:

§ 102. a) The names of rivers and winds (gods a

rivers and winds) and months (o fjurjv the month) arc

masculine : 6 Eu/xBra?, the river Eurotas ; 6 Zecj)vpo^, th

west wind; o '^Karofi/Satdv, the month Secafomiaeon.

§ 103. b) The names of trees, lands (rj yr) the land)

islands{fj

vrjao<; the island) and most cities, are feminine ,

f) Bpv'i, the oak; 17 'ApKaSla, Arcadia; rj Aecr/So?, thi

island of Lesbos; 7) K.6\o^a>v, the city of Colophon.

Most abstract substantives also, i. e. those which denote

a condition, relation, act or property, are feminine : 9;

iX/Trh, hope ; rj vmtj, victory ; t] BiKaiocrvvr), righteousness

,

rj TU'^vri]';, quickness.

§ 104. c) Many names of fruits are neuter : to (tvkov.

the Jig ; most diminutives also both of masculine and

feminine words : to 'yepovriov dimin. of yipcov, the ola

man; to <yvvaiov dimin. of rj <yvvri, the woman. Fur-

ther, every name and word, which is adduced merely as

a word : to avOpairo'i, the name " man ;" to BiKaioavmi.

the idea of "righteousness;" and the names of the

letters, to aX<f)a, to a-lyfia.

§ 105. 2. From the ending of the Stem the gender uknown according to §§ 113, 125, 137-140.

3. In Declension the Neuter may be distinguished

from the Masculine and Feminine, for all Neuters havea) no Accusative or Yocative distinct from the Nom.b) no s as case-sign of the Nom. Sing.

c) the ending d in Nom. Ace. and Voc. PI.

§ 106. The Greek language, like the English, em-ploys the definite Article. The forms of the Article arethe followin"' : Digitized by Microsoft®

§109. ACCENT IN DECLENSION. 37

'38 THE A DECLENSION. § Ub

Gen. Sing, of Trora/io?, river ; rififi Pat. Sing, of n-fir],

honour ; ttoS&v Gen. PL of ttoi;?, foot; uurjvolv Gen.

Dual of iJLT^v, mcmth.

§ 110. Originally there was only a single declension,

for which reason much has still remained common,which we shall put together below, § 173. But we dis-

tinguish Two Principal Declensions according, to the

ending of the Stems

:

1. the First Principal Declension (vowel declenMon),

which comprehends the Stems ending in a and a, and2. the Second Principal Declension (consonant declen-

sion), which comprehends the Stems ending in conso-

nants, but also those iu the soft Towels c, v, in diphthongs,

and a small number of Stems in o.

First Peincipal Declension.

( Vowel-declension^

§ 111. The first principal declension is subdividedinto two, viz.

:

A.

—

TJie A Declension

B.

—

The O Declension.

What is common to both is put together below, § 134.

A.

—

The A Declension.

(Commonly called the First Declension.)

§ 112. The A Declension comprehends those words,whose Stems end in a. In certain cases, however, thisa becomes tj. Hence the A Declension of the Greekscorresponds both to the A or first, and to the E or fifth

Declension of the Latin language.

§ 113. The A Declension contains only Masculinesand Feminines. The two genders are most easily distin--guished in the Nom. Sing., in which the mascuUnes take?, the feminines no case-ending. Hence the terminations


§115. THE A DECLENSION. 39

of the Nom. Sing, are in the feminine a, 17, in tlie

masculine a?, 179.

§ 114. 1. Feminines.

Examples.Stems.

40 THE A DECLENSION. § 116.

a) a remains in the Nom. Sing, after e, i or p, (§ 41) :

St. aoîa, Nom. Sing. crocf>id, wisdom ; Dat. PL Trirpai^,

Nom. Sing, irerpa, rock.

I) a remains in the Nom. Sing, after o- and after the

double consonants if, f,i|r, <ro-(or t r ), XX, as well as in

the feminine designations in -aiva: St. afiaâ, Nom.Sing. a[iaâ, carriage; Gen. PL Xeaivaiv, Nom. Sing.

Xiaivd, lioness.

c) After other vowels and consonants a is generally-

changed into r] in the Nom. Sing. : St. /Soa, Nom. Sing.

ySoj;, cry ; Ace. PI. 'yvmij-d'i, Nom. Sing. <yvQ}iJi-r) (opinion).

More important exceptions are—to a) Koprj, girl ; Koppr), temple;

Seiprj, neck—to b) epa-rj, dew—to c) a-rod, hall ; XPo°; colour

;

ToKp,a, ioldness ; Simra, mode of life.

§ 116. 2. In order to form the other cases in the

Singular according to a given Nom. Sing.

:

a) If the Nom. Sing, ends in 17, this letter remainsthroughout the Sing. : Slkt], justice, SIkt]^, SUy, hUrjv, Ukt).

h) If the Nom. Sing, ends in a, this letter remainsalways in the Ace. and Vac. : a/j,aâ, dfiaâv.

c) If the Nom. Sing, ends in a, this letter remainsalso in the Gren. and Bat. when preceded by a vowel or p(§ 41) : Nom. Sing, a-oîd, wisdom, Gen. aocpid^ ; Nom.Sing. cTTod, colonnade, Dat. a-roa : also in some propernames with long a: Nom. Sing.'AT^Sa, Gen. AjjSw, andin fivd (contracted from fj,vda). Gen. yam?.

d) Otherwise a of Nom. Sing, becomes 7} in Gen. andDat.

: Nom. Sing, fiovaa, Gen. /j,ova7j<; ; Nom. Sing.Blaira, Dat. BiaLTy.

§ 117. For the quantity of a in the Nom. and Ace.Sing., the general ride is : a purum (after vowels) anda after p is long, every other a is short: Bed, goddess

;

afiiXXd, fight.

The exceptions are generally shown by the accent (§ 84, Obs. 2).The most important are the fem. designations in -rpia and-fm ;

fcO^rpm, female player ; fiao-iKeiS, queen (but âa-i-Xeia.dominion), and several words with diphthongs in the lastsyllable but one,

^^ff^^^/j ^f^^f^StStôod-witt, polpajale.

§120. THE A DECLENSIOS. 41

§ 118. The Gen. PL has the ending av, which com-bines with the Stem a to form dmv, contr. wv. This is

the reason that the Q-en. PI. of all words in this declen-

sion has the circumflex : "xpopa j(o)pS>v, \eawa Xeaivoov

(Exceptions, § 181. Comp. § 123).

§ 119. The Dat. PI. originally ended in <rt, before

which t is added to the a of the Stem. The aicri thus

formed is usually shortened into at?, but the original

form is found even in Attic writers, in poetry and prose.

<Comp. § 128, D.)

§ 120. 2. Masculines.

Examples.

42 THE A DECLENSION. § 121

Ezamples for Declension.

Ta/ilas, treasurer orparnin??, warrior dSoXeaxis, iabbler

NiKtas, Nicias jraiSorpi^rjs, wrestling- 'AXKi/3iaS>;s

Kpirrjs, Judge master

§ 121. In the Masculines, as well as in the Feminines,

when a vowel or p precedes, the a of the Stem remains

and is long ; after every other letter it becomes 17 in the

Nom. Dat. and Ace. Sing.

Those words which in the Nom. Sing, end in ti;-s,

names of peoples, and compound words, have a short in

the Voc. Sing. : TroXlra, liepad (Nom. Sing. Hepar]-^

Persian), êafieTpa (Nom. Sing, yecofiirprj-'; land-

measurer). The Voc. Sea-TTora (Nom. Sing. Seo-TroTT?-?

lord) draws back the accent, contrary to § 107, a, to

the first syllable. All others have rj in the Vocative

:

KpoviSrj (Nom. Sing. Kpovi87]-<;).

§ 122. The Declension of the Masculines is distin-

guished from that of the Feminines—1. in the Nom. Sing, by ? being added to the Stem,2. by the Gen. Sing, ending in o v.

Obs.—The termination of the Gen. Sing, of the masculines is pro-perly -0, which with the a of the Stem forms -ao (see theHomeric dialect)

; by weakening a to e (§ 118 D.) and contrac-tion (§ 37) arises ou : woKirao (ttoXit-co) ttoXiVou.

§§ 121 and 122.—Dialects.—1. The Epic dialect in some wordsomits the s of the Nom. Sing., iii which cases the a remains short

:

imroTo., horseman, ve(êX?)yepe'Ta, cloud-gatherer. (Comp. Lat. poeta,scriba.')

2. The Dorians also in the masculines put 5 for 71 and contract 5ointo a. (§§ 24 D. ; 37 D. 3.)

3. Homer has three forms in the Gen. Sino-.

:

a) the original -So : 'Arpeibdo

;

b) -ea> with the quantity transposed (where € is lost by synizesis,

§§ 37 D., 39 D.): 'ArpeiBea. The accent remains unchanged, in

spite of the a> in the final syllable. The New-Ionic form is thesame,

c:) -a, by contraction: 'Ep/icia (Nom. Sing. 'Epp,ela-s = Attic

'Ep/i^s), ô/)f(B (Nom. Sing, ôpeds). Comp. § 37 a.

§ 125. THE DECLENSION. 43

ôpâs (contracted from /3opea-s nortJi wind), contracts the ori-

ginal So in tlie Gen. Sing., after Doric fashion, into d: fioppd.

The same takes place with some Doric and Eoman proper names,and a few other words : 'SvWas, Sidla^ 6pvi6o6fipas, fowlerGen. Sing. a.

§ 123. In the Dual and Plural the Declension of the

Masculines is the same as that of the Feminines.

Exceptions to the accentuation prescribed in § 118 are p^pônj-r,

usurer, irrjcrlai, trade-winds. Gen. PL j(pfj(rTa>v (xpicrSiv in

the 0-declension from xpnoros, good) and irrja-iav.

B.

—

The Declension.

{Commonly called the Second Declension.)

§ 124. The O Declension comprehends those words

whose Stems end in o, together -vvith the few whose

Stems end in w (§ 132). It answers to the o- or Second

Declension in Latin.

§ 125. The O Declension is the complement of the

A Declension in regard to gender. It contains Masculines

and Neuters, but only few Feminines.

The termination of the Masculines and Feminines in

the Nom. Sing, is o - ?, that of Neuters o-v [Lat. u-s, itrm'].

The Masculines and Feminines are declined alike

;

the Neuters are distinguished from them (comp. § 105^^

only by—1. The Nom. and Voc. Sing, taking the Accusative-

ending V : Bmpo-v (gift) [donu-m],

2. The Nom. Ace. and Voc. PI. ending in a : 8Sipa

[dona\.


M THE O DECLENSION.

126.

§123.

Examples

§ 130- THE DECLENSION. 45

5. Single words: /3i/3\os, hooh; p&^hos, staff; biaKcKros, dialect;

vocros, disease; Sp6a-os, dew ; 8ok6s, heam. Many designations

of personal beings are common, that is, with the same form theyare masculine when they denote a male, feminine when theydenote a female : d deos, god ; rj deSs, goddess ; 6 3v6pamos.and fi SvBpumos-

§ 128. The ending of the Gen. Sing, is -o, which with

the o of the Stem is contracted into ov (comp. § 122)

:

avOpcoiro-o = avOpmirov.

§ 129, The Nominative form is sometimes used

instead of the YocatiTe form: the Vocative of deSg-

is always the same as the Nom. : w ^609 [Lat. deus] i

d£eX(j)6i;, hrother, has dSeXcjje in the Vocative with the

accent thrown back.

Contracted Declension.

§ 130. Several words which have e or before the

last letter of the Stem may contract these vowels with

the o. The rules of §§ 36 and 37 are here applied : ea,

however, contrary to § 38, is contracted into d.

§ 128. Dialects.—The Epic dial, in the Gen. Sing, has the older

form -to for the ending ; lo with of the St. produces oio : wdpaa-

iroio, TTcSioio (jrehio-v, field). We also, however, find the Attic av.

Other Epic peculiarities are : -ouv = oiv in the Gen. and Dat.

Dual ; &fioav (&fios, shoulder) :—o«rt(v) = ois in the Dat. Plur. :

av6panT6iixL(y), which is also New-Ionic and is found even in Attic

writers (comp. § 119).

§ 130. Dialects.—The Ionic dial, leaves the forms uncontracted.


46 CONTEACTED O DECLENSION. §1S1.

Examples.Stems.

O VOV'S

vooTO oa-Tovv, hone

6(TT€0

Singular.

Nom.Gen.Dat.

Ace.Voc.

VOO-i

vnov

viav6o~v

voe

vovs

vol)

vov-v

vov

o(TTeo-v

OGTeOV

6a-T€a

doTeo-v

oa-reo-v

oa-Tov-v

o(rTov

OfTTa

OCTOV-V

o<rTov-v

Dual.

N. A. r.

a.D.

Plural.

Nom.Oen.Dat.

Ace.

Voc.

voaVOOLV volv

vooi

voav

VOQIS

voovs

VOQl

VOL

vavvols

vovs

voX

ocrreo)

oa-Teocv

OfTTOi

OtTTotv

ncTTea

oarecov

oirreois

oa-rea

ocrria

oa-ra

OffTUiV

ocrots

oaraoa-TCL

Examples for Declension.

ttXovs, voyage ^oSs, stream i8e\<p,8o{ls, Irother's son

§ 131. Some irregularities of accentuation occur inthe contraction, viz.,

1. the Nom, Dual is made oxytone, contrary to§ 87.

2. compound words leave the accent on the lastsyllable but one, also contrary to § 87: KepLifkfc, Dat.of irepuTfKov^, circumnavigation, for wrepiirXS, from'-^a,.

3. the word Kdveov, basket, is contracted into Kamvvcontrary to § 87.

'

On contracted adjectives, see § 183.

Attic Declension.

§ 132. A small number of words, instead of the short0-sound (o), have the long (»). This a, at the end of the

uen. Smg. from the Nominative nfretJ-y.'

g 134. ATTIC DECLENSION. 47

Stem goes through all the cases, but at the same time

takes the case-endings as far as possible. Most of these

words have e before a, and for -eto there also occurs the

additional form -do: veco-'i, temple, together with mo-?,

Xeoo-?, people, together with \d6-'i (comp. § 37, D.). This

Declension is called the Attic.

On adjectives in «-?, see § 184 ; on some words which

fluctuate between this and the second principal declen-

sion, see § 174.

Examples.

48 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § ISS.

1. the masculines have in the Nom. Sing, the

ending -9.

2. the masculines have in the Gen. Sing. (§§ 122, 128)

the ending -ov.

3. all three genders have i subscriptum with a long

vowel in the Dat. Sing.

4. all three genders have -v in the Ace. Sing.

5. all three genders have the Stem vowel lengthened

in the Nom. Ace. and Voc. Dual.

e. all three genders afSx -iv to the Stem vowel in

the Gen. and Dat. Dual.

7. all three genders have -wv in the Gen. PI.

8. aU three genders affix -aiv or ? with preceding i to

the Stem vowel in the Dat. PI.

9. the masculines and feminines affix -i to the Stemvowel in the ISTom. PI.

10. the masculines and feminiaes affix -? (for i/?) in

the Ace. PL, lengthening the Stem vowel to compensate

for the V dropped. (§ 42.)

The difference therefore is only in the formation of

the Gen. Sing, of the feminines and in the accentuation

of the Gen. PI.

Second Peincipal Declension.

Consonant-declension.

{Commonly called the Third Declensim.)

§ 135. The Second Principal Declension comprehendsall the Stems which end in consonants, the soft vowelsI and V, or diphthongs, and a smaU number of Stems ino (Nom. ft)). The Stem is best recognised in the Gen.Sing, where what remains after rejecting the termina-tion OS may generally be considered as the Stem : Gen.XiovT-o<;, St. 'KeovT (Nom. Xeav, lion), Gen. ^vXaK-o'i,St. j)vKaK (Nom. (pvKa^, guard).

§139. CONSONAJST DECLENSION. 49

Uence for the exact recognition of a word of this declension, not only

the Nominative hut also the Stem or the <3enitive is necessary

:

as, Nom. Soi'r, St. Suit or Gen. dairis, meal [Lat. rex, St. reg or

Gen. regis].

To the second principal declension correspond in Latin the third

and fourth declensions. In it the case-endings usually appear

pure, i. e. not mixed up with the end of the Stem.

The Stems ending in the soft vowels follow the third declension,

hecause the soft vowels (§ 35, 1) can be used together with

the vowels of the terminations : Gen. 7ri'TU-oy(Stem mrv, Nom.Tviru-s, pine-tree'). In the Stems ending in diphthongs the v is

sometimes resolved into F: for example, the Stem ./Sou (Nom../SoO-r, ox) was originally in some forms ôF (Lat. lov), as Gen.

'ôF-6s (= iov-is). See § 35, Obs. The O Stems have probably

lost a final consonant.

§ 136. The Second Principal Declension comprehends

all three genders.

The Neuters may be recognised by the inflexion,

according to § 105, from their having the Nom. and

Ace. alike, and these cases in the PL always with the

ending -a : awfuiT-a (St. arasixar, Nom. Sing, cr&ixa, lody).

§ 137. For determining the gender from the Stem

the following are the most important rules

:

a) Masculine are the Stems in ev (Nom. ev-?), TTjp

(Nom. rr)p), Top (Nom. rap), vt (with Nom. 9 or i;

preceded by a long vowel), as well as most Stems in v

(of various Nominatives) with a preceding long vowel

:

St. 'ypa(j>ev, Nom. ypaêv^, writer; St. and Nom.

cfmrrip, saviour; St. p tjt op, Nom. prjTwp, orator; St.

\eovT, Nom. Xecov, lion, leo ; St. and Nom. 07001', contest.

§ 138. b) Feminine are all Stems in S (Nom. -t? ,-«?),

most in i (Nom. -t-9)j those in o (Nom. -co or -ca-?), and

the names of qualities in ttjt (Nom. -tij-?) : St. eXTrtS,

Nom. iKrrk, hope; St. iroXt, Nom. TroXt?, city; St.

ire 160, Nom. -TreiO-L, persuasion; St. laoTrjr, Nom.

la-orTf]'^, equality.

§ 139. c) Neuter are the Stems m fiar (Nom. ytta),

<the substantive SdJ^ffiseiiii^Wdfeoifem. 0? or a?, those in

t or V which append no ? in the Nominative, and those

50 CONSONAKT DECLENSION. §140,

in p preceded by a short Towel in the Nom. : St. cr <b /^ a t,

Nom. a-Mfia, hody ; St. êvey, Nom. YeVo?, genus; St.

and Nom. '^r]pa<;, age; St. and Nom. aivanri, mustard;

St. and Nom. aa-rv, city ; St. and Nom. rjrop, heart.

§ 140. The following words must be noticed separately

:

r) râdTTip (St. <yaa-Tep), belly; 6 irov'i (St. ir oh), foot;

f] yelp (St. %6tp), hand; to oS? (St. wt), ear; 6 "Trrj^vi;

(St. -jTrixv), forearm; r) ^prjv (St. <f>p6v), diaphragm,

mind; 6 TreXeû? (St. ireXeKv), axe; 6 ônrpvi (St.

ôrpv), lunch of grapes ; 6 aTa^v^ (St. crraû), ear

of com; 6 a-cfy^^ (St. a-<f>r]K), wasp; 6 /jlv'; (St. /ti/?),

mouse [jwMs] ; o tp(;î5s (St. ixSv), fish ; 6 arfp (St. ae/j),

air ; to ttO/j (St. 'Kvp),fire; to vSaip (St. vBut), water.

Of two genders (common) are several names of animals, as : 6 and

17 aXeKTpvau (St. dXe/crpuoj'), cooA and Aera; d and ^ &, or

(TVS (St. ii or o-u), swine [susj; 5 and ^ at| (St. aiy), jroai;

6 and fj /3o{)s (Stem ôv),ox; and many names of persons

:

d and f) nais (St. n-atS), 5oy and j'lVZ; 6 and ^ baljuov (St.

baifiov), god and goddess ; 6 and ^ jxavrts, prophet and prophetess.

§ 141. The endings of the consonant declension are

the following

:

§ 143, CONSONANT DECLENSION. 51

§ 142. The accent in the Second Principal Declen-

sion deviates from the rales laid down in § 107 in

the following point :

—

Words of one syllable accentuate the Gfen. and I>af.

of all numbers on the case-ending (circumflex if the

vowel be long, § 109) : ttoS-o?, ttoS-i (but ttoB-o), irohoiv,

iroSSiv, TToai.

Exceptions.—1. Participles, as : &v, heing, oyros ; /3as, going,

fidvTos—accentuate the Genitive and Dative of all numbers on

the last syllable but one.

2. TrSr, omnis, has jravros, iravri, but ttclvtoiv, 7ra<n(y).

3. The words Trais, io!/ ; hjiiis, slave ; Bias, jachall ; Tpds, Trojan

;

TO <j>S)s, light; ij (j>^s, ilister ; ij 85s, torch; to ovs, ear; 6 arjs,

moth; are paroxytones in Gen. PI. and Dual : jraiS-av, SiJ-d-av,

6(i-av, Tpii-(op, (jidr-av, (j)ci&-(ov, 698-coc, coT-oiv, (ri-av (Com-pare further §§ 177, 9).

4. The words which have become monosyllables by contraction

;

§p = cap, spring (ver), rjpos, rjpi,

§ 142 6. In regard to the quantity it must be observed that

several monosyllables, in spite of the short Stem-vowel, are

lengthened: St. no 8, Nom. Sing, nov-s, foot; St. iravr, Nom.Sing. Neut. nav, everything; St. trvp, Nom. Sing. Trip, fire;

St. a-v, Nom. Sing. <rBr, loar

§ 143. The Stems of the Second Principal Declension

are divided into three Classes with different sub"

divisions

:

I. Consonant Stems.

1. Guttural and Labial Stems.

2. Dental Stems.

3. Liquid Stems.

n. Vowel Stems.

1. Soft-vowel Stems.

2. Diphthong Stems.

3. o Stems.

Ill Elided Stems.

1. 9 Stems.

2. T Stems.

3. Bi^iemSoy Microsoft®

52 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 5 144

I. Consonant Stems.

§ 144. 1. Guttural and Labial Stems,

i. e. Stems in k, %, 7, ir, (p, ^.

Examples.

§t47. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 53

§ 146. 2. Dental Stems, i. e. Steins ia t, 6, S, v.

Exam.Stems.

54 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 1*^-

sigma the consonants t, B, 0, when they stand alone,

disappear altogether (§ 49) : Xa/47raS-9, Xa/J-'rra.-^,

Kopv6-<;, Kopv-^, Mmet; but v and vt have the short

vowels of the Stem lengthened by way of compen-

sation (§ 42), so that d, tj V, become d, I, v; but e

becomes e i, and o, ov: Travr-?, 7ra-?, everi/ ; ei*-?, el-?,

owe/ 6BovT-<i, oSov-^, tooth.

Exceptions.—The monosyllaHc Stem ttoS [jped] (§ 142, b) has

the vowel lengthened exceptionally, irov-s [Lat. ^e-s, i. e. ^ec^s]

;

SajxapT has Nom. Sing. ^ Safiap, spouse, for daiiaps, because

of its harshness.

2. M'fAoMf Sigma being affixed to the Stem; but

in its stead the Stem-vowel, in case it is short, is

lengthened, so that by this lengthening (§ 42, Obs.) e be-

comes 7}, and o becomes a>: St. Troi/iei', Nom. Troifitjv,

shepherd; St. riyefiov, Nom. Tjyeficov. If the Stem-

vowel is long of itself, the Nom. Sing, is like the Stem

:

o ar/c6v, contest.

The T of the Stems in vr in this formation is

rejected according to § 67: yepovr, Nom. ^yeprnv (for

<yepaivT). The simple t of the Participial Stems in oris changed into ?: St. XeXvKor, Nom. Sing. XeXvKco?

(for XeXvKaT), having loosened.

Ohs. 1. The vowel a> shows that s is not a mere affix in XfXuKtir,

one who lias loosened. Comp. x°P'-s', favour, St. x^P""-

05s. 2. The Stems in 6, 5, as well as those in avr, evr, always

form the Nom. Sing, with sigma ; but Stems of substantives in

ovT and the Stems in v generally without y.

§ 147 b. The Neuter has the pure Stem in the Nom.Ace. and Voc. Sing. (§ 136), as far as the laws of sound

in regard to final consonants (§ 67) admit it : Xv66v(t),

loosened (see § 187), \eXvK6<i (for XeXuKor); yaXa,

milk, from the Stem jdXaKr (Gen. YaXa/cr-o? = Lat.

lact-is). On m-av (Stem Travr), see § 142 b.

Obs.—On the Aco. Sing, in v, belonging to some Stems in it, id,

iS, vd, v8, see § 156.

§ 149. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 55

§ 148. The Vocative of masculines and feminines

sometimes has the pure Stem, as far as is possible:

"Apre/ii (St. 'ApT6/itS), Alav (St. Alavr), yepov (St.

yepovr); sometimes it is like the Nom. (necessarily

so when the accent is on the last syllable) : •^ye/imv :

and in all participles even when the accent is not onthe last syllable: Xeycav (St. Xeyovr), speaking.

The Voc. m-al, boy, from the St. TraiS, is specially

to be observed.

Ohs.—The Stems 'ATrAXttH/, Iloa-etSSv, whicli are like the Nom.,shorten the Towel and draw back the accent in the Voca-tive : "AjtoXXoj', HocreiSov. The accent is also drawn back in

many componnd words : 'Aya/iE/o<o»', 'Apia-ToyeiTov (§ 85).

§ 149. The formation of the Dat. PI. results from the

laws of sound (§§ 49, 50). t, 8, 6 and simple v, are

dropped before crt,(v) without leaving any trace; but

VT is dropped with the previous vowel lengthened byway of compensation.

Exception.—The adjectives (not participles) in evr admit no

lengthening of the vo*el by way of compensation : St. ii^apteiT

(Nom. Sing. xap'"f> graceful, Dat. PI. xa/"'f<''(•')• See In-

flexion, § 187).

§ 148. Dialects.—The Vocative of the Stem di/a/cT (Nom. Sing.

«Va|, ruler) is in Hom. ava (shortened from a k a k t : comp. the neuter

yaXa, § 14-7 5) ; some Stems in vt lose the v in the Voc. : "ArXo for

"ATXavQr).

§ 149. Dialects.—Homer forms the Dat. PI. 7roa-a-i(v) instead of

7roS-cri(i'), Att. iro<riv (irovsj/oot) ; the 8 being assimilated instead

of being rejected.

56 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 150i

§150.

Sl54. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 51

ya a- rep, Arj/jLrjrep (Noms. iraTrjp, father ; liryrrip,

mother; dvyaTrip, daughter; yaaTifjp, belly ; Arj/j.'^T'ripy,

reject e in the Gen. and Dat. Sing. (§ 61, c.) Thefirst four throw the accent on the case-ending ; the last

draws it back (Trarpo?, Aj^/iijr/aos). The e is accented

where it appears : firjTepa, in spite of fiijrrjp, except in

the Voc, where the accent is drawn back: iraTep, in

spite of Trartip, but Ace. Sing. A-^firjrpa. In the Dat..

PI. the syllable rep becomes by metathesis (§ 59) rpa:fi7jTpd-a-i(y).

Obs.—The Stem ao-Tep (Nom. Sing, da-rrjp, star) telongs to these

words only in the formation of the Dat. PI. : da-Tpa.(ri(v). For

dv^p (St. dpep), see, under the irregular words, § 177. 1.

II. Vowel Stems.

§ 154. 1. Soft-Vowel Stems, i. e. Stems in t, and v.

Exam.

58 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 155,

§ 155. The Norn. Sing. Masc. and Fem. is always

formed by Sigma. The Neuter Sing, as well as the

Vocative Sing, of all genders has the pure Stem. Yet

sometimes the Norn, form is used for the Vocative, and

this is the case in all monosyllables. In the Ace. Sing.

Masc. and Fem. v is affixed to the Stem.

On the lengthening of monosyllabic Stems, § 142 b.

But this lengthening takes place also in the Nom. and

Ace. Sing, of some polysyllabic words.

§ 156. Barytones in vr, tZ, lO, uS, vd (Nom. 19, 119),

form the Ace. Sing, generally by affixing v after

rejecting the Stem-consonant: St. epoh (Nom. epi-'i,

strife), Ace. epi-v; St. KopvO (Nom. Kopv-';, helmet),

Ace. Kopv-v ; ^i. opvld (Nom. opvl-';, bird), Ace. opvl-v.

The Oxytones, on the contrary, always have a: e^.7^^-9,

hope, Ace. eXTriSa; /cXet'?, key, stands alone; St. KXeiS,

Ace. likelv, (seldom KkelB-a,) Ace. PI. /cXet? or KkeiSa's.

s, hopeExamples.

§158. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 59

Dual and PI. Before the ending of the Gen. Sing, this «

remains unchanged ; in the Stems, however, in t, and in

some substantive Stems in v, e is followed by cos

(instead of o?), called the Attie termination, which does

not prevent the accent from being on the antepenult :

7ro\e-t09, •7re\€K£-eo'; (Tre\eKV-<;, axe).

In the Dat. Sing, ei is contracted into et, in the

Nom. PI. 66? and Ace. 6a? into et?, and ea of neuter

substantives into rj. Adjectives maintain the uncon-

tracted form ea : aarrj, but ykvKea.

§ 158. The contraction of 6 6 to i? in the Nom. Ace. andVoc. Dual is rare. The Gen. PI. of Stems in i follows

the accent of the Gen. Sing. : Troke-cov like TroXe-to?.

Most substantive Stems in v leave this vowel un-

changed; but others like aaTv follow the analogy of

Stems in t, and change v into e. ve are sometimes

contracted into v in the Nom. Ace. and Voc. Dual ; in

the Ace. PI. also we find t%^t)?, with lyQv-a'^ {I'Ôi-^;,

fisK), and 6(f)pv^, Ace. PI. of ofpv-';, eyehrow.

eyxêXv--;, eel, retains v in the Sing. : Gen. e^êXu-o?

:

but changes it in the Dual and PL into e : Nom. PI.

€7^^Xei?.

The adjective ffi|Oi-?, acquainted with, St. Ihpi,, keeps

its I imchanged through all the cases.

§ 158. Dialects.—The Dat. Ixdv'i is in Horn, coatracted into IxBvl.

In the Dat. PI. o-is sometimes doubled : viKv-aai^v) with yEKu-c(7crt(i')

{vUv-s, corpse)

60 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 3E&.

§ 159. 2. BipTaJiong Stems, i. e. Stems in ev, av, ov.

Exam.

S 162. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 61

Some compounds of ttov-?, foot, form the Ace. Sing,like Stems in ov: Tpi-jrov^, three-footed, Ace. rplirovv.

For vav-<;, see among the iiTegular words, § 177, 11.

§ 161. The stems in ei^ moreover have in the

a) Gen. Sing., ax; for 09. Comp. § 157.b) Dat. Sing., ei always contracted for el.

c) Ace. Sing, and PI., a is long and not contracted.

d) Nom. and Voc. PL, ee? contracted by older Attic

writers into 17?, by the later into et?.

e) Words which have a vowel before ev may be con-

tracted also in the Gen. and Ace. Sing., and in the Ace.

PI.: St. TLeipatev, Nom. Ueipaiev-^, port of Athens,

Gen. Ueipaio)';, Ace. Ueipatd;

%oei/-9, measure. Ace. PLXod'i.

Obs.—The Gen. in -ems has arisen by transmutation of quantity

(§ 37, D. 2) out of the Horn. rjos. Hence the length of the

final syllable. In the same manner the Ace. Sing, ed has

arisen out of rja : still ea is also found, like eas in the Ace. PI.

;

€as is contracted by later writers into eir.

§ 162. 3. O Stems, i. e. Stems in o and a.

Examples.Stems.

62 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 163.


!j rjxoi (St. Tjxo), echo

KaXvyjro), Ajjra, Sfia-s (St. fi/ito) slave

jx.r]Tpa>-s (St. firjTpa), avunculus.

§ 163. The Stems in o, all feminine, form the N"om.

Sing, without sigma, except the Stem ai8o, Nom. Sing.,

alSco-i, shame, Ace. aiSS). The Ace. which is like the

Nom. is oxytone (contrary to § 87) : TreiOw, not •n-eiOos.

The Vocative ends in ot; all other cases are con-

tracted. The Ace. of Stems in tu usually remains un-

contracted. The Stem ka, 'Earn. ^ ew-?, dawn, has

Gen. Sing, ew, Dat. ea (according to § 132), Ace. eo>

(from etoa).

Obs.—Several Stems in ov follow the atove declension in some of

their forms : dridav, nightingale, Gen. drjSovs, with aijSocos ;

eUmv, image, Gen. ehovs (oomp. § 171).

tives also in eor and €vs ('OSytrevs), Datives in eV, et, and Accu-satives in ea, 7; : TtiS^.

The New-Ionic dial, leaves e frequently uncontracted : j3ao-iXe'-Es.

§ 163. Dialects.—Horn, contracts TJpa'L into ^pa, Mlvaa into

MiVo). The old and poetic form for em-y is ^m-s (St. ^0), declinedlike albi>-s. Some proper names in a in the Nom. Sing, have in theNew-Ionio dial, an Ace. in ovv : tuijToiv, 'low.


§165. CONSONANT DECLENSCON. 63

III. Elided Stems, i. e. Stems which reject the final

consonant in certain forms.

§ 164. 1. 2 Stems, i. e. Stems which elide sigma.

Exam.Stems.

M CONSONANT DECLENSION, § 168.

into o in the Nom. Ace. and Yoc. Sing.: St. yeve';,

^h)o<;. Neuter adjectives leave e unchanged: eiiyevh.

Masculines and Femiuines form the Nom. Sing, by

lengthening e? into i?? (§ 147, 2), as s cannot be affixed

:

evyev^'i from evjeve^, like •rroi/i'^v from Trotyu.ei'.

Masculines and Femiuines have the pure Stem in the

Voc. Sing., and in compound vrords which are not oxy-

tone in Nom. Sing, the accent is on the last syllable

but two (comp. §§ 148, 85): Nom. ^(OKparTj^, Voc.

XcoKpaTe<; ; Nom. Arj/jLoadevrj';, Voc. Ar/fioa-Oepe';.

Ohs.—The Neuter aXrjdis (Maso. aKrjdris, true) draws back the

accent in interrogations : SXrjBes, really ?

§ 166. In all other forms ? is rejected (§§ 61 and 49)

:

îve-i for yevea-i, \^gener-i\. Wherever two vowels meetthey are contracted : ee in the Nom. Ace. and Voc. Dualbecome rj; ea generally rj, but when another vowelstands before e they sometimes become d, according to

§41: St. ivSee^, Nom. eVSe???, defective. Ace. eVSea;

St. vyie<;, Nom. v^wj?, healthy, Ace. vyM, but also

vyifi; St. %/3 6 6 9, Nom. to xPô<;, debt, Neut. PL xped.The adjectives in -(f>vrivd.

05s.—Barytone adjectives have the accent in the Gen. PI. on thelast syllable but one, contrary to § 87 : avrapKav (Nom. airdtiais,self-sufficient). So also rptripris, trireme, used as a substantive,Gen. PL rpcripiDv.

§ 167. Proper names in -kXey/s compounded with xXcoy, glory(St. /cXeer), have a double contraction in the Dat. Sing., and asingle one in all the other cases : Nom. (nepiKXe^f) nJpiK^s,Gen. (nepiKX«o9)nepifcXe'o.;r,Dat. (nfptKXcei, UepucXeî) UepL-(cXel, Acc. (nepilcXeea) nepmXed, Voc. (n^piKXees) Hcpi'^Xf ty.

§ 166. Dialects.—A vowel before c is often contracted with it inHorn.

:o-n-eosor a-m'ios, cave, Gen. aTrdovs, Dat. o-Trij-t (from a-Treei)

I)at. PL o-Trêo-o-^./) and o-jreVo-^j/) ; ^kXc^s:, glorious, Acc. eiiKXelcil<trom cvKXeeas), but o/cXtêT? (from okXe^s, inglorious). Herod.VSee'ey (eVBc^s:, defective), dv0pm7ro4>via, (dvepmTrocjyv^s, human)

§ 167. Dialects^The Epic dial, forms 'Hpa^fj,, 'UripaKXij-o,,HpaKX,,-L, HpaKXr,-a; the New-Ionic, 'UpaKXi,,,, Hpa^Xe-osHpaicXc-1, HpaxXf-a.

169. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 65

§ 168. 2, T Stems, i. e. Stems which elide r.

Examples.Stems.

66 CONSONAIJT DECLENSION. § 170.

§ 170. 3. N Stems, i. e. Stems which elide v.

Example.Stem.


§ 172. Synopsis of terminations ia the Second Prin-

cipal Declension.

Nom.

68 CONSONANT DECLENSION. §172

Nom.


Njm.

70 IREEGTJLAEITIES IN DECLENSION. § 174.

The principal differences in the endings are

:

1. In the Gen. Sing., where the Second Principal

Declension always has o ? (u)?).

2. In the Norn. PL, where Masc. and Fern, of the

Second Principal Declension always have e?.

Irregularities in Declension.

§ 174. The mixing of two Stems which may have omNom. is called Heteroclising (eTepoKXoala, different in-

flexion) : Nom. aK6To<;, darkness, Gen. aKotov (O-Declen-

sion), and ctkotov; (Second Principal Declension) ; Xa/yom,

hare, according to the Attic declension, but Ace. Xar/o).

An important irregularity of this kind occurs with

proper names in t;?: XwKpaTTj'; (St. 'Z(oicpare<;), but

Ace. Xa>KpdT7;v (as if from Stem XooKpara of the A-Decleusion) with ScoKparr;. But those in -xXij? (§ 167)

follow the Second Principal Declension exclusively.

§ 175. The formation of some cases from a Stemwhich cannot be that of the Nom. is called Metaplasm

(jieTaTrKacrix6<;, change offormation) : Nom. Sing, to hev-

Spov, tree, Dat. PI. BevBp€(Ti(v), as if from St. BevSpe<;;

Nom. Sing, rb SaKpvov, tear, Dat. PI. SdKpvcn(v), from

St. SaKpv (poet. Nom. BaKpv) ; to 'rrvp,jire, PI. to, irvpd,

Dat. Tot? irvpol^ (0-Declension) ; Nom. Sing, ovetpo-^,

dream, Gen. ovelparo^, Nom. PI. ovelpara.

§ 176. A peculiar irregularity appears in several

§ 174. Dialects.—Several Masc. Stems in a, Nom. ?j s in Herod.,have ea for rjv in the Ace. Sing.: Seo-Tronj-y, master, Sea-irorea.

6 oxo-s, carriage, in Hom. has PI. rh o'^ra, '6xe(T(t>i(v), from theSt. ox^s- OiSiVoM has poet-fonus from a St. OiSiiroSa, Gen.Sing. Oldi7r6Sao, trag. OiSwrdSa. Hom. Sapm/8a>i/, Stems ^apwriSovand 2apTTTitovT. Mivms, Ace. Sing. Mivaa (§ 163), and Mivav.

§ 175. Dialects.—Hom. metaplasms are : Dat. PI. ai/8pa7rd8e<r(ri(i'),

Nom. Sing. dvlSpdmSov, slave ; Nom. Aco. PI. Kpoa-aTrara, Nom. Sing.n-poVmTTOv, countenance ; SeV/iara, bonds, Sing. 6 Sicriios ; epirjpoZ,confidential, Nom. PI. iplr,p(s; oKk^, strength, Dat. Sing. oKk-i;ia-pivri battle, va-pXvi ; Ix^p, divine blood, Aco. Sing. lxS>.

§ 177. IREEGULAEITIES IN DECLENSION. 71

Neuter Stems in apT,as <j)peapT. They reject t in theNorn. Ace. and Voc. Sing,, and p in the other cases : to^peap, well, Gen. j>peaTo<s (also ^priTo^) ; to rj-n-ap, liver,

Gren. rjiraTO'i ; TO aXeiâp and aXeicfid, salve, Gen. aXei-

(f>a.TO<;.

To these correspond the Stems crKa(p)T and w 8a (jo) t :

Nom. a-Kcop, dirt. Gen. a-icaT6<; ; vhwp, Gen. vBaro^.

§ 177. Special irregularities in alphabetical order

:

1. avi^p, man, (comp. § 153) rejects e of the St. avep,and inserts 8 in its place (§ 51, Obs. 2) : w-S-p-o?, avSpi,

dvBpa; Voc. aiêp; Dual, dvBpe, avSpoh; PI. dvBpe<;,

avSp&v, avhpcUniy), dvBpas.

2. "Aprjs (the god Ares) : St. 'Ape?, Gen. "Apeoy; and"Ajoeo?, Acc."Apr}v, together with "Ap?; ; Voc. regul."A/3e?.

3. d/3z/, without Nom. : Gen. rov and t^? apv-o'i, of

the lamb, apvi, dpva ; Dat. PL apvaaiiy).

4. TO <^6vv, hnee {genu), Nom. Ace. Voc. All the

rest from St. yozâr, Gen. yovaTo^.

5. rj 'yvvrj. Woman. All the rest from St. <yvvaiK-,

Gen. yvvaiKO';, Dat. yvvatKo, Ace. yvvuLKa, Voc. yvvai ;

Dual yvvaiKe, yvvaiKolv ; PI. yvvalK-ev -wv -^t(v) -a?.

6. TO So pv, wood, spear : St. Sop a t (comp. 4). Gen.

SopaTo^, poet. So /DO 9, Dat. Sopt and Sojoet.

7. Zev9 (Âe ^0^ Zeus), Gen. Ato?, Dat. Atif; Ace.

At'a, Voc. Zet).

8. o and r/ Kvav, dog, with Voc. kvov from St. kvov.

All the rest from /ci>z/ : Gen. kvvo^, Dat. a;w4 Acc. Kvva;

PL Kvve^, KvvMv, /cvai(v), Kvva<;.

9. o A,a-9, s^cme, from Hom. Xaa-9, Gen. Xa-o?, Dat.

§ 177. Dialects.—The following forms are peculiar to dialects :

—

1. dvrjp, poet, 'avep-os, 'avep-i, 'avep-a ; Dat. PI. av8pfrT<n(^v').

2. "Aprjs, Hom. 'Apijos, "Apirfi, "Aprja.

4. yoTO, Ion. and poet, yovvdr-os, yovvar-a, yoxivacri^v) ; Ep.

Gen. Sing, yovvos, H. yovva, yovvav, youi'-co-crt(v).

6. dopv, - Soiparos, Bp. 8ovp6s, Sovpi, Sovpe, Sovpa, Sovpiou,

8avpe<riTL(v).

7. Zeuy, poet. St. Ziji/ : Zr)v-6s, Zrjv-i, Zfjv-n (also Z^v from Zij).

72 lEEEGULAEITIES IN DECLENSION. § 177

\,a-l, Acc. Xaa-v, Xav, PI. Xa-e?, Xd-cov, \a-e(T(n{v) or

'Ka-eai{y), Xa-a^.

10. d /J, dp TV-';, witness, witli Dat. PI. /j,dpTva-i(v),

from the St. /ia/srv. The rest from the St, /jLuprvp:

p,dpTvpo<;, fidprvpt, &c.

11. T} vav-<;, ship, ve-w's, vr)-t, vaii-V, PI. z^-e?, ve-cov,

vav-<jl(v), vav^. Comp. § 159.

Ohs.—The Nom. Acc. Sing, and Dat. Aco. PI. rest on the St. vuv.

Before vowels vav becomes (according to § 35, D. 2) vtjF, vt),

ve-m is for vrj-os (§ 37, D. 2).

12. d and rj opv%-<;, bird, St. opvid and o/az/i : opvlO-o';,

opvWi, opvlOa and o/swi' ; PI. 6pvlde<; and opvei^, opvecov.

13. TO o5?, ear. All the rest from St. (ut: tord?,

wTi; PI. (Sra, wrwy, Q}-a-i(v). (On the accent, § 142, 3.)

14. 57 Hvv^ (the Pnyx), St. ivvkv, Hvkv-o^, ILvKv-i,

TLvKv-d.

15. d "Trpea^v-^, the aged, has in the G-en. and Dat.

Sing., and throughout the PL its forms from irpecr^vTa

(Nom. Sing, •wpea^vrrj';) ; irpiaêi'i, Trpicrêcov, irpe-

<Tê(n{y) signifies ambassadors, to which the Sing, is

TrpecrêvT'q';.

16. Tav. Only Voc. w rdv or w rdv, friend or friends,

a defective Stem.

17. d utd?, son, St. yto, vt, utev, Gen. vteo?, D. i/tet,

Acc. viea (rare), PL i^tet?, utewi;, vieaL{v), vlei<;. But also

regular! V viov, &c.

18. 57 ;;êtp, hand, St. %6tp, Dual %e/3oti/, Dat. PLXep<Tl(y)-

Dialects.—11. vaii-s, from St. vj/d, lon.i^jC-s, Horn. Aco. Sing,i/^-a, Dat. PI vrii(Ta-i(v), vr)V(rl(y), Aoo. vr/as.

from St. i/eu, Ion. ve-dj, vf-f, vt-a, ve'-ef, i/f-Sj,, ve-ea-cri, ve-as.from St. Kou, Dor. m-os, va-i (navi), vS-e(Tcn{v).

13. ovs, Ion. ouas, ouar-os; PL ovar-a, Dor. Sy, mr-dy.

17. vl6-s, Bp. Gen. uf-os, vl-t, vT-a, vl-es, vt-da-t(v), vl-as.

18.^ xeip, poet, and New-Ion. x^p-of, x^p-', Ep. Dat. PI. xe'p-ecr.or \etp-€(ra-i(v').

To these add the words which are anomalous only in dialects :

19. Hom. 'AfS;,-9 (Att. "AiS^f), St. 'Al-S, Gen. "AVS-oj, 'aVS-i.also 'Ai'SfflveiJ-f, with regul. inflexion, according to § 159.

§ 178. CASE-LIKE TERMINATIONS. 73

Case-like Terminations.

§ 178. Besides the case-endings, there occur certainsuffixes or appendages, which in meaning very nearlyresemble case-endings. To these belong

:

1. -61, answering to the question where: aXko-6t,

elsewhere ;

2. -dev, „ to the question whence: oUo-Oev,

from home

;

3.-^6, „ to ih.e qaesiion whither : o'Ua-he,

homewards.

Dialects.—20. o epmy, love, Stems eptuT and ipo, poet. Aco. Epo-i/.

21. dijus, justice, St. 5e/it and Befuar, PI. dejiia-T-es, Senurr-as.22. TO Kapa, head,B.OTa. St. Kap-qr, Kapr/aT, Kpdar, Kpar, Rap.Horn. Nom. Sing. xapj;.

Oen. „ KiipriT-os, Kapfjar-os, Kpdaros, Kpdros.

Dat. „ KaprjT-i, Kaprjar-i, Kpdar-i, Kpar-i (trag. Kapa).

Ace. ,, Kapn], rhv Kpar-a, t6 Kap.

Nam. PI. Kapa, Kaprjar-a, KpSar-a, secondary form Kaprjva.

Oen. „ Kpdrav, Kaprjvav.

Dat. „ Kpdal(y).

Ace. „ = Nom. (also roiis Kpar-as).

23. fj pda-Ti^, whip, Hom. Dat. pdcrn, Ace. p-aari-v.

24. 6 p-us, month. Ion. = Att. priv.

25. ia-a-e, eyes. Nom. Aco. Dual, Neut. in Hom. The trag.

have Gen. PI. ocra-av, Dat. oa-a-ois or o(ro-oi(Tt(i').

§ 178. Dialects.—The three local suflSxes are very frequent in

Hom. : otKodi., at home ; 'iXwdi irpo, infront of Ilios ; ovpav66ev,from

heaven; ayoprjQ^v, from the assembly. 6ev also supplies the place

of the Gen.-ending : koto Kprjdeu, downfrom the head, entirely ; i^

SK66ev, out of the sea. -Se is generally affixed to the Ace. : oucovSe,

Iwmewards ; KKuririvSe, into the tent ; 7r6\ivSe, into the city ; (jioôvSe,

into /light. 0ijyaSe, into flight, and epa^t, to the earth, are peculiar.

A suffix peculiar to the Som. language is (j)i,(v); it is added to

the Stem of nouns, and supplies the place of the Gen. or Dat. ter-

mination in both Sing, and PI., as

:

1. A- decl. : piri-4>i,ivithforce; (cXicriij-iî, in the tent; djro pevp^-

<lM/,from the low-string.

2. 0-decl.: 6e6-(j>iv, from the gods ; 'lKw-(j)iv, from Hios.

3; Oons.-deel. : KoTvXrjSov-o-îv, with the suckers (on the feelers

of the polypus) ; air Sxe(r-(l>i(y), from the carriage ; vapa vav-(f)i,(v),

alongside the ships; cmo KpdTea--<j>iv,from the head. (§§ 177, D. 22.)

74 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. § 179.

These suffixes are joined to the Stem of the noun

:

"KdrivqGev, from Atliens, (with Ion. r)) ; icvKKodev, from

the circle, (/ci/zcXo-?). Sometimes o comes in place of the

A.-sound : piôdev (radicitus) from piâ {radix) ; it also

serves as a connecting vowel with consonant-stems : iravr-

o-6ev, from all sides. The o is sometimes accented,

contrary to § 107, a : Kv/cX-o-Oev, MapaOav-o-dev, from

Marathon. The enclitic suffix Se (§ 92, 5) is often also

combined with the Ace. form : Meryapa-Se, to Megara

;

'EXei/o-w-o-Se, to Eleusis. o'U-a-he, home, from Stem

oIko, is irregular.

For 8e we find ere, fe, with the same meaning:

dXXoae, elsewhither ; ^KOrivaê, to Athens ; @i]âê, to

Theles ; 6vpaê (foras).

§ 179. Moreover, a few words have an old Locative in

I for the Sing., and a-i(v) (without a preceding i) for the

Plur., answering the question where: o'Uoi, at home;

Tivdol, at Pytho ; 'IctO/jloX, on the Isthmus ; Â9'^vr](n(v),

in Athens ; MXaraiacniy), in Plataea ; dvpdai(v), at the

door, (foris) ; &pdcri,(y), at the right time.

Chap. YII.—Othek Inflexions of the Adjective.

A.

—

Inflexion according to Genders.

Adjectives of the Yowel Declension.

§ 180. The most numerous class of adjectives is that

which in the Masc. and Neut. follows the 0-Declension,

and in the Fem. the A-Declension ; which, consequently,

has in the Nom. Sing. 09, rj (or a), ov [Lat. us, a, uml.

§ 180. Dialects.—The lonians have frequently here also r) for

Att, a : alaxpn.


§182. INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 75

Sing.

76 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. § 183.

endings, the Masc. being used for the Fern. : Masc. and

Fern. r)(Tvxo<;, Neut. rjo-vxov, quiet. Compound adjec

fives especially are all of only two endings : dre/cvo';, child-

less ; KapTro(f>6po<;, fruitful.

§ 183. Adjectives ending in eo? and oo? in the Norn.

Masc, are generally contracted (§ 130) : xpv(Teo<;, golden,

and atrXoos, simple, are thus contracted

:

Sing.

§185. INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 77

the Attic 0-Declension (§ 132): "Xem?, ISTeut. "Xewv,

gracious; a^ioxpeajf, Neut. -av, considerable; TrXeeo?,

irXid, wXemv, full, o-fi? (from a-do^, salvus) lias in theNorn. Sing. Pern, and Neut. PI. a-a; but also the forms(70)09, (TQjd, PI. (7W0t, CTOJai.

Adjectives op the Consonant Declension.

§ 185. Other adjectives in the Masc. and Neut. foUowthe Consonant Declension, and form from the Stem apeculiar Fern, with the ending ta, which, however,

undergoes various changes in combination with the Stem.Such adjective-stems of three terminations are

:

1. Stems in v (Masc. and Neut., § 154). The Fern, is

formed from the Stem as it appears in the Gen. (^ 8 e)

;

6 and la are contracted, and the accent remains on the

last syllable of the Stem : hence

78 INFLEXIONS OP ADJECTIVES. §186,


•yKvKvs, sweet ^paxvs, short evpvs, broad.

PpaSvs, slow Taxis, swift

Obs.—drjXvs, female, differing also in accent, occurs as a Feminine.

§ 186. 2. Stems in v. The i in la is transferred

to the preceding syllable (§55): St. /j-eXav, Nom.Masc. /ieXa?, Fem. /j^eKaiva (from fieXav-ia), Neut.

fjLekav, black.

Singular.

§ 187. INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 79

80 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. §188

Obs.—The form of the Pern, is explained from t before i becoming

a, according to § 60, i being dropped after o-, and v before <t being

thrown out and compensated for by a lengthening of the vowel :

77avTia^ Travaca, Travaa, nafra ; XvovTca, Xuovcrta, Xvovcra, \vov(ra,

§ 188. 4. Stems in or. The participles of the Per-

fect Active in OT (Nom. Sing. Masc. &>?, Neut. o?)

have via in the Fern. : XeXvKoi^, \e\,vKvca, XeXvKo?,

one who has freed. See §§ 146, 147.

Singular.

§ 191. INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 81

Other Examples for DeclenBion.

y.vr)jui,v, mindful of cViXV/""''. forgetful ofTroKvirpdyjMav, much occupied

3. Isolated forms, as

:

tS/Jts i'dpi, acquainted with Gen. l'8pi-os

(Inflexion according to § 157 D.)appr)V (apa-rjv) appev, male Gen. appev-os

Compounds of substantives, suoli as dwdTmp, Neut. ajvarop,

St. .jrarep (Nom. iraTrjp) fatherless; bva-prjTmp, iifiTr]p, un-motherly ; (piKojroXis, -i, Gen. -ib-os, loving the city ; ev€Kms(Gen. eveKnih-os), hopeful.

§ 190. 4. Besides these there is a large number of

adjectives which have only one ending, because either

their meaning or form excludes a Neuter: apira^,

rapackms, St. a

p

it a<y; <^v^d'i, fugitive, St. (jjvyaS;

ar^vd)<i, unacquainted, St. a^vwr; aTrat?, childless, St.

a TTa t S; /xaicpoxeip, long-handed ; ttez^?, poor, St. tt e z/ 97 t ;

ryv/jivrji, light-armed, St. jv/mvtjt. Some adjectives of

one ending follow the A-Declension, and are almost

substantives, as : ideXovrri^, Gen. ideXovrov, voluntary/

;

they occur only in the Masc.

§ 191. The following adjectives are irregular : fiiyaf,

great; ttoTiv?, much, and irpao'i, gentle, the forms of

each being derived from different Stems, viz., in fj-eyai;,

§ 190. Dialects.—Horn, has also many adjectives in the Pern, only

'

KaWiyvvcuKa Aco. Sing, e.g., 'S.Traprqv, abounding in heautiful wom^n I

l3a>Tidvetpa, e. g. idia, men nourishing.

§ 191. Dialects.—In Horn, both Stems, n-oXu and ttoXXo, in

Masc. and Neut., are ahnost completely declined ; the Fem. is

regularly ttoXX^.

Sing. ^. TToXvs TTQvKvs or ttoXXos N. irokv irov\v ttoKKov

Q. jroXXoC or jtoXeos

D, TToJlX^

A.. TToKvV ITOVKVV TToXXdv I^. TToXv TTOvKv TToKKoV

Plur. N. TTokees (ttoXely) TroXXot ttoXXo

G, TToXXiai' or TTokiav

D. 7roXeto-(Ti(i') 7roX£(r<ri(i') n6\€<n(v) or noXXoIs

A. iTokeas jroKKois N. iroXXa

Herod, has scarcely any forms except from the Stem ttoXXo!

TTuWdpf aroXXot.

Digitized by Microsoft® (J

82 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. ; 192.

from the Stems fie^a and fieyaXo; in ttoXv?, from

TToXv and ttoXXo; in irpao'i, from Trpao and Trpai).

Sing.

§ 197. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 83

§ 193. The following points are to be observed

:

1. The Stems in o leave o unchanged only when the

preceding syllable is long (§ 74, &c.), but lengthen it

to CO when that is short : irovrjpo-Tepo';, worse ; wikoo-

rarov, most bitter ; a-o^d>-Tepo<;, wiser ; aîco-rdrT), most

worthy. Every syllable with a vowel followed by twoconsonants or a double consonant is here considered long

(§§ 76, 77).

§ 194. 2. The o is always rejected after at in the adjective

yepai6s, senex, sometimes in iraKaiSs, cmtiquus, and crxoXaios,

at leisure : yepalrepos, irdKairaTos.

§ 195. 3. The o or o is changed to at in fiecros, medius; uros,

like ; eiSStos, clear ; npmos, early ; S-îos, late : linrairaTos,

Trpcoiairepov. rjavxas, peaceful, has fjirvxai-Tepos, and fi<Tvxo>Tepos ;

cj)iKos, dear, besides (j)i\a>Tepos -raros, also (piXrepos -raros,

and <l)tKalTepos -raros ; irKrja-tairepos, TrXrjcrtaLTaros, belong to

irXrjtrlov, near, and napaTrXr/cnaiTepos, more like, to the same

;

irpovpyiairepos to Trpovpyov, from irpo cpyou, advantageously.

§ 196. 4. The endings eorepo-s, eo-TOTo-f, are inorganically

applied :

—

a) to Stems in ov : ira^povia-repos (St. (ra>(j)pov, Nom. o'oxjipav,

reasonable"), Ahaiixoviarepos (St. evSaifiov, Nom. evbalp,a>v,for-

tunate). TTLorepos -raros, fvoui'irlwVffat, and ireirairepos -raros,

from rvirrav, ripe, are exceptional.

6) to the Stems of anparos, immixed ; ippaiievos, strong ; atrfievos,

willing : oKparea-repos, eppaiievecrrepos. More seldom to others.

c) to some Stems in o o contracted : cvvovirrepos for evvoiarepos

from eiivovs, well-disposed.

§ 197. 5. ta-Tspos, ta-raras, occur with \dXos, talkative;

irraxos, heggarly ; oijfocl>dyos, epicure ; povo(j)dyos, eating alone,

and some adjectives of one ending, as kXctti)-s, thievish : XoKi-

(TTepos, TTraiXioraros, KKcrrriarepos.

Others of one gender in rj-s follow the rule of those in o : vfipurro-

Tfpos from v/S/Dio-njs, haughty.

§ 193. Dialects.—The quantity of the 0-sound in poets is rather

doubtful : Horn. oiCvpSraros, the most wretched.

Horn, has Wivrara, from Wis, straight; âavraros, from âcivos,

glittering ; dxapla-repos (for dxapir-repos, according to § 46), from

&Xai.<.s, graceless. ^.^.^.^^^ ^^ Microsoft®

84 COMPAEISON OF AJtJECTIVES. § 198.

The compounds of x<»P'S' grace, favour, form their Comparative

and Superlative as if they ended in xap'To-s ; imxapi^TutTepos,

§ 198. The second and rarer termination of the Com-

parative is lov (Nom. Masc. and Fern, icov, Neut lov);

of the Superlative, la-ro (Nom. tcrTO?, larrj, kttov). The

Stem-vowel is rejected before t. The accent is placed

as far as possible from the end in the Comp. and Superl.

Inflexion of the Comp., § 170. So is formed from :

Positive. Stem. Comparative. Superlative.

rj&vs, agreeable fihv i]&iav, -ov rjBia-Tos -rj -ov

Tavisj swift Tax'^ Oda'a-ayv 'OV tclxicttos -ri ~ov

(from raxiaiv, according to §§ 54, 57)

neyas, large fieya jxii^mv -ov fieyuTTos.

(from fieyicov, according to § 58)

Ohs.—The length of a in Baa-a-ov (comp. fiaXXov, § 202), and the

diphthong of jxeiâv, is explained from the t passing into the

preceding syllable, as in ajieivcov (comp. § 55).

Further with suppression of p

:

c'xflpd -s, hostile ixBiav -ov Superl. ex6i.(rTos.

ala-xpo -s, shameful al(Txi'OV -ov ,, a'tcrxioTos.

oiKrpo -s, pitiable „ o'iktiutos.

ix6p-6s and oUrp-os also have the forms in repo-s and toto-s.

§ 199. This comparison occurs also in connection

§ 198. Dialects.—The endings icov, kttos, are more frequent in

the poets: Horn. tpiXimv ((îXos, dear)

;ykvKiav (yXvKvs, sweet)

;

&Ki(rTos {wRvs, swift); ^ddia-ros (PaBvs, deep)

;^pd(raa>v = fipaxlav

(lipaxvs, short), Sup. poet. Ppdxia-Tos, Hom. Superl. ^dpSurns(PpaSiis, slow, § 59, D.) ; naa-a-wv = jraxiav (jvaxvs, thick)

; fiacro-mw

= p-dKimv (poKpos, long), Sup. pfiKurros (Dor. paKurros) ; Kvhlav(KvSpos,famous); peâv, New-Ion. for peiâv.

§ 199. Dialecta.—1. Hom. Comp. dpsiav. Positive Kparvs, Superl.KapntTTos

;Comp. Xatrepos ; New-Ion. Kpia-a-cov = KpsLinTav

;poet.

fiikrepos, êXraros, (peprepos, (ÊpraTor, or (fiepitrTos, more excellent,most excellent.

2. Hom. KaKwnpos; xepi/s, x^pf't"", x^P^ôr^pos, xftpoVfpor ; New-

Ion, eaaav = fja-a-av. (Comp. Kpea-amv, p^âv, § 198, Ohs.)4. Hom. vTr-oki^tov.

§ 199. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 85

with other peculiarities in the following adjectives,

where the changes of sound of §§ 55-58 are often applied

:

1. For the idea of good

:

Positive. Comparative. Superlative.

ayad6s

[St. a/i€vj dfielvcoVj afieivov

[St. apes] [apeiav, Horn.] apiaros, J), ov

[St. jSeXto] êKriaiv, PeXriov ^cKtuttos, r], ov

[St. KpaTv'\ Kpei(Tcra>v (^KpeiTTcov) Kpdn&ros, rj, ov

N. Kpclo'a'ov (/cpetTroy)

[St. X 0) u] 'Kattcov or \aatv Xaaros, 7], ov

N. X&'iov or "K&ov

Ohs.—afifivav and Spia-Tos rather express excellence, capacity

;

Kpeia-a-iov, Kpanaros, strength,, preponderance, (Lat. superior);

rjiTatav is opposed to Kpu(T(ra>v.

2. For the idea of lad:

Positive. Comparative. Superlative.

KaK6s KaKlCOV N, KCLKIOV KUKltTTOS

[St. x^p] x^^P""' (deterior) N. x^'P"" x^'P'o'''''^

[St. Tjnv] rja-aav (inferior) N. rjaa-ov N. PI. rJKia-Ta, least of all.

3. yuKphs, small, besides fiiKporfpos liiKporaros

jiflav, smaller N. pelov

4-. oXiyos, little oXiyia-Tos

[St. cXaû] ika(r<Tav^.eKdcrcov iKdîcTTOs

5. TToXis, much ttXei'iuv (nX-iav) wKe'iaros

N. irXiov (also Trkeiv)

6. KoKos, heautiful, as if from

KoXXos, leauty KoKKiav N. koXXiov koKKio-tos

7. paSios, easy

[St. pa] pîBV N. paov paa-Tos

8. aXyeivSs, pamfid, as if from

aXyos, pain dXyitov N. SXyiov aXyurros

Dialects,—5. Horn, contracts jrXeov to irXevv, jrXioves to rrXevves ;

Plur. also, irXees, nXias, jrXea.

7. Ion. prjtSios ; Horn, prjirepos, pri'iaros, prjiTaTos. Horn, forms

single degrees from substantives: Kvvrepos, more doggish (Kuav,

dog); plyiov, worse, piyos, cold, shudder.

Defectives : iveprepoi, also tragic veprepoi (inferi, for which

Positive cvepoi) ; Hom. irvpaTos and Xo~iar6os, Xo'ktBlos, last, vtrrcunos

= vaTaTos, Seiraros, in a like sense, n-pairitrTos=7rp5ros, the first.

86 ADVERBS FROM ADJECTIVES. § 2O0.

§ 200. Finally observe further the Defectives :

—

va-Tepos, later va-raTOS, ultimus

ctrxaros, extremus

(yios, new) vearos, novissimus

(ifffp, over) vjraros, summua

(npo, before) wporepos, prior npSrros, primus,

{mpav, on the other side) Trfpaircpos.

G.—Adverhs of Adjectives.

§ 201. Adverbs are derived from the adjective Stem

by affixLQg to it the syllable a> ?. The o of the Stem is

entirely dropped : ^/Xoy, adv. (piXax;. The Stems of the

Second Principal Declension have the same form as in

the Genitive : Ta'^vi, swift, Ta')(eaiî;, clear,

<raêa><;, contr. cra^cD? ; aoa^ptav, reasonable, (raxjjpovco';.

Contraction occurs only where the Genitive also has it.

The accent of the adverb is always the same as that

of the Genitive Plural of the corresponding adjective

:

\jrv'xp6<;, cold, \jnij(pS)<i ; hiKaio<;, just, SiKaio)^ ; Tra? (St.

iravt), TrdvTQ)';, every way.

The Neuter Accusative, both of the Singular and the

Plural, is moreover very often used as an adverb.

§ 202. An older adverbial form is that in a, as:

Ta')(a from Tayy<i, quick (meaning, in Att. prose, ip&r-

haps) ; a/x,a, at the same time ; fiaXa, very. The Comp. of

fj,aXa is fiaXkov {potius) = fiaXiov (§ 56) ; Sup. fioKiara(potissimum). ev, well, as an adverb to ar/a66<;, good,

stands alone.

§ 203. Adverbs in w ? are also formed from Compara-tives and Superlatives : êâioripm, more firmly ; koX-Xtw(B9, mare beautifully. But as a rule the comparative

§ 202. Dialects.—The adverbs in a are more numerous in Homer

:

&Ka, {guichhj, wkvs) ; \iya, aloud, Xtyis ; Kapra, strongly, very, toKparvs, comp. § 59, D., a-d(pa {clearly, crai^jjs).

Hom. has for ev or ii the adjective its or rivs, good.

§§ 203, 204. Dialects.—Hom. iKaaripa, iKaâra (from Uas,far)

;i(rtrov (= dyxiov), do-o-orepm (S.yxi, near), ayxta-ra ; New-Ion!

dyxordTw, dyxSrara. In addition to this there is the Hom. iir-acrarvrepoi, crovided, with u instead of o.

§205. PEESONAL PEONOUNS. 87

has the Neut. Ace. Sing., the superlative, the Neut. AceFl. as an adverb : êâiorepov, koXXiov

; êâiorara,

KciXkiaTa.

§ 204. Adverbs in a, like ava>, above ; Kara, helow ; ea-a, inside

;

Eô), outside, have no s in Comp. and Superl. : avaTcpa,

KaTmrepa, likewise antoTepai, fwrther (from cmS) ; iyyvripa

(or iyyvTspov), eyyvrdTio (or eyyvraTo), from iyyis, nea/r, and

some others.

Chap. VIII.

—

Inflexion of Peonouns.

§ 205. The Personal Pronouns are

:

Singular.

Nom.Gm.Dat.Ace.

88 PEESONAL AND POSSESSIVE PEONOUNS. § 206.

§ 206. The Stems of the Sing, are: ifie, for the

first person; ere, for the second; e, for the third.

The Nominative, however, is formed differently from

them : i'yca, <tv, and that of the third person is enturely

wanting.

Js.—The o- of the Stem o-c has arisen from t (§ 60, a) \te], which

remains in many dialect-forms. The Stem e goes back to f f,

and this to a still older fonn <rfe [Lat. se for sve]. (§ 60, J.)

In the form erê, the f is hardened into <^.

The Stems of the Dual are: vw \no-s], o-^w, crcâ.

Ihe Dual of the third person does not occur in prose.

The Stems of the Plural are: 57/^6, uytte, aê (e is

generally contracted with the ending, hence the circum-

flex : see Dialects).

§ 207. When there is no emphasis on the Personal

Pronoun, it becomes enclitic in the forms mentioned

in § 92, 2 ; in that case the iirst person has the forms

beginning with /i. But when emphatic, as well as gene-

rally after prepositions, it retains its accent, and the

first person has the fuller forms : So/cet fwi, it seems to

me ; ifiol oii aol tovto apicTKet, this pleases me, not you.

The Gen. Dat. and Aco. Plur. of the first and second persons,

when not emphatic, sometimes have the accent on the first

syllable : i^jiav, vii.lv, and in this case the final syllable of the

Dat. and Aco. is usually shortened : tjimv, fjiias (Hom.).

When emphatic with the final syllable shortened they are

written ^filv, vîlv,

§ 208. The Possessive Pronouns are formed from tho

Stems of the Personal Pronouns

:

St. ijxe, ijios, my St. ^fie, fmirepos, our

„ o-f, a-os, thy „ i/ie, i/ieVepos, yowr

„ e, OS, his, her. „ (r(pe, (r(l>€Tepos, their.

Obs.—The ending repos is that of the comparative (§ 192).

§ 208. Dialects.—Hom. additional forms of the Possessives : reos[tuus], ios [suus], Afjios (properly Dor.), i/j-os, (t(J>6s. From theDual Stems ua>, cr<j>m : vatrepos, nos-ter, a-(f)a>tT€pos, belonging to youtwo, ap-os (also a.p,6s) often means my, Ss sometimes means own,without any reference to a particular person.

§ 21t. EBFLEXIVE AND OTHEK PEONOUNS. 89

§ 209, auTo-?, avTT], avro, self, is declined like acommon adjective, except that the Neuter in the Nom.Ace. Voc. Sing, has no v (comp. the article to).

o auTO? (auTO?), 17 'avTrj (avrrj), to ainb (tovto or

TavTov), the same, Lat. idem.

§ 210. The Stems of the Personal Pronouns, combined

with avTot;, produce the Beflexive Pronouns.

Singular. Gen. M. N. F. Dat. M. N. P. Ace. M. F. JST.

1st person ipuvrov -7)5 efuxvra -fj €fiavr6v -rjv myself

2d person creavrov -rjs a-eavra -g (reavrSv -rjv thyself

or aavTov -rjs cravra -^ aravTov -fjv

3d person eavrov -rjs eavra-fj

eavT6v -fju -6 himself, her-

or avTov -rjs avra -3 airdv -rjv -6 self, itself

In tliG plural, toth Stems are declined together

:

PlnraL Gen. M. F. N. Dat. M. N. F. Aco. M. F.

1st person r}^i5iv avr&v ^[juv aiiTols -ais rifxas avrovs -as ourselves

2d person vjxStv avriiyv ' vfiiv avTois -ais vjias avrovs -as yourselves

3d person a-cfyav avrav u^io'iv avrots -ais acjias avrovs -as themselves

Neut. (T(j>ea avrd

Yet the 3d person plural has also the compound form :

iavrav iavToXs -ais iavTovs -as -a

or avrSiV avrols -ais avrovs -as -a.

§ 211. aWo-9, oXXtj, aXKo, another (alius), is de-

clined like avTO';.

The Stem aXXo combined with itself produces the

Meciprocal Pronoun aW-TjXo (for aXX-aWo), oc-

curring only in the Dual and Plural.

§ 209. Dialects.—New-Ion. ojutos, avrrj, rairo ; Horn, airos = o

avros.

§ 210. Dialects.—The Epic dial, declines both Stems together

even in the sing. : t/xe avrov= ifiavrov, oi avra = iavra, &o.

Now-Ion. ifieavrov, a-cayurov, iavrov, stand for the forms with av.


90 DBMONSTKATIVE PEONOIWS. §212

Dual.

a.D.Ace,

§214, RELAT. AND INTEEEOG. PROSOUNS. 91

Dual.

|t6) ra Ta (tolv raiv tolv

N. A. V.<T&8e rdSe TuSSe G. DArohSe raivSc TolvSe

\TQvr^ ravra Tourco \rovToiv ravraiv TovTotv

The adverb of oSe is S8e ; that of oStos ovtois or ovtod, in this way.

Like ovTos are declined :

—

TotrovTos TOcravTr] Totrovro or too-ovtou, j

TOIOVTOS TOiaiTTj TOIOVTO OX TOIOVTOV, Sllck (feZls)

Ti/XtKoOroff TrjKiKavTT} rrjKtKovTo or rrjKiKovTov^ so old

in which, however, the t of the forms beginning with t is

dropped : ravra, but Too--au7-a ; by affixing the enclitic fie wehave the forms too-oiSe, so large ; rolosSe, of such quality

;

rriXtKds-Se, of such an age, with a regular adjective declension

before the syllable Be.

eKelvo-s, eKeivri, ineivo, that, is declined like alros.

A long accented i is often affixed to the Demonstrative Pronounsto strengthen the meaning, without affecting the declension, butthe e of he is lost : ovrosi, o8r, ckciviovI, airriT, roisSr. Com-pare the Lat. ce in his-ce, has-ce.

§ 213. The Relative Pronoun has the rough breathing

in all cases, as

:

Singular.

92 INTEEEOG. AND INDEF. PEONOUNS. §215,

guished only by the accent. The Interrogative Pronouii

has the accent always on the Stem syllable ; the Inde-

finite is enclitic : hence rt'?, who ? ti?, enclitic, some one.

§ 217. COEKELATIVE PBONOTJNS. 93

§ 216. The following are called Correlative Pronmms:

Interrogative.

94 COBEELATIVE ADVEEBS. S21g,

Interrogative.

TroO, where ?

(ubi?)

TToBfv, vjhence

(unde ?)

jroi, whither f

(quo ?)

TTore, when f

I at

TnjvUaIwhat

[ time ?

TTWS, how f

{whither ?

in whatway?

Indefinite.

TTOV 1

J.

,. [some-

^ i-\ (where

jTodiv from(ali- some-

cunde) where

^"f . j some("'l" [whitherquo) )

TTore, sometime

TTcSr, somehow

^ I some whither

^^\in someway

Demonstrative.

evoa

ivddde

EVTdvSa

evQev

evdevSe

ivrevdev

evda

ivdab^

ivravda

Tore, thenrrjViKa

TTji/iti-dde

Tr)j/CKavTa

as

ourcos

ravTT]

there

(iU)

fromthere

(inde')

thither

(eo)

at that

time

thus

thither,

in this

way

Relative.

ov \ where

OTTOv !(uhi')

odev \whenceorrdBcv )(unde)

ol vwhither

oiroi i(jMo)

ore, oTTOTe, when

qv'iKa \at whatoTTrjViKa) time

as, ojrms, OS

I whither,

fi, oTrrj < in what

{ way.

Obs.—€v6a and evBev, in tlieir original demonstrative sense, occur

only in a few combinations in Attic prose (cvBa 617, just then;

evOa Kol ev6a, here and there) ; but they are regularly used in a

relative sense : where, whence.

To the Correlative Adverbs there belong also eas, quamdiu (Eela-

tive, as long) ; reas, tamdiu (Demonstrative, so long), as well

as the poetic o0pa (for o^pa, § 53, c, Obs.) used in the samemeaning as ear, and T6(f>pa as tcuk.

To the simple ckuvos (tJiat, § 212) correspond among the Adverbsof place exei, there ; eKsWev,from there ; hela-e, thither. The De-monstrative ms occurs in Attic prose only in koI as, even thus,

and ovS' as, not even thus. It is also written hs in these com-binations.

§ 218. The conjunctions 61;, brjnoTe, and ovu (meaning ever, Lat.

cunque), and the enclitic jrep, may be joined to any relative pro-

noun or adverb to give prominence : Sa-ns 817 irorc, whosoever,

OTras oiv, (utcunque), Scrjrep, ju,st as.

Sometimes ^ is affixed to the interrog. n in the sense oiwhy f andto the corresponding indirect interrogative o n : Wij, oriri, why ?

§ 219. There are also negative pronouns and adverbs to be noticed

:

ovTis, firjTts, no one; oiSerepos, firiSerepos, neither, neuter;ovSaixov, p.?)8a/ioC, nowhere; ov&ap.as, ji.r)bap.as, in no way.

§220. THE NUMEBALS.

Chap. IX.

—

The Numeeals.

§ 220. The Cardinal, 0rdinal,aQ.d.Adverhial'SvLva.6Tsi[s,

with their Talue and signs, are :

—

1

96 THE NUMEEALS. §221

Ohs.—The letters of the alphabet are used in numbers also in un-

interrupted succession. In the most frequent designation,

given above, stigma (g') is inserted after e for the number 6

d to ff are therefore units ; i is 10, k 20 ; after tt' (= 80),

9^(koppa=90) is inserted; and after a (=800)'^ (sampi

=900). The alphabet begins again at 1000, but here' each

letter has the accent under it ; hence ^t^iS'=2344, /ko^^

=1862.

§ 221. The Cardinal Numbers 1 to 4 are declined.

1. Nbm.Gen.

Dot.Ace.

§ 224. NUMERALS. 97

§ 222. The numerals 5 to 199 are indeclinable.

We also find rpels, rpla Koi 8e<a, rea-aapes, ria-a-apa Koi Sena, for

13 and 14. The units and tens are united by Km, in any order

:

ciKoiTi Koi TtevTe and jrcvre koi eiKoo-t ; or without koi when the

tens are first : e"Kocn nevTe, 25 ; so also cKarbv Sexa. For twenty-

first we have els koI clKoards, or irparos kcu. cIkocttos, and(Ikocttos irpStTos, &C.

The Cardiaal numerals from 200 are, like the Ordinal,

regular adjectives of three terminations : StaKoaioc, ai, a.

The Ordinal numerals have the endings of the superla-

tive, except Sevrepo?, which has that of the comparative

(comp. § 192),

§ 223. By combination with a-iv, the numeral Stems form Distri-

butives : a-vvSvo, two and two ; a-ivrpets, three and three

;

Multiplicatives, by the syllable vKovs (from ttXoos, Lat. plex) :

dn-XoSs, simple; SitrXovs, TpijrXovs, nevranXoiJs, &c. Observe

also Sicra-os, twofold; rpura-Ss, threefold; hnrkcunos, twice as

much ; rprnXda-tos, &c., iroXKairXdinos, many times as much.

Adverbs : povaxji, simply (ji,6vos, alone') ; hixv or ^'X'^i doubly.

Substantives: fiomj (St. povah), unity ; ivas, rpids, rerpas,

rrepirds, c^ds, cfiSopAs, oySoar, ivveds, SeKas, elKas, eKarovrds,

xCKids, p,vpias ; hence rpeis pvpidSes ^ 30,000.

§ 224. The most important general Adjectives of

quantity are: eKucrro';, each; eKdTepo<;, either; wa?

irdcra, irav (St. iravr), all; •jroa-TO'i, ottoo-to'; [quotus]

;

and the adverbs : •7roX'KdKt<s, many times, often ; eKaardKi^,

every time; oa-aKK, as often as; Toa-auTaKt';, so often;

7r\ei(7TdKi<{, very often ; oXtyaKt^, seldom.

7' 'L

98 THE VEEB= §22&,

E.

—

Inflexion of Vbebs.

CremrcH Remarhs.

§ 225. The Greeks distiaguish in the Verb

1. Three Numbers : Singular, Dual, and Plural.

2. Three Voices:

Active: eXvaa, I loosed

Middle: iXvcrafj/rjv, I loosed for myself

Passive : ikvOrjv, I was loosed.

Verbs which occur only in the Middle or Passive are

called Deponents : Bexo/iat, I receive.

Ols.—Only the Aorist and tlie Future have special forms for tie

Passive ; and only the Aorist special forms for the Middle : in

all other tenses the Middle forms have also a Passive meaning.

3. Two classes of Tenses

:

A.

—

Principal, viz. :

—

1. Present : Xvas, I loose

2. Perfect: XiXvKa, I have loosed

3. Future : Xvaco, I shall loose.

B.

—

Historical, viz. :

—

1. Imperfect : eKvov, I was loosing

2. Pluperfect : iKeXvKecv, I had loosed

3. Aorist: eXvaa, I loosed.

4. Four Moods, viz. :

—

1. Indicative

:

Xvco, I loose

FiniteJ2. Subjunctive: Xva, I may loose

Verb. 3. Optative

:

\voifii, I would loose

4. Imperative

:

Xve, loose.

5. Three Verbal Nmms, viz. :

—

1. Infinitive: \veiv, loose

2. Participle

:

Xuav, hosing

3. Verbal Adjective: Xvreo?, to be hosed,

solvendus.


§227. THE PERSONAL ENDINGS—TENSE-STEMS. 99

§ 226. The Personal Endings had originally the

following forms

:

Active.

100 TENSE-STEMS. § 228.

2. The Strong Aorist Stem, from which the Second or

Strong Aorist Act. and Mid. are formed.

3. The Future Stem, from which the Future Act. and

Mid. are formed.

4. The Weah Aorist Stem, from which the First or

Weak Aorist Act. and Mid. are formed.

5. The Perfect Stem, from which the Perfect, Plu-

perfect, and Future-Perfect are formed.

These five Stems belong to the Actiye and Middle.

There are added to them, for the special forms of the

Passive

:

6. The Strong Passive Stem, from which the Second

or Strong Aorist Passive and Second Future Passive

are formed.

7. The Weah Passive Stem, from which the First

or Weak Aorist Passive and First Future Passive are

formed.

The form from which all the Tense-Stems of a verb

may be derived is called the Verlal Stem.

§ 228. The Subjunctive is indicated between the Stemand the ending. Long vowels are peculiar to it :Xv-a)-/iev,

solv-a-mus ; \ii-7]-t6, solv-d-tis.

The vowel t is characteristic of the Optative, which

generally becomes a diphthong with other vowels:

Xv-oi-fj^v, we would loose. The Subjunctive has the

endings of the principal tenses; the Optative (except

1 Sing. Act.) those of the historical tenses.

The Imperative has the following peculiar endings

:

Active. Middle.

Sing. 2. -6t -0-0

3. -T6> -a-6<o

Dual 2. -Tov -a-Bov

3. -r<Bi/ -irdaiv

Plur. 2. -re -a-6e

3. -vTav or -T<o<Tav -trdav or -o'dacrav

§ 228. Dialects.—The Horn. dial, often shortens the long vo-ff^

oi the Subjunctive in the Dual and Plural.

§ 230. CONJUGATIONS. 101

§ 229. The general law for the accentuation of the

verb is, that the accent is placed as far back as possible

from the end, final ai not being considered long, except

in the optative : Xvm, Xvere, 'Kvofuu.

Ohs.—An exception is formed by the Participles, which in declen-

sion (chap, vii.), if possible (§§ 79-87), always keep the accent

on the same syllable as in the Norn. Sing. Masc. : Part. Pres.

Act. âa-iKfiav, regnans, Neut. âaCKevov (not fiaalXevov

according to § 84), Part. Fut. Act. âa-CKeva-av, regnaturus,

Neut. âa-ikeva-ov. (The special exceptions, see §§ 331-333.)

§ 230. We distinguish Two Principal Conjugations

:

1. The First— the far more frequent—connects the

personal endings with the first two Tense-Stems by a

connecting vowel: Xv-O'/xev. The verbs belonging to

it are called verbs in a because the first Pers. Sing.

Pres. Act. ends in to : Xvco.

2. The Second—^the less frequent, but older—afiixes

the personal endiags to the first two Tense-Stems without

a connecting vowel: ia-jjiiv. They are called verbs in

fit because the 1 Sing. Pres. Act. preserves the original

ending /it: el-ixi.

The forms of the other :^ve Tense-Stems are commonto both conjugations.

The Paradigms of the verbs are given first: the for-

mation of each Tense-Stem is then explained in order.

List of the Paradigms.

Ei/ii, I am Table I.

Synopsis of \iu, I loose (exhibiting the meanings of

tho Tenses) „ U.

Vbebs in Q.

A.

—

Vowel Stems.

1. Uncontraeted, \ia „ III.

2, Contracted, rijiioi, iroUojj Sov\6c0 „ IV.

B.

—

Consonant Stems.

1. Guttural Stems, ir\€KM, ipiiyu, -rikaam .... „ V.

2. Dental-Stems, \f/eiSonm, ireiBa, Koftlâ ., .. „ VI.

3. Labial Stems, Tre/xirw, Xei-jva), Ka\6irTQj .. .. „ VII,

4. Liquid Stems, S4pa, ayyeWai, (nrelpm .. .. „ VIII.

Verbs in MI.

First Class, T/eT)^!, Si5iBtt;,V5TJ);ui.. .^^ „ IX.

Second Class, Se£«^î9%.<^^r.'W'cCosoft® X

102 PARADIGMS OF VEKBS. Tal

PAEADIGMS OF VERBS.

Eliil, lam. Stem «.

Table U. PAEADIGMS OF VERBS. 103

siiSSI-

.s

:^

II

O u

J^'*'?-(JO03 o

97ppiinaqcj95[ii

a. a.>3-;^ ffi

b.3-_ 3 _ _ _

S,o §W 05 §

til r§ °tf.S S

SSSrg-Sr

3- a *3 3 o IV <w 3

o o «< *©b b b b

^ ^ ^ ^p p p ;3

; (u S « "^^

SSS,S5,S

_c-,_ fee 5-2«-s ^1 ^ '^ "^ ^

a.-3- b a.O O »u ^ob b b b

3- ^ !>

3 o £ 3b b b b

to S

i iri.

o 55

,!!llltSSS-i-Srl

9ippiai9q:^93[i|

!» o =>

a- 3--3-

.

b a.K 3 Q u u ~o2 b b b b b

is"

§ i8 3

§ s

?!" S

J I i "'f-a e: S: oSSSrS

B

>?>

K 3 a o a a5 b b b b b

a

ra -g -g, &<.- §

§11tu S (3

J

P p p p-^p p

a . o 5> B

a 3 o HI »3 »3V V V a< atf a^p-p-p p p p(<'<'<(<'<

'^

a J-9 -S. &'

CQ OmAPh

: Ph

=£>

rS

§>-o"fcS b f

P '5 3/< t?

s,-

104 PAKADIGMS OF VERBS.—VEKBS IN O. Table II

A.—VOWEL STBMl

AcTn

Tenses.

Table III. PARADIGMS OF VEBBS.—^VEEBS IN II.

1.—UNCONTEACTED.Voice.

.105

106 PAEADIGMS OF VEEBS.^VERBS IN 12. Table III.-,

A,—VOWEL STEMS.

Middle amd

Tenses common

Tenses.

contirmea. Jl'AKAUiUJllS OF VJCKBB VEKJ3H IN li. 107

1.—UNCONTEACTED.Passive Voices. (§ 225, Ohs. 2.)

to hoth Voices,

Optative. Imperative. Infinitive. Participle.

Xvoifir]!/

Xvoio

XvoiTo

Xvoifiedov

Xvourdov

XvoicBrju

XvoineBa\voity6e

\V01VT0

\vm>

XvevBa

XvetrSov

\via8av

XveaBeXveaBcDV or

XvecrBaxrav

XieirBai XvSfievos

Xvoêvr]

Xv6fici/ov

Xv(Toijxr]V

etc., as in the Pres. Xvoijojv

Xvaecrdai

XeXvfKvos e'irjv

XeXvo'o

XeXv(T6a>

XcXv(t6ov

XeXitrdav

XeXv(r6e

XeXva-dtov or

XcXiirBaxTav

XeXiKrdai

Xv(rofji£vr]

Xvaoêvov

XeXvêvos

XeXvfievr]

XeXvfjLevov

X(Xv(roifiriu

etc., as in the Pres. Xvoi/ujij-

XfXvaeirSai

igitized by Micros )ft®

XeXvcofievos

XeXvcTOfiej/rj

XeXvo-QfievQV

108 PAEADIGMS OF VEEBS.—VEKBS IN O. Table III,

A.—VOWEL STEJ

Middle a

Tenses peculiar

Tenses.

continued. PARADIGMS OF VEBBS.—VERBS IN O.

I.—UNCONTRACTED.Passive Voices.

the Middle Voice.

109-

Optative.

110 PAEADIGMS OF VEEBS.—VEKBS JN fl. Tab

A.—VOWEL ST]

Present and Imperfect Ti

Ttjua©, / hoiwuT

'Table IV. PARADIGMS OF VEEBS.—VEEBS IN fl. Ill

n.—CONTEACTBD.Indicative Mood,

112 PAEADIGMS OF VERBS.—VEBBS IN O. Table

A—VOWEL st:

Present and Imperfect 21

oontinued. PABADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN O. 113

II.—CONTEACTED.

Indicative Mood.

114 PAEADIGMS OF VEEBS.—VEBBS IN SI. Table IV.-

A.—VOWEL STEMS

{Uncontractec

Tenses.

continued. PABADIGMS OF VEEBS.—^VEEBS IN i2. 115

II.—OONTEACTED.

Tenses,)

Imperative. Infinitive. Participle.

Active Voice.

Tifirjo'eLV

TTotijcreti/

SovKoHTetv

TToifitrav

8ovXa>(Ta>v

iToLrjtrov

SovXaa-ov

TifOjirai,

noi^<rcu

8ov\a)(T(U

TenfirjKe TeniirjKevai

jreTTOtqKevai

ScdovXcoKevai

TTCiroirjKas

deBovXoiKaiS

Middle and Passive Voices.

Tifirjceo'dat-

jToirjirea-Bai

dovXao'eo'dai

Tifirja-onevos

7rocr]a-6^evos

dovXaxro^evos

TeTlflTjO'O

8e8ovXai(ro

wejroirj<76ai

dedovXatrOat

TeTijirjfievos

TTenotriiievos

TeTifirjaeaBat

TreTTOLTjcrfa-Bai

dedovXuKreaOat

Tinfajirdiiivos

ireTTOtrfO'Sfievos

dedovXtaadfievos

TTOlflBrjTl

dovXa6T]Ti

niirjOrjvai

irotrjdrjvac

8ovXco6rivat

jrotrjOeis

dovXcoBels

SovXadjia-icrBai

TijajBrjiTOiievos

TTOirjSrjo'Ofievos

SovXaBijo'Ofievos

110 PAEABIGMS OF VERBS.—^VEEBS IN O. Table V.

B.—CONSONANT STEMS.

ttXcko), Iplait (class 1); tji^iyio, Iflee (class 2) ;

Tenses.

Table V. PAEADIGMS OF VEEBS.—VERBS IN li.

I.—GUTTURAL STEMS.

Toaa-a, I arrange (olass i). Verbal Stems: ttXck, <pvy, ray.

117

118 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN il. Table VI.


yjrevboiiM, I lie (class 1), neida, Ipersuade (class 2)

;

Tenses.

Table VI. PAEADIGMS OF VERBS.—VEEBS IN O.

n.—DENTAL STEMS.

Kofii^a), lea/rry (class 1, &.). Verbal Stems: ijrfvS, nid, KOfud.

119

120 PAKADIOMS OF VEEBS. Table TU,


TTc/in-o), I send (class 1) ; XeiVa), I have (class 2);

Tenses.

TaHe VII. PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 121

III.—LABIAL STEMS.

KaXvTTTO), I cover (class 3). Verbal Stems: 7re/x7r, Xitt, *caXu/3.

Optative. Imperative. Infinitive. Participle.

Active.

TrefXTTOtut

XeiiroLfii XetTre

KaXvTTre

XeLTTClP

KaXlfTTTCLV

ItefXTTcav

XetTTcoi'

KakvTrTcav

Xeiyj/oijiL

KaXyyjroLfjLi

Xt770t/i£

KaXvylraifiL

XtVc

KoKvyf/o

irefiylrciv

Xei-êLv

KaXvêtv

XiTrelv

KaXv-âi

Xeiyjrtav

KaXv^frav

XlTTOiV

KcCkvy^ras

XeXotTTot/it

7re7rofi(f)€

XeXotTre

TrcTTO^cficvai

XeXoLwevai XeXoLTras

Middle and Passive.

TreflTTOlflTJV

XeiTTOLf^riu

KaXvirTOLfirjV

Xeiirov

KaXvirrov

TTefiTrea-dat

Xelirea-OaL

KaKvTTTea&ai

7refi7rofj.€i/o$

XeiTToêvos

KaXvTTTOfieuog

7refjL\j/-oilx7}V

XeLyjroLfjuriv

KaXvyj/ôLfirjv

Xnroiyj}V

KaXvylraifirju

XtTTOV

KdXv\j/-a

Xei\ê(r6ai

Trefxiijraa-dai

XtTTeoSat

KaXvyjrao-Oat

Treix-yjrofievos

X€l^jr6fl€vos

KaXv\lr6fj.evos

7r€[xyj/'dfievos

XiTTOfievog

KaXvylz-dfieuos

TreTrefXfievos eirju

XcXetfifxevos €Lr)V

KeKaXvfXfievos e'crjv

XeXetTô

KeKaXui/z-o

XcXct^âe

KeKaXv(f>6ai

TTCTrefifj^vos

XeXeififxevos

K€KaKvfxpAvos

XeX€iyjroifJ.T]V

KeKaXvyj/ôlfiTjv

XeXel-êo-dat

K€KaXvyj/-€(Tdai

XeXefôfxepos

KeKoXvyjrofievos

XcKpdelrjv

KaXvtpBclijv

7r€H(j)dr)Ti

XeL(j)Br)Ti

KaXvcf>6T}Ti

XetcjydijvaL

KaXvc})6iivai

TrefXipdcLS

XeLcfyQeis

KaXvcfiOeis

TTefUpSrja-OLfirjv

Xet(})dj](ToliXT}p

KaXvcl)Brj(roLfj.7]V

Xei<f)67}(r€(rBat

KaXv<fi6T)a-€(Tdai.

iTeix<l)drj<T6fiepos

XeLffyOTjcofievos

KaXv(f)dr]o-6fxeyos

2. TrejLtTTTeos, XetTrreoff, KaXvnTeos.

Conjugatioii.

(class 2), as to its Perf., see § 279 ; BaTrra, I hury (class 3), Stem toc/i

the escort ; Xonr-o-s, reTnamvng ; r) KaXv^"!}, the hut ; 6 rpoTT'O-s, the

322 PAEADIGMS Of VEEBS. Table VIII

B.—CONSONANT STEMS

Sipto, I skin (class 1) ; dyyiiiXa), I announce (class 4, c) ; a-neipa, / sow (clasi

Tenses.

Table VIII. PARADIGMS OF VEEBS. 123

IV.—LIQUID STEMS (X, fi, p, p).

4, cZ); fiialva, I soil (clsi&B 4:^ d). Verbal Stems : Bep, dyye\, o-Trcp, fiiav^

Optative. Imperative. Infinitive, Participle,

oepoi^L

dyyeXKoLfxt,

(nreipoLfiL

fj.taivoip.1

Bepe

Syye}<Xe

OTTClpe

fitatve

hipeiv

dyyeXKeiv

(nreipeiv

fitaivetv

bipav

dyyeXXcBV

(nreiptav

fiLaivav

depoip.1,

dyyeKoip.1

(nrepoifii

fjLiavotfAt

Sepetp

dyyeXelv

(TTVepGLV

fxiaveiv

bepSiv

dyyeXSiV

fT7repa>i/

fiiavayv

delpaifjLi

dyyelkatfii

<nr€LpatfiL

fiLavaifii.

Beipov

ayyeiXov

{TTreipov

fxiavov

deZpuc

dyyeTKai

(TTrelpaL

fxtavai

oeipas

dyy€i\as

(nreipas

fitdvas

^yyeXKotfiL

eawdpKOLiML

fiefiLoyKOifii

€(nrapKe

fxcfiiayKe

rjyyeXKevat

ifnrapKivai

p.€IXLayK€vai

r}yye\Kas

coTrapKoas

fiefxiayKCDs

Bepotfirjv

dyydKkoLp.r]v

o-ireipoipjjv

p.iaivoiixi]V

Bepov

dyyeKkovo-irelpov

fiiaivov

Bepeo-Bat

dyyeXkeadat

O'lrelpea'Bai

fitatvefrOaL

BepSfxevos

dyyeXXofievos

(nreip6fjL€Pos

p,iaLv6p.€vos

6€pOLp.JJV

dyyekoifjuqv

(TTTipoifirjv

p.LavoLp.7}v

Bepeia-Oai

dyyckeia-Qat

(nrepelo-Bat

fiiavelo-BaL

Bepovfievos

dyyekovfievos

(nrepovfievos

fitavovp,€uos

BeLpalp-iju

dyyeiXaifjLTjv

(TjreLpalprjp

p.iavaifxrjv

Belpat

ayyetXat

cnreTpai

fiiavai

Beipao-Oai

dyyetXao-Bai

(Tireipaa-Bai

pidvaaSai

BeBapfievos eLr}v

7)yy€\p,evos etrjv

eoTrapfievos tlrjv

p.€fiia(rfiej/os c'ltjv

BeBaptro

^'yyeXa-o

etTwapcro

fxep-iatro

qyyeXOai

ifnrdpQai

pefiiavBat

oetpafievos

dyyeCXdp.€VOs

(nreLpdfievos

ptapafxevos

BeBappepos

TjyyeXpevos

itnrappepos

peptaffpepos

Bapeirjp

dyyeXBeLTjv

{TTrapeLTjv

piapBeirjp

Bdpr}0L

dyyiXdrjTi

(TTTdprjOi

pLdp6r}Tt

Baprjvac

dyyeXBrjpat

aTraprjvat

piap6r}vaL

BapT}(roipT}v

dyyeXdrj(rolpt]p

<T7rap7](roLpT)p

ptapQ-qaroLp-qv

oapeis

dyyeXdels

(TTrapels

ptapOeis

Bapr}a-€(r6ai,

dyyeXdrjo-eo-dat

(prrap-qa-ea-daL

ptap6rj(T€(r6at

baprj(ropepos

dyyeXBrja-dpePOs

tTTraprjaopepos

piapBqo-opepos

2, BapT€Os, dyyeXreos, (nrapreos^ piapreos.

124 PARADIGMS OF VEEBS.—^VEEBS IK /M. Table IX.

VEEBS IN /»!.

Table IX. PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN fH. 125

^mST CLASS.

This First Class consists of Verbs which afifix their tenninations

126 PARADIGMS OF VEBBB. VJfiKiJH iJN fCl. Jaoio U.-

VEEBS IN /«,

cmtimted. PABADIGMS OF VERBS.—VEEBS IN /ii.

FIRST CLASS.

127

This First Class consists of Verbs whioli affix their terminations

128 PARADIGMS OF VBEBS.—^VEBBS IN fJLl. Table X

VERBS IN Ml—SECOND CLASS.

atis Second Class consists of Verbs wHoli form the Present Stem by adding

m to the Pure Stem.

buRvvfu, I sliew. Pure Stem, Sf4K. Present Stem, 8 eiK-»u.

I, THE PEESENT-STEJT. 129

Chap. X.—Fibst Principal Conjugation

or Verbs in m.

I.

—

The Pkesent-Stem.

A.

—

Inflexion of the Present-Stem.

§ 231. The Present-Stem is the form which remains

after rejecting w in the 1 Sing. Pres. Act.

On the distinction of the Present-Stem from the

Verbal-Stem, see § 245, &c.

The following Table exhibits the way in which the

Personal Endings are affixed to the Present-Stem bymeans of the connecting vowels.

§ 232.

130 I. THE PEESENT-STEM. §232.

-§233. PERSONAL ENDINGS. 131

§ 233. Ols.—1. The E-sound (e, ;;, Et) is used as a connectingvowel, except before nasals, where the O-sound (o, <o, ov) is

used.

2, In 1 Sing. Ind. Act. &> is the connecting vowel lengthened,the ending fu being dropped. In the 2 Sing, eis is for ea-t.

In the 3 Sing, ei for en : Xu-ei-y for Xv-e-a-i, \v-ei for Xu-e-tj[comp. solv-i-t]. The ov of the 3 Plur. has arisen out of o by-

compensative lengthening (§42): Xi-ov-n from Xv-o-vm for

the original and Doric Xu-o-vri [comp. solv-u-nt].—In the 3 Sing.Imperf. e(v) stands for original e-r—comp. solveba-t—as t at theend could not maintain its ground (§ 67).

3. In the 2 Sing. Ind. Pres. Mid. rj or ei arose from e(<T)ai.

(§§ 61, 38) : Xir) from Xvf(o-)at ; the ending et is the Old Atticone exclusively used in oXu, thou thinhest, ôvXei, thou wishest;rj is the one later in general use. Comp. the Put. oyjrfc (§ 259).

-4. The Subjunctive has always a, ij, r;, for o (ov), e, ei; the r)

of the 2 Sing. Mid. is contracted from ij(o-)oi (comp. § 228).'

•5. In the 2 Sing. Imper. Act. the termination after the connectingvowel is quite lost, ou in the 2 Sing. Imperat. and Imperf.Mid. has arisen from e((r)o, eo: Xvov =Xve(a-')o, iXvov=:«Xu€(o-)o (§§ 61, 37); oto in the 2 Sing. Opt. Mid. arose fromo 1 (a-) o.

§ 233. Dialects.—L The Epic dial, sometimes has the original

ending fii o{ the 1 Sing, ia the suhjunctive : iBiXa-fii, velim ; the'2 Sing. Subj. and Opt. often has the fuller ending a-Ba (for s):

ii6eXrj-adaêdeXrjs, Kkaioi-aBa= icXaioK (icXaia, Iweep); the 3 Sing.

Subj. has the old ending ai.(y) from Tt : edeXr)-<Ti(v) = ideXr/.

2. The long vowels of the Subjunctive are often shortened in

Horn. : lOvvere for IdvuriTe (IBvvai, Iput straight) (comp. § 228, D.).

3. The Epic dial, often has fievai or fiev in the Inf. Act. con-

nected with the Stem by an accented e : ajivv-i-iievai, or afiMV-i-iiev

= dfivvetv, to defend.

4. The 2 Sing. Mid. often remains uncontracted in the Ion. dial.

:

XiXaUai, thou wishest ; Subj. ex"?"" (hoiearis), also shortened, fita-yâL

•(miscearis) ; Imperat. «rfo, follow; Imperf. iheveo, thou wast in

want of. eo is also contracted to eu (§ 37, D.) : ejrev.

5. The 1 Dual and 1 PI. Mid. in poetry often has- a- 6 for 6 :

ôvXafietrBov, -fieada, we wish,

6. aro (§ 226, D.) occurs in the Ion. dialect regularly for vto in

3 PI. Opt. : fiaxoiaro (= [laxotvTo), they may fight. In New-Ion.

oral., aro, are also sometimes fouhd in other forms where f is the

132 I. THE PEESENT-STEM. § 234-.

B.

—

The Augment.

§ 234. The Augment (Augmentum, increase) is tlie

sign of the past in the Indicative of all the historical

tenses (§ 225, 3. B). It has two forms, that is, it ap-

pears either

a) As a Syllabic Augment, in the syllable e prefixed, or

5) As a Temporal Augment, in the lengthening of the

initial vowel.

All verbs beginning with a consonant have the

Syllabic Augment : e-Xv-o-v, i-TinrT-o-fj^rjv, I was struck,

p is doubled after e : epplTrrov, from phrTm, I hurl.

Oils.—The Syllabic Augment appears in the stronger fonn of 17

instead of e in fj-iieXK-o-v, I was about to, from iiiXKio ; fj-fiovX-

6~fi7jv, I wishedj from j3ovXo/iat ; Tj-dvvd-nTjVj I could, from

hvvaîai.

§ 235. The Temporal Augment is used in all verbs

which begin with a vowel, whether aspirated or not.

The Temporal Augment changes

a to 7; : aya, Head Imperfect rjy-o-v

6 ,, 7 : f\auv<o, I drive ,, 7J\avv-o-v

,, CO : oveiSifo), I reproach „ oveiSi^-o-v

1 „ I : *iK€Teiioi, I beseech „ 'iKersv-o-v

connecting vowel instead of o : Krjh-e-arai = Kij8-o-»rai, they care^

€ôv\~i-aTO := iôvkovTO.

7. Horn., quite peculiarly, has in the 3 Dual Imperf. tov, <t6ov

for TTjv, a-drjv: irevxeTov, the two made; and Attic writers have

Tr)v for the 2 Dual of an historic tense : elxiTTjv, ye two had, evperrjVy

ye twofound.

§ 234. Dialects.—În Hom., and also in other poets, the Augmentmay be eatirAj omitted : TeSpff, he made; ex^v, he hud. X, fi, ^, o-,

are also sometimes doubled after the Syllabic Augment : {XXiVo-eto

(from Xia-a-qiiai, I heseech) ; 6 only in the Stem 8 1 : eSSeto-a (i

beared, § 317, 5). On the contrary, p is sometimes left single

:

epaiTTojiev (paTrro), / sew, spin).

§ 235. Dialects.—By the Temporal Augment a becomes 5 in Doric :

S-yoi/. The Temp. Aug. is very often wanting in Herod, especially

ill the case of diphthongs.

.§238. THE AUGMENT. 133

• -B to 5 : 'vppl^cD, I insult Imperfect 'v^pi(-o-v

su „ 7) : tuirBavofiai, Iperceive „ jicrBav-i-fojV

av „ rjv : av^dvco, I increase „ rjHâv-o-v

OL ,, CO : olKTeipa, 1pity „ axTeip-o-v

Before vowels, a becomes d, not tj : alio, I hear, 'dlov.

The long vowels 17, a, I, v, and usually the diphthongs

€t, ev, ov, remain without Augment.

eiKaât, I conjecture, eiKa^-o-u (also ^Kaôv),

fvplorKcn, Ifind, evpia-K-o-u (seldom Aorist rjvpov),

âlso a V and o i immediately before a vowel : avaiva,

I dry, aiacvov, olajci^co, I steer, oldiaôv, and .other

diphthongs in isolated instances.

Ohs.—The rough hreathing precedes the augmented

form when the verb in its unaugmented form had it.

§ 286. e becomes et (instead of 7?) in some verbs, viz.

in earn. Heave; i6iâ>, I become accustomed; iXiaaco, 1roll; eXKO) or eXKvco, Idraw ; eiro/j,ai, Ifollow ; ipr^dôfiaL,

I work ; ep-irai or epirv^co, I creep ; kcmdw, I entertain

hospitably ; €xo>, I have. Comp. below the Aorists

:

eXjjb'tjv (§ 318), eVKov (alpew, I take, § 327, l), elaa, 1placed (§ 269, D., and § 275).

Obs.—These verbs originally began with a consonant, and there-

fore had the Syllabic Augment: hpya^-o-p,ai (§ 34, D.)

i-Fepya^-o-pr)v ; arcx-"' (§ 327, 6) i-a-ex-o-v. Then the consonant

was dropped : i-epya^-o-prjv, i-ex-o-v, finally te was regularly

contracted to ei (§ 36) : fipya^-6-p.riv, elx-o-v.

§ 237. iopraâ, I celebrate, has the Augment in the second

vowel : impraôv for fjopTaôv (comp. § 37, D. 2). Verbs which

originally began with a digamma (§ 34, D.), consequently with

Si consonant, have the Syllabic Augment in spite of their initial

vowel : avhava, Iplease; e-dvbavov, ovpeto, Iraake water; aBeoi,

1 push; aveopai, I buy (§ 275). Both Augments, Syllabic and

Temporal, are combined in opaco, I see, capaov {iapav) ; av-oiy-a,

I open, av-eay-o-v.

§ 238. Verbs compounded with a preposition have tJie

§ 237. Dialects,—Hom. forms eavoxoti from olpoxofto, Ipour out

twine; ifjvSavou (Herod. idvSamv) and rjv&avov from ivhavie, 1

fêase. Comp. § 34, D. 1 and 4


IM I. THE PKESENT-STEM. §239;

Augment immediately after the preposition : ek-êp-w, Iearry in, ek-e-tftep-o-v ; irpo';-wy-a), I lead to, 7rpo<;-fjy-o-v

;

i/c, out of, becomes e'f before the Augment : i^-fjy-o-v, Iled out. The true forms of iv, in, and (tvv, with, altered

by assimilation (§ 51) in the Present, appear again be-

fore e : (Tv\-'ker/-a), I collect, crvv-e-\ey-o-v ; ifi-^dW-a, Iinvade, iv-i-âXX-o-v.

The final vowel of a preposition is elided : d7r-e-<f)6p-o-Vf

I carried away, from diro-cf>ep-a> ; only irepl and rrpo

never lose their final vowel ; but Trpo is often contracted

with e : irpov-âivov from irpo-e-âiv-o-v, I marched on.

§ 239. Exceptions.—Some verbs, which are not merely com-pounded with prepositions, but derived from already compoundnouns (Deoomposita), have the Augment at the heginning:

havnoofiat (from ivavrlos, against"), rjvavTiovjafv (from oofujv),

Iwas against; poet, jjvapov from ivaLpm, 1 slay; 5ra/5/5i;<riafo/xac

(from irapprja-ia, freedom of speecK), inappr)tTia^6pr)v, I spoke

freely; but the majority nevertheless have it in the middle

:

cKKkri(Tmâ>, I assemble, from €KK\rja-ia, assembly, i^cKKrjfriaôv

;

vjroTTTevm, I suspect, from viroirTos, suspicious, vTranrrfvov

;

KaTTjyopim, 1 accuse, Kar-qyopovv (from eov). vapavop-ia, I act

contrary to law (from irapd-vopos, contrary to law), has irre-

gularly Traprpiopovv {fov).

§ 240. Many prepositions have in some compounds so far lost

their distinctive meanings, that the verbs are treated as simple :

KaOeibtD, I sleep, fKaSevSov yet Ka&rivdov also ; KadLâ, I sit,

fm6iôv. Comp. the verbs Irjpi (a(f>ir;p.i., § 313), ei/mpj, (dp-

(jiUvinjpi, § 319, 5), rjpai (^KaBrjpai, § 315, 2). Some verbs

also have a double Augment : dveôpm, I endure, rjveixoprjv ;.

dvopdoa, I raise up, rjvapSovv (ooy) ; ivox>^â>, I encumher,

rivi>-)(Kovv (eov) ; irapoivka, I act as a drunlca/rd, iivapavovv Soalso hiaiTaai, I live (from Siaira, mode of life), ibir'jrav (aov)

;

BiaKoveto, Z serve, edtrjKovovv, (eov).

§ 241. Sis, lad, ill, in composition is preceded by the Augmentwhen the second word begins with a consonant or long vowel :

SvsTVxe'-' I am imfortunate, ibvsrixovv (foi/); SurmjreiB, Imake a sourface, iSvswTrovv (eoy) ; but short vowels receive theTemporal Augment after Sis : Svsdpearia, I displease, Susij-

pecTovv (eoi').

Compounds with cv generally have no Augment: eirixow (eov),.

I wasfmiunate ; but short vowels occasionally receive the Tcm-Digitized by Microsoft®

§ 243. CONTEAOTED VEEBS. 135

poral Augment after eS : evrjpyeTovv (eov), togetter with eicp-

yiTovv, from eiepyeTca, I do good,

§ 242. All other compounds have the Augment at the begin-

ning : j]6vjwvv, from a.dvp,cu>, I am without cov/rage.

C.

—

Contracted Verbs.

§ 243. Verbs whose Present-Stem ends in a, e, or o,

regularly contract these Towels in all forms of the

Present-Stem with the connecting vowel, and hence

§ 243. Dialects.—The Ion. dial, very often does not contract

;

hut the three kinds of contracted verbs are treated differently.

A. Hom. inflects the a-Stems in three ways

:

1. The syllables regularly contracted by the Attic writers remain

qpere and unchanged : doiSid-ei, he sings, vaicra-ovcri, they dwell, and

the Fem. Part. vm^Taaxra for vauraova-a, with a remarkable change

of OV to 0).

2. Contraction takes place : apera = dperd-u, he thrives, from

dperaa ; Trpos-r]iba = jrpos-r]v8a-e, from Trpos-avSda, I address.

Sometimes ae becomes rj (not d) : irpos-avbtjTrjv (3 Dual Imperf.),

opr/ai—also with regular accent—(from opd-eat) = Att. Spa (2 Sing.

Pres. Ind, Mid.).

3. Extension instead of contraction takes place when a vowel of

the same kind is inserted before the long one which results from

contraction : 6pda>, I see, contracted opS>, extended opoa.

a) This inserted vowel is usually short. Hence oadai is thus

inflected.

Act. Pr

136 I. THE PEESENT-STEM. § 243.

are called Cmtracted Verbs. The laws of contraction

given in §§ 36-38 are observed. Paradigms of ibe three

verbs Ti,//,da), iroiew, SovXoco are given on pp. 110-113.

Ois.—Âs the fi in the Infinitive civ is not original, aeiv, oeiv

do not become av, oiv, but av, ovv (§37, ObsS).

Dialects.

i) sometimes l<mg, e. g.

i7/3a-0U(ra Att. rfiSxra Horn. r\^&ti>(Ta

from T]&aa, I am youthful, so also from Spaw, I do

hpa-ova-i Att. bpaa-t Hom. Spmoxri

and from p.vdop.ai, I remember

/ivd-eadai Att. fivacrdaiTiojn. /ivdaa-Bai.

After long vowels the one following is sometimes shortened :

—

liva-ojievos Att. jivap-evos Horn. p.va>6p,evos

fj^d-ovTes „ TjâvTes „ rjâovTEs

The metre chiefly determines which of the vowels should be lou,,'

or short. Such forms, for instance, as dpfrda (" ), ^ôavres

( "), are inadmissible.

In Herod, the Stems in a often pass over into the conjugation of

the Stems in c : opea (but opas, opa), opeopev, opeovcn, Spiovres.

Instead of co we also find ea: 6peiovT€s. Hom. also has ijvTeov=Att. Tjvrav (from avrd-o), I meet), ;(pE(u/xEi/os= Att. f^piijuvos, making

use of.

B. Stems in e fluctuate between the open and contracted forms,

fo is often monosyllabic by synizesis (§ 39): iSprjveov, I com-

plained; often also in Ionic contracted to ev : Hom. veviiai = Att.

viopai, I return home, eov rarely becomes ev: veiKEva-t= veLKova-i,

they quarrel, ee becomes r; irregularly in Hom.: ofiaprrjTrjv

{ojxapTia, I meet with), dweCkijTrjv (dn-eiXem, I threaten), dopTrrjrrjv

(dopTTea, I sup), Inf. (fiopripevai = Att. cpopelv, to carry. An utterly

anomalous Infinitive is (fiop!]vai..

The second c in the 2 Sing. Mid. is sometimes dropped : jxoBeai for

fivBieaL (Att. /iuflj, p.vBf'i, thou sayest), TriaXe'o = Att. cVibXoC, thou

hadst intercourse ; sometimes e e are contracted to c t : jivBeiai. The

.

first way is usual in Herod. Hom. also prolongs e to e.i without

contraction : veiKeia = Att. veiKco, eVeXcict-o = Att. ireKelTO (reXm,

/ complete).

G. Stems in o are mostly contracted : yovvovpim, I supplicate.

Some have an extension like those in a : dp6atm(v) = Att,

apova-i.(v), they plough ; Srj'iocoev = Att. BrjioUv they would destroy

;

vnvcaoirras = Att. virvovvras, the sleepers.

In Herod, o sometimes changes to e, and with o is contracted to

E u : ebKalevv ^ Att. edLKaiovv, deemed right.

§2-15. PKESENT AND VEEBAL-8TEMS. 137

i 244. Ols.—1. Monosyllabic Stems in e admit only the con-

traction ej. All syllables which, contracted, would produce

another sound remain uncontracted.

Stem TrXe (Pres. ttX/o), I sail, Inf. TrXeiv)

w\eeis jrXfis but irXeu

TrXe'ei TrXei „ TrXeovai

eWXees cTrXet? ,, eirKeov.

Se'ffl, / hind, forms an exception, having to Sovv (St'ov), Sovfiai,

&c., to distinguish them from forms of dea, 1 am in want of,

Set, it is necessary, to beov, duty.

2. Some Stems in a have a preference for r), which they admit in

the place of d: fa-<». Hive, f^s, fj, ^re, f^v ; Trcivd-m, lamhungry, TTdvrjv ; SLijfd-cD, I thirst, Siiff^j/ ; so also Kvd-a>, Iscratch ; a-fia-a), I stroke ; yffd-a>, I scrape, and xpa-oitai, I makeV£e of.

3. piyo-a, Ifreeze, has o> and a for ov and ot: Inf. piy&v, Optptymjv.

4. Xouo), I wash, lav-o, has a peculiar contraction ; that is, the

connecting vowel after o u disappears : c-Xou for e-\ov-e, XoC-ftai

for \ov-o-fiai, &c. In like manner ot-o-jiai is often contracted

to ol-fiai, I think, and the Impf. to-o-jirji/ to w-firfv.

D.

—

Distinction of the Present-Stem from the Verbal-

Stem.

§ 245. We call that part of a verb the Verbal -Stem

from the combination of which with the terminations

of persons, tenses, moods, infinitives and participles,

consistently with the laws of euphony, all the forms

of the verb may be explained: Xv, Pres. Xi^co, Perf.

XeXvKa, Put. Xva-m; rofia, Pres. Tifido), Perf. rerl/j/rjKa,

Put. TlfJbrj(T(0.

Ohs.—From the Verbal-Stem also nouns are formed by means of

the nominal sufiSxes : 'Ki-tn-s, loosing ; Xv-rijp, looser ; Xv-rpo-v,

redemptionfee; Ti-iirj-a-t-s, valuation ; rifirj-^-s:, censor.

When the Verbal-Stem cannot be traced further

back, it is called a Root: Xv, and a verb formed from

it, a Boot- Verb : Xvco. But when the Verbal-Stem is

§ 244. Dialects.—2. For xp^'"'" Herod, has xpS-foi-

4. Hom. 3 Sing. Imperf. Xde (for XoFf, § 35, 06s.) = XoCe, TKove.

138 I. THE PKBSENT-STEM. § 24S

itself a Nominal-Stem formed by means of a nominal

suffix, it is said to be derived: Ti,/j,a is at once the

Nominal-Stem of rtyu.??, Tumour, formed by the nominal

suffix fid from the root ri, and the Terb formed firom

it is a derivative one : n/j-dco.

Ohs.—Boots are almost all of one syllable ; derived Stems are of

two or more syllables.

§ 246. The Verbal-Stem is not always Kke the

Present-Stem, but the Present-Stem is frequently an

extension of the Verbal-Stem: Pres. 'Keitr-co, I leave,

Present-Stem Xenr, Verbal-Stem Xiir (Aorist eknrov).

Such additions are called enlargements of the Present

;

the Verbal-Stem divested of them is the pure Verbal-

Stem.

Ols.—Where tbe Verbal-Stem differs from the Present-Stem,

nouns are usually formed from the former, not from the latter v

Verbal-Stem ^uy, Present-Stem (jievy, substantive (jivy-ri

(fug-a), adj. <l>vy-6.(h)-s, fugitive.

§ 247. The relation of the Present-Stem to the

Verbal-Stem produces four Classes of verbs with some

subdivisions.

1. FiEST Class (unenlarged).

The Present-Stem is like the Verbal-Stem.

This comprises first of all the pure verbs, i. e., verbs

whose Stem ends in a vowel (with the exception of a

small number in ew, § 248), and many others besides

TijjLa-o), ^ov\o-(o, TraiSev-a), T educate ; \v-a, I loose ; tZ-g}

I honcmr ; dpx-a>, I 'rule ; dy-oa, I lead ; Xey-a>, I say.

§ 248. 2. Second Class (lengthened class).

The Stem vowel is lengthened in the Present-Stem.

This comprises several verbs whose Stem ends in a

mute, and which in the Present have a diphthong or a

long vowel, as

:

§ 248. Dialects.—To these belongs the Horn, o-euw, I htnvy, from

the Stem av.

§ 249. PEESENT AND VEEBAL-STEMS. IBS'

(pevy-cD, I flee Pure Stem <pvy {tpvy-i], flight, Lat./M«?o)

XeiV-o), Heave „ „ Xijr

TTfid-o), Ipersuade „ „ iri 6 (jrid-avo-s, persuasive)

TiJK-o), I melt „ „ Taxraifi-a, 1 rub „ „ Tpi/3

But besides these there are also six verbs in t <», viz.

:

TrXew, Jsai'Z Pure Stem ttXu

jrvfo), J otcw

140 I. THE PEESENT-STBM. § 25C

§ 250. 4. FouETH Class (I-class).

The Present-Stem adds i to the Verbal-Stem [Lat.

fug-i-o, Pure Stem fug]. The i is here subject to the

various changes and transpositions discussed in §§ 55-58,

viz.

:

a) The Gutturals k, 7, ')(^ form with i, the group

<r(r (New-Att. tt) (§57):

<j)v\acra-a>, I guard, instead of (j>v\aKia>, Pure Stem (jivXaK (cûXaKij,

o guard)

TcuTda, I arrange, „ rayia, „ ray (^Tay6s,

arranger)

TapdcrtTco, T confuse, „ rapa)î(o, „ rapa)^ (rapayrj,

confusion)

Other Examples,

jlXltrcr<o(^K), I roll irpa<T<Ta(y), I do 6pva-(Ta>(x), I dig

Kr]pvcra-a)(^K), Iôclavm fr(l>dTTQ>(y), I slay

Ols.—The character of the Presents ap/ioTTa, I fit, naa-a-a, Iscatter, 7rXa(rcrci), / shape, (^pdcra-a, I seethe, tpeaa'a, I row,

n-TiVo-o), Istamp, ^\'i.TTa>, I abstract honey,—is a Dental; wea-ara,

I hoil, has Stem n-en- irregularly.

§ 251. b) h, and more rarely 7, with t, form t,

(§ 58) : eôfiai, I sit, instead of eBiofiai, Pure Stem e S

(eS-o?, seat, Lat. sedes) ; Kpdêo, I cry, instead of Kparjia,

JPure Stem Kpa'^.other Examples.

(ppaCa>(8), I say o^w^S), I smell (rxtia(8), I split

Obs.—Present-Stems in f which express a sound have theVerhal-

Stem in y : orerafo), Isigh ; olpa(w, I wail; olpay-rj, a wailing;

moreover, ffrafca, / trickle; a-Tiâ, I prick, Lat. inrstig-o,

§ 250. Dialects.—The Stems of the Presents Ipaaa-a, I whip;\la-a-opai, I beseech; Kopva-a-a, Iarm; Herod, dcâo-o-ca, I touch, endin Dentals (Xtr, Kopvd); Hom. ivia-a-a, I blame, has irregularly

the Stem e'vtn-.

§ 251. Dialects.—In all dialects Presents in -f<a much more fre-

quently have a Guttural for their character, in Hom. especially

in aXajraftn, I conquer ; Saifco, / divide ; p.fpp.ripiô, I ponder •

Tvokfui^m, I war; oTV(j)f\i^w, I strike, &c.

§ 253. PEESENT AND VERBAL-STEMS. 141

liaa-rlû), I whip, and some others. xXafii), 1 call, Stem xXayy,K\ayy-ij, a call ; TrXofoj, I mislead ; (roKmia, I hlcru) a trumpet—have a Pure Stem in yy ; vlâ, I wash, has irregularly the Stem

§ 252. c) \ with t forms X\ (§ 56)

:

âXXo), 2 throw, for jSaXito, Pure Stem ;SaX Ot'X-os, o sSo<)

aXXo;uai, Z foap „ dXto/iiai „ „ dX [saZ-i-o]

TiXXa), Ipluck „ tCKuo „ ,, TiK

Other Examples.

6aX\ai,Ibloom a-(j)aXK<o, I cause to stagger a-TeXKa, I send

TToKKai, Iwield dyyeWa, I announce \jraKKa, Tplay on tJie lyre

§ 253. d) V and p tlu-ow the ( into the preceding

syllable of the Stem (§ 55)

:

Tcivie, I stretch, for Tevia, Pure Stem rev (t6v-o-s, a stretching,

Lat. tendoy

<j>6eipa), I corrupt „ cjidepita „ „ (î 6 ep (<^6op-a, corruption)

<j>aivai, I show „ (paviu) „ „ (j>av (^d-(j>av-rjs, invisihle)

Other Examples.

Iiatvofiai, I rage atrflpa, I sow eyelpa, I awaken

aipa, I raise dyelpa, J collect vipaivco, I weave

Ohs.—If the Stem syllahle has i or v for its vowel, this is-

lengthened by the retreating i : npiva, I sever, judge, from

KpXv-ita ; avpo), I drag, from avp-tco,

A single Stem in X also follows this formation, viz. oêX, Pres.

ocfKika, I owe, for oc^fXico, to distinguish it from dêXXo), Jincrease, with the same Stem.

The I unites immediately with the final vowels of the Stems Kav

and KKav, which then sacrifice their v (f) : Ka-ia, I hum,icKa-ia, I weep. Additional fonns in Attic are Koa, icKda (§ 35,

Ohs.).

N. B.—The other less usual classes of verbs are given below.

§ 253. Dialects.—Horn, joins t immediately with Vowel Stems

:

ha-la>, Jhurn, Stem 6a ; fia-Loiiai, I seek. Stem /xa ; va-la>, I dwell.

Stem va ; and he uses ocfieXKa in the sense of the Att. ocf/fiKa ; but,

on the other hand he has AXm, I press, from the Stem eX, for

which one might expect eXXm (Class 4, c).

142 II. THE STRONG OE SECOND AOEIST-STEM. § 254.

n.

—

The Strong ok Second Aoeist-Stem.

§ 254. The Strong or Second Aorist Active and

Middle is formed from the Strong Aorist-Stem, which

is like the Pure Verbal-Stem, except the few cases

.named in § 257.

Pres.

StemXeiiv-a, I leave

XtTT

TvirT-io, I strike

rvir

j3a\X-(B, J throw

Active.

AoristI

€-Xm-o-v, I left I e-Tvir-o-v, I struckl e-/3aX-o-i/, I threw

Ind.I

e-XtTT-c-r | e-nnr-e-s \e-âX-e-r

etc., like the Imperfects eXftn-oi>, eTVirrov, tâKkov

Subj. n^^jXijr-Q)

I

Tvir-O}I

âX-o)

iiT-rj-sI

TVTr-Tj-sI

âX-7/-ff

etc., like tlie Pres. Subjunctive XtiVto, runTa, jSaXXm

f^, |(Xi7r-ot-yL«

I

TVTT-oi-iuI

/3dX-oi-;xi

^ |\XlV-OI-fITVTl-Ol-S

I|3dX-0l-S

etc., like the Pres. Optative XeiTroifu, rviTToifu, /SdXXoifxi

TI

fXiTT-fI

Txm-eI

0dX-e^ 'j\Xt7r-C-Tft)

ITV7r-€-TQ>

\jSoX-e-TO)

etc., like the Pres. Imper. Xcmg, TiWe, ^dXXe

Iniin. Xiir-eiv j3dk-€LV

Part. Xtff-cbi/, XiTr-ovcaj

Xm-ov, Oen. Xm-OVTOS

TVTT-av, Tvir-ova-a,

rvTT-Qv, Gen. tutt^

âX~a>Vf âX-oV'

(TO, /SoX-dv, Oen.

âX-6vTos

Middle.

Indie l/^'"^"''"""^"?''I

e-TVTr-6-fj,Tiv I i-^dk-o-jUjv' |\e-Xi7r-ov

Il-Tvir-ov

\c-âX-ov

etc., like the Imperf. jXeiTrofirjv, iruTrToiirjv, e^dXXoiirjv

rim-at-pxtL I âX-a>-fiai

.... "JT-jI âX-u

etc., like the Pres. Subj. XetVojjugi, TvirrajLm, âXXafiai

Opt. I A'^'^-o'-f"?"I

nm-oi-fi.ijv I pdX-oi-ixrjV' l\Xi7r-ot-o

ITvn-oi-o

\j8aX-oi-o.

etc., like the Pres. Opt. Xemoifiriv, rwKTolfir)v, âXXoiixriv

^ ''\Xi7r-€-crda>I

)3aX-oO

1âX-e~(rdai

etc., like the Pres. Imper. XeiVou, run-Tou, fiaXXov

TV1T~0V

ITvw-i-a-da>

Infin.IXm-i-g-dm TVTT-e-a-aai âX~e~(r6aL

Part.IXt7r-o'-/êyo-y, ?;, o-v | Tinr-d-;iej'o-y, ?;, o-j"

|fiaX-o-jievo-s, rj, o-v


^ 257. II. THE STRONG OR SECOND AORIST-STEM. 143

§ 255. 1. The Inflexion of the Strong Aorist-Stem

differs from that of the Present-Stem (Imperfect andPresent tenses) only in the accent of the following

forms : the Infin. Act. is perispome (Xmelv), the Infin.

Mid. paroxytone (\nrea-6ai), the Part. Act. accents the

O-sound (Xi/ircov, Xiirovaa), the 2. Sing. Imper. Mid. is

perispome (Xiirov).

2. The Aorist Middle has not, like the Present

Middle, the meaning also of the Passive: thus

e^dXofj/riv means only I threw for myself, but not, / wasthrown.

On the Augment of the Indicative, §§ 234-242.

§ 256. The Strong Aorist can be formed only from such

verbs as have a Present-Stem different from the PureVerbal-Stem, therefore not from the verbs of the First

ûnenlarged) Class (§ 247). Also it is not usually formedfrom many verbs of other classes, and scarcely occurs

&i all from any but Root- Verbs (§ 245).

Obs.—On the Aorists of the verhs 6v-o> and <î-a (class 1), see

§§ 316, 16, 17.

§ 257. In a few verbs the Strong Aorist Stem is distinguished

from the Pure Verbal Stem ; viz. instead of <= of the latter,

the Strong Aor. sometimes has a, by which rpeir-a, I turn,

though belonging to the first class, has a Strong Aor. ; E-rpaTr-

o-v (Impf. e-rpeir-o-v), i-rpan-o-jiriv. An isolated formation is

Pres. Tpay-a, Ignaw, Aor. e-rpSy-o-v. ay-io, 1 drive, likewise

belonging to the first class, by doubling the Verbal-Stem forms

the Aorist-Stem ay-ay, whence Ind. : fjy-uy-o-v, Subj. ay-ay-a.

Inf. ay-ay-civ.

§ 255. Dialects.—1. All the peculiarities enumerated § 233, D.

extend likewise to the Strong Aorist : 2 Sing. Subj. â\r]a-6a, 3. Sing.

âkri<n, &c. ' The Inf. Aor. Act. ends in Horn, also in ieiv instead of

ilv (/SaXeetv).

2. The Middle Aorist forms of the Stems Kra (§ 316, 4), ^Xij

(§ 316, 19), oiiTa (§316, 20), exceptionally have a Passive

meaning.

144 III. THE FUTUEE-STEM. §258;

III.

—

The Futuee-Stem.

§ 258. From the Future-Stem are formed the Fut.

Actiye and Middle.

First Future{The a- Futwe).

5 269. I. THE FtTTUEE-STEM. 145

§ 259. 1. The Inflexion of the Future-Stem is theBame as that of the Present-Stem, i. e., that of the

;0- Future is the ordinary Inflexion, that of the con-

tracted future is the Inflexion of the contracted Present

of 6 Stems (§§ 231, 232, and 243).

§ 260. The o- Future forms the Future-Stem byadding o- to the Verbal-Stem: Xv, Tivo-. All Stemsending in a vowel or a mute have the a Future. Thea, according to § 48, with gutturals makes ^, with

labials i^, and admits of no dentals before it (§ 49)

:

a7-Q), I drive, Fut. a|-&); jpd<f>-a>, I write, Fut. jpa^jr-o)

;

aB-co, I sing, Fut. acr-w ; cTTrevS-co, liho, Fut. crTretix-a)

for c77revB-(7co (§ 50). About Opeijrco, Stem rpe^,&v-\{rQ}, Stem rv(j}, and others, see § 54.

2. Verbs of the second or extended class (§ 248)retain the extended Stem also in the Future : Xeiir-o),

A,6ii|r-a) ; th« six verbs in eta mentioned in § 248 showtheir strengthened form in the Fut., though it is not

seen in the Present : ttXeo), "TrXevao/iat ; in like mannerjckaieo brings out its Pure Stem kXuv in KXavcrw, and

Kaioa in Kavaco (§ 253). Aboutx^"'' ^^^ § '^^^^

3. Of verbs of the third or T class, and of those of

the fourth or I class (§ 249, &c.), the Pure Stem must be

found in order to form the Future : Timrco (class 4), Pure

Stemi TV IT, Fut. Tviâ>; (pvXdcrcra), Pure Stem ipvXaK,

(^Tcprr-o-fuu, I rejoice); Stem <j)tS (class 2), (lîSofiai, Inf. Aor.

iire-4>i8-e-(rdm, also Fut. jre-îS-^-o-ojuat. Isolated Aorists are:

c-Ke'-K(€)X-e-TO, he called, from KeXojuat ; ni-f^v-o-v, I hilled (Stem

cj}ev); re-Tfji-o-v (Î hit, Stemre/i); Tf-ray-av (^seizing. Stem ray,

Lat. tango), rjv-irr-air-o-v (J scolded, Pres. cvItttoi) along with

ev-eviTT-o-v, and rjpvK-aK-o-v (J kept hack, Pres. epvKO)) have the

reduplication in the middle of the word.—The reduplication in this

case everywhere belongs to the Tense-Stem, and, as in the Perfect-

Stem (§ 273), is preserved in all the moods, in the Infin., and the

Participle. The Indio. may add the Augment or omit it before the

reduplication. (§ 234, D.)

§ 259. Dialects.—About the contraction, see § 248, D.

LDigitized by Microsoft®

146 III. THE FDTUEE-STEM. § 2ClL

Fut. (pvXdâ; cjipdâ), Pure Stem cf)pa8, Fut. <ppdaw.

Accordingly, verbs ending in the Present in -aaa or

-TToj generally make the Fut. in -^m, and those having

the Present in foj generally have their Future in -aw.

According to this rule, let the Future be formed of

ekicra-eo, I roll; K7)pvaa-a>, I proclaim; irpdaaa, I do;

a-xl'K'^, I split ; Soicdô), I judge ; oifXlô}, I arm ; and

let the Presents be found to the Futures opu^co, a-cpd^w,

^laaofiai,, Xo'ytaofji.ai.

Verbs with a dental character ending in the Present

in -aao) or -tto) naturally (§ 250, 05s.) make the Future

in -aa : irXdaai (Pres. irXdaaa), I shape), dpfioaeo (Pres^

dpfWTTO}, Ifit) ; and, on the other hand, those with the

character 7, which have the Present in -fo (§ 251, Obs.}

make their Future in -feu : aTevdâ (Pres. aTevd^co, Isigh), arlâ (Pres. crTiâ, Iprick).

§ 261. Vowel-Stems have their vowels long before o- ;.

a becomes d if preceded by e, i, or p (§ 41), in all other

cases it becomes 1?. Every other short vowel is changed

into the corresponding long one : Id-a, I leave, eacr-co ;

Id-ofiat, I heal, idcr-oixai ; Bpd-o), I do, hpcux-co ; but

TipA-w, Tipi.ria-ai ; ôd-w, I cry out, ôrja-ojjiai, ; iyyvd-o),

J hand over, iyyvija-co ; -iroik-to, 7roirja-w, BovXocOy

Bov\d>(T-a).

The Stem XP"' iXP°''^>-^^*'^^ ^'^ oracle; xpaop'ai, I

use) exceptionally has tj in the Future : xPV°''^> XPV^'^f''"''' >

whereas dKpoaofj,ai, J listen, has uKpodcrofiai.

Eespecting the Future with a short vowel, see § 301.

§ 262. The contracted Future forms the Futui-e-Stem

§ 261. Dialects.—The Ion. dial, has ?; even after t, i, piireiprja-oiiai, I shall endeavour. The Ep. dial, sometimes doubles the

<r when the vowel is short: albea-a-ofnai (aiSto/jiai, I feel shame).

The Horn. Futures dXa7rd|<B, TroXf/ii^m, arvîKlâ, and others with

their Presents in -fm are explained in § 251, D.

§ 262. Dialects.—Stem 6ep has in Horn, the Fut. Bipa-opMi, Pres.

6ipo)),ai, I grow warm ; Stem k e p (Pres. class 4, d, Keipa, I shave),

Fut. Kepa-a ; Stem (jivp, Pres. Kprpa, I mix, Fut. (jiipa-ai.

§264. HI. THE PUTUEB-BTEM. 147

by adding e to the Verbal-Stem: ^dv, <j)dv6. Thisform of the Future occurs ia Stems ending in X, fi,v,p;and the Stem vowel is short: vefta, I distribute, Put.

ve/iw ; a/MVvco, I defend, ajjuvvas. Verbs of the seventh

class here show their Pure Stem (§§ 252, 253) : âXXa,1 throw, âXo) ; <paivai, (f)dvii) ; KTeivm, I Mil, KrevS)

;

^deipco, ^depa> ; ar/yiWa), ar/yeXSi.

According to this rule, let the Future be formed of

a<j)dWM, J cause to fall; ariXKo), I send ; fialvofiai, 1rave ; atpm, I lift ; and the Present (class 4) of (rn-epw,

iroiKiXS), (Tiqiiavm, rjZtJvSi.

Exceptions.—The Stems xeX (xfXXm, class 4, c, Henoch against)

and Kvp (jcvpia, I meet) have the a fonn of the Future:K€X<rai, KvptTOi).

Obs.—The contracted Future is properly a peculiar form of the

a- Future, for <f>ave-a> has arisen from <pav-e-a-a> (§ 61, b), in

which e is the connecting vowel.

§ 263. Several Stems in e (Pres. em), aS (Pres. a^w),

and tS (Pres. i^co), throw out the a- in the Futiu-e. Those

in e and aB then contract the vowels e and a with the

connecting vowel: reXi-co, I covvplefe, Tekea-a, reXia,

reXw ; 1 Plur. TeXeofj,ev, Te\ov/j,ev (as in the Present) ;

îjSd^Q}, I bring, /3i^da-6}, /3i^dw, îây; 1 Plur.

î^dofiep, î^&fiev. To these also belongs eKdat, iXco,

2 Sing. 6\a?, 3 Sing. iXa, from the irregular Present

eXavvco, I drive; comp. § 321, 2.

Stems in tS after dropping the o- insert e, which is

contracted with the connecting vowel : ko/ii^co, I carry,

Fut. Act. KoijA,(j-a, KOfii-e-(c, KofiiS), 1 Plur. KOfiieo/Mev,

Ko/Miov/J^v, Fut. Mid. Ko/Miovfiai.

This form of the Future is called the Attic.

§ 264. Some verbs take an e after the <r of the Future,

which is contracted with the connecting vowel : Trveto, 1breathe, Stem irvv, nrvevcrovfiai ; TrKew, I sail. Stem ttXk,

§ 263. Dialects.—The Futures in am in the Hom. dial, are treated

exactly like the Presents (§ 243 .D. A.), hence i\6a, ikaas, iKda.

i i8 III. THE FUTUEE-STEM. § 265>

7rXev(rov/j.ai, along with nrXeva-o/iai, ; <f)evyo}, I flee, Stem

^117, (pevôv/xai, and êvôfiM. This kind of Future

which occurs only in the Middle voice with an Active

meaning is called the Boric.

§ 265. Few verbs form their Future without any

tense sign : ')(e(o, I pour, Fut. Act. %6(b, Mid. ^(koiiai,

and so also among the irregular verbs eiiofiai, I shall

eat (§ 327, 4), and iriofj.ai, I shall drink (§ 321, 4).

§ 266. The Future Middle generally has a Middle

sense, but in many verbs it has a Passive, and in not

a few an Active meaning ; the last is the case espe-

cially in verbs denoting a bodily activity : aStu, I sing ;

d/covQ), I hear ; aTravrdco, J meet ; diroXavo), I enjoy

;

âBiô), I walk (âSiov/j-at);ôdm, J call out; ryeXdw,

I laugh ; olfxcoâ), I bewail; ai/ydco and cnwirdxo, I amsilent ; cnrovSdô), I am zealous. Irregular verbs (§ 320,

&o.) very frequently have a Middle Future with Active

meaning.

§ 265. Dialects.—The Horn. /Sct'o/iat or piojiai, I shaU live, akin to

îdsi), I live, is likewise formed without a tense sigu.

§267. IV. THE WEAK OE FIRST AOEIST-STEM. 149

IV.

—

The Weak, oe Fiest Aoeist-Stem.

§ 267, From the Stem of the Weak or First Aorist are

formed the Weak (or Mrst) Aorist Active and Middle.

Pres.

150 IV. THE WEAK OR FIEST AOEIST-STEM. §268.

§ 268. The characteristic vowel in the inflexion of

the Weak Aorist is a, which in the 3 Sing. Ind. Act.

becomes e, but everywhere else remains unchanged

before the personal and modal signs. In the Subj. a is

lengthened to a and r], whereby the endings become the

same as those of the Present. In the Optat. Act. the

foims with ei in the 2 and 3 Sing, and 3 Plur. are morecommon than those with at : Xvueta?, Xva-eie(v), Xva-etav.

In the 2 Sing. Imperat. Act. v is added by which the a

is rendered so obscure as to become o : \v<ro-v ; and in

2 Imp. Mid. t is added which with the a makes ai. In

the 2 Sing. Ind. Mid. a- is thrown out as in the Pres.

and Fut., so that i-\iia-a(cr)o becomes eKvaeo according

to § 37.

Ohs. 1.—Three forms of the Weak Aorist are the same, the 3 Sing.

Opt. Act., the Infin. Active, and the 2 Imperat. Mid. ; but in

accent they differ, for as the ai of the Optat. is regarded as long

(§ 229), the first of these three forms is always paroxytone

:

Xutraij ypaâi (ypdcfioi, I write), Traideva-ai (TratSeiJo), 2 educate);

the Infinit. always has the accent on the penultimii : XCo-ai,

TraiSeCo-ai, ypa\jfai ; the 2 Sing. Imperat. Mid., where possible,

has the accent on the antepenultima : TraiBeva-m, XOcrai, ypdijfiu.

Obs. 2.—The 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Weak Aor. Act. is the same

in form as the Neut. Partic. Fut. XOo-ov, but in Verbal-Stems of

more than one syllable it differs from it by the accent : n-ai-

deva-ov, but the Neut. Part. Put. is TratSeScrov (§ 229).

§ 269. The o- form of the Aorist differs from the Stem

§ 268. Dialects.—In the Ion. dial, the 2 'Sing. Indie. Mid. fre-

quently leaves the vowels uncontracted : iKia-ao.

Some Aorists in Hom. take the vowels o and e instead of a : l§ov,

I came, jfes ; c^rja-eTO (paiva, I walk) ; Sva-ero (he set or went down,Sva) ; so also the Imperatives opa-eo, arise ; aêre, hring ; oio-e,

hring ; \eêo, lie down; irekdo-a-eTov= wekaaaTov, from n-fXafo), 1approach.

§ 269. Dialects.

—

a<j)va-a-a>, I draw water, has in Hom. the Put.dij>iâ>, but the Aor. atpva-aa. Irregular Hom. forms without o- are

:

eX^va for exeva-a, from Pres. xf<», Ipour ; ektjo, 1 Plur. Subj. Krjopey

or Kfio/xEv, Imperat. kôv or kciov. Inf. Krjai. or Ks'iai, from Pres. Kaia,

I lurn; Stem Kav (Att. eKava-a); eVo-euo, Pres. irevai, I drive

§270. IV. THE WEAK OR FIRST AORIST-STEM. 1.51

of the Puture only by the addition of the a : Xver, Xva-a

;

7/3ai|r, <ypaiâ;^vSm^, (j>vXaâ. Respecting the change

of vowels and consonants before er, eomp. §§ 260, 261.

The irregular %ew (§ 265) has the Aorist e%6a for 6%evcra.

Comp. the irregiilarity in elva, IspoJse; T]veyica, I lore,

§ 327, 12 and 13.

§ 270. The Stems in X, fi, v, p, forming their Future

without o- reject this consonant also in the Weak Aorist,

which gives rise to the supplementary form, for the

TOwel of the Stem is lengthened by compensation for

*he loss of the a:

5 after i and p becomes d : Pres. irepaiva (class 4, d), Ipenetrate. Stemirepav, Fut. ncpava, Aor. i-^repdva (§ 41).

otherwise 17: Pres. (Iiaiva (class 4, d). Stem âv. Put.

âvSi, Aor. e~(l}r]va,

'< becomes ei : Pres. dyyeWa (class 4, c), I announce.

Stem dyye\. Put. dyyeKw, Aor. ijyyeCKa.

„ „ Pres. vip,a> (class 1), / distribute. Put.

j/f^m, Aor. e-veifia.

X „ X: Pres. KpiVco (class 4, d), J /arf^'e, Stem

Kpiv, Put. KpCvm, Aor. e-Kpiva.

w „ w : Pres. dp.Cva (class 4, d), J defend, Stemdp,vv. Put. u/iui/ra, Aor. rjpvva.

06s.—The Stems dp (aipm, J Zi/'i) aud A\ (oXXofiat, J Zeap) have

in the Indicat. ?; because of the Augment : ^pa, j^Xa/iT/v, but in

the other forms a : Spas, oKijuvos. a instead of jj occurs in

away ; the Infinitives dKevaa-Bai or dKeaaSai, to avoid ; hariaa-Bai,

from bariopai, I distribute.

ela-a, I placed, is a defective poet. Aorist, the Horn. Inf. is ia-trai.

Part, e'uj-as and ea-a-as (dvicras), 3 Sing. Mid. Ucra-aTo. On the

-doubling of the o- see § 261, D. \6ea-a-a (Xof-e-owo) = eXoucra (Xoum,

I wash), with e inserted. (Comp. § 35, Ofo.)

§ 270. Dialects.—1. Homer makes the Aor. of several Stems in

.X, p., !>, p with er: eXa-a from etXo), I press; the defective dmepira,

I tore away.

2. In the Aeol. dial, o- is assimilated to preceding X, p.,v,p; an

example of it in Horn, is a^fXXa for aicêX-o-a= Att. acjxiXa, Pres.

.o0eXX(B, I increase.

3. The Augment of the Hom. Aor. êtpa, Pres. eipai, J/om, is

quite irregular. Comp. § 275, D. 2.

152 IV. THS WEAK OE FIKST AOEIST-STEM. §271,

some few verbs : Kepbalvm, I gain ; opyaivto, I muse anger

;

a-rjfiaiva, I indicate—ia-r]jxava along with ia-fiii-rjva. On tha

other hand rj instead of a, in spite of the p, occurs in Terpalvta

I bore, eTGTprjva.

§ 271. The Weak Aorist is the usual form in aU

verbs which, according to § 256, cannot form the Strong

Aorist, that is, in all deriTative verbs and in verbs of

the first class ; but radical verbs of other classes, espe-

cially those with Stems in X, fi, v, p, also have the WeakAorist.

The Weak Aorist Middle like the Strong one ha%

only a Middle sense and is never Passive (§ 477, &c.).

V.

—

The Peefect-Stbm.

§ 272. From the Perfect-Stem are formed the Perfect

and Pluperfect Active and Middle, and the third Future

(Futurum exactum) which occurs only in the Middle.

§ 273. The essential characteristic of the Perfect-

Stem is the reduplieatim, (comp. •jre-TrTiy-a with Lat..

pe-pig-i), which generally takes the first place, but in

verbs compounded with prepositions is put, like the

Augment, after the preposition (§ 2.38): Xi-Xv-Ka, but'

iK-Xe-\vK-a.

The redu'plication belongs to the Perfect-Stem, and

is therefore, unlike the Augment, preserved in all the

moods, infinitives, and participles (comp. 258 D).

In verbs beginning with a consonant it consists in the

initial consonant with e being placed before the Stem :.

Stem Xv, Perf-Stem XeXv, 1 Sing. Perf. Ind. Act.

Xi-Xv-Ka.

§ 273. Dialects.—The reduplication cannot, like the Augment, be-

omitted in the Epic dial. ; diy-fmi. forms an exception (3 Plur.

Se'x-aT-at), though we also find Se-dey-pai, I expect, or receive. Part..

fie-Sey-n/i/of, from Pres. 8e'x-o-/iai (comp. § 316, 34). Some verba>

beginning with a vowel do not lengthen it in the Perfect in the

New-Ionic dialect.


273. V. THE PEKFECT-STEM. 153

154 V. THE PEEFECT-STBM.

II. Middle and Passive.

^ 275. V. THE PEEFECT-STEM. 155

1. An aspirate, according to § 53 a, is represented

by tlie corresponding tenuis: Stem %£o/3e, %<»j3w, 1retreat, Ke-ymprj-Ka ; Stem 6 v, 6va>, I sacrifice, ri-dv-Ka ;

Stem âv, 7ri-(f>r]v-a.

2. When a verb begins with two consonants, only the

first appears in the reduplication, and even this only

when it is a mute followed by \, fj,, v, or p : Stem jpa^,r/pd^co, I write, rye-ypacfi-a ; Stem irXay, irKrja-ao), 1strike, -Tre-TrXryy-a ; Stem irvv, irvia), I breathe, ttc-

•TTvev-Ka.

3. In every other case a Stem beginning with two

consonants takes only e for its reduplication: Stem

jcrev, Kreivw, I hill, e-KTov-a; Stem îjre, ^rjra>, I seek,

i-^'qTrj-Ka.

4. Stems beginning with p likewise have only e, after

which the p is doubled: Stem pt^, pLirTO), I throw,

ep-piip-a, (comp. §§ 62, 234).

Exceptions.—^Verbs beginning with yv, y\, and sometimes those

beginning with |8X, have a simple e for their reduplication. Stem

yi/o), i'-yva-Ka, I have come to know; Stem ^Xaa-Te (pXaara, Igerminate'), e-â<rrri-Ka. The Stems Kra ((crS/ioi, I acquire')

and liva, on the other hand, have Ki-KTrj-fioi and fie-ixvrj-iim,

I remember, me-min-i, Comp. iri-Trra-Ka, I 'have fallen, and

n-e-nra-juat, / am spread out, §§ 319. 3, 327. 15.

Instead of the reduphcation ei appears in ei-Xtj^-o, / have taken

(§ 322. 25), ct-Xijx-«, I have obtained (§ 322. 27), el'-Xoxa (from

Xeyto, I gather), Si-et-Xey-fim (from Siakcyo/Mt, I converse),

ci-prj-Ka, I have said (§ 327. 13), and in the aspirated d-jiap-rai,

it isfated, Stem /xep.

§ 275. Initial vowels are lengthened as in the case of

§ 275. Dialects.—1. The Attic reduplication is more frequent in

Homer, as : dp-^po-rai from ap6a>, I plough ; dX-aXi;-/iai, from a\d-

o-fiai, I wander; ap-rip-a, lam joined. Stem ap; oS-mS-a, I smell,

ofa, comp. od-or ; on-am-a, I have seen, from the Stem o tt ; and

with a V inserted : iiiv-rifiv-na, from the Pres. rip,v-a, I droop the head.

—Herod, has dp-alprj-Ka from aipew, I take.

2. Instead of e'l-a>da Horn, also has e-w6a, which is the only form

used by Herod. From the Stem iXir (originally FcXtt) c-oX7r-a, 1

hope; from Stem ipy (Jepy) e-opy-a, I have done. From the Stem

dp (Lat. sero), Pres. e'ipa, 3 Sing. Pluperf. Mid. eepro, Part. Perf.

156 V. THE PEKFECT-STEM. § 27G.

the Temporal Augment (§ 235) : Stem opdo, op65>, 1

raise up, (op6co-Ka. The verbs mentioned in § 236 have

el here also : eHXiyfiM, Pres. eKia-aai, I roll.

1. Some Stems beginning witli a, f, or o exceptionally take wtat

is called the Attic reduplication instead of the mere lengthening

of the vowel. This reduplication consists in the initial vowel

with its following consonant being repeated, and the vowel of

the second syllable being lengthened: Stem dXicp (dXft'^m,

class 2. 1 anointy, dX-^\t0-a ; Stem ok o, a/covo), I hear, aK-rjico~a

(for d/cijKofaj § 35.06s.), but Mid. rJKova-fj.ai; Btem 6pv ^(^opvo'a'di,

class 4, / dig) op-oypvx-o- ; Stem ayep {dyeipM, class 4, d, I col-

lect) ay-Tjyep-Ka; Stem tXa (Pres. iXavvat, I drive, § 321. 2)

eX-^Xa-Ko, Mid. ik-TjXa-pai; Stem eXpy^i Pres- ^^yx"') -^ ^sfi^te

(class 1), Perf. Mid. eX-^Xty/iai (comp. § 286, Ohs.); iyp-

Tjyop-a, I am awake, from the Stem iyep, Pres. iyflpm, I awaken(class 4, d), is irregular.

2. The Stems dXo) (a\la-Kopai, § 324. 17, I am made prisoner),

ay {ayvvpi, § 319. 13, I break), clu (not used in. the Pres.,

§ 317. 7), and oive (Jsviopai, I iuy) are hkewise irregular; but

originally they had an initial consonant (§ 34. D) : t-dXa-Ka,

e-dy-a, e-oiK-a, i-dyvrj-pac',the Stem di/oty (di/otyoj, /open) has

av-eay-a. To these may be added k'l-aid-a, I am accmtomed,

from' the Stem 4$, originaUy ftO (comp. §§ 236, 237).

1. The Perfect Active.

§ 276. The terminations of the principal tenses are

appended to the Perfect-Stem in the Indicative by-

means of the connecting vowel a. The first person has

no personal ending at all ; in the third a is changed

into 6. The Subjunctive, Optative, and the Imperative

(which rarely occurs) have the vowels of the Present

;

the Infinitive ends in -evai (always paroxytone), and

the Participle in -fB9, -via, -6?, Gen. -oto'; (Stem ot,

§ 188).

Mid. eepiievos (oomp. § 270, T>. 3). The following two are defective

Perfects in Hom. dv-rivo6-e(^v), it gushesforth, iv-rjvo6-e(y), if is upon.

Both also occur as Pluperfects.

§ 276. Dialects.—In the Hom. dial, the Part. Perf. Act. sometimeshas w instead of o : tiBvyjuitos = Att. TedvrjKoTos (from BvrjtrKa, i

die) ; KeKkqyams for KeKXijyoTfs, calling, from Pres. xXafm.


§278. THE PEEFEOT ACTIVE. 157

Ohs.—The Subjimctive and Optative are not unfrequently formedperiphrastically by the Participle with the corresponding forms

of elfii, I am.

§ 277. The Perfect Active is formed in two different

ways

:

1. The Strong Perfect (Second Perfect)

is formed, like the Strong Aorist, directly from the Stem :

Stem Trpdy, Pres. (Class 4, a) Trpda-crco, I do, Perf.

ire-Trpdy-a. The Strong Perfect, Hke the Strong Aorist,

occurs almost exclusively in the case of radical verbs

(§ 24.5), and is generally the older and rarer form.

§ 278. The following changes of vowels are to be

observed in its formation

:

a after p becomes d: Stem k pay, Pres. Kpaâ>, /'

scream, Perf. Ki-Kpay-a

a otherwise becomes i; : Stem n-Xay, Pres. irXrjo-cra, Istrike, Perf ve-jrKrjy-a

Stem ipav, Pres. ipaiva, Ishow, Perf. Trt-îjv-a Comp.

f becomes o: Stem orpe^, Pres. o-Tpc^m, J §4:Oto§43.turn, Perf. e-o-Tpofjy-a

t „ ot : Stem \i7r, Pres. XciVd), Jfeaae,

Perf Xe-XoOT-a

V „ €vi Stem ûy, Pres. 0euy<o, jTêe,

Perf. 7re-êuy-a

The change of d into a> is quite isolated: Stem pay,

Perf. ep-payy-c, I am torn, Pres. p^jyvv-fii (§ 319, 24), and

§ 277-280. Dialects.—The Hom. dial, is partial to the Strong Per-

fect ; the aspiration does not occur in it : Stem kott ((edn-ra)), KeKcarais.

The Part. Tre-ûf-dr-er, from Stem (pvy (êwyu) is quite an isolated

Horn. form. Hom. forms the Weak Perfect only from Vowel-Stems,

and even here he has sometimes strong secondary forms : Stem 0v, 3

Plur. Perf. Act. ire(j)vd(Tt = Att. ireipvKda-i,, from (j>ia>, I hegef ; Stem

KOTc (Korea, I am angry). Part. Perf. (cocorijar, § 317, D. In the

Fem. Part. Perf. shortenings of vowels often occur : Stem dp, Masc.

Part. Perf. dp-rjp-ws, Joined, Fern, dp-dp-vla; Stem da\ (SdXXaj, 1

hloom), Masc. Part. Perf Te-drjX-ais, Fem. Te-OaX-vZa. The Perf.

Te-Tpr/x-a, I am restless, Pres. TapaiT(ra>, I disturh, Stem rlajpa^, is

irregular.

158 v. THE PBKFECT-STEM:. § 279.

so also tliat of e into to: Stem id, Perf. e"-co6-a, I am

accustomed (§ 275). With the Attic reduplication, and.

in some other cases also, there is no lengthening of the

vowel : Stem o/jy%, op-mpvx-O', Vves. hpvaaw, I dig ; rye-

rypaxjj-a, from 'ypd(f)Q), I write.

§ 279. Some Stems ending in the consonants k, y, it, /8'

change these into the corresponding aspirates, generally

without any lengthening of the Towels

:

Stem KTjpvK, Pres. Kripva-a-a, Iproclaim, Perf. Kc-Krjpvx-a

„ ay, „ aya, I lead, „ â (ayfjox-a)

„ KOTT, „ K&nTa, I hew, „ Ke-Kocj)-a

„ ^Xa/3, „ /SXaTTTiB, I hurt, „ ê-âcp-a

In spite of the aspiration the vowels are changed ins

Ke-Kkoj>-a, Stem K'Ke'jr, Pres. KKeirro}, I steal; ire-iTOfiji-a,

Stem -TrefjuTT, Pres. Tre/iTTco, I send; Te-Tpo(j)-a, Stem

rpeiT, TpeTTO), I turn, which is in form the same as the

Perf. of the Stem rpe^ (Pres. rpeâ, I nourish);

et-Xo%-a (comp.§ 274), Stem Xe^, Pres. 'Ke'^co, I gather.

Ohs. 1.—Pew verbs liave both forms with and without the aspi-

rate : the Stem npay (Pres. 7rpda-(ra>, I do) has both ire-irpdy-a

(intransitive, / have fared) and ire-npax-a (transitive, I have

done); Stem avoiy, Pres. avolya, I open, Perf. av-iay-a (intrans.

I stand open) and av-iax-a (transit. I have opened).

2. The aspirated form of the Perfect, contrary to § 277, occurs.

also in a number of derivative verbs : StemdXXay, dXXdo-cro), /change, from aXXos, Perf. r/'Wax-a.

§ 280. 2. The Weak Perfect (Fiest Perfect)

is formed from the Stem by the insertion of k : Stem \v,.

Xe-\v-K-a. The Weak Perfect is the more recent form,

and with all Vowel-Stems it is the only one in use,

while it is the more common with Stems ending in t, 8,

0, and those in \ fi, v, p.

Ohs.—The only complete Strong Perfect of a Vowel-Stem in Attic

prose is dxijKoa (§ 275, 1) ; but comp. § 317,

§ 281. In regard to the vowel the Weak Perfect foUowa

the cr Future (§§ 260^,261^ :^t^m^ a, Bpd.a,, Si-Bpa-m ^

§ 283. THE PLUPEEPECT ACTIVE. 159^

Stem Ttfia, Tifjurjcreo, rerifirjKa; Stem -rrXv, irXevaeo, ire*

ifXevKa; Stem ttiO (nTeiOa), Ipersuade), ireiafo, "TriireiKa.

yeco, Ipour, Perf. Keyptca, is an exception (§ 265). For

other exceptions see § 301.

Stems in t, S, 6, throw out these consonants before awithout any other change : Stem KOfiiS, KOfii^as, I carry,

KeKOIXlKU.

§ 282. The monosyllabic Stems in \, v, p, having t in the Stemsyllable, change this e in the Weak Perf. into a: Stem o-rcX,

cTTiKXco, I send, Perf. e-o-ToX-Ko; Stem <j>6ep, (jidelpa, Idestroy,.

Perf. ?-(j)dap-Ka. Several in v throw out the v : Stem KpXv^

Kpiva, Ijudge, Perf. Ke-Kpi-KO ; Stem kXXv, kXIvco, I incline, Perf.

Ke'-xXi-Ka; Stem nXvv, liKvvay, IwasTi, Perf. vi-nXv-Ka; Stent

rev, Tfiva, I stretch, Perf. Te-rd-Ka. Wherever v is not thrownout before k, it becomes according to § 51 a nasal y : Stemipav, cf)alvco, I show, Perf. ni-fpay-Ka.

Other Stems of this kind and some in p. admit of metathesis

(§ 59): Stem ^aX, jSaXXm, I throw, Perf. fie-^Xri-K-a ; StemKap, Kdpva, Igrow tired, Perf. <i-Kpj]-K-a (§ 321. 9).

2. Tlie Pluperfect Active.

§ 283. The Pluperfect takes the Augment before the-

Perfect-Stem ; its terminations are those of the his-

torical tenses. Between the Stem and the termination

the diphthong et steps in, which in the 3 Plur. is

reduced to e.

Ohs.—The 3 Plur. in curav is rare and more modern.

The Temporal Augment of verbs beginning with a

vowel is not recognisable, because their Perfect-Stem

§ 282. Dialects.—The Horn. fie-pPXa-Ka for pe-pXa-Ka, from the

Stem poX (Aor. epoXov, I went) is explained by metathesis. Comp.

§§ 51, D., 324, 12.

§ 283. Dialects.—The Ionic dial, has the antiquated endings of the

Pluperf. : 1 Sing, ea, 2 Sing, eas, 3 Sing. «(!/), contracted 11, eiv or

ri ; the 2 Plur. New-Ion. ea-re. Horn. cTe-6rj7r-ca, I was astonished ;

3 Sing. SeSearvrjKeiv, from dens-vea, I dine.

e-pepT]K-ov (Perf. pepxjKa, 1 Heat) and fjvasyov along with rjvoayea

(Perf. avtcya, I compel) are formed quite irregularly according to the

manner of Imperfects.

1(50 V. THE PEHFECT-STEM. § 284.

has already a long vowel : Verbal-Stem 07, ariw, I drive,

Perfect-Stem tjx, TO"^''^-"^^^ Syllabic Augment is

often omitted. The 1 and 3 Sing, in the older Attic

dialect has 77 instead of et and ei-v, as e-XeXiiK-rj.

The formation of the Pluperfect is exactly the same

as that of the Perfect, and like it it is either strong or

weak, and has the vowel long or short or unchanged.

§ 284. 3. The Perfect Middle and Passive

can be formed only in one way, that is, by appending

the personal endings of the principal tenses of the

Middle, without any connecting vowel, to the Perfect-

Stem, i.e. to the reduplicated Verbal-Stem : Stem Xv,

Perf. M. \e-Xv-fiai.

The Infinitive and the Participle always have the

accent on the penultima : XeXvcrdai, XeXvfiivo'; ; Stem

TratSev, ireTraihevcrOai, from iraihevw, I educate.

§ 285. The vowels are treated in the same way as in

the Weak Perfect: Stem Tifia, rerL/irjKa, reTi/jLTjiJiai,;

Stem Tj-td, irkrrei.Ka, jreTreicrfiai, ; Stem <f)6ep, e(f>6apKa,

eÔapfiai; Stem /3aX, /Se/SXij/ca, î^rj/j-ai. The verbs

Tpecpeo, I nourish, Tpeirai, 1 turn, and aTpi<f)0), I turn,

a,lso take a instead of e : Te-Opafi-fiat, Te-rpufi-fiai,

e-a-rpafi-fiai.

§ 286. The final Consonants of consonantal-Stems

change according to the general laws of sound (§§ 45-49)

:

§ 284. Dialects.—In the Horn. dial, the o- of the 2 Sing. Perf. and

Pluperf. Mid. is sometimes thrown out between two vowels : /xtfi'âi

= fuejimjo-ai (meminisW), contracted jiiiivrj ; so also m the New-Ionio

the Imperat. nefiveo for fxefiirqa-o.

§ 285. Dialects.—The Horn. we-irpa-Tat, Stem wop (Strong Aor.

i'wopov, I gave) is explained by metathesis. The following have a

short vowel : Temyfiai, from revxa, 1 prepare, 3 Plur. TereixaTai

;

mcjivyfjLsvos from êu-yo), / flee ; ea-trvpai from aevoi, X hasten ,* v

instead of €u : ne-nvv-pjai, from irvia), § 248.

§ 286. Dialects.—The 6 of the Stem Kopv6 (Kopiaata, I arm)

remains unchanged in Hom. : Kf-KopvO-fievos. alaxuvui, 1 put to

ehame, has rjax^ppAii.

§ 287. THE PERFECT MIDDLE. IGl

1. Before all terminations beginning with fi

every guttural becomes y : Stem ttXek, ttXckib, I twist, iri-itkey-iim

„ dental „ cr : Stem tti 5, Trei'ô), ij5ersMO(ie, jre-7reio--/ie6a

„ labial „ ju: Stew. ypa(p,ypd(j)io, Iwrite, yc-ypa/ji-iicvos.

Obs.—"When a guttural or labial is preceded by a nasal, the latter

is thrown out before /x : Stem Rafitr, Kap-wra, 1 hend, Kt/ca/uâi

;

Stem e\€yx, iXeyx"), I refute, iXfiXeyiicu (§ 275. 1). SomeStems in v by way of exception do not change the v before /i

into <r, but into /i: a^n/im, from o|wi», I sharpen; those

which throw out the v in the Perf. Act., do the same here

(§ 282) ; KcKpifiai (comp. ire-(j>aa--iji.ai from the Stem (pat/);

OTrivha, I offer a libation, Fut. (nreicro, has etnTeurjiai.

2. Before a-

every guttural becomes k, and this with o- becomes ^ : iri-irkeâi

„ labial„ n „ „ „ „ i^: ye-ypaâi

„ dental is thrown out Tre-Treicrai

3. Before t

every guttural becomes k : W-jrXfKi-ai ; Stem Xey, Xe-Xex-rat

„ labial ,, tt : ye-ypan-Tai

„ dent, (except v) „ (7 : jrc-7r«(r-Tai (Stem (ây, 5re'-<âi'-Tat)

4. The o- of a-9 after consonants (§ 61) is dropped,

and then

every guttural becomes x • ni-TrKex-Bov for Tre-TrXe/e-o-ôv

,, labial „ <^ : ye-ypa(p-6c for ye-ypa(p-(rde

„ dent, (except v) „ cr : 7r€-7re7a-dai for 7re-irei6-ir6ai.

V, A., and /> remain imchanged before the ^ which

has arisen from a-6: Stem d)aj', ireifxivdai ; Stem

§ 287. The ending j/rat of the 3 Plur. is irreconcile-

able with Consonantal-Stems. Sometimes the Ionic

§ 287. Dialects.—In the Ion. dial, the forms arm and arc for the

3 Plur. are common : Horn, has ê-^XTi-arai, OaXXm, I throw), neTro-

•njaro (jroTaopai, I flatter), teSaiarac (data), I divide), epxarai,

tepXaro (eipya, I shut in, § 319, 15) ; in New-Ion. irapeaKevdSaTo

(jrapao-Kcudfa, I prepare), KeKoa-fjiiaTai. (K.oap.ia>, I adorn). Three

Horn, forms insert 8 : cppd-S-arai (paiva, I besprinkle), diaix^-6-aTo

(axm-iuu, I am grieved), i\riXd-8-aTo (Stem c'Xa, e\avv(o, I drive);

tpripeSarai from ipeiSa, I support, is irregular.

Digitized by Microsoft® M

162 V. THE PEEFECT-STEM. §288.

UTM takes its place (§ 226, D), before which 7, k, /3, and

IT are aspirated : 'ê-'^pai^-wrai, TerTayârai, (Stem ra^,

Toaaa, I arrange), Te-Tpiârai, (Stem rpt^, rpiâ), Iruh). But the common practice is to use the periphrasis

by means of the Participle with el-cri(v) : yeypaf/./iivoi

elaLv. Comp. Lat. scripti sunt and § 276, Ohs

The following paradigms supply examples of the

above-mentioned changes.

Perfect Middle and Passive.

§291 THE FUTCKE PEEFECT, 163

§ 290. 4. The Pluperfect Middle and Pasdve

differs in every verb from the corresponding Perfect

only by the addition of the Augment and the personal

endings which are those of the historical tenses. Ee-specting the 3 Plur. in vto and ara, and their places

being supplied by periphrasis, see § 287, which is here

applicable also.

§ 291. 5. The Future Perfect or Futurum Fxaetum

adds <T to the Perfect-Stem with the inflexion of the

Future Middle; the or produces the same changes in

the preceding consonants as in the ordinary Future

Middle; "Treirpdêrat (Stem vpay, Trpdcrcra, I do), it

will have been done; 'ye<ypa\êrai, {Stem ypa(p, ypdcpa,

I write), it will have been written.

There are two isolated Future Perfects with Active

endings : ia-ri^ô) (§ 311), I shall stand, and reOvij^m

(§ 324. 4.), I shall be dead, from the Perf. ecrrrjKa,

Tedvr]Ka.

Otherwise its place in the Active is supplied by the

Part, of the Perf. with the Fut. of elfil, I am (ea-ofiai,) :

'Ke\vicai^ ecrojiat, J shaU have loosed (solvero).

164 VI. THE STRONG PASSIVE STEM. §29!

VI.

—

The Strong Passive Stem.

§ 292. From the Strong Passive Stem are formed tb

Strmg or Second Aorist, and the jStrong or Seoom

T'uture Passive.

Present : (palvco

§ 295. Vr. THE STRONG PASSIVE STEM. 165

Second Principal Conjugation (§ 302), to the Stem with-

out a connecting Towel, and the e of the Stem is length-

ened in the Indicative and Imperative to t]. In the

Subjunctive the e is contracted with the vowels of the

Subjunctive : âve-w, <f>a,v5) ; in the Optative the e com-

bined with the modal sign tiy becomes etij : j>ave-ir]-v.

The Infinitive always has the circumflex on the penul-

tima, and the Participle in the Nom. Siiag. Masc. the

acute on the last.

§ 294. The Strong Passive Stem, just like the Strong

Aorist Active and Middle (§ 256), is formed very

rarely from derivative Stems, but it occurs in verbs of all

classes, even the first (§ 247), e being added to the Pure

Verbal-Stem : Pros. pd-nT-co (class 3, 1 sew), Pure Stempa^, Strong Passive Stem paê, Aor. Pass, ippdiprj-v

;

a-<j)dTT(o (class 4, 1 slaughter), Pure Stem a-ây, Strong

Passive Stem aâye, Aor. Pass. ia(j)dr/r]-v, Fut. Pass.

cr(j)ar/'^-crofi,at ; Pres. ypd<f)-a> (class 1), Strong Pass. Stem

ypdcjje, Aor. Pass, eypd^-v. The Strong Passive Aor.

occurs only in such verbs as have no Strong Active

Aorist. The only exception is rpe-n-co, I turn, Aor. Act.

e-rpaw-o-v, Pass. i-Tpdirrf-v.

Obs.—By way of exception ^XXdyiji' is formed from tlie derivative

Stem aWay, Pres. oKKda'aa, I change,

§ 295. As in the Strong Aorist Active (§ 257) the e

is sometimes changed into d: Kkeir-r-w, Isteal, i-Kkd-mj-v;

cneWco, I send, i-crrdXi^v; rpecfi-o), I nourish, i-rpdcjyri-v;

irkeK-co, I twist, i-7rXeKr]-v and i-TrXdKrj-v ; irXrja-aco, I

and sometimes to ij : <j>avri-ij = (j)av^. In the Dual and Plur. the

modal vowel is shortened where this lengthening of the e occurs

:

Saiiel-ere (for Sa/xcT/Tf, Att. Sa/i^Tc). In the Infinitive we find the

Hom. fuvat or /jtev : /iiyriiieuai, Safajfiev,

§ 295. Dialects.—Homer here also employs metathesis (§ 59) as

in the Strong Aor. Act. and Mid. (§ 257, D.) : Pres. ripv-a, I de-

light, Aor. Pass. i-Ta.(mt)-v, Subj. rpaire-a, 1 Plur. Tpairetonev (gatt'

deamus). Inf. Tpanrj-nevai.

166 Vri. THE -WEAK PASSIVE STEM. § 29C

striJce', has i-vXij'Y'jrv, TrKrjy^-tTOfjMi, but ia compositioi

e^-e-TTkop/rj-Vi eK-irXary^-^'o/iat ; the Ptire Stem of verbi

of the second class here reappears : cr??7r-(» (Stem o-utt

I corrupt), e-(7d-jrt)-v ; tij/c-o) (Stem xa k, I melt), i-rdKrj-v

pea (Stem: pi), Iflow), e-ppwj-v, pvi]-a-o/j,ai.

VII.

—

The Weak Passive Stem.

§ 296.. From the Weak Passive Stem are formed the

Weak or Ftrdt Aorist and the Weak or First Futur

Passive,

Pres-. Xvm, Stem \v. Weak Passive Stem \v6e.

l.^—Weah or First Aorist Passive.

Ind: i-\i6r]-v

I was loosed

e-Xvdrj-s

Sub. \v6Si

\v6rj-S

Opt. Xydeirj-v

etc., like- the Strong or Second Aorist Passive.

Imp. Xu^j;-Ti

"Kvdrj-Ta

Inf. \v6rj-vai,

etc.,, like the Strong or Second Aorist Passive.

Part, \v6ei-s, \v6£l<Ta, Xi

Gren. \v6evT-os

2.

—

Weak or First Future Passive-

Ind. \v6r]~(T0}iai- Opt. XvBrjro-oijjirjv Inf. \v6ri-o-ea-6ai

Part. 'KvBtj-o'^ij.cvo'S, rj, c

§ 297. The inflexion of the Weak Passive Stem i

entirely like that of the Strong. Respecting the t o

XcOij-Ti, instead of XvOrj-di see § 53. c.

§ 296. Dialects.—The Weak Fut. Pass, is wanting in the Homerdialect.

§ 297. Dialects.—Eespecting the inflexion see § 293, D.

§ 298. Dialects.—The Horn. dial, after some Vowol-Stems inser

V before 5: ajmvv-v-6r) (Stem nvv, itvkw, I breathe), i&pv-v-i

(i8pva, I fasten), and changes the e of the Stem <jia(v ((paeivi

<t>aiva>, I appear") into a, (badvdnv.^ ^^ ^ Digitized by Microsoft®

$299. VII. THE WEAK PASSIVE STEM. 167

§ 298. The Weak Passive Stem is formed from the

Verbal-Stem hy appending the syllable ê. Before

this syllable the vowels of Vowel-Stems are lengthened

as ia the Future, the Weak Aorist Active, and the Per-

fect: Tifjba, eTCfMJdTjV, "Tretpa, eTreipdOrjv, J tried. Asto the exceptions see § 301. As in the Perfect Middle,

o- is inserted before 6, especially after short vowels,

but often also after long ones : e-TeKk-cr-dtiv from reKeo),

I complete; i-KeXev-a-Onjv, from KeXevco, I order; and

this is the case in the verbs mentioned in § 288, and

especially in yeXda), I laugh, iyeXdadriv; Spaa, I do,

iSpdadTjv; iravw, I cause to cease, eTravadrjv, but also

iiravdrjv. The Aor. Passive of a-aitfo, I save, on the

other hand, is formed from the shorter Stem am without

the o- : icr(io6rjv.

As in the Weak Perfect Active and the Perfect

Middle, the e before X, v, p is sometimes changed into

a: Stem rev (relvo}, I stretch), i-TdOrj-v (comp. § 282).

The changes of the consonants before d are explained

by the laws of sound (§ 45): Stem Trpdy, irpdaa-w,

I do, i-Trpd'^-6rj-v ; Stem 'yfrevB, ifrevSco, J deceive,

€-êvcr-0r]-v; Stem Trefiv, irepm-cc, I send, e-7rifj,(p-6r]-v.

—Eespecting idpi(p6r]v (Pres. Tjoe^w), i6d<p6r]v (Pres.

OdTTTco) see § 54, Obs., and respecting iridrjv, eTvdrjv

(Stems 6e, 6v), see § 53 5.

§ 299. The Weak Aorist Passive and the Weak Future

Passive are, on the whole, more common than the

Strong, and in the case of derivative verbs, as of nearly

all Vowel-Stems, they are the only customary forms of

the Aorist and Future Passive.

There are some primitive verbs of which both Passive

Stems are in use : Stem ^Xa^, Pres. ^Xdirra, I hurt,

Aor. Pass, epXd^rjv and e^lKdÔrjv.

108 verbal adjectives. § 30(

Veebal Adjectives.

§ 300. The Verbal Adjectives are a kind of Passiv(

Participles.

Pres. \voo, Stem Xv, 1. Xv-Toii, -q, bv, loosed, eapahl

of being loosed

2. Xv-rko-'i, a, ov, to he loosened

solvendu-s, a, urn

The First Verbal Adjective is formed by means o

the syllable ro (Nom. to-^, ttj, to-v) from the Verbal

Stem, and has the meaning either of a Participle Per

feet Passive : Xv-To-s^solu-tHr-s, or of possibility, capabl

of being loosened.

The Second Verbal Adjective is formed by means o

the syllable reo (Nom. Tio-<;, Tea, reo-v), which is neve:

contracted, from the Verbal-Stem, and has the meaning

of necessity, like the Latin gerundive : Xu-reo-?, one whis to be loosened, Xvreov ia-rl, loosening must take place

solvendum est.

The vowels preceding the t are in general treatec

exactly in the same manner as in the Weak Passiv(

Aorist ; o- is inserted in the same cases as in the Aoi

Pass. : reXe-cr-To^, KeXev-a-Teov. The consonants befop

T are treated in accordance with the laws of sound

'TrpaK-TO'! (Stem Trpdy, Pres. irpdaaco), ypa-ir-ro-

{ypd^o}), KOfM<T-reo-v (Stem KOfiiS, KoixL^m, I carry!)

Verbs which leave their Stem Vowel short in the formation

of their tenses.

§ 301. The Vowel remains short throughout in

:

§ 300. Dialects.—Spa-ro'-s is derived by metathesis (§ 09) fror

the Stem Sep (bepai, Iflay).

§ 301. Dialects.—The Horn. dial, epda, I love, Aor. Mid. ripaaa

pT]v; dpK€<o, I ward off, rjpKea-a; Kopea, I satisfy, cKopewa; Korea

J ijrudge, Kcrrccra-aTO ; ipva, I draw, eipva-a. On the usual doublin

of the (T after short vowels (ipd(r(raTo, ipitrtraro) see § 261, D.Digitized by Microsoft®

§301.

170 VEEBS WITH A SHOKT VOWEL. § 302.

6va>, I offer, Put. (9c'o-(o, Aot. Mt.Wva-a,^

Perf. Act. TtBvm, Aor. Pass. iTv6t]v,

Perf. Mid. riBviiai.

Xva, I loose. Put. Xva-co, Aor. Act. ekva-a,

Perf. Act. XeXvKo, Aor. Pass. ekvBrjv,

Verb. Adj. \vt6s, Perf. Mid. Xikvuai.

3. TAe wwe? IS short in the Future and Weak Aorist

Active and Middle, but lorig in the Perfect, Aorist

Passive, and Verbal Adjective of KaXico, I call, KoXiaa,

KeK\7)Ka, eicKrj6r)v, kXtjto'? ; alvea>, Ipraise, has alvkaw,

ijveKa, rjveOriv, alveToi;, but Perf. Mid. rjvrîxM.

4. iroOea, I long for ; irovem, I toil ; and hva, I sink,

fluctuate between the short and long vowels : •woOeaoixaii

and iroOrjcroi ; •jroveaw, iTrovija-d/j.rjv ; Boa-co, Aor. Pass.

Chap. XL

—

Second Peincipal Conjugation

or Yerbs in fii.

Peeliminaey Obseevations.

§ 302. The Second Principal Conjugation differs

from the First only in the inflexion of the Present and

Strong Aorist-Stems, and in the case of a few verbs also

in the Perfect and Pluperfect Active.

The special terminations of this conjugation are :

1. The 1 Sing. Pres. Ind. Act. retains the ancient /xt: (prj-iii,

I say (§ 226).

2. „ 3 „ ,, „ „ ,, „ ,, <''(»') (for

ri) : <j>r,a-t(v) (§ 226).

3. „ 3 Plur. „ „ „ inserts the vowel a before the

§ 302. Dialects.—The Horn, dialect often has the ending ada in

the 2 Sing. Ind. Act. : rlBi^-arda, tliou puttest ; e-î;-o-5a,—and jievai

or fiev instead of vai in the Inf. : (pd-fievm, tâ-fiiv ; and a short v

instead of the (rav of the 3 Plur. of the Preterite : €-cj)a-v.

The Horn, dialect sometimes lengthens the Stem-vowel in theSubj. and shortens the Modal-vowel as in the Aor. Pass. (§ 298):'zoiifu=:'ta>iJ,ev (eamus).

§ 304. SECOND PEINCIPAL CONJUGATION. 171

.termination a-i. (for vrt) (§ 226, comp. Dial.), and this a is lengthened

by compensation (i-d<n(y), they go, from the Stem i), and unites

with the a of the Stem : <l>dai(y),

4. In the Optative it] (tf, i), the Modal-sign attaches itself

directly to the Stem : (jia-trj-v ; comp. § 293.

5. The 2 Sing. Imperat, has the ending 6i : (j>d-6i, 1 „ pqo6. The Infinit. has the ending vm : tpd-vm >

7. The 3 Plur. of the Preterite has a-av : e-^''-o-a>/ (3 Plnr. Imperf.)

All terminations of these two tenses are appended to

the Stem without a connecting vowel: ^a-jxev (comp.

Ttfia-o-jMev), ^a-Tco (comp. Tifia-e-TO)) ; in the Participle

also vT attaches itself directly to the Stem : ^ a-v t, of

which the Nom. is formed by the addition of a : <pd<i

;

Stem So, Sov? (comp. § 147, i). In the Subjunctive

alone the final vowels of the Stems are contracted with

the long connecting vowels as in the ordinary contracted

verbs (§. 243) : (j)dra, (pS) ; TtrOk-ai, Tirdw, B6-w-/mu,

Swfjiai.

§ 303. In the Vowel-Stems of this conjugation a

change of quantity takes place in such a manner that

vowels in themselves short are lengthened in the Sin-

gular Indicative Active, a and e becoming »?, o «a, and v v :

<^-fii, I say, Plur. <f>d-fiev, e-(pT]-v, Dual, e-^d-rov [e-Orj-v,

Jplaced]; Plur. e-Oe-ftev; SeUvv-fii, I shmv, Plur. SeiKvv-

/Mev.

Ohs.—Those forms which always have the vowel long are specially

noticed below.

§ 304. AU verbs in fit are divided into 2 classes

:

1. Those which in the Present join their terminations

directly to the Stem : ^-fii;

2. Those which form the Present-Stem by adding vv

to the Pure Stem : hei/c-vv-fjn,, I show, Pure Stem, S e s «,

Present-Stem, BeiKvv,

172 FIEST CLASS OF VEEBS IN /it. 130

I.—FiEST Class of Veebs in fu.

§§ 305 and 306. The Paradigms of this Class of Vert

are inserted on p. 124, fol.

§ 307. Some few forms of the Verbs in fu are forme

§§ 305, 306. Dialects,—The following are Ionic secondary formthose enclosed in brackets helng the New-Ionic.

Active.

2. Sing. Pres. Ind. TL-Brj-a-da bi-hoi-aBa also hi-hoi-s

3. „ ,, ,, Tl-6fi Si-SoI [t-OTo]

3. Plur. ,, ,, Ti-6€'L(n(v') 8i-Sov(ri{v) \^i-(rTc-a(rt(v)\

also (^7rpo)6€ov(ri(v)

2. Sing. Pres. Imperat. Si-Sa-ei (meyi-araInf. Pres. Ti.-6t}p.e-vai hi-Zo-jxev

dt-dovvai

Imperf. 1 Sing. y-n-Be-a'] [e-Si-Sov-v]

3 „ [e-Ti-de-e]

Middle.

S. PI. Pres. Ind. [ri-Bi-arai Si-So-arai.

-,, „ Imperf. „Pres, Part. n-6fj-jicvos

Active.2. Aor. Ind. 3 PI.

„ Subj. 1 Sing, deia [Bio]

3. >j 2 „ Beirjs or Brjrjs Sms

« )> 3 „ Belli Smin(v) or

„ „ 2 D.

['-<7Ta]

i-crre-aTcu]

[i-ore-aro]

earav

etTTaaav

OTTjTJS

3J )J

„ Inf.

„ Ind.

„ Subj.

„ Imper

arficTov (§ 302

D.;

oTctajLiep or

(TTeiOfiet/

1 PI. Becofiev or Smoiiev

Belofiey

"* » Sa)(0(rt(i') ^

Bifievai, Bffiev Sofnevai. dofiev oTrjjifva.

Middle,

iBeo, i'Bfv (§ 37, D. 1)[Herod. TrposB^Kavroj

[Beafiai] Belo/iai

Beo, Bev,

§308. FIEST CLASS OP VEKBS IN fll. 173

after the First Principal Conjugation, as e. g., the 2 Sing.

Imperf. eVi^et?, the 3 Sing, hldei, as if from the StemTt,6e. In the Imperf. the forms iSiSovv, iSiSov;, iSiSov

are the only ones in use from the Stem BtSo; they are

formed in the same manner as those of contracted verbs

(§ 243). Other similar forms will be noticed in treating

of the separate verbs.

In the 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. contraction is sometimes

employed : Ti6ei<n, SiSovcri,

In the 2 Sing. Imperat. Pres. Act. the real ending 6c

is dropped, and the Stem-vowel is lengthened to com-pensate for it : SlSov for BlSodt.

In the same person of the Aorist after a short vowelI only is dropped, and the remaining 6, according to

§ 67, is changed to ? : So-6i, Soy, but o-ttj-Oi, whichonly in compounds sometimes appears as a-rd, e. g^

KaTaard.

In the 2 Sing. Mid. of the Present and Imperfect th&

o- between the two vowels is preserved : rlOe-aai, rlde-a-o,

eride-ao ; only the 2 Sing, of the Subj. is treated entirely

like the contracted verbs of the First Principal Conjuga-

tion. In the 2 Sing. Mid. of the Strong Aorist, on the

other hand, the o- is thrown out, which gives rige to a.

contraction: e-de-a-o, e-de-o, e-6ov; Imper. de-ao, 6e-o,.

00V.

Ols.—The forms of the 2 Sing. Imperat. Mid. compounded with

monosyllabic prepositions, after contraction throw the accent

as a circumflex upon the last syllable : irpo-doi ; but Homer has-

avv-Beo and ncpi-dov.

§ 308. The three verbs conjugated above (p. 124) dis-

tinguish the Present-Stem from the Pure Stem by re-

duplication, that is, the initial consonant with t is prefixed

before the Stem : So, BuZo ; 6e, nOe (§ 536) ; l-aTa for

ai-<TTa according to § 60 I. (comp. Lat. si-sto). In like

manner the Stem ^pa in the Pres. becomes ki-xp«^

(Ki^prj-fjLi, I lend); irXa and •n-pa, with the insertion

of a nasal, become irirfi-TrXa, m-iJ.-Trpa (irlfi'TrX'rifii;

174 FIRST CLASS OF VEKBS IN (1,1. §301

I fill ; iri/nrpij/M, I burn); but av^tr-irlrirXri-iit, e/j.-'Tn

n-X7]-//,i ; the Stem e becomes i-rj-fu I send ; and, wit

the reduplication within the Stem itself, ova become

h-vi-vrj-yi,!,, I benefit.

§ 309. The Deponents Simnat, I can; iirlaraijuu, I understand

KpijxafMi, I hang ; together with the Aorists cTrpia/iriv, I bought

avrjjj.r)v, I benefited, withdraw the accent, even in the Suhjunc

tive and Optative, as far as possihle from the end : bivajia

eTrlaraiVTo (comp. tcrrw/xat, torati/ro).

Other peculiarities of verbs of this class are

:

§ 310. The three Stems 6e (ridrifii). Bo {BiStofu), an(

I (iT/yat) form an irregular Weak Aorist in ku : eOrjKa

eSoDKu, rjKa, but in the Middle we find only '^Ko./j/riv. Lthe Sing, of the Indicative the Active forms are custo

mary instead of those of the Strong Aorist, but in th(

Dual and Plural of the Indicative they are rare. Th(

other moods and the Participles have the strong form;

exclusively.

The really customary forms of the Aorist, therefore

are these

:

Ind.

§312. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN jJii. 175

Mid. and Aor. Pass., and ê in'the Aor. Pass. : Be-Bo-fiai,

iSoOfjv, ecTTddrjv, iTeBrjv, redriaofiai. On the meaning of

the different forms of u7tij/ii, see § 329, 1.

§ 312. To the First Class of the Verbs in /i t there

also belong

:

A) Verbs whose Stem ends in a (comp. La-Trjfu)

:

1. ^-/At (comp. Lat. d-io), I say, only in the Impf. ^v,

8 Sing.7i(comp. § 213, Ohs.).

2. o-vlrV7]-iJLi (Stem o 1/ a, § 308), Ihenefit, Mid. ovivafiai

(§ 309), I have advantage, Strong Aor. Mid. mvij/Mjv,

&vri<To, &vr)To ; Opt. ovaifiTjv, Imperat. oinja-o, Inf. 8pa-

crOai,, Fut. ovrjCTw, ovija-ofiai ; Aor. Pass. wvijOtjv.

3. 'n-l-fi-TrXri-fM (Stem TrXa, § 308). Additional form,

-TrXjjeo), I Jill [Lat. ple-o], Fut. ttXijo-co, Perf. Mid.

vre-TrXrja/jyai, Aor. Pass. eTrX'ijadijv.

4. irlrîrTTfyrj-fjiv (Stem ITpa), additional form, Trpijda

(quite like 3).

5. ^-fil (Stem â), I say, 2 Sing. Impf. eâOa(enclitic in Pres. Ind. except 2 Sing., comp. § 92, 3).

Imperat. ^ddl, or <f>a.9c ; comp. iâanca, § 324, 8.

6. ')(pri (Stem %/3a, XP^) "^^ must, Subj. xpfl. Opt.

XpeiT], Inf. ^pfjvat. Part. 'xpeoDv (only Neut. from

Xpaov, according to § 37 D.). Impf. ixpv^ or XPV^'Fut. 'XPW^''i

—a.'jTO'xpVt ^t suffices, also 3 Plur. airo-

Xpa)a-i(v), &c., as above airoxpaw.

7. Ki-îj-fiL (Stem %/5a, § 308), Ilend, Inf. Kixpd-vai, Fut. XPV<^^> -^0^^- e%/3i7<ra. Further the depo-

nents :

8. arya-fiac (Stem 'ay a), I admire, Fut. ar/aa-o/jiai,, Aor.

Pass. TjydaOrjv, Verb. Adj. dyaaro^.

. 9. Buvdrfiai (Stem Suva) I can, 2 Sing. Ind. Bwy is

rare (§ 309), Impf. iSvvdfirjv, 2 Sing. eBvvio, Fut.

§ 312. Dialects. —3. Horn, has the Aor. TrXijTo, it was

3. Plur. jrkfjvTO, Opt. irK^/jajv, or TrkfijirjV, Imper. [e/njTrXTjo-Qi

6. Herod, airixpa.

8. Horn, ayaofiai,, dyaio/iai.

176 FIRST CLASS OF VEEBS IN /i*. §312

Bvv^a-ofiat, Aor. ehvvrjd'nv, seldom iBvvda-dTjv. The Aug

Tfient is frequently/ t) (§ 234, Ols.), Perf. SeSvvjjfiat, Verb

Adj. Swaro?, capable, possible.

10. eiriaTOriiai (Stem eiria-Ta) I understand, 2 Sing

eTTia-Taaai, Imporf. ^Trto-ra/x?;!', rjiriaTco, Put. i'TTiaT'^-

aofjMi, Aor. TjiTiaTrjO't^v, Verb. Adj. eina-rrjTO'i.

11. epa-fj,at, (Stem e/aa), poetic, Z Zowe (comraonlj

epdco), Aor. Pass. ripda-Oijv.

12. Kpefia-fiM (Stem Kpe/Mo), I hang (§ 309). Fut

Kpe/jiTJao/iai, Aor. eKpefjida67]v. Additional forms, § 319,

2

OJs.—The following may serve as examples of the formation o

words : to 6i-fia, the position ; o ho-rrjp, the giver ; rj trra-o-i-f

tte rise; ij ovrj-a-i-s, the benefit, from the Pure Verbal-Stem

differing from the Present-Stem ;

—

fj <^r)-ii-q,fd-ma, talk ; fj hvva

fu-s, power; tj iinaTq-in), knowledge, from the Verbal-Stem

which is the same as that of the Present.

Dialects.—13. Hom. ajxevat, satiate, Stem, d, Subj. ecoftcv.

14. Stem /3 a, Part. jStjSds, stepping.

14. b. Stem 8 e a, 3 Sing. Imperf. hiaro, seemed, Aor. fiod-o-craro.

15. Stem l\a, IXdcTKoiiai, iXaofiai, I am gracious, Hom. Imperal

16. Stem Kepa (comp. Kepavvvju, 1 mix), Hom. 3 Plur. Subj

Mid. Kipavrai. To these belong also, in regard to the inflexion o

the Present-Stem, those Hom. verbs, which either are tised only ii

the Present-Stem, or form the Present-Stem from the Verbal Stei

by affixing the syllable -v a :

a) haix,-vr]-p.i (also hap.-va-a), I tame. Mid. iaii-va-p.ai, Ful

Sajudco, dapidas. Weak Aor. Inf. 8ap.dcrai, bapaaaadai, Perf. dedfiTj

fiai, Aor. Pass. i&p.rjdriv, 8apda-dr]v, and Strong Aor. Pass. eSdfirj

(Subj. Sapeico).

J) KipvTjpi (also Kcpdwvpi, § 319, 1), I mix, Part. Kipvds, SSinj

Imperf. cKipva, comp. § 319, 1.

c) Kpripvdpai, poetic additional form of Kpcpa-pai (12), comj

also § 319, 2.

d) pdpvapai, I contend, 2 Sing. Imperf. ipApvdo.

e) TrepvTjpi, I sell, Part. Trepvds, Trepvapevos.

f) nlXvapat, I approach. Stem neX, Aor. 3 Sing. e-TtXTj-ro.

g) irirvripi, I spread. Part, jrirvas, Imperf. irirvavro, com]

§ 319, 3.

/() iTKl&vrjpi, 1 scatter, a-Klhydrai, comp. § 819, 4.

§ 313. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN fM. 177

§ 313. B) Verbs whose Stem ends in e (comp.

1. Mj-/it (Stem 6, Pres.-Stem t-e, i. e., t-l according

to § 308), I send.

Act. Pres. 3 Plur. Ind. lacn{v), Opt. ieiriv (secondary-

forms hifii,, 3 Plur. lotej/).

Imperf. 'ir)-v (secondary forms [ww], let?, t'et), Plur.

'ie-fiev, 3 Plur. ie-a-av, a<f>iei and îîet

(a<f>l7i/j,i, I send away). Comp. § 240.

Aor. rf-K-a, riK(K, '^Ke(v), elrov, e'irrjv, elfiev, etre,

elcrav.

Subj. &, Opt. etT?!/, Imperat. e?, Inf. eti/at, Part.

et? (Stem ivr). On this Aor. comp. § 310.

Put. â-cD, Perf. el-K-a.

Mid. Pres. '{re-jmu, I hasten, strive, Subj. la/iai, Ifj, &c..

Opt. teZ/ii;!/ (additional form, lOL/Mrjv), Imperat.

tWo, or Ebi;, Imperf. t-e/irjv.

Aor. ei/iT?!', elo-o, elro, Subj. &fiai,, Opt. 6i/ii;j;

(additional form, o"fj/rjv).

Ohs.—The et of the Ind. et-jaiji', is caused by the Augment (§ 236),that of the Opt. by the Mood-sign (§ 302, 4).

§ 313. Dialects.—!. Horn. 2 and 3 Sing. Pres. his, lei ; 3 Plur.

ieiiTi(v) ; 1 Sing. Impf. leiv, leis, lei ; 3 Plur. iev, 3 Sing. Subj.

"rj(n(y') ; Inf. Ufievai ; Aor. Act. eijKa ; 3 Plur. ea-av ; Subj. eia ; Aor.

Mid. 3 Plur. ej/ro.

2. Put. ô-ca and (dv)€a-ai [Herod. fiefieTijiivos as a Part. Perf. of

lj.eTiT]iu=iie6iTjni, § 52, D., as if from fiCTia with irregular reduplica-

tion].

Moreover

:

3. Stem a(f)e, Pres. aijjut, J iZoto, 2 Dual ajjToi/, 3 Sing. Impf. 017

and aei, Inf. dijvai and dij/ievai. Part. Aor. Nom. Plur. aevres, Mid.

4. Stem 8 1 e, (eV) BUa-av, they frightened, hUvrai, they flee. Opt.

Stotro.

5. Stem biê, Si^Tjfiai, additional form, Sifm, Iseeh, 2 Sing. hi(riai.

Inf. 8i^Tja-6ai, Put. Si^rjiroiiai.

6. Pres. Kixifu (comp. § 322, 18) J obtain, Subj. Kixîa, Opt..

Kixfi^v, Inf. Ki^rivai, Part, kix^'ls. Mid. Kip^^/iEvoj.

Impf. 2 Sing.^'«'Xî5,^f,fiTi/»T3lb«®

178 FIEST CLASS OF VEKBS IN fll. § 314

Fut. rfcroimt,, Perf. el-iiai, Plup. eC-fi'qv.

Aon Pass. e'lOi^v, Subj. eOm. Fut. idiâofiai.

Yerb. Adj. ero?, erio?.

2. SI-St]-/!,!, (Stem Se), I bind, a rare additional font

of S^-Q, (§ 244, 1).

§ 314. C) Verbs wbose Stem ends in t

:

1. el-jii (Stem I, Lat. t-re), I go.

Pres. Ind, ct-î l'-/»cv Subj. i-ta t-js etc.

ei t-Toy T-Tf Opt. i-oii)v l'-o(j etc.

er-(7i(>') i-Tov i-acri(v) Imperat. t-Bi i-rco etc.

3 Plur. l~6pra)v or i-raa-av

Inf. l-i-vM Part. i-a)>', t-oSo-a, i-di' (Gen. i^wr-os, comp. Lat

Impf. jyeiv or ,â êifiev or ,17/xew

_^'eiy „ ijeicrBa êiTov, tjtov, ffecre „ tjts

Ijei ,, êiv rjeiTijv, h'tiji' rjeirav

Verbal Adj. tro?, tVeo? (additional form iTrjTeov, it ii

necessary to go).

Obs.—The Present, especially in the Indicative, has a Futun

meaning ; the Imperfect has the endings of a Pluperfect, ^ ii

produced by the Augment preceding c (.

2. Kel-fiai (Stem xei), I Me, has the inflexion of i

Perfect. 2 Sing. xel-aM, 3 Plur. Keivrat, Subj. 3 Sing

KerjTai, Opt. KeoiTo, Imperat. kqIcto, Inf. KelaOai, Part

Keifievo^ ; the compound TrapaKeifMao, Inf. irapaiceicrOai

(Comp. fifjâi, § 315, 2).

§ 314. Dialects.—1. Stem I, 2 Sing. Pres. Ind. tltrBa, Subj. '!.ri<rea

ir)<jiv, 1 Plur. 'Vojifv, 'lOfiev, and 'la/icv. Opt, loj, iei'i) or etri, Ini

Impf. fia and îw, 3 Sing. ^'ie(v) or te(i/), 1 Plur. ôj^v, 3 Plui

^loi/, ij'i<Tav, with itt/v, I'/iej', to-ay.

lût. et(ro)Liat, Aor. eladfiTjv and ieKrdfirjv.

2. Stem K e t, 3 Plur. KciWai, Kcarai, Keuvrat, Impf. Keiaro, Kear

\_Ki€Tm=KeiTai], Part. Fut. Kccav, CMJi<Mri(S, Inf. Keiiftev.

ovo is an Hom. Stem in o, Pres. Svofim, I vituperate, ovoa-ai

3 Sing. Opt. SvoLTo (§ 309), Put. ovoa-a-ojiat, Aor. avoa-afuqv, amfrom the Stem o v, avdfirjv.

pv or epv is an Hom. Stem in u, 3 Plur. elpvarai, they rescui

protect. Inf. pua-dai, epvaBai, elpifievos, Impf. 2 Sing. Upuaa, 3 PIui

pvaro, ipvaro, e'lpvvro ; moreover. Inf. Act. elpvuevai, to draw, Aoi

^liJ. pva-aro, he rescued, epitraaro, he drew.Digitized by Microsoft®

§315. FIKST CLASS OF VEEBS IN /if. 179

Obs.—When compounded with prepositions, Kiijiai is almost

identical in meaning with the Perf. Pass, of the coiTesponding

compounds of Ti6r)ja : viroridrjiu, I lay as a foundation,

VTr6ii€iTai, it is laid as afoimdation.

§ 315. D) Verbs whose Stem ends in a consonant (o-)

:

1. €1/111 (Stem is Lat. esse"), I amPres. Ind. el-fil (for e<rî) iir-jiiv

ft (for ia-iTi) iiT-rov ea-Tf (es-tisy

ia-Ti(y) (Lat. es-t") ctr-rov el-(Ti(y)

Subj. S Sifiev Opt. cirfv eirffiev Or c';«ej'

lis rjTOV TjT€ eirjs eirjTOv or etroj/ etjyre or eire

j; ^roi/ £o"i(v) e'lTj elrjrrjv or etTTji* eiqfrav Or etei'

Imperat. lo-fit eotoj/ tore Inf. tivai

eo-ro) eoTOiV earaxrav Part, ^j/ uuo'a ^v (Stem ovt)(Lat. esto) earcovj SvTav

Impf. ^v or 7 TJfiev

TjaOa rjuTOV or §rov rjTf or ôre

jyv TjCrTriv or ^Vt/i' ^crai'

Impf. Mid. ijfiriv (rare)

Fut. UtTOfiai 3 Sing, eorai

V. Adj. icrriov.

Ohs. 1.—The loss of the cr of the Stem is compensated for by the

vowel being lengthened in the 1 Sing. (§ 42) : eljii for eV/xi, in

the 2 Sing, el for ia-i, which has arisen from the eVo-i preserved in

Homer (comp. §§ 49, 61, 6). In the 3 Sing, the original

ending t t is retained : cVtiX"), the 3 Plur. has el(ri{v) from

fo-vn. The Subj. S stands for ea (Hpm.) from eVm ; the Opt.

§ 315. Dialects.

—

Ionic additional forms : 2 Sing. eV-o-i or eif,

1 Plur. elfih, 3 Plur. eaa-i,{v) ; ia-irl is also enclitic, but not €aa-l(v).

Subj. 1 Sing, em, eici), 2 Sing, ejjs, 3 Sing. er}ai.(y), wK"), %j3 Plur. cw(ri(j')

Opt. also €ois, €ot, 2 Sing. Imperat. Mid. i'cra-o, 3 Act. earco,

3 Plur. ea-Tav

Inf. e/i/ifvai (for etT-fievai), efi/ji^v, eficvai, Ujiev

Part, emy, iovcra, i6v (Stem iovr)

Imperf. 1 Sing, â, ta, eov ; 2 Sing, ejtrâ [eaj], 3 Sing, rjev, erjv,

rjriv, [2 Plur. ea«], 3 Plur. fo-ai-; 3 Plur. Mid. eiai-o (^.ro)

Fut. e(T(rojjuu, 3 Sing, eaerai, etraerai, i&celTai (§ 264)

2. 3. Plur. earai, etarai, Imperf. earo, elaro

3. Inf. tSfievai, to eat, Pres. ea-da, ia-dia, eSa lhat.es-tis= editis']f

Comp. § 327, 4.

4. 2. Plur. Imperf. <}>epTe=(l>€peTe, Iring [Lat./crfe].

180 FIKST CLASS OF VERBS IN fXl. § 31(

lirjv for ia-~irjv, as the Inf. ctvai for id-vai ; &v for iav (Horn

from itT-av. In the Impf. the Dual has most fully preserve

the (T.

05s. 2.

—

dfi.1 is enclitic in the Pres. Ind. except the 2 Sing, i

(comp. § 92, 3) ; tori is paroiytone when it denotes existenc

or means the same as c|foTi "it is possible," as well as at th

heginning of a sentence and after the particles oi, jiij, €i, mj

Kal: earI 6eos, there is a God; ovk ean, it is not joossibli

When merely external causes prevent it from heing encliti

(§ 93, c), ea-Ti(v) is oxytone : (piKos icrrlv f'/xoC, he is myfrienaOhs. 3.—In the compounds of elfii the accent remains on tli

Stem-syllable ; e.g. in the Imperf. Trapijv, in the Suhj. and Opt

ottS, ajrelev, in the Inf. and Part, direivai, irapoyv, in the 3 Sing

Fut. napeo'Tai.

2. rjfiat (Stem 17?), J sit, has, like xeifiai, the in

flexion of a Perfect.

Pres. ^/iat rjfiedov

?j<jai fjcr6ov

rjaraL fjcrOov

Impf. rjfirjv, fjao, &C.

In Attic prose we find almost exclusively the com-

pound Kadr)fiai,, of which 3 Sing. KddrjTai, Subj. Kadto/xai

Opt. Ka6olfir]v, 3 Plur. KaOolvro, Imperat. KaQr^ao 01

kclOov (from KaOeero), Inf. Kadrjadat, Part. Ka6rjfx,evo<;,

Imperf iKadrjfirjv (§ 240) or KadrjixTjv, 3 Sing. eKadijTO 01

KadrjcTTO, 3 Plur. eKadrjino or KaOrjvTo.

§ 316. The following Strong Aorists formed without a

connecting vowel from verbs whose Present-Stem mostly

follows the First Principal Conjugation, likewise belong

to the First Class of Verbs in /u. t

:

Stems in a.

1. e-^7]-v (Stem /3 a), Pres. ^aivm, I go, Imperat. yS^^t,

in compounds also /3a (KaTd^d), Inf ^rjvai,, Part. jSa?.

rifieOa

§316, FIRST CLASS OF VEEBS IN /it. 181

2. jTipa-vai (Stem yrjpa), Inf. to the Pres. y7jpd-i7Ka;,

Igrow old, § 324, 1.

3. e-Sparv (Stem Bpd), Pres. Si-Spd-criea}, § 324, 2,

I run, Inf. Bpd-vai, Part. Spa?.

4. e-icTorv (Stem k t a), Pres. KTUvm, I kill. Part. KTa-i,

Part. Mid. Kra-fievo^ (killed).

5. e-TTTTj-v (Stem Trra, Trre), Pres. TreTo/iat, I fiy.

Part. TTTa?, Mid. Trrdfievot;, Inf. TrreaOai,.

6. e-T\r]-v (Stem rXa), J endured, Subj. tXoj, Opt.

rKairjv, Imperat. rXfjOi, Inf. rX^vai, Put. TXrjo-ofiac,

Perf. T6T\9y«a (§ 317, D., 10).

7. e-cfidrj-v (Stem ^â), Pres. <f>0dv{0, I anticipate, Inf.

8. e-irpid-ij,r]v (Stem Trpia), Thought, Imperat. irpiw.

Stems in e.

9. e-a^Tf-v (Stem cr/3e), Pres. aîvvvfii, I quench,

§ 319, 7, Inf. <7/3î/at.

10. eraickrj-v (Stem cr/eXe), Pres. o-«eXX&), I dry. Inf.

o-zcXiji/at.

11. Imperat cr;iê-?, from <j-)(i-Oi, (Stem o-;)ê), Pres.

6X0), § 327, 6, 1 Sing. Ind. e-ax-o-v.

Stems in us.

12. k-oKa-v (Stem d\a), I was caught, Pres. okLitko-

fiai (§ 324, 17), Opt. aKoiijv, Inf. akSsvai, Part. dXom.

13. e-^Lco-v (Stem /Stw), Pres. /Siow, i" Z»ve, Opt.

^lanfu. Inf. ^L&vai, Part. î,ov<;.

Dialects.—2. Part, yr/pas.

3. [Her. cSpi;^].

4. 3 Sing. cKTa, 3 Plur. eicrav, Subj. KTeafiev, Inf. KTa/ifvm, Mid.

tKTaro (he was killed, § 255, D. 2), Pass. Aor., 3 Plur. eKraSev.

5. Mid. ejrraTo, Sabj. bt^toi, Dor. 1 Sing. Act. orrav.

6. 3 Plur. eTXai/.

7. Subj. 3 Sing, (pdrjri, or (^55(7((i'), (Trapa)(j)6alrja-ij(v'), 1 Pluj.

<j>6ea>iiev.

12. ;}X(ax, Subj., liXcia. Opt. 3 Sing. dXoij;, Inf. dXtoÊcat.

182 FIEST CLASS OF VERBS IN /Ml. § 31f

14. e->yvai-v (Stem yvco), Pres. yi-yvai-a-Ka), J come t

Mow (§ 324, 14), Opt. ryvol-nv, Imperat. 7i'w6't, Id

ryvavai. Part. 71/0V9.

Stems in t.

15. Imperat. -Tri-di, (Stem iri), Pres. ttIvco, I drink

1 Sing. Aor. Ind. emov (§ 321, 4).

Sterna in v.

16. e'-Su-i' (Stem Bv), Pres. 8i5ft), / diVe, Imperat. S£)^«

Inf. Bvvac, Part. 809. As to its meaning see § 329, 4.

17. e-^v-v (Stem <jiv), I became, Pres. ^vco, Iproduce

Inf. (j>vvai.

Dialects-—14. Subj. -jv&kh. Inf. yvaiievai.

15. Imperat. n-iV.

16. 3 Pliir. cSu-i-, Subj. Stfo), Sr^j, 3 Sing. Opt. Sst] (from Su-i'i)]

Inf. Sviiev.

17. 3 Plur. c<^t;i/.

Besides these the following are peculiar to the Ep. Dial. :

—

18. Part, anovpas, Pres. diravpawj I take away.

19. Stem jSXi;, Pres. /SaXXm, I throw, 3 Dual, ^h^Xtjttjv (me

together), Fut. ^vp^Xfjo-ojiai, Mid. e/SXT/ro (was At*, § 255, D. 2])

Subj. /3X^-€-Tai, 2 Sing. Opt. ;8Xcio, Inf. îjcrBai, Part. /SXij/ievo

(All!).

20. Stem out a, Pres. oiram, I wound, 3 Sing. oStS, Inf. oirofit

vat, Part. Mid. ovrajievos (wounded'). Verb. Adj. oCrarof.

21. Stem Trra, Pres. n-Tijo-a-m, J sioop, 2 Dual, c-jjt^-ttjj', Part

Perf. 5rfnT7)o)r.

22. Stem ttXo, Pres. jreXafm, I approach, Aor. Mid. irX^ro.

23. Stem /Spa, Pres. jSt-^pti-o-Kw, i ea« (§ 324, 13), Aor. tfipav.

24. Stem n-Xa), Pres. ttXcoco, / sa»7, 2 Sing. Aor. en-Xmr, Part. TrXm-s

25. Stem kti, Pres. Kn'fw, Ifound. Part. Aor. Mid. iv-Kri-jj-evo

(well-founded).

26. Stem qbfli, Pres. (pdivm, I waste away, Subj. Aor. Mid. 05ie

Toi, Opt. (pdlii-qv, (J)61to, Inf. (j)dl(Tdai, Part. <^6lfiiVos.

27. Stem kXv, Pres. kXuib, I Jiear, Imperat. Aor. kXCî or KexXBî

jcXCre or (ce/tXi/TE.

28. Stem Xu, Pres. Xiim, i Zoose, Aor. Mid. Xvp-riv, Xuto or XCro.

29. Stem nvv, Pres. Trvim, I ireathe, Aor. Mid. ap.vvvTO (he ncovered ireath).

30. Stem <rv, Pres. o-fum, I scare, Aor. Mid. otuto, Part, cripfvos.

31. Stem xu, Piês. xe<», -f yow (§ 248), Aor. Mid. ex"™) X^"Part. j(ypevos.

§ 317. PIKST CLASS OF VERBS IN fu. 183

§ 317. Several Perfeots also iave some formB witkout

& connecting yowel

:

A) Vowel-Stems,

A number of Vowel-Stems form the Sing. Perf. Ind.

Act. regularly, but in the Dual and Plural of the

Perfect and Pluperfect Ind., in the other moods, and in

the Infinitive and Participle, may connect the endings

immediately with the Perfect-Stem.

1. Stem /3 a, Pres. âiva, I go i(,§ 321, l).

Perf. Ind. ê^rjK-a jSeâ-fiev

3 PL Subj. ê^&aoiy). Part. ySe^Sw?, ê^mcra, Gen.

/SeySwTO?.

2. Stem rya (for yev), Pres. rylryvofjuu, Iheeome, Perf.

lye-yov-a, Plur. also <yi-'yd-/j.ev (§ 327, 14), Part. 'yeyay<;,

Gen. ryeySiTo^.

Dialects.—32. Stem d\ (aXXo/iai, I sprmg), Aor. Mid. SXo-o, 3\ro,

Subj. SKerai, Part. SK/ievos.

33. Stem yfv, only in yEvro, 7i£ took.

34. Stem Sex (Pies. SexofO'j I accept), Aor. iiiyjirjv, 3 Sing.

•hlKTo, Imperat. S/Jo, Inf. hexBai (comp. § 273, D.).

35. Stem Xey (Xcym, I collect), A'or. Mid. Xekto, Ae counted.

36. Stem Xex (iô Pres.), Aor. Mid. Xckto (he laid himself),

Imperat. Xeô, Inf. \ex6m. Part. (jaa-ayUyjievos, Aor. Act. eXeâ,

Mid. iKeiaro, Fut. Xffo/iai.

37. Stem /ity, Pres. filoya, I mix, Aor. Mid. %iuk.to, iukto.

38. Stem op, opvufu, I excite, Aor. Mid. ^pro, Imperat. Sptro or

opa-eo (Spa-ev), Inf. opdac, Part. -Spixevos.

39. Stem n-ay (jr^yw/it, Ifix), Aor. Mid. rCTn/KTo, ii was fixed.

40. Stem jraX (ttoXXci), I wield), Aor. Mid. n-dXro.

41. Stem jrepfl (wepSa, I destroy). Inf. Aor. Mid. n-ep5at(io 5«

To tkese are to be added the Participles whicb bave become

Adjectives, aa-p-cvos, ylad (Stem dS, &vbava, I please), "iKjievos,

Javmurahle (Stem Ik iKviopxu., I come).

§317. Dialects.—1. Hom. 3 Plur. jSeâao-iCf), Part. |3e/Sa<Bf, Dual.

2. Horn. 3 Plur. yeyaaa-t^v). Part, yeyaas, yeyavia. Gen. ycyaSyros,

5 D''al Plup. (fir)ycyaTijV.

184 FIRST CLASS OF VEEBS IN fU. §317.

3. Stem Ova, Pres. 6vr]-aK(o, I die, Perf. Te-dwij-Ka,

Plur. Ti-6va-/j,ev, &c., Inf. redvdvat, Part. TeOvew'i,

Te^j/fiftjo-a, re^z/eo?, Plupf. 3 Plur. eTedvatrav (^ 324, 4).

4. Stem crra, Pres. t-trrTy-yitt, Perf. e-ariq-Ka I Stand,

Plur. e-cTTci-fiev, Subj. karSijMev, ea-Ta)ai(v), Opt. eoTairjv,

Imperat. earadi, eaTara, ecrrarov, earare, Inf. ierrdvai.

Part. ea-Td)<;, kcncocra, e<7r6<;, Gen. Io-timto?, 3 Plur.

Plupf. eo-rao-ai; (§ 306 &c.).

5. Stem St, Perf. Se-St-a or Se-Boi-Ka, I fear, Plur.

SeBi-fiev, SeStacrt(i'), Subj. SeSw», Opt. BeSiei'rjv, Imperat.

B'iBiOi, Inf. BeBievai, Part. SeStcoy, Plupf. iBeSieiv, 3 Dual

iBeBlTTjv, 3 Plur. iBiBiaav, also Aor. eSetcra, Fut. Set-

Ois.—The regular and irregular forms are mostly both in use.

B) Consonant-Stems.

In tliese the peculiar changes of the vowels (§ 303)

and consonants (§§ 45-49) must be obserred.

6. Stem Id (Aor. elSov I saw, § 327, 8).

VerlAnA. olS-a, I know itr- fie v Subj. el8Z eliZiiev

oi-ada \(r~Tov 1<r~Te eldjjs slb^Tov eld^re

oi8-t(i')io--roj' '<T-da-i(v') el&jj eiS^rov «3S<n(i/)Opt. «8ei7;v, Imp. to--^! 'icr-Tov 'la- -re Inf. «8eVat

itr-ro) icr-TO)!' i(7-T(oo-ai' Part.eiS'cif, elSvIa,

elBos, Gen. eifior-os

Plup. fjSeiv or nfi?) (i knew) §Seiiicv or ^aiifv

jlbeia-Ba „ ^Srjada ^8e ltov or rj(TT0V ^Seire „ ^orejSei(i/) „ ^trj rjbeirrfv „ fja-rriv fjSecrav „ yaav

Put. cia-ofiai, Verb. Adj. itrrt'oi/.

Dialects.—3. Imperat. ndvadt, Inf. ^^^/^{^(ai), Gen. Part.TefceSrof, TfSi/ijSroy, TeBveiaros, reBprjoTos, TcBveioTOS, Fem. TfOinjv'ia.

4. 2 Plur. Ind. also sa-TrjTc, Part, eoraiij, Gen. forarfTor [Her.€(TTea>s, ea"reS(ra].

5. Sfi'Sea, Sei'dtju.fi', Imperat. SeiSiOi, 1 Sing. Perf. also Sei'SoiKo,

Aor. tfideio-a (comp. § 77, D.).

6. 1 Plur. U-ficv [Her. and sometimes also in Att. writers o'Ba/iev,

3 Plur. oiSao-i] Subj. eiSem or ISea, Plur. eiSofifv, fiSfrf, Inf.

i8;teK{ai), Fem. Part. JSuIa, Plup. [^Sra] ^fi'S^y, J'SfeCv) or ^ci'Sj; [2Plur. sSeWe], 3 Plur. 'Uav, Fut. elSriaw.

§318. SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN fit. 185

Ohs.—Besides ola-Qa we rarely have oZSas, more frequently xi&eis,

fl&Tjs, together with ySeitrda, and nSe/iei', JSere instead of pci/ifi/,

fjSeiTe,

7. Stem Ik, only in the Perf. eotKa Iresemble, appear,

1 Plur. poet, eoiyfiev, 3 Plur. quite irregularly el'â-

a-i(v) (comp. icraa-i). Inf. elKevai (poet, with ioiKevai),

Part. eiKm^ (with eoiKms), elKvXa, cIko^, Plup. imaetv.

8. Stem Kpay, Pres. Kpd^w, I cry, Perf. KeKpar/a, Im-perat. Ki-Kpa^-di,.

n.

—

Second Class of Verbs in /iî.

§ 318. 1. The Second Class of the Verbs in /i t belongs

to this conjugation only in regard to the inflexion of

Dialects.—7. Impf. eote [Her. oiko, oikms], Dual t'iinTov, 3 DualPlup. itnTTiv, 3 Sing. Plup. Mid. ij'iKTo or ci'KTo.

Besides

:

9. Stem fia, 2 Dual Perf. /uftaTov, strive, jifjiajiev, fiifmre, /leimda-i,

Imperat. ji,eiw.Ta>, Part, /j-efiaais, v'ta, 6s, Gen. aros, 3 Plur. Plup.

fieiiatrav,

10. Stem rXa, Perf. TcrKriKa, I am patient, 1 Plur. TerKafiev,

Opt. TfrXairjv, Imperat. TtrkSBi, Inf. TeTXa/iEy(at), Part. rcTkrias,

rjvla. Gen. TerXiydroy.

11. Stem dvay, Perf. avayya, I command, 1 Plur. avayfieu,

Imperat. avaxOi, 3 Sing. ai/caxSa, 2 Plur. S.va-)(6e, Plup. î/iiyea.

12. Stem iyep, Perf. eyp-riyop-a, I am awake, 2 Plur. Imperat.

iyprjyopBf, 3 Plur. Ind. iyprfyopdaorify")

.

13. stem e\u5, Perf. «X^Xou5a, Ihave come, 1 Plur. eiXi^Xou-

6nev.

14. Stem TTcvd, Perf. ireirovBa (Pres. 7rdo-x<B, -^ sM/e?*, § 327, 9),

2 Plur. miroa-de (for ireirovB-Te), Pem. Part. irevaBvia.

15. Stem TTtd, Perf. 7r«roi5a (Pres. jreWu, J jjeretWKZe), 1 Plur.

Plup. eiremdiicv, Imperat. TriireitrBi.

Further the Participles

:

16. Stem 0po, (fii^pao-Kw, I eat, § 324, 13), Part. Perf. ê^pa>s.

Gen. PePparos.

17. Stem n-Tf, vra (mirrcn, I fall, § 327, 15), Perf. TreVrcoKa,

Part. Gen. jreirTfrnros, Nom. TrfTrnor.

§318. Dialects.—Ion. 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. Act. -Co-i(i') together

with -va<ri(v). Horn. 2 Sing. Imperat. -v and -iJ^t (Sai'vu, o/ivuBi),

Inf. Hom. -ififvai, vficv (£€vymp,ev). Horn, forms from Saivv/u,

I feast, the Opt. SatvCro, for fiaiyu-i-ro. Similar cases see below,

186 SECOND CLASS OF VEEBS IN /ii. §31

the Present-Stem. The Present-Stem of this Second Clas

is formed by adding the syllable i/u to the Pure Stem.

2. The quantity of the v is determined by the rule

in § 303, hence SeUvvfM, but ihelicvvfiev.

3. Vowel-Stems double v in the Present-Stem : Stei

Kepa, Kepor-wvfM, I mix.

4. Here also numerous additional forms are in us

according to the First Principal Conjugation {Sencvvw

especially in the 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. : Seiicvvova-i(v), anthese forms are exclusively used in the Pres. Subj. amOpt.

5. Most of the verbs of this class have the Wea.

Aorist ; only a-^evvvfii I quench (Stem c/Se), forms thi

2 Aorist ea-^rjv. Inf. a^rjvai, comp. §§ 316, 9; 319, 7.

The Paradigms of this Class of Verbs are inserted oj

p. 128.

§ 319. The following verbs belong to the Seconc

Class of Verbs in yti t

:

Stems in a.

1. Kepavvvfii (Stem /cfpS, xpa), I mixAor. eKepaa-a Perf. Act. KeKpdKa . p jiKpadrjv

„ Mid. KeKpap.M'

'XiKepaadriv

2. Kp(p.a.vvvp.L (Stem Kpep,a), I hang, trans. Mid. Kpepafuu,

-

hang, intr. (§ 312, 12Fut. Kpeixu, (§ 263) iKpepAaBrivAor. eKpefiatra

3. ir^Tavvvpi (Stem ireTo), I spread

TTfj-S (§ 263) iirerdirBTiv

CTTeTaa-a T!-en(eyrap.ai [pate-6]

4. a-KeSavvvfit (Stem a-Keba), I scatter, additional foiTa a-iclS'

injpi (§ 312, D. 16, h:

o-KcSS (§ 263) e'a-KiSdo-erjV

ea-Kedaaa ea-Kedairpai,.

§ 319, 32. In the New-Ion. D. the i of the Stem Scixis lost in 8c|<»

i'Se^a, SeSeypMi, eSe';(5i;i/ ; Hom. Pf. (8ei8Ey/iai, I salute) 3 Plm-Seidexarat.

§ 319. Dialects.—1. Comp. § 312, D. 16, and § 312, D. IG, h

Other forms : Kepam, K(pala>, Aor. eKprjcra.

2. Fut. Kp€ii6a,, Kpepaas (§ 243 D),

§319. SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN /it. 187

Siems in e.

Ohs.—Several of these Stems originally ended inr.

5. evvvfii (Stem originally hs, comp.Lat. ves-tis) I clothe, (only

diupt-evwiu is in use)

diKpi-S> (§ 263)Fut. Mid. dfi(l>i-€a'ofiai rjficjiUtTiiai

Aor. ^fiî'-eo-o (§ 240)Inf. Aor. Mid. imfo-aa-Bai,

6. Kopevvvfii (Stem Kopi) I satisfy

iKopeira eKopeaBriv

KSKopetTfiai

7. aîvuvpi (Stem crfie), 1 quench

jv o I transiijiveca-pea-a )

(§ 316, 9)I

intransitive (§ 329, 5)Fut. trliTjaofiat J

8. <TTopivvvp,i (Stem a-rope) (comp. 11 and 25), T spread,

(comp. Lat, ster-n-d)

aropS) (§ 263) iarSpea-iiai

caropeaa.

Stems in co.

9. i&vvvfii (Stem f<o), I gird

e^wcra (Mid.) efaxrd/iT/c

10. pavvvfjii (Stem p<»), I strengthen

pcatrto eppa)p,ai (2 am strong") tppaaSrjv

11. <TTpiivvvp,i (Stem o-Tpia), comp. No. 8.

trTpa)(r<a eoTptOficu eaTpadrji/

earpcoaa

12. xpmvvviii (Stem XP"")) ^colour

C}(pa)(Ta Ke^poKTiiai i^pmtrBtjV.

Consonant-Stems.

13. ayvvp.1, (Stem ay orig. Fay § 34:, D.), 1 break

aât fdya (/ am hrohen") idyrjv

?ala (§ 237) (§ 275, 2)

Dialects.—5. Impf. etwov for i(r-rvov [Inf. Pres. eiwo-ât], Fut.

dpiÛcrai, ecrtrm, Aor. etrtra. Mid. ieacraTO, Perf. Mid. ci/xoi, eira-at,

Part, eipevos, 2 Sing. Plup. co-o-o, 3 Sing, coro, eeo-ro, 3 PI. eiaro.

6. Aor. Mid. Kopea-a-aro, Part. Perf. Act. K€<oprj&is, satiated

Mid. KCKoprjpMi.

13. ?|a with ?a|a [Her. Perf. ?.)ya].

188 SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN fll. §31

14. SeUvvfii, see § 318.

15. e1.pyvvjx.i (Stem elpy), J sA«i m (addit. form eipym)

elpâ Part, epâs clpyp.ai

16. ^fvyvvp.1, (Stem fuy), Hind

cfet'la elevyiiai UC^^X^"!17. KTlvvvp.1 (Stem ktej/), i MZ, with KT-tiVw (§ 253)

18. filyvvfii. (Stem p-ty), i mix, with piaya (§ 327, 7)

epiâ pepuypai ' epiyr]v

19. olyvvpi (Stem oiy), 7 opera (with oiym)

oi'lfi) EipX" ôd emya (§ 279) iwj(6']v

etoâ (§ 237) eaypai

20. oWvpi (Stem oX and oXe), for oXw/it, I destroy

oXS (§ 262) oXeiXeKa (§ 275, 1)

oiXfa'a

Fut.Mid.3Xoi;;.a""^'-'^"lintrans. J perish

<OAopT)V ^

21. opuvpi (Stem o/i, ofio), I swear

opovpai (Act.) oiiapoKa (§ 275, 1) oipotrdn"

apoa-ag gjj^^_ pgj.j_

j^^^jopaporm Verb. Adj. (dv)ii/ioTo°' ' *

' opatpoarai

22. opopyvvpi (Stem opopy), I wipe out

&popâ (Mid.) a)p6p)(Briv

23. TTTiyvvpi (Stem Tray), J/x [comp. liStUpangd]

'ii7T)â TreVpjya (J am fixed) f e'ni]x6r]v

' £Trayr)v

24. prjyvvpi (Stem pay), Jiear

eppj)|a (Mid.) eppaiya (T am torn) ippayrjv

(§ 278) payr\aopai

25. (TTopuvpi (Stem a-rop), with a-ropivvvpi (8) and cn-pav

vvpi. (11

26. <j)pdyvvpi (Stem (j>pay), also (fidpympt, and aoc. to

Class 4, a, (f>pa<T<ra, I shut in, lock ii

Dialects.—15. Impf. eepyj/u with eVpym [epy<a], 3 Plur. Perf. Midfpxarat, Plup. 'dpxaro (§ 287) Part. Perf. UpypAvoi, Aor. Pass

ipx6eis, with Impf. epyadov.

18. Aor. Mid., § 316, 37.

19. oSiâ, a§a [avoiâ], Imperf. mtyyuj/ro.

20. oXeVo-o) [oXcm], Part. Aor. oiXopcvos (destructive), with oXexa

21. apLoo-aa or Spotraa,

To these also belong

:

27. a'lmpai, dnoaivvpai, 1 take away, used only in the Pres.

§320. IKREGULAE VERBS. 189

Ohs.—Nouns are formed from the Pure Vertal-Stems, as ij bd^i-s,

the announcement ; 6 Kpd-Trjp, the mixing howl ; to el-jia, the

clothing—for hcr-jia; ^ Co-vrj, the girdle ; fj pa-jir), the strength

;

TO arpa-iia, the carpet; to ftiy-o-v, the yoke; 6 Skc-dpo-s, the

ruin ; 6 mv-inji&Trfs, the conspirator ; 6 irdy-o-s, thefrost, hoar-

frost.

Chap. XII.

—

Ieeegulak Verbs op the First

Principal Conjugation.

§ 320. The irregularities of tlie Greek Verb chiefly

consist in the Present-Stem differing from the Verbal-

Stem, in a way different from that which has been

pointed out above, § 245, &c. To the four classes there

enumerated the following four classes are to be added.

Obs.—In these as well as in the following lists, the principal

forms only are given from which the rest are easily formed.

Dialects.—28. amfu (and avva), I complete, only Imperf. Mid.

•rjvvTo.

29. apvvfuii, I acguire, Aor. i]p6p,rjv. Inf. dpia-dai, 1 Aor. 2 Sing.

.ijpao, 3 Bing. rjpaTO.

30. axvvfiat, I grieve, Aor. aicaxovTo (§ 257, D.), Perf. aRaxqiiai

<§ 275, 1), 3 Plur. aKrix'^barai (§ 287, D.), 3 Plur. Plup. aKaxeiaro,

Part. aKaxTjuevos and dKrjx^p^vos. Moreover the Active aKaxiCo

<(/ grieve), Aor. rJKaxov and a.Ka.xr]<ra (comp. § 326).

31. ydwp,ai, I rejoice. Put. yam<r<T€Tai.

32. h<uvvp.t, I entertain. Opt. Pres. Mid. 3 Sing. Smvvto (§ 318, D.),

3 Plur. Saivvar, Fut. daia-a (Mid.), Aor. cSaia-a (Mid.)

33. Kaim/iai (Stem Kab), I surpass, Perf. KeKacrfiai (J am dis-

iinguished).

34. Klwfiai, I move, additional form of Ktvia, Preterite e-ia-o-i/

J went, Suhj. ki'-g>, Opt. Ki-oi-fu, Part. Ki-av.

35. Ttvup.1., Tlvvp-ai, additional form of TiVm, § 321, D. 5.

36. opiyvvp-i, additional form of opiya, I stretch out, 3 PI. Perf.

Mid. opapexarai (§ 287).

37. '6pvvp.i. (Stem op), I excite, Fut. opa-a, Aor. apopov (§ 257, D.),

Perf. opapa (§ 275, 1), I have arisen [Lat. or-ior'], Aor. Mid. 3 Sing,

SipTo, arose (§ 316, 38), Perf. Mid. 3 Sing. Ind. opap-e-rai, Subj.

ipaiprjTai,, with Imperf. Mid. opeovTO.

38. Tavvfjuu with Tavia, relva, I extena, stretch,.

190 FIFTH OK NASAL CLASS, §321,

(Mid.) added to a tense denotes that in addition to the Active^

the corresponding Middle form is also in use, e. g. in addition

to eno-a (No. 5), eTiaajirjv also is used.

Fifth or Nasal Class.

§ 321. The Verbal-Stem is strengthened by the

addition of k or of a syllable containing v to form the

Present-Stem.

a) V alone, often united with lengthening of the

vowel, is added to the following Stems :

1. Stem â, Pres. âlva, I go

Aor. Act. Put. Perf. Pass.

?-/37,-v (§ 316, 1) )3^<7o/iaj jSe'/S)?™ (§ 317, 1)

?/37)-(7a i3>5<r<-(§329,2) Verb. Adj. âro'y

2. Stem i\a, Pres. i'Kavvai, I drive

^-XS-o-a eXS (§ 263) iki)KaKa (§ 275, 1) ijK&Brtv

ikrjXaâi Verb Adj. eXareos

3. Stem 05 a, Pres. <j>6ava, I anticipate

(e-05?)-!' (§316, 7) i^Brja-ofmi 'i(p6a.Ka

ie-<pda-(ra

4. Stem ffi, Pres. niva, I drink (additional Stem iro) comp.

§ 327, 10

e-TTL-o-v (§ 316, 15) moiiat (§ 265)

5. Stem Tt, Pres. rtvai, Ipay penalty

€-Ti-cra (Mid.) riVo) TcVrita ir'uTBrjV

Teria-fiai

6. Steal (j> 6 1, Pres. cjidtv a, I perish, waste awaye-<j)6t,~a-a <^6io-oiiai €<^6niai i^6i6riv

7. Stem 8 V, Pres. hiva (with bia G\. V), I immerge

£-8v-v (§ 316, 16) Svcru) SeSvKa iSiOriv

i'SHcra, I dipped

8. Stem Sat, Pres. 8aKva>, I bite

i-&aK-o-v Sijlofiai Be'Srjxa €&rix6r]V

§ 321. Dialects.—1. Aor. Mid. i^f,a-€To, § 268, D.

2. Pres. eXao), Put. eXo'to, eXaas, § 243, D., Aor. eXao-(ra, Mid.

TJKa<Tajir]V. 3. Plup. Mid. ikrfKdbaTO (287, D.) [^Xao-î/i/].'

3. Bp. ^ddva. Part. Aor. Mid. <p6dfj.evos.

5. Ep. TrwiB with Ti-etTO, § 316, D. 26 ; with

Pres. (pdivvBa.

7. Aor. Mid. f'Suo-ero, § 268, D. [Pres. eVSuyeco, Iput on. Compi

§ 323].

§ 322. FIFTH OE NASAL CLASS. 191

9. Stem Kofi, Tree. Kajxpa, I weary

e-KUfi-o-v Kafuivjuu KeKjj-rjKa (§ 282)10. Stem Tffi, Pres. refivo, I cut

c-refi-o-v (fTCLjiov) Tefiai TeTfiqKa (§ 282) iTiiTjBrjV

§ 322. 5) The syllable aK is added to the following

Stems

:

11. Stem al(rd, Pres, aio-fl-av-o-fiat, Iperceive

â9-6-fir]v ai(r6-rj-(roji,ai rjaO-rj-iiai

12. Stem djiapr, Pres. cLjiapr-av-to, I err, sin

tjfiafyr-o-v &iiapT-rj-(TOji,ai rjfidpT-rj-Ka îiapTrj-dr]V

13. Stem a i^, Pres. av ^ - dv- lo ani avâ, linorease [aug-ed]

iji!|-ij-(ra avîja-a ijv^rjKa Tiv^fi6riv

ai^Tjcroiiai (Passive)

14. Stem j3X a o-T, Pres. /3X a 0-7 a 1/0), 7 5m(Z

e-jSXao-T-o-y /SXacrr-^-tria c^XdaTrjKa (§ 274 exc.)

15. Stem 8ap5, Tres. Sap 6 dv a, I sleep

e-8ap6-o-v Sap6-r\-crojxai deSdpBriKa

16. Steme'x^, Viea.{aTr)exddvop,ai, lamhated{drT)r]-)(6-6-p,rjV (&n)ex6-r]-(T0jUU (diryfixStjiuu

17. Stem (f, Pres. tfa»ffl and tjio, I seat myself

18. Stem <ix, Pres. Kixava, I meet (oomp. § 313 D. 6)

i-Ki^-o-v Kix-Tt-TOfiai

19. StemoiS, Pres. olbdva and olhea, I swell

olBr]-(ra} adtjKa

20. Stem o\ier5, Pres. oXca-ddva, I slip

StkitrBo-v 6\itTd-7j-crQ>

21. Stem oaffip, Pres. 6<r(j>paivopai,, I smell

u>(T<j>p-6-p,r]v o<T<j)p-ri-(Top.ai,

22. Stem o0X, Pres. oipX-io-K-dv-a (comp. § 324) and 6(f>eiKa,

I owe

Dialects.—9. Part. Perf. /cfKfiijms, Gen. KeKji-qaTos.

10. with Tfiriyo), Aor. Pass. 3 Plur. iTfuiyev, with Pres. Tifiei.

Peculiar to the Horn, dialect are : Aor. t^d-eiy) ,Uluxit, Put. 7re-<^^ •

a-ofioi, from Stem ipa, Pres. âiVfii ((jyaeiva), I shine, shew, Aor.

Pass. (j]adv6r]U.

§ 322. Dialects.—12. Aor. ijfi^poTov for fjppaTov (§ 257, D., comp.

§ 51, D.).

18. a(Of|<B.

15. Aor. eSpadov (§ 257, D.).

18. Bp. Kixivo).

21. [Herod, oadipdiffiv,! Aor.]'- ^'^ Digitized birMicrosoft®

192 FIFTH OB NASAL CLASS. §322,

23. Stem dS, Vres. dvSdvco, I please

24. Stem 6iy, Pres. Siyydva, Itcmch

•f-Bty-o-v Siôfiai

25. Stem Xaft Pres. Xa/ji^dva, I take

«-Xaj3-o->» Xî/fo/iai eiXi)0a (§ 274) i\rj(j)6riv

elXrjfiiiai (seldom XcXij^/xat)

26. StemXa^, Pres. Xavfla via, Jam Ai(Mera, with X^5a> (CI. 3),

Mid. Iforget.€-\d6-o-u Xô"Q> \e\rjda

Mid. eXadofLTjv \ritjofiai, XeXrjo-fiai

27. Stem Xa;(, Pres. Xa'y;;(dj/a), I attain

i'-Xd^-o-v Xfiô/iai fiXijpâ (§ 274)

fiXi^y/xat

28. Stem /xafl, Pres. fiavdava, I learn

^~fid6-o-v fiad-rj-aoât fi€fiddi]Ka

29. Stem nild, Pres. nvv6dvojj.ai, I learn, with 7reu5o/iaj, CI. 2

i-irvB-o-fiTjv vficrofiai mirvafiai

30. Stem ri/Xi ^''^^s. Ti^yx"""*! I êet, with t^vx^, I prepare,

CI. 2, f-Tup^-o-v Tcvôjuu Te-rOx-1-«^

seldom rcrevxa

31. Stem (ûy, Pres. ipvyydva, Iflee, with (j)evyoj (01. 2).

05s. 1.—The verhs in 23—31, whose Stem forms a short syllable,

insert another nasal in addition to the affix a v. In âlva (1)

and oa-cppaivoiMi (21) t has crept in (<5 253), as well as in Kep-

Saiva, I gain, which forms only the Perf. kckepStjko from the

Stem KepSa; all the other forms are regular according to

Class 4.—A large part of the verhs (No. 11-^16, 18—22, 28

and 30) form either some or all the tenses, except those of the

Present-Stem, from a Stem in e (comp. helow, § 326).

Ohs. 2.—The following may serve as examples of the formation of

nouns : to Prj-fia, the step ; fj (fiBi-a-t-s, the consumption ; 6 /cii/t-

uTo-s, the exhaustion; to X^;x-/ia, tJie assumption; ^ X^6-ij, the

Dialects.—23. Imperf. § 237, D., Aor. [caSoc] evaSov (§ 237),

faS))0"Q)] eada.

25. [Her. Fut. Xd^\(Ao/iai, Perf. \eXd^j]Ka, Aor. Pass. iXafujieriv.

XcXafi/xat, Verb. Adj. XafMirds.]

Hom. Inf. Aor. Mid. XeKafiiadat (§ 257, D.).

26. Pres. with (KkriSdva, cause to forget, Aor. cXtjo-o and XeXdfloK

(§ 257, D.), \(\ad6ij.r,v (Iforgot), Perf Mid. XeXacr/xae.

27. Aor. XeXaxov, I shared with [Fut. Xdô/iaj], Perf. XcXoyâ.29. Aor. Opt. Tren-ufioiTO (§ 257, D.).

30. Also Tevx<o, Aor. reruKfiv, Mid. TfTUKOvro, Perf rirvyiuu, 3Plur. TfreiJârai, Aor. iTvx6r)v, with the Pres. Ti.TV<TKOjmi (§ 324D. 37) I aim at, Aor. erivria-a, I met (S 326\

Digitized by Microsoft®^

§3'24. SIXTH CLASS OK INCHOATIVE VEEBS. 193

forgetting; fj tvx-j], the chance, accident,—and from Stems

which are lengthened hy c : ij aM-rj-ai-s, the sensation ; to

&IMpT-r]-iia, the error ; 6 iiad-rj^fj-s, the scholar.

§ 323. c) The syllable ye is added to the following

Stems

:

32. Stem jSv, Pres. fivva, I stop wp€-/3u-o-a îJo-o) Mid. /3e/3uo-/iai

33. Stem IK, Pres. Jxyovfiai, J come, with IfAva, according

to § 322

iK-6-\a\v tôfiai lyiiai

34. Stem kv, Pres. Kwia, I hiss

€-Kv~(ra

35. Stem ttet, Pres. iriTvea, Ifall (comp. ttiVto) J 327, 15).

f-TTGcr-o-u (for e-7rer-o-j'} together with e-niTP-o-v

SQ. Stem. viTex,7xes.ijri(rx''ovfiat, I promise (comp. ex''> §

327, 6)

iTretrxof"/" VTroa-x'IO'OfUU iijreVx'yf""

SO likewise aiima-xvovfiai I wear (also diiTrixoiâi), Aor. rjiinia-xov

Inf. d/nTno-x"".

§ 324. ^SiasiA Ctes or Inchoative Verbs.

The Verbal-Stem is enlarged by affixing o-k to form

the Present-Stem. This o-k is added to Vowel-Stems

(exc. 21) at once, but to Consonant-Stems after the

insertion of the connecting vowel i. Several of the

verbs belonging to this class (Nos. 2, 6, 7, 13, 14, 16,

20) further strengthen the Present-Stem by means of

a reduplication with the vowel t : ryi-ryvoo-crK-o) [Lat.

(g)^w-sc-o].

§ 323. Dialects.—32. [Herod, îvco].

33. "tKa, Aor. Iôv (§ 268 D.), Part. 'Ujievos, favourable (§ 316 D).

34. Kvcro'a.

Moreover, (to a—c) the Verbs

:

37. Stem dX IT, Pres. aKiTalvm, Isin, Aoi. ^"Xiroy, Mid. dXiVoj/ro,

Part. Perf. dXiTij/ievoj, sinful.

38. Stem dX^, Pres. aXtpdva, 1 acquire, Aor. ^Xiôv.

39. ayivea, only in Pres., I lead, with aya.

40. ipvyyava, I roar, Aor. ijpvyov, Pres. also epcvyofiai.

41. Stem x°-^j Pres. pâySdyo), / embrace, Aor. eâSov, Fut.

Xîa-oiJMi, Perf. KexavlBngitized by Microsoft®

O

194 SIXTH CLASS OE INCHOATIVE VERBS. §324,.

As many of these verbs denote a beginning or

coming into being, all of them are usually called

Inchoatives.

Stems m a.

1. Stem yripa, Pres. y.tj p a- a- k- u>, 1 grow old (seldom yripd-aj

comp. sene-sc-o

i-yT]pd~<ra yrjpd-o'Ofiat. ye-yT]pa~tca

Inf. yrjpd-vm (§ 316, 2)

2. Stem Spa, Pres. Si-Spd-a-K-^ I run (used only in com-

pounds)

'd-bpa-v Spd-CTO/iai Se-SpS-KcC (§ 316, 3)

3. Stem ^ /3 a, Pres. ^/Sd-o-x-s), / become marrmgedble (comp.

•puhe-se-o)

rj^rj-a-a

4. Stem 6va (from 6av), Pres. Bvrj-a-K-a, I die, (usually

dirodvria-Ka^

f-Sdv-ov 6dv-ov)iai ri-GvYj-Ka (§ 317, 3)

Put. 3, reevrjâ § 291 fivij-TO-t

{mortaiy

5. Stem tXa, Pres, l^d-tTK-ofiai, 1 conciliate

Mid. iXa-trd-îji; tXa-cr-o-jnai iKd-irBTj-v

6. Stem/iva, Ties. ni-nvrj-o-K-ai, I remember

e-fLvrj-a-a fiVTj-<Ta i-fivrf-a-Btf-v

fi,i-p,vq-jxai fi.vrj-iTdjia'Oiiai

[memini]

7. Stemirpa, Pres. Trt-Trpd-o-K-o), JseZZ

(for the Aor. and Put. anMfiriv, wi-irpd-Ka i-wpd-drjv

aTroSmroiiai) Tre-jrpa-ât Trpa-BTjiTOjia;

ire-Trpd-a-Qfiai

8. Stem (j)a, Pres. <j>d-a-K-a), I say, comp. (jirj-ni, § 312^,59. Stem xa and x^v, Pres. xa-o-K-a, I open the month

f-X^v-ov ^âv-oO/xat Ki-xr}V-a

Stem in e.

10. Stem ape, Pres. dpl-a-K-m, Iplease

ijpe-tra api-am rjpe-a-fftjv.

Stems in m,

11. Stem^jm, FieB.(ava)Pia-(rK-oiiai, Irevive{dv)e-fi'm-v (§ 316, 13)

§324. SIXTH CLASS OK INCHOATIVE VERBS. 195

12. Stem p\a (from fioX, § 51, D.), Pres. ^Xib-a-K-a, Igoe-fMik-ov fioX'OVfiai

13. StemjSpco, Tvea. ^L-^pa-a-K-a, I consume

Be-^pa-Ka (Part, ê^pas, § 317,

D. 16)

ê-fipa-fuu

14. Stem )/»(», Pres. yi-yva-a-K-ai, I recognise [Lat. (jr)jio-sc-o]

E-yj/to-j/ (§ 316j 14) yva-a-ofiai e-yva-Ka i-yv&-cr6i]v

€-yvQ) -<r-fiai

15. Stem dpai (from 6op), Pres. Bpa-o-K-a, I hapt-6op-ov

16. Stem Tpo), Pres. Ti-Tpa-aK-a, I wounde-rpa-cra rpm-cra Tc-Tpto-fiac i-rpa}-6rjP

17. Stem &\ and &Xa>, Pres. dX-i'-o-K-o/iai, /am toê»

( c-aXto-j' dXa>-iro/xat t-aXco-fca or rjkai-Ka

Ipâv (§ 316, 12) (comp. § 237)

18. Stem dp.jB'K and dp,^Xa>, Pres. ap.^X-i-o'K-a, I miscarry

TJp,^\c^(Ta TJfijSXa-Ka

19. Stem dva\ and dvaXu, Pres. dvdX-i-aK-a, I expend

dvoKa-ira or df^Xoxra dvaka-a-a i dvaXa-Ka I dvdXa>-6r]v

also r]vd\a-cra Idvrjkai-Ka \dvTJXa>-6riv.

Stem in i.

20. Stem tti, Pres. m-Tvt-a-K-a, I give to drink, comp. m-v-a>

§ 321, 4c-7rt-(7a TTi-aio

Stems in v.

21. Stem Kv, Pres. kv-l-o-k-co, Ifructify22. Stem /xeflu, Pres. /jieBi-a-K-a, I make dnmh, Mid. 7 lecome

drunk

e-fieBv-aa c-fie5u-(rAji'^

23. Stem d^TrXax, Pres. diiirXaK-i-a-K-a, Ifail

rj/iirXaK-ov ajm\aK-ri-a-at

24. Stem (Jvâip, Pres. (JiT)avp-l-(rK-oiiai, I enjoy

iirrpip-oiiriv

Inf. eTravp-eirBai

§ 324. Dialects.—12. Perf. iii-p.-^-'Ka-Ka (comp. § 51, D. and

§ 282, D).

13. Aor. £-Ppa-v (§ 316, D. 23), with the Pres. /Se/SpAfl*).

15. 3. Plur. Put. Bopeovrai [with 66p-m-pM, according to § 319].

16. "With rpa-a.

19G SIXTH CLASS 'ÔE INCHOATIVE VEEBS. §324,

25. Stem eip, Pres. evp-'i-a-K-o), Ifind

eup-ov (Mid.) evp-fj-a-a evp-rj-K-a clp-e-Brfv

€vp-r]-pai evp-e-6f]-iT0jiai

26. Stem o-rep, Pres. orc-p-i-o-K-cB, / deprive (with o-rcpS,

Mid. (rripoiiai, I am deprived)

i-a-Tcp-rj-a-a tTTep-rj-ira i-a-Tep-rj-Ka i-arep-rj-Bi^v

e-CTep-rj-iiaL

27. Stem aXux, Pres. dXv-o-K-oJ, I shun

rfkvâ dXv^co

28. Stem SiSax, Pres. StSa-a-K-a, I teach,

£-8i8a|a fiiSaô) fie-8iSa;(-a i-8i-8dx6riv

Se-6iSay/xat

29. Stem Xok, Pres. Xq-o-k-ib, I utter, speak

e-\aK-ov \aK-r]-(rop.aL j Xe-Xi)K-a

€-\dK-7]-(Ta IXe-XoK-a.

05s. 1.—The last three Stems suppress a Guttural before o-k.

Several of the Stems quoted form a part of the tenses by afiix-

ing 6 to the Stem (comp. § 322, Ohs., and § 326), especially

Nos. 23, 25, 26, 29.

06s. 2.—The following may serve as examples of the formation

of nouns : 6 6dv-a-To-s, death ; to fivTj-fielo-v, the memorial

;

6 auT(5-fioX-o-s, the deserter; tj yv^-pjrj, the opinion; rj aXa-ci-s,

the capture; 6 Sidda-K-ako-s (from the Present-Stem), the

teacher ; fj 8180^-^ (from the Verbal-Stem), the instruction, and

from Stems which are enlarged by e : to evp-rj-fm, the discovery;

17 a-Tep-tj-a-i-s, the deprivation.

Dialects.—26. Aor. a-repecrai, Part. Pass. Aor. cmpe'is.

28. [8iSacrKô-ai] a secondary Stem is 6 a, Aor. bebaov, 1 taught

(§ 326, D. 40).

29. Ion. form \r)K.la (§ 325), Fem. Part. Perf. \dka.K.via.

And the Special Verbs :

30. Stem oKha, Pres. aX8ij(rK<», / become great, Aor. fjXSavov, Imade great.

31. Stem kXc, Pres. kikKtio-koi, with KoKea, I call.

32. Stem <pav, Pres. [<pav-a-K-a>] wt-cpai-a-K-a, I slww.

33. Stem diracj) (from dcj>), Pres. dTr-a(f>-i-<rK-a>, I deceive, Aor.

ri77a<ôv, Subj. dirdôi.

34. Stem dp, Pres. dp-ap-i-om-a), Ifit, Aor. ^papov, Ifitted, Perf.

upr]pa, I suit, Fem. Part, dpdpma. Part. Mid. apfievos, suitable,

"Weak Aor. fjpaa, Ifitted, Aor. Pass. SpSrjv.

35. Stem Ik, Pres. i-t-o-K-a>, I make equal, (comp. § 317, B 7).

36. Impf. ia-K€(i/), he spoke.

37. Stem tvy (comp. § 322, 30), Pres. nrvaKouai, I aim at.agiUzed by Microsoft®

'^

§325. SEVENTH OE E-CLASS. 197

§ 325. Seventh or JE-dass.

A short Stem alternates witli one enlarged by e.

A) The enlarged Stem in e is the Present-Stem, the

shorter serves to form the other tenses.

1. Stem yafi, Pres. yaij.i-<o,Imarry(Âct.uxoreinduco,M.id.nubo)

t-yqfi-a yaji-Si (Mid.) •ye-ya/i-Tj-xa

ye-ya)LA-7^-/Aat

2. Stem yri8, Pres. yrjBi-a, I rejoice

y€-yr;d-a, 1 am rejoiced

3. Stem 8 OK, Pres. ho<e-at, I seem

i'-Soâ 8d|a) Mid. SeSoy-fiai

4. Stem Kvp, Pres. Kvpi-a, and Kvpa, I meet

e-Kvp-fra Kvpato

5. Stem /tapTvp, Pres. paprvpe-co, 1 am witness

Mid. papT^popai, I call to witness

6. Stem §vp, Vres. ^vps a, I shave Mid. ^vpopaii-^vp-aprjv eîp-rj-pai.

7. Stem iraT, Pres. iraTi-op.ai, I eat

e-7ra(rdprjv weiracrpai,

8. Stem (5t(^, Pres. pnrT-e-ta, and ptrrT-a (according to § 249),

I throwcppiâ piâ €ppL(j)a jippi<jitjv

eppippai I €ppi<j)6r]v

9. Stem Q>6, Pres. ade-a, Ipush€-acra (§ 237) acrai (a>6fi(Ta Mid.) e-ai(T-pai i-axrOriv

§ 325. Dialects.—1 Put. yap-ea, 3 Sing. Put. Mid. yapea-o-erai.,

she will marry.

3. [SoK^cfio, eSo/CTô'aJ.

8. 3 Sing. Plup. Mid. ipipmro.

Besides

:

o) Stem yeyau, Pres. yeymve-m, I call, Perf. yeyava, Put.

ycyai'ô-a).

b) Stem 8ar, Pres. hari-opm, I distribute, Put. Sda-opai, Aor.

ddo'O'aTo, Perf. beSaa-TCu.

c) Stem Soujr, Pres. bovni-a, I make a sound, Aor. i{y)hovm)-(Ta,

Perf. Se-Sovjr-a.

<i) Stem eiX, e\, Pres. fi-Xe-o), I press, Impf. ietKeou (§ 237),

Aor. 3 Plur. eXo-av, Perf. Mid. eeXpat, Aor. Pass. edXiji' (§295),

3 Plur. oXey, Inf. oKripevai.

e) Stem KeXaS, Pres, KeXaSe-m, I resownd. Part. KEXaS-av.

/) Stem KeiT, Pres. Kevri-o, I sting, Aor. Inf Kev-aai.

198 SEVENTH OK E-CLASS. § M6.

Obs.—In some verts the Stem with e extends even further than

the Present-Stem. Examples of the formation of nouns:

6 ydfi-o-s, the wedding ; tj Soâ, the appearance ; to fiapTvp-UMi,

the testvmony ; t) Z>-ai-s or adrj-ms, pushing.

§ 326. B) The shorter Stem is the Present-Stem, the

enlarged one in e serves to form the other tenses.

10. Stem a 1 6(f), Pres. aiS-ofiai ani alSe-oum, I am ashamed

11. Stem dXe|(c), Pres. d\ci-a, I ward off

rj\eât>.r]v aKi^-r)-(TOft,ai,

12. Stem ax6{e), Pres. axB-ojiai, I am vexed

d^Be-aoiuu TjxSe-aBrjv

a-)(de-a6i]tT0juu

13. Stem ô(ric(c), Pres. jioa-K-a, Ipasturejioa-KTi-a-a ; from the Stem ô the Verb. Adj. /So-rdy

14. Stem /3ouX(e), Pres. jSouX-o/xai, 2 will

(Augment § 234) )3ovX^-o-ofiat /3E-ôuX7j-/xai i-ôvXfj-drjV

15. Stem Se(e), Pres. Se-m, I need (8ei, it is necessary), Mid.

Sfo/iai, I require

f-Serj-ara Sfrj-a-a Se-Serj-Ka i-her)-6r)V (§ 328, 2)16. Stem ep(e), Pres. not usual (§ 327, 13)

T]p-6fiT)t/, I ashed iprj-a-opai, Inf. epeadai

17. Stem lpp(y), Pres. epp-a, 1 go away^ppjj-cra epprj-a-a rjppr)-Ka

Dialects.

—

g) Stem ktvtt, Pres. Krviri-a>, I ring, Aor. eicr"iT-ov.

h) Pres. nUô) and tneî-a, I press, Aor. itrietra.

i) Stem piy, Pres. piyc-a>, I shudder, Perf. eppXya.

V) Stem a-Tvy, Pres. a-ruye-a, I hate, shun, Aor. etrrvyov andtTTvyrjirm, etrrvâ, I made dreadful,

I) Stem 0iX, Pres. cjiiXea, Hove, Aor. 6-0rX-a-/ii)j/.

m) Pres. xpo'c/^f <», ^ ê?P, Aor. expaurp-ov.

Three Verbs in am with a moveable a are here to be noticed

:

n) Stem yo, Pres. you-m, I wail, Impf. c-yo-o!'.

o) Stem /la/c, Pres. pr)K6.-o-pai, I low, Perf. fU-p.riK-a, Aor.?-;iaK-oi'.

^) Stem /iuK, Pres. iwKa-o-p/u, 1 roar, Perf. iiifivn-a, Aor.f/ilJK-OV.

§ 326. Dialects.—10. Ûtraro, Imperat. mSeo-o-ai, Fut. albl-a-opm,

Aor. Pass. 3 Plur. aiSeo-êK.

11. oKdkKov (§ 257).

14. Pres. /SoXcToi, Impf. iôkovro, Perf. îfiovXa.

15. Aor. iSeir]a-a, once 8^<ra, J was m waref o/j also Pres. Siiopju.16. Pres. 6£pojua£, Fut. eLp7)(Top.ai,

^326. SEVENTH OR E-CLASS. 199

18. Stem evS(e), Pres. evSa, I sleep (geneially KoBeiSa)

Augm. § 240 (Kaff)evS^-(ria

19. Stem E^(e), Preg. €\jf-a), 1 coqh

Verb. Adj. i^dos

20. Stem 0f\(e), or e5eX(e), Pres. 6eX-a, or eflcX-o, J will

i)6£Kq-iTa (i^dekfj-vco rjdcXij-Ka

21. Stem »f(Oj Pure Stem e'S, Pres. ifo/iai, I seat myself

,

also iâvo), Class 5, comp. iôfiai

•iKaBurafirjv (§ 240) Ka6i^ri<roiuu and KaBeSov/iai (§ 263)22. Stem kXov and kXoic, Pres. (c\ai'<o (icXao)), I weep, comp.

§253^xKav-iTa KKairjrTa with ickaviTOjim

23. Stem iiaxC^X Pres. /idxoiiat, IfigMi-jiaxe-(rajir)V irnxov/iai, (§ 263) /ie-fidxTj-iJiat

24. Stem /ieX(e), Pres. jueXet /ioi, ii is a care fo me. Mid.

liiKoiuu, I cwrefcr, take care oj

e-jiA\r)-(re iieX^-a-ec jj^-fuX-q-Ke e-fi.ekr)-6r]v

(€7rt)fie\rjaofmt

25. Stem /ieXX(e), Pres. /ieXX-m, 1 am on the point, hesitate

i]-IJ,e\\r]-(ra jueXXi^-a"(a

(§ 234, 06s.)

26. Stem fievê), Pres. jiiv-a, I remain [mane-o, man-si], Verb.

Adj. fiev-e-To's

f-fieiva fiev-Si jie-fievrj-Ka

27. Stem j[ii;f(€), Pres. iivCa, I sueh

€-fivCri-(ra fxv^-lj-a-o

28. Stem i/e/i(f), Pres. veji-a, I assign

f-Vfi/ia ve/i-S) vf-vefiTj-Ka, (Mid.) e-ve/jLrjrdriv

29. Stem of(e), Pure Stem 6S, Pres. of-o, I smell

ti^rj-a-a ofij-o-m oS-(o8-a (§ 275, D.) [Lat. 0(Z-or]

30. Stem oi(e), Pres. oi-ofiai, I think (comp. § 244)

olrj-tTOjuii ajj-;6r]V

31. Stem olxi^)! Vxei. oi;(-o;uaj, I am off

olx^-O'Ojxai, ot;(-(U/c-a

Dialects,—19. [Imperf. e'êe.']

23. fiaxc-ofiai. Part, /laxeiofievos or fiaxôvficvos, Fut. iiaxf](rofi.ai

and iiaxâ-ojuu,

24. Perf. lUiirjKe, Plup. fiffi,r]\fi, Perf. Mid. /le-ju-^-Xe-rat (PIup

-ro), § 51, D.

26. Perf. /ie/iova, 1 am disposed, strive.

30. Pres. ot-ojiai, ot-a, Aor. Mid. otaaro, Aor. Pass, atadrjv.

31. Perf. oixi/fa (fiixW^' •mUh tbe Pres. otx-ve-a), according to

§ 323.

200 SEVENTH OB E-CLASS. § 32S.

(oi^-uwc-oj witli in-eg. Eeduplication [§ 275] for olx-a>X''^> comp.

§ 35, a)

32. Stem oiEiX(e), Pure Stem dcj)e\, Pres. 64>ei\a>, 1 owe-

(§ 253, Obs.y

ai(j)cK-ov [titinaTn] ocjxiXrj-cra) oiêiXij-Ka

33. Stem 7rep6(f), Pres. irepSm

€-7rapd-ov napbrj-a-o^t 7re-7rop5-a

34. Stem 7r(e)T(e), Pres. iveT-oji.ai, 1 fly

(§ 61 c)

35. Stem pv(e), Pres. peca, i/ow (§ 248)

£ppcv-cra (rare, § 200, 2) pvr]-tTOjxaL ippvjj-Ka ippirfv

(with peiKrofiai)

36. Stem a- rt 13(e), Pres. a-Tîp-a, I tread

37. Stem rvn-i-e. Pure Stem rinr (§ 249), Pres. Tvirra, I strike

€~TV7r~ov TV7rT7j-aa>, Mid. re-rujit-ât e-TV7r-rjv

38. Stem x"'pf) Pî'e Stem ;(ap, Pres. xa'P<"> -^"i'^'c^ (§258)

Xaipr}-<Ta> Ke-xapr]-Ka i-xip-rjv

Ke-xaprj-fiaL

Ohs.—The e sometimes appears in all the tenses except the Present,

sometimes only in some of them ; sometimes it is added to the

pure, sometimes to the strengthened Stem: jxcv-e, trTi|8-e,

iff, off, TVTTTe. The formation of nouns shows the same

varieties : al8fj-piov, shame-faced ; rj ôiXrj-a-i-s, voluntas ;.

Dialects.—38. Part. Perf. KfxapT/mr, Fut. Kexapfja-o, Aor. ixvparo,,

and 3 Plur. Kexapovro, § 257, I).

Besides

:

39. Stem d\d(e), Pres. akd-op.cu, Ilecome well, Fut. aKSfj-iropai.

40. Stem da, Aor. SeSaoi/ (§ 257, D.), I taught, Aor. Mid. InLSeSaaa-dai (to get to TcnovS), Aor. Pass. iba.T)v (1 learned'), besides

Fut. 8ar](ropat, Perf. SeSdtjKa, Part. Perf. Sefiams.

41. Stem K J) 8(e), Pres. K-qB-a, I grieve, Fut. KrjSrj-a-a), Perf. ke-

KJjS-a (I am concerned), Fut. KeKaSTja-opju.

42. Stem /iffi(E), Pres. ê'S-m, I ruZc, Mid. J reflect, Fut.

iifS^-0"0jLta(.

43. Stem nid, Pres. neida, I persuade, Fut. also mflijo-a, Part.

Aor. TTidrjcras,

44. Stem T.op(f), Aor. '4-Top-ov and e-Topri-cra, I lored through,

Fut. TfTop^-cro).

45. Stem <^tS, Pres. 0fiSofioi, J spo9-e, Aor. Mid. 77f(l>i.Sea6at

(§ 257, D.), Fut. Trf(j)t8ri-a-ofiai.

§327. EIGHTH OK MIXED CLASS. 201

idtKri-jxav, voluntary; 6 ixaxy-Tri-s, the warrior; fj fiiWrj-

a-i-s, the delay; jiov-ijio-s, remaining; 6 voji-o-s, the law;fi 68-117], the smell ; fj x°P""> '^^ joy.

§ 327. Mghth or Mixed Class.

^Several essentially different Stems unite to form one

verb:

1. Present aipi-a, I take; Mid. I choose; Stems aipe and e'X.

cIX-ov (§ 236) aipT\-a-a ^prf-KU Tjpi-Brjv

Inf. eXeiv

€iK6]i7}v alpTj-o'oiJiat ^prj-pî

2. Pres. epx-op.ai,Igo,come; Stems ipx and i\(v)6fj)\^'\6-ov iKfv-(TOjiai iK-TJKvB-a (§ 275)Imperat. iXBi (§ 333, 12)

Inf. i\6eiv. The place of the Put. is generally supplied by elpn.

3. Pres. cpfi-to and pe^-a, I do; Stems ipb, ipy, peyf-pe§a '^p^'" ipex^riv

Ohs.—The original Verbal-Stem is fepy, hence to Npy-o-v (§ 34,

D.) Attic epy-o-v, work ; from (f)fpy, by the addition of the en-

largement of the Present i (ol. 4), arose (J)ipy-i-a>, and from

this tpS-m. But by metathesis, ffpy became fpey, and with

loss of the f, pcy, whence the regular Present according to

cl. 4, is pe^-a, i. e., pey-i-a> (§ 251).

4. Pres. iaBl-co, I eat, Stem iadi, e8(f) [ed-o'] and (j>ay

e-(pay-ov Fut. eS-Ofim e8-r]8oKa (§ 275) fjSe-crdTjv

(§ 265) i8-rjSe<rp.ai.

5. Pres. fiT-opai, I follow,^ (Impf. e'mofujv, § 236) Stems cVand o-(e)7r

e-iTTT-opriv clonal Subj. (nrm-pai Inf. irvea-Oat

Ohs.—The original Stem is o-en-, from which en- has arisen byweakening o- to the rough breathing (§ 60 V). In the Aot. Ind.

the rough breathing is not organic, e being properly only the

Augment. Besides this there is a syncope (§ 61 c).

§ 327. Dialects.—1. [dpalprjKa, apaiprip.ai, § 275.]

2. Aor. ^XiJOou, Perf. elX^Xovea (§ 317, D. 13), Part. i\riXov0as.

3. [Pres. £>8-ffl] Perf. eopya (§ 275, D. 2), Plup. ecipyetv, Aor.

e/)|a and ipeâ.

4. Pres. ecrô) and eSm, Inf. e8-p.evat, Perf. e8-i;S-a, Mid. iSrjSorai.

6. Pres. Aot. fircB, i asm occijpied, Aor. e-a-ir-ov, Inf (rrrclp. Part.

OTTiBK, Put. ei|fai, Subj. Aor. Mid. tcjroijLtai, e<TJroiprjV, €(nritr6ai,

fo-jrop^vos

202 EIGHTH OK MIXED CLASS. §327.

6. Pres. fx

-

<»> J'âve, hold (Impf. elx"" § ^36), Stems ex and (rx(e)

i-(Tx-ov, I seized 1. c|io (Mid.)

Subj. (TxS, Opt. (TxoCrjv

Inf. ffxeii', Part, trxmi' 2. o-x^-tw e-(rxi)-(ca i-(rx^-6r]V

Imperat. o-xt'-y (§ 316, 11) e-trxTI^'^^ ^'"'os crxero's

Mid. i-a-X'Of^rjv, (rx^/iiat, etc.

Inf. (TX-ccrBai

Ohs.—The original Stem is o-cx, from whioli ex ^"'^ arisen by

weakening a- to the rough breathing (§ 60 6). From trex by

syncope came e-cx-o-i', by metathesis (rxe> from wliich trxe-r,

f-crxq-Ka. From ex came the Future e^m, and the Verbal Adj.

«K-T(J-f, whilst in the Present-Stem the rough breathing was

changed into the soft breathing, because of the aspirate in the

following syllable (§ 53 h, Obs.} : ex-m for ex-m. Comp. also

imcrxveoixai aud ap.mtrxviojiai, § 323, 36.—All the Stem forms

also appear in the formation of nouns : to (rx^-fia, the form;f] eii-s, the hearing; ix-vp6-i, firm, tenable,

7. Pres. filay-m, I mix, misc-eo, Stems ina-y and /iiy, additional

form, fityvvfu (§ 319, 18).

8. Pres. 6po-Q>, I see. Stems 6pa, 18, ott

eI8-ov (Mid.) oyôfiai e-atpa-Ka aipdrjy

oir-aTT-a (§ 275)

Imperat. ZSe' Mid. iSoC (§ 333, 12)

Inf. iS-eiv empa-fxai opdros

SifL-fiai OTTTOS

Obs.—On the irregular Augment of the Stem Spa (Impf. iiipav)

§ 237.—The Stem lb was originally fid (§ 34 D.). Comp.

vid-e-o ; the Aor. Ind. therefore, i-hS-ov, with Syllabic Augment,

contracted to eU-o-v, but Subj. "S-to, Opt. W-oi-fu. The Perf. of

this Stem is oiSa, I know (§ 317, 6).—All three Stems appear

also in the formation of Nouns : to opd-pia, the spectacle ; to

e'S-or, the form, appearance ; f/ oi/î-r, the sight ; ro o/i-fia, the

eye, look.

9. Pres. irao-x-tu, I suffer. Stem naa-x, ira5(e), jrevB

e-TTa6-ov TT^L-a-Ofiat Tre-TrovSâ TraOrj-rSs '

(for TvevB-a-ojj.ai, § 50)

Dialects.—6. Perf. 6'x-fflK-a (§ 326, 31), Perf. Mid. Syjuai, 3 Plur.

Plup. sSxaTO.

8. Aor. iSoi/,Weak Aor. Mid. hiaaro and eio-oTO, Part, hurdfievos

to the Pres. dboiiai, I appear, resemble (comp. § 34, D. 4). As a

chorter additional form of the Stem dp a we find in Homer the

Stem op(fo/>), thence 3 Plur. Pres. eVi op-o-vTat, they overlook.

9. 2 Plur. Ttirroade (§ 317, D. 14), Part. mTraBvia.

^'•^'^''- EIGHTH OR MIXED CLASS. 203

Obs.—^From the shorter Stems we have the nouns : tA iraB-os,

the suffering ; t6 irivB-os, the moiurning.

10. irlv-a, Idrink, Stems n-n/, ttj, tto [Lat.ô-tus] comp. § 321, 4.

e-TTi-ov Fut. Tri-Ofiai (§ 265) we-n-a-Ka i-!r6-6r)V

Imperat. ni-6i § 316, 15 iTe-ivo-fuu no-ros

Ohs.—From the Stem tto we have the nomis : 6 'ir6-Tr]-s, po-tor;f] 7r6-ai-s, po-tio ; to no-rfipio-v, po-culu-m,

11. Pres. rpEX"<"> I run. Stems rpex and Spf/ie-Spa/i-ov SpSfioO/i-at 8e-8pap,ri-Ka dpeKreov

6piôp,ai (§ 54 c)

Ohs.—Nouns from both Stems : 6 Tpox-6-s, the wheel; 6 8pop,-€v-s,

the runner..

12. Pres. (jyep-a, I carry [ferd], Stems (êp, eve(y)K, ol

rjveyK-ov o'L-cron ev-fjvox-a- (§ 275) ol-a--6ri<rop.aL

ol-IT-TOS

jjveyR-a (§ 269) rjV€x-6r]V

flpeyK-a-iirjV o'liropac ivT]vey-p,ai ivex-Bfjaojiiai.

Obs.—From the Stem (jxp we have the nouns : to îp-e-rpo-v,

the bier; 6 (j>6p-o-s, the contribution, tax; 6 (pop-ro-s, the

burden.

13. Aorist eiTTov, I spoke. Stems f iir, ip and peeHT-ow

fwr-a (§ 269) ip-Sy d-pri-xa (§ 274, Obs.) ippri6T]V

Imperat. et7r-e Inf. elir-^Xv ei-prj-^c pTj-drjcrofiai

(§ 333, 12)

el-pij-a-opM prj-To-s.

Obs.—The Stem elir has arisen by contraction from i-eir, and

e-en- from fe-hn, the reduplicated Aorist-Stem of the Verbal-

Stem ferr (oros, word, § 34, D. 1). This is the reason whythe diphthong el belonas not to the Indicative alone (§ 257, D.).

The Stem ip (Fut. ipSi), to which the Mid. ipeirOai, to ask

(§ 326, 16) belongs, has likewise lost f, it being originally fep

(comp. Lat. TCr-bu-m). From fep, by Metathesis (§ 59) arose

Dialects.—11. edpiâ [Spa/icofiai], beSpopa.

12. 2 Plur. Imperat. Pres. (j>ep-Te [Lat. ferte], Aor. rjvuKa,

3 Sing. Opt. eveUai (ei/eiKot) [Perf. evrjveiypai], Imperat. Aor. oio-e,

Inf. olaipevai (§ 268, D.)

13. Pres. f[/j<B (01. 4. d), Aor. eo-Tr-ow (Stem o-ett, comp. 5) 1spoke, Imperat. ea-ir-ere, Pres. iv-iir-a, Imperat. ewcjre (§ 62 D.),

Aor. ivuTTTov, Subj. evia-ira. Opt. 2 Sing. eyiWoiy, Imperat. evunre

and cvunres, Fut. iviâ and ew(nrij(r<a.

204 EIGHTH OK MIXED CLASS. § 32S,

fpe, after the loss of tte F, pe, hence ei-prj-Ka for fe-fprj-Ka,

ipp^-dri-u for e-fpri-6ri-v, pr)-T6-s for Fpri-ro-s. As Present forms

^ij/ii, Xt'yo), and, especially in compounds, dyopeia may be used,

e. g. dtrayopeva, I forbid ; Aor. aitemov, Fut. dtrepSi, Perf.

amipriKa. Nouns from the Stems cV and p€ : jj oi|/', fte wice;

7-0 prj-fM, the word ; 6 prj-rap, the orator.

In addition to these there are three verbs which re-

duplicate the Stem in the Present

:

14. Present yi-yv-op.ai (also yiv-ap.ai), Ihecome

Stem yi-y(e)v&Ti<\yev(e') (Lat. gi-g(e)n-o, Perf. gen-m)

i-yev-o-pjjv yevr)-(Top.ai ye-^ov-a

ye-yivT]-p.ai

Obs.—From the Stem yevwe have to yiv-os, the race, genm

;

01 yovsis, the parents ; from yevf, rj yeve-cri-s, the origin.

15. Pres. Tvl-TfT-a (from tti -rreT-o)), I fall. Stem niirr, irfr,

TTTOi

e-TviiT-ov from e-n-er-ov (§ 60 a), Treer-oC/iai (§ 264) Tre'-Tn-a-Ka

(comp. § 323, 30).

Obs.—From the Stem irra : rj irrSi-cn.-s, to trrSi'p.a, the fall,

16. Pres. Ti-rpa-a, I lore, Stems rirpa and rpa

e-Tprj-a-a Tpf]-a-a>

(§ 270, Ols.).

Ieeegulaeities oe Meaning.

§ 328. The most important irregularities of meaning

consist in the fluctuation between the Active, Middle,

and Passive, as well as, on the other hand, between the

transitive and intransitive meaning.

A) Active, Middle, and Passive Meaning

1. Very many Active verbs have a Middle Future

with Active meaning (§ 266). This is the case with

most verbs of classes 5 to 8.

2. The Deponent verbs are to be regarded as Middle,

Dialects.—14. Perf. 1 Plur. ye-ya-fi^v, § 317, D. 2, comp. § 329, 8.

15. Perf. Part, n-c-jn-e-is, § 317, D. 17

Besides :

17. l-ava, Stem av, df, I sleep (i as Eeduplication, comp. § 308),

Aor. aecra.

§ 329. lEItEGULARITIES OF MEANING. 205

and also make most of their tenses in the Middle form.

Those are called Passive Deponents, whose Aorist has aPassive form : e.g., ôvXofiai, I wish, SôvX'Ôtjv, I wished.

The most important Passive Deponents are the following;

of which those marked * have a Passive Future, which

is used along with the Middle

:

ayajiai, I admire (§ 312, 8) evXafieofiai, I am on my guard*aiS£o/iai, / dread (§ 301, 1) *ilbojiai., I rejoice

akdofim, I ramble *iv \ ^ ^ il icike to heart

&fx,CKKaofi.m, I rival npo I r r '' \j am inclined

II am anxiouslieXofiai <

I repent

*apveojiai, I deny *i'wi

*ay6ou,ai, I am, indignant 1

(§826,12) /'''"'

ôvKofiai, 1 wish (§ 326, 14) ajro i.jI despair

bioiiai, I need {^ Z2Q, lb) *&ia I,^ ^^

\l reflect

depKOfiai, I look iy[

^ Iponder"SiaKeyoiiM, I converse jrpo ] [l anticipate

Siva/iai, I can (§ 312, 9) *oiofiat, I am of opinion (§ 326, 30)

fvavTi6o[iai, I am opposed (reôjiai, I reverence

emaraijuii, I know (§ 312, 10) (\iiKonji,eojiai, I am ambitious

Obs.—Several of these verbs have the Middle Aorist as well as

the Passive.

8. The Passive Aorists of several Active verhs have a

Middle meaning: evcl)paiva>, I rejoice, ei^pavOrjv, I.

rejoiced; a-Tpejxi), I cause to turn, ia-Tpd^v, I turned—myself ; <f>a,iva>, I show, i<f)dvrjv, I appeared, &c.

4. The Passive forms of several Deponents have also

a Passive meaning : Idofiai, I heal, Iddnjv, I was healed ;

Ss'Xp/jLai, I receive, iBe')(dr]v, I was received; in someeven the Middle forms have both Active and Passive

meaning : fii/ieofiai., I imitate, fiefj,lfi7]/j,ai, I have imi-

tated, or have been imitated.

§ 329. B) Transitive and Intransitive Meaning.

When the meaning of a verb fluctuates between

§ 329. Dialects.—The Strong Aor. erpacjiov (rpei^co, / nourish) in

Horn, has an intransitive meaning, I grew up. In Herod, aveyvav

(avayiyviia-Kio) means I read, aviyvaira, Ipersuaded ; Hom. TJpnrov,

1 fell, Aor. to ipema> (cl. 2), 1 throw doum; svaa-o-a, I caused to

dwell, Aor. to vaia>, I[^-^fSed by Microsoft®

206 IKEEGULAKITIES OF MEANING. §329.

Transitive and Intransitive, the Strong Aorist has the

intransitive and the Weak Aorist and Future Active the

transitive meaning; when there are two Perfects the

Str<mg liiewise has the intransitive and the Weak the

transitive meaning; if there is only one Perfect, it is

intransitive. The most important cases of this kind are

:

1. Stem trra. Pros. Xcrrrjixi, I place, Weak Aor.

earrja-a, I placed, Fut. ctttjo-o), I shall place, Pres. Mid.

XcTTajjiai, I place myself, Strong Aor. ea-rriv, I placed

myself—stood, Perf. eartjKa, I have placed myself, or

stand (§ 503), Plup. kcnrîceiv, I stood, Eut. ecTrj^m

(§ 291), I shall stand.

Ohs.—This same important distinction appears in the numerouscompounds : aî<TTqfi.i, I cause to revolt, to separate, aweaniv,

I revolted—separated, aê<TTr]Ka, I have revolted ; iîarqfu, Iput over, iirecmiv, Iput myself over, etf/iarriKa, I am put over,-

KaSiarrjiu, I put down, KarôTrjv, I put myselfforward, Ka6e-

onjKo, I stand there or forward. The Aor. Mid. has a specially

Middle meaning, c. g., (caTeorô-oro, he determined for himself

(comp. § 479).

2. Stem /Sffl, Pres. âlva, I go, is commonly intransi-

tive with the Flit, ^âo/j.ai ; but iu the poets, / cause

to go, also in the Weak Aor. e^rja-a, Fut. /Sijo-ta ; but

intransitive in the Strong Aor. c^tjv, I went, /Se/Siyâ, Ihave advanced, stand firm (êâ-io-'i, firm).

3. Stem , I sink, hide, often ti-ansitive

:

KaraBveo, I cause to sink, also ehvcra, Bvao) ; but eSw, Isunk myself, I dived; eveSvv, I put mi; iêSvv, Iput off.

5. Stem o-/Se(?), Pres. a-êvvvfii, I quench, Weak Aor.

e-a-ê-a-a, I quenched. Strong Aor. ea^Tjv, Iwas quenched,

€a-^7]Ka, I am quenched. The Pres. to it is a-îvw/jLat.

6. Stem crxeX, Pres. a-KeWa, I dry, but Aor. ea-KXTjv,

I grew dry, with the Pres. aKeXkoaai.Digitized by Microsoft®

§331. ACCENTUATION OP VEEBAL POEMS. 207

7. Stem TT i, Aor. einov, I drank, eirlaa {iriiria-Kai), 1caused to drink.

8. Stem <yev, Pres. yeivofiai (comp. § 327, 14), I ambom, Aor. iyeivdfj/riv, I begat.

9. Stem 6X, Pres. SWvfu, I ruin. Strong Perf. oXaiXa,

I am ruined, peril, Weak Perf. o\a>k6Ka, I have ruined,

perdidi.

§ 330. In a number of verbs the Strong Perfect alone

has only an intransitive meaning, as

:

1. dyvv/jLi, I break, Pf. iarya, I am broken (§ 275, 2).

2. iyeipco, I awake „ iyprjyopa, lam awake (§ 275, l).

3. ireido), Ipersuade „ miroida, I trust (Tretdofiai, Ifollow, obey).

4. irriiyvvfii, Ifasten „ irkirrfja, I stick fast.

5. prfyvvfjii, I tear „ eppwya, I am torn (§ 278).

6. a-rjiro), I cause to rot „ aecrriira, I am rotten.

7. TTjica, I melt „ TeTrfica, I am melted.

8. <âiv<o, I show (rarely shine), Pf. jricprjva, I have

appeared (cfialvo/jLat, I appear).

On the distinction between aveaya and avemxa, and

between •jreirpar/a and Trevr/aaâ, see § 279.

§ 331. Geneeal View op the AccentuationOF Veebal Foems.

The general rule given § 229, that in the verb the

accent is removed as far back as possible from the end, is

subject to the following exceptions

:

For all contracted syllables the accentuation is seen

from § 87. Hence So/cw, iXa/jLev (§ 263), Treo-oO/ât

(TrtTTTftj, § 327, 15), Ti6S)fj,ai (§ 302), Xv6&, \v6y<;

(§ 296). Comp. however § 307, Obs.

§ 330. Dialects.—9. Horn, haia, I set fire to, Pf. Se'Sija, I

caught fire.

10. Horn. TKira, I give hope, Pf. eoKira, I hope.

11. „ <t>e€ipa>,g^0^î^y„0^^pa, I am destroyed.

208 ACCENTUATION OF VEEBAL FOEMS. § 33i.

§ 332. Compound Verbal forms follow the general

rule laid down in § 85, with the following limit-

ations :

1. The accent never goes back beyond the syllable

on which the first word had it before the composition

:

«7r6So9, give back (airo), not ciTroBo';; iiriaye';, hold in

(eVt), not e'jTbcrjê'i.

2. In double compounds the accent never goes back

beyond the first : aweKBo<;, give out with ; irapevOe';, put

in besides.

3. The accent never passes beyond the Augment or

Reduplication: awrfkOe, he went away ; dfpiKTai,, he has

arrived. This is the case even when the Augment or

Reduplication is not expressed : vwelKov, I gave way

;

avevpe, he found again; a-vvoiBa, I know along with,

from olBa, I know, forms an exception.

§ 333. The other exceptions are

:

1. All Infinitives in vai, have the accent on the

penultima : ndevai, Oelvai, 'KeKvKevai, XvOfjvai.

2. the Infinitive of the Strong Aorist Active of verbs

in CO is perispome : Xaêlv.

3. the same form in the Middle is paroxytone:

Xa/3ecrât.

4. the Infinitive of the Weak Aorist Active has the

accent on the penultima : TratBevcrat, iiraivicrai (§ 268,

Obs. 1).

5. so likewise the Infinitive of the Perfect Middle

:

ireirai.BevaOab, KeKOfiiadai.

6. the Participle of the Strong Aorist Active of verbs

in o) is oxytone : Xaâiv.

7. the Participle of the Present and of the Strong

Aorist Active of verbs in /a t is oxytone : ridei^, airo-

Bov^.

8. so likewise the Participle of the Perfect Active

:

XeXvKw (via, 6?, Gen. oro'?), and9. that of both Aorists Passive : XvOei^, ypa6ek.

Digitized by Microsoft® ' 'I' T ^

§ 337. FOEMS OF VERBS IN THE IONIC DIALECT. 209

10. the Participle of the Perfect Middle is paroxy-

tone : \eXvfj,€vo<i.

H. the contracted 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Strong

Aorist Middle is perispome: Xa/3o{). Only the com-

pounds of monosyllabic forms with dissyllabic preposi-

tions form an exception: TrepLOov (TrepiriOTj/Mi), comp§ 307, Obs.

12. The 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Strong Aorist Active

in the following verbs is oxytone : eliri, speak ; i\6e,

come ; evpe, find ; ISe, see ; \a^e, take. But direnre, &c.,

according to § 85.

On the accentuation of the three equal forms of the

Weak Aorist, see § 268, Obs. 1.

Peoctliab Fobms of Vebbs. ijf THE Ionic Dialect.

§ 334. Dialects.—The Iterative form denoting the repetition of

an act is frequent in Homer and Herodotus, though foreign to Attic

prose. Its characteristic sign is the letters ctk afBxed to the histo-

rical person-endings in the Active as well as in the Middle bymeans of the connecting vowels o and e ; hence 1 Sing. Act. o-kov.

Mid. aKOfi-qv. The Augment is generally wanting, in Herod,

always. The inflexion is quite the same as that of the Imperfect.

§ 335. Dialects.—The Iterative (tk may be afSxed to the Present

as well as to both the Strong and Weak Aorist-Stems ; hence wedistinguish Iterative Imperfects, as : ex-^-cKo-v, 1 used to have, andIterative Aorists, as : 'IS-c-ctk-o-v, I used to see, eXacra-o-K-e-v, he

used to drive; the former denote the repetition of continuance, the

latter the repetition of the occurrence of an action (§ 492).

§ 336. Dialects.—In verbs of the First Principal Conjugation f

is the constant connecting vowel for the Iterative Imperfects and

the Iteratives of the Strong Aorist : fiiv-e-a-Kov (/levo), I remain),

pocrK-e-<TKovro (/Soo-ku, 1 pasture'), (j>vy-€-(TK€ ((pevyco, I flee)

;

a occurs rarely in its stead : p'nrr-a-a-Kov (piVto, / hurl), KpvTrr-a-crKov

(^KpvvTai, I hide). Contracted verbs in the Iteratives either leave the

two vowels uncontracted : KoKifo-kov (/caX/m, I call), or reject one

of them : adeoKov (wBito, Ipush), ^'iatrKov (^iam, I leave) ; the Stems

in a sometimes change ae to aa : vaierdacTKov (vaierao), I inhabit),

comp. vaieraa, § 243, D.

§ 337. Dialects.—In verbs of the Second Principal Conjugation

tTK is aiSxed immediately to the Stem : e-<pa-crKov (Stem <p a, cttrj/ii,

-p

210 FORMS OF VEKBS IN THE IONIC DIALECT. § 338.

1 say), cna-irKov (fonji', Iplaced myself), ea-Kov instead of ia-a-Kov

(Stem i s, flii'i, I am), Ke-o-zcero (Stem k e i, Kcljiai, I lie), ri-Be-aKov

(jiBrjjxi,, Iput), priym-<TKov (p^yi/uynt, 1 tear). For tlie Stem oX, as

in other formations ^aXecra, oXeaa), e is the connecting vowel:

oX-e-CKero.

a-K is further appended directly to the Weak Aorist-Stem:

iprjTva-a-a-Ke (Jpr]Tva>, 1 pacify), \i.vi]aa.-aKfro (/icao/iat, I remember).

§ 338. Dialects.—Many Stems of the Present and Strrnig Aorist

in poetry (seldom in Attic prose) have 6 added without any parti-

cular modification of meaning. The Preterite is the most frequent

of the Stems thus strengthened. The 6 is connected with the

Stems sometimes by a, sometimes by e. The most important forms

of this kind are

:

SiwKa, additional form Siaxdda, 1 pursuef"(c<a

,, „ clKaBa, I yield

dfivva „ „ TjiivvaBov, I warded off

f'lpya „ „ epyaBov (^iepyaOov), I separated, shut off

Kia „ ,, cKlaOov, I went

aelpop,ai „ „ rjepcBovTai, they hover

ayeipco „ „ rjyepiBovTo, thcy were assenibled

<t>6iva> „ „ <j)6ivv6a)

«X<» » )) <TX^6teip, Aor. Inf. to hold.

§ 340. SIMPLE DEEIVATION. 211

in.—DERIVATION.

Chap. Xni.

§ 339. A word is either simple, i. e. sprung from a

single Stem: \07-0?, gpeech (Stem X67), jpoA^-w, I write

(Stem ypa^),—or compound, i. e. formed from two or

more Stems : Xoyo-rypdô-i;, speech-writer.

A) Simple Dekivation.

Simple words are either primitive (Verhalia), i. e.

are formed directly from a Verbal-Stem (§ 245) : apx-^j

beginning, from the Verbal-Stem apx (apx<o, I begin) :

or derived {Denominativa), i. e. formed from a Nominal-

Stem (§ 100): apxarlo-'i, incipient, ancient, from the

Jôminal-Stem apxct) Nom. dpxVs beginning.

§ 340. Nouns are usually formed—^whether from a

Yerbal or from a Nominal-Stem—by means of a ter-

mination. This termination, added to the Stem, is

called a derivative-ending or suffix. Thus Xo-yo-? is

formed by means of the suflSx o from the Verbal-Stem

Xey, dpxa-to-<; by means of the suffix 10 from the

Nomiual-Stem dpx<^- The suffixes serve more clearly

to define the idea of the noun, or to mark the different

relations in which the general idea of the Stem is to be

conceived: Verbal-Stem -Koie {iroiS), I produce, com-

pose), iroirj-rrj-^, compos-er; 'rrol/rj-air';, composi-îbw

;

irolrf-fiair), composi^jow, poem; Verb.-Stem rypa<p

(lypdcjxi), I write), rypaxji-ev-<s, writer; y.pa(fi-i-<;, writing

instrument ; lypafju-jjua, writing ; rypaftrfjiri, a line ; Nom.~Stem St«a {hiKri, right), hlKOrio-'i, right, just; Sikmo-

a-vvT), righteousness; Nom.-Stem âacXev (fiaa-CKev-^,

Idng), /SacrtKe-id, queen; âxnXe-id, Hagdom; âa-Ck-

ik6-<;, InngiTy.

Ohs. 1.—Only few primitive nouns are formed witliout a suffix:

<t>v\a^, guard, NominaJ and Verbal-Stem (f>vXaK (cjivKda-a-a,

212 SUFFIXES FOK FOKMING SUBSTANTIVES.^ § 34J.

cl. 4, a, I guard); Stjf, voice, Stem ojr, Ver"b.-Stem eV

(eiTTElI').

Ohs. 2.—The Consonant-Stems undergo tbe necessary changes

before suflSxes beginning with a consonant (§ 44, &o.) : ypa<p,

ypd/jL-lia, Xey, Xeîs, word; diKaS (SiKdâ), 8iKa(T-Trjs.juilge.

Vowel-Stems readily lengthen the vowel and sometimes insert

cr before several suffixes, as in the Perf. Mid. (§ 288), and in the

Weak Passive-Stem (§ 298) : 5roij;-;iio (comp. jre-Troiij-fiat),

a-ei-<r-}i6-Sy shaking (comp. o"e-o"ft-(r-/iat).

Ohs. 3.—In many primitive words the Stem undergoes a change

in its vowel, which generally is like that of the Strong Perfect

(§ 278): Stem \ad, \r]6-r], forgetfulness, comp. \i-\rjd-a;

Stem IT f fin, Troim-rj, escort, comp. ire-7rofi.(j)-a ; Stem Xitt,

\otir6-s, remaining, comp. Xt-XoiTr-a. The most frequent

vowel-change is that of e to o : Stem wefiir Qiriji.TTa, I escort'),

n-oiar-T], escort; Stem 0Xfy ((jAeyca, I hum), (jiXoi, flame;

Stem Tpcn (rpiva, I turn), rpon-os, turning, manner.

Ohs. 4.—A general rule for the accent of nouns is, that the

Neuters are almost all barytone (§ 19): to ytVor, the race;

8S)-po-v, gift ; \el''âvo-v, remains ; wev-fia, hreath.

§ 341. I.

—

The most important Suffixes for forming

Substantives.

A) Substantives denoting an agent are called nomina

agentis. The person acting or occupied ia and belonging

to something is indicated by the following sufSxes :

1. eu, Nom. (v-s (always oxytone), Maso. (§ 137).

Examples of Primitive words are

:

ypa(f)-ev-s, writ-ER, Verb.-Stem ypa<j>, Pres. ypd(j)a> (cl. 1)yov-ei-s, begett-ER „ yev „ yiyi/o/iai (cl. 8)Koup-eu-y, Z)ar5-BK „ Kcp „ Keipo (cl. 4, d).

An example of the not very numerous Denomina-tives is

:

5ropfl/i.-ev-y,/erry-MAN, Nom.-Stem wop dp-o, Nom. TropSpîs, passage.

Ohs.—Several Masculines in ev-s have Feminines in eta (pro-paroxytones) : /Sao-tXeur, king; âa-lXeia, queen.

2. rrip Nom. Trip -j reipa Nom. Teipa\

Top „ T<u/)|Masc., rpta „ rpm I

Ta „ Tjj-s) rptS „ T-pi'-jI

1^<=™"-

TlS „ TJ-S J

§343. SUFFIXES FOK FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. 213

Examples of Primitive nouns are

:

Stem and Nom. a-a-Trjp, deliver-ssSi, Masc. -i Verb.-Stem a- a (o-wfu))

„ „ „ <Ti>-Tiipa „ Fern. / (§ 298)

,, pij-Top „ /5i)-T(Bp, orcj-TOB, Verb.-Stem pe, Ftit.epS (§327,13)

„ Kpi-ra „ Kpi-TTj-s, judge,,

icpi, Vies. Kpiva

(§ 253, Obs.)

„ jroiTj-Ta „ iroiri-Trj-s, poet \ ,,ttoie, Pres, ttoieo)

Stem and Nom. iroiij-rpia, poetess) (ol. 1)

„ av\r]-ra „ aiXjiTrj-s, flute-play-ER, Masc.l Verb.-Stem ai\e,

„ ai\r]-Tpt8„ avXrjTpi-s „ Fem. i Pres. av\e<o (cl. 1)

Examples of Derived words are

:

Stem TToXi-ra, Nom. noXlrrj-s, citizen, Nom.-Stem sroXi, Nom.W(iXt-S

„ oiKe-To „ olKerrj-s, domestic, MsiScA stem oIko, "Norn.

„ oiKE-TiS „ oiKen-s „ Fem. J oi/co-j

§ 342. B) Substantives expressing an action are

called nomina actionis ; the foUomng sufiixes are the

most common for them :

1. ri, Nom. Ti-s ^

m ,, o-i-f, from Ti-s, according to § 60a I Feminine,

[comp. Lat. ii'o]jBarytones.

(Tta ,, crta /

All nouns of this kind are Primitives, as

:

n'i.a--n-s, faith, Verb.-Stem niB, Pres. Mid. iretdoixat (cl. 2)

)j.i.p.r]-cn-s, imitation „ jn i ju e, Pres. (Dep.) ^t;ae'o;aat (cl. 1)

<rKe\jn-s, contemplation „ a- Kin, ,, „ o-KeWo/xai (cl. 3)

irpa^i-s, action „ irpay, Pres. Act. n-pacro-a) (ol. 4, a)

ydve-ari-s, origin ,, y(v(j), Pres. Mid. ylyvojiai

^(§ 327, 14)

SoKip-a-trt-a, examination ,,8oKip,a&, Pres. Soxt/iafto (cl. 4, b)

2. /io, Nom. /io-s (always oxytone), Masc.

tnra-a--jj.6-s, cramp, Verb.-Stem erjra, Pres. a-Traa (cl. 1), I draw

^t-a--p6-s, iond „ Se „ Sew „ i"5jW

oovp-jio-s, wailing „ 68vp „ oSjpo/iai (cl. 4, d, OJs.)

Ohs.—Prom verbs in eva> substantives in eta are derived, wbich

denote the action, and are ail paroxytone : iraiSeia, I educate,

TraiSeia, education ; ^aa-iXeva, I am king, /Sao-iXei'a, king's rule.

Comp. § 341, 1 Ohs.

S 343. C) The result of an action is indicated by :

—

214 SUFFIXES FOK FOEMING SUBSTANTIVES. § 344

1. liar, Norn, im, Neuter (accent, § 340, Ohs. 4).

Trpay-iialr], the thing done, Verb.-Stem npay, Pres. npda-aa (cl. 4,a)

(almost the same as ro irenpayfievov, Lat. factum)

prj-palr], luord, Verb.-Stem p e, Fut. epa> (§ 327, 13)

(comp. TO flptjpevov, Lat. dictum)

T/ii7-/ia[T], cut, Verb.-Stem rep., Pres. repvo) (§ 321, 10)

(comp. TO TCT/Jiripevov, the piece cut off).

2. fs, Nom. OS, Neuter (accent, § 340, Obs. 4).

Stem Aax-fs, Nom. \axos, lot, Verb.-Stem Xax, Pres. Xayxavto

(§ 322, 27>

„ ie-es „ Wos, custom „ e fl, Perf. eimâ (§ 275)

,, TCK-f s ,, TCKos, child „ TSK, Pres. tikto)

(cl. 3).

Obs.—The same suffix in derived words denotes a quality :

^dpos, weight, Adjective-Stem fiapv, Nom. âpv-s

âdos, depth „ Padv „ â6v-s

fJ^rJKos, length ,, paKpo „ paxpo-s

§ 344. D) The Instrument or means for an action is

expressed by

:

Tpo, Nom. rpo-v [Lat. fra-m] (accent § 340, Obs. 4)

apo-Tp - V, plough, Verb.-Stem a/)o. Vies, apoat (cl. 1) [aro/-

tru-rn\

Xi-rpo-v, redemption money „ \v „ \ia> (cl. 1)

btSaK-rpo-v, a teacher'sfee „ SiSax „ StSdo-xm (§ 324, 28)-

Obs.—The meaning of the kindred feminine suffix rpa is less

fixed : ^v-17-Tpa (^îa>,I scrape), scraper, instrumentfor rubbing ;

6pxr]-<r-rpa (opxeopai, I dance^, dancing place; TroKai-ir-Tpa

(ndKala, I urrestle), wrestling school.

§ 345. E) Flace is indicated by

:

1. TTfpio, Nom. T-qpio-v Neuter proparoxytoneaKpoa-TTjpio-v, audi-toriu-m, Verb.-Stem, aKpoa, Pres. oKpodopai

(cl. 1).

OiKaiT-Tripio-v, judgment hall „ biKob „ SiKofoj

(cl.4 b).

2. e 1 0, Nom. cio-v, Neuter properispome

Xoy-eio-j', speofe'ra^ jaface, from the Nom.-Stem Xoyo, Nom. \oyo-rKovp-eXo-v, barber's ship „ „ Kovpev,, Kovpei-sM.ov(T-e'io-v, seat of the Muses „ „ Mouo-a ,, MoCo-a

3. (ov, Nom. toy, Masc. oxytone,

denotes a place where anything is in abundance: apneKav, vine-yard ; avbpav, men's room ; olvav, wine vault.

§ 348, SUFFIXES FOR FOEMIN& SUBSTANTIVES. 215

§ 346. F) Substantiyes of quality are derived from

Adjective-Stems by means of the following suffixes

:

1. TTjT, Nom. nj-r, Fem. [Lat. tat, tut, Nom. tas, ties]

Stem naxv-rrjT, Nom. 7raxvn;r, thickness, Adj.-Stem traxv,

Nom. naî-s

„ veo-TTjT „ ve6n]S, youth „ veo

Nom. vio-s

„ t(ro-Ti)r „ laoTT)!, equality „ to-o

Nom. uTo-s

2. (Tvva, Nom. a-ivr], Pem. pavoxytone.

biKaio-a-ivrj, justice, Adj.-Stem SiKaio, Nom. SiKaio-s

j-(i>cj}po-<rvv7], soberness „ trcaippou „ <ra^pa>u

3. I a, Nom. la, Fem. paroxytone

<ro(/)-ia, wisdom, Adj.-Stem crocjjo, Nom. a-o(f>6-s

fvBaifiov-i a, hliss „ evbaifxov „ evdalfiaiv.

The suffix ta with the vowel e of the Adjective-

Stems in -69, Nom. -•?;? becomes eta; and when the

final o of an Adjective-Stem is preceded by another o,

it becomes oia, oia (proparoxytone).

akri6e-ia, truth, Adj.-Stem a\rjde[^s'], Nom. oKrjdrjs (§ 165)

eijvo-ta, benevolence „ evvoo „ eiivov-s

4. es, Nom. os. Neuter, § 343, 2.

§ 347. G) Diminutives are formed from Nominal-

Stems by the suffixes

:

1. 10, Nom. lo-v, Neuter

fraih-io-v, little boy, Nom.-Stem iraib, Nom. iraX-s

KrjTT-i o-v, little garden „ kjjtto ,, KrJTro-s.

Obs.—Other forms of to are 181.0 (Nom. iSto-v), apto (Nom.apto-v), vSpio (Nom. vbpw-v), vXXto (Nom. vXXio-k) :

oiKi 8 ( o-v, a little house (o'/co-s) ; iraiba p i o-v, a little boy

(Tral-s);piKvbpio-v, a little song (êXos) ; dbiWio-v, a little

picture (eiSos).

2. Masc. la-Ko, Fem. la-na, Nom. utko-s, lanri, paroxytoiier

veav-itTKo-s, adolesceniMZifs, Nom.-Stem veavia, Nom. veavla-s

7raih-iirKT],girl „ TratS „ irai-s

(rTe(j)av-l<rK0-s, a little garland „ <m<âvo „ crTeKJtavo-s.

§ 348. H) Patronymics or substantives which denote

descent from a father (or ancestor)—more rarely the

descent from a mother—are most frequently formed by

the suffix ba (No^^.^|g59^/jgr^theJasculine, and only S

21G SUFFIXES FOE FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. § 349.

(JSTom. -9) for the Feminine. The Masculines are par-

osytone, the Feminines oxytone. This suffix is added

to Stems in a without any connecting vowel

:

Masc. Bopfa-5i;-f, Pern. Bo/jfa-y, Nom.-StemBopca, TSTom. Bopea-s

„ Alveia-Sr]-! „ Aiveia „ Alveid-s.

The same is affixed to CmsonantStems by means of

the vowel i :

Maso. KiKpojT-t-&t]-s, Pern. KcKpon-t-s, Nom.-Stem KexpoTr, Nom.KeVpoT/r,

Stems in ev and o of the Second Principal Declension

also adopt the connecting vowel i, before which the v of

€v is dropped

:

Ilrj\s-L-Sr]-s from the Nom.-Stem rtiyXeu, Nom. n^Xcu-s

Homeric additional form nrjXrj'iaSrj-s (comp. § 161, D.)

ArjTo-i-Srj-s from the Nom.-Stem Atjto, Nom. Atjtw, son of Leto.

The Stems of the O-Declension substitute t for o :

Masc. TavTdK-t-8rj-s, Pem. Tavrdk-i-s, Nom.-Stem TavraXo, Nom.TdvraXo-s

„ Kpov-i-Srj-s „ Kpovo, Nom.Kpovo-s.

Only those in to (Nom. to-?) change these letters

to la:

Masc. Bea-Tid-Srj-s, Fem. Oeand-s, Nom.-Stem eccrrio, Nom.GetTTto-ff

„ MevoiTid-S 7] -

s

„ MevoiTto, Nom,MevoLTio-s,

Obs.—A more rare sufSx for Patronymics is lov or imi', Nom.lap : Kpovlav, son of Kpovo-s. The Poets take many liberties

with regard to the metre.

§ 349. I) Gentile names or substantives describing

persons as natives of certain towns or countries have

the suffixes

:

1. ev, Nom. evs (comp. § 341) oxytone

Meyap-ev-s, Nom.-Stem Meyapo, Nom. tcL MeyapaEperpt-ci-r „ 'Eperpio „ '"Epirpia.

2. TO, Nom. Trj-s, paroxytone

Teyed-Trj-s (Teyca), Aiyij/ij-Tij-s (Alylvrj), 'HTTSipco-rrj-s ("HTTfipo-t),

2.KAii-r,-j (2.«Xm). ^.^.^^^^ ^^ Microsoft®

§ 35i. SUFFIXES FOK FORMING ADJECTIVES. 217

Obs.—The feminine gentile names end in 6 (Nom. -s) : MfyapiS,Norn. Meyapi'f ; TeyeartS, Nom. Tfycans ; StKeXiarii,Nom. SiKeKiaTis,

§ 3.10. II.

—

-The most important Suffixes for forming

Adjectives.

1. 10, Nom. to-? (proparoxytone)

expresses the most general relation to the idea of the

substantive from %¥hich the adjective is formed : ovpdv-

io-<;, heaven-?z/ (ovpavo';); ea-irep-io-^, belonging to

evening (icnrepa). The t sometimes combines with

the final vowels of Vowel-Stems to diphthongs, which

then frequently receive the circumflex: ar/opa-Lo-<;,

{opensis {ouyopa) ; atSo-to-?, modest, from the Stem alho(Nom. alSdos:) ; but SiKa-to-'; Just, from the Stem BiKa'(Nom. SiKT], Justice) ; so also after rejecting the 9 we/have from the Stem depe<; (to 6ipo<;, summer) depe-to-?,

summer-like. By the suffix to, adjectives are also formed

from Adjective-Stems : eKev6ep-bo-<;, liber-aZi's (ikev6epo-'i,

liber) and gentile adjectives (§ 349) from names of places,

which, however, are also used substantively : MfXijer-to-?

(for Mt\7;T-to-9, from MtXiyro-?, according to § 60),

'A6r)va-io-<; ('Adrivai,).

§ 351. 2. KG, Nom. /co-s (always oxytone)

is mostly afHxed to the Stem by the connecting vowel

*, and, in words derived from Verbal-Stems, denotes

fitness : apx-t-Ko-^, suited for governing ; '^paîKO';, suited

for writing or painting (picturesque). Many Verbal-

Stems insert the syllable tl before the suffix ko

(§ 342): ala-Orj-Ti^Ko-s, capaile of perceiving; Trpa-

KTi-Ko-'i, suited for acting. From Nominal-Stems the

suffix KG, Nom. «o-9, forms adjectives denoting what is

peculiar, belonging or referable to the thing expressed

by the noun: âa-i\,tK6<;, kingly; ûcrt/co?, natural:

iroXe/MKO'!, warlike.

Ohs.—By means of this suffix are formed the names of many arts

and sciences, the Feminine being used substantively, originally

with the siAdiliBfît^g^îffB^fiênce : 17 iiova-i-ic^, musk.

218 SUFFIXES FOK FOEMING ADJECTIVES. § 352.

ij ypaykfiar-i-Kr], from to ypaiijiara, litterae, grammar, the art of

writing; tj raKT-i-Krj, tactics. Tho corresponding Masculine

denotes one who is experienced in such art or science : 6 fiov-

a-iKo-s, musician ; 6 jpaixjianKo-s, grammarian ; 6 raKTiKo-s,

tactician.

§ 352. 3. ivo, Nom. wo-9, proparoxytone, and

4. 6 0, Nom. 60-9 [Lat. eu-s], proparoxytone (ou?

perispome, § 183), denote the material of which any-

thing consists: Xt6-ivo-<;, of stone (Xtô-9);

ûX-tvo-9,

wood-en {^vXo-v); %/3i/o--eo-9, %/3iio-oi}9, gold-en [aur-eurs]

(X/31'0-6-9).

Ois.—IV o, Nom. ivo-s, oxytone, forms adjectives of time: ;(5co--

IV OS, yesterday's, from x^«> yesterday ; eaptvos, vernus; with

enlarged suffix : vvKT-ep-i v 6-s, noct-ur-nu-s.

5. evT, Nom. Masc. 6^-9, Fern, ecraa, Neut. ev,

denotes abundance : %a/3t-e t-9, grace-/MZ (%api-?) ; vKri-e t-9,

wood-t/ {vK'rj) ; ijfjâdo-e t-9, sand-j/ {ajjuado-'i). Comp. Lat

osu-s: gratiosMs, siivosus, aienoms.

6. /jLov, Nom. Masc. /ioji/, Neut. fiov,

denotes the ient or inclination to something : /j,vij-fi co v,

mindful ; tXi]-/x tu v, patient ; i'7ri.\ria--fjL a> v, forgetful.

Ois.—Adjective suffixes of less defined meanings are :

vo, Nom. j/o-r, oxytone, mostly passive : Sd-vo^s, terrible ; cnfi-vo-s

(o-t/3-o-fiai-), venerable

Xo „ \o-s, mostly oxytone and active: Sti-Xo'-t, fearful;

aTraTTj-Xo-s, deceitful

jio „ fio-s, proparoxytone, partly active; pax-i-p-o-s, warlike

;

and partly passive : doi8t-|i o-s, capable of being

sung ; akin to it is

a-ifio „ a-ifio-s, proparoxytone : xpria-ip-o-s, vseful ; ^vîft.o-s,

capable of being fledfrom, avoidable

fs „ rjs, Neut. es : -vêuS-ijr, false, almost exclusively in com-pound words (§ 355).

§ 353. III.

—

Derived Verbs

are formed in various ways from Nominal-^tem.s. Themost important endings of derived verbs, differing little

from one another in meaning, are the following, arrangedaccording to their forms of the Present

:

§ 353 6. DEEIVED VERBS—ÂDVERBS. 219

1. o-a : fiurdora, IMre (jiurBo-s, hire)

Xpva-6-a>, I gild {^^pvao-s, gold')

fi)fito-m, Ipunish (^^rjiita, punishment)2. a-a : nfid-o), I honour

(j'î''^,honour)

alna-onai, 1 blame (âlria, blame)

yod-a, I wail (yoo-f, wailing)

3. e-co : dpiBiie-co, I number (dpi5/io-s, number)

cirvxe-co, I amfortunate (^fvTvxl]s, fortunate)

ia-Topc-co, I search (Jo-rap, searcher)

4. ev-a : âa-CKev-co, I am king (fiaa-CKev-s, king)

Pov\fv-w, T advise (PovXrj, advice)

5. if-o) : eX7rif-o>, I hope (iKtrl-s, hope)

iKhjvt^-a), I speah Greeh ("EXXtji/)

<l>CKi.mri^-a>, I am inclined l , _

to Philip ](!Ô.m,ro-s)

6. a^-a> : StKa^-a, Ijudge i^l-Kr], justice)

ipya^-ofiai, I work (epyo-v, worhj

jSmf-ojxat, I use violence (/3ia, violence)

7. aiv-ia : o7jp.alv-oi, I sign (tr^p^, sign)

\evKaiv-a>, I whiten (Xcv/co-j , white)

Xa^ciralv-ta, I am indignant (xaXe7rd-r, severe, in-

dignant)

8. vv-a : fjSiv-a), I sweeten (rjSi-s, sweet)

Xap.irpiv-co, I brighten (Xa/n7rpd-r, bright).

Obs. 1.—From a few Nominal-Stems verbs are derived with

different endings and with different meanings ; thus from

SovXo, Nom. Sov\o-s, slave: Sovkd-a, I enslave, SouXcu-m, 1

am a slave; from TroXep,o, Nom. irokefio-s, war, !roXe;ie-o>

and irdXepl^-a, I make war, jroXe/id-a, / make hostile.

Obs. 2.—Â desiderative meaning belongs to verbs in creia, as

well as to several in aa and taa : yeXaa-eia, I am inclined to

laugh; hpaaeia, I desire to do; <j)oiida), I want to murder;

KKava-idai, I want to weep. The verbs of the last two termina-

tions frequently indicate a bodily weakness or illness : wxpidiny

I am pale ; o^daKjuda, I suffer in the eyes.

IV.

—

Adverbs.

§ 3535. On the Adverbs formed from Adjectives,

comp. §§ 201-204.

Prom Verbal and Substantive -^\Bm.a adverbs are

formed by the suffixes

:

-220 FOKM OF COMPOSITIOlf. § "54.

Sov, oxytone: ava-tpav-Sov, openly; ayiKrj-Sov, gregatim

&r]v {ahriv), paroxytone : Kpi^S rj v, clam ; cvXXrjPSriv, collectively,

briefly (Stem Xa^); <nrop-abriv, scatteredly

(Stem (TTrep), a-ireipco, I sow

tI, oxytone: ivop,aa--T i, ly name (ovojiaâ) ; iKkrivicr-T i, graece

(JKkqvlâi).

B) Composition.

§ 354. I.

—

Form of Composition.

A noun, standing first in a compound, appears in the

form of its Stem : ocrTV-yeiTcov, neigJiiour to the city

;

yopo-SiSdaKoXo-^, teacher of the chorus; cra/cey-TraXo?,

shaJcer of the shield (to aaKOs:).

Consonant-Stems are usually united to the second part

by the connecting-vowel o : avBpiavT-o-Troi6-<; (6 avBpid-s:),

maJcer of statues, statuary ; -Trarp-o-KTovo-';, murderer of

a father. This o, further, is frequently inserted after

weak vowels : <pvcn-o-\6yo-';, acquainted with nature

;

lj(0v-o-(pdyo-<;, fish-eating, and regularly stands in place

•of a in the Stem : rjijbepo-hpofio-^, a runner hy day

;

')((opo-ypd(f)o-<;, descriher of a country. The o is dropped

before vowels : x°P'V'yo-''} leader of the chorus ; nrarp-

dSeX.<f>o-<;, a father's brother; it remains, however, where

the word originally began with digamma (§ 34, D.) :

Horn. Sri/xioepyo-^, Att. BTjfiiovpyo^, artisan.

Ohs.—Exceptions to these rules are frec[uent. Thus Stems in o-

often appear in an abbreviated form in compounds : î(J)o-kt6vos,

killing with the sword (Stem ^ t ^ e y) ; Teixo-fiaxi-a, a contest

at the wall (Stem reixes); the final vowel of A-Stems is

sometimes preserved as a or ?; : dpcra-Xoyor, a speaker about

virtue ; x'>^-4>opos, hearer of funeral offerings. A case-form

seldom occurs instead of the Stem-form: veas-oiKos, shed forships ; opfcro-t-(3aT!)r, wandering on the hills.

§ 355. The ending of a word is often somewhataltered in composition, especially when the compoundword is an adjective : Tifirj, (f)iX6-Tifio-^, ambitious

;

TrpayjjLa, 7roXv-7rpdry/j,wv, much occupied. The ending

§ 358. FORM OF COMPOSITION. 221

1J9 Masculine and Femiaine, e? Neuter, deserves special

notice ; this ending occurs

:

a) in many adjectives formed directly from Verbal-

Stems : a-/3A^j8-77?, uninjured (^Xa/3, Pres. ^XdirTa);

avTdpK-7j<;, self-sufficient (avro-'i and apKew).

b) in adjectives, whose second part comes from a

substantive in e? (Nom. o?) : Se/co-eT?;?, ten years old

(ero?) ; /ca/co-j^î;?, of a had nature (fl6o<;).

Ohs.—Observe also the compound adverbs in ft or t, oxytone :.

avTo-xeip-i, with one's own hand; a-jwrB-L, without pay;

irav-br]fi-el, with the whole people.

§ 356. A verb—without changing its nature—can

only be compounded vcith a preposition. The looseness

of the connection in such compoimds is the reason for

the position of the Augment mentioned in § 238

:

aTTOâXKa, I throw away ; a-rreâXov, I threw away.

For the same reason prepositions are frequently sepa-

rated from their verbs in the poets and in Herodotus,,

and in some cases even in Attic prose (comp. § 446).

This separation is called tmesis.

When any other word is to be compounded with a

Verbal-Stem, a noun is first formed of the two, e. g.

from \i6o-'; and Stem âX, Xtô-/3oXo-?, throwing stones,

and thence \i6oô\e-a), I throw stones ; so likewise from

vav-<; and fid-xpjj,ac comes first vav-fid'ô-^, fighting at sea,

and thence vav/^La'îco ; from eS and Stem ipry, eue/oyexTy?,

benefactor, evepyeTeci), J do good.

§ 357. A substantive of an abstract meaning can only

be compounded with a preposition without changing its

termination : Trpo and ôvXij make TrpoôvXri, previous

consultation. In every other compound the abstract

substantive must take a derivative ending: Xi6o<i and

^dX-i) make Xi6oôXld, throwing stones ; vav^ and fJ.d'XT],

vavfiaîa, sea-fight; e5 and Trpd^K, evirpaîa, well being.

§ 358. Compounds having the first part formedDigitized by Microsoft®

222 MBAilING OF COMPOUNDS. §359,

directly from a Verbal-Stem are rarely met with, except

in the poets. They are formed in two ways, viz.

:

1. the Verbal or the Present-Stem is joined directly

to Stems beginning with a vowel, and to those begin-

ning with a consonant by means of the connecting-

vowels e, t, or o: BuK-e-Ov/j^o-^ (Pres. haKV-m, cL 5),

heart-gnawing ; jreiO-apxo-';, obedient to order (7reldo/j,ai,

and apxn) > ap%-t-T€«;TCBj/, master-builder ; fucr-o-yvvo-^,

hater of women (j/,icria}).

2. A form strengthened by cr and resembling the

Weak Aorist-Stem is joined in the same way to the

second part of the word: 'Kvcr-i-irovo-<;, freeing from

trouble; irXri^-i'n-iro-'i {irXrfa-aa, cl. 4, a), whipping

horses ; arpe'y^L-hi.Ko-'i (o-r/je^tD, cl. 1), perverter of right.

§ 359. II.

—

Meaning of Compounds.

In regard to their meaning compound Adjectives and

Substantives are divided into three principal classes

:

1. Determinative compoimds. In them the second

word is the principal, which, without in any way

altering its meaning, is merely defined by the first.

These compounds may be paraphrased by changing

the first part either into an Adjective or an Adverb;

aKp6-iro\i-<;, high town, castle, i. e. ciKpa ttoXi? (Horn.

ir6Xi,<; aKprf) ; fiea-rjfi^pia, mid-day, i. e. yu.eo-7; Tj/jbipa;

yJrevBo-Kfipv^, i. e. ylrevSrj^ Krjpv^, false herald; 6p,6-

SovXo-?, fellow-slave, i. e. ofiov BovXevav; fieyaXoTrpeTrij';,

grand, properly, appearing as great ; 6->lri-yovo<;, late-bom,

i. e. 0T|r6 yevofievo';. This class is the least numerous.

2. Attributive compounds. In them the second wordis indeed also defined by the first, yet so, that the latter

alters its meaning and together with the first forms a

new idea, which is attributed as a quality to another

word. These compounds can generally be paraphrasedby employing the Participle of exa or a verb akin to it

in meaning, and adding to this the second word as anDigitized by Microsoft®

§ !559. MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. 223

object, the first becoming an attribute to the object:

fiaKpo-yeip, longi-manuB, Icng-handed, i. e. fiaicpk<; X€ipa<;

6%(Bj/ (not the long hand itself) ; dpyvp6-roô-<;, provided

with a silver how, i. e. apyvpovv toôv <j>epaiv; ojjlo-

TjOOTTo-?, of the same kind, i. e. 6/ioiov rpcnrov exjcov ;

ryXavK-MTTt-';, bright-eyed, i. e. yXavKoix; 6(f>6aXfiov^

exovcra ; iriKpo-âfio-';, having a litter wedding ; Kov(f>6-

vov-<i, frivolous, trifling ; a--(f>pa}v, of sound sense, sober ;

SeKcireTi]<;, ten years old, i. e. having or lasting ten years

;

avTo-xeip, making use of one's own hands.

Obs.—To these belong the numerous adjectives in -mSj;s and

oeiSrjs : yvvai.Kai8rjs=yvvmK0-eiSris (eiSoy), womanKA;e, womam's/i.

3. Objective compounds, or those of dependency. In

them either the first word is grammatically governed

by the second or the second by the first, so that in the

paraphrase one of the two must be put in an oblique

case: î'ô;jô-?=t^ rivia exôv, guiding the reins, driver

;

\oyo-ypdô-<;, speech-writer, i. e. X07011? ypdtâv ; dîo-

Xoyo-'s, worth speaking, i. e. "Koyov d^tc; ; (j)i\6-fwva-o-i;,

loving the Muses, i. e. ^CkSiv rdi; Movcra? ; SeKn-Saificnv,

fearing the gods, i. e. BeBico^ toik; Balfiova<; ;êtpoTrow/To?,

made by hand, i. e. %6/3crl -Troirjro^ ; 6eo^Xaî]<;, injured

by Crod, i. e. vtto 6eov ê^Xafi/j,evo<; ; olKoyeviji;, born in

the house, i. e. iv oXic<o yev6fjLevo<s.

Ohs. 1.—Prepositions may be joined with substantives in any of

the three principal classes—(1) Determinative : ajKî-diarpov, a

round theatre, i. e. a theatre extending itself round in a circle;

air-ekevdepos, one who has been freed by another, not by himself,

1. e. a freedman (6 ajro tivos i\ev6epos &v); (2) Attributive

:

iv-6eos, i. e. iv eavra 6e6v ex'""' carrying a god in himself,

god-inspired ; afi^tKicov, viz. ve^s, i. e. Kiovas apx^ iavTov ^ôv,

a temple encompassed around with pillars ; (3) Objective : iyâi-

pios, i. e. ev TJj x^P^ ^^» ^^ home; iffylirTrios, i. c. e^' tTTTro) atv,

heing on a horse, belonging to a horse.

Obs. 2.—Against the general rule (§ 85), according to which

compound words draw back the accent as far as possible from

the end, those compounds in -o-s in the Nominative whose

second part comes directly from a Verbal-Stem (§ 356), usually

accent this StemJmJMSMi«fe|mgining. They are paroxy-

224 MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. § 360

tone wlien the last syllable but one is short, oxytone when it

is long : Xoyo-ypd(j>o-s, speech-writer ;/xj/rp-o-KroVos, mother-

murderer ; TraiS-aycoyd-r, boy-leader ; /ifXo-jrojdr, composer of

songs. When the meaning is passive, the second word remains

unaccented: avT6-ypa<f>o-s,written'by one's self; firjTp-o-KTOvo-s,

murdered hy the mother ; Svcr-dycoyos, hard to guide.

§ 360. The prefix av [comp. dvev, without, Lat. in-,

Engl. un-~\ before consonants a [comp. Lat. i- in

i-ffna-ru-s], called alpha privative on account of its

meaning, is found in a very large number of compounds,

which belong to the determinative class if the second

part has arisen from a verb or an adjective, but chiefly

to the attributive if from a substantive : d-ypa^o^, un-

written, i. e. oil yeypafMfj.evo'; ; av-e\ev6epo';, unfree, i. e.

ovK eKevOepo'i ; av-athrj<;, shameless, i. e. alhS) ovk e^^wv

;

airai-';, childless, i. e. iralha'; ovk ej(ttiv. Determinatives

with av (a) from substantives are rare and poetic:

fjLijTTjp afirjToip, an unmotherly mother, i. e. /jltjttjp ou

firjTTjp ovaa.

Ohs.—

"Words originally beginning -with digamma (§ 34, D.)

have a not av : a-eKav, contracted aKcov, unwilling ; a-fiK-jjr,

contracted alK-qs, reproachful (Stem cIk, foixa) ; d-cpyo-s, con-

tracted apyo-s, inactive (epyo-v, work).

The prefix S u ? corresponds to the English mis, and,

as the opposite to ev, denotes something unfortunate,

a-wkward, difficult: Sv^dp€aTo<; (§ 324, lo), displeased;

2i/9/3ouXo9, ill-advised, i. e. KaKa^; ^ovXd<; exoJv (attribu-

tive) ; Sy?a\a)T09, hard to capture (§ 324, 17). Here,

too, determinative compounds from substantives are

rare : Hom. Au?7rcr,|0t9, unfortunate Paris.

( 225 )

Part Second.

SYNTAX.

Preliminary Remarks.

§ 361. 1. Syntax (<7vvTaî<i, arrangement) teaches the

use of the forms discussed in the first part of the

grammar, and the way in which words are arranged

into sentences, and sentences are combined together.

2. A sentence is either simple or compound. Everysentence is simple in which the necessary parts of a

sentence occur only once.

3. The necessary parts of a sentence are

:

a) the Subject, i. e., the person or thing about which

something is stated,

h) the Predicate, i. e., that which is stated.

Obs. 1.—Every form of the finite verb (§ 225, 4) contains a

complete sentence in itself, in -which the personal ending contains

the Subject, and the Verbal-Stem the Predicate : ^j//xi', I say;

iâfiev, we said.

Obs. 2.—In many cases the Subject remains undefined: <f)acri,

they say, people say ; or it is not defined, because readily under-

stood by the Greeks : vei, lie rains, i. e., Zeus, for he alone can

cause rain ; ia-aXiriyê, he blew the trumpet, i. e., the trumpeter

—for it is his business. The Subject of the impersonal verbs

Set, xpVt '* *'* necessary, is also undefined.

4. The Predicate is either Verbal or Nominal; it is

Verbal when expressed in the form of a finite verb:

KOjOo? iâa-lXevere, Cyrus ruled; it is Nominal whenexpressed in the form of a noun (substantive or adjec-

tive) : Kvpo<; âaiXei/'; r)v, Cyrus was king.

5. The Predicate must agree with the Subject, viz.,

ihe Verbal Predicate in number, the Nominal in number

and case, and whgj^/^gj^yajft^c^jyîve, in gender also

:

Q

226 PKELIMINAEY EEMAKKS. § 361.

ol "TToXe/jLiot, ivLKTjcrav, the enemies conquered; fj iicu)(r,

ueyaXt] r)v, the lattle was great.

Exceptions, §§ 362-366.

6. In many cases this agreement alone is sufficient to

express the relation of a Nominal Predicate to the

Subject : o ^kâs SXô'i ov /m6vi/j,o<;, great prosperity is

not lasting ; Aepioi kukoI, the Lerians (iahabitants of the

island of Leros) are lad. But mostly the Nominal Pre-

dicate is more clearly connected with its Subject by

the yerb to be (substantive verb) : d fiiâ<; oX^c; ov

jjLovifio^ ianv, Aepiot kukol elcriv. This verb, thus used,

is called the Copula.

7. The intransitive and passive verbs, which denote

to become, be made, appear, be named, designated, chosen

and the like, in order to produce a complete sentence,

often require a Nominal Predicate along with the

Verbal one. In this case also the Nominal Predicate

must agree with the Subject : KOpo? iyeveTo âcriXevt;,

Gyrus became Jcing, Cyrus rexfactus est, comp. § 392.

8. The Greek language expresses many definitions of

time, order, and kind, less frequently of place, by adjec-

tives, which are expressed in English by adverbs or

prepositions with substantives. These adjectives, which

must agree with the Subject, are to be considered as

supplementary Predicates : TpLToiot, airifKBov, they went

away on the third day ; AaK€Saifj,6vi.oi varepoi aîKovro,

the Lacedaemonians arrived later, posteriores advenerunt

;

opKio'i <TOi Xeyco, I tell you on oath.

On the similar use of the participle as a supplementary Predicate,

see § 589, &c.

9. A simple sentence is enlarged by an Oiject being

added to the verb. The Object is that to which the

action of the verb extends : oi 'A6rjvaioi, airmTeivav tov

"ôj/cpdrrjv, the Athenian's killed Socrates.

On the different kinds of Objects and the manner in which they

are indicated, see §§ 395—402.Digitized by Microsoft®

§361. PEELIMINAET BEMAKKS. 227

10. The Active verbs, which correspon-L in meaning

to the Intransitive and Passive ones mentioned in 7, i.e.

the verbs which denote to make, name, designate, choose

and the like, frequently also require a Nominal Pre-

dicate. But as this belongs to the Object, it must agree

with it : oi Tiepaai, tov Kvpoi> e'lKovTO jSaaiXea, the

Persians chose Cyrus Icing \_Persae Cyrum regem elege-

runt}. Comp. § 404. This kind of Predicate is called

a Dependent Predicate. As the Dependent Predicate

here appears in the Accusative, so it may in other cases

appear in the Genitive or Dative. Comp. § 438 ; Obs.

§ 589, &c.

11. Another enlargement of the sentence is the Attri-

bute, i. e., any nominal definition added to a substantive

as essentially belonging to it and forming with it one

idea : KaX6<; wttto?, a fine horse ; 6 irapiov Katpo^, the

present time (the present).

Ols.—The Greek language in many cases adds an Attribute to

the designation of a person, expressive of a generic idea : Horn.

rjpaies Aavaoi, ye heroes Danai (ye warring Danai) ; avtpcs

SiKatTTai, ye judges, judices.

12. Different from the Attribute is the Apposition.

Apposition is such a subordinate deiinition added to a

substantive as does not exactly form one idea with it,

but is superadded rather for describing or illustrating

it, and hence might generally be expressed in the form

of a descriptive clause : TlapvaaTi<;, rj tov K.vpov fiijTijp,

TOVTOV fiaXKov icf>lXei, r) tov 'ApTa^ep^Tjv, Parysatis, the

mother of Cyrus—who was Cyrus' mother

—

loved him

more than Artaxerzes ; ivTevOev Kvpo? i^eXavvei Sia,

^pir/ia^ 6t? H-oXocraovi, ttoXiv olKovfJLevqv, evSai,/j,ova Kol

/j.eyaXTjv, from there Cyrus marches through Phrygia to

Colossi, a populous, prosperous, and large city (which

was a . . . . city).

The Attribute and Apposition must agree with the

substantive to which they belong, in the same way as

the Predicate (5, 7)..,. ,, .„. ^^^ ' Digitized by Microsoft®

228 NUMBER AND GENDEK. §362,

Chap. XIV.

—

Numbek and CtENDek.

§ 362. The Singular sometimes has a collective sense,

denoting a plurality : iadri<;, clothing, clotJies ; •yrXlvdo';,

bricks; r) iTnro'i, cavalry ; f) acnrii;, the heavi/-armed.

Sometimes a Predicate or Apposition in the Plural

refers to collective substantives in the Singular : Âdrj-

vaiaiv TO •7rX'fj0o<; o'iovrai "iTnrapxpv rvpavvov ovra

aTTodavelv, the mass of the Athenians believe Hipparchus

died as ruler; to crTpaTevfia eiropiêTO oItov k6-

•7rT0VTe<; tov'; jSovi xal ovov;, the army obtained food by

hilling the oxen and asses.

A Plural is formed in Greek from many words, espe-

cially abstracts, which have no plural in Enghsh

;

especially when the repetition of an idea is to be ex-

pressed: al eiri^dveiai koI XafiTrpoTrjTei ix twv

urôivayv Îr^veerOai <f)i\ovcn,v, celebrity and glory usually

arise from' the contests ; i/Mol al cral fieyaXai eiiTv^îai

ovK apea-Kovcnv, your (repeated) great success does not

please me; Hom. Trai/re? OdvaToi aTvyepol, all hinds of

death are hateful.

Ohs. 1.—Poets frequently use the Plural in a generic sense where

we employ the singular with the indefinite article : ovk hv

yvvaiKav rja-aoves Kakoifj.eB' av, 1 should not like to he called

inferior to a woman ; (pCkoi, afriend.

Ohs. 2.—The speaker often uses the first person Plural of himself

[oomp. Lat. nos\. In this case the Masculine is used even

when a woman is the speaker. Thus Electra says, vâoijieff

,

« Xphy ""'pi Tifiaipoviiepoi, T will fall, if it must he, as myfather's avenger.

Ohs. 3.—In Homer there are many Plurals of ahstract ideas, which

we express in the Singular ; the Plural, however, properly

denotes the various manifestations of such ideas : 'm-irocrivrjs

eKeKaaro, hy horsemanship he w<xs distinguished; at^pahlriai.

vooio, in the foolishness (the foolish thoughts) of his mind.

§ 363. The Neuter Plural comes very near in its

meaning to the Singular. This explains the peculiar

Greek custom, that the Neuter Plural has the verb inDigitized by Microsoft®

§ 366, NUMBEK AND GENDEE. 229

the Singular : ttw? ravra iravaerai; how is this to

end? ra -Trpdyfiara ravra Seipd ecmv, these thiyigs

are terrible.

Ohs. 1.—Some Plural Neuters, which denote a plurality of

persons, sometimes have the verb in the Plural, as : tcL reXr;,

in the sense of the authorities ; ra 'iOvt], the peoples.

Ohs. 2.—The Homeric and the Common Greek Dialects (Intro-

duction, 4), generally allow the Plural Verb with the Neuter

Plural : Horn, trtrapra XcXwi-at, the ropes are loosed.

§ 364. With an indefinite Neuter Subject (in English,

it) the Adjective Predicate is frequently in the Plural

:

dSvvard scttiv diro^vêiv, it is impossible to escape;

this is the case especially with the Verbal Adjective in

T60-?: iiri-xêipriTia r/v, it was to be attempted.

§ 365. When two persons or things are spoken of, the

Plural is always admissible as well as the Dual, and

both numbers may be used in referring to the same

thing: iyeXao'dTTjv aiJ,<pa), ^Xeyfravre'} et? dWrj-\ov^, they both laughed after looking at one another;

S T 6 •jrapdSet/yfj.a, S) Aa^îj? re kuI NiKia, give an example,

Laches and Nicias ; u Ad-)(7]<; re Kal Ni/ct'a, ei-Trarov,

Laches and Nicias say.

§ 366. The Neuter of an adjective in the Singular as

well as in the Plural easily becomes a substantive : iv

fleam, in medio, in the midst; iv rm Trapovri, at the

present moment, for th£ present ; ix ttoWov, for along

time ; Seivd, terrible things.

Hence a Neuter Adjective often stands as Predicate to

one or more Masculine or Feminine substantives to

express a class or genus in general : Hom. ovk dyaObi

iToXvKoipavi'r], the government of many is not a good thin^ ;

opOov ak7]6eC del, truth is always the right thing;

Seivbv ol iroXKoi, KaKovpyovi orav e)(acri, irpoa-rara';,

a bad thing is the many when they have base leaders

;

rapaxal Kal a-rda-eK oXeOpia Tal<i troKeaiv, disturbance

and discord are

230 THE ARTICLE. §367

§ 367. The demonstrative pronoun, instead of being

in the Neuter as in English, frequently agrees in gender

and number with the Predicate to which it refers, just as

in Latin: ovroi elcnv avSpe';, those are men; oi)To<i

opo(; icTTl BiKaioavvrj^ aXrjOfj re Xeyeiv kol a av Xd^rj rt?

awoBi,S6vai,, this is the idea of justice, to speak the truth

and to give back what we have received [haec notio justitiae

esf].

The relative pronoun also often agrees in Gender and

Number, not with the preceding substantive to which it

refers, but with the substantive following, which is added

as a Predicate : <f>iXou, b /j.eytcrTOv wyadov eanv, ov

(f)povriôvaiv, they do not care for a friend, which is the

greatest good.

Chap. XV.

—

The Akticle.

§ 368. The Article 6, 57, to is originally a demonstror

tive pronoun, and still employed as such in Homer, both

in a substantive and adjective sense, and frequently also

in the language of the other poets : Hom. ttjv iym 01

Xvcrco, HEE I mil not give up ; poet, tov, & Zev irdrep,

<p9icrov, HIM, father Zeus, destroy ; Hom. (pfflaei ere to

(70V fj.evo(;, this thy courage will he thy ruin.

§ 369. The Article in this demonstrative sense is

also employed in the following cases ia Attic prose

:

1. In connection with fikv and Se : d jjkkv, the one ; 6 Se,

the other.

Ols.—Used adverbially, to (to) fiiv—to (to) Si, mean partly—partly,

2. Sometimes also with Kai and Be ; kuI top KeXevcrai,,

and that he ordered ; tov koX tov, the one and the other.

3. In irpo TOV, before that, formerly.

§ 370. The real Article generally corresponds to the

English definite saîêdijîmfsm^ set forth an object,

•§374. THE AKTICLE. 231

either as a single one (the individualising article) or aa

a class (the generic article).

Ols.—o, fj, TO in Homer almost always has a demonstrative power.Yet in many cases—comp. especially § 379—the nse of these

forms approaches very near to that of the Attic Article. TheArticle, however, in Homer is scarcely ever necessary, and is

frequently omitted also in the Tragic writers.

§ 371. 1. The Individualising Article sets forth a

single object above others of the same kind, and that

:

a) as known or having been pointed out before

;

Herod. XaX/ttSee? ra? ett' 'Aprefiiaio) e'iKocri vfja^ irapelr

XovTO, the Ohcdddeans furnished the (before mentioned)

twenty ships at Artemision; Hep^v^ aêipa<; rrjv ava-

piOfj/rjTov (TTpaTiov riXOev iirl rrjv 'E\Xa8a, after having

collected the (well-known) innumerable army, Xerxes

marched against Greece.

Ohs.—In this sense proper names also, which in general do not

need it, may take the Article : 6 SoiKpaTjjr, Socrates, whom youknow, or who was mentioned before.

§ 372. b) A thing as distinguished from others by the

addition of distinguishing circumstances : 6 rcav 'Adrjvaioov

^fio^, the Athenian people (no other) ; 17 ttoXw rjv iro-

XiopKov/jLev, the city which we are besieging (just this).

§ 373. The distinguishing circumstance expressed by

the Article is often indicated in English by the posses-

sive pronoun : eKacrro^ tSjv STjfuovpy&v rrjv Te')(y7]v Ka\co^

iêipydêro, each of the artisans practised Ms art well.

§ 374. In connexion with numerals the Article some-

times denotes that the number to which it is added

stands in a deimed relation to another number : ra Svo

fji^pr), two-thirds ; tS>v Tpiijpav rpiaKoaicov ovcrwv t&v

iracT&v ra<; Si,aKO(ria<; ri iroXi^ Trapic'^êTo, of the triremes,

of which there were three hundred in all, the city furnished

two hundred. The Article has a similar effect with

quantitative adjectives of a more general kind : iroXKol,

many—oi iroXkoL most : TrXeoye?, more—ol ifKeove^, thiDigitizedby Microsoft®

232 THE AKTICLE. § 375.

greater part ; SXKoi, alii—ol aXXot, caeteri ; oXijoiiUfew—ol oXiyoi, the oligarchs.

§ 375. 2. The Generic Article indicates a whole class

of homogeneous objects : ol TroXirat, all the citisem

;

6 prjTcop, the orator (by profession) ; hel tov <rTpaTiayn)v

Tov apôvra fiaXKov rj roii'i iroXefilov; ôêiaOai, the

soldier mast fear his superior rather than the enemy.

Obs.—Hence the Article may also be used with proper names in

the plural when a whole class is to be described : o i Arjiio-

a-6ev(ts, orators like Demosthenes (a Demosthenes, comp. § 362,

Ohs. 1).

§ 376. The Article is not used when a substantive

only expresses an. idea in general : dv6pa>7rov -^vxh tov

deiov /iereêt, man's soul partakes of the divine ; so Geo?

denotes the deity ; 6 6e6<s, a particular god; so like-

wise, in many other current expressions, the moreancient method of not using the Article has been pre-

served : vvKTO'i, hy night ; ri/jbipa^, by day ; eiri OaXdaa-y,

at sea; tt/jo? darv, to town; kot ar^pov, in the country

;

KUTo, yt]<;, under the earth ; iv Seîa, on the right ; iâi,pS>

Xoyov, I exempt.

§ 377. The Article is omitted with a number of sub-

stantives, which by custom have almost acquu-ed the

force of proper names: /SatrtXeu?, the king (of the

Persians) ; TrpvrdveK, the presidents (as officials) ; ev

d/cpoTToXei, in the Acropolis (Athens).

§378. The Predicate (§ 361, 3, lo) generally has noArticle: Kvpo<; iyeveTo âaiXeii^ ruiv Uepcrcbv, Cyrusbecame king of the Persians; irovo'; evKkeia'; Trarijp,

labour is father of fame ; ol 'Adrjvawi lieptKXea eiXovro

cTTpaTiryov, the Athenians chose Pericles general (comp.

§§ 387, 392, 403, and 438, Obs.).

^§ 379. By means of the Article, any adjective, par-

ticiple, or adverb, as well as the infinitive, may be madea substantive : Horn, o yepav, the old man ; ol irXovaioi,

the rich; 6 ^6V»!'./J/^/^lg^mero&/!i^^?, the neighbour;

§ 3*^- THE ARTICLE. 233

oi irapovTe';, those present ; rk kcitco, the under (part) ; ot

iraXai, the ancients ; to /j,ia-eiv, hating or hatred.

Ohs.—With the Neuter Article any word, or even a whole sen-tence, may be represented as one ohjeot : to avTjp, the worddvrjp or the idea "man;" tA Tvadi <reavT6v, the saying or rule" Know thyself."

§ 380. The Generic Article (§ 375) generalises theidea of a participle, which then is to be translated by arelative phrase: Troieira) tovto 6 fiovKoixevo^, do that,

who will; firj ^r)Telre rov ravra Xe^ovra, seek not (one)

who mil say this (comp. § 500).

§ 381. By the Article many adverbs placed between it and a sub-stantive become attributive adjectives: oi totc avBpanoi, the people

cf that time; r] irapavriKa fjSovfj, the momentary pleasure ; atevddSe yvvaiKcs, the women of this place; ij ayav iXevBepia, the

excessive freedom.

§ 382. In the same way a genitive or a preposition with a sub-stantive, placed between the Article and another substantive, becomesan attributive clause : tA tUv 'Ad-qvaiwv irpdyfiara, the affairs of the

Athenians ; ol iv rfj iroXej avdpamoi, the people in the city ; rj Ka6'

rjpepav Tpo(j>fi, the daily nourishment; oi av€v ^virap rjSovai, the

painless pleasures.

§ 383. The Article often stands alone, sometimes

with the Genitive of a substantive (comp. §§ 409, 410),

sometimes with a preposition followed by a substan-

tive; in such a construction the Article has the force

of a substantive (§ 379) : to, tSsv ^Adrjvalcov, the affairs

(possessions, interests) of the Athenians ; ol iv rfi iroXei,

the (people) in the dty ; ra fieTo, Tavra, what follows, the

later (events).

§ 384. When a substantive with an attributive (§ 361,

ll) adjective has the Article, the adjective stands between

the substantive and the article : o ar/ado^ avrjp, the good

man.

§ 385. If the substantive alone is to be prominent,

and the adjective to be added as apposition (§ 361, 12),

the substantive stands first, and the adjective with the

articU follows, thug,^^,,^^^^^ ^.^^^^^^

234 THE AETICLE. §386

a) The substantive witliout Article, when the case is

such that the substantive, if put alone, would have no

article, rt Btacftepei avOpanro'i aicpaTr)^ d'qpiov tov

aKparea-TaTov ; in what does an ungovernable man

differfrom the most ungovernahle beast ? for if drjplov stood

alone it would be without Article, 07]plov, from a beast.

b) The substantive has the Article, when by itself, even

without an adjective, it must have the Article : ol Xtot

TO Tetyo? irepieZkov to kuivov, the Chians pulled down

(their) wall—the new one (which they themselves had

built) ; for even without the adjective it would have to

be TO TeZ)(p'; irepieTKov (§ 373).

§ 886. The same rule holds good with regard to the

position of the attributive additions mentioned in §§ 381

and 382 : o Â9r}vaiaiv BrjfjLa, the Athenian people ; 6

StJ/xo?, o tcov 'A67]vala)v, the people, that is, the Athenian ;

6 ixeTh TavTa ypbvo'i, the after time; o yjpbvo'i o /iera

TavTa, the time which folloived this.

§ 387. An adjective which without the Article either

precedes or follows a substantive having the Article, is

predicative, i. e. the character is assigned to the substan-

tive only by this word (§ 361, 4, 8, and lo) : ayaOb^ 6

avTjp or o avTjp ayaOo'i (viz. effTuv), the. man is good;

airavTe'i 6')(pfiev to acofia dvTjTov, we all have a body

(which is) mortal. The translation may often be effected

by a relative clause : ol A.6r)valot, riyovvTo avTovofiav to

•TrpwTov avfifid'xaiv, the Athenians had the lead of allies

(who) at first (were) independent ; (paivofiai, /xeyaXa? ra?

vTTocT'xeaei'; TToiovfjuevoi;, I seem to make promises which

are great. Comp. § 378.

Obs.—With proper names the use of the Article is very uncer-

tain, when the class is added to which they belong : 6 'Ev<f>pa'n)s

norafios or 6 norauos 6 Eirc^paTijr, the river Euphrates ; fj A'iTvri

TO opos. Mount Etna; 'Sinikia rj vrja-os, the island of Sicily;

Tj iroXis ol Tapo'ol, the city qf Tarsi,

§ 388. The possessive pronoun is preceded by the

Article when aîg&l^êl'^^'^jj/crosfe'^* ^® referred to:

SSMI. THE AETICLE. 235

6 e/io? eralpo';, my (particular) friend; ifiof eratpo?,

a friend of mine.

§ 389. avTO'i, as a predicate, put before or after a

substantive with the Article, means self: avrb'i 6 ttotj;/?

or o TTarrjp a\)r6<i, the father himself, ipse pater ; but as

an attribute it is put between the Article and the

substantive and means same: 6 avTo<s dvijp, the same

man, idem vir.

With the demonstrative pronouns ovtoi, oBe, iKelvo<;,

a substantive, not being a predicate, has regularly the

Article : o5to? o avr/p or d av7]p ovro'i, this man ; eKeivo

TO htopov, that gift. But when the substantive is a pre-

dicate the Article is wanting : eV IXepcrat? z/d/io9 eaTiv

ovTO'i, among the Persians this is law. Comp. § 367.

§ 390. TTa? without the Article before a substantive

without the Article means in the Singular every : iraaa

ir6Xi,<;, every city. The Article before ttS? gives it the

meaning of whole : r/ -Trdcra 7r6\t?, the whole city ; Toii'i

Tvdvra'i 6-irKiTa<i, the whole of the heavy-armed. Most

generally ttS? as well as 0X09 without the Article pre-

cedes or follows a substantive provided with the Article

:

Tvdaav vjuv Tfjv dXrjOeuiv ipa>, I will tell you the whole

truth; TOP dpiOfwv iTavTa Bi-)(a Sie\.d^ofj,ev, we divided

the whole numher into two parts ; rrj'; rifj,epa<; 0X.17? hirpK.Oov

ov ifKeov irivre koX elKoai cTraBlcov, during the whole day

they proceeded no mare than twenty-five stadia.

Obs.—Tvas with, the Article added to a numeral may often he

translated by " altogether " or " in all :" Aapeioc e/SacriXeuo-e

ra navra l| Km TptaKovra err], Da/rius ruled altogether thirty-six

§ .391. Expressions for measures are to be understood differently,

according to the position of the Article : ecrxafov to opos, the extreme

end of the mountain ; to ea-xo-Tov opos, the farthest mountain (in

contrast to other mountains); ^ ayopa p,ecrr], the middle (of the)

market-place ; 77 fieoT] ayopa, the middle market, that placed in the

middle of several others. In Latin /<w«to medium means both.

Digitize

236 THE NOMINATIVE. §392

Chap. XVI.—Use of the Cases.

A) The Nominative.

§ 392, The Nominative is the case of the subject and

of the predicate belonging to the subject (§ 361, 3, 4).

Hence, as in Latin with jio, dicor, videor, creor, &c.,

so in Greek with verbs of the same meaning the predi-

cative noun referring to the subject is in the Nomina-

tive: KaOia-TCLTai ySacriXei/?, he is appointed Mng

;

'AXeâvBpo^ 6eb<; wvo/iidêTo, Alexander deus appella-

batur. Comp. § 361, 7, §§ 378, 403.

Ohs.—aKoia, I hear, in the sense of I am called [Lat. audio],

also belongs to these verbs : oi iv 'Adrjvais ^CkmmôvresKoXaKes Koi 6eoXs ix^pol rJKovov, the PMlippizers in Athens

were called flatterers and objects of the gods' hatred.

§ 393. The Nominative is frequently used instead of the Voca-tive in addressing a person, especially in connection with oJros

:

o 'ATToXXoSmpoff ovTos, ov TT^pcfievels ; You I Apollodorus, won't youstop ? and also in exclamations : vrimos, thefool

!

B) Tlie Vocative.

§ 394. The person or thing addressed is in the Voca-tive. In Attic prose & is generally put before it,

except sometimes in animated discourse : /xt) Oopvêlre,

Si a.vSpe'; 'AdTjvaloi, don't make a disturbance, Athenians

;

cLKovei'i Alff-îvT) ; do you hear, Aeschines ?

Ohs.—The Vocative, like interjections, does not belong to the

structure of a sentence, whence a word in the Vocative is

inclosed by commas.

C) The Accusative.

§ 395. The Accusative, Genitive, and Dative markan object as dependent, whence they are called cases of

dependence {casus ohliqui, oblique cases).

The Accusative is the case of the Object, and therefore

denotes generally the person or thing to which an action

is directed.Digitized by Microsoft®

§398 THE EXTERNAL OBJECT. 237

The Object is either external to the action by which

it is affected : tv-ktu) tov BovXov, I strike the slave,—or

internal, i. e. already contained in the action itself

:

Ti/TTTw irevTrjKovTa ifKrp/d'i, I strike fifty blows.

Ohs,—The Accusative therefore in the great majority of cases is

dependent on a verb. Only in a very few cases does it happen

that a substantive after the manner of a verb is followed by an

Accusative; ol (rvfj-fiaxoi reBvatn ra 8eet rovs toiovtovs

aTTooToKovs, the allies are dead (beside themselves) from fear

of such ambassadors.

§ 396. 1. The External Object

is expressed by the Accusative with transitive verbs as

in other languages. Several verbs, however, are treated

in Greek as transitive which in other languages are in-

transitive. Such verbs are

:

a) Those which signify to benefit or injure, whether it

be by act or speech: ev or wyadov iroikw, evepyerea),

I benefit (tovs evep'êTrjo-avra';, my benefactors) ; ovlvtj/mi,

o)(f>e\eco, I am useful ; /ca/cw? or kukov iroieo), KaKoeo, 1do ill; aSi/ceo), I do wrong; v^piâ, I insult ; jSXdTTTco,

I hurt, &c. ; also Ko\aKevco, I flatter, and Ttficopio/n,ai,,

I avenge myself {tov lj(Qpov, an my enemy") ; o %a>KpdTr)<;

ovSeva rSiv ttoXitwv •^SiKi^crev, Socrates acted unjustly to

none of his fellow-citizens.

§ 397.—Not unfrequently the verb of a principal clause takes as

its object what should properly be the subject of a subordinate

clause : km fioi tov vJoi/ elni, ei /le/xadijKe t7]v Texvriv, more animatedthan Kai jioi eijrt, el 6 vlbs ftefidBr/Ke t^v re^^vrjp, and tell me aboutmy son, whether he has learnt his trade. Comp. § 519, 5, Ohs. 2.

§ 398. b) The Accusative of the external Object is

used with the verbs : (pevyeo (comp. fugio), airoStBpdcrKa},

I run away from; (f}Odvco, I get before; BrjpdM, OTjpeva,

I hunt after ; luixiopât (comp. imitor), ^tjXoco, I rival

;

d/j,ei/3o/iai, I repay, I respond to ; \av6dva (comp. lateo),

iKKeiirm (comp. defido) ; eKXeiiret, fie rj ekivk, spes medeficit.

238 THE INTERNAL OBJECT. §399.

§ 399. c) This Accusative is furtlier used with verbs

of emotion : alBeo/Mai, ala'xyvo/j.at, I am ashamed (tov

irarepa, before my father) ; cjivXaTTOfiai, evKaêo/MU, 1

am on my guard against; Oappea, I have confidence

(rrjv l<T')(yv, in my strength) ; eKTrX-^rrofiai,, KaraTrXijT-

Tofiai, I am amazed at ; similarly with o/ivv/jli, I swear

by (rov'; deovi, the gods).

Ohs.—-As with ojj.wyi.1, so in exclamations, the Accusative is used

even without a governing verh : vai fii. tov Aia, Tes, by Zeus

!

(§ 64:3, 16).

§ 3995. The Space and Time over which an action

extends are often expressed by the Accusative : koivtjv

oBov r)X6on,ev, we came by a common road ; Horn. KXifiaxa

vyjrTjXrjv Kare^rjaero, she came down the high ladder;

frXeiv OaXaaffav, to navigate the sea; ivravOa Kupo?

'ifieive i7/iepa9 vevre, there Cyrus remained five days.

Comp. § 405.

On the Accusative of the aim, see § 4.06.

§ 400. 2. The Internal Object

is expressed by the Accusative not only with transitive,

but also with intransitive and passive verbs.

The internal Object is

:

a) a word of cognate origin with the verb: Horn.

dXXoi 8' a/M(p' oKXrjcn iidj^^rjv e/j.d'yovTO irvXrjatv, alii

circa alias portas pugnam pugnahant ; Tel')(ô<i rei^t-

ôvTai,, they wall (build) a wall; iroinrr^v irefiTreiv, to

send an escort, make a solemn procession; KaKicrT7]v

SovXeiav eSovXevcrev, he served the worst service (endured

the worst slavery) ; Horn, tw ireiaeai 09 ksv apia-rriv

/SovXrjv ôvXevar], you will obey him who advises (gives)

the best advice ; r-qv ivavTtav vocrov vocrovfLev, we suffer

(sicken) from the opposite sickness ; fieydXTjv Ttvh Kpiaiv

Kplverai,, he is judged (tried) in a great trial;

b) or a word akin to the verb in meaning; -nXrj'yrjv

TVTTTeTai âpvTaTTjv, he is struck a very severe blow; Trao-asDigitized by Microsoft®

§402. DOUBLE OBJECT. 23&

vocrov; Kafivei, he suffers from all diseases ; poet. oSvpfiara

yoda-dai, to moan lamentations; irokeôv ia-Tpdrevcrav

Tov lepov KaXovfievov, tTwy marched, out to the so-called

holy war ; 'ypa(f>rjv Swu/cew', to pursue with a writ (comp.

'^pa<j>r]v ypdêadai) ;

c) or a substantive defining the verb : ÔXv/nria viKav,

to conquer in the Olympic games ; rydfiov; eariav, to give

a marriage-feast ; Horn, voarov o^vpofievoi, weeping forthe return ; fievea irvelovret; 'Ajâiol, the courage-breathing

Achaeans ; a/yyeXlrjv i\6elv, to go a message ; m-iip 6<pOa\-

fioicTi SeSopKO)';, looking fire with the eyes (flashiQg fiery

looks)

;

cZ) or the resfult of the action expressed by the verb

:

eKKO'i oiiTaaai, to strike a wound (produce by blovcs)

;

opKia rd/iveiv, foedus ferire, i. e. foedus hostiam feriendo

efficere; poet. r)he (97 dvapyld) rpoira? Karappîyvvai,

it (anarchy) breaks flight, i. e. produces flight by breaking

through the ranks.

§ 401. Often, especially in the poets, a neuter adjec-

tive or pronoun in the Accusative is added to a verb as

a special qualification, almost hke an adverb (§ 400, c)

:

oXljov a/rreivai,, to be a little way off ; fjui'â i/revSerat,

he tells a great lie (comp. fierâ \jrevBo<; •yêvSerai)

;

roijro yalpco, at this I rejoice; tL y^pijcrofiai, rovrcp,

what use shall I make of this? irdvTa •wdcrop.ai, I tvilt

obey in all things.

§ 402. 3. Double Object.

Many verbs have a double object, consequently a

dffuhle Accusative ; the following, which most frequently

occur wdth this construction may serve as examples:

SiSdcTKCo (iSlBaâv tov iraiSa rrjv fiovcriK'^v, docuerunt

fncerum musicam) ; KpCirrui, I hide ; epwrdw, I asK

;

alreo), I demand ; TrpdTTo/j.ai, I acquire (apyvpiov tovi;

•yrapovra';, money from those who are present) ; KaKov^ ^ Digitized by Microsoft® ^ '

240 DOUBLE OBJECT. §403,

Xeyco Toii? ex^poiK;, I speak ill of my enemies ; acjiai-

peofjAU, aTToa-Tepio), I deprive of ; avafUiMvrjcrKO), I remind

of ; ivBvai, ajjiîevvvfii, Iput on (riva %tTciJi/(x, a coat on

some one) ; irepiâKKoîM, I encircle (ret^T? rrjv ttoXiv,

the city with walls). Horn. : tj he fLeyav icrrov vâivev

ScTrKaKU, she wove a double garm£nt at the loom (§ 399, 5).

Ohs. 1.—In the passive construction the thing remains in the

Accusative : fitSacrKO/xat Tf}v iiovciktiv ; dcf)7ipi]^cu Tov ittttov,

I am rdbhed of the horse.

Obs. 2.—Many other verbs besides these have a double Accusa-

tive, by an external object being added to the internal one:

Horn, ov Zevs (j>tKet iravTolqv <j>cK6Tr]Ta, whom Zeus loved with

multiform love, i. e. to whom Zeus manifested love in various

ways (§ 400, a) ; Alcrx^vts KTrj(n<j>S)VTa ypacjifjv wapavojiatv

ihlmKev, Aeschines prosecuted Ktesiphon with a charge of vio-

lating the law (§ 400, 6) ; poet. ttoXKcl ce ohvpjiara Kareldov t^v

'HpaxXeioj/ eôSov yoa>p,ivrjv, many wailings I saw you give vent

to about the departure of Heracles (§ 400, c) ; Hom. eXxos o /le

jSpoTos ovraa-ev avrjp, tlie wound which a mortal man struck me

(§ 400, d).

§ 403. 4. The Accusative as a Predicate.

A dependent Predicate relating to an Object is in the

Accusative. Hence the verbs mentioned in §§ 361, 10,

and 392, which signify naming, deeming, making, appoint-

ing, choosing, representing, and the like, have a double

Accusative in the Active, one of the external Object,

and one of the Predicate : ol /coTut/ce? ÂXeâvhpov deov

a>v6/u,aôv, the flatterers used to call Alexander a god

;

alpeiaOai tov a a-Tpar 7] y 6 v, eligere aliquem ducem ; ov

TOV? ifKeldTa eôvTa'i evSatfiovecTT a t o u 9 vofii^co, I do

not deem those possessing most the happiest ; wapeymifMavTov eviretO ij, I show myself obedient ; 'iKaê tovtoS&pov, he received this (as) a gift.

Obs.—The want of the Article often of itself distinguishes the

predicative accusative from the objective (§ 378). In the pas-

sive construction both Accusatives must become Nominativesaccording to § 392.

§ 404. 5. In a freer way the Accusative is joined toDigitized by Microsoft®

§405. DOUBLE OBJECT. 241

verbs and adjectives, to point out to what the idea of

these words refers, in reference to what they are to be

understood : Kajivw ttjv Keâ~Kriv, I suffer in the head

(comp. § 400, V) ; dBiKO^ iracrav dBiKiav, unjust in

every (kind of) injustice (in every way, comp. § 400, a);

"EXXTjviv etcri to jivo';, they are Greeks in race; ev

eyofj,ev ra aoDfiaTa, we are well in body ; Horn, ofifiaja

KoX iceâ\i)v If/ceXo? Ati TepTTi/cepavvo), in eyes and head

like thunder-loving Zeus; 7rap6evo<; /caXij to etSo?, a

maiden beautiful in form, or of beautiful form (facie

pulchra) ; ovSeh avOpanro'; avTo>; vavTa ao^<;, no manis himself wise in everything ; 6 M.apava<; iroTafio^ e'lKoai,

KoX irevTe TroSa'; el-)(e to 6 5/3 09, the river Marsyas was

twenty-jive feet in breadth. This Accusative is called

the Accusative of reference.

Ohs.—^Hence a great number of independent, almost adverbial.

Accusatives : to Svofia, in name, hy name ; to nXridos, in

numher ; tov Tp67rov, in character ; tovtov tov rpmrov, in

this way ; rjfv (\>v<tiv, hy nature ; jrpo^Scrti', ore the pretext, osten-

sibly ; b'lKTjv, like ; x^P'"! /'"' *''^ ^'^^^ °f {gratia) ; to ttav,

altogether, on the whale ; ttoXv, by far ; ri, quid, what ? why ?

TL KKaiets ; why weepest thou ? avTO. TavTa iJKca, for this very

reason I come.

§ 405. In regard to the ideas of space and time,

the Accusative expresses extension (comp. § 399, b)

:

Hom. irav rjiâp êpofirjv, a whole day I was borne

along, totum diemferebar ; âa£Kev<; Kal"EWrjve<; dTreixpv

dXX'qXav TpioLKovTa aTaSia, the king and the Hel-

lenes were thirty stadia distant from each other ; Horn.,

'XeiireTo Sovp6<; ipcoijv, he remained a spear's throw

behind ; tov /juev eS iraBovTa Bel fiefiinjo'daL tov irdvTa

Xpovov, tov Se 'irovr]cTavTa eiiOii^ eTrCKeKrjaOai, he whohas received kindnesses ought to remember them throughout

all time, but he who has done them immediately to forget

them.

Ohs. 1.—An Accusative used with ordinal numerals, in regard

to time, is to t^p^^HS^ tecfSSeft^^/o" or ago: e^bofiTji

E

242 THE GENITIVE. §406.

fjijLcpav fj dvydrrjp avT^ eTeTeXevTrjKCij his daughter ?iad died

seven days he/ore.

Ols. 2.—Freer Accusatives, referrible chiefly to time, are : tovtov

rov xpo""") '^t ^'"'* time ; to Xoittw, for the future, henceforth ;

reXos, at last ; vporepov, formerly ; apxrjv, ii/p to the beginning,

hence entirely ; ttjv Taxi<rTrjv, supply oSoj', the quickest (way)

;

p,aKpav, far, distant.

§ 406. In the poets the Accusative joined to verbs of

motion also denotes the place towards which an action

is directed: Horn., tov he KXeo'; ovpavbv Ik€1, Ms famereaches up to heaven; ttw? ^X^e? "Ap709 ;

quomodo Argos

venisti ? On the absolute Accusative of participles see

§586.

D) The Genitive.

§ 407. The Genitive generally denotes a thing

helonging to another.

Ohs.—Hence the Genitive is most commonly dependent on a

noun, and even where it is governed by a verb, its use resembles

that with a noun.

§ 408. 1. The Genitive with Substantives.

One Substantive may be joiued to another in various

ways ; the most common are

:

1. XaKparr]'; 6 ^wcppovlaKov vtd?, Socrates son of

Sophroniscus : Origin.

2. ^ ouKia TOV iraTpo';, the father's house: Possession.

3. v6fj,c<T/j,a apyvpiov, a silver coin : Material.

Horn. hewa<; o'lvov, a cup of wine : Contents.

4. ol irKelcTTOL tS>v '^Wrjvwv, most of the Sellenes:

Partitive Genitive.

5. ^6^o<; tSiv TroXefMiwv, metus hostium, i. e., either

a) the fear of the enemy, i. e., the fear which the

enemy feels {Subjective Genitive), or,

b) the fear about the enemy, i. e., the fear of which

the enemy is the object {Objective Genitive).

6. hovKo'; irivre fivSiv, a slave worth jive minae : Value.

7. <Ypa(j>r) kXott?}?, an accusation of theft : Cause.

8. TToXtTon apev^mzmtwvJKbm^fm : Quality

§4-12. THE GENITIVE. 243

9. Horn. Tpo'u)]<s iTToKiedpov, the city of (called) Troy

:

Designation.

Whicli of the two substantives in any particular case

has to be expressed by the Genitive, is generally quite

as clear from their meaning as in English.

But the following special peculiarities in the use

•of the different kinds of Genitives deserve to be

noticed

:

§ 409. a) The Genitive denotes descent from a father,

even without the addition of a Substantive : %a>KpdT7]<i

•0 liox^povicrKo v, Socrates the son of Sophroniscus ; MtX-Ti,dSr](; IKlfjimvo <;, Miltiades son of Kimon; poet., Ato?

"'A/jTE/it?, Artemis, daughter of Zeus.

§ 410. I) The Neuter of the Article with a Genitive

has very different meanings (comp. § 383) : ra rasv

'^XX/^vwv, the affairs, interests, possessions of the Hellenes

(comp. rh '^XXrjvtKo) ; to Trj<; oXtyap^/a?, the nature

of the oligarchy; on the other hand, to tov Aiyytto-

aQkv 01"?, the word of Demosthenes ; to, tcov (plXco v Koivd,

the property of friends is common.

§ 411. c) The idea of abode is to be supplied in the

expressions : eh SoSaa-KaXo v <f>oiTa,v, to go to the master's

{house), i. e., to go to school ; iv or ek"Ai,Sov (Homer,

elp 'Ai'iSao h6fioi<;, in Hades' dwelling, dominion), in or into

the lower world.

§ 412. d) The Partitive Genitive (4), denoting a

whole to be divided, is most common with numerals

and superlatives: iroWoX twv 'Kdrjvaiav, multi Athe-

niensium; vorepo'; rwv aSe\<j}£v; which of the two

irothers? TrdvTwv dpia-To^, omnium optimus ; but also

with various adjectives: ol airovhaloi, TOiv iroXiTav,

the assiduous among the citizens. So, more freely in the

Homeric poems : Bia 6ed<ov, the divine one amonggoddesses ;hrjiMov dvr\p, a man of the people ; and similarly, dvi)p t&v

pijTopcov, a manfr^^t^^y.u^er^o^Jie orators.

244 THE GENITIVE. § 41S.

The Partitive Genitive with names of places denotes

the whole territory : ©jjySat t^? BottBTta?, Thebes in

JBoeotia ; with Neuter pronouns it sometimes denotes a

Avhole which is attained by degrees : eh tovto avoia'i

rjXOov, eo usque insaniae progressi sunt.

Ois.—Adjectives which have a Partitive Genitive sometimes

follow the gender of the Genitive dependent upon them : o

rjjiKTVs ToO xpo""'"! ^^^ ^'^If 9f ^^ time (instead of to ijiwru tou

Xpovov) ; fj ttXciVti) rrjs x^P'^^t '>nost of the land.

§ 413. e) The Objective Genitive (5, b) may be trans-

lated by various prepositions : evvoia twv cpiXcov, bene-

volence towards friends ; dwopla o-lto v, want of food

;

Horn., epo'i iSrjTvo s ^Be irorriTo ?, eagerness for food and

drinh ; 7]<jvyia eyQpSiv, peace from enemies; arywve^

Tuiyco V, contests in speeches ; d<popfif) epyco v, stimulus to

deeds ; d'woaTCKyt.'i tcov 'Kdrivaiav, defection from the

Athenians ; Xvo-l,^ Oavdrov, deliverance from death ; ^la

TrdXiTwv, with violence against the citizens, in spite of thf:

citizens.

2. Genitive ivith Adjectives and Adverbs.

§ 414. The Genitive is joined to many relative adjec-

tives and their adverbs, i. e., to such adjectives and

adverbs as are conceivable only in reference to something,

and points out the person or thing they refer to. Themost important adjectives of this kind are

:

1. Koiv6<;, common ; Xhio';, olKelot;, own, peculiar, and

others which imply property or belonging to, as : vaos

tfijoo? Tov 'ATToXXdji/o?, « tcmplc sacrcd to Apollo (pos-

session, comp. § 408, 2).

2. Adjectives denoting plenty and want (contents,

§ 408, 3), as: /j,ear6<;, efiTrXew?, irkrjpT)';, full; -n-Xovaw^,

rich; evBeij<;, irevrjt;, necessitous; further, the adverb

aXt?, enough : iravra eixppocrvvri^ TrXea fjv, all was full

of joy-

3. Those signifying acquainted or unacquainted with

:

e/i7recpo<;, peritus ; ;ag7ei(@9%j2M?jg^igB®; i'jriarijiu.cov, skilled

§416. THE GENITIVE. 245

{Ti'xyrj';, in an art); fiv^ficov, afivij/uMv, mindful andunmindful.

4. a^w9, worthy ; avdîo<;, unworthy : ifXeicnov aîov,

tvorth most, the worthiest thing (§ 408, e).

5. Adjectives ivcr^lymg participation (§ 408, 4), whetherit be positive or negative : /êroTô? tov ttovov, partieeps

laboris ; dfioipoi;, without a share ; atno^, author, guilty,

reus,

Ohs.—To these belong many adjectives compounded witli dv (a,

§ 3G0) privative, which, especially in poets, are joined with the

genitive : poet. ali>u kokZv ayevaros, a life which has not tasted

of misfortunes ; (j)iXav a/sXauTos, unwept hyfriends.

6. Adjectives in -iko? (§ 351) denoting capability or

fitness for (comp. 3) something: BiSacrKaXcKo^ ypafi-

âTiKYj';, capable of teaching grammar ; irapaa-KevaariKO'i

Tb)v eh TOV TToXefiov, skilled in obtaining the necessaries

for war.

§ 415. Many Adverbs of Place are joined with aGenitive, which is mostly of a Partitive nature (comp.

§ 412) : TTov 775s ; where on earth? so with ez/ro?, within ;

eicTw, inside ; skto^, without ; e^w, outside ; ariyi, i^yv'i,

'TrXrjalov, near ; -jrpoaw ov iroppco,forwards ; -jrepa, beyond;

evQv, straight towards; irpoa-Qev, ejunrpoaOev, in front;

OTTiaOev, behind; afiôripcoOev, on both sides; avw,

upwards (-Trora/iaiv, up-stream) ; and corresponding with

these also some adverbs of time and manner : irrjviKa

rrjii fiiiepa<; ; at what time of the day'? tto)? ex^'-'i t?)?

<yvcofj/>]'i ; what do you think ? \ddpa tcov 'yovicov, secretly

from the parents.

§ 416. The Comparative may have the object with

which anything is compared in the Genitive (as in the

Ablative in Latin) : fiel^wv tov aSeXipov, major fratre,

i. e., rj 6 dBeX<f>o^, than the brother; ov Trpo'iijKei tov

apxpVTa TCOV dp^pfjêvoiv irovripoTepov elvai, i. e., rj tov<;

Apxo/J'ivov';, it is not becoming that the governor should be

worse than the governed.

Ohs. l.-This Genjîv^Jî^^ôs^t^^quently where it repre-

246 THE GENITIVE. §417.

sents rj with the Nominative or Accusative;yet it may also

more freely represent ij with the Dative : poet. liKuav xpovosy

ov Bel 1^ apea-Kdv Tols Korai Tutv ivBd&e (rj rois ivddSe), longer is

the time that I must please those helow than that I must please

those here.

Ohs. 2.—Like the Comparative, the Superlative is sometimes

joined with the Genitive of the things with which anything

is compared: poet., tpdos KaWia-Tov tS>v nporlpav, a light

most heautiful in comparison with the former ones, where wemight have expected <^dos koKKwv t&v jrpoTfpcov, lax prioribus

pulchrior, or (j>aos koKXio-tov navrav, omnium pmlcherrima.

Ohs. 3.—All adjectives expressive of a comparison follow the rule

of Comparatives : SiTrXdcnos, doubly (as great as) ; Sevrcpos (oi-

8fKos), second (to none) ; varepos, later than ; erepos, another

than.

3. The Grenitive with Verbs.

Very many yerbs are joined with the Genitive on the

general principles mentioned in § 408.

§ 417. 1. The Genitive represents a Predicate (§ 361,

7 and lO) with verbs which denote leing, hecoming^

making, deeming, in order to predicate something of a

substantive, as originating from, possessing, consisting of,,

or in any other way qualifying it, § 408 : SraKpari;? "Za-

<\>povl<7Kov riv, Socrates was Sophroniscus's son (§ 408, l)

;

ri oiKia Tov TTUTpo^ iyevero, the house hecame the father's

property (§ 408, 2) ; to retTô? \i6ov Tre-TrolriTai, the wall

has been made of stone (§ 408, 3) ; oi ©eaaaXol tS>v

'^XKrjvoav Tjcrav, the Thessalians belonged to the Hellenes

(§ 408, 4) ; TToXiTov ayaOov vofiLêrai dappelv, to be

courageous is deemed a good citizen's quality (§ 408, 8).

Obs.—The Genitive often occurs with verbs of perception and

observation in such a way that it is properly dependent on anoun or pronoun : tovto vfiHv jidkiara 6avp,aôp^v, this we most

admire in you (properly : this of you we most admire).

§ 418. 2. The Genitive of Material (§ 408, 3) is also-

used with verbs of plenty and ivant (comp. § 414, 2)

:

jrl/jiTrX'ri/M, TrKTjpoa, I fill; 7rKjj9co, yefiai, I am full;

Beofiao (Bel fiot), I need ; to, wra eveifkyjaav Saifwviai

a-o(f>ia<;, tliey filled the ears with zumdrous wisdom ; i

S419. THE GENITIVE. 247

irapwv Kaipo'; ttoXX^? ^povrlSo'; koI /SovXijs Beirai, the

present time is in need of much rejkction and advice.

§ 419. 3. The Partitive Genitive (§ 408, 4) is used

with many verbs which only partially affect the object

of the action

:

a) With all verbs which contain the idea of sharing

:

//.ere^cB {/MeT€<7Tl /jloo), I have a share in ; fMSTaXa/Mâvw,

J take a share in; fjLeTaBlBaiij,i, I give a share (tij? Xe/a?,

of the booty) ; Koivcovias, I share (comp. § 414, 5) ; Horn.

cn/Tov 8' aihol/T) rafilT] irapedrjKe •^âpiôfiivrj irapeovToiv,

the modest stewardess brought bread supplying from the

store.

Obs.—SfiB, I smell, also belongs to these : luipav of«, Tie smells of

myrrh.

b) With verbs which denote touching, laying hold of,

seizing : awTO/iai, ifravco, J touch ; e^pfiai, J hold by,

border (rtvot;) on something; dvre'^ôfiai, eTriXafi^dvofiac,

J lay hold of; Xafi^dvas rtvd rij? 'xêip6<;, I seize one

by the hand; dp)(pfiai,, I begin (t'^? -TraiBelai;, with the

education); poet. Qavovrwv ovhev d'hiyo'i dineTai, no

pain touches the dead.

c) With verbs which denote striving, aiming at : <tto-

)(aôfMU Tov aKoirov, I aim at the goal ; opeyajjiai, Istrive ; Sf\}rdo}, J thirst ; Tvyxdvai, J hit, attain (eVuê

ra)v dOXeov, he won the prizes); icfiiicvov/j-ai,, I reach,

attain; fjKai, I have attained (Herod. Swdfiw;, power).

d) With verbs which denote enjoying: icrOio), I eat;

irlvco, I drink ; êuw, I give a taste ; ea-rtdco, I entertain ;

dwdKavoi, I enjoy (jieîarav dr/aOav, the greatest bless-

ings); evo<; dvSpb'!, ei ^povrjaavro'i ttoXXoi dv diroXav-

aeoav, many would enjoy a man who has thought sensibly.

e) With verbs denoting the opposites of the ideas

enumerated under a—d, that is, the exclusion from a

share in something : dire')(p[iat, I refrain {a-irov, abstineo

cibo) ; 'Xfoplâ, I separate ; e'lpym, I keep off ; (TTepi(7Ka,

I deprive ; iravoiMav, I cease; e'lKco, irapaj^wpew, Iyield;Digitized by Microsoft®

248 THE GENITIVE. § 420.

Xi5(B, I loose ; e\£v9ep6co, I free ; (f)eiBoiu,ac, I spare

;

afiapTciva}, oMTOTvy^dvoj, I miss ; '^jrevSofiai, (KâXKofiai,

J. am deceived (ttj? iXiriSo';, in my hope).

Ohs.—Many of these verbs are also joined with an Accusative

when an object is to be expressed as wholly encompassed by

the action : TrXelarov jiepos nvos fierexîv, to have the greatest

part in anything ; Triva olvov, I drink wine ; o'ivov, some wine

;

\ayx<ivo> n, I attain something ; Ttra'r, a share in something.

§ 420. 4. The Genitive is joined with many verbs

denoting a sensuous or moral perception or emotion

(comp. § 414, 3), as : aKova, aKpodofiat, J hear ; aurdd-

vofiai, Iperceive ; fitfMvijcrKOfiai,, I remember (tov if>i.\ov,

Tnemini amici) ; iiriKavOdvo/xat, I forget ; fiekei fwi

Tivo<i, eTTi/neXeofiai, I am concerned about something, Icare ; ivrpewofiat, Horn. dXiyo), dXeylôj, J concern my-

self ; d/ieXetB, J neglect ; oXiycopea, I care little about;

ipdco, J love (§ 419, c) ; eVt^v/xeto, I desire ; irwOdvofiai

ri TLvo<i, I learn something about one.

Ohs.—The Accusative also is admissible with several of these

verbs : with aKovm if the object is directly audible : (j>d6yyov, a

sound, but tov SiSao-KciKov, the teacher.

§ 421. 5. With verbs of estimating, buying, selling,

&c., the Genitive denotes the valvs or price (comp.

§ 408, 6, and § 417) : 6 SovXo'; irevTe fivoov rifia/rai,

the slave is valued at jive minae ; ttoWov mveiaOai, magni

emere ; raXdvTov dirohotrdai, to sell for a talent.

§ 422. 6. With verbs oi judicial proceedings the Geni-

tive denotes the cause (§ 408, 7, § 414, 5): KXoTrrj'?

<ypd(j>€<T6at, ala-)(p6v, furti aeeusari turpe est ; (f>6vov Buo-

Keiv, to prosecute for murder ; (peiiyei iTapavo/^cov, he is

charged with violating the law; dire^vye KaKr]'yopia';,

he was acquitted of libel ; idXacrav 7rpoSoaLa<;, proditionis

condemnati sunt.

Ohs.—With verbs of emotion the Genitive likewise expresses the

cause, as : 6avfidCa> ere T^r aatppoa-ivr]!, I admire thee for thy

moderation ; Horn, pûd/xerar yvvaiKos, angry aholtt the woman.Digitized by Microsoft®

§425. THE GENITIVE. 249

§ 423. 7. The Genitive is also joined with verbs

which imply the meaning of a Comparative (§ 416), as

:

tcparea) (jcpevnoyv elfii), dpyat (Kpolao^ Av8S)v VPX^^'Croesus ruled over the Lydians); âaiXeva, I rule;

irepUifLi, irepir/lp/vofiai, I am superior ; r^TTdofuu (rjTTeov

€t/ii'), I am inferior ; Xeiirofcai, vaTepew, I am behind;

SM<pepco rivot;, differo ab aliquo ; âp^dpav "^Wijvasdp'êiv €Ik6<;, it is reasonable that Hellenes should rule

over barbarians.

§ 424. 8. The Genitive is joined with verbs com-pounded with prepositions, which either always, or

in the sense which they have in the compound verb,

require the Genitive (comp. Chap. XVII.) : eKâXkaTLva Ti.fiT]^, I eject some one from office ; irpocrTaTevei, ttj?

•K6\e()i<;, he presides over the state ; la')(pv tov Sixaiov

•TrpoTldrja-LV, he prefers might before right ; KaTa<f>poveiv

Ttvo?, to despise any one ; KarTiyopeiv ri, ti,vo<;, to accuse

one of a thing ; 'rrdrpLov rjv ry ÂdTjvalcov iroXec irpoecrTd-

vai Tcov '^WtJvoiv, it was a hereditary custom for the city

of the Athenians to be at the head of the Hellenes.

4. Freer use of the G-enitive.

§ 425. The Genitive, without immediate connexion

with a noun or verb expresses

:

1. Place (local Genitive), almost exclusively in the

language of poetry, and that either the place fromwhich something is removed : la-raaffe ^ddpcov, get up

from the steps ; inrdr/eiv t^? oZov, to go out of the way(comp. § 419, e)

;—or the space within which something

takes place (comp. §§ 412, 415) : t^? 'Icoviaf tovto

alcr')^pov vevofiicTTai, within Ionia that is considered dis-

graceful ; Hom. ve(po<; ov <f)aiv€TO irdcrT}^ <yairj<;, no cloud

appeared within the compass of the whole earth ; epy(0VTat,

TreSioio, they go through or within the plain (comp. the

German ich gehe des Weges).

On another local Genitive, see § 412.Digitized by Microsoft®

250 THE DATIVE. §426.

§ 426. 2. Time (temporal Genitive), in which case it

is a Partitive Genitive expressing the wTwle of a space

of time (§ 412), withia which something takes place

:

rph Tov iviavTov, thrice in the year; rjfj,epa<;, hy day;

vvKro<i, hy night; tov avrov xei.fiavo^, in the same

winter ; tov Xoittov, for the future ; x^povov avxyov, for

some time ; eKoaTov eTovi, each year.

§ 427. 3. Cause (causal Genitive, comp. § 408, 7,

§ 422), in exclamations : o'lfwi t'/j? tvxv'!, «^«s •' for

my fortune (comp. the German des Leides) ; and in

Infinitives with the Genitive of the Article (in order to).

§ 574, 3, Obs.

§ 428. 4. Occasion, time, circumstances, &c., as an

absolute Gfenitive, in connexion with participles, just like

the absolute Ablative in Latin: Kvpou /3a<Ti\evovTO<;,

Gyro regnante, § 584 (comp. the German: stehenden

Misses).

Obs.—Tlie absolute Genitive very rarely occurs, like the absolute

Ablative of the Latins, witbout a participle; when the verb

to he occurs in the clause the participle &v is to be used

;

te ^pueTO, dov iraidos ovtos.

E) The Dative.

\ 429. The Dative denotes, in general, the person or

thiSig more remotely connected with an action.

Obs.—The Dative, therefore, depends just as often on verbs as on

adjectives (adverbs), but very rarely on a substantive.

§ 430. 1. Dative of the person concerned.

As in Latin and English, so in Greek, the person

more remotely affected by something is in the Dative,

and:

a) with transitive verbs it is the so-caUed indirect

object: Horn. eirTa Se oi Sdicro) ewawfieva irToXieOpa,

and I will give him sevenflourishing cities.

b) with intransitive verbs it expresses the person or

a thing conceived as a person to which the actionDigitized By Microsoft®

§435. THE DATIVE. 251

refers : irpeirei, fioL ri, a thing becomes me ; Set fiot

Tivo<;, I need somMhing ; ifwl ovrco SoKei exeiv, it seems

to me to be so ; ô-qOS} rol'; crvfj,/j,d')(pi,<;, succurro sociis

;

irelBov rot? vofioi^, obey the laws ; ev^yecde rot? 6eol<;,

fray to the, gods; fiefi<po/j,at rots fiaOrjraX';, I reproach

the scholars.

Obs.—Substantives derived from sucli verts are sometimes followed

by the Dative : t) Iv tiS noXeiuf rots aviifjAôis ôfjOcia, the help

to the allies m the war.

c) 'with Adjectives : 6 a/ya6o<; Ta> ayadS fiovo^ ^/Xos,

the good alone is dear to the good.

§ 431. 2. Datiye of interest.

The Dative denotes the person for vrhom—for whose

interest—something is or takes place ; hence

a) the person benefited or injured {dot. commodi, in-

commodi) : ttS? avrjp avrm irovei, every man toils for

himself ; ^66vo<; fieyierrov kukov Tolf e'xpvaiv avTov, envy

is the greatest evil to them that have it.

§ 432. b) the possessor with el/j,i, ylryvo/iai, and similar

verbs : ttoXKoI /moi (j}iKoi, elcrlv, I have many friends.

Obs.—The possessive Dative is sometimes, like the Genitive, joined

vpith a Substantive ; Herod., oZ <r(pi, jSoes, tJieir oxen.

§ 433. e) the sympathising person (ethical Dative)

:

poet, w TeKvov, ?iê/SrjKev ^fuv 6 fezôy, child, has the

stranger left lis ? tI yap irafrip fiat irpea^v; iv SofjLouri,

Spa, for what is my aged father doing in the house ?

§ 434. d) the acting person with passive verbs (com-

monly vTrd with the Genitive), which is then to be

viewed as one interested in the action : Hom. TroXee?

Sdfiev "E«TOjOt Siq), many were overcome by godlike

Sector ; rl ireirpaicTai to4s aXXot? ; wTiat has been done

by the rest ? This Dative is regularly joined with the

Verbal Adj. in -reo? : ifiol 'iroXefjurjTeov ia-riv, mihi jnig-

nandum est.

§435. e) the yfigjggg^j^j:^^ connected with an

252 THE DATIVE. §436.

action: redv-rj')^ vfilv rraXai, he died to you long ago;

Horn. iraa-Lv Kev Tpcoecrai, kOSo? dpoio, thou mightest get

thee fame with all Trojans ; Horn, rolffw dvicrTt}, among

them arose; iiiroXafi^dveiv hei t& toiovtw oti evrjO'rj';

ea-Tiv, in regard to such a one we must suppose him

simple.

Ohs.—In this maimer participles are most frequently used, partly

with, partly without, an accompanying noun : Hom. fjulp tiVa-

TOff iart TrepiTpoTretov eviavTos evddde fiijivovTea-a-tv, it is the ninth

yearfor us lingering here ; r] Biaâvn top Ttorafiov npos iintipav

oSo'f, the road westward when you have crossed the river ; yiyverai

n e'/ioi ôvXojihai, something happens to me as I wish ; a-uvc-

\6vTt or a>s (Tvvekovn emelv, to speak briefly.

§ 436. 3. Dative of community.

With verbs, adjectives, and adverbs, wliich denote

community, agreement, friendly or hostile meeting, the

person or thing with which such a community, agree-

ment, or such a meeting takes place, is in the Dative.

a) Verhs of this kind are : Koiva>vea>, I share (rtvl

Tivo's, something with one) ; avfi<pcovieo, ofxo'Kcr/eai, crvvaBaj,

ofiovoeai, I agree ; 6/j,oi6ofiai, I resemble ; ojiCKeo), I asso-

ciate with ; Sta.Xe70yu,a.i, I converse ; St,a<p€po/j,ai,, I differ ;

fjid'ô/jiai, Ifight ; ipiô), I dispute : to, epya ov avfi<f>(ovel

TOi? XoyoK, the deeds do not harm,onise with the words;

poet. KaKolcnv jJi-r] irpoôiJ[,i\ei dvSpdaiv, aXX' alel tcov

dyaOcbv eêo, with bad men do not associate, but always

hold to the good.

b) Adjectives: 'ia-o<;,like; ofiow'Sj-Trapa-TrKija-io';, similar

;

6 avTO'i, the same ; oIk6io<;, t'Sto?, peculiar ; koiv6<;, common

(comp. § 414, l) ; 6fiQ)vvfj,o<;, of like name ; avvcovv/jLo<;,

of like meaning ; Bidcjiopo^, different ; evavrLo^, opposite

:

oyir\t,fffievoL fjaav rot? avTol'; K.vpa) 07r\oL<;, they were

armed with the same weapons as Cyrus.

e) Adverbs : besides those derived from the adjectives

just mentioned, especially dfj,a, at the same time ; ofiov,

together : d/j,a tS eralpo), at the same time with his friend.

% 437. The Dative is used with many verbs which.Digitized by Microsort® •' '

§440. THE DATIVE, 253

compounded with prepositions, denote a contact or

union, especially with such as are compounded with

ev, a~w, eirl, yet also with those compounded with Trpoy,

irapd, irepi, v-iro, as : eTncrTrjfj/riv ifi'TTOieiv ttj "^vj^ji, to

bring knowledge into the soul ; eirtKeladaL rivi, to press

upon, to urge, one ; iTririfiav tlvi ri, to reproach one with

something ; wpoîevai, Ta> hrjijuw, to come before the people ;

TrapicTTacrdai, irapeivaL rivi, to support one ; -TrepiiriTrTeiv

Tivi, to meet one.

§ 438. 4. The Instrumental Dative, answering to the

Latin Ablative, denotes that hi/ or 5z/ means of which

an action is brought about, hence

a) the means or instrument (comp. Bid, § 458)

:

Horn.. Tov /J,ev Kara, (TTfjOoi /Sake Bovpi, the one he struck

on the breast with the spear ; 6p5sp.ev toi<; 6<ji6aX/jLol<;, wesee with the eyes ; ovBeU eTratvov TjBoval'; iKrrjaaTo, no

one gained praise by pleasures ; ^tj/xwvv Tiva OavaTa, to

punish one with death; Horn, tiaeiav Aavaol ifia

SaKpva crolai îXea-aiv, may the Danai pay for my tears.

hy thy darts.

Obs.—Hence the Dative is used with ^(prjaBat, to make use of; as

the Ablative with uti in Latin. A second predicative Dative is

often added (§ 361, 10) : roirav na-X <j>vXaîv ixprjTo, some of

them he used as guards.

§ 439. b) the operating power or cause from which an

action proceeds : dv6po)7ro<; ^vaei ttoXitlkov, man (is)

by nature fitted for the State; iroXKaKi'i arfvoia dfiap-

rdvofiev, we often err from ignorance; ô^m, from fear.

Ohs.—With verbs of emotion the Dative expresses the ground or

occasion of the emotion : ^hojiai, pâipa tj liovcriKrj, I delight in

music; "kuTTOVfiai, I am grieved; jiâXeTraij/m, / am, angry;.

arcpya, ayairai, I am satisfied (with something) ; alax^vofiai,

lam ashamed (about something).

§ 440. c) the measure, by which a thing is measured.

hi/ which one thing surpasses another, bj/ which it is

distinguished : TaD'fsihL^tjtMimpBiaS^v rot? yejevrj/ievoit;,

254 THE DATIVE. §441-

the future we judge of by the past ; Se/ca erea-i irpo t^s

ev 'toKaiuvL /u.a%??? ol 'ABTjvaioi iv MapaOoivi, evUrjdav,

ten years before the battle of Salamis the Athenians con-

quered at Marathon; -ttoWS fieil^mv, multo major (also

iroXv, § 404, Obs) ; hiajiepew rivo<; ^povrjaei, to differ

from any one in insight.

§ 441. 5. The freer use of tlie Dative expresses

:

a) the way and manner, or an accompanying cir^

cumstance : Tovrm Ta> Tpoirai, in this way ; /3ta, by

force ; cnrovBr}, with zeal ; aiyfj, in silence ; epyo), in

fact; T& ovTi,, in truth; Ihia, privatim ; Br^fioa-ia,

publiee ; Horn. vrjineycTi,, in his folly (§ 362, Obs.).

Ohs.—The Dative with airos should he particularly noticed:

6 îXiTTiros TrevraKoaiovs iinreas eXaêv avTols toIs OTrXotff, Philip

took five hundred horse together with their armour. (Comp. the

Dative of community, § 436.)

§ 442. 5) The place where something happens is

expressed by the Dative more rarely in prose than in

poetry : MapaOcbvi, at Marathon ; Horn. 'EXXaSt oiKta

vatfov, inhabiting his house in Hellas ; Horn. t6^^ &ixoicn,v

ex<>>v, having the how on his shoulders ; poet. oBol'i, on the

way.

§ 443. c) Time is expressed by the Dative as defi-

nitely limited in answer to the question when : TrjBe ry

vvktI, hoc node; rfi va-repala, on the following day;

Terdpra erei, in the fourth year; 'OXu/iTTiot?, at the

Olympic games ; poet, 'êtfiepiip voTtp, in a stormy south

wind.

Obs.—Notice the difference between the Accusative (§ 405) andthe Grenitive (§ 426), in their application to relations of time.

§447. THE PREPOSITIONS. 255

Chap. XVII.—The Pkepositions.'

§ 444. Prepositions have a double use. Either they

are combined with a verb, to define the direction which

the action of the verb takes, or they are used inde-

pendently, and serve, in connexion with different cases,

to point out the relation of single words in a sentence

to one another more distinctly than could be done bythe cases alone.

§ 445. Ohs. 1.—As tlie name praepositio (jrpodetns) points to the

first of these uses, those prepositions which are not comhined with

verhs, such as : avev, without (poet. Six"; X""?'*) i "W' /^^'XP''

till; jj^ra^i, ietween; evexa, on account of; TrKfjv, besides,—are

called spurious. They are all used with the Genitive (oomp. § 415),

except as, to, which has the Accusative.

§ 446. Ols. 2.—All Prepositions were originally adverbs ; manyof them are still used as such in poetry, and a few even in prose : irepl,

beyond, very ; iierd, later ; irpos, m addition. On account of this

origin, their position in Homer is very free ; they may be separated

from their verb, as well as from their substantive : Hom. cV 8' avrog

iSitrero vapoira x'^'^o": ^'^ ^ himself put on the glittering brass

;

aficj)! 5e ;(atTat c^fiots dwaovTcu, and the manes wave around the

shoulders. On the anastrophe in placing the Prepositions behind,

see § 90. In prose only irepl is sometimes thus used.

§ 447. With regard to the cases joined with Preposi-

tions, the following general rules are to be noticed

:

1. The Accusative with Prepositions expresses the

object upon which, over which, towards which an action

extends (§§ 395, 405), and with many Prepositions the

goal of an action itself (§ 406).

2. The Gfenitwe frequently, denotes the place fromwhich an action proceeds (§ 425), often also a moral

relation (§ 408, etc.), whilst it depends on- other Pre-

positions in the same way as on the adverbs mentioned

in § 415.

3. The Dative denotes a more external connexion

C5% 435, 442).^''' / ' Digitized by Microsoft®

256 PEEPOSITIONS "WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. § 448.

General View op the Prepositions.

§ 448. I.—Prepositions which can have only on&

•ease

:

A) the Accusative: el;, oi?.

B) the Genitive : avri, wko, e/c (e^)j ttjOo—avev,

cuyfii, /ê%p') fêra^v, eveica, ttXtJp.

C) the Dative : iv, crw (^w).

II.—Prepositions which can have two cases

:

A) the Genitive and Accusative : Std, Kara, virep.

B) the Dative and Accusative : avd.

III.—Prepositions which can have all the three oblique

cases : afi(pi, eVt, fierd, -Trapd, irepi, irpo';, inro.

I.

—

Prepositions which can have only one Case.

§ 449. A) Prepositions with the Accusative

1. et? or 6? (Lat. in, c. Accus., and inter), to, into,

points out the goal towards which the action is directed.

The opposite is i^, out. ek is used

:

a) of place : ol AaKeBaifj,6viot ekeâXov et? rrjv 'At-

TiKriv, the Lacedaemonians invaded Attica ; et? BiKocrTripiov

ehievai, to come into court; Xeyeiv et? to Tr\r]0o<;, to

speaTc to the multitude; ek avhpa<i iyypdcpetv, to enroll

among men. Comp. iv, § 456, a.

h) of time : ek ttjv va-repaiav, in diem proximum, for

the next day; ek ecnrepav, towards evening; poet. eVo?

ek ere;, year hy year ; ek Kaipov, for the right time.

c) of measure and number : ek BiaKoaiovi, up to two

hundred ; ek Bivapnv, up to one's power, as much as is in

one's power.

d) of purpose : 'x^pijcri/jLov ek tov "jroKep-ov, useful for

the war ; ek Tohe rjKOfiev, for that we have come.

In compounds it is to be translated by into, in, to.

§ 450. 2. ft)»- (comp. § 631), to, only of persons:

§453. PEEPOSITXONS WITH THE GENITIVE. 257

Horn, alel tov o/xolov a/yei 0eo? o)? rov ojjlolov, God

always brings like to like.

§ 451. B)- Prepositions with the G-enitive.

1. avTv (comp. Horn, avra, avrrjv, avriKpv), originally

opposite to (comp. ev-ainlrc;), then instead of, for:

Horn. avTt Kaa-i/yvijrov êlvoi ff iKiT7j<; re rervKrai, a

stranger and a suppliant is instead of a brother (like a

brother) ; ovtI 6ptjtov o-co/iaro? aOdvarov Soâv aXXdâ-

a-6ai, to exchange a mortal body for immortal glory.

In compounds it signifies against.

§ 452. 2. airo (Lat. ab, a, Engl, off), from, in the

sense of separation, severance, and origin

:

a) of place: Horn. a(f>' LTnreov SXto pâyiiafe, he sprang

off tJie chariot to the ground.

b) of time : from, since : air iKeCvT]'} rrj'; rjfiepa'i, fromthat day.

o) of cause: by, from, through: avrovo/x.o'; airo ttj?

elpi^vrj^, independent through the peace.

Phrases : airo aKowov, far from the goal ; airo yva/j/rj^,

contrary to expectation; airo aT6/j,aTov T^yeiv, to speak

from, mem/rry ; ol airo crKrjv^'i, those of the stage, the

actors.

In compounds it signifies frmn, off, away.

§ 453. 3. Ik, before vowels e'^ (Lat. ex, e), out of

(opposed to et's), denotes removal from within or from

amongst

:

a) of place : Ik '%irdpTr]<; (pevyei, he is banished out of

Sparta.

b) of time : ix iraihav, from boyhood (a pueri£).

c) of origin : bk 7rarpo<i 'XpTjtjTov iyevero, he sprang

from a brave father; seldom with a Passive verb:

riiJLaadaL bk tivo<;, to be honoured by any one.

d) close connection and conformity with : after,

secundum: 'ôyov^K.^^^gyiêê»>ô deliver speech after

258 PKEPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE. § 45t

speech; iic t5)v ofioXoyovfiivav, according to the agree-

ment (Lat. seeundum).

Phrases: sk Se^ta?, on the right; i^ Xaov, equally;

Bfjaai, KpefiAaai Tt e/c two';, to fasten, to hang one thing

to another (Lat. pendere ex, ab aliqua re).

In compounds : out, away.

§ 454. 4. TTjoo (Lat. pro), for, before, instead,

a) of place, before: Trpo Ovpmv, before the door

h) of time : irpb tij? fid'^r)';, before the battle.

c) of preference ; irpo rovrcev reOvdvab /j,3X\ov av

eKoiTo, lie would choose death befiyre this, i. e., rather than

this.

d) for, a rare use : vpo iraiZav ficuxea-Qai, to fight

for the children.

Phrase : irpo iroXKov iroteicrOai (c), to prefer greatly.

In compounds : before, forth, beforehand, forwards.

§ 455. The spurious Prepositions

:

5. dvev, without (poet, j^toyat?, St%as, drep),

6. a%pt, /^6%pt, until.

7. fiera^v, between.

8. eveica, also eveKev, elve/ca (poet. ovveKu), for tlte

sake of an object to be attained (Lat. causa): tt}';

vyteia'; eveKU 'y^pcofieOa rm larpm, we employ a physician

for the sake of health. (Comp. Sta with Ace. § 458, B.)

9. ifkriv, besides (praeter).

Obs.—irKriv is often used quite adverbially without governing acase : poet, ouk S.p' 'AxaioU avSpes ei(ri n-Xfjv oSe ; have then the

Achaeans no men lut this ? It miglit be nX-qv ToOSe, besides

thisi

§ 456. C) Prepositions with the Dative.

1. ev (Horn, evi, ev, Lat. in, c. Ablat. and inter), in,

answers to the question where ?

a) of place: ev 'AdijvaK;, in Athens; also among(inter) : iv tovtoi';, among them ; ev Btj/^co \eyeiv, ta

speak before the people (comp. § 449, a).Digitized by Microsoft®

I 458. PREPOSITIOKS WITH THE GEN. AUD ACC. 25&

b) of time : iv rourp tS erei, in that year.

c) a moral relation : with : ev t& Oem to ttJ? fJ-a^Ti

T-fiXo?, the result of the battle rests with God.

Phrases: 17 iv MapaOStvo fidxHt the battle at Mara-

thon ; iv TOK TrpoJTo?, first by far ; iv Kaip^, at the

right time ; iv irpo<;9r)KT)<; jxepei, in addition ; iv %epo"f

îdivai, to put into the hands (comp. Lat. in mensa

ponere).

In compounds : in, into, on. The accented evt=eveaTi

signifies, it is in, it exists, it is possible.

§ 457. 2. crvv or fw (Lat. cum), with, denotes com-

panionship (opposed to dvev, comp. /lerd with Gen.

§ 464, B.) : a-vv 'Adijvri ivUnjaev, he conquered with (the

help of) Athene ; aiiv v6fj,<p, in accordance with the law

(opposed to irapd with Ace. § 465, C, b).

In compounds : with, together.

II.

—

^Prepositions which can have two Cases.

The Qenitive and Accusative.

"Obs.—Here, as everywhere in what follows, that use of a Prepo-

sition is placed first in which its original meaning is most

manifest.

§ 458. 1. hid (akin to hvo, as between is to two

\twain^, originally between, then through.

A) with the Genitive

:

a) of space : most frequently through (Lat. per) :

Hom. Sta fiev ao-TrtSo? ^Xê âeiV7J<; o^pi,/j,ov ej'xp';,

through the glittering shield pierced the mighty lance.

b) instrumental: by or with: Bid rwv 6<jiOaXfiwv

opMfiev, by (by means of) the eyes we see (comp.

§438).

c) of space and time : among (inter), during, in : Sid

^(eipwv e-xeiv, to have in hand ; hid vvkto^, during

night ; Sid (piKla'; iivai, to be on friendly terms.

Phrases: Sid crTouaTo'; exeiv,tajiave in the mouth, to

260 PEEPOSITIONS WITH THE GEN. AND ACC. § 459^

be talking about; Bt ovSevo<; 7roiela-6ai, to deem a»-

nothing ; Bia jjMKpov, after a long interval, interruption.

B) with the Accusative

:

a) of space and time almost exclusively in the poets

:

through, during : Horn. Bia BwfiaTa, through the rooms ,*•

Btci vvfcra, during night.

I) usually causal : on account of (the operating cause)

(comp. eveKa, § 455, 8) : Bia, rrjv vocrov ypw/j.eda ra^

luTpS, we employ the physician on account of the illness.

Phrases : avTo<; Bi kavrov, by himself ; Boa tl ; why ?

In compounds Blo, is through, or denotes separation

like Lat. dii- : Bi,acj)epco=differre, Biaipeco, J sever.

§ 459. 2. Kara (comp. Adv. Kara, down), originally

downwards, down (the opposite to dvd).

A) with the Qenitive

:

a) of space : down from : Horn, ^fj Be kut Oikvfnroto-

Kaprjvaiv, he came down from the heights of Olympus;

helow (sub) : to, Kara 7^?, things below the earth.

b) tropically: about, against: 'Ker/eiv kuto, tivo<;, to

speak about, against one.

Phrases : iroXiv kut dKpa<; eXelv, to capture a city

completely ; Karh, vojtov, behind.

B) with the Accusative it denotes in its most general

sense extension over, relation to, direction towards some-

thing :

a) of place: Kara poov, down a stream; Kara jrjv

Kal 6aXaa<Tav, hy land and sea; Hom. Zev? e^7) Kara

Balra, Zeus went to the feast.

b) of time : xar meivov tov ^(povov, at that time y

oi Ka& r)ii,d%, our contemporaries.

c) of other relations : Kara tovtov tov rpoirov, in

this way ; Kara, rrdvra, in every respect; Kara Bvvafiiv,

according to ability, as much as possible; Kara rov<;

vo/jiov^, in accordance with the laws ; Kar e/xe, as regards

me ; Kara YllvBapov dpiarov vBwp, according to Pindarwater is best.

§461. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DAT. AND ACC. 2(J1

d) distributive in divisions : Horn. Kara ^vka, by

tribes; Kara Tpel<;, by threes; Ka& 7]fi,kpav, daily.

In compounds: down, downwards, against, towards,

very often untranslateable.

§ 460. 3. virep, Horn, also vireip (Lat. super), radical

meaning over.

A) with the Genitive

:

a) "/ space: 6 ^Xi,o<; virlp rifjMV iropeverai, the sunpasses over us.

b) tropically, for : fidxea-Oai v-rrep tivo<!, to fight forany one (originally over, e. g. over a corpse) : o vwep rij?

irarpLô'; KivSvvo<;, the danger for one's country ; instead

of: ijQ} virep aov airoKpivovjiai, I will answer instead

'of you.

B) with the Accusative

:

aver, beyond—of space and measure: Horn. vTrep ovBov

eîjaero, he went over or beyond the threshold; inrep

Svva/Mv, beyond (his) power.

In compounds : over, away over, excessively, for.

With the Dative and Accusative.

§ 461. 4. avd (comp. adv. avw, above), originally upon,

up (opposed to KUTo).

A) with the Dative only poet, on the top of, upon:

"Horn, ypva-ea dva aKrprTpf^, cm the top of a golden staff.

B) with the Accusative avd denotes the direction

upwards, up towards something, then spreading out

•over something (comp. Kard).

a) of space : dva poov, up the stream ; dva Trdaav ttjv

rfrjv, over the whole earth, over the whole country.

b) of time : dvd rrdaav rrjv rjfjiepav, per totum diem.

c) tropically : dva Xoyov, in accordance with.

d) distributive: dva reTTapa<;, by fours '(four menêp, comp. /card, § 459, d).

Phrase : dvd arofia exîv, to have in the mouth, to bi

talking about (comp. Sta).

In compounds : up, upwards, again, bach.Digitized by Microsofi®

262 PEEPOSITTONS WHICH CAIT HAYE THREE CASES. § 462-

III.

—

Peepositions which can have theee Cases.

Ols.—The original meaning is usually most manifest in connexion^

with the Dative.

§ 462. 1. afj,(jib (Lat. amb-, German um, akin to

afx.(j)Q}, both), radical meaning around (i. e. on both sides,

comp. irepL).

A) with the Dative

:

only poet. : Hom. ISpcoaet TeKafjmv afKJsl cTTrjOeaai, tP.e

belt around the. breast will sweat; dyu.^t ô^cp, from fear.

B) with the Genitive

:

Hom. ajjijii tpiXoTTjTO'i aeiBetv, to sing about love.

C) with the Accusative

:

of place, time, measure, occupation : afi^l to, opi,a, about

the boundaries; afj,(f>l tovtov tov ^(^povov, about this time;

dfj,(f)i to; k^rjKovTa, cireiter sexaginta ; aficjil SîTrvov

iroveiv, to be occupied about a meal.

Phrase : ol ajMî ruva, any one with his attendants ;:

hence even : ot dfKJA TTXaTcova, Plato and his followers.

In compounds : about, around, on two sides, douhly.

§ 463. 2. eVi, radical meaning, upon, on, on the-

surface, by.

A) with the Dative

:

a) of space: Hom. eTrl )(9ovi crlrov eSoj/re?, eating-

bread on earth; iirl t§ OaXdcrcrrj olicelv, to dwell bythe sea.

b) of time : iirl to-utoi';, thereupon.

c) of an ethical relation : iirl rot? wpdy/jLaaiv ehai, to

preside over the business ; hrl rot? •Tro'X.efi.LOK elvai, to be

in the power of the enemy ; cTrt rivi %at/3en^, to rejoice at

a thing ; especially also of purpose : iirl Tvaiheia tovto

e/j,a9e<;, you learnt this for education ; and of condition

:

iirl t6koi<; Saveiêiv, to lend on interest; iwl tovtm, on

this condition.


:

a) of space, in answer to the question where : KOpo?Digitized by Microsoft®

§ 465. PKEPOSITIOKS WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. 263

•n-polâweTo i(f> apfiaroi;, Cyrus appeared on a chariot ;

and to the question whither : eirl Xdfwv ifkelv, to sail to

Samos. (Comp. § 419, c.)

h) of time: eirl Kpala-ov apxavTOi, in the reign of

Croesus ; also in many connections : near, hy.


:

on, orirto: avaâiveiv i(j>^ 'hnrov, to mount (on-to) a

horse ; eVl heîa, an tJte right.

Phrases : ms eirl to ttoXv, for the most part ; ro iir

i/Me, for my part.

In compounds : on, at, hy, in addition, he-, very often

untranslateable.

§ 464. 3. p,eTa (German mit), radical meaning, in the

midst.

A) with the Dative

:

in poet, only : amidst, among (inter) : Horn. "^KTopa, o?

6eo^ eaxe fier avSpdai, Sector, who was a god among

men.


:

mth, in the sense of participation with (comp. avv,

§ 457) : fierci, rmv ^vfip.d'âiv KivBweveiv, to fight with

(in alliance with) the allies ; fiera SaKpvcov, with tears.


:

a) into the midst, among : poet. : Horn. Imv fiera eOvo'i

eralpmv, going among the crowd of companions.

h) usually after: Hom. o'i'xpvrai fierd helwov, they

go after (for) a meal; jMercc tov HeXoTrovvrja-iaKov

iroKefiov, after the Peloponnesian war.

c) seldom in (as with the Dative) : fiera %6tpa9 exî'V,

to have in hand (comp. Zed); fieB^ rjp,epav, interdiu.

In compounds: mth,.after, trans- (fieTaTiOevai, trans-

pose).

§ 465. 4. irapd (Hom. Trap, irapaL), radical meaning,

beside, near.

A) with the Dative

:

at or near: Hom. irapa VTjvcrl Koputvicri fiifivdêiv, to


264 PEEPOSITIONS WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. § 466.

linger near the curved ships ; koI Trap" ifJ.oi ni ifiireipia

ia-Tiv, I also have some experience [with me also is, &c.).


:

a) from, with verbs of motion, and such as denote

receiving either bodily or mentally: Horn, avovoareiv

TTapa vrjSiv, to return from the ships ; 'Kafiâveuv, fiavdar

veiv irapd tivo<;, to receive, learn from some one.

h) hy, very rare, and only poet. : vaieraiv Trap' 'loyi?;-

vov peLOpmv, dwelling hy the waters of the Ismenus,

C) with the Accusative :

a) to : Hom. tm 8' avri'; lttjv vapa vrja';, they went

again to the ships.

h) along, near hy

:

of place : Hom. -irapa diva daXdcrcr'r}';, along the sea

heach.

of time : during : Trap o\.ov top /3toj/, per totam vitam,

during the whole of life ;

compared with : Set ra? irpdêi'; irap oKK-qKas ridevai,

you must put the acts hy the side of (or compare with)

one another; with the comparative, puelôv n Trapa

TovTO, something greater than this ;

on account of (comp. propter, near, and on account of) :

Trapa rrjv -^fierepav dfLeXeiav ^LXnnro^ avêrai, on

account of our neglect JFhilip hecomes great.

Taken negatively : besides : e')(pp,ev n Trapa ravra

aXKo Xeyeov, we have something else to say besides this ;

contrary to (opposed to Kara with the Ace): irapa

Tov vofMov, contrary to the law, properly past the law, by

evading the law.

Phrases : "jrapa fiiKpov, nearly ; irap ovBev iroieurOai,

to deem as nothing.

In compounds: near, at, past, beyond, over (irapa-

j3aivetv, overstep).

§ 466. 5. Trept (Hom. adv. irepi, very = Lat. per in

per-magnus), radical meaning around (from above),

comp. a/i^t.

§407. PREPOSITIONS WHICH CAN HAVE THREE OASES, 265

A) -with the Dative

:

round, around, near, for: Horn. irepX %KMy<7i, irvkycn,,

round, the Skaean gate; irepl rots (piXTo.TOi'i Kvêveiv,

to gamble for what is dearest.

Horn, irepl Krjpi, at heart ; 'irepl j)6^(p, from fear.

B) witli the Genitive

:

a) mostly in a figurative sense, about, Lat. de: riva

Boâv exeK "Trepl tovtwv ; what opinion have you about

this ? fiovkexiovrai Trepl tov TroXe/iiou, they consult about

the war.

i) in Horn, over, above : irepl irdvTcov eiifxevai, aXKwv,

to he above all others; hence the prose phrases: irepl

iro'}OMv iroieiaOai, to place above much, i. e. estimate

highly ; Trepl ovBevo? irobela-dai, place above nothing, i. e.

estimate at nMhing at all.

0) with the Accusative

:

ahnost the same as dfij>l (§ 4<32) : wepl A'lyvn-Tov

(around, i. e. everywhere, in Egypt), about the country

of Egypt ; figuratively : in regard to, about, concern-

ing: irepl <pi\ocro(pMv airovSdêiv, to be zealous about

philosophy.

In compounds (with adjectives = Lat. per-) : round,

round about, besides, over.

§ 467. 6. 7r/)6? (Horn, irpon, irorl), akin to irpo,

radical meaning at, to (towards the front), comp. irapd.

A) with the Dative

:

a) at, near: 6 Kvpa yv ttjoo? Ba^vKcovt, Cyrus wasnear Babylon.

b) on, to : Horn, iroil Se aicfprTpov jSaXe 'âlrj, he

threw the staff on the ground; tov vovv irpoî'^êTe irpo<i

TovTtp, give your mind to this.

c) besides, in addition to: iTpo<; rourot?, besides this;

irpo's TOO? dXXoi,';, besides the rest.

B) with the Grenitive

:

a) with, in the sense of community : Horn, irpo^ yap

Aid? elcrit/ diravre^ êlvoi re irTcajfpi re, mth (protected

266 PEEPOSITIONS WHICH CAM HAVE THREE CASES. § 468.

hy) Zem are all strangers and the poor ; rrpo'i Tivo<f

etvai, to be with (on the side of) any one; tt/so? larpov-

iariv, it is with (belongs to) a physician, medici est;

7r/309 Ttvos Xiyeiv, to speak for (in behalf of) any one

;

irpo<; 6e5)v, with (in presence of, by) the gods, per deos,

form of an oath.

h) towards (versus) : tt/jo? fieaTj/M^plai;, towards the

South, comp. TT/Do? with Ace.

c) from, ly (comp. irapd with Gen.) : SXô^ ttjoo?

Oecbv, blessing from the gods; sometimes with Passiye

verbs : ttjOo? two? (piXeicrdai,, to be loved by some one.


:

a) to: epxovTM ttjoo? jj/ia? '7rpecr/3ei<;, ambassadors

come to us; Trpos top Brj/iov a/yopeveiv, to speak to the

jieople.

b) towards, against (versus, adversus, ergo) : ttjoo?

IBoppav, towards the North (comp. Tr/ao? with Gen.)

;

BiKaêcrOai, Trpo'; riva, to enter an action against any

one ; ir(,(n5)<; BiaiceicrOaL tt/jo? riva, to be faithfully dis-

vosed towards some one; Trpo'? âcriXia a7rovBa<; iroiei-

crOai, to make a treaty towards (with) the king.

c) in regard to, according to : Biaj>epeLv irpo^ apsTijv,

to differ in regard to virtue; irpb<; rh KaXXiara tuv

vTrap'XpvTcov Bel ra XoiTrci 'TTpaneiv, we ought to arrange

the future according to the best of the present means;

irpo^ Tama, according to this.

Phrases: tt/jo? rjSov^v, according to pleasure; Trpois

Xapiv, in favour of; tt/oo? ^lav, by force; ovSev Trpo<;

€/ie, nothing to me.

In compounds : to, in addition, near, together with.

§ 468. 7. vTTo (Horn, also viral, Lat. sub),

radical meaning under, below.

A) with the Dative

:

under: Hom. fSiv viro m-ocrcn fieja arevaylêTO <yal(i,

under their feet the earth loudly groaned ; vtt 'Adrjvaiot<s

ehai, to be under (subject to) the Athenians; poet.

§470. THE PEONODNS. 267

•yepcrlv v<j) r^fierepijo-iv aXovcra, (Troy) conquered under(by) our hands.


:

a) under, in space : viro 7^9, under the earth ; in thesense of dependency: xnr avKrjTcbv 'xppeveiv, to dance

under (the guidance of) flute-players ; hence

b) by, with Passives and verbs of Passive meaning:.

17 TToKi^ eakm viro twv '^XKrjvwv, the city was taJcen Jythe Hellenes ; iroXKol airedavov viro rS)v ^ap^dpwv, manywere hilled by the barbarians.

c) from, because of : vwb 'yijpto'; acrOevr]^ tjv, he was-

weakfrom old age.


:

a) under : Horn. a><; ehriov inro ttovtov iSvcrero KVfLalr-

vovra, having thus spoken, he dived under the billowy

sea; viro to opo<; rjiiXi^ovro, they spent the night under(at the foot of) the mountain.

b) of time : towards (Lat. smJ) : viro vvktu, towards^-

night ; viro ttjv vvktu, during the night.

In compounds : under, down under, gradually, secretly^

often untranslateable.

Chap. XVIII.—The Pkonotws.

§ 469. 1. The Nominative of the Personal Pronouns:

is used, as in Latin, only when the person is to be men-tioned with special emphasis: koX ah oyjrei, amov, tu

quoque eum videbis, i. e. ov fiovov eyd> (not merely I).

§ 470. 2. The place of the Possessive Pronoun is

frequently supplied by the article (§ 373). On the-

article with the Possessive Pronoun, § 388.

a) Instead of the Possessive Pronoun the Greek likes-

to use the Genitive of the corresponding Personal Pro-

noun. Such a Genitive, when the substantive to whichj

it belongs has the article, usually stands either before-° Digitized by Microsoft®

-268 THE EEFLEXIVE PKONOUN. §471.

the article or after the substantive : gov 6 vm or

o vlo^ (70V, thy son, not d aov vl6<;.

b) As the Possessive Pronoun approaches very near

to a possessive Genitive (§ 408, 2), it may be qualified

by a Genitive : rafxa Bvarijvov kuko,, my ills, the. unfortu-

nate one's \mea miseri mala\.

§ 471. 3. The Meflexive ProTwun refers either to the

-subject of the clause in which it occurs : St wyade, fxir)

aiyvoei, aeavrov, good friend, be not ignorant of thyself;

or, in dependent clauses, it refers back to the subject

of the leading clause : ehiAvat eKeKevaev, el fie\Xoi<;

a-vv eavrS eWXeti/, he bade you enter, if you were going

to sail away with him (secum).

Obs. a)—Instead of the Eeflexive Pronoun the usual Personal

Pronouns also may he employed : 8okS juoi oIk. anapda-Kevos

ehai, I think myself not to he unprepared.

€bs. V)—The simple Pronoun of the third person, ov, of, e, &c., is

commonly used reflexively by the Attic writers, hut in Hom. it

is exactly like the English, of him, to him, him, &c. (like the

Attic avTOv, aira, avTov, &0., according to § 474) : Xey^rai.

'AttoXXo)!' iicheipai Mapaiav ipi^ovra oi nepl (rotpias, dicitur

Apollo Marsyae cutem detraxisse de arte secum certanti ; Hom.airSpaTOs de oi §X6e

—

MivcXaos, sponte sua ad eum venit

Menelaus.

Obs. c)—The Eeflexive of the third person sometimes supplies the

place of that of the first and second : Set rjpas avepia-Qai, eavTois,

we must ask ourselves; in like manner the Possessive os

sometimes stands for the Possessive of the first two persons

;

Hom. ov yap eymye ^s yairis hivapai yXvKeparepov oXXo IbiaBai,

for I can see nothing sweeter than my own country.

§ 472. The following are used as Possessives of the

Meflexive Pronouns

:

a) the Genitives of the Eeflexive Pronouns, especially

in the Singular : i/navrov, creavrov, eavrov. When the

substantive to which they are joined has the article, the

Genitives stand between the article and the substan-

tive : Zeii? TTjv 'AOt/vuv e<j)vcrev ex t?5? eavrov KeipaXTJ^,

Zeus produced Athene out of his own head.

b) the Possessives of the Personal Pronouns, espe-

§ 475. DEMONSTEATITE AND INTEEKOG. PEONOTOfS. 269-

cially in the plural: rjiierepo-i, vfierepo'; : crêVepos is

exclusively Eeflexive.

c) the Possessives in connexion -with the Genitives ofavToi; : rjfieTepoi; avrSiv, &c.

§ 473. The Reflexive Pronoun in the Plural is also

used instead of the Redproeal Pronoun aXkrfKav v.

8ieXey6/ie6a rjfuv avTol'i, vje conversed with one another

(among ourselves).

§ 474. On ai)T6<;, self, and o avro?, the same, see-

§389.

auTo? in the oblique cases, like the Lat. is, ea, id, is

used as a Personal Pronoun referring to some person

or thing mentioned before: iSiovro avTov Trapa/jLeivat,.

they wanted Mm to remain.

The Genitive avrov, rj<;, wv, like the Lat. ejus, eorum,

is the Engl, his, her, their, when it does not refer to the-

subject. Its position is that pointed out in § 470, a

:

6 vto? aiiTov or avrov 6 vL6<;,filius ejus. Still the Geni-

tive of awTo? often supplies the place of the Eeflexive of

the third person.

§ 475. Of the Demonstrative Pronouns, ovto9 points-

more to what precedes and is already known; oSe to

what foUows and has not yet been named ; so likewise

are distinguished toiovtc;, of such quality ; toctovto^,

so great; t7]\ikovto<;, so old— from roio'iSe, rocro^Se,

rrj'XiKo'iSe.—On the article with these Pronouns, § 389.

On the demonstrative uses of 6'?, § 213, Obs.

§ 4756. The Interrogative Pronouns mentioned in

§ 216 : Tt?, TTOrepa, vroto?, &c., are used exclusively

in direct questions. In indirect ones the compound

Relatives ocrn?, oirorepo';, otvoIo^, &c., are employed..

The former, however, are often used in indirect ques-

tions, though the latter never in a direct one : rt? el

;

who are you ? ehve /loi, '6<tti<; el or rt? el, tell me who

you are.

On the Attractiq^m^^îffi^%ônouns, §§ 597-603.

270 THE ACTIVE VOICE. § 476.

Chap. XIX.

—

The Voices of the Verb.

§ 476. 1. The Active Voice.

1. The Active voice not unfrequently has an intran-

sitive as well as a transitive meaning. Thus iKavveiv

means to drive and to ride ; 'i-xeiv, to have, hold, and to he

in a condition (/caXw? ^X'^h iene se haiet) • irpdrreiv, to do,

and to be (eS 'n-pdrro), I am doing well) ; SrjXovv, to make

.and to become manifest.

In some verbs different tenses are assigned to the different mean-

ings : see above, §§ 329, 330.

2. Simple verbs which are transitive often become

intransitive when compounded: fidWeov, to throw—pera^dWeiv, to change; i's^dWeiv and i/ji^dXKeiv, to fall

into, issue (of rivers) ; Zchovat, to give—ivSiSovai, to give

in ; eTTiBiSovai, to grow .; KOTrreov, . to cut ; "TrpoKoirreiv,

proficere, make progress; j)epeiv, to bear; hiajtepeuv,

differre, to differ or be distinguished.

3. The Active often denotes an action which the

subject accomplishes not immediately but mediately, that

is, causes or allows to be done by others: o KO/do?

KwreKavae to, I3aal\eia, Gyrus had the royal castle burnt

«down. This is called the Causative use.

§ 477. 2. The Middle Voice.

Its primary meaning is reflexive, i. e. the action of the

verb in the Middle refers back to the subject from

which it issues.

The Middle, in the iirst place, may be either transitive

or intransitive; it is transitive when it can have an

object in the Accusative : 'jrpdTTo/xat j^prjfiara, I gain

Jor myself money ; intransitive when it is incapable of

having such an object : d-rrkypiuii, I restrain myself.

The Middle, further, can vary much in its mode of

Teferriag back to the subject. We distinguish

:


^480. THE MIDDLE VOICE. 271

§ 478. 1. Ine Direct Middle,

in which the subject is at the same time the direct object

of the verb : Xovonai, I wash myself; TpeTro/j,ac, I turn

mi/self; hnhelicvvfiaii, I show myself; Lcrrafiat,, J place

myself; KaXv-n-rofiai, I hide myself. This Mnd of Middleis the rarest. The Actiye with the reflexive pronoun

in the Accusative is more generally used to express

direct Eeflexion.

Obs.—Through, the direct Middle several middle verhs havehecome intransitive or passive : Traiat, I cause to stop ; iraiofiai,

I stop myself, cease ; Kpalva, I shew ; ipaivojiai, I shew myself,

appear ; iriiii, I send ; lefiai, I send Tnysdf, hurry,

§479. 2. The JwcZiVec^, or Dafwe-Zife Middle (§431),

in which the subject is but indirectly affected by the

action. Here the action takes place for or in the

interest of the subject, so that in other languages the

Dative may generally be used to denote the reflex

influence: iropitfo, I provide; wopiôfiai,, I provide for

myself, e. g. '^pi^fiaTU, money ; dyofiai, ûvaiKa, J take a

ivife to myself ; fiia-Qovfiai, a-rpari(ji)ra<;, I hire soldiers for

myself (but fucrdovp, hire out, fucrOovv kavrov, to hire

<me's self out);

fieTaTrefiirofuti nva,, I send for some one;

Hom. aiiTo^ i(êKKeTai avSpa criSripo^, the iron itself

draws a man to it. Hence the Athenian says : 6 vofio-

ffirr]'; TiBtîTi vofiov^, the lawgiver gives laws, but 6 Srjfioi

TiBerai vofiovv, the people gives laws to itself.

Obs.—The interest of the subject sometimes consists in an object

being removed from its reach : ajiivajxai Kivhwov, I ward off

danger from me ; Trpotejiai nva, I send some one away fromme ; airohoudai, vavv (to give away for one's interest), to sell aship. (Comp. § 324, 7).

§ 480. 3. The Subjective or ethical Middle.

This denotes that an action originates not only exter-

nally, but also internally from the subject, i. e. from its

means, power, or disposition: irapexew, to furnish;

iraoeveadai, to fwrnish from one's own means; jroi.eat• '^ ' J Digitizedty Microsoft®

272 THK MIDDLE VOICE. §481,

elpr]Vt]v, to make feace, ; n-oielcrBai elprjvqv, to strive to

make peace ; \afji,^dvei.v ri, to take something ; Xufiâ-

veaOai rova, to lay hold of something; aKoireiv, to

look at ; aKoiretaOai,, to reflect.

Ohs.—The subjective Middle is formed also from intransitive

verbs ; it then expresses a state more intensively than the

active : n-oXiTevcu', to he a citizen ; woXiTevecrdai, to act as a

citizen; PovXeieiv, to give advice; ôvXevea-dai, to deliberate

with one's self.

§ 481. 4. The Causative Middle.

As the Causative Active (§ 476, s) expresses an

action only occasioned by the subject, so the Middle is

often used to denote that the subject has an action done

for or ffn itseK : o iraTrip SiSdaKerao rov viov, the father

has his son instructed; iraparLOefiM hehrvov, I have a

meal placed before me ; hiKdâjjuab, I have judgment pro-

nounced for me ; diroTeixvofiai ra? ')(elpa<s, I have myhands cut off.

§ 4815. As examples the following more important

verbs may be adduced, whose meaning in the Middle

essentially differs in various ways from that of the

Active : apx^}, I «»* f-'^'^t, apxa/J-ai,, I begin ; 6 prjrwp

ypdêi vo/xov, the orator proposes (writes down) a law;

6 KUT'ôpo'; lypdcfjeTat rov diiKrjaavra, the accuser prose-

cutes (has the name written down) the wrong doer ; rificopM

Tivi, I help one ; rificopovfiai nva, I avenge myself on one;

alpoi, I take, alpovfiai, I choose ; Bavei^w, I put out to

interest ; Saveiô/j,ai, I borroiv at interest ; irdQai, I per-

suade, iteiQoiiai, I allow myself to be persuaded, I obey.

One and the same Middle may occur in different senses : fiiSao-Ko-

jxai (4), I cause to teach, or (1) I teach myself, learn ; rpeVo-

fiai (1), / turn myself, or (2) I turn to myself: rpiivovTai tus

yvafiai, they change their opinion; rpiTrovrai tovs woXefitovs,

they turn away (put to flight) tJie enemy (§ 479, Ois.).

§ 482. Obs.—The deponents are distributed among the different

kinds of Middle verbs, and differ from the verbs mentioned only byliaving no active form. Thus vma-xi'ovji.ai, I pledge myself, is a

^484. USE OF THE TENSES. 273

direct Middle ; but Seôf'"') I receive ; ktoo/uu, I acquire, are in-

direct ; aymviôiiat, I contend ; otfiai, I think, are subjective : ava-

fiioxraa-Bai, to revive, is causative. On the Passive Deponents,

§ 328.

§ 483. 3. The Passive Voice

has a freer use in Greek than in Latin, viz.

:

1. even such verbs as in the Active take a different

case from the Accusative, form a Passive : Karat^povM

TWO? (§ 424), I despise one ; KaTcuppoveiTai rt? vir' i/xov

;

•jTiarevovai, to âcriXel, they trust the king ; 6 âcnXev<i

irtcTTeveTai vtt avrwv ; eTrtôvXeveo rm voXefiim, he plots

against the enemy ; 6 TroXe/iio? iiriôvKeverat vtt avrov,

a plot is made against the enemy hy him.

2. Neuters of Passive participles may be formed evenfrom intransitive verbs: rh arparevofieva, the warlike

measures; ra crol •jreiroXiTevfjieva, your political course,

your policy.

3. The exclusively Passive forms even of Deponents

are sometimes used in a Passive sense : îdtpfiai, 1force, iîda-drjv, I was forced ; in like manner a Passive

may be formed from a Middle : atpea>, I take, aipeofj-at,

Pass. I am chosen; fiereTri/jicpOr), he was sent for, fieTOr

•Trkyjwoiiai, I send for (§ 479).

Chap. XX.

—

Ûse op the Tenses.

§ 484. In marking the time the Greeks distinguished

:

1. The Oedee of time. The three Orders of time

being the Present, the Past, and the Future.

2. The KiSD of time. In regard to the Kind of time

an action is either

a) going on, e. g. 'î^voxtkuv (gradually), to learn to

know; or,

h) momentary, ^,^^'^^^v<^to^^<^îve, know; or,

27'± USE OF THE TENSES. § 485;

c) eompMed, e. g. i'yvmKevai,, to have learnt, to know

(Lat. nosse).

Ohs.—The momentary action may be compared to a point, the

action going on to a line, and the completed action to a surface.

An action ffoi77g on is indicated by the forms of the-

JPresent-Stem.

A momentary action is indicated by the forms of the

Aorist-Stems.

A completed action is indicated by the forms of the

Perfect-Stem.

The Future denotes the future Order of time of an

action going on, as well as of a momentary action

:

^vwa-ojjbai, I shall (gradually) get to know, and I shall

perceive; the Third Future (futurum exaetum) that of

a completed action : iyv6}Ka)<; eaofiai, I shall have learnt

(Lat. novero).

In the Present, Aorist, and Perfect, only the Indicative

indicates a dBflnite Order of time; the other Moods,

the Infinitive and the Participle, resemble the cor-

responding Indicatives only in regard to the Kind, not

in regard to the Order of time.

The following table presents a general view of these

relations

:

Present. Past. Future.

Going on. Ind. Pres. Imperf.

Subj., Opt., Imperat., Inf., Part., of the Present. ^

i i i IMomentary. I Aor. Ind. ^

Subj., Opt., Imperat., Inf.,. of the Aorist.

Completed. Perf. Ind. Pluperf. I Futm-um exact.

Subj., Opt., Imperat., Inf., Part., of the Perfect.

§ 485. Ohs.—As the English as well as the Latin language

generally neglects the distinction between an action going on and a

Momentary action, it is difficult to comprehend it. A similar dis-

§ 488. THE PRESENT INDICATIVE. 275

tinotion, however, may be perceived in some Bnglisli verbs, as flee

QpcvycLv), and escape (c^vyeij'); flicker and flash ; fear ((jio^cia-dai),

and ie frightened (0o0))6^vai, hua-ai) ; worarfer (5au/xaffiv), and to he

surprised (6aviJ,d<rai) ; to he husy about (wpacro-cij'), and to accomplish

(wpa^ai) ;yeKav, to he laughing, and yeXaa-ai, to hurst out laughinC/.

1. Forms of an Action in Progress.

a) The Present Indicative.

§ 486. The Present Indicative denotes, as in English

and Latin, an action going on or in progress at the

present time : iKerevofikv ere irdvTe^, we all im/plore thee.

Hence by the Present are expressed general assertions,

valid for all times, and therefore also for the Present

:

ea-Ti ©eo?, there is a God.

Ols.—Actions wbose commencement indeed belongs to the Past,

butwhose effects extend to the Present, are sometimes expressed

by this tense : axoia, I hear, also in the sense : I have heard

and still bear in mind ; j/imm, I conquer, i.e., I am victorious

;

(fievya, 1 am hanished ; dSiKtm, Iam wrong (h&ve done wrong);

6vfi(TK€i, he is dead. In this sense alone are used ^xa, lamcome ; oixojiai, I am gone.

§ 487. By a lively apprehension a past action mayhe represented as present, hence the use, very frequent

in Greek, of the Historical Present, which frequently

alternates with past tenses: poet. koX irSyi opdrat koX

ripeOr) ; and how is she seen, and was she captured ? eVel

^yeiTO 'Ap^lBa/j,o'; kuI eTropevero ivl roii<s avrnraXov:,

ivravda oiiToi ovk ihe^avro rov<s irepl tov 'ApxiScifj,ov,

aXX' iryicKlvova-iv, as Archidamus tools, the lead andmarched against the enemy, the latter did not wait forthe troops of Archidamus, hut retreat.

§ 488. 5) The Imperfect

is the Preterite of an action in progress, like the Latin

Imperfect.

The Greek therefore uses the Imperfect where he

wishes to describe past states or past actions in their

progress, in their <^>M0MMM,&'°^^g with others, or in

276 THE IMPEEFECT. § 489-

their frequent, continued repetition: Horn, ol fiev

dp' otvov e/Jîcryov ivl Kp7jT7]pcri, koX vhoap, oi o avTe

UTToyyoiai, iroKvrprjTOicrt, rpaireâi; viôv koX irpoTiOev,

To\ 8e Kpea iroXKa BarevvTo, some were mingling loine and

water in mixing-bowls, others cleaning tables ndth porous

sponges, and placing them, the rest were carving much

meat; rov? fLev ovv irekTaara'; iSiâvTo ol ^dpâpoi

Kal ifxaxovTo, the barbarians met tJie peltasts, and then

were fighting,—Horn. 6(^pa p,ev ô)? ^v Kal aiêro lepov

^fiap, TOippa fJLohJ ajxôrepcov jSeke rjiTTero, irlirTe re

Xao9, as long as it was morning, and holy day increasing,

so long the darts of both were striking and people falling.

—oinroTe fjuelov aTreaTparoTreSevovTO ol /3dpâpoi, tojv

'K\X^va>v k^rjKovTa araSicov, the barbarians (did not

encamp) used never to encamp less than sixty stadia fromthe Hellenes.

§ 489. Ohs. 1.—The Imperfect frequently expresses a merely

attempted but not accomplished action : jrpSiTos KXeapôs tovs airov

(TTpaTtoiTas ejStaêro Uvat, ol 6e avrbv eâXkov, varepov de eVet eyi/cr

oTt ov bvvr](rcTaL îdfracrOat., (rvvrjyayfv kKKkruriav, first Olearchus

tried to force his soldiers to go, hut they shot at him ; afterwards,

however, as he perceived he would not he ahle to force them he sum-

moned a meeting. So ihibov sometimes means he offered to give, to

distinguish it from eSowce!/, Ae gave.

§ 490. Ohs. 2.—The Imperfects of the verbs which denote should

and must are used, just as in Latin, to denote what should be done,

in opposition to what was done : eSei roiis 'Keyovras jujre irpos

e)(^Spav wou'Lo-dai. tov Xoyoy fx^Te npbs x^P'") ^^ speakers ought to

have made tJieir speeches neither from Imired nor from, favour (Lat.

oportebaf) ; so xp^",«'* ought ; ukos tjv, it would hefair.

On the Imperf. with &, § 494, Ohs. 1, and § 537, &c.

§ 491. c) The Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, Infinitive,

and Participle Present

simply express an action in progress, whether it lie in

the present, past, or future : iiaivojx^Qa TrdvTe';, ottotov

opyi^cofj.eda, we are all mad when we are angry ; eXeyov

Tc5 ^vdvBij/jLo), oTi wdvTe'i eToiiJLoi elev jjuavOdvew, they

told Euthydcmus that tlieii were all ready to learn ; outoi•^Digitized^by Microsoft® ^ '

§ 492. THE AOEIST INDICATIVE. 277

iroirtao), ott&j? av crv Kekevri<;, I will do <xs you may hid

me {sic agam, ut tu me agere jubehis) ; tavra Xeycov

dopvôv ijKovcre, Si,a t5)v rdêeov l6vT0<i koI rjpero, t« o

66pvô<; eiT), saying this, he heard a noise pass through the

ranks, and ashed what the noise was.

Obs.—^These Present forms sometimes, like the Imperfect (§ 489),

express a mere attempt : to arroStSpdo-Kovfa fifj hivacrBai diro-

hpavai voWf] /impla, for a man not to he able to run awaywhen he tries to run away is great stupidity.

§ 492. 2. FOEMS OF A MOMENTAEY AcTION.

a) The Aorist Indicative

is the Preterite of a Momentary action, and therefore

denotes the actual beginning of an action in the past,

similar to the Historical Perfect of the Latins.

The Greeks employ the Aorist Indicative when they

wish to narrate past facts, to state past actions simply

as having happened, or to represent them as individual

facts without reference to other actions: p.era Trjv iv

K-opccveia, /J,d')(rjv ol A.6r]vawi iêXiirov ttjv ôiwriav

irdcrav, after the battle at Coronea the Athenians left all

Boeotia;—TLava-aviwi e'/c AaKeBaifiovo'; crTpaTrf/o'; virb

'^Xkijvmv i^€Trefji(j}67i /j,€Ta etKoai vewv d-rro HeXoTrov-

vrjcrov, ^vveifKeov he Kal 'KOrjvaioi TpiaKOvra vavcrl Kal

iaTpdrevaav e? Kinrpov Kal avrfj'; rd TroWd Karearpi-

yjravTo, Pausanias was sent out from Lacedaemon as

general hy the Hellenes, with twenty ships from the Pelo-

ponnese, hut Athenians also accompanied him (accom-

panying circumstance) with thirty ships, and they pro-

ceeded to Cyprus and subdued the greater part of it;

ToîKTjv Kal laTpiKrjv Kal fiavriKrjv 'A'noWcov dvevpev,

Apollo invented the arts of archery, medicine, and pro-

phecy

;

—Horn. Tr}v he ivoXv irp&TO'; the Ti^Xe/ua^ô? 0eo-

et8?79, î) h' Idv'i irpodvpoio, veiieaarjOr] S ivl 6v/ji,a> êivov

hrjBd BvprjaiV i<j)eaTd/j,ev, iyyvOi, he o-ra? X^V ^'^

Seîreprjv Kal iheâro yakKeov erfxo^, but her first

Telemachus of forS^givmtiibiit^lcôtlSd he went straight to

278 THE AOEIST INDICATIVE. §493.

tlie porch, and was ffrieued at heart that a stranger stood

a long time at the door, and going near he took him hy the

right hand and eased him of his brazen spear.

§ 493. As the Aorist Indicative simply expresses an

action as having taken place in the past, it answers to

all the different Preterites in other languages, especially

often in subordinate sentences to the Latin and English

pluperfect : Aapeto'; K.vpov fieraTrefj.'ireTai, (§ 487) diro

T^js apX'?? ^? avTov craTpdTTTjv eiroiTjcrev, Darius has

Gyrus sent for from tJie province, over which he had made

him satrap (fecerat). Thus the Aorist is used with the

Conjunctions of time, ivel, &>?, ore, as, wlien, like the

Latin Perfect with postquam, ubi, ut: to? o KOpo?

fj(r9eT0 Kpavyfj';, dveirriBrâev eirl rov "irirov acrirep ivOov-

criwv, when Gyrus perceived (ut audivit) a cry, he sprang

upon his horse like one inspired.

§ 494. The Aorist Indicative is used in statements of experience

implying that a thing once happened, hut admitting an application

to all times : poet. t£ xP"*"? V ^'"'J ""^^rtof ^\6' cnronaafiivr], with

time avenging justice always came (and hence always comes) ; kol

^padvs evôvKos etXeu ra^vv avBpa diatKcov, even a slow man, whenwell advised, overtooh (overtakes) In/ pursuit a quich man. In

English vre employ the Present in such general assertions, and often

add such adverbs as usually, commonly, always, &c., ras tS>v <f>avXQ)v

crvvovalas Skiyos -j^povos biekvaev, a short time usually dissolves the

associations of the had. This Aorist is called the gnomic Aorist,

because it is often used in gnomes, proverbs, or maxims. In Hom.it is often-also used in comparisons.

Ohs. 1.—In expressing what usually happens, the Aorist some-times has av in order to express the case as one that may have

occurred, ajid therefore may occur oftener : eKeêv av, he mayhave said. In the same way the Imperfect is used, but re-

ferring to an action in progress : avakajiâvav airav to. jroiriftaTa

SirjpaiTaiv av, ri \tyoifv, taking up their poems I would asle whatthey meant.

Ohs. 2.—The Aorist Indicative, especially in the 1 Pers. Sing, is

frequently used to express actions and states begimiing only at

the moment of speaking : iyiXaara, I burst out laughing ; poet,

injivea-' epyov Kol jrpovoiav fjv Wuv, I praise the deed and the

prudence which you have exercised.

On the Hypothetical Aorist, § 537, &c.Digitized by Microsofi®

?§ 496. THE AOE. SUBJ., OPT., IMPEEAT., AND INFIN. 279

§ 495. 5) T}ie Aorist Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative,

and Infinitive,

denote a Momentary action simply, whether of the

present, past, or future : ol rpiaKovra Trpo<;iTaâv aira-

ja/yeiv Aeovra, tV airoddvoi, the Thirty commanded to

take Leon away to die ; a/wopm, tL irpcorov fivrjaOS), I amin doubt what first to mention; firj dav/idaTjre, i^v irapd-

Soôv elTTca to, be not surprised if I say something strange ;

<rv fjboi aTTOKpivai, & iral, give me an answer, boy ; fLeya

x)lfj,at epjov TO dp')(r]v Karairpaâi, tto'Xv S en fielôv to

XaôvTa tiaaaiaaaOai, I deem it a great thing to founda government, but a still greater to maintain it after

acquiring it.

Ohs.—The Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, and Infrnitive

Aorist, therefore, differ from the corresponding forms of the

Present, just as the Aorist Indicative differs from the Imper-

fect; the Aorist forms express a single fact, oonoeived as a

point, the Present, as a state or condition, sometimes of long

'duration ; ôKcttov to Troielv, to Se KeXeOtrat pabiov, it is di^cult

to do, easy to command ; e'L 717; cx^'^ avrCkiyeiv, avrtkey^- ei he

firi, iraxJa-ai TroWaKts Xeycov Tov airov \6yov, if you have any-,

thing to say in reply, reply (even in a long speech), if not,

cease (at once)freqmntly repeating the same statement.

§ 496. The Aorist Participle regularly expresses

something which tooTc place earlier or before the act of

the principal verb : K/aoto-o? "AXvv Sio/Sa? fieyaX'ijv

apxhv KaToXiKTet,, Oroesu^, after crossing the Halys, will

overthrow a great empire; iradiov Se re vri-Tno's eyvoi

(§ 494), after suffering (by suffering) even a fool becomes

knowing.

Qls_ As the Aorist generally indicates the moment at which an

action actually iegins (§ 485), so the Aorist Participle also only

expresses that the beginning ofan action took place hefore another

action, whilst its progress may continue simultaneously with that

other : yeXaVas ein-e, he legan to laugh and said (laughing) [risu

ohorto dixit^. Horn. 2jSc Sc tis ehrftrKiv lSi)v is ttXijo-iov aXXoy,

thus would say many a one while looking at his neighbour; xapurai

,uoi aTToKpivafi.€vos, answer and oblige me, inasmuch as the x<^P^'

crao-ât follows iiS®«4«My ftftobifesêginning of the answer.

280 THE FUTlirKE. § *®7,

§ 497. As tlie Aorist Indicative may frequently be translated by

the Pluperfect (§ 493), so also the Aorist Optative and Infinitive

.11 assertions generally denotes something which took place he/ore

:

lit 'ivSol eXe^v on ir4ii-êi€ (rcfias 6 'IvSav (Sao-tXeis (Ind. otl

fnefvî), the Indians said that the king of the Indians had sent

them ; KixKams 'kiyovrai iv StKeXia oiKô-ai, the Cyclops are said to

have dwelt in Sicily.

§ 498. Many verbs whose Present-Stem expresses a

fiate, denote in all the Aorist forms the entrance into-

this state : ap'xew, to rule, dpâi, to obtain dominion

;

âauKeveiv, to be king, âaikevcrai, to become king;

layyav, to be strong, layycrai, to become strong ; aiyav,

to be silent, crvyricrai,, to become silent; e%6ty, to have,

cT'xeTv, to obtain ; (f>aive(fOai, to appear, ipavfjvai, to become

apparent; voaelv, to be ill, voarjaai, to become ill;

TToKefielv, to be at war (bellum gerere), "TroXe/MricraL, to

begin war (bellum inferre). (Comp. § 485.)

Ohs.—This meaning, however, is not always attached to these

forms ; and iTToke/irja-av may also signify simply helium gessenmt

(§ 492).

§ 499. 3. The Futuee

expresses the futurity both of an action in progress and

of a Momentary action : ap^<o, I shall become ruler, and

I shall rule.

Ohs.—The 2 Person Future with oi nearly resembles the negative-

Imperative, ovK eTnopKrja-ets, thou wilt (shalf) not swearfalsely.

§ 500. The Future Indicative in relative clauses, and in clauses

with offojj, that, is worthy of notice, for there the Future denotes

what may or should happen r ovk eô/tev oVou alrov wvrjcro^cda, ive~

have nothing with which we can huy food (non liahemus, quo cibum-

emamus) ; Set ajravra avhpa tovto Trapaa-Kevd^saSat, ottojs cos a"0(â)-

TdTos eorai, every man should take care to he (that he shall he) as

wise as possible (oomp. § 553). The Participle is similarly used

:

7] X^pa TToWrj KoX dyadr] rfv Kai ivrjcrav ol epyacTOfievot, the land was

I'lrge and good and there were people to (luho could) cultivate it ; t'is.

e'a-Tai, 6 fjyrja-oiievos ; who will he there to (luho can) guide us (comp.

§§ 380, 578).

Ohs.—av (Horn. Ke) is sometimes added to the Future Indicative

to denote that a case may possibly occur : (v 016' on aiTjiivos

§503. THE PERFECT INDICATIVE. 281

&v irpbs avSpu oior o-u el d7raK\ayri(reTm, I well know that he

will be glad to be reconciled to a man such as you are ; Horn.

6 6e K€v KeôXanxerai ov Kev iKtafiat, and he will doubtless he ilb'

wrath whom I come upon.

§ 501. The verb /leXXw ia used with the Present,

Future, or, though more rarely, the Aorist Infinitive, to

express an immediately/ approaching or at least intended

action : /u-iXkco vfm<; wyeiv ek Âcriav, I am going to lead

you to Asia (in Asiam vos ducturus sum). This is called

the periphrastic Future.

Obs. 1.—fieKXm may also be used in other tenses than the Present

with an Infinitive, like esse in Lat., with the Part. Fut. r

TrXT^trioy rjdT] rjv 6 aTodfios evda efieWov KaraKva-eiv, jam prope

aderat statio ubi deversuri erant, where they wished to rest.

Obs. 2.—TTWE or TL ov fieWm, is elliptical in the sense of Whyshould I not ?

4. Forms of a Completed Action.

§ 502. a) The Perfect Indicative

is the Present of a completed action, i. e. by the Perfect,

the Greeks denote an action completed for and with

reference to the Present : poet. X0709 XeXearat 7rd<;, the

whole speech has been spoken [dixi] ; evprjKa, I have

found, 1 have it ; Hom. rjhr) lyap TereXea-Tat a fioi ^tXo?

fjdeke 6vfj.6<;, for now has been finished what my dear soul

desired ; rj iroXi'; eKTiavat Trapa t&v ôpwOLaiv, the city

has been founded by the Corinthians (of a still existing-

city) ; TO, '^^pi^fiara rot? irXovalot'; -^ Tvyj) ov BeScopTjTai,

dXka 8eSdveL/cev, Fortune has not given, but leyit (at

interest), their money to the rich.

§ 503. Obs.—Several Perfects have entirely a Present meaaing,

inasmuch as they present in a completed state the action of which

the gradual accomplishment is expressed by the Present : fufivrjo-Ko-

uai, I remind myself, fie/ivrjiiai, I bear in mind, remember {rnemini)

;

KaXeofiai, I am named ; k/kXjj^m, my name is ; neiBofiai, I folloiv ;

iTCTroida, I confide in ; oKkv/xi, I am perishing ; oXmXa, I am lost

;

KTaofiat, I acquire ; Keicr-qfiai, I possess ; "larap.ai, I place myself;

earrjKa, I stand ; PaiofgiizmSt^^îmtsiffm gone.

:282 THE FUTUKE PEEEECT. i !504.

§ 504. 5) The Pluperfect

is the Preterite of a completed action, i. e. by tlie

Pluperfect the Greeks express an action completed for

:and with reference to a past time: Horn. Br] tots

«y' aTpe/ji,a<; evSe XeXacTfj,evo'; Sera i-rreKovoei, then truly

-he slept quietly, forgetting what lie had suffered ; iv rot?

Apa.KOVTO'; v6fJ,oi<; jjula airaaw Spiaro TOt<; ajxapTavovcn

tjjfila 6dvaro<;, in Draco's laws death had been appointed

for all criminals as the only punishment— says an

Athenian after the laws were aboKshed. (As long as

they were in force : wpia-Tai.)

Obs.—The Pluperfects of the Perfects enumerated in § 503, are to

be translated by Imperfects.

On the Aorist in the sense of the Latin Pluperfect, § 493.

§ 505. c) The Futuee Peeeect (FuTUEUlfl: exactum)

is the Future of a completed action, i. e. it denotes an

action which will be completed in the future. It is

only in the Middle that the Greeks have a apecial form

for this Third Future, which has generally a Passive

meaning. In the Active the circumlocution by meansof the PeTfect Participle and the Future of ehai mustbe used (§ 291) : av ravr elSwfiev, ra Beovra icrofieOa

eyvcoKore';, when we know this, we shall (thence) have got

to know our duty; Horn, i/xol Se XeXelyjrerai, aXyea

Xvypd, but I shall have gloomy woes left me.

Obs.—The Future Perfect of the Perfects mentioned in § 503

serves as a common Future : jiijivfjo-oiiai, meminero, &c.

§ 506. d) The Perfect of all the Moods, of the Infinitive,

and of the Participle

expresses a completed action generally, and mayrefer to any of the three Orders of time : ov j3ovXev6-

crOai copa aWa ISePovKevcrdat, now is not the time to

consult, but to have consulted (to be resolved) ; Sep|i;?

-&)? iirvOeTo rov 'EXX'^o-ttovtov i^ev^dat, •jrpofj'yev 6« ro)vDigitized by Microsoft®

§ 511. USE OF THE MOODS. 283

"ZdpBemv, when Xerxes learnt that the Hellespont hadbeen bridged over (and was still provided with a bridge,

oTt eêvKTo), he marchedforward from Sardis; ravra fiev

ovv irpoeipija-Oa), thus rrmch he said beforehand (now to

something else) ; Horn, ea-aerao rjfiap ot av itot okoiXr)

"IXto9 Ipij, a day will come when holy Ilios will he lost

(has been lost) ; 'xprjcriixov n icrKe/i/ievo^ yKw, I am come

after having devised something useful.

Chap. XXI.

—

Use of the Moods.

A) The Moods in Simple Sentences.

§ 507. 1. The Indicative.

The Indicative, in accordance with the usage of

other languages, is employed simply to state something

positively or negatively, or simply and directly to ask

a question : poet. tjJ? dpeTfj<; iSpayra deal wpoirdpoiOev

eOrjKav, the gods placed sweat before virtue ; Hom. -KoQa)

€49 dvBpa>v ; from what class of men are you P

Ohs.—On the Indicative in hypothetical sentenceswith or without

av, § 536, &c., in sentences expressing a wish, § 515. On the

Aorist Ind. with ay, to express what usually happens, see

§ 494.

2. 27ie Subjunctive.

§ 508. The Subjunctive expresses what ought to take

place; it always refers to the present, to reality.

Hence it is used in the following cases

:

§ 509. 1. as a challenge in the first person: 'ieofiev,

let us go \_eamus'\;êpe B^, ra? fiapTVpui<s vjuv avar/vw,

well, come ! let me read you the testimonies \recitern\.

§ 510. 2. with the negative firj in prohibitions and in

>iegative admonitions (comp. § 518) : firj tovto TroiJô-j;?,

tie hocfeceris, you ought not to do this.

§ 511. 3. In hesiiafim^ i§imiieimm7heTe it is asked

284 THE OPTATIVE MOOD. § 51!t.

what should be done : rt ^cS ,• what am I to say ? Horn.

TTois Tt? roi 7rp6(j)pa)v eireaiv ireiOnfjTai A.')(aiS}v ; how

shall any of the Aehaeans willingly trust thy words?

Be^ea-Oe -nfici^ n aTri(o/u,ev ; will you receive us, or are we

to depart ?

§ 512. 4. with jxri ia sentences expressing fear or

anxiety : firj op/poiKorepov § to a\.r]6e<; ehrelv, if it he not

rather rude to say the truth. If the anxiety is to be

negatively expressed, jjJfj ov is used : Horn, firj vv rot ov

^paicr/j,r} crKfjirrpov xal crTef:ifj,a 6eolo, lest the staff and

wreath of the god should not help thee, i. e. it will cer-

tainly be of little help to thee [Lat. vereor ne ncn or

ut tejuvet]. Comp. §§ 533, 616, Obs. 3, § 621, a.

§ 513. 06s.—The Homeric language employs the Subjunctive of

future events, quite like the Fut. Ind. to express a thing that is

to be expected (§ 545) : ov yap ttco tocovs tSov dvipas ovSs 'IScofiai,

for never yet did 1 see such men nor Tnay (shall) I see them, av is

sometimes added in Hom. to this Subjunctive : ovk av toi ;i(pai'(r/ii7

Kidapis TO. T£ 6mp' 'A0po8iTT)f, the lyre and Aphrodite's gifts would

not help thee. Comp. § 500, Ols.

3. The Optative.

§ 514. 1. The Optative alone (without the particle

av) is used to express a wish that something may take

place : poet. & iral, yevoio 7raTpo<; e\nv)(iaTepo<;, boy

!

may you be happier than your father [Lat. Pres. or Perf.

Subj.].

The particles used (like Lat. utinam) to introduce a

wish are : el (Horn, at), eWe (Horn. atOe), el yap, o)?.

§ 515. Ols.—If it is to be intimated that a wish is not to he

realised, it is referred to the past, and expressed by the Imperfect or

Aorist Indicative : tiff rjo-Ba Bwarbs Spav otrov 7rp6dvp,os ei, would

that you were able to do what you wish ; eWe croi Tore a-uveyevop-qv,

would that I then had met you. The same kind of wish is expressed

by the Aorist m^eXov (properly " I owed ") and the Infinitive

:

oXeVflai &(j)e\ov TrjS' rjpepa, would that I had perished on that day[Lat. Imperf. and Plup. Subj.]. Comp. § 537.

§ 516. 2. The Optative with the particle av (Horn. KeDigitized by Microsoft®

§ 519. THE IMPEEATIVE MOOD. 285

or Kev) exTpresses possibiUti/ : tovto yivoir av, that (coald)

might be ; rt 'âp yevoir av eX/co? /xeiôv -rj <^/\o? KaK6<; ;

what greater evil could there be than a bad friend ? ttov

Stjt' av elev ol êvoi ; why ! where can the strangers be ?

[Lat. Pres. and Perf. Subj.] The Optative with av is

therefore called the potential Optative.

§ 517. Ohs. 1.—Hence the Optative witii av is used in modestly-

expressed assertions : ovk hv Xe'yoi/it, I would not say [non dixerini]

;

j>pa &v ava-Kevdêardai e'lrj, it is perhaps time to hreah up ; ovk &v

Svvaio firj Kafimv eiSai/ioveiv, you could not witJwut taking trouble

he happy.

Ohs. 2.—In the poets the Optative in a potential sense is also

used without av: Horn, peia deosy id^Xmv Koi TrjXodev avSpa a-aacrai,

a god who is willing can easily save a man even afar off. But this

use of the Optative to denote a possihle and merely imaginary case

is originally peculiar to this mood, and hence is preserved in depen-

dent clauses, §§ 528, 529, 532, 06s., 546, 552, Ols.

§ 518. 4. The Imperative.

The Imperative is the mood of command and, with

negatives, of prohibition.

A prohibition in the second person can be expressed

only in two ways, viz. either with fj}) and the Present

Imperative : /j,7) irparre, of a continued action, or with

/t?; and the Aorist Subjunctive: fir; n-pd^ri';, of a

Momentary action, do not do : raOrd fiot irpaôv, tekvov,

xal firj ^pdSvve fjiriS" iirifiVTjaOfj'i ere Tpoia<;, do me this,

child, and delay not nor think further of Troy.

In the third person also jj^rj with the Aorist Imperative

is admissible : fj/riBel<; ifi&v TrposBoKrj(rdTa) aWco<;, let

none of you expect otherwise.

On the Infinitive instead of the Imperative, see

§ 577. On the Imperative as a substitute for a hypo-

thetical clause, § 545, 05s. 3.

B) The Moods in Compound Sentences.

§ 519. Preliminary remarks on the connexion of

sentences with one'S!($»Mi^.'W'crosoft®

286 THE MOODS IN COMPOUND SENTENCES. §519.

1. Two simple sentences (§ 361, 2) may be combined

in two ways, viz. eitlier

a) so, that the one may be quite independent of the

other—this combination is called Co-ordination, or Para-

taxis (Trapdra^hs).

b) so, that they mutually are referred to each other

and express a complete thought only in their combi-

nation— this combination is called Subordination, or

Hypotaxis (vTroTaîs).

2. Of two Co-ordinate sentences each is a principal

sentence, and in every respect independent of the

other : Koivrj rj tvx^ ''^''' "ô fieXKov doparov, fortune is

common, and the future invisible ; tovto iryo) ovt e'cprjKa,

ovre Xiyoi/u,!, dv, I have Tieither said that, nor could Isay it.

On the manner in which coordinate sentences maybe combined, § 624, a.

3. By Subordination two sentences are combined in

such a way that one expresses the principal idea, the

other a secondary one. The former is called the

leading sentence, the latter the secondary, dependent or

Subordinate. One leading sentence often has several

subordinate ones dependent on it. The moods of sub-

ordinate sentences are in many ways determined by the

leading sentence : Ti,(Tcra(f>epv7]<; Sia/SdWei, rbv ILvpov

"TTjJo? rov dSeX(j}6v, d>^ i-irtôvXevoL uvtS, Fissaphemcs

brings a calumny against Cyrus before his brother,

(saying) that he was plotting against him; Hom. trol

dfi ea-TTofieO', ocjjpa av %at/Jj?9, we have followed thee thai

thou mayst rejoice.

4. The Correlative connexion of sentences is a special

kind of subordination. Of two correlative sentences,

one always refers to the other. The one is called the

Protasis, and the other the Apodosis. The Protasis,

which requires to be completed by another sentence, is

subordinate (3). The Apodosis is a leading sentence,

which furnishes |jie.fengêsî;g^^(^pletion • Hom. S,

§ 520. THE MOODS IN COMPOUND SENTENCES. 287

iSev, &<; fjLiv eSv x°^°'^' ^ ^^ ^^^ *^ wrath seized iiinir

Horn. OTTirowv k et-Trrjada eVo? rolov k enaKovaai,^, the-

Mnd of word you speak such you will hear.

Obs. 1.—This correlation is frequently expressed ty two Pronouns-

or Particles referring to eacli other (§§ 216, 217), as in the

examples just quoted, hut not always : ci tv-tj exîs avrCKiyciv,.

dj/TiXeye, if you can in any way reply, reply,

Obs. 2.—The'Apodosis often precedes the Protasis : oStos iScXno-ros-

&.V e'ir] 0(TTis KOcriudnTara ras (ru/i0opaf <êpciv Sivarai, he wouldhe the lest who can hear calamities with most dignity.

5. From the subordination of one clause to another^,

there arises a compound sentence.

Ols. 1.—The same thought may often be as well expressed in twoCo-ordinate sentences as in one Compound sentence : /iijSevJ-

(Tvôpav 6v£i5ltrj}$, kolv^ yap f] tv^tj, reproach no one with

a calamity, for fortune is common ; or iwe\ tj Tixo koivt) iariy

IxrjScvi (TVjiôpav oveiBloTjs, sincefortune is common reproach noone with a calamity. The Homeric language abounds in series-

of Co-ordinate sentences (the paratactio arrangement).

Ols. 2.—Frequently a word belonging to the Dependent sentence-

is drawn into the Principal sentence, where it may appear in

different cases. If the Principal sentence stands first the ar-

rangement is called prolepsis (jrpokijijns, taking beforehand) ;•

Kai fioL Tov vlov fine, el pepdBrjKe ttjv tcx"'!^ ^ '=°' f"" fOTe, el 6-

viis fjffia^Tjxe TrjV Tex'"]" (§ 397). Horn. TtiSeifij/i' 6' ovk avyvoirjs, TvoTepoKTi p-erelr), you could scarce perceive on which side

Tydides stood ; koI twv âpfidpav iiTep,eKeiTo, as nokep.eiv iKavoi

eirjo-av, he also took care that the barbarians should he capable ofcarrying on war. On the other hand a substantive may pas»

from the Principal to the Subordinate sentence : Hom. fiera Secraerai fjv tot aTnjvpav Kovprjv Bpicrrjos, among them also will b&

the daughter of Srises whom I then tooh away (comp. § 602).

6. On the different kinds of sentences according to-

their substance, § 624, &c. Only those kinds will here

be noticed which are most important in regard to the-

use of the Moods.

§ 520. The use of the Moods in Dependent sentences

is subject to the following general rules

:

1. The Indicative in Greek is Yery extensively used'

even in Depend@i^'^^fetofcM'ee§°«1he Greeks merely

288 THE MOODS IN COMPOUND SENTENCES. § 521.

annexing or inserting many sentences without any

mark of dependence where the Latin language marks

the dependence by the Subjunctive or Infinitive: [irj

ft avepy, Tt? elfjbi, ash me not who I am \ne me interroges,

quis si'wi].

§ 521. 2. The Subjunctive in Dependent sentences

also denotes always that which ought to take place, and

•can generally be employed only when the leading

sentence contains a principal tense.

Every verbal form is regarded as a Principal tense

which connects the action with the present ; hence the

Fresent (except the Historical Present, § 487), the

Perfect, and the Future Indicative, and aU tenses of

the Sviijunctive and Imperative.

§ 522. 3. The Optative (without av) denotes some-

thing merely conceived or supposed (§ 517, Obs. 2), and

generally can be employed only when the Principal

sentence contains an Historical tense.

Every verbal form, however, is regarded as an Histo-

rical tense which connects the action with the past,

hence the Historical Fresent (§ 487), the Indicative of

the Aorist, the Imperfect and Fluperfect.

A Dependent clause, moreover, frequently has the

Optative when this mood occurs in the Principal sen-

tence.

§ 523. 4. In indirect speech (oratio ohliqua) the Opta'

tive (without dv), but only after an Historical tense, is

used to denote something which is to be stated, not as

the opinion of the speaker, but of another person : at

AO'qvaZoi TlepiicKea eKaKi^ov, oti, aTpaTrjyo'i wv ovk

eTTe^dr/oi, eVt tou9 iroKefiLovi, the Athenians reproached

Fericles because being a general he did not lead them out

against the enemy \c[uod non duceret] ; ev^avro a-anrjpM

dvaeiv evda irpcoTov et? <j)i\[av yrjv a(j)iKoivTO, they vowed

to offer thank-offerings whenever they should first come to

a friendly land; el tl<: ttoXi? eTrt "roKiv aTparevcroi, eV!Digitized by Microsoft®

§526. MOODS IN DEPENDENT ASSEETIONS, ETC. 289

ravTTjv eKJyrj Uvai, si qua civitas contra [aliarn] eivitatem

pugnatura esset, contra hanc se dixit iturum.

In this case, however, the Indicative also is admis-sible according to § 520, but never the Subjunctive evenafter a Principal tense, its employment being limited to

the case mentioned in § 527.

§ 524. 5. The Potential Optative (with dv) may occur

in Dependent, in the same sense as in Independent,

sentences (§ 516) to denote something as merely pos-

sible: \e7t0, oTO TovTo oiiK av ryevoiTo, I say that this

probably could not happen.

The further use of the Moods in Dependent sentences

is treated of specially in what foUows according to the

different kinds of Dependent sentences.

I.

—

Moods in Dependent Assektions and vs

Dependent Intekkogative Sentences.

§ 525. Sentences containing Dependent assertions are

those which annex the substance of a speech or opinion

to a Principal sentence by means of the conjunctions,

on, ai<;, that ; Dependent or indirect Interrogative sen-

tences are connected with the Principal sentence by

means of el, if ; v6repov...r] \utrum...an'\, whether...or (in

double questions), or Interrogative Pronouns (§ 214) or

Adverbs.

§ 526. 1. The Indicative

is used in those sentences, which when conceived inde-

pendently would have the Indicative, and thus

a) when the leading sentence has a Principal tense

the Indicative must be used (§ 521) : dire fxoi, rlva

r^va/MTiv e-xei^, tell me, what opinion you have (direct:

TtW lyvwjXTjv %6f?) [Lat. die mihi, quam sententiam

habeas'];

b) when the leading sentence has an Historical tense

tlie Indicative may be used (§ 522) : elirov, rjvTtva

fvmfi/qv elxov, d&^iti^m^ Mmim^<^'>n haberem ; rjKev

u

290 MOODS IN DEPENDENT ASSEETIONS, ETC. § 527

ar/yiWwv tk, ta? 'EXareta KarelXTjTTTM, some one came-

bringing the news that Matea was taken (direct: 'EX-

dreia KaTeLXTjiTTat).

Besides the Indicative, the Optative also is in this-

case admissible, § 528, a.

§ 527. 2. The Subjunctive

cannot occur at all in Dependent assertions, and in

Dependent Interrogative sentences only if, when con-

ceived as independent, they woidd necessarily have th&

Subjunctive, and thus

a) when the leading sentence has a Principal tense

the Subjunctive must remain : ôv\evojj,ai, ttm? o-e

d-TToSpa), I am planning how to escape from you (direct

according to § 511 : Troi? ce diroBpo)) [delibero, quo modo

te effugiam'l ;

5) when the leading sentence has an Historical tense

the Subjunctive may sometimes occur : iôvXevofirjv,

TTfti? ere drrohpS) ; but the Optative is more frequent in

this case than the Subjunctive (§ 528, b). The Sub-

junctive in Dependent Interrogative sentences accord-

ingly is to be translated by may or shall.

§ 528. 3. The Optative (without av)

may occur in such sentences

:

a) as a substitute for the Indicative (§ 526, b), i. e.

when there is an Historical tense in the leading sen-

tence, in case the Dependent sentence, if conceived inde-

pendently, ought to have the Indicative : el-rrov, ^vriva

ryvmfjbijv exoifj-t (direct : el'xpv) [Lat. dixi, quam senten-

tiam habereni] ; eyvcocrav oti Kevo'i 6 <f)6ôv eiTj, they hnew

that the fear was groundless (direct : 6 j>6Po<s Kevb<} ^v),

comp. § 523.

b) as a substitute for the Subjunctive (§ 527, 5), i. e.

when an Historical tense occurs in the leading sen-

tence, in case the Dependent sentence, if conceived inde-

pendently, ought to have the Subjunctive : iôvXevo/irjv,

jTsi? a-e diTohpai'qv (direct : ttco? ae aTroSpo)) [Lat. delibe-

§530. MOODS IN SENTENCES OF PURPOSE. 291

ralam, quo modo te effugererri], I was refieeting how 1should escape you.

In the second case the Optative is to be translated

by should.

Obs.—Whicli of the two meanings belongs to the Optative is

generally perceived from the connexion quite as easily as in the

Latin nesciebat quid faceret, he knew not what he did or whathe should do.

§ 529. The Optative as a substitute for the Indicative is found

also without a Conjunction in the continuation of a direct speech

:

eXeyov ttoXXoI, oti Travrhs a^ta Xeyet (§ 526 &), xîfioiv yap eoy Koi

oixaSe diroirXelv oi bwarou c'iri, many said that he says what is worthy

of the utmost regard, for that it was winter, and that it was impossible

to sail home.

On the Infinitive in assertions, § 560. On the Participle in asser-

tions, § 593.

Mixed examples

:

TlvOa/ôpof; 6 Adfiw; irpooTO'; ev To2<;"E)\X7]a-iv iroXfirjcrev

ehrelv, on to fiev aaifia redv^êrat (§ 291), 57 Be ^vxvavaTTTacra (§ 316, 5) ol'X^'^ceTai addvaro'; Kot dr/Tjpoj';,

Pythagoras the Samian was the first among the Greeks

who ventwred to maintain that the body will he dead, but the

soul, flying upward, will depart immortal and ever young ;

®e[jbi(rT0KKri<; via en wv eXeyev, m? KadevSeiv avrov oi/c

iarq to tov MtXTtaSov Tpoiraiov, Themistocles, when still

young, used to say, that the trophy of Miltiades would not

let him sleep ; 'A-jropai, tov (§ 214, Obs. 1) irpwTov fjuvrja-Oai,

I am at a loss what to mention first; 01 'ETriSafivioi tov

deov eirripovTo, el irapaholev K.opivOioi'i rrjv iroXiv, the

JEpidamnians ashed the god whether they should give uptheir city to the Corinthians.

II.

—

Moods in Sentences of Purpose, orFinal Sentences.

§ 530. Sentences which express an object or a purpose

are introduced by the Conjunctions 'iva, (Horn, otppa),

«9, oTTw?, in order that, that, in order to, fii], or otto)? /iif,

iva firj, in order thf^^n^ by Microsoft®

292 MOODS IN SENTENCES OP PUEPOSE. §531,

As such sentences express something which is ex'

pected to happen, they take :

§ 531. 1. The Subjunctive

a) necessarily/, when the leading sentence has a Prin-

cipal tense : eh Kaipov riKeK, ottcds t^? Sikt?? dKova-rj<;,

you have come at the right time to hear the trial \in

tempore odes, ut eausam audias\

b) more rarely, when the leading sentence has an His-

torical tense : eh Kaipbv ^/ce?, otto)? t^? S/kt;? aKova-ri<;

^aderas ut audires^ ; eVtViySe? tre ov/c Tjyeipov, iva co?

rjBicTTa Stdyrj^, I purposely did not wake you thai you

might pass your time as pleasantly as possible.

Ohs.—The Conjunctions as, ovas, sometimes have av (Hom. xe',

KcV) added to them in this sense : tovt avro vvv diSaax, ottcos

hv iKfxada, explain that very thing now that I may learn it.

The purpose is thereby represented as one whose attaiimient

depends on conditions (as here, if you explain it). Comp. § 554.

§ 532. 2. The Optative

as a regular substitute for the Subjunctive (§ 531, 5),

when the leading sentence has an Historical tense : iirl-

T?;Se? ere ovk ifyeipov, "va a><; rjBocTTa Siar^oi'; ; Hom.'Tvheihrj Atofi'^Bei IlaXXa? 'A6i^v7] SuKe fievo<; Kal ddpcro?

"v eKBrj\o<; fierd irda-iv 'Apyeioicrt, yevoiTO, to Tydides

Diomedes Pallas Athene gave strength and courage that

he might be distinguished amrnig all the Argives [JDiomedi

Minerva animos dedit, ut insignis fieret inter cunctos

Argivos'].

Ois.—The distinction between the Subjunctive and Optative in

sentences of purpose after an Historical tense consists in the

rarer Subjunctive expressing the sentence more as an object or

demand that may be attained, the Optative, more as the thought

or conception of the acting person (comp. §§ 521, 522).

On the Future Indicative with oTrtos, §§ 500, 553. On the hypo-thetical Indicative in Sentences of Purpose, § 500. On the

non-intended conseriuence (coot*), § 565.

§ 533. Sentences expressive o! fear introduced by jiij (Lat. ne),

or firj oi (Lat. ut") follow the construction of sentences of purpose

Ccomp. § 512). They have the Subjunctive necessarily when depen-Digitized by Microsoft®

§536. MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 293

dent on a Principal tense : oi ô(3ei,fj-ri ^Sij jrpcafivTepos f/s ; do you

not fear to he already too old [nonne times, ne aetate provectior sis] ?

The Optative is commonly used after an Historical tense : itjyofiovvro,

jif) n irddoi, theyfeared he might suffer somewhat [vereiamtur ne quidilli accideret] ; tut not unfrequently also the Subjunctive : oi

'Adrivaloi Toiis ^vfijiaxovs eSfSUa'av, fifj aiTO(rrStcri.v, the Athenians

were alarmed lest the allies shmdd revolt (comp. § 519, 5, Ohs. 2).

Obs.—fir) and oTrtos f»^ after verbs of fearing seldom have the

Future Indicative, oftener the Perfect Indicative when the fear

refers to a completed action : ôôvfieBa, /irj ifiipoTipav fniaprfj-

Kafi,fv, ivefear loe have failed in hoth.

Mixed Examples

:

TOVTO ov irpoTjprjfjyai Xeyeov, Iva Tiaiv vjjloiv wKeydavaijiai,

I have not chosen to say this in order to be hateful to some

of you ; KOjOo? <f>l\av Sera BelaOai, to? avvepyoii'; e')(oi,

Cyrus thought friends necessary that he might have

helpers ; AiSoixa, fir) iiriXadoifieda rrj^ oUahe ohov, I am-

afraid lest we should forget the way home ; 4>iXt7r7ro? ev

<f>oâ) ?iv, fir] eKcpvyoi to, irpdyfiara avTov, Philip was in

fear lest the affairs might escape him.

in.

—

The Moods in Conditional Sentences.

§ 534. Conditional or hypothetical sentences belong

to the Correlative sentences (§ 519, 4). The Protasis

states a condition under which something is to occur

;

the Apodosis states that something happens under a

certain condition. Both sentences together form a

Hypothetical Period.

§ 535. In the Protasis el (Horn, al), iav (i. e. el-av),

contracted to ffv, or av (Horn, ei Ke-v), if, are employed

;

in the Apodosis the particle av is sometimes used to

show that it is true only under certain conditions.

In Greek there are four principal forms of the Hypo-

thetical Period

:

§ 536. 1. in the Protasis el with the Indicative, in

the Apodosis the Indicative without av, or the Impera-,.

' Digitized by Microsoft®^

294 MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. § 537.

This form of the Hypothetical Period is employed

when the relation between the Protasis and Apodosis is

to be represented as one absolutely necessary, actual,

without any opinion being expressed by the speaker as

to the probability or improbability of the case : el 6eol

elalv, ea-Ti km epya 6ewv, if there are gods, there are alsi

worhs of oods ; aol el irrj dWy BeSoKrai, "Keye koX BiBacrKe,

if you have any different opinion, speak and explain.

Ois.—All tenses may br used in this form, consequently also

Historical tenses. If these latter occur, care must be taken not

to confound this first principal form with the second : e^rjv croi

amivai ix t^s TroXetor, (I /x^ rjpetrKov <rot oi vd/ioi, you were free

to leave the eity, if its laws did not please you (in the present

:

€^ecrn—el fir) apeaKova-L) ; a ri tS>v Seovrav ewpd^dri, tov Kaipov,

ovK ip,i (jiTfa-iv ainov yeyevrjtrdai, if anything right was done, he

says that the occasion, not I, was the cause. A sure sign of the

second principal form is the particle av in the apodosis.

§ 537. 2. in the Protasis, el with the Indicative of an

Historical tense ; in the Apodosis, av with the Indicative

of an Historical tense.

This form of the Hypothetical Period is applied whenthe relation between the Protasis and Apodosis is to be

represented indeed as one quite necessary, but at the

same time neither of them as real. The Indicative in

such conditional sentences is called tJie Hypothetical

Indicative, which, therefore, always denotes the opposite

to reality (comp. § 515).

In such Conditional Sentences, a sentence contra-

dictory of the Protasis may always be supplied in

thought.

Hence the Protasis may have the following forms

:

§ 538. a) The Imperfect is used when a condition is

stated as not existing at present: el tov ^IXnnrov raSiKuia irpuTTOvTa ecopojv, a-(f>oSpa av Oav/xaarov ^yovur/v

avTov, ifI saw (were to see) Philip acting justly, Ishould

deem him very admirable. Here we may oppose to the

Protasis the thoug^^^^^.^^^^w r^ SIkuiu irpdr-

^ 541. MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 295

Tovra, but now I see Mm not act justly. The verb of this

•contradiction to be supplied is in the Present.

To this form corresponds in Latin the Imperfect Sub-

junctive : si viderem, putarem.

§ 539. h) The Aorist Indicative is used when a con-

dition is stated which did not take place in the past

:

airedavov av, el /xr) rj rwv rpiaKOVTa ap^r) KareXiBrj, Ishould have died, if the government of the thirty had not

ieen overthrown.

Here we may oppose to the Protasis the thought

xareXvOri Si, but it was overthrown. The verb of this

contradiction to be supplied is in the Aorist.

To this form corresponds in Latin the Pluperfect Sub-

junctive : periissem, nisi dominatio eversa esset.

§ 540. c) The Pluperfect is used when a non^completed

condition is stated : el tovto d)fio\6y7]To ^fuv, paSlco^ av

SoefiaxoiJ'e6a,ifinthiswe had been agreed, toesliould easily

carry the contest through.

Here we may oppose to the Protasis the thought

atO^ ou% mn,o')J)'y7}Tai, but we have not been agreed. The

verb of this contradiction to be supplied is in the

Perfect.

To this form corresponds in Latin the Pluperfect Sub-

junctive : si inter nos convenisset.

§ 541. The Apodosis to a Hypothetical Protasis of

this kind may have either the Imperfect or the Aorist

Indicative, or the Pluperfect with dv [Hom. Ke-v], and

that quite independently as to which of the three tenses

occurs in the Protasis. In this case, also, the Imperfect

corresponds to the Latin Imperfect Subjunctive; the

Aorist and Pluperfect, to the Latin Pluperfect Sub-

junctive : el TOTe eôrjdijcrafiev, ovk av ^vco'xêi, vvv 6

îXtTTTTo?, if we then had rendered help Philip would

not now be troublesome; el avrapKr] to, ^jf7)<pLa-/u,aTa rjv,

•îXuiriTO'; waXai ay iSeSaiKei SIktjv, si plebiscita per se

suffieerent, Philip'^dudum poenam dedisset.

296 MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. § 5*2.

§ 542. Ohs. 1.—The particle av is sometimes omitted in the

apodosis : jia-xuvofofv, el iirb irdKefiiov ye ovtos e^T\'ira.rri8r]v, I shoidd

be ashamed, if I liad ieen deceived by an enemy.

§ 543. Obs. 2.—The Imperfect sometimes refers to a past time

when the continuance of an action is to be made particularly em-phatic : el TOVT erroiei (not iirotria-ev') eKaaros, evUav av, if each

had been acting so, they would be victorious. On the other hand,

the Aorist is sometimes used referring to present time, when the

rapid commencement of an action is to be indicated : e'i tie a-e fjpeTo,

n hi aireRpivu) (not mreKpivav) ; if any one asked you, what answer

would you give ?

§ 544. Obs. 3.—A Hypothetical Apodosis may stand alone, the

Protasis being supplied in thought or deduced from the context :

efiovXoixrjv av, I should like (ei livvafajv, if I could, dared') ; St' i/jias

avTois iTokai av diro\a>\eiTe, you would long since have perished

through yourselves (i. e. if left to yourselves).

§ 545. 3. in the Protasis lav {fjv, av, Horn, el' Ke-v)

with the Subjunctive ; in. the Apodosis the Indicative of

a Principal tense or the Imperative.

This form of the Hypothetical Period is used to

express or prescribe something in regard to a case that

is to be taken for granted and expected. It is admissible

only in connexion with present and future time (§ 521),

and is met with chiefly in maxims or proverbs : Set

Ta jSekTiara avrl twv ^Becov, av fjur] crvvafKJjoTepa i^,

Xafi^dveiv, ycni must choose what is best rather than what

is agreeable, when both together are not allowed; av to,

TrapeXrjXvOoTa /jlvt]fj,ov€vrji;, afietvov irepi twv fieWovrcov

^ovXevcret,, if you remember the past, you will judge better

about the future.

Obs. 1.—The Aorist Subjunctive in such conditional sentences

often comes very near to the Latin Future Perfect: veos av

irovr](rps, yjjpas e§eis ev6a\es, si Juvenis laboraveris, senectute'in

habebis jucundam.

Obs. 2.—We find el with the Subjunctive in Homer, and occasion-

ally also in Attic writers, in the same sense as eav, el av and el

Ke-v : Soph. avSpa, Ke'l Tis 3 <ro<f)6s, to fxavOdveiv irdXX', ala-xpov

oi&ev, for a man, even if he is wise, to learn much, is no dis-

grace.

Obs. 3.—The Subjunctive in Conditiorwi sentences is akin to the

S 548. MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 297

Subjunctive of Challenging (§ 509). The spealser thereby puts

or demands an assertion, to which, for the present, he requires

the hearer's assent : tovto iav a"K07r^re, evpTja-cre, or Trdvratv

apiara f^fi, if you consider this you will find that it is the lest

of all ; which is almost identical with the challenge : consider

this, &o. [comp. Lat. Naturam expellas furca, tamen usque

recurref]. In a similar way the Imperative sometimes takes the

I)lace of a Hypothetical Protasis : Poet. ttKovth tc yap Kar

oiKov, ei jSouXct, fieya Ka\ ^ Tvpavvov a")(r]ii ^X^^> ^^^ ^*^"^V

TovTOiv ri j(alp€tv, rSXV eyo) Kairvov cKias ovk hv irpiai^riVj forbe rich, if you will, at home, and live in the splendour of agreat ruler; hut if joy he wanting to it, I would not give the

shadow of smohefor the rest. (Comp. § 549.)

§ 546. 4. in the Protasis el with the Optative ; in the

Apodosis av (Ke-v) with the Optative.

This form of the Hypothetical Period is employed

intentionally to represent what is said as quite uncertain,

as merelypossible, as a merely conceived case : el tc^; kskt-t)-

fiivoi; elr) irkovrov, 'Xpauro he avTa> fj,rj, ap av evBatfiovol

;

should any one possess wealth and not make use of it

(suppose any one possessed), would he be happy P Comp.

§§ 516, 517, Ohs. 2. The Present or Perfect Suhjunc-

tive in Latin corresponds to this form: si possideat (or

possederit), num beatus sit?

Ohs.—^Tn Homer the Protasis of such a period also sometimes

has K€-v or av : et rovTa Ke Xdôifiev, dpoifiedd kcv Kktos etrffkov,

if we should get these two, we should get glorious fame. TheAttic writers very rarely use av in the Protasis.

§ 547. Since et with the Optative intimates that a

thing is merely possible, it expresses in reference to the

past what possibly might have been, i. e., a repeated case

(comp. § 494, Obs. 1) ; the Apodosis then usually has

the Indicative : e'i ttov iêXavvoi 'AaTvaiy7j<;, e'^' iinrov

j^pvcro'âXivov 'Trepirjye tov K.vpov, if ever Astyages rode

out (might ride out) he tooTc Cyrus with him on a horse

with a golden bridle.

§ 548. 61 with the Optative in the oratio obliqua, takes

the place, accordfegf/tec/ §>528jrooifft€i' with the Ind. (1).

298 MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. §549

or idv with the Subjunctive (3), when a Hypothetical

sentence depends on a Historical tense : fjBei, K.vpo<;, on€0 Ti jJ-axV^ TTore ê-qaoi,, e/c t&v (plXcov avrS TrapatTTaTa^

"XtjiTTeov ett}. Gyrus knew that, if ever any battle should

be necessary, Jte would have to take his supporters from his

own friends. In direct language, Cyrus would say, ^v

TTore Serjcrr) or el' Trore Seijcrei—XTjirriov iari. If in its

relation to the time of the governing verb, the condition

lies in the Future, the Future Optative is used. Weseldom, in this case, find idv with the Subjunctive.

The following general remarks also are to be observed

in regard to Conditional sentences

:

§ 549. 1. The two members of a Hypothetical Period

are not so dependent on each other, as that the one

necessarily requires a special form in the other. AProtasis of one form may, on the contrary, be joined

with the Apodosis of another form. It occurs very

frequently that a Protasis is in the first or third form,

and the Apodosis in the fourth, in order to represent the

Assertion which it contains as merely possible: el tovto

A,6'7et?, dfjbaprdvoi^ av, if you mean this, you would be in

error ; iav iOeXijarjTe irpdrrecv aîa><; vfiaiv avr&v, i(Ta><i

av fxkrja Ti KTijcraLcrOe dryadov, if you should be disposed

to act in a manner worthy of yourselves, you wouldperhaps

£ain great good. The connexion of a Protasis of the

second form with an Apodosis of the fourth is rare:

Horn. Kai vv Kev ev6' diroXoiro dva^ dvSpwv Klvela^,

€i IJUT) ap o^v voTjcre Ato? Ov^drqp 'A(f)poSiTrj, and nowassuredly Aeneas, ruler of men, would there have perished,

if Zeus' daughter Aphrodite had not kept a sharp look

out.

§ 550. 2. A Hypothetical Period may partly or entirely be in-sorted in another sentence. The most peculiar, in this respect, are

sentences expressing a purpose, when connected with Conditionalsentences : d yap &(j>e\ov oioiVc dvm o'c jroXXoi tcl niyiara Kaxaeêpya^fjOm, Iva oioiVe â-av aS koi dyaSa Ta fieyiara, I would thatihe many were capaMe£^/#g^,ifi'/4t<Mfc©98^^ greatest evil, in order

552. MOODS IN RELATIVE SENTENCES. 299

hat they might also on the other hand le capable of (effecting) the

rreatest good (instead of : for if they were capable, they would also

)e capable). The Hypothetical Indicative here denotes the im-jracticable purpose (§§ 515, 537).

On the Hypothetical Participle, §§ 583, 595. On the Hypothetical

Infinitive, § 575, dtc.

MiTxd Examples.

Et viro <f>!Xc0V ide\ei<; a/yairacrOai, rovv <j)i\ov^ evep-

yeTTjTeov, if you wish to he loved by your friends, youmust benefit your friends ; Et to eêiv ovtco'; wcnrep ro

Kafiâveiv '^Sv "qv, 'ttoXv av Biiipepov evSai/xovia ol ttXov-

aioi TMv "TrevijTQyv, if having were as sweet as getting, the

rich would be greatly distinguished above the poor in

blessedness ; Poet. Et iraa-b ravro koKov ecpv croipov ff

afjLa, ovK ?jv av a/i(J3iX£KT0<; avOpwTroi,'; epi^, if the same

thing were to all beautiful and wise, people would have no

bitter disputes ; TiXdrcov Trpof nva rwv iraiScov, fjiefiacTTi-

ycoao av, e^rj, el fir) ojpyiôfi/rjv, Plato said to one of his

servants, you would have beenflogged if I were not angry ;

'Eaz/ iJjEV t4 vfuv hoKW dXrjde^ Xiyeiv, ^wofioXoyâaTe, if

you think I utter any truth, agree with me; Et nroKK

dvBpMV ar/a9cov yevoiTO, 'ir€pi/Md')(r]Tov av eiTj ro fifj dp'êiv,

wiirep vvvl to dpêiv, if there were a state (consisting) of

good men, it would be an object of contention to avoid

ruling (how one might not rule), as now to rule; 'Hi/

Toiv OTpaTicoTcov So'Yjia, ei ti<;, oiroTe r) arparid iîoi,

IBla \r)LtpiTO, STjfiocria elvai rd Xr}(j)6evTa, it was a decision

of the soldiers, if, when the army went out, any one took

booty by himself, what he took was common property (direct

Idv Xrjt^rjTai—Br/fjioaia eara)).

IV.

—

The Moods in Eblative Sentences.

§ 551. Relative sentences are those which are con-

nected with others by means of Eelative pronouns

[§§ 213, 214, 216), or Eelative adverbs (§ 217). ,

§ 552. In Eelative sentences all moods are possible in

the same meanin^/fisei^yiMfie^flient or hypothetical

300 MOODS IN EELATIYB SENTENCES. § 553.

sentences : ovk e^^to 6 n -n-pSirov Xd^a, I have (know) not

what I shall take first (§ 511, comp. § 527) ; opw ae Siw-

KovTa a)v fir] rvxofi, I see you pursuing what, Ipray, you

may rwt attain; (§ 514) ; v/xet? eo-re -Kap aiv av KaXkia-Tci

TK TovTo fidOot, you are they from whom any one might

best learn this (§ 516) ; ovk fjdeXov Xeyeiv Trpo^ v/j,d<;

Toiavra oV av v/jllv 7]BiaT rjv aKoveiv, I did not wish to

say to you such things as might he pleasantest to you to

hear. Comp. § 544.

Ois.—Sometimes, especially in tlie Poets, Eelative sentences have

the Optative without S.v in an indefinite assertion, very muchlike the potential Optative vrith av : ov nSKis a-rrjo-fie, rovSe

Xprj Aveiv, whom the State fnay appoint, him we must listen to

(comp. § 517, Ols. 2).

§ 553. On the Future Indicative in Eelative sentences

expressive of purpose, see § 500. 6wco<;, how, that, in

order that, very frequently has the Future Indicative

(yet, according to § 531, also the Subjunctive of other

tenses) after verbs which denote looking after, earing for,

striving, avoiding : aKOirei, otto)? to, 'irpdryfiaTa awO'^crerai,

see that the affairs (the state) shall be safe ; Set e/c iravTo<;

Tpoirov diravra dvSpa tovto irapaaKevd^ecrdai,, otto)? <u?

aotpcoTaro^ ecrrai, every one ought to take care in every

way to (that he shall) become as wise as possible.

Ohs.—oircDf is often used in challenges and warnings in such a

manner that the governing sentence has to be supplied : ojrms

TrapeVci els Trjv etmepav, tliat you shall lie here for the evening

(more completely somewhat Uke : a-xoVft ms-ais, see that you,

&C.) ; OTTfflS Trepi tov iroXefiou fir^hiv epe'is, that you shaU say

nothing about the war (supply something like : (jivKdrrov, take

care).

§ 554, The particle dv (Horn. Ke-v) is added to the

lielative when the Eelative sentence expresses some-

thing merely conceived, so that the assertion contained

in the leading sentence is true only when what is asserted

in the Eelative sentence really occurs. Such a Eela-

tive is called a Hypothetical Eelative. The HypotheticalDigitized by Microsoft®

j 555. MOODS IK EELATIVE SENTENCES. 301

Relative with av in general is used only where the verb

In the leading seutence is in a principal tense, and is then

iccompanied by the Subjunctive. Such a Eelative sen-

tence may easily be changed to a Hypothetical sentence

3f the third form (§ 545) : nrav 6 n av jxiXKy'i ipeiv

irpoT^pov ejn.uKO'rrei rfj ypm/irj, whatever you may be about

to say (= edv ri ipeiv fiiXKr;';), examine it first in your

mind ; in which it is left quite undecided, whether one

wishes to say anything ; sTrea-de oirr) av rts ^yriTac,

follow wherever any one may lead you {= edv rt? irrj

^yi]Tai), where you must first wait to know whether any

one leads.

Obs. 1.—As the Eelative is generalised by the addition of &v, it

may often in English be translated by ever (Lat. cunque) : 6s

av TovTav n Spa TeBvara, guicvngue horum aliqwid fecerit,

perito ; Xeye oer &v de^ys, say whatever you wish (comp. iav

Ti BeXjjS Xe'ye).

Obs. 2.—In the same sense the Poets use the Subjunctive with a

Belative without av (or xe'-v) : tS>v 8e Tnffiovav /ioKiora Xmrova-'

at tâvacr aidaiperoi, the sufferings afflict most which appear

self-caused (comp. d with the Subj., § 545, Obs. 2). Homerhas also the Fut. Ind. with /ce and the Eelative (§ 500 Obs.).

§ 555. If the verb in the leading sentence is an IRs-

torical tense or an Optative, the Eelative without av

with the Optative is used, quite in the same sense, as a

substitute for the Subjunctive (§§ 522, 523). These

lêlative sentences take the place of those mentioned in

§ 554, in the same way as the fourth kind of Con-

ditional sentences takes the place of the third (§ 548)

:

sKeXevcrev avTol<; eTrecrdai, oiroi Tt? '^yolro, he bade them

follow wherever any one might lead. Thus we read in

Homer : 6v he k iyav dirdvevOe fid'îj'i eOeKovra vo-ija-o)

ULfivdêtv, ov ol eireiTa apKiov ia-a-etrai <f)vyieiv Kvva<; ^8'

oiaivov';, but whomsoever IWMy see inclined to remain away

from the battle, to him there shall be no security of escaping

logs and birds (i. e., death), but : ovrwa fiev âcriXfja

val eôxov avSpa Ki^xeirj, rov 8' dr/avo2<; eireea-a-Lv epr]Tv-

TacTKe, but whateve^.^^^^x^^'<j^.hing^r prominent man he

302 MOODS IN TBMPOEAL SENTENCES. §556.

might meet with, him he soothed with gentle words. Horn,

ft)? airokono kuI aXKo<i o tk Toiavrd ye piôi, so ma^ any

other 'perish who shall do such things (but 8? av pe^rj—aTToXea-Ba)).

Ohs. 1.—This Optative often implies repetition, ovriva Kixîxj, as

often as he might find one (§ 547).

Ohs. 2.—The Subjunctive and the Relative with av occur only

exceptionally after an Historical tense, and the Optative with

the Eelative and av, in the same case (comp. § 546, Ohs.}.

V.

—

The Moods in Temporal Sentences.

§ 556. Temporal Sentences, i. e. those which indicate

time, are properly only a particular kiad of Eelative

senteaces, and foUow them almost entirely in the use of

the Moods. The particles of time employed in such

sentences, are : eVei, eVetS)?, to? (when, after, as) ; ore,

oTTore, fjViKa, when, as; &)?, e'sre, fii-xpi-<;, till; irplv,

before ; in Horn. 6j>pa, as long as, till ; rjfio^, when ; and

besides the Eelative expressions : a^ ov, ef ov, since

;

iv a>, whilst ; a%pt ov, et? o, until.

In these sentences the Indicative is used when any-

thing actual is stated; the Optative may supply the

place of the Indicative in indirect speech after an His-

torical tense (§ 522).

§ 557. When a Temporal sentence states something

merely conceived, occurring only conditionally, the par-

ticle of time, like the Eelative, has dv (Ke-v) joined to it

(§ 554). This occurs usually only when the leading

sentence has a principal tense, and the Subjunctive mustthen follow. By combination with av, are formed the

Hypothetical particles of time : orav, oirorav, enredv, or

eTTrjv, eireihdv : iTreiBav iravra dKovcrrjTe, Kpivare, wlien

ye have heard all, judge; eto? av am^rfTai to aicdfo';, Tore

Xpv Kol KvêpvijTTjv KoX TrdvT dvSpa irpodvfiov^ ehai, ad

long as the vessel is safe, the sailor, the pilot, and every meought to be zealous.

Ohs.—Here also av is sometimes wanting (§ 554, Ohs. 2).

§558. MOODS IN TEMPOEAL SENTENCES. 303^

§ 558. If the leading yerb is in an Historical tense, theparticle of time with the Optative without av occurs in

the same sense : eXeryev oti, hreihh irdvTa aKovcreiavy

Kpiveoav.

Obs. 1.—Here, too, the Optative often implies repetition (comp.

§ 554, Obs., and § 547), so that ore, djrdi-e, tVe/ with the

Optative may he translated hy, " as often as," " whenever :"

OTTore oi EXXT/veff rots TToKefiiois iirioiev, padicos a7T^<\>evyov, as-

often as the Hellenes went up to the enemy, the latter readily

fled.

Obs. 2.—^Here, too, exceptionally, av and the Suhjunotive some-times occur after an Historical tense (§ 555, Obs. 2).

On irpiv with the Iniinitive, § 565.

Mixed Hxamples of Relative and Temporal sentences.

'Tfiel'i Trdvra Xoyicrdfievoi ravra 'êcpoTovelS', 6 Ti avvfitv SoKrj fjbdXiirra <7Vfi(f>epeiv ry iroXei, after havinff

weighed all this, vote for what you thinh will most benefit

the state ; 01 t&v âpfidpcov WTTret?, Srivi evT%i^-)(dvoi,ev

^XXrjvi, irdvra'i e/creivov, the cavalry of the barbarians,

whatever Greek they met, hilled them all; M.e')(pi<;

av iyo) Sjkco, ai (nrovSal /jLevovTcov, till I come, let the

treaty remain; Poet. Mjjttot' iTraiv>ârj<;, Trplv av el8fj<;

dvSpa cra<f>r]va><;, opyfiv /cal pvdfiov Ka\ rpo-irov oWt? av §,

never praise a man before you clearly know his temper, andbearing, and character ; 'ETretSi; n ifKpdryoiev, dviaravro

Kal i-TTopevoirro, after having eaten something, they rose and

proceeded ; 'O XcoKpdTr]'; roii'i avvovTa^ eTrolei ov fiovov

OTTore VTTO T&v dvdpdyjrcov opavTO, wnk'yeijQaL twv dhiKwv

teal alcT'Xpwv, oKka, Kal OTrore iv eprifjbLa elev, Socrates

caused his disciples to abstain from what was unjust and

shameful, not only when they were seen by men, but alsa

when they were in solitude.

304 THE INFINITIVE. § 559

Chap. XXII.

—

The Infinitive.

A) Tlie use of the Infinitive gefMrally.

§ 559. 1. The Infinitive is a verbal noun (§ 225, 5)

which, as such, has certain properties in common with a

verb, others with a noun.

With a noun the Infinitive agrees

a) in expressing the action of a verb in general, like

the nomina actionis (§ 342) : iroielv, Trpdrretv, doing;

comp. -TToiTjai';, Tr/jfi^t?.

b) in the fact that it may have the article like nouns

:

TO iroieiv, TO irpdrTeiv, the doing; comp. ^ iroLi](TUi, r]

With the verb, on the other hand, the Infinitive

agrees

a) in its power of denoting different times: Troieiv,

•TroLrjaai, treiroi'qKevai, and of being formed from the

Active, the Middle, and the Passive : iroiriaai, n-oirjira-

ffdai, 'TTOiTjOrjvai.

i) in being occasionally joined with dv, and thereby

sharing the functions of mood (§ 575, &c.).

c) in governing the same case as the verb to whichit belongs : Troieiv rd SiovTa, doing ymir duty ; '^p'i^crdai

Toi? oTrXot?, making use of arms.

d) in being qualified, like the finite verb, by adverbs,

never by adjectives: KaXSi^ Trpdrrew, doing nobly, but

KaXr) -Trpd^K, a noble action.

2. The Infinitive is used very extensively in Greek.

Very often, besides the more definite mode of expres-

sion, by means of a Conjunction with a finite verb, the

less definite, by means of the Infinitive is admissible.

§ 560. The Infinitive serves to complete and qualify

different sorts of verbs, viz. :

1. those which express the occasion, capability,

modality of an action : SvvavTai direkOelv, tltey can go


S562. THE INFINITIVE. 305

away ; jieliôv ti exet elirelv, he has smnething greater to

say (can say); Poet, oiiroi, crvvexOeLv aXKa a-viM^Ckeiv

e(f>vv, I am horn not to Join in hating but in loving ; dpô-fiai Xiyeiv, I begin to speak ; eTriTpiirco aoi, woi.eiv 6 ti- av0ovXr], I leave you to do whatever you wish ;

2. such verbs as denote appearance, perception,

opinion : So/cet? ajxapTelv, you seem to have erred ;

3. such verbs as denote striving after something, im-pelling towards, or frightening, deterring, preventing,

something : fir] cnrevBe ifkovTelv, do not hasten to he

rich ; Horn. KeXeai p,e fwOrjo-aaOai, you bid me to speak

;

•7ravTe<i ahovvTUi toik; Oeoii^ ra âvXa aTTOTpeireiv,

omnes homines precantur deos, ut mala avertant ; j)oôv-

fj,ai SieXeyxeiv ere, I am afraid of refuting you ; eXeyov

aoi /MT) rya/j^lv, dixi tibi, ne uxorem duceres ; rt? avrov

KofKvaei Sevpo âSlêtv ; quis eum impediet, quominushue veniat f aveôKKeTo fiot, SiaXey^drjvai, he put off con-

versing with me.

§ 561. Even the purpose of an action may be ex-

pressed by the mere Infinitive, as in English by the

Infinitive with to or in order to: S€vo<f>S)v to i^/Mo-v

Tov tTTpaTevfiarov KaTeKiire ^vXarreiv to aTpuTOTreBov,

JCenophon left half the army behind to guard the camp ;

•7rapi')(a) i/j,avTov rm laTpm Tefiveiv koI KUietv, I give

myself up to the physician to cut and burn (me) ; iTLelv

BtBovat TLvi, to give any one (something) to drink.

Ohs.—Nqt only with verts of this kind, but also with those men-tioned in § 560, this Infinitive has a much wider application

in Ilonaer : apuTTevetTue fudxecrdai, he used to he tlie first in

fighting ; da-l koI olSe rdS' elnefiev, these too, then, are (able)

to say this ; îj Uvat, he started to go ; ^vverjKe ^dêcdai, he

urged (them) to fight.

§ 562. The Infinitive, serves to complete or qualify

adjectives of different kinds, partly in the sense of the

English Infinitive with to, partly corresponding to the

Latin supine in u : 'xaXeirov evpeiv, difficult to find [diffi-

cile inventu]; oiK^jt'^^pjîî^êâa-dai, a house very

X

306 THE INFINITIVE. §563.

pleasant to live in ; afto? eo-rt TrXi^ya? Xaêlv, Tie deserves

to get blows ; o^vrarol iare yvavao to, fnjdevra, you are

very Iceen in perceiving what is said ; S€ivb<; T^yeiv,

powerful in speaking ; 6 xpovo^ ^payv'i d^t&j? Sir]yija-ar

aOai TO, rrrpaxOevra, the time is short for worthily nar-

rating what has happened.

Ohs.—In Homer such Infinitives are particularly frequent : ixeya

Koi ia-aofievoiai, TwBia-Bai, great also for posterity to learn

;

6eUiv dvefiotrriv ofioioi, like the winds in running ; so with some

substantives : duvfw. iSea-dat, a wonder to see.

On otoffj oiosTe, and o(tos, with the Inf., § GOl.

§ 5G3. The Infinitive, as in Englisli and Latin, is

used as the Subject of a sentence to which the predicate

is a neuter adjective, a substantive, or an intransitive

verb : Trdcnv aSelv 'âXeTrov, to please all is difficult

;

KivSvvo'; iartv riTTaaOai, there is danger of being worsted ;

crov epyov Xeyetv, speaking is your business.

§ 564. The infinitive is used in a freer way, without depending

on a particular word, with and without the particle as, in several

phrases almost like a free Accusative (§ 404) : as emelv, so to speak

;

efio\ SoKcIv, as seems to me ; oKiyov Suv, almost ; to vvv etvai, for the

present ; Kara toiito eluai, in this respect.

On (Kav dvai, § 570, Ohs.

§ 565. The Conjunctions to?Te, so that; -rrpiv, before,

and its Homeric synonym 7ra/ao?, are joined with the

Infinitive : îXofiadeaTaTO'; r/v o JLvpo^, S^re irdvTa

•Kovov cLvarkrivaij tov hraivelaOai, eveKa, Cyrus was very

fond of learning, so as to endure any trouble for the sake

of being praised; -Trplv rrjv a,p')(r)v op6S)<; virodea-Oat,

fidraiov '^yovfiai irepl t?}? reXei/T?)? ovrivovv Troieiadai,

Xoyov, before properly establishing the foundation I deem

it useless to make any words whatever about the end.

Obs. 1.—These conjunctions may also he joined with the finite

verb (oomp. § 556) ; aore with the Indicative represents a

sentence as an actual consequence more independent and byitself, and may accordingly be often translated by therefore,

lience : ds rnv varepaiav ovv nKfv, as6' ol 'EXKrives ichpovritov.Digitized by Microsoft® ' rf i

»

§ 567. THE INFINITIVE. 307

he came not on the following day, therefore the Hellenes hecameanxious.

Ohs. 2.—For irpiv we also find Trpiv rj, prtus-quam; properly

irpLv, when, it means sooner than, is always to te regarded as anabbreviation for irpiv rj, npiv originally answering entirely to theLatin prius. On the Infinitive after rj, than, see the following §.

On i<j> are, on condition that, with the Infin. § 601.

§ 566. After a comparative the Infinitive is preceded by ij asrc or

^ alone in the sense of than that: tôôvjiai iifj n fisiôv i) &sTt<j}tpeiv Svvaa-Bai kokov t^ TrdXei (rujujSj, i fear lest too great an evUshould befall the state for it to be able to bear (greater than that it

should be able).

On the Genitive of the Infinitive vrith the Article, which also is

possible here, § 574, 3, Ohs.

B) The case of the Subject and Predicate with the

Infinitive.

§ 567. The /Subject of the Infinitive is that word from

which the action of the verb ia the Infinitive proceeds.

When the Subject is to be expressed with the Infinitive

it appears

:

1. most generally, as in Latin, in the Accusative, which

gives rise to the construction of the Accusative with the

Infinitive : ijyyeiXav rov K.vpov vncrjaai, nuntiabant

Cyrum vioisse. The use of the Accusative with the

Infinitive, like that of the Infinitive alone (§ 559, etc.),

is more common in Greek than in Latin. Not only-

can the substance of a statement or perception—which,

however, may be also expressed in one of the forms dis-

cussed § 525, etc.—be given in this construction, but

also the effect and consequence of an action. Hence

the Accusative with the Infinitive also occurs after

verbs of happening, and is admissible after verbs of com-

manding, demanding, forbidding : irdvTe's ofioXoyovcrt

^7]v ofiovoiav fie<yi.arov ayaOov elvai, all agree that concord

is a very great good; avvk^t] fiTjSepa rav arpaTTjjap

TrapeivM, it happened that none of the generals was pre-

sent ; eypa^lra airoifkeiv rrjv ra'Xîa-rrjv rovf TT/aecT/Set?,

proposui ut quam cM&l¥i^>%tftiiP^f^£iscerentur.

308 THE INFINITIVE. § 5o*.

The Accusative with the Infinitive is properly dependent on the

verb of the leading sentence (comp. the English : I hear you

sing, I hid you go), and is explained by the prolepm meotioned

in § 519, 5, Ois. 2. Instead of rjyyeCKav on 6 Kvpos ivUrjo-ev,

we might have : fjyyeiXav tov Kvpov on eviKrja-ev ; and for on

iv'uaia-ev, viKrja-ai, according to § 560, 2 ; thus we obtain ilyyeCKav

TOV Kvpov viKTia-ai. If the governing verb is intransitive or

passive, the Accusative is of a freer kind (§ 404) : iXirls iari

Ts-avra KoXas ex^'") '^'s™ '^ î'^ *^'*' '^^^ '^ iDell.

Ohs. 1.—The impersonal verbs Set and xP'ht '* *'^ necessary, are

joined with the Accusative and Infinitive like the Latin oportet

:

Xp^ Tokfiav x°^^7rot(Ttf eV oKysa-i Kelpevov avbpa, the man thai

lies in painful sufferings ought to he courageous.

Obs. 2.—As a continuation of an Accusative with the Infinitive

the same construction may be employed in indirect speech mEelative sentences and after Conjunctions, denoting time and

circumstances : roiavT arra o-cjâs €<pr} dt^Xexîvras Uvaf eVec

de yeveaBai eVt rr} OLKia ttj 'Ayddcovos, dv€ayêvr]v Karakap-^dveiv

TTjv 6vpav, he said that after such conversation they went ; hut

that when they reached Agathmi's house, theyfound the door open.

§ 568. 2. A Predicate referring to such a Subject

must necessarily be in the Accusative : tov dSiKov koc

TTovTjpov dvSpa (fi7}/u a&Kbov elvat, I maintain that the

unjust and had man is miserable.

Not unfrequently a Predicative expression requires

an indefinite Subject (tovo) to be supplied : to. roiavTa

hêiJTi (riva) fierpijaavTa Kol apidfiijaavra elhevau, one

may hnow such things by measuring and counting.

§ 569. 3. When the Subject of an Infinitive is the

same as that of the leading sentence, it is usually not

expressed at all : vo/j,l^(o vevLKijKevai, puto me vieisse, Ithink I have conquered ; eXTrtfet? revêaOai &v av herj,

yo%h hope to obtain what you need ; vTreaxero irapeaeadai,

el<; TTjv iaTrepav, promisit se affuturum ad vesperam.

Ohs.—For greater emphasis, especially when opposition to some-

thing else is to be expressed, the subject may be added, and that

either in the Accusative or Nominative ; Herod, oi hlyivTioi ivo-

fuCo" (oivTovs npaiTovs yevecrOai dvdp&waiv, the Egyptians thougld

that theyfirst of all men came into existence ; d o'Ua-Be XaXxiSeas

I] Mcyapeas rfjv'JiiXdSa criiff-(ui,.vu.iis^ dno8paaea-6ai rd irpdy

§ 571. THE INFINITIVE. 309

Hara, oix opdas o'Ua-Be, if you think the Chalcidians and Mega-rians will save Greece, hut you escape from trotthle, you are

mistaken.

§ 570. 4. Predicative qualifications referring to the

Principal Sviiject are in the Nominative : 6 'AXeâvBpo';

e<f>aa-Kev elvat î,o<; vlo^, Alexander dicebat se esse Jovis

filium ; iyw ovk ofioKoyija-eo ukXi^to'; rjKew, ahX iiiro crov

K€K\r]fievo<;, I will not acknowledge that I am come unin-

vited, hut invited by you; ol BoKovvTe<; aoôl elvai, they

who seem to be ivise.

Obs.—From the Predicate ixav joining the freer Infinitive ehm(§ 564), arises the combination excov eivai : tovto ckcov elvat ov

iroifjira, this (if I am) to he offree wiU Iwill not do.

§ 571. 5. In many cases a personal instead of an

impersonal form of expression is used in Greek, the

Subject of the Infinitive being made the Subject of the

leading sentence ; so instead of the English, " it was

announced that Cyrus had conquered " (rjyyiXOT] tov

Kvpov vcicrja-ai), we have, d KOpo? r^yyeXOrj viKpiffai,,

Cyru^ was announced to have conquered. This form of

expression occurs not only—as in Latin with diatur,

videtur—with SoKei, eotKe, it seems; Xeyerai [dicitur,

- traditur'\ ; dyyiXXeTai, it is announced ; 6/j,oXoyelTai,, it is

agreed, but also with crv/iâivei, it happens, and with

several adjectives with el/j^l, as: BiKaw;, jtist ; eVtTJj-

Seto?, eVt/catpto?, fitting ; eVt'Soô?, probable ; avar/Kam,

necessary : avT6<; fioi, Sokco ivOdhe Kara/ievelv, it appears

to me that I myself shall remain here ; hUaio<; el ariew

avOpmirov^, it is just that you should lead mm (you are

justified in leading men) ; iTriSoôi. elai, to uvto ireiae-

aOai, it is to be expected that they will suffer the same

;

Poet, irpeiraiv ecj)v<; irpo Toi>vSe (j>coveiv, it becomes you to

speak in their presence.

The Personal construction is explained, like that of

the Accusative with the Infinitive (§ 567), by prolepsis

(§ 519, 5, Obs. 2). For ^yjeXOr] on 6 KO/oo? ivUrjae

there might be îffl^'&^d^TO^ on evLierâe, and for

310 THE INFINITIVE. §575,

this again yyyeXOr] 6 KOpo? viKrja-ai, ; for iiriSoôv eariv^

oTb TO avTo TTeiaovrai—iirlôôl elcn ort to avTO Trei-

crovrac, and hence iirLBoôi elai to avTo -jreiaecrOac.

Ols.—The Accusative construction, however, is almost every-

where applicatle : Xeyerai rbv Kvpov viKrjOai, dicimf Cyrumvicisse.

§ 572. 6. Predicative qualifications referring to aGenitive or Dative may be in these cases : ^pôv iiri tivo.

tS)v Sokovvtwv aocpwv etvai, I came to one of those whoseem to he wise ; eX&yov roi? SoKovcri <to<ôI<; elvai, I said

to those, &c. ; Kvpov iheovTO co? Trpodv/jboTaTov yevea-Qai,

they legged Cyrus to he as ready as possible ; iravTl

dp'ôvTi wpo'srjKet ^povlfnp elvai, it becomes every ruler

to he judicious.

Still the Predicate is often in the Accusative : (rvnîpei airols

(pCKovs elvai jiaiKKov rj TToK^fuLovs, it is to their advantage rather

to iefriends than enemies.

0) The Infinitive with the Article.

§ 573. The Substantive nature of the Infinitive is

made more manifest by prefixing the Article. Yet theInfinitive with the Article must nevertheless have a

noun in the case required by the verb to which the

Infin. belongs : to Taif rjhova^ êvyeiv, the shunning of

pleasures ; the Infinitive in this case also is qualified byadverbs : to koXm'; ^rjv, living rightly.

The rules given §§ 567-572 for the case of the Subject

and Predicate are applicable also to the Infinitive with

the Article. Thus the Acciisative with the Infinitive is

often preceded by the Article: to irpoeihevac tov Oeov

TO fieXKov Kai to irpocrrjfjiaivew & ôvKerai, kuI tovto

iravTeii kol Xeyova-i koI vofiiôvai, Gfod's foreknowing the

future and pointing it out beforehand to whom he will, all

assert and believe.

§ 574. By having the Article prefixed the Infinitive

becomes declinable, and thus answers to the Latin

Gerund.Digitized by Microsofi®

§ 574. THE INFINITIVE. / 311

1. Nominative: I

Poet. TO tppoveXv evSaifiovia^ irpwrov ip-dpêi, to be

thoughtful is the first step to happiness ; 'to dfiapTaveiv

dvdpmirovi ovTa'i ovBev 6av/j,acrT6v, tnat those should

commit errors who are human is nothing isurprising.

2. Accusative:

axiTo TO dTToOvrjCKeiv owSets (poêLTai, dying itself no one

dreads. Especially to be noticed is the Accusative

with the Prepositions et?, /cara, in reference to; Sid, on

account of, because ; •jrpo'i, hri, besides : KOpo? hid to

(pi\o/Ma6ri<; (Nominative according to § 570) ehai ttoXXA

Toil? irapovTUf dvijpooTa, Cyrus, through being eager forTtnowledge, asked those present about many things ; izpo's

TO jjierpicov Seia-Oai /caXto? ire'iraiSev/j.ai, I have leen well

trained to require what is moderate.

Ohs.—This Accusative of the Infinitive with the Article hassometimes a freer connexion with a verb or adjective after the

manner of the freer Accusative (§ 404) : ot HeXonovvfia-ioi

aveKiTUTToi elai to is Trjv yrjv ruiav isâKXeiv, the Peloponnesians

Tmve no hope in regard to invading our country,

3. Grenitive:

eiTidviiia Tov Trieiv, desiderium bibendi; to ev irpdTTeiv

irapd TTjv dîav dipopfir} tov kukS)'; (ppovelv roi? dvor\Toi<i

<yu^veTai, prosperity without merit is an occasion to fools

of base sentiments; ifiol oiSev irpea^vTepov tov oti

BeKTicTTov ifie yevea-Oai (§ 416), nothing is more important

to me than my becoming as good as possible. Especially

to be noticed is the Genitive with the prepositions 6«,

from ; irpo, before ; evsKa, because, on account of ; virep,

for, for the saJce of, in order to ; Sid, by, through ; dvev,

without: oi dv6pco7roi irdvTa iroiovdiv vrrep tov imt)

Sovvai Slk7)v, people do everything in order not to suffer

punishment.

Obs.—Purpose is often expressed by the Genitive of the Infinitive

even without a preposition : tov fiTf Biaêvyeiv tov Xayav ck tS>v

StKTvav a-KOTTovs KaBioTafjiev, we place scouts that the hare maynot escapefrom the nets. (Comp. the rare use of the Lat. Geni-

tive of the Qetym^^^^f^ffff^^^jîmt^ndae libertatis.)

312 THE INFINITIVE. § 576.

4. Dative.

The Dative is eepecially frequent to express Instru-

mentality (§ 438) ; it is then, like the Latin Ablative of

the Gerund, to be translated, 5y : îXiTTTro? KSKpaTijKe

Tco TTpoTepo'; (§ 570) ttjOo? Toii'; TroXefiiov; ikvai, Philip

has gained the victory ly going first against tJie enemy

[comp. the Latin, docendo discimus'] ; also with the pre-

positions iv, in ; eVt, on, on condition that ; irpo';, besides,

and others : tt/so? tw /juTjSev ix t?}? irpeaêuK XaêXv

T0U9 al-)(jj,a'Xa>Tov<; sk twv ihlwv iXvad/j/rjv, besides gaining

iiothing from the embassy, I set free the captives at my own

expense.

D) The Infinitive with av.

§ 575. By the addition of av the Infinitive acquires a

potential or hypothetical meaning, and denotes therefore

either that something only might happen, or that under

certain circumstances something vjould happen, or would

have happened. Here two cases are possible

:

1. the Infinitive with dv can be replaced by the Opta-

tive with av : fiaki(TTa olfiai av crov "TTvOeadab (pTi irvBol-

fiTjv av), I think I could learn it best from you; BoKeiTe

fioc TToXu êKTiov av nrepl tov TrdXifiov ôvXevaaaOai,

(oTi av ôvXeva-aicrde), el tov tottov Trj<; %copas 7r/309 fjv

"TToXe/MecTe ev6v/j,7j6eir]Te, it seems to me you would muchbetter settle about the war if you took into account the

localities of the country against which you are making

ivar.

This Infinitive with, av therefore answers either to the Potential

Optative (§ 516), or to the apodosis of a Hypothetical Period

of the fourth form (§ 546).

§ 576. 2. The place of an Infinitive with dv can be

supplied by the Hypothetical Indicative with dv : Kvpo';

el iîwaev, dpiaTO<; av SoKec dp'^^cov yevicrOai, (ol/j,ai oTt,

av iiyiveTo), if Cyrus had lived, it seems he would have

become one of the best of rulers ; tov<; raOra a/yvoovvra';

'ZeoKparr]'; avBpaTiroBmBei^ av KeKknaSai '^jeiTO (i, e. X.Digitized by Microsoft®

? 578 THE PARTICIPLES. 313

rjyetro, on el rive:; ravra '^yvoovv, itceKKriVTO av avBpa-TToScoSet?), Socrates thought that, if any did not know this,

they would be called slavish.

This Infinitive with Hv thns answers to the apodosis of a Hypo-thetical Period of the second form (§ 537, &c.).

Obs.—The context must show into which of the two forms theInfinitive with av is to be resolved.

E) The Infinitive instead of the Imperative

§ 577. belongs almost entirely to poetry ; it is usedfor the second and, rarely, for the third person. TheSubject and Predicate are in the Nominative: Horn.GapaSiv vvv, Ai6/J/r]Se^, iirl Tpcoecrcrt fid-yêadai,, cou-

rageously now, Biomede, fight against the. Trojans ; iralha

E ifiol \vcrab re (jjlXrjv to, t diroiva Seêtrât, deliver upto me my dear child and accept the ransom.

Chap. XXIII.

—

The Participles.

Preliminary Remark.

A Participle, like the Infinitive (§ 559, l), is a verbal-

noun (§ 225, 5). It has the same things in common with

the verb as the Infinitive, the same points also in commonwith the noun ; but it is distinguished from the Infinitive

inasmuch as the latter resembles a nomen actionis,

whereas the Participle has the nature of an adjective.

§ 578. A) Their Attributive Use.

A Participle, corresponding to an adjective or to a

relative sentence, is joined to a substantive, to ascribe

to it a permanent quality : TroXt? evpeia'; aryvia'; exovaa,

i.e. Horn, evpvdyvia or ^ evpeia^ aryvM^ ^%^'> ^ ^^^2/

having broad streets ; al KaXovfêvai, Alokov vfjaoi,, the so-

called islands of Aeolus ; 6 Trapoov Ka.ip6<;, the present

opportunity (comp. pîfdl^JVlicrosoft®

314 THE PARTICIPLES. §579.

06s.—Like an adjective the Participle also becomes a substan-

tive by having the article prefixed : ol irapdvres, (hose present

(comp. § 379); d nxdiv, the first comer. Such participles mayoften be translated by substantives : 6 Spauras, the doer ; oj

\eyovTfS, the speakers ; to av/icfifpov, the advantage ; ra Seovra,

the duty ; npos to TeXcvToiov (§ 361, 8) ixâv exaarov tS>v irpXv

virapâvTtav Kplverai, everything that happened before is judged

ofm accordance with its final result.

On the peculiar use of the Put. Part, with the Article, § 500.

B) Tlieir Appodtive Use.

§ 579. The Participle serves to ascribe to a substan-

tive a merely transient quality or activity. In this case

the Participle is a shorter and less definite mode of

expression for what is otherwise expressed by sub-

ordinate clauses with conjunctions of the most different

Idpds (comp. § 583, Ohs.).

A Participle used in this way is

:

§ 580. 1. Temporal,

with the distinctions of time nientioned in Chap. XX.(esp. § 496) : 7rj0o?6;;^6T6 tovtoi<; dva/yiyvcoa-KOfievoti; tov

vovv, give attention to this whilst being read; Horn, w?

dpa âvijcrati ave^-^crero = 67ret o)? icpcovrjae, after having

thus spoken he went away. Observe especially e^^toz; and

êpa>v in descriptions, which may frequently be trans-

lated by the English with : ra? i/au? airea-Teikav 'expvra

'AXKiBav, they sent away Aleidas with (having) the ships ;

"XpwjMevo'i, in a similar sense : ttoXX^ '^s-)(vr] j^cofiepo^,

with (using) much skill. So also, dpôfJiepo';, at first

;

reXevTav, at last ; Bi,aXnra>v •^(povov, after a time ; ev

itolSsv, fortunately ; KaXw'i Trot&v, Justly. The Participle

civ cannot be omitted when being is to be ascribed to a

substantive : 'AX/ct/StaS?;? en Trat? av iOavfidêro, while

yet a boy (Lat., merely puer) Aldbiades was admired

(§ 428, Obs.).

§ 581. 2. Causal and final,

where the Participle is to be resolved by since, by or fyDigitized by Microsoft®

§583. THE PAETICIPLEM. 315

the fact tJiat, when referring to the present or past, andby that, in order that, when referring to the future : ovkeoTiv aBiKovvra Svvafuv êâiav KTrjcraaOai, firm poweris not to he gained by acting unjustly; tov aSi/covvra

irapa tov; Sf/tacrTa? ar/etv Set Blktjv Bcoa-ovra, he whoacts unjustly ought to be brought before the judges in order

that he may suffer punishment.

§ 582. 3. Concessive,a somewhat rarer use : t6 vBap evatvoTarov apurrov ov, water is

the cheapest though it is the test ; ifiels icfiopaiticvoi to imrpayfievaKai Svsx^paimvTes rjycTc r^v elprjvriv o/ims, though suspicious ofwhat had been done, cmd indignant, you still maintained the

§ 583. 4. Hypothetical,

a very frequent use, where the Participle is to be re-

solved by if, and corresponds to one of the forms of the

Hypothetical Protaseis mentioned in § 534, etc. : roii?

<j)C\ov'i €vepyeTOvvTe<; koI tov<; i'Ôpov'; hvvrjaeaOe Ko\d-

êiv, if you benefit your friends you will he able also to

punish your enemies (idv) ; also with the article : o fjirj

Sapel<s av6payiro<; ov iraiZeverai, a person is not educated if

he has not been beaten. Such a Participle with (jltj mayoften be translated by without: ovk ecrriv dpxeiv fj,rf

SiBovra fitcrdov, a man cannot rule without giving pay.

Ots.—Witli the varied use of the Appositive Participles it mustnot be overlooked that such a Participle of itself does not clearly-

express any of the meanings developed in §§ 580-583, but that

we make use of the one or the other turn in translating, only in

order to express in a more precise way what is simply suggested

by the Participle. Hence there are many transitions between

these meanings, especially between the Temporal and Causal,.

but also between the Temporal and Hypothetical meanings, just

as in Latia sentences introduced by quv/m : iravra ravra avvi-

S6vTas anavras (ifms) Set ôrjdeiv, it becomes every one ofyoUy• when you have considered all these things, to render help;

vofii^tt) afieivov av Vjias irepX Stv vvv ipS> Kplvat, fUKpa Twv

Trporepov ttotc prjdevraiu fivrjôveva-avras, I thinh you would

tetter judge about what I am now going to say, when you

rememier a little 0)î?feai?*iâiwfcâfeiW®

316 THE PARTICIPLES. § 5St,

C) The Participle with an Absolute Case.

§ 584. The Participle with a noun or pronoun in the Ahsolute

Genitive (§ 428) or Accusative, serves to point out the circumstances

mentioned in §§ 579-583. The noun or pronoun to which the Par-

ticiple refers may be regarded as its subject, since from it proceeds the

action expressed by the Participle. This construction, therefore, maybe resolved by a separate clause, beginning with a conjunction, in

which the word in tne Genitive or Accusative must appear in the

Nominative : Tovratv avayiyvaa-KOfievaiv tov vovv irposfx^Te, attend

whilst this is being read (comp. § 580).

1. The Absolute Genitive (comp. § 428),

for which may be substituted clauses with temporal,

causal, concessive, or hypothetical conjunctions : Hepi-

K\eov<; '^yovfievov 'ttoXKo, Kau koXo, epya a/wehelâvTO ol

ÂOrjvaloi, as long as Pericles led them (Pericle duce), the

Athenians produced many and splendid works ; vavfia')(ia<;

'yepofj,ev7]<; rerrapa^ Tpiijpei,<; Xafi^dvei Topyanrai;, navali

pugna facta Crorgopas quattuor triremes capit ; 6\7](; ri)?

TToXeo)? ev rot? 'jroXefiiKOK kivSvvok iTriTpewofiem]'; rm<TTparr)'y&, fieyaXa rd r dyaOa KaTop6ovvro<; avrov, Kol

TO, Kaica Siafiaprdvoi'TO'; et/co? yeveadat, OS the whole state

in the dangers of war is committed to the care of the

general, it is natural both that great good should happen

when he is successful, and great evil when he fails.

Poet. yevoLT av irav deov re'^vwfievov, all may be done ij

a God contrives it (el Teyyayro).

§ 585. The Absolute Genitive differs from the corresponding

Latin construction of the Ablative Absolute in the following points.

a) The subject of the Participle is more frequently omitted in

Greek, when it is either easily understood from what precedes, or

from the meaning of the verb, or when it remains indefinite (comp.

§ 361, 3, Obs. 2) : irpoiovTosv, as (they) wentforwards ; uoiroj , whenhe (Zeus) rains ; eâyycXBevrav, when it had been announced.

b) On the necessity of the Participle of dvai—aov naiSbs ovtos

[Lat. te puero] see §§ 580, 482, Obs. An exception occurs in the case

of the adjectives cKa>v and axmi/, which very much resemble Par-

ticiples : cfiov eKovTos, with my luill ; ifiov ukovtos, me invito. ThePoets take other licences.

c) As the Greclffl have two active Participles to express a past

action, they use the Absolute Genitive of a Passive Participle lessDigitized by Microsoft®

§ 587. THE PARTICIPLES. 317

frequently than the Romans do their Ahsohite Ablative: 6 KOpor,Tov Kpo1(rov viKr\tras, Karea-Tpe^jraTo Toiis A.v8ovs, Cyrus, Croeso vicia,

lydos sibi suhjecit.

d) The Absolute Genitive is employed even where the subject ofthe Participle is mentioned also in the leading sentence: ravrdmvTos avTov eSogc n X/yeii/ ry 'Aa-rvdyei, after thus speaking heseemed to Astyages to say something (of importance).

'

[Lat. italocutus—visus esi.]

§ 586. 2. Tlie Absolute Accusative

is usual in the case of some impersonal verbs, especially

Uov, it being a duty; e^6v, irapov, it being allowed,

feasible; Trpo^rjKov, it being befitting; Soâv, it having been

decided : ovBeh iôv elprjVTjv op/eiv TroXe/iov alprjcreTai,, noone, being allowed to be at peace, will choose war ; ttoXXAkkvjuv iôv TrXeoveKTrjcrai ovk rjdeKrjaare, though it was often

easy for you to gain more you were unwilling ; oi %vpa-Kovcrwt Kpavyfj ovk oXiyr/ i-^^pwvTo, ahvvaTOV 6v iv vvktI

dXkw T(p a7)fji,rjvai, the Syracusans raised no small shout,

it being impossible to make a signal during the night by- anything else.

D) Supplements to Participles.

§ 587. For the sake of greater clearness, certain par-

ticles are added to Appositive Participles, as well as to

Participles joined with an absolute case ; they give moredistinct prominence to the idea expressed by the Par-

ticiple. Such Supplements to Participles are

:

1. ajxa, at the same time, denoting contemporaneousness : ot

'EXXtj^cs ijia.)(ovTO ajxa iropevojiivoi, tile Hellenes fought vjhilst

marching.

2. fiera^v, between, amidst, with pretty nearly the same meaning

:

iireax^ f-^ XeyavTa fiera^v, he checked me in the midst of my speech.

3. airUa and eidvs to express immediate succession : tm Scliw

Kspa fvdiis aTTOêPtjKoTi fjre/ceivro, they pressed upon the right wing

immediately after its landing.

4. ToVe, ilra (Kara), eireira, ourfflj, are added to the principal verb,

to indicate that the action of the Participle was past before, and

laKe up the substance of it with various accessory ideas : KaToXin-ww

^povpav ovTois eV o'Qi&*ii9^)^f0î9^l^ having left a garrison

S18 THE PAETICIPLES. §583

he thus went away home ; Poet, /i^ vvv ^vyovres el6^ SKwfiev varcpoy,

lest though now escaping we should afterwards he caught.

5. KaiTTfp (more rarely Kai alone), with a Participle, to be trans-

lated though, renders prominent the concessive meaning : Kaimpovrat a-QCJios toy jSeXrtcoz' hv yevoto, though so wise you might perhapsbecome better ; Homer often separates Kai from nep : ol Se Kai

a^vijifvoi nep iir avra rjSv yekacrcrav, and though vexed they

heartily laiighed at him ; op.a>s in the same sense though or yet, is

used with the principal verb : Herod, varcpov aTriKopevoi t^s av/iôX^s

ifielpovro oiMcos Berja-ao'dai roits Mrjdovs, though they did not cometill after the engagement, yet they desired to see the Medes.

6. are with a Participle (like oTov, ota Sri) answers to the English

in asfar as, since, and brings into prominence its causal meaning :

Karedapde Trdvv ttoXv are pôKpav rcov wktS)u ovo'av, he slept a great

while since the nights were long. [Comp. Lat. quippe guum, quippe

ijp.ii.'\

§ 588. 7. (»s and a)<s-irep added to a Participle suggest

that what is expressed in the participle is subjective, i. e.

is the opinion, the conception, the view of the principal

subject. Both particles are joiaed to the Appositive

Participle as well as to a Participle connected with an

absolute case, either the absolute Genitive or the abso-

lute Accusative. The latter case in this connexion is

far more extensively used than without those particles

{§ 586). If the opinion expressed in the Participial

construction is to be characterised at once as false, w?

and &<;irep may be translated by as if: SeBia<Ti tov

BdvaTov CBS ev et'Sors? on fjkkrjiuTov rS)V KaKwv icrriv,

they fear death as if they well Tmew that it was the

greatest of evils ; but by in the belief that, since, in tJie

feeling that, etc., if the correctness of the opinion is to

be left undecided : rjfjLel<; irdvTe'i epXeirofiev irpo'i avTov

to? avTLKa fjbaXa aKovcTOfievot davfiaaiov^ Tivai Xoyoi/?,

tve all looked at him expecting immediately to hear

some wonderful statements ; Poet, eêart â>velv m e/M)v

/iWTj? TreXa?, you may speak out since (in the convic-

tion that) I alone am near ; Xiyei to? SiBaKTov ovarjf;

T^? dper^'i, he speaks thinking that virtue is capable of

being taught; "Tre^^f^^T^^^^^g^^/Xou? cb? airk fiev

§ 590. THE PAKTICIPLES. 319

e/cooTOS ov iroirjo-wv to Soâv, rov Se m-Xria-lov -TTpdôvra

(absolute Accusative), you looked at one another thinking

that each one of you would not do what was decided wpm,,

hut that his neighbour would.

E) The Predicative Participle.

§ 589. The Participle, like the Infinitive (§ 560),serves to complete a verb, by attributing to a word con-

tained in the sentence something which is not a mereaddition but an essential part of the statement. TheSupplementary or Predicative Participle may refer either

1. to the subject of the sentence (§ 361, 5, 7, 8)

:

iraveade ae\ nrepl rwv avreov ôvKevofjuevoi, cease always

consulting about the same things ; ta-Ot, Xvirnjpb'; civ, knowthat you are troublesome, or

2. to a dependent word in the sentence (comp. § 361,

10, and § 403) : o TroXe/io? eiravcre tou?'

AOt^vuIov; asl

irepl tSxv avrav ôv\evo/j,evov<;, the war caused the

Athenians to cease from always consulting about the same

things ; olZa avrov Xvirrjpbv ovra, J know Jdm to be

troublesome.

In English such Predicative Participles are mostly

expressed by the Infinitive with to, or by sentences with

that, sometimes also in other ways. In some cases

however, the English language also makes use of a

Participle in a similar way : I-feel myself affected by it,

he found him armed (comp. § 361, 10, Obs.).

The verbs which admit of a Supplementary Participle

may be classified as follows :

§ 590. 1. Verbs which express a condition,

as : exco, I am in a condition ; rvyxava, I chanee to be

(Poet. Kvpem) ; Xavdavto, Iescape notice ; (palvofiai, StjTww,

<âvep6^, Brpw'; elfii, lam manifest; eoiKa, I seem ; Sia-

reXio), Bidr/co, I continue ; avk')(pfi,ai, KapTepico, I hold out,

endure ; Kafivm, I grow weary ; a-rrop/opevw, I despair ;

as weU as the verbs which denote the beginning, inter-

rupting, or ending (l>îmm^^vm:ef^ffîJ.ai, I begin ; <f)6dva>.

320 THE PARTICIPLES. § E9L

I am beforehand ; oiôjx.ai,, I depart, I am off ; eVt-, Sto-

Ti.eiTTco, I break off, I suspend ; iravai, I make to cease

(pravofjuM, I cease). In translating we frequently change

the Participle into the principal verb, and render the

principal Greek verb by an adverb. Examples : Kripvâ<;

e')(ai (more emphatic than iKi^pvâ, comp. Lat. nuntiatum

haheo), I have announced ; rk ervê Trapayevofievo'; ; who

happened to be present ? BiareKw evvotav e^cov Traaiv

vjjuv, I continue cherishing a kindly feeling for you all

;

UT] Kafifj^ (plXov dvSpa evepyerwv, don't grow weary of

benefiting a friend ; aXKa fjuvpla eirCKeiira) Xeycov, I re-

frain from saying innumerable other things ; Horn, clyjêr

dTTOTTTdfievoi;, he luas gone flying away.

Obs.—Even the verb eljii may be joined witb a Participle

:

rj rovTO ovK eVrt yiyvoîevov irap Tjfuv ; is this not liajppeniruf

(usual) among us? A Participle is necessarily so used witli

fi/ii to complete certain verbal fonns, comp. §§ 287, 291, espe-

cially the Participle of the Perfect or Aorist with Afii instead of

the Future Perfect : hehaxais or bovs c<ret = dederis.

§ 591. 2. Verbs of perceiving,

as : opdca, I see (jrepiopoM, I overlook, endure) ; dKovm,

J hear ; otSa, I know ; fiavddvoa, I learn ; yirfvaxTKa, Iget to know ; alaOdvofjuii, I perceive ; evpia-Kos, I find ;

IJL,eiM>rjiJiai, I remember. In several of these the object

is in the Genitive according to § 420. Examples

:

to? elhov avTOV<; ireKafyvra';, oi XerfkaTOvvTei eu6v<;

a<f)evTe<; rd ')^p-ijfiaTa e(j>evyov, cum eos appropinquantes

vidissent, praedantes praeda stdtim relicta fugam capes-

siverunt; iJKOvcrd Trore XcoKpdTov; "rrepi cf)iXcov Stdkeyo-

fjbhov, I once heard Socrates discoursing about friends

[audivi Socratem disputanteni] ; 'Keppovqaov Kare/uide

TToXei? evBexa rj SooSeKa ejôvcrav, he learnt that the

Chersonese had eleven or twelve cities ; dvOpeoTroi /caXol

Koyadol eTreiSdv yvdoaiv dTricrTovfievoi (comp. § 483, l),

ov (fiiXovcri roil'; dTnaTovvTa<;, when good men perceive that

they are distrusted, they do not like (hose who distrust

tlvem.

S 595. THE PARTICIPLES. 321

Ois.—With (TvvocSd fioi, 1 am conscious, the Participle may beconnected with the Nominative of the Subject or the Dative(j»oi) : ffiavTW a-vvfiSeiv oiStv iTnardfievos or eTriora/ieVa), I wasconscious of knowing nothing. In the sense of " to be aware "

it may also have the Accusative witli the Participle.

§ 592. 3. Verbs of emotion,

as : %a^jO(B, TjBofiai, Tepirofiai, I rejoice ; arfairaco, I amsatisfied; âXeircSi; îpco, aegre fero; dyPofxai,, I amdissatisfied ; cuyavaKTeoj, I am vexed ; atVywo/iat, I amashamed; iMerafiikofjiai, or yaera/ieXet fioi, I repent.

Examples : Horn. 6 he (ppeal repweT aKovav, but he

rejoiced in heart at hearing (it); (jbeTafjueKei avT& ^jrevcra-

fievw, he repents having told a lie.

§ 593. 4. Verbs oipointing out and asserting.

as : SeiKVVfit, a-jroipalveo, J shew ; eêXer/yw, I prove,

convict ; a/yyeWco, J announce ; o/j-oXoyeoi, I assent.

Examples : ^tXtTTTro? irdvTa eveKa eavTov ttokSv eêkrj-

XeyKTai, it has been proved that Philip does everything

for his dim sake ; anroâivovo't, roix; cpevyovra'i •jraKai

TubvTjpov'; ovTa<;, they make manifest that the banished had

long been base.

§ 594. Obs.—The Infinitive according to § 560 may be used as vcell

as the Participle with many of the verbs enumerated in §§ 590-

593, but in a somewhat different sense : Spôâi SiSda-Ktov, Iiegin to he a teacher ; apxa/iai SiSaVicftv, / begin to teach (myteaching) ; alcrxivonai \iyav, I am ashamed though I say it

;

aurxivofuu Xeyeiv, shame prevents mefrom saying.

F) The Participle with av.

§ 595. By tbe addition of the Particle av the Par-

ticiple, in every case like the Infinitive (§§ 575 and 576),

acquires the meaning ofpossibility or that of an Apodosis

in a hypothetical /Sentence, and may therefore be resolved

in two ways

:

1, by the Optative with dv (§§ 516 and 546)

:

eya> elfii tcov rjMo)^ fiev av eK^yOevrmv, ^Bia><; S' av

iXey^dvTwv, I am one of those who tvould gladly be

refuted {ol hv e\eyî^^,hfrf4^^sgf^ gladly refute {ot An

Y

322 THE PAETICIPLES. § 59«.

eXiyêLav) ; evpia-KO) ravTTjv av fiovriv rêvoiievrjv twv

jjueXKovToiv KivSvvcov airoTpoTrrjv, I find this would be the

only "prevention of the coming dangers (on av ryevoiro) ;

Lcr/jLev Koi v/MO,'; av koX aXKov;, iv ry ainfj Svvdfiet rjfuv

yevofievov^, SpMvra<i av avro, we know tliat you as well as

others in the same position would do the same tiling, i. e.

oTi el yevoiaOe Bpare av.

2. By the hypothetical Indicative with dv (§ 536, &c.)

:

<l'iXt77Tro? ILoTiSaiav eXaiv koI SirvrjOeh av avro? ejêtv, 64

iôv\rj6ri, 'OXwOCok uTreBcaKev, when Philip had taJcen

Potidaea and might have (ore iSwijOt] av) kept it himself,

if he had wished, he gave it back to the Olynthians.

G) The Verbal Adjectives.

§ 596. Verbal Adjectives are, like Participles, verbal

nouns of an adjective kind, but differ from participles

by a usage much more restricted, and referring to no

special time, which has been treated of generally in § 300.

The Verbal Adjectives in -Teo9, implying necess^y,

are worthy of notice. A double construction is here

possible

:

1. The object of a necessary action becomes the subject,

and the Verbal Adjective agrees with it : o irarrip aoi,

TifiTjTec; iaTiv, pater tibi venerandus est ; 77 TroXt? rot?

7ro\lTai,<; di<peX7]Tea, the state must be assisted by its

citizens. In this construction the subject is emphatic.

2. The Neutral or impersonal construction, where the

necessity of the action is made specially prominent ; the

object of the action is in each instance in the case

required by the verb : StcoKTeov rrjv apeTijv, we mmipursue virtue ; elpijvTjv aKTeov ecrriv, pax agenda est

;

diTTeov Tov -TToXifiov, you must try war ; ôriOrireov rjiuv

iari Tol<; itparîhacriv, tve must help the state.

The person, who is to, or must, do something, is in

both cases in the Dative : in the second, according to

the analogy of Set (§ 567, 05s. 1), sometimes in theDigitized by Microsoft®

^597. PECUIilAEITIES OF EELATIVB SEHTENCES. 328

Accusatiye : ovBevl Tpoirq) eKovra^ aSiKrjTeov, in no waymust you willingly do injustice.

Ohs. 1.—The Verbal Adjective sometimes has the meaning of a

Middle : neiareov ea-riv, we must obey (jreidofMi not TreWm).

Obs. 2.—In the Neuter construction we often find the Plural:

irokeiiTjTia iariv, we mustfight (comp. § 364).

Chap. XXTV.—Some Peouliakities of EelativeClauses.

A) Attraction.

§ 597. 1. The Eelative Pronoun in general follows

i;lie rule, that it agrees in Gender and Number with its

antecedent, that is, with the word to which it refers,

but in Case with what /oZ^ows; that is, it accommodatesitself to the sentence in which it stands : fie/MvrjcrOe tou

opKov ov ofico/ioKare, be mindful of tJie oath which you

lime sworn.

2. An exception from this rule is the Attraction, or

the process, by which the Eelative is attracted in Case

also by the word to which it refers, so as to take its

case : fiifjuvqa-Oe tov opKov ov o/im/ioKaTe.

S. With Attraction another process is frequently com-

bined, viz., shortening. This consists ra the Article or

the Demonstrative Pronoun being left out, and the

Eelative with the word to which it refers being drawn

together into a single clause: fjiefwriaOe ov ofi,wiM>KaTe.

hpKov.

4. If the word referred to by the Eelative is a mere

pronoun, the Eelative remains quite alone, but stands

in the case which the Demonstrative would have had :

^fivrjcrde ov 6/J,c0fi6KaTe= fie/ivrjcrOe tovtov o dfia>/j,OKaTe,

remember that which you have sworn ; a/teXw mv fie Bel

'jrpoLTTeuv= d/ieXS rovrwv a fie Set irpdrTew, I neglect

what I shmdd do. Digitized by Microsoft®

324 PECULIAEITIES OF KELATIVE SENTENCES. § 59&

§ 598. Attraction, however, can occur only under the-

following conditions

:

1. The Relative clause must be closely connectecC

with the word to which it refers, must be an essential part

of it. Attraction is iuadmissible in a Relative, clause,,

which only loosely adds a remark to a substantive,,

which might quite as well be wanting, or be annexed

by means of Kai and a demonstrative pronoun.

2. The sentence must be such as would have the'

Relative pronoun in the Accusative, but its antecedent

in the Genitive or Dative: rt? rj ccêXeia toZ? êoZ?-

TV^')(avei ovaa airo t&v Bcopcov Siv -Trap' tificov Xafi^d-

vovcriv, what advantage have the gods from the presents-

which they receive from you ? ehêpere acj)' oaav eKaa-To<r

ex^h contribute from what each has (airo Tocjovrayv ocra).;.

"X.eyei'i ov avfKpava 019 to 'jrpwTov eXeye^, you do not say;

what harmonises with what you first said (rouTot? a) ;.

T& ryêyJiVi irLaTevcro^v a> av Kvpo? So), we shall trust

the commander whom, Cyrus gives (us), (tovto) ov).

Ols.—Attraction very seldom takes place with other cases : iiv

iVTvyxo-vtii fioKuTTa ayafiai (re, i. e., Tovrav oTs, -Z" admire you

most of all I meet.

§ 599. AU clauses subordinate to a Relative Sen-

tence, so far as they consist of words referring to the

Relative, and are capable of inflexion, must likewise be

modified iu the Attraction : 0?? oSaiv vixeTepoi<; eêh

TovToi<i TTavra ToXXa ao-âXco? KeicTTjTai, i. e., a ovra

v/Merepa ex^h Tovroi'i, he keeps all the rest in safety by

means of what he has of yours.

§ 600. oTos, and sometimes oeros and ffKUos have quite a peculiar

attraction ; viz., eiwu is often omitted when it woiild stand with

olos in the nominative, and the latter is put in the same case as its

antecedent : otta ye efioi jravraTrao'tv airopov tovto, i. e., ToaovTio olos

iya> el/ii, that is quite impossible to such a man as I am. Sometimes

the article is prefixed at the same time : toIs olois Jjpv, to such as

we. By the same ellipsis ostisovk acquires the fixed meaning, who-ever, i. e., any whatever : ovk coti Sixaiov av&pos /SXaTrreii' ovtivovv

dyOpaiircov, it is not a just man's nature to injure any person what-

^603. PECULIARITIES OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. 325

«w (i. e., any one, whoever he may be). [Comp. Lat. <yuicimqueliomini nocere.2 So Ssns ôuXsi means the same as oSt-os Sv /3ovX«like quivis.

'

§ 601. Other Kelative expressions, all inyolving eitherShortening or Attraction, are

:

avff Siv, because, i. e. avrl tovtwv a, or avri tovtcovon: ah ev eTrolirjcra^ avff &v cTraês, ôu did goodbecause you received good (for that which you received).

e(f &, i<j) one (Herod. eVt rowrp, eV one), jw thepurpose of, on condition that, i. e. eVt rourp w?Te, oftenwith the Infinitive : ol rpid/covTa ypWrja-ave^) &r6 crvy-

rypdyjrai vofiov;, the thirty were chosen for the purpose of•drawing up laws.

e^ ov, d(j) ov, ex quo, since, i. e. since the time that,

'On kv S), eh o, dxpi ov, § 556.

oh's, more complete tolovto's olo'i, with the Infinitive,

'Of the Mnd that, of the kind to, and oloyre, with the In-ifinitive, able, possible : ovk ^v &pa o'la dpBeiv rb ireSiov,

it was not the season to water the field; ovx oloke âav,fiorj07i(rai, they were not able to render help (camp. § 562).

•Saov, for ToaovTo ocrov, enough to, with the Infinitive

:

ôfiev ocrov diro^riv, we have enough to live on.

§ 602. -An inverted Attraction takes place when a•noun or pronoun is put in the same case as the Kelative

Tvhich refers to it: r-qv ovaiav rjv KareXi/jre r^ vlet oi

vr\eiovo<; d^la eariv, the property which he left his son is

not worth more, instead of ^ oiaia ijv. Poet. Ta?Se

S' difTrep ehopa.'; ijKovai tt/jo? ae, those whom you see (the

girls) have come to you (atSe a?). So oiBek, fiySeh,

become one word, as it were, with ojrts ov : ovSevl oro)

OVK diroKpiverai, properly ovSei<; iartv ora ovk, nobody

whom he does not answer. Observe also such expressions

as : 6aviMa<TTo<; ocro?, i. e. davfiacrrov iariv oaoi;, wonder-

fully great ; Oavfiaa-ra)!; <»?, i. e. davpâaTov ecniv o)?,

it is wonderful how. Comp. § 519, 5, Obs. 2.

§ 603. A singular anomalv' is presented hy Relative sentences

after eo-rt, in the sense ot "mere js. tari is in the Singular even

326 COMBINATION OF KELATIVE SENTENCES. § 604.

when the relative is in the Plural : €<ttiv o", there are those who,

i. e. some ; Utmv oh ovx ovtois eho^fv, thera are some to whom

it did not appear so. So €(mv ore (= iviore), sometimes ; ea-nv ov,.

in some places ; eanv ^, in some ways.

B) CompUeation..

§ 604. In translating Greek Eelative clauses into

English, difficulties sometimes arise through the parti-

cular relations of the sentences

:

1. When the Eelatiye as an Accusative of the Subject

belongs to an Infinitive: ol iroXeiiioi, ov? wovro airo-

(pvyelv, eâi(j)vrj<; Trapfjaav, hostes, quos aufugisse putahant,

subito aderant, the enemy whom tliey thought to have fled,

were suddenly there.

2. When the Eelative depends on a, participle: /cara-

Xa/j.^dvovcn reiT^ô? o ret')(îaafji€voi irore Axapvave^

KOivo) BiKaa-Ttjpia) exp^vro (== at i'XpwvTo Tet%to-a/iez'06

avrl), they take possession of the fort which the Acarna-

nians, after building it, used as a common judgment hall.

3. When the Eelative is in the Gfenitive dependent

on a comparative: aperrj, fi<i ovBev KTrjixa aefivorepov,.

virtue, than which no possession is more venerable (§ 416).

4. When the Eelative depends on the verb of an

inserted clause : alpov/j.e6a avTOfj,6Xov<;, ot? oiroTav tkifKelova, fitaOov StScS, fj.er eKeivwv aKoXovOrjcrovdiv (duces)

eligimus transfugas, quibussi quis pliis stipendii praebuerif

illos sequentur (i. e. oi, oirorav ti<;—StSm, aKoXovOrjcrova-iv,

qui, si iis—praebuerit, sequentur), we cJmose deserters, who,

if any <me gives them more pay, will follow him.

Ohs.—In the cases enumerated under 2 and 4, as well as those

discussed in § 605, and others hesides, the Greek language satisfies

itself with putting only once a word which has to be supplied

in different cases for several clauses belonging to one another.

§ 605. C) Combination of several Relative Glauses.

When several Eelative clauses follow one another, the Eelative-

pronoun need be expressed only once, even when, the second time, ifc

would require to be in a different case : Hom. avmydi 6c' iiiv ya—^Digitized by Microsoft®

'^ '

§ 606. INTEKKOOATIVE SENTENCES. 327

fieeo'dai r^ orea) re jrarrjp KiXerai Koi Avbdvei avr^y hid her marrywhomsoever her father urges and (who) ^'leases herself; 'Aptalos, ov

fjfifls rj6e\oiiev âtrCKea Kadiardvai Ka\ [a] iSmxafiev Kol [afji' ov]

Aa/So/ifv mora, oiros rjfias Kaxms noieiv ireipaTai,, Ariaeus, whom wewished to make king, and (to whom we) gave and (from whom we)received pledges offidelity, attemjpts to ill use us.

Ohs.—Sometimes instead of the repeated Relative airos is substi-

tuted in the case required by the construction of the sentence.

So likewise jiiv in Homer,: oi npoyovoi, oh ovk ixaptCovB' ol

Xeyovres ou8 e(j)t\ovv avrovs, cosnep vfias ovroi vvv, Trevre Kal

TCTTapaKovra err] tZv ''EWfivav rjpâv eKovTiov, your ancestors,

whom the speakers did nrjt gratify, nor did they flatter them, as

these now do you, ruled forty-five years over the readily sub-

mitting Hellenes. Horn. ; avrldeov Ilo\v<p7}fiov, oov Kparos earl

fieyioTov irdaiv KvKkamea-aL, Gdcocra 6e' p,Lv reKe vvfi(f>r), godlike

Polyphemus whose power is the greatest among all the Cyclops,

and him (whom) the nymph Thoosa lore.

Chap. XXV.

—

Înteeeogative Sentences.

§ 606. 1. The simple direct, question may be intro-

duced by the Interrogative pronouns or adverbs men-

tioned § 214, etc. In Greek several different questions

may be included in one interrogative sentence: Hom.

Tt's •jTodev eh avhpwv ; what man, whence are yon ? cnrb

rovTtov (jâvepov jev^crerai, rk rivo^ atrw^ eariv, from

this it will be clear who is chargeable with what (who is

chargeable and with what).

06s. 1.—An Interrogative pronoun may be joined with a demon-

strative : ayyfklav <f>€p<o âpeiav riva Tavrrjv ; I bring heavy

tidings ; what (is) that ? (ris avrrj eanv ;)

06s. 2.—A question may also be expressed in a subordinate clause

and by a jiartioiple : ttotc a xpn irpaiere ; inei&av -rl yivqTai

;

when will you do your duty ? luhen what shaU happen ? n I8a»

Tov KpvroôvXov voLOvvra ravra KareyvaKas avroS; what have

you seen Critohulus doing that you have charged him with this ?

Ol iToKai 'Adrjvalot ov SifKoyla-avro, imp oTa TrcTTOirjKoriov ivOpw-

jrov KivdweviyovS^tieeil i^MJAm:^^s did not calaulate how

328 INTEKEOGATIVE SENTENCES. § 607.

much people have done for whom they were going to incur risk.

Of this kind also are the phrases : tL irad<!>v ; what ham you

passed through, that? tI iiaB&v; what have you got to know,

that ? Ti iraj9av dSoceis 1-171' narpiba ; what have you passed

through to make you act unjustly towards your country f

§ 607. 2. When the question refers not to a single

word, but to a whole sentence, it may be indicated

a) merely by the tone of voice : oii (po^el fiij rfirj

TTpecy^vrepo^ §<; ; do you not fear that you are already

too old ?

h) by Interrogative particles, which, in translating into

English, cannot always be expressed by separate words,

but often may be rendered by the position of the words

and the tone of pronunciation. The most important

Interrogative particles are apa and ?), both comparable

to the Latin affix -ne. Which answer is expected, is

indicated by neither of these particles : ap' eljuX fidvTi,<;

;

am I a prophet ? rj ovtol -TroXe/Moi eicriv ; are those

enemies ?

Ohs.—If an affirmative answer is to be specially indicated oi is

added, if a negative, firj is added to Spa. Hence apa oi corre-

sponds to the Latin nonne. &pa p.rj to the English, surely not.

§ 608. Of other Interrogative expressions the following may he

noticed : rj yap ; isn't it ? ^ nov ; surely ? cSX\o rt rj, properly aXXo

Ti ecTTLv rj : does anything else happen than f hence, also with ^omitted (comp. § 626, Ols.), like the Lat. nonne, where an affirm-

ative answer is expected : SlCKo ti rj ahiKovfiev ; are we not doing

wrong ? SKKo ti ovv rnvra ravra av eirj p-ia imarfjpr) ; would

not this, then, he all one science ? ov put in a question also anticipates

an affirmative answer, and may be compared with nonne and the

English not. The opposite to it is pij, which may often be translated

by surely, as pS>v, formed from /ii) oSv, surely not, always points to

a negative answer, pfj 'A;^tXXe'a oiet (^poi/nVai Bavarov kcu kiv&vvov ;

surely you do not think Achilles cared about death and danger ?

§ 609. 3. The indirect question in Greek, according

to § 520, is by no means clearly distinguished in

regard to Mood from the direct. So likewise the direct

Interrogatives, pronouns and adverbs, are often used

instead of the indirect ones : al ywacKe'i rjpmTwv avTov<;,Digitized by Microsoft®

§612. THE NEGATIVES, 329

TiVe? elev, the women ashed them who they were

(§ 475, J).

§ 610. 4. The English indirect Interrogative if or

whether is represented by el (§ 525, etc.), more rarely

by edv (with the Subj.), sometimes by apa, and in Horn.

by rj (r)£). Whether or not or whether perhaps may be

rendered by firj : a-KOTreire, el SiKauo<; j^pijcro/jLai, t&\6jq>, see whether I speak justly ; 6pa, /irj irai^tov eXeyev,

see whether or not he spoke in jest.

On the subject of the Interrogative Sentence heing drawn pro-

leptically into the principal sentence, see §§ 397, 519, 5, 06s. 2.

§ 611. The direct double question (disjunctive ques-

tion) is most generally introduced by mTepov (-n-oTepa)

—^, Lat. utrum—an : irorepov BeSpuKev rj ov ; irorepov

uKcov rj eKcov ; has he done it or not ? mllingly or unwil-

lingly ? In an indirect double question the same Inter-

rogatives may be used, but also el—rj, whether—or, and

efre—eXre : a/iropoviiev, elVe clkoiv elVe eKwv BiSpaKev, we

ure in dvuit whether he did it willingly or unwillingly.

Obs.—The Homeric language has for the direct, but more fre-

quently for the indirect double question, the conjunctions 7 (r/e),

V (^0 • *5 v/A^' €v frjecra-t. Ilo(reiddo}V eBafxaa-trev, 7] irov avaptrioi

avbpes ibrjKrjtravT iiri x^pcrou ; did Poseidon overpower you in

your ships, or have hostile men injured you on land f elire Se

fioL fivrjOTrjs dXo^ov jSouX^v re voov re, rje fievet jrapa iratbl Koi

e/iireSa irdvTa (j>vKd<r<rei., rj rjhrf fuv €yr)fiev 'Kxp-iaiv orris Spurros,

tell me the purpose and inclination of the wooed wife, whether

she remains with the son and guards all carefully, or has

already married him who is the lest of the Achaeans ? ^ (rje) is

also used for rj (^e) in the second member.

Chap. XXVI.—The Negatives.

A) Simple Negatives.

§ 612. The Greeks have two different negatives, oii

and fiy.NumereoBf/zedS^BMdsft^.nd derivatives are

330 THE NEGATIVES. § 613.

formed from each, as : ovtb, /jî^tc, oiiSek, firjBei';, ouSa/xw?,

/i9j8a/A(S?. The principal distinction between ov and fj,ij

is that ov denies, but /m'^ declines. Hence arise th&

foUowiag special rules

:

§ 613. 1. oil is used in aU direct statements, whether

the reality of something is denied by the Indicative,

or the possibility or probability of something by the

Optative with dv : ÎXnnro^ ovk dyei elprjvqv, Philip

does not maintain peace ; ovk av d<yoi elprjvrjv, he would

not (will hardly) maintain peace; ovk av Svvato firj

Ka/MQiv evBai/jMvelv, ymi could not he happy without labour-

ing (§ 516).

Obs.—ov is also used in the peculiar Subjunctive of the Homeric

language mentioned § 513.

2. ov is used in direct questions to which an affirma-

tive answer is expected (§ 608) ; but ^rj when a negative

answer is expected (§ 608).

§ 614. 3. In independent sentences ixrj is used with

the Subjunctive (§§ 510, 512), with the Optative of

wishing (§ 514), with the Indicative of wishing (§ 515),

and with the Imperative : fir] dopv^rjarjTe, do not make a

disturbance ; jjlt) rêvoiTo, may it not happen; Hom. &<; fxrf

cicpeKXe yevea-Oat,, would it nsver happened! firjiroT hr

aTrpijKTota-L voov 6%e, never devote your thoughts to what

is impracticable.

Obs.'—In these oases jxr] generally corresponds to the Latin ne. It

is often used in negative oaths with the Indicative, in so far as

the swearer declines something (§ 612) : Hom. iot<b vvv toSe

Vaia . . . . ftrj 6t ifirjv lorqra llo<r€L8dtov .... nTjfjiaiveL Tptoasy

let Oaea now know this .... not with my consent does Poseidon

afflict the Trojans,

§ 615. 4. ov in general is used in all those dependent

sentences which do not express a negative purpose or a

condition : ySeiv, oto ov paSiov eir), I knew it was not

easy ; a ovk idre tou? vratSa? TroLelv, ravra avTol ttokIts,

what you do not allow your children to do you do your

selves.Digitized by Microsoft®

§616- THE NEGATIVES. 331

Obs. 1.—In indirect questions oi as well as firj may he used with

£1 in the sense of whether : crKOTrafiev, el Trpiiret 17 oi, let ui

consider whether it is hecoming or not; neipatroiiai /iade'iv, el'

dXr]6es rj firj, I will try to learn whether it is true or not.

Obs. 2.—In such Relative Sentences as contain quite a general

idea, fifj may be used : & fir) olSa, oiSe o'Loy-ai elSevai, what 1do not know, I do not think I know.

§ 616. 5. /iTj in general is used in all those dependent

sentences in whicli a negative purpose or a condition is

expressed ; hence fjirj is the negative in sentences denoting-

intention or purpose (§ 530), in those indirect Interroga-

tive and Relative sentences where a purpose of hinder-

ing is implied, in all the Protaseis of Hypothetical

Periods (§ 534, &c.), and lastly in Hypothetical Eelative

(§ 554) clauses, as well as in Hypothetical Temporal

clauses (§§ 556, 557) : edv tk Kafiy, •jrapaKaXei'; larpov,

OTTO)? /XT] a-TToddvy, when any one is ill, you send for a

fhysidan, that he may not die; i]nf)<îa-aa0e Toiavra e'f

av /j/rjEeTTore v/uv /MeTafieXijcret,, vote for such things as

will never cause you to repent \_ea quorum numquam vos

poeniteat'\ ; opa, ottib? /u.^ aoi diroaTijaovTai, see that they

do not abandon you ; i^fjv aoi airdvai m ttj? TroXew?, et

fMT] ijpea-Kov aoi ol vofioi, it was at your choice to leave the

state, if its laws did not please you ; dedaaade, o)? aaOpov

i(7Ti irdv, o n av fir) ScKaia<; y TreTTpar/fiivov, see, how

rotten everything is, which is not Justly done; fieyia-TTj

ryir/verai accTT^pia, orav yvvrj irpo'i dvSpa firj SiXoc^raTfj,

it is the greatest safety when a wife is not at variance with

her husband.

Obs. 1.—In sentences of this kind, sometimes oi is used to

negative a single word : iravrais ovras exî, lav re m <j>rJTe eav

re 0^re, it is entirely so whether you deny or assert it.

Obs. 2.—The Optative expressing repetition likewise has /i^.

(§ 547). . .

.

Obs. 3.—With verbs of fearing, /i^ like the Latm ne, signihes.

lest 01 that: SeSoiKO, firi eTrCKa6a>ne6a r?js oixaSe oboi, I fear

lest we forget the way home (comp. § 533). Even without &

governing verb the fear that something may happen is mtro-

duc6d by iî,, whi0i^fflfe|feigys?\?fc^to*e translated if only not,.

332 THE NEGATIVES. §617

or if but not : /ifi iTriKadaiieBa ttjj oiKaBe oSoC, if only we da

notforyet the way home (comp. §§ 620, 621, and 512).

§ 617. 6. The Infinitive generally has firj, particularly

"when the Infinitive has the article : ra? ofioia'; x^dpiraf

jMr) avTiBiBovat alcr')(p6v, not to return equal thanks is

base ; aoi to fir) criyfjcrai Xonrov r)v, it remained for you

not to he silent.

Obs. 1.

—

ov may he put with thelnfimtive after verbs of declaring

and conceiving : 6no\oyS> ov Kara toutous ehai pfjraip, 1acknowledge I am not an orator in their sense.

Obs. 2.—Ssre, so that, when joined with the Infinitive generally

has fiTj, more rarely ou.

Obs. 3.—After verbs of hindering, forbidding, refusing, denying,

and others which contain the idea of declining (§ 612), fif) is

usually added to the Infinitive, and is rendered in English byfrom, or not expressed at all : KaXvofitBa jii] im6eiv, we are

hindered from learning; ^pvovvro firj jrejrrmKcVat, they denied

havingfallen.

§ 618. 7. With Participles firj is used when they are to

he understood hypotheticaUy, i. e., in the sense of a Hypo-

thetical Protasis (§ 583) : ovk av Svvaio jj,r] xafiav evBai-

jjioveiv, i. e. el fir) KajMoi'i (§ 613) ; so, likewise, when the

Participle has the article, if it can be resolved into a

hypothetical or a hypothetical relative clause : o fir]

Sapel<; avOpcoTTd ov TraiBeverai, i. e. idv Tt? fj-rj Bapfj, or

o? av /Mr] Bapfj (§ 583).

Obs. 1.—When fir) is added as a Negative to single woi'ds, they

are likewise to be taken hypotheticaUy : to ^ij dyadov, the not

good, i. e., 6 &v firj dyadov rj.

Obs. 2.—With Participles as well as with other words fif] often

occurs as a Negative on account of the prohibitive, declining,

or hypothetical nature of the whole sentence : ^rjcjiia-aiTBe tov

TTokf/iov firj <j>opridevTes to airlKa Seivov, determine upon the warwithoutfearing the immediate danger.

B) Several Negatives combined.

§ 619. 1. A Negative is not neutralised by a subsequent

compound Negative of the same Mnd, but only continued.^

In translating, the Negative is employed only mee inDigitized by Microsoft®

§ 621. THE NEGATIVES. 335

English, and the place of the other Negative is supplied

by an indefinite : Poet, ovk eariv ovSev Kpeiaaov fj v6/j.oe

TToXet, tJiere is not anytMng better for a state than laws

ouSet9 "TroyjTOTe AtOKparovi ovSev aaeê^ ovSe avocriov ovre

irpaTTOVTo^ 0VT6 XeyovTO'; ^Kovaev, no one has ever heard

Socrates either doing or saying anything impious or unholy,

Obs.—A Negative is neutralised by a subsequent simple Negative

of the same kind : ovSelff avdpairoiv dSiKSiV tlo'lv ovk diroSacet.^

no one who does wrong will not (i. o., every one will) pay the

penalty.

§ 620. 2. oi) followed by fir) with the Subjunctive or

Future Indicative is an emphatic negative. This modeof speaking is to be explained by the idea of fear being

supplied after ov (comp. § 616, Ohs. 3) : oii fj,fj iroi.ria-a),

about the same as ov ô^rjTeov /ir/ iroirjaa, there is no

fear that I shall do it, i. e. I shall certainly not do it

:

ovheh jjLrjiTOTe evp^cret, to KaT ifie ovSev ikXei^div, no one

will ever find that anything, as far as depends on me, is

neglected; ov firjiroTe eâpvo<; '^kvajj.ai, I shall certainly

never deny.

§ 621. 3. iiri followed by ov is used in very different

ways

:

a) After verbs of fearing, /j-tj ov corresponds to the

Lat. ne nm, or ut, and is to be translated by that not :

SeBoiKa, fir) oil 6e/MTov fi,vereor, ne nonjustum sit, Ifear

that it is not just (comp. § 616, Obs. 3) ; also without a

governing verb, fii) ov defurov y, if it be but not right, i. e.

if it be only not wrong (comp. § 512, and § 616, Obs. 3)

;

Horn, /i?; vv Toi ov xpalanri aKrjin-pov Kal arefiâ Oeoh,

the god's staff and garland will surely not help you.

b) In indirect questions where /j-vwould mean if

perhaps (§ 610), fi^ ov means if or whether perhaps not :

adpei fir) ov rovro § ro afyaeSv, look whether perhaps

this is not the good.

Ohs.—In the cases adduced under a and b, m is a Negative Con'

junction, and oia/i#/2ie66ja)Mrdi«)&)fiôial word.

:S34'

THE NEGATIVES. §822.

c) fit} ov is used with the Infinitive after Negative

expressions, in the sense of so as not, or not to : ouSei?

•o16<;t6 aXXco? Xiyav firj ov KaTor/eXaa-ro? elvai, no on£

speaJdng otherwise is able not to he ridiculous.

d) /j,^ oil is further used with the Infinitive after nega-

tive verbs, or questions containing verbs of hindering,

forbidding, denying, refusing (§ 617, 05s. 3). The In-

finitive in this case is often preceded by the Article.

In English the negative is not expressed : ov KwXvo/ieda

jj.ri ov fiaOeiv, we are not hindered from learmng ; fiv

-jrapfj^ TO /u.^ ov <})pdcrai, do not omit saying it ; riva oiei

ATTapvrjcrea-Oai fit) oiixi' eTTicrTacrdai, ra BiKaia ; whom

do you think will deny at all understanding what is

Just ?

Ols.—ov is here only a repetition of the Negative contained in

the principal sentence.

C) Some Negative Phrases.

§ 622. 1. ovBev, /MrjSev, and ovti, fJiriTi, rwthing, are

•often used as free Accusatives, like the Latin nihil,

meaning not, not at all; comp. § 404, Obs.

2. ovirto, ixriTTco, not yet ; are to be carefully distin-

guished from. ovKert,, /irjKeri,, no longer : oihrfo ire'jrovr]fca,

nondumfeci; ovKeri jroi^a-co, nan ampliusfaciam.

3. ovx oTi stands for ov Xeya on, I do not say that,

mot to mention; koL ovy otl 6 JS-piTav iv rjair)(l.a r)v, aXKa

jcal oi t^iXoi avTov, and not to mention (i. e. not only)

Crito was quiet, but his friends also were.

4. jxr) oTi for fifj eiirco on (/J.'tj ottib?) means dont

suppose, nedum, by which the mention of something is

declined as unnecessary, and hence may sometimes be

translated in Negative sentences by not only not : fir} onSea's, aXXa Kal av6po)Troi ov (piXova-i tov<; aTTKyrovvTa';,

don't suppose that only Gf-od, but men also do not love the

faithless [non homines injidos amant ; nedum dens]. In

like manner ov% ott&j?, properly not that, don't suppose^

-§ 624 a. THE PAETICLES. 335

may frequently be rendered in connexion with Nega-tives by not only not.

5. ixovov oil, fjLovov oiixh o^^y not, is equivalent to

ulmost, nearly ; oaov ov, temporal [tantum nan'], nearly,

almost: KarayeXa vtt avSpav ou? crii fiovov oil iTpo<i-

Kvveif, you are ridiculed by men whom you almost worship.

6. ov fJirjv or oil fiivTov aXkd, however, notwithstand-

ing, is to be explained by an ellipsis : 6 iWo? /iiKpou

cKeivov i^eTpayrjXia-ev oil fir]v (viz. i^eTpaxv^ta-ev) odXaiirifji,ei,vev 6 Kvpo<;, the horse nearly threw him off, (did)

not, however, but Cyrus kept his seat.

On oine, fcijre, oiiBe, /J-rjSe, § 625.

Chap. XXVIL—The Pakticles.

§ 623. Particles are those indeclinable words which

serve partly to connect sentences, partly to give em-phasis to particular parts of a sentence, and to enliven

language. The Particles which serve to connect sen-

tences are called Conjunctions; those which give pro-

minence to particular parts of a sentence, or impart

animation by making entire sentences prominent, are

called emphatic particles.

In regard to position they are either prepositive, i. e.

take the first place in a sentence, or postpositive, i.e.

always stand after at least one other word in a sentence.

Ohs.—The Conjunctions are divided into various classes according

to their meaning. Several Conjunctions, however, belong

equally to different classes. They will he arranged according

to their original or primitive signification.

A) Conjunctions.

Preliminary Eemark.

§ 624. a. The Conjunctions are here enumerated

without regard to the formal relation of sentences to

one another (§ 519). But^ [digitized by Microsoft®

336 THE PAKTICLES. §624.

1. Co-ordination is implied ia all Copulative and Dis-

junctiye Conjunctions, the Adversative Conjunctions with

the exception of o/iCD? which is used principally in the

Apodosis, among the Causal Conjunctions yap, and all

Illative Conjunctions except axire ;

2. Subordination is implied in all the rest.

Ols.—Mucli more rarely than in modem languages, more rarely

also than in Latin, is one word or one sentence added to another

in Greeli without some Conjunction. The Asyndeton (aa-uv-

hiTov, want of connexion') takes place more frequently only in

an Epexegesis (Jire^f]yrj(ns), i.e., a subsequent explanatory-

addition to something already alluded to in the previous sen-

tence : elfii Tis yiKoios larpos- lafievos fifiôv to voayifun

iroiSi, I am an odd physician ; iy curing the disease I make if

vjorse. Wherever the Asyndeton occurs in other cases, the

speaker generally intends to produce a special effect by it.

I.

—

Copulative Conjunctions.

§ 624. 1. The two Copulative Conjunctions are kcu,

which in general corresponds to the Latin ei, and the

postpositive enclitic re, which in general corresponds to

the Latin que. The language of poetry has besides ^Se

and 'tSe with the meaning and [comp. atque'].

2. The Greeks, like the Eomans, are fond of expressing

the idea of addition in two connected parts of a sentence,

either by /cat

—

Kai or re—Kai, or re—re : kol Kara jrjv

Kol Kara. daXaa-aav, loth hy land and ly water ; Horn.

'ArpetSai re Kai aSXoi iv/cv>j/j,i,Be<; 'Aâtot, ye Atridae as

well as ye other ivell-greaved Achaeans ; Horn, alel yap

Tot, epi^ re î\r] iroKeiiol re fid'âi re, for strife is always

pleasant to you and wars and battles. We may further

add the Epic ^fiev—r/Be, as well—as also.

Obs.—In single instances we also find re—St, where the second

member is made more prominent by contrast.

3. Kai has, moreover, the meaning also : Horn. Trap'

efioiye koo aXXoi, o'C Ke fie rip/ria-ovai, with me aro also

others, who will honour me.

5 «25. THE PARTICLES. 337

In this sense, also, km is frequently used in both the

connected parts of a sentence : koX rjfuv ravTo, SoKet d'/rep

•jtai âajX^l, we also approve the same t}dng as the king

does {also). The meaning also by intensification be-

tjomes even ; koX Xiav, even very much ; and in the oppo-

site case even hut : Kal ^paypv )(p6vov, even but a short

time. Koi Si answers to the English and also : SUaiov Kal

irpeirov Se dfjia, just and at the same time also becoming.

After words of resemblance or Kkeness /cat means as

:

ojjLOLw; Kai, aeque ac.

4. aXXffls re (cat properly means, "totli in other respects, and•also;" it serves to give prominence to the subsequent word or

words, and may he translated by especially : jâXfTroi/ eWi Siaâlveiv

TOP TtOTafiov aXXmr re Ka\ noXefilav iroiKXStv eyyui ovrtov, it is difficult

to cross the river especially as many of the enemy are near, km 8fi

Kal is used to make the last part of a series emphatic : Herod.

iKpoiVou jSao-iXevovTOS awiKviovTai is SdpSis oXXot re oi ndiTfS ix

TTTis 'EXXdSos a-o(j)urTai, Koi 8^ Koi SdXav, during the reign of Croesus

there came from Sellas hoth all the other wise men and especially

Solon [Lat. cum—tum\5. In the Epic Dialect re is frequently employed to indicate the

agreement not only of separate parts of a sentence, but of whole

sentences, often, too, in connexion with other Particles, such as

Kai, iiiv, Sf, aXKa, and with relatives (osre, oo-osre). In these cases

Tc must generally be left untranslated or rendered by an unaccented

dso : Hom. os Ke QeoXs Imit^WriTai iiaXa t eicKvou aiiroVf whoever

obeys the gods they greatly listen to him also.

Ohs.—The re in asri, oldsTe, which occurs also in prose, is of the

same origin.

6. The rising climax is also expressed by oi fiovov—aXXa Kal, not only—but also. On ou% on, /jltj oti, ou%

OTTO)?, see § 622.

§ 625. 1. The Particles ovBi, fjjjSe and oike, /xi^Te

serve to form a negative series. Two different meanings

belong to ovBi and yui^Se, viz.

a) rwyr either, and not ; in this sense they are used to

connect a single member of a sentence with a preceding

one negatively : Hom. ^pwfiTjs ovt^ aTrreai, ovBe ttot'^to?,

t/ou touch not meat nor drink either ; tt/so? crov ovS" ifiov

^pd<^.o,, to your (^^d^ft^^m^^cPo^lM "^"^^ ^'"^'^^ 'P"^^

338 THE PARTICLES. §826*.

5) also not, not event iXwiêo ovBe roii'; rroXefiiovr-

fieveiv eri, I hope that the enemy also will not longer stay ;•

ovSe TovTo i^rjv, not even this was allowed \ne hoc quidem

liceiai].

2. ovTe—ovre, fxriTe—fJi.riTe, are used with mutual re-

ference to each other, and may be translated neither—nor : Horn, ovre ttot e? iroXefiov TraiXiaKeTo, ovTe iror

eh ar/opriv, he neither went to war nor to the assembly.

Sometimes a negative member of a sentence is brought

into relation with a positive one, by means of ovre or

fjLriTe—T6 [Lat. neque—«^] : cjfioa-av fiijTe irpohaxrew

aXKrjkov; avfiyi,a')(pi re ecreaOat,, they swore not to betray

one another and to be allies.

Obs.—Îf something else be added to tTvo members connected byotVe—oiVe, or /u^re

—

jthTe, it may be done by ovbe, jirjSe. When,,

on the contrary, oi8e or îjSe corresponds to a preceding otVe

or lifjre, it mnst be called an irregularity (comp. re-Se, § 624,

2, Obs.), and the member thus added is emphatic, dWa yap-

ovre TOVTbtv ovdev ecrriv oK-qBes, ovde y el rivos aKijKoare, oys

iya TTaiBeveiv e7n;êtp£ dvBpbiiTovs, hut neither is any of these

things true, nor even if you have heard fro-ni any one that Iundertake to train men.

II.

—

Disjunctive Oonjunetions.

§ 626. 1. 7], carefully to be distinguished from ^/

(§§ 643, 607), meansa) or, and in this sense is often doubled : 7—->j, either—

or, for which tjtoi—^ is used when greater emphasis is

to be given to the first member of the sentence : r> aa-ros

TK rj êvo<;, either some citizen or a stranger.

b) than, after comparatives and comparative adjectives

like aXXo9, alius ; eTepo<;, alter ; Bidôpot;, different ;.

ivavTLo<;, opposed to, &c. : TtVt av fiaXKov TnaTevaaifM 4croi ; whom should I trust more than you ? ovhev aXkcf

i'mT7]Sevovaiv rj a'TToOinjaiceiv, they think upon nothing

else than dyin^.

Ohs.—After liKiov (jrXeiov contracted n-Xetj/), more, and eXarrov,

neiov, less, fj is sometimes omitted with numerals, just as juo?»

§629. THE PARTICLES. 339

is after plus : enj yeyov^s irXelov i^hofirjKovTa, more than seventy

years old [^lus septuaginta annos natus]. The same is the case

also after oXXo n in questions (§ 608).

§ 627. 2. e'ire—elVe, iavre—idvre are used like theLatin sive—sive, when it is to be left undecided which of

two sides is to be chosen : etVe aXTyê? etVe -i/reOSo?, ov

KcCkov fiob SoKei TovTo Towo/j,a e'xêw, whether true or false

it seems to me not fair to have this name.

III.

—

Adversative Conjunctions.

§ 628. 1. Be, expresses so slight a contrast or oppo-sition, that though it is generally rendered by but, it

may also, and especially in Horn., be translated by and.

The Greeks, however, also like to indicate the first of

two sentences which are contrasted to one another,

and this they do by /j,iv, in truth, truly, indeed; but it

may often be left imtranslated : Horn. SXkoi fiev pa Oeol

re teal dvepe<; hriroKopvcTTai evBov iravvv-îoi,, Ata S' ovk

e')(e vijSvfio^ vTTvo';, the other gods, indeed, and the horse-

hair crested men slept through the night, hut sweet sleep

did not hold Zeus. As here, fiev—Se express a contrast,

so elsewhere they indicate only a difference: Aapelov

Kal TiapvcrdTi,So<; jlyvovrai TratSe? Svo, -jrpea/Svrepot; [lev

'Apraêp^<;, vemrepa he K.vpo';, Darius and Parysatis

had two children, the elder Artaxerxes, the younger Cyrus;

Hom. Trept fiev ôv\y Aavatov irepl B' 'iare fid'^êa'Oai, in

council, on the one hand, and in battle on the other, you

are distinguished among the Danai.

Ohs.—In Homer an Apodosis also may he opposed to its Protasis

by means of 8e, especially when the Protasis is introduced by a

temporal conjunction : ecos 6 ravB' apjiaive Kara (j)pEva Koi Kara

6vfi6v, rjXBe 8' 'ABrjvr], while he pored on this in his mind and

spirit Athene came. This is founded on a combination of co-

ordination and subordination. Comp. § 519, 1 and 5, Ohs.

§ 629. 2. dXKa, yet, hut (originally Ace. PL Neut. of

aXKo^), denotes a stronger contrast than Be: Hom.evB' aXXoi fiev Travre^ i'7rev(fyijfj,7jaav Aôstot

—

dW ovk

'ArpelBy 'Aya/j,e/j,W9îz^$9imicS3^^ dWd KaKcb'i dîei,,

340 THE PABTICLES. § 630.

then all the other Achaeans assented, yet it did not meet

the feelings of Atrides Agamemnon, but he harshly dis-

missed him.

Ols. 1

.

—After a kypothetical sentence either expressed or under-

stood, oXkA., sometimes with a strengthening yi added to it, mayfrequently he rendered by hut or yet at least: ei fif) iravra,

aWa TToXXa y 'ia-re, if not all, yet you know at least much

;

Poet. S) 6eo\ irarpaoi crvyyevia-Oe y' dWa vvv, oh gods of myfathers, he with me at least now [if not before].

Oha. 2.

—

oKKa frequently serves to break off a long discussion and

emphatically to introduce a request : Horn. aXKa iridea-Be Koi

i'/ii/iej, hut do you alsofollow me.

Ohs. 3.—After negatives aXX' rj or aXKa alone means except

:

apyvpiov iih ovk exa> aXX' ^ iiiKpov ri, I have no money except a

little. On ov fiTjv aWa, § 622, 6.

§ 630. Other Conjunctions which point out a contrast

or a transition to something different are

:

3. av, avre, properly again, then on the other hand, yet.

4. Horn, avrdp, and ardp, but, on the contrary, yet.

5. fiivToi, certainly, however, see § 643, 13.

6. Kairoi,, and yet, still.

1. ofiQ)';, nevertheless, yet, denotes a strong contrast

[Lat. tamen, nihilominus'\. On o/itu? as a supplement to

a participle, § 587, 5

§ 681. IV.

—

Conjunctions of Comparison.

1. £09, as (Lat ut)

is properly the adverb of o?, rj, o. It differs in accent

from w?, so or thus (§ 99), except when in poets and the

Homeric Dialect, it is placed after the word compared

(§ 98, a) in which case it is oxytone : ira-TTjp &? r;7rto?

fjev, he was gentle as a father. Like the Lat. ut it is

employed in very different ways

:

a) In its original comparative sense (u? means as or

how, and is used in comparisons : d><; /SouXet, as you wish ;

jiaKpov (1)9 yepovTi, far for me an old man (Lat. tan-

quam) ; Horn. 0)9 jmol Bi'^erai KaKov eic Kaicov alei (liow

with TM one evilfollows anotlier, I^at. quam) ; with super-Digitized by Microsoft®

§ 632- THE PAETICLES. 341

latives like the Lat. quam : £09 rdxi(7Ta, quam ceUrrime ;as quickly as possible (comp. oti). In statements of

number and measure it means about, nearly ; co? SeKa,

about ten ; &>? em to ttoXv, for the most part ; with verbsof motion or action it indicates what is merely intended,

apparent : dirriei cb? et? tou? TroXefiiov;, he went away in

the direction of the enemy (as if he went against the

enemy) ; hence it occurs with participles in the mannerdescribed § 588. On its use with the Infinitive, § 564,

and on oi? as a preposition, § 450.

b) In a temporal sense <a? means wlien, as soon as

(comp. Lat. ut) : Horn, co? etS', &<; jmlv /moXKov eSv x^^^!when he saw him, anger pierced him the more; co? Tdxtcrra

«B9 inri<j)aivev, idvovro, as soon as dawn appeared, they

sacrificed [Lat. ut primum"].

c) In a carnal sense m? means as (Lat. quum), since, and

with subsequent statement of the reason, for: heojxat

crov irapafieivai, to? eym rjhio'Ta cLKOvcrai^i, crov, I beg

you to stay here, as I should hear you with the greatest

pleamre.

d) After verbs of saying and declaring m? means thai

7\Kev ar/yeXXa>v tk, ft)? 'EXareta KaTeiXrjTTTat,, some one

came announcing that Elataea was taken. § 526, b.

e) ft)? is rarely used in a consecutive sense, so that

((5j?T6).

/) In a final sense «!)? means in order that : (u? /j-rj

TTai/Te? oXcovTab, in order that all may not perish. Comp.

§ 530, &c.

g) On to? expressing a wish (Lat. utinam) see § 514.

§ 632. 2. mirep, as,

is only a strengthened w? (comp. § 641, 3), and is used

only in a comparative sense.

3. oTTfi)?, how, that, in order that,

is principally used as a final Conjunction, and may then

342 THE PAKTIOLES. § 63S.

be translated by that, or in order that, comp. § 530, &c.

On ov^ oTTM?, § 622, 4.

4. &J9Te, as, so that,

has rarely the comparative meaning as, generally the

consecutive so that, when it is followed either by an

Infinitive or a finite verb. Comp. § 565.

5. Horn, ^vre, as, just as, like, only in comparisons.

§ 633. V.

—

Declarative Conjunctions.

1. oTi, that, because [Lat. quodi],

is originally nothing but the Neuter of the pronoun

OST49, Ti, on the distinction of which from oti, compare

§ 214, Obs. 2. Like the Latin quod, 'on has two prin-

cipal meanings, the declarative that, and the caudal

became.

a) oTi means that after verbs of saying and declaring

(comp. § 525) : '}lpdK\eCTo<; Xeyec, oti, irdvra 'X^'pel Kal

ovSev fiivei, Heraclitus says, that everything moves andnothing is stationary. Hence the phrase hrjkov on (also

written BrjXovoTo), it is clear that, manifestly.

Ohs.—Sometimes, also, a direct speech, is introduced by on, so that

the Conjunction is, as it were, a mere sign of quotation : eS^Xou

fi ypafjjrj, on ScfiiaroKX^s tJko) napa uk, {he letter stated (that') 1TJiemistocles am come to you.

h) because, that [Lat. quod'\ : Horn, 'xaonevo';, tov

apiarov Â'âi.wv ovBev enaw;, angry that you have not

honoured the best of the Achaeans.

The use of on (or o n) with a superlative deserves

attention : on rd-xîcrra like w? Tajîara, as quickly as

'

possible; and onfj,j],

except, besides: oiiic fjv Kptjvr) otl /jltj

aia, there was no fountain except one.

2. o)?, tJiat, § 631, d.

3. Sion, that, § 636, 2,

4. ovveKa, that, § 636, 3.

'^ 635. THE PAETICI/ES. 343

VI.

—

Temporal Conjimatdam.

§ 634. (Eespecting the Moods, see § 556, &e.)

1. ore, OTTOTe, when, as [^qucmdo, cum] : orav, oTrorav,

when, if: rjv Trore 'xpovo'i, ore deal jmsv rjaav, dvqra Se

r/evr] ovK rjv, there once was a time wliencjods existed, hut

mortal races did not exist; Horn, oi S' ore 8^ Xijj.kvo'i

-TToXv/Sevêo? eVro? lkovto, laria fj,ev crreiXavTO, hut when'they got within the deep harhour t^y furled the sails,

'ore and oiroTe with the Optative, according to § 558,

Ohs. 1, mean whenever, as often as: Horn, 'ivda -n-dpo^

Koi/iad' ore fj-iv jXvkv^ vttz/o? iKavoc, where formerly he

used to lie down whenever sweet sleep came upon him.

Sometimes ore has the causal meaning sirtce.

2. Hom. e5T6= 0Te.

3. ^vLKa, oTTTjvlKa, when, at ike time when (§ 217),

•denotes rather a point of time : iJi/tW rjv SetXij, eârrrivrj'i

.iiTKpaivovTat ol TroXifjuiot, when it was evening the enemy

'Suddenly appeared.

4. ^/i09, poet, when.:

Horn. 5/*0E 8' Tfikios fica-ov ovpavov a/;i</>(|3cj3^Kei, (cni r^ 817 XP^'ireia iraTTjp tViVatve TaKavra, when (at the moment) the sim

had entered mid heaven, just 'then the father raised the golden

§ 635. 5. eirei, after, when, as: iiredv, hr-qv, eirdv,

-wJien ; Hom. airap eirel Trocrto^ koX iBrjTvoi; .e'f epov evTO,

hut when they'had quenched the desire for food and drink;

K-vpa i/7reo-%6T0 dvSpl eKdcrro) Bdxreiv irevre dpryvplov

fivd'i, iirdv ek Ba^vXava ij/caa-iv, Cyrus promised to give

each man five silver minae when they should come to

Babylon, eirel frequently introduces a reason, and then

is to be translated by because or for: Hom. dXKd

TriOeaOe Kal vfip.e'i, ivrel weiOeaOai, d/ieLvov, hut do you

also ohey me, for it is better to obey.

6. iirei^ri, now since, since : eVetSa?/, when, is eVet

strengthened by ^ (§ 642), and points more strongly

to the reason assigned than iirei: iareiSij dvecpx^V ôDigitized by Microsoft®

344 THE PAETICEES. § 68S»

Sea/MOT'ijpcov,. ehrjKOoîev, now since the prison was openedn

we entered.

1. Sbt, as Ivng as, till \_quamdiu, dum, donee] : ew? eV*

iX-TTK, as long as there is still hope; irepiejMevofiev eco?

avoixêij] TO Sea-/j,coTi^piov, we waited till the prison should

be opened.

8. 69Te.I ^ "

8. /*e%/3t, a'xpi (comp. § 455) J^'"''

10. poet. 6j>pa, as long as, till:

Ham. o<j)pa fiiv Tjiis ^v, as long as it was morning ; Horn, cj^fi

k6tov, o(j>pa rfXf'crtjTj, he nurses wrath till hefulfils it. ocppa is-

very often a Particle of purpose or intention, and then to be

translated by that, in order that : Horn. o(f)pa firj olos dyepavTos^

ta, in order that I may not he alone unhonoured.

11. Trpiv, before, sooner [^priusquam] (comp. § 565),

is- joined sometimes, with, the InfinitiTe, sometimes with

a finite yerb. Its original adverbial meaning, previously,,

earlier, has been preserved, especially in to irplv, for-

merly. In Hom. the Conjunction Trpiv may refer back,

to the adverb wpiv : ovh^ oê irplv Aavaolcnv aetKea

\oi/yov aTTaxrei, irpiv y a-TTo iraTpl îXa Sofievai eXiKO)-

-TTcSa Kovpriv, and he will not avert the dreadful suffering'

from the Danai, before they have given back the quick-eyed'

maiden to her father.

12. •irdpo'i, Hom. == Trpiv.

VII.

—

Causal Conjunctions.

§ 636. 1. oTt, § 633, h2. BioTi, because, properly 8ia tovto on, for this reason-

ihat, or that.

3. ovveKsa, because; poet., from o5 eveKO, for rovrov

'ivsKa oTi, for this reason that ; because, also declarative-

that. So likewise odovveKa from otov (ovtivc;) eveica.

4. eVet, § 635, 5.

5. OTe, § 634, 1.

6. yap (always postpositive), for, namely, to witr

Special peculiarities in the use of yap are

:

§ 637 THE PAKTICLES. 345

a) In animated discourse the sentence containing a

reason is often put before the one for which the reason

is given, especially after a Vocative : Horn. 'ArpelSr],

•TToWol 7^/3 redvacn KapijKOfj.oavre'; Â.yaioi—tw ae yprj

iroKefiov Travcrai, Atrides, for many rich-haired Achaeans-

have died, therefore you ought to put an end to the war.

b) By namely, ydp may be translated when it intro-

duces the substance of a speech or opinion before

announced, so especially after TSKfiripuov Be, fiaprvpioi/

Si (supply eo-Tt), for that there is a proof, a testimony.

c) In answers ya/j may often be rendered by yes^

certainly, but must in reality be explained by anellipsis : cuycovia-Teov fiev apa tjimv Trpo'i tov<; dvSpa^

;

avarfKt) <ydp, eiftrj, must we then contend with the men?yes, it is necessary, said he—the complete answer would

be, we must contend, for it is necessary.

d) In animated questions â/j serves to give emphasis

like the Lat. nam : tl yap ; quidnam ? how so ? rj yap ;

ov yap ; is it not so ? ttw yap ov ; how could it he other-

wise ? el yap is the Lat. utinam. dXKa, yap \at enim'\

corresponds to the English but surely; ov yap dXKa

properly : for it is not so, but, hence however.

YIII.

—

Inferential Conjunctions.

§ 637. 1. apa (Ep. dp and enclitic pd, poet, also apa,

postpositive), then, therefore, accordingly, always refers

to something known or resulting from what has gone

before. It is most frequently used in Homer to connect

sentences slightly: w? dp' ejyt), thus then he spoke;

'ArpeiBrj^ B' apa vfja Oorjv SXaBe irpoepva-a-ev, and Atrides

accordingly drew the fleet ship to the sea (as was to be

expected), ovk apa often means not forsooth, el dpa if

then or if perhaps, and in indirect questions whether

perhaps.

On the Interrogative apa, § 607, b.

2. oZv (NewIoB,Jj',ôs|j)ositi^), then, consequenthj.

:346 THE PARTICLES. § 63So

is more emphatic than dpa : Hom. IjTot voctto^ aircuXeTo

irarpo? ifiolo' out' oiiv ayyeXLTj ert, Treidofiai, e'i Trodev

MXdoi, oiiTe Oeo-n-poiriTj'; i/Mird^ofiao, mirely my father's

return is lost, therefore I no longer believe a message, if

.one comes from anywhere, nor concern myself about pro-

phecy, jjbev ovv (comp. § 643, 12), no doubt, certainly,

well tTien ; 8' ovv, certainly ; aXX' ovv, but certainly ; yap

o\)v, yet surely. When joined to relatives, oh) has the

generalising meaning of the Lat. cunque : 6<;ri,<;ovv, who-

ever, quicunque (§§ 218, 600).

By combination with ovv we obtain the Negative

ovKovv, not then, to be carefully distinguished from

-oiiKovv, which is properly an Interrogative, not then?'

but as an affirmative answer is expected after an. inter-

rogative with ov (§ 608), it has acquired the positive

meaning, therefore, accordingly, now : ovkow 'ifioir/e SoKei,

hence I do not thinJc so ; Poet, ovkovv orav hr) fj,r; aOevco,

ireirava-oixao, well, then, I mil cease when I really have no

.strength.

3. vvv (enclitic, postpositive), a weakened vvv, cor-

responds to the unaccented English naw.

4. Toivvv, hence, therefore, surely, is a vvv strengthened

by the assuring rot (§ 643, lo).

5. roir/ap, so then, therefore, yet ; more emphatic roi-

•ydpTOO, Toiyapovv.

6. co<iTe, so that, § 632, 4.

IX.

—

Final Conjunctions.

(Eespecting the Moods, § 530, &c.)

§ 638. 1. wa, that, in order that, in order to [Lat. vij,

as an adverb also signifies where in a relative sense and

in indirect questions : ovx opa<; "v el KaKov ; do you

not see in what (position of) evil you are? "va as a

Particle of purpose is elliptical in ha tL ; where ykv^rat

•must be supplied, i. e. tliat what may happen? why?Digitized by Microsoft®

? "39. THE PAETICLES. 347

On 2. (B? and

3. gTTco?, see §§ 631, 632, 3.

4. S^pa, § 635, 10.

5. ^77 = Lat. m, that not, in order that not, §§ 530,etc., 614 ; after verbs of fearing, § 616, Obs. 3.

X.

—

Hypothetical Conjunctions.

(Eespecting the Moods, § 535, etc.)

§ 639. 1. el, if,

in indirect questions whether, § 610 ; in wishes (whered6e, el yap are also used), if only, if but, § 514. Observealso el (irj in the sense of exc&pt, like the Lat. nisi: tjimv

ovSiv eariv ar/adbp aXKo el /j,r} oirXa koX aperrj, we have

no other good except weapons and valour ; el fir] el, nisi si,

unless; e'iTrep, siquidem, if indeed, certainly if, contains

an emphatic assurance : Poet. ^ Kal yeyrjOo)'? ravr ael

Xi^eiv 8oKei<; ; e'lirep ri 7' eaTi rfj^ dXrjOeia^ cr6ivo<;, do

you really think you will always speak thus joymisly?

(answer) if indeed (certainly if) there is any force in

truth.

2. eav, 1. e. ei av (av, rjv), if;

in indirect questions, whether, § 610.

3. dv, I suppose, perhaps (postpositive)

always denotes that something may happen only under

certain conditions, and hence is often untranslatable.

On av with the (potential) Optative, § 516.

,, „ (hypothetical) Indicative, § 537.

„ „ Indicative, denoting repetition, § 494.

„ „ Future Indicative, § 500, Obs.

„ „ Subjunctive with relatives, § 554.

„ „ „ „ with particles of time, § 557.

„ „ Infinitive, §§ 575, 576.

„ „ Participles, § 595.

Qls.—av is often "used twice in the same clause : ovk av opdSts

ouS' vyiS>i 6 TOVTO-TroincrasirfM ovBims av Xoyia-mro, he who did

348 THE PAETICLES. S 6*0-

this would not, I suppose, judge correctly or soundly about anything.

4. Horn, ki, kcv (enclitic and postpositive) is used almost entirely

like Sv.

XI.

—

Concessive Conjunctions.

§ 640. 1. el KM {iav Kai), if even, although,

denotes a simple concession : poet. iroXiv, el koI firj

/SXevret?, ^povelt 8' '6fJM<;, o'Ul voaai ^vveariv, though you

have not sight, yet you are aware in what misery the city

is involved.

2. Ka\ el {jcaX edv, Kciv), even if, even though

denotes an emphatic concession, like etiamsi : fj'^evTO

avBpo'i elvab arfaBov oitpeXelv tovs (^tXou?, Kal el /iijSet?

/jbiXXoi e'ia-eadai, he deemed it to belong to a good man to

benefit his friends, even if no one should know it.

Ois.—The distinction between el nal and koi ft consists mainly in

the former giving the emphasis of the kqi to the Protasis, the

latter to the Apodosis. Hence the meaning is in many cases

almost the same.

3. Kainep with the participle, § 587, 5.

In the Apodosis the Concessive Conjunctions are often followed by

ofi:os, notwithstanding, § 630, 7.

B) Particles of Emphasis.

§ 641. 1. 76 (enclitic and postpositive), at least [Lat.

quidem], gives the word before it greater weight,

and is often represented in other languages merely by

a more emphatic accent on the word to which je is

attached: Hom. eiwep 'yap"FiKTa)p ye kukov kuI avaXKiSa

^Tjaet,, dXX' ov -TreicrovTai Tpwe?, for if Sector shall call

(you) base and effeminate, yet the Trojans will not believe

(it) ; Hom. aXXa crv, el hvvaaai ye, TrepLcryeo TraiB6<;, but

do you, if you can, protect the son; tovto ye olfiai vfi,d<;

airavra<i rjaOrjaOai, this at least I think you all have per-

ceived ; Hom. ocTTt? TOMiira ye pe^oi, whoever sfiould do

eiieh things, ye is very frequently affixed to pronouns

:

§ 642. THE PARTICLES. 349

Mycoye, ego quidem, 'cr/e (Horn, he, he spedally) ; 0976

strengthened o?, qui quidem.

2. <yovv (postpositive), at least [Lat. certe\, is com-

pounded of 76 and oiiv, and hence more emphatic than

76 alone.

3. -jrep (enchtic and postpositive), just, exactly, very,

shortened from the adverb irepl, very (§ 466), serves to

give precision to the relative : o?7rep (§ 218), the very

one who ; w? irep, just as. In Homer it is added to

participles in a sense similar to that of KuiTrep (§ 587, 5)

:

^•rjS' ovrms ar/a96<; irep iav OeoeiKsX' 'A')(^0Oêv KXeirTe

vow, he not so stealthy in purpose, divine Achilles, though

you are so very noble (ironical).

§ 642. 4. Sj; (certainly, to be sure, well then, therefore),

points to what is obvious in a single idea, or in a \¥hole

sentence. S77 is used principally in three ways

:

a) to emphasize single words : Trota icmv a -^fâs

(JxêXei ; vyieia ical Icr-xp^ koX KaXKo<i Kal TrXovro^ Sr/,

what kind of things are those which benefit us ? health and

strength and beauty, and, certainly, wealth; hrjXa, hrj, to

be sure it is clear ; vvv opare B^, now you surely see ; dye

Sij, well ! come ; tI Stj ; what then ? fiaXia-ra h-q, very

much so, at the beginning of an apodosis ; koI tots hr],

now, just then. On koI Brj Kal, § 624, 4.

b) to confirm a sentence by referring to what pre-

cedes : Tov /Mev Br] -TrefiTrei,, him, then, he sends ; Poet. 01

TtjXiKoiBe Kal BiBa^6fiea6a Br) (jjpovelv 'rrpo<; avSpo? ttjî-

KovBe ; we even at such an age are, tJien (according to the

preceding speeches), to be taught wisdom byaman of such

an age ? w^ ev nvi (^povpa ia/j-ev 01 dvOpmirot, Kal ov

Bel Br] eavTov eK ravrT]'; Xveiv, we men are, as it were,

placed at some post, and it is therefore not proper to

abandon it.

c) referring to time, very much like the particle of

time, r]Br], Lat. jam : Kal ttoXKo, Br] dXKa \eâ<; elirev,

and after having already stated many other things, he•' '^ Digitized'by Microsoft®

350 THE PAKTICLES. §643.

said ; vvv hrj, just now. Horn, ra hr] vvv irdvTa reXetTaif

all that is just now being done.

5. Stjttov, surely, 1 suppose, also hfjirovBev,

is often used ironically in assertions which admit of no reply :

Tp4<f>eTai 8€ ^vxfj Tivi ; fia6r]jj.a<Ti. hrjTTov, the sovl is nourished

ly what? (answer) surely by learning, rl S^ttou, well then,

what do you suppose ?

6. fi^TQ, certainly,

negative ov S^ra, certainly not ; ri hrjra, well I what then ?

7. Brj6fv, clearly, evidently.

8. Sat,

another form of 6i;, but only used in questions : rt fiai ; well!

what ? how so ?

§ 643. 9. ^, verily, truly,

(to be distinguished from rj, or, than, § 626), strengthens

an assurance. ^ jJLrjv (Horn, rj fiev) is the common form

of an oath : a/Jôcrav '6pKov<s r] iMrjV firj fivrjcriKaKiâ-etv,

they swore that they would truly not cherish revenge. Onthe Interrogative fj, §§ 607, 608.

In Homer tj is appended to eVet and ti, to add

strength to them : iirel fj, rt r), for which also iirar], Ttry

is written.

10. Toi (enclitic and postpositive), I assure you, let me tell you.

oUtoi, truly not, strengthened forms : rolyap, roiyapovv, toi-

yaproi (§ 637, 5).

11. rJToi., verily, faith (Jjand toi),

serves as a naive assurance in Epic poetry : ^Vot o-y' tis iliriav

KOT ap' effTO, noiu when he had so spoken he sat down.

On the disjunctive rjroi—rj, either, or, see § 626, a.

12. fiTjv (Hom. fidv, fi€v), verily, truly [Lat. verum,

ver6\,

Horn. Sihe yap iêpeco, kul firjv TereXecrfievov ea'Tat,for so

will I speak out, and truly it will be fulfilled ; rt /tTji/ ;

why ! what P why not ? (comp. § 404, Ohs^.

13. ixkvToi, yet, however, certainly, Lat. vero,

from fi,iv the weaker form of ^jurjv : e? OtVtaSa? earpa-

revaav koI irroKiopKovv, ov jjAvtol etkov ye, dXhJ ave-

^(oprjo-ai) eV o'Ikov, they made an expedition against

§643. THE PAKTICLES. 351

Oeniadae, and besieged it ; yet they did not conquer it, hit'

returned home,

14. vai, yea, in fact.

15. vij, truly,

followed by the names of gods in the Accusative, whoure invoked as witnesses in an oath : vrj Ala, by Zeus.

16. fid, truly,

in negative oaths: oii fih Ala, no, by ZeMs ; also in-

positive ones, when vai precedes: vaX /la Ala, truly by'

Zeus (§ 399, Ohs.).

17. Horn. 6rjv (enclitic), trnly, surely,

similar to the Attic brjirov (§ 642, 5), often witli an ironicali

meaning : ov 6r]v /uv irdXiv aSris dutjati. Bvfios ayrivicp peiKeUiv

8acn\rtas, his courageous heart will surely not again incite Mm te-

taunt Kings,


( 352 )

ENGLISH INDEX.

{Tlte nuttibers indicate the $, not the pages.')

* Abode," to be supplied, 411.

Absohite Genit, 428; 584

—

Ace, 586.

Abstracts in the Plur-, 362,Ob3.~inostly Fem., loj.

.Accent, 17, etc. — Generalrules, 79, etc.— of Nouns,107, etc.; 118; 123; 148—of Comparatives, 171— of1*100., 207 — Irregularities

ia the declCDsions, 121

;

12? ; i^i ; 1J3; 142; 163 J

166; 181; 183—in Adverbs,201; 165— in Verbs, 229;3ii, etc.—in the StrongAor., 255—in the Perf.^.

276 ; 284—in the StrongPass. Stem, 29j— irreg.,

332, etc.— in derivation,

340, Obs. 4, etc.

.Acaisative, orig. ending, 17J,Obs.— meaning, 395— ofthe outer obj., 396, etc.— ofthe inner obj., 400, etc.

—

of double obj., 402, etc.—ofthe predicate, 403 — free

Ace, 404, etc.—Adverbial,201 ; 203 ; with Prep., 447, i

—with the Inf., 567, etc.

"Acdcstonied to," expressedby Aor. and Imperf. Ind,,

with av, 494, Obs. I.

" Acquainted vxith '* or " igno-

rant of," with Genit., 414,3.

Actiout Suffixes for, 342.Active, 476—Act., Mid., Pass,meaning, 328.

Acute Accent, 17; 80, etc.

—

87, 2."** Adaptedfor" Suffix, 351.Adjective, declens., 114 ; 126

;

154; 164, etc. — Compar.,197—Genders, 180, etc.—of3 Endings, 185, etc.—of 2Endings, 182; 189— of i

Ending, 190—Derived, 350—Contr., 183—Subs, fem.,

127, 4— with Art., 379—follow the Genit., 412, Obs.

Adverbs, lor, etc. — Corre-lutlve, 217, etc — Num.

ATTEIBUTB.

Adv., 22J—with the Art,379—as Adject., 382.

"Aim," expressed by Ace.,

406.Alphabet, 3.

Anastrophe, 90.

AoriU, weak^ with trans,

meaning, 329—with k, 310—strong with intrans.

meaning, 329— of proverbsand gnomes, 494—Ind., 492,etc.—in CondiL sentences,

54J—in Condit. sentences,

5^9; 541—Moods, 495, etc.

—SubJ. in cond. sent., 545,Obs. I.—Opt. and Inf., 497—Part., 496.

Apocope, 64. D.Apostrophe, 15; 64; 65, D.Apposition, 361, 12 ; 385

—

Appositive Partic, 579 ; 583.Article, 106 — Crasis, 65 —

without Accent, 97, i—asDemonstr. Pron., 212, I).—for the Relative, 213, D.

—

Origin in Homer, 368 ; 370,Obs.—omitted, 376, etc.

—

Meaning, 369, etc.—Nent,with Genit., 381; 410—Po-sition, 383-390,

Aspirates, J2; 52, etc.—at thebegin, of two successivesyll., 53; 274. I—Redupli-cated by Tenues, 62.

Aspiration dropped or re-

moved, 3 2, D.—thrown back,54—omitted, 52, D.—in thestrong Perf., 279.

Assimilation, 45 ; 47, etc. ; 50,

&; 51; 56.

Asyndeton, 624, a, Obs.AtoTux, 97—before EncMt, 93,

e;98."Attempting an action," ex-pressed by the Imperf., 489.

Attic Decl., 132—Ending, 157— Fut, 263—Reduplic, 275,I , 278.

Attraction, 597, etc. — in-

verted, 604.Attribute, 361, II — Attri-

butive Adject. Art., 384^


COMPLETED.

Attx. compounds, 359, 2, andObs. (Comp. 360)— Attri-butive additions, 383-386Attributive Partic, 578.

Augment, 234, etc.—Omitted,

234. D.; 235—Double, 237;240— in Compounds, 238,etc.—irreg., 270, D.

Barytones, 19." £e," " become/' " make,"

etc., 417 ; 361, 7.

" Begin," " Interrupt," " end,"verbs with Part., 590—withGenit., 419, !>.

" S&neftmg," Verbs of, 396.

"Buy," Verbs with Genit,

421.

" Capability," etc, Verbswith Inf., 560, 1.

Cardinal Num., 220.

Case, 100—Use of, 392, etc.

—

Endings, 100— Ace, 142

;

153—in Comps., 354» Obs." Cause," in the Genit, 408,7—422 ; 426—Dat., 439—Part., 581.

Challenge or Command— in

the Subjunc, 509—by ottws,

553, Obs.Cliaracteristic, 249.Circumfex, 21 ; 80; 83, etc.;

87,0.Classes of Verbs In la, 247-

250; 320-327 ; of Verbs in

jLLi, 305-319-Collective Sing., 362.Cominon Gend., 127, 5 ; 140." Commwiity," expressed byDat, 4 J 6.

Comparative, 192, etc. ^de-clens., 170, etc.—irreg., 199—Adv., 203—with Genit,416—Adj. and Verbs withGenit., 416, Obs. 3 ; 423.

G<ympensation by lengthen-

ing, 42—for V, 49, Obs. 3

;

147, i; 133,2—ioTVT,vQ,v&,50 ; 147, I ; 187—for tr, 270.

Completed Action in Verbs,

484; 435; 502-506-

ENGLISH INDEX. 353

COMPO'OKDS.

Compmmds, Divis.of Syll., "jj

—Accent, 8;; iji ; 165;i8j; 352—Adj., 182, etc.;

189, i— Augm. in Comp.

Verlis, 2?8, etc.—treated as

simple Verbs, 402 — withGenit., 424 — with Dat.,

437-Concessive Participle, 582.CanditianaX Sentences, 534,

54^—negat., 616.

Conjunctions, 62j,etc.

CoriTiectiTig Vowels, 2jj, i, 2,

5; 262, etc.; 275.

Consonants, Divis. of, 30, etc.,

44—in dividing Syll., -jii

etc.

Contraction, 36, etc.—in De-dens., 118; J2z; 128: 130,

etc.; i6j, D.; 166; 168—Double, 1 6-7—Omitted, 35,D. i; 165; 166, D. ; 2JJ,D. 4; 243, D.; 268, D,—ofthe Pres. Stem, 245, etc.

—

of Adv., 201—Contr. Syll.

long, "75, Obs.—Accent, 87

;

163; 331—Oontr Fut, 259;262, etc

Coordination, 519, i a, z.

Coronis, 16 ; 65.

Correlation, 519, 4— Correl.

Pron. 216; 218—Adv., 217,etc.

Crasis, 16; 65—Accent in,

89.

Dative, Perispome, 109—Oxy-tone, I33j 2—in Monosyl.,142—in o-i(p), 68 ; 165, D.—^represented by <i)iv, 178,

D.— Meaning, 429, etc.

—

with Prepos., 447, 3—of ad-

vant. and disadv., 411—of

interest, 431, etc.— ethical,

433 — of community, 4j6,etc.— of instrument, 4j8,etc.—of measure, 440—free,

44I-443-" J)eclaration," Verbs of—with Ace. and Inf., 567

—

with Inf., 560, 2—with Part.,

593—with ov, 617, Obs. i

—

Sentences of, 525,Decomposites, Augm. in, 239.

Defectives in Compar., 200.

Defining Object, 400 c—Inf.,

562.Deminutives, 347 ; T04.

Demonstrative Article, 369

—

Pron., 212; 216; 475 —follows the predicate, 367

—

Art with, 389.Denominatives, 339.Dental Cons., 30— tlissim. 46—become tr, 47 ; 67—mutesdropped before a, 49; 147,

1; 149; 260—in Perf., 281

—Charact. in Verbs, 250,

Obs.—Fut., 260, 3.

Deponents, 482—Pass., 328, 2Pass. Mean., 328, 4 ; 48J, 3.

Oerivative Ending in Comps.,i51-

Description expressed by theImperf., 488.

Desideratives, 353, Obs. 2.

Determinative Comps., 359, i,

and Oba, (Comp. 360).Diaeresis, 9 ; 22, Obs.Digairvma, 3, 1); 34, D. ; 35,

D. 2 ; 63, D ; 75, D. ; 160

;

237 ; 253, Obs. ; 360, Obs.Diphthongs, Pronunt., 8—Ori-

gin, 26 ; 35, 2 — beforeVowels, 3?. Obs. ; 160; 248,Obs.—without Augm., 235—spurious, 27.

Disjunctive questions. (SeeDouble question.)

Dissimilation, 46.

Distributives, 223.Doric Fut., 264.

Doubling of Conson., 62 ; 34.Double questions, 611 — ovand fj.T}, 61;, Obs. i.

Dual represented by PI., 365,

Effect and Consequence ex-pressed by Ace. and Inf.,

567.JBlision. 64— Accents, 88—

before Enclit, 96, 3.

ETiditics, 92, etc.—retaining

the Accent, 96.

landing, 100 — changed in

Comps., 355—of tbe ist De-clens., 134—of 2nd, 172.

Enjoying, verbs of, with Ge-nit, 419, d.

Epexegesis, 624, a, Obs.

Ethical Dative, 43 3-

Exclamations, 393—in Ace,399, Obs.—in Genit., 427.

Extent, exp. by Ace, 405.

Fear and Anxiety, 513 ; 512 ;

6t6, Obs. 3.

Feeling, verbs of, with Ace.,

399—with Dat, 439, O^s.

—

. with Genit, 422, Obs.—withPart, 592-

Feminines, 103; 127; 138;163.

Final letters, 67, etc.—Syl.

long—bef. vowels short, 75,

D. 2—Contr. Accent, 87 ;

183.

Future, 499, etc., 484—Act.with trans. Meaning, 329

—periphrastic, 501 — Fut.

Perf, 505—Ind. with kc,

^^^, Obs. 2— Part withArt, 500.

Gender, known by general

rules, loi, etc.; 127— byending of Stem, 125; 137.

IHTEEROGATIVB.

—In A Declens., 122—inDeclens., 127—in Cons. De-clens., 137, eta

Generic Article, 375-Genitive Perispome, 100; 118—Oxytone, 131, 2—I'aroxy-tone, 181—in Monosyl., 142—represented by 6ev and^Lv, 178, D.; 118—Meaning.407—with Prepos,, 447, 2—with Subst, 408, etc.— withAdj. and Adv., 414, etc.

—

with Verbs, 417, etc.—free

Genit, 425, etc.

Gentile Names, 349 ; 3^0.Chave accent, 19, etc. ; 86.

Gutturals, 30—with it form |,

48; 260—before ft, becomey, 47—with (,, become tra;

57—Charact of Pres., 250

;

251, D.

Eeteroclites, 174.Miatu£, 63—apparent, 63, D

4-

SypotJietical Sent (See Con-ditional Sent).

Imperative, 228—i Aor., 53—268. D. ; 518—in Cond. Sent,

545, Obs. 3—exp, by 2 Pers.

Fut. with oil, 499, Obs.

—

supplied by Inf., 577,Impeifect, 488, etc.—in Cond.Sent, 54J — in Prot andApod., 538; 541.

Inclination, 91, etc.

Incomplete Action, 484, etc.

Indefinite Subject 361,3, Obs.2—in Neut, 364.

Indefinite Pronouns, 214, etc.

;

216—Adv., 92, 4.

Indicative, 507 — in Depend.Sent, 520; 523—in depend,declar. and Interr. Sent,526—in Condit. Sent, 536,etc., 545— in temp. Sent.,

556—hypoth. Ind. in Cond.Sent, 537—in Sent of pur-pose, 550.

Indirect Object, 430 a.

Individualising Article, 371,etc.

Infinitive Act, in /iecat, fj.ev,^

2J3, D. 3 ; 255, D.—in vat'Aor. and Perf. Accent, s^^i

1-5; 268, Obs. I—Use, 559—with Art, 379— as Sub-ject, 563 ; 574, 1—Ace., 2—Gea, 3—Dat, 4—with /Lt«,

and ov, 617—wiih ftTj ov,

621, c d—for Imper., 577.•' Injure," Verbs—with Acc-.

396.Instrument, suffix, 34^—Na-

tive of, 4j8; 574, 4.

Interest or Advantage, Datof, 43 r, etc.—Middle of, 479

Interrogative Pron., 214; 21O

2a

354 ENGLISH INDEX,

—direct and indirect, 4'75, 6

;

609—in depend. Sent., 525— joined with Demonstr.,606, Obs. I.

Irregular Mouns, I'j'j—Verbs,

J 20, Obs.Iterative form, J34, D., etc.

—

in Imperf. and Aor., JJ5, D.

JUdicnnX Proceedings, Verbs of—with Genit., 422.

Kinds of Verbs, 225, 2.

Labials, jo—before /x, 47

—

before &, 48 ; 260—verbalstem, 249.

LPMgtImiivg, 40, etc. ; 147 ;

155; 165 ; 17J, Obs.— in

Pres., 248—in the Fut., 260,

2 ; 261— in Redupl., 275.

(Comp., 27J, D. ; 278).—ofVowels, 24J, D. i ; 26;, D.

Liquids, 33—in divis. of Syll.,

72.1-Locative, 179.

Long by Nature, 75.

Marnier, exp. by Dat,, 441.Masculines, 102 ; IJ7—disting.from Fem., ti} ; 122; 134—for Fem., ?62, Obs. 2.

Material, sulfix, 352, 3, 4

—

Genit., 408, j ; 414, 2; 418.Measwe, in Dat., 440.Mediae, ii.

Metaplasm, i.75.

Metathesis, 59; with strongAor, Act and Mid., 257

;

D., 282, 285; with strongAor. Pass., 29;, D.

Middle, 477, etc.—direct, 478—indirect 479—Snbjective,480—Causative, 481—Aor.with Mid. meaning, 255, 2;271, Fut. with Act. mean-ing, 264; 266; 328, I—withPass, meaning, 266.

Modesty of Assertion, exp. inOpt., with av, 517, Obs. I.

Momentary Action, 484 ; 492-498.

Monosyllabic Stems, length-ened, 142, b—in A, V, p, Perf.,

282—Accent of Mon. words,142—with Enclit., 94.

Mocds, 225, 4.

Miiltiplicatiues, 22^." Must " and " Should,"Verbs of, in Imperf., 490.

Mutes, 31, etc.—AssiiniUition,

49, U. ; 52—before Liquidsand Nasals, 78—Stems ofVerbs, 248.

Name in Genit., 408, 9^fAnimals, Gender, 140.

^Name," "Select," etc.. Verbsof, 361, 7, 10; J92;403.

Narrative in Aor. Ind., 492.Ifasals, 33—in divis. of Sy].,

72.1-Necessity, exp. by Verbal

A^j., 300.

Negatives, 619, and Obs.Negative Pron. and Adv., 219.Neuters, 104; 139 — Dental

Stems, 147, 6 ; — LiquidStems, 151-—Sigma Stems,16;—Marks of, 105, 3 ; 125

;

136—Accent, 340, Obs. 4—M Adv., 201 ; 20J ;

401

—

Plu. with Sing. Verbs, 36J—Adj. as Predic, 366.Nominal Predicate, 361, 4,

etc.

Nominative Dual oxytone,131,1—forVoc, 129; 393

—

meaning, 392.Nouns from Verbal Stems,

245.Numbers, loo, i ; 225, i

—

" two " in the PI., 365.Nvanerals, 220, Obs,— with

Art., 374-

Objective Inf., 561— Genit,

574, J Obs.—Part., 581 ; 361,

Objective Comps., 159, 3, andObs.—Genit, 408, s, b\ 413,

" Opinion to he of," Verb,with Inf., 560, 2 ; 567.

Optative, 228—Pres., 2 Pars.

Sing, in irBa., 133, D. i

—

Perf. Mid., 289-514 — po-tential with av, 517, Obs. 2

;

552, Obs.—In dep. sent., 524—Opt. in dep. Sent, 522, etc.

—in indir. Speech, 523—in

depend, declar. and interr.

Sent., 528—in Sent of pur-pose, 532—in Sent of fear,

533—in Condlt Sent, 546,etc.—in Relat Sent, 555

—

in tempor. Sent, 556 ; 558—exp. interest, 4J0.

Ordinal Numbers, 220 — in

Ace, 405, Obs. I.

Oxytonts, 17—before Enclit,

93. a.

Paroxytones, 17—In Crasls, 89—before Enclit, 93, c.

Participles, Declens., 187

—

Voc Sing., 148—Perf. Act,276, D.— Fem., 188; 277,I>.~Pre8. Aor. and Perf.

Mid., J33, 6-10—with Art.,

379, etc. ; 578, Obs. — inDat., 43 5. Obs.— bypoth,withiinj, 583,618.

Partides, 92, 5 ; 623, etc.

Partitive Genitive, 408, 4;412 ; 419.

Passice, 483 — with Dative,

4J4 — Aor. In Act verbswith Mid. meaning, 328, 3.

Patronymics, J48.Peculiar Charact. SuflBx, 351—Genit, 408, 8.

" Perceive," Verbs of withGenit, 420; 417, Obs.—with Inf., 560, 2 — withPart, 591.

Perfect, weak, 277, D. ; 280,etc.-strong, 277, etc.—in-trans. meaning, 330—trans,

and intrans. meaning, 329—use of the Ind., 502

—

Moods, Inf., Part, 506—Per-fects with Pres. meaning,503.

Period, bypoth., 5J4~lnter-posed, 550—Negative, 616.

Perispomes, 21—before Eji-

clit,, 9J, b.

Personal Endings, 226—Pro-noun, 250, etc.

; 92, 2

—

Meaning, 469—Genit., 470, a—for reflpc. pron., 471, Obs,a, b—Personal Constr., 571.

Place, Suffix of, 345—Genit.of, 412; 415; 425— Dat,442—Adv. with Genit, 41

5

—Desig. of, 82, 2 ; 179 ; 41 2.

Plenty and Want, Adj. of,

414, 2—Verbs, 418.Plural, 3 Pers. PI. Mid. in

-arat, -aro, 226, D. ; 2JJ, D.,

6—1 Mid. in fieaBa, 233, D.

5, 362, etcPosition, 71, etc. ; 19J.Possessive Article, 373—Pron.,

208—with Art, 388; 47Q—of the reflective, 472, 6, c

—

Poss. exp. by Genit, 408, 2

;

414, I—by Dat, 422.Possibility, exp. by Verb Adj.,

300—by Opt. with av, 516,

etc. ; 546—by Part with av,

595-Predicate, 361, 3, etc^de-

pendent, j6i, to; 589, 2—without Art, 378, 187.

Predicative Ace. 403—Genit,

417—Ace. with Inf., 570—Gen. or Ace., 572—Part,

589.Prepositions, lose their Ac-

cent 88—Elision in dissyl.,

64; 90; 238—Anastrophe,

90—Augm. aft Prep., 2?8,

etc.—Use, 444—Adverbial,446— with Ace, 449, f—Genit, 451, etc.—Dat, 456,

etc.—Genit and Ace, 458—with three cases, 462, etc.

—

spurious, 445.Present Ind., 486, etc. —

Moods, Inf. Part, 491 —hist, 487— exp. by Ind.

Aor., 494, Obs. 2—enlarge-

ment of, 246—Stem, 231—like the Verb Stem, 247—with lengthened Stfni

Vowel, 248 — from Verl


ENGLISH INDEX. 355

PRIMITIVE.

Stem with t, 249—with i,

2^0, etc.

Primitive words, J39.Principal Conjugations, 2jo—first, 231, etc, ; 320, etc.

—

second, 302-319 — Declen-sions, III—first, 112-134

—

second, 135.

ProcUtics (see Atona)."Prohibition," 518; 510; 499—Prohibit, Hinder, Deny,etc.—have the Inf. with jllm,

bi";, Obs. i—with jlltj ov,

621, d.

Prolep&is, $ 19. 5. Obs. 2

CComp.,.56'7;5'jO.Fronvmciation, 4, etc.

Prt^pa/roxi/tones, 17 — before

Eincl., 93, d.

Pi'operispomes, 11 — before

End., Qj, d.

Proper Names in -a, iiy, D. 2

-^s. 174

—

k\yi^, 167—withArt,, 37t, Obs. ; 375, Obs.;

387, Obs."Property," SufBx of, 346;34h Obs.

QuwnUty, in Crasis, 65—in

Monosyl., T42— doubtful,

75, D., I—reversing quant,,

37, D., 2; 161, Obs.Quantitative Adj. and Adv.,

224—with Art., ^74.Questions, dubious in the

Subj., 511.

Reciprocal Pron., 211.

B&iuplication, 51, 10, a—in

the Perf., 273, etc.—in the2 Aor., 257, d—in Verbs in

fxL, 308.

Refliective Pron., 210—^Mean-

ing, 471—3rd for 1st and2nd Pers., Obs. c—to denotepossession, 472—for Recipr,,

475.Relative A(^., 414.Relative Pron., 21J ; 216 —

Craais, 65—Compound, 214,

Obs. 2-^Hypoth., 554—fol-

lows the Predic. Subst., 367—used once only, 605.

Relative Sentences, 551—withFut. Ind., 500—with /a^,

615, Obs. 2— complication,604—Connection, 605.

" Reference to," exp. by theAce, 404.

Rejection of letters, 61—of aVowel at begin., see Syn-cope—of a vowel at end,

sfe Elision.

R^etition, exp. by the Opt.,

547 (Negative, 616, Oba 2)

555, Obs. 15558, Obs. I,

SUBJDKCrrVE.

Remit of an Act, 34i—In theAce, 400, d.

Root, 245.

" Scare," "Obstruct," andother Verbs, with the Inf.,

yjo, J.

Semivowels, 31.

Sentences, Compound, 519, 3,

5— Principal, Subordinate,

519, 4—Moods of, 525, etc,

—Condlt., 534; 549, ^^c*

—

Negat., 616—of Experiencein Aor. Ind., 494—Interr.,

525—of Pui-pose, 5 jo-533—Negat., 616.

" Shew," Verbs of with Part.,

59 J ; 580. ,

Slwrtening, at the begin.,

74, D.—of the final syll.,

75, D. 2—in the Perf., 285,

D.—in the SubJ., 228, D.;

233, D. 2— in Rel. Sent.,

597. 3.

" Should, exp. In depend.Sent, by the Subj., 527, b.

Opt., 528, 6.

Sigma, tuture, 259 ; 260, etc.

—Aor., 269.

Singular, 3 Pers. in e (y), 68,

4—Accent on Imp. Mid.,

268, 2—Accent on 2 Aor,

Imper, Act. and Mid., 333,ri, 12, 362.

"Space," exp. by the Ace.,

399, b.

Spiritus, position, 12; 22

—

with p and pp, ij—Spir.Asper, 6d, b— in Augm.,235, Obs.—-Spir, Leiiis, 11.

Stem, 100—St, Vowel leiigtb-

ened, 147, 2 ; 248 ; 253. Obs,

;

2^1, 270, changed to e, 157.

"Strive," "Aim at," Verbswith Genit,, 419, c—withInf., 560, 3-

Subject, 361, i—Omitted, Obs.

2—^with Genit, Abs., 585, a— of a Subord. Sent, as

Object of the Principal

Sent, 397 ; 5i9. 5—Obs. 2—Subj. of Prill, Sent, in the

Subord. Sent., 602; 519. 5.

Obs. 2.

Sut^ective Genit., 408, 5, a,

Svhjyjnctive, 228—Shortened,233, D, 2; 255, D. I ; 502, D.

—of the Perf, Mid., 289—of verbs in p-t, accent, 309

—

IWeaning, 508, etc.—similar

to Fut., 5 1J—in dep. sent,,

521 — in dep. assert, and

interrog., 527—in sent, of

purpose, 531. 5?2» Obs.

—

express, fear, 533—in condlt,

sent,, 545, 554. 555. Obs. 2

—in temper, sent., 55*?, jcS.

Obs, 2,

Subordi7iatUm., 519, j,

Substavtive, degrees of, 199,D.—joined to the Dat., 430,Obs., 432, Obs.

Sujjixes, ^40; 178.

Superlatives, Adv., 203—withGenit., 416, Obs. 2—with ws.

631, a—with oTt, 633, I, b.

Supplements to the Part., 361,

8.

Supplementa/ry Aorist, 270,etc..

Syllabic Augm., 234— with,initial vowel, 237—omitted,283.

Syllables of both quantities,

75. D- i;77-Synizesis, 39 ; 66 ; 243, D., 3.

61, c;257, D.

" Taking part in," with Ge-nit., 414, 5 ; 419, a.

Temporal Adj., 352, 4, Obs.—Augm., 234, 6; 2J5.

Tevses, 225 ; 3 Princip. Tenses,521- Subord.. 522—TenseStems, 227,

Tenues, 32—for Aspirates, 32,

D.Time, in Ace., 399, 6 ; 405

—

in Genit., 42&—in Dat. 443—Adv. of with Genit., 415

—

kinds, degrees of, 484, i, 2.

rransiiiue and In trans. Mean-ing, 329, etc.; 476—Mid.,477.

" Touch," and other Verbswith Genit., 419, b.

Uncontracted Syll., 35, D., i.

Vej'ba Cuntracta among Itera-

tives, 336, d — V. puru,

impura, 247.FerftaZPredic, 361,4—Nouns,

225, 5—Stem, 245, etc.—Pres. Stem, 246 ; 260, 3.

Vocal Stems, i Perf., 280.

Vowels, 24, etc.—in divis. of

Syll., 470— before others,

74—long without Augm.,235—Clianges, 40, etc.—in

2 Perf., 278-in derivation,

340, Obs. J.

Weakening of Conson., 60.

" When," exp. by Dat., 443

.

" Whither," exp. by Ace, 406.'* Wish," exp. in the Opt., 514,

etc.

Worth and Price, in the Ge-nit., 408, 6; 421.


( 356 )

GEEEK INDEX,

a for rj, 24, D. 2 ; 41, D.

;

115, D. I ; 121, D. 2; 235,D. ; 270, Obs.

a for T], 277, D.

a becw, 268;278—bee. 0,268.

a bec.Tj,4o; 115, i,c; ii6,d;

235; 270; 268; 278; 303-

a bee. €, 31, !>• 2; 169, D.

;

243, D. 3.

a bee. at, 24, D. 3.

a from ao, aw, see ao.

a after e, t, p, 41 ; 115, i, a;

116, c; 121 ; 180; 261

;

270; 278.

a before vowels, 235,

a, connecLing vowel, 276

;

336, O.; 358, D.— in the

3 Plur., 302, J.

a, cbaracteristie of the First

or Weak Aorist, 268.

a, privative, 360 — in Adj.with the Genlt.,4r4, Obs. 5.

-a, ending of the Accus., 141

;

156; 17J, Obs.; 181 ; 276.

-a, quantity of, 117; 121;161 ; 169; 181, I.

-a, Plur, ending of Neuters,

125, 2 ; 136; 141; 173.

-a, Adverbs in, 202.

-a, Nom. of Substant. in, 172.

-a, from ao in theGenit.,122,Obs,

ayaBoq, Comparison, 199, i.

ayajLLai, (a7a0|aat), 312, 8

—

Pass. Depon., 328, 2.

ayavaKTeta, with the Particip.,

592.(iyaTTw, with the Dative, 439,

Oba.—with the Partic., 592.ayyeKKofj.at, construed person-

ally, 571 — iyyeAAo), witha Partic, 59 j.

aye S^, 642, 4, a.

i-yeipui, 2 Aor., 257, D.—Perf.,

, 275, I.

ayTJOxo, 279.ayiveui, 32}, D. 39.

iyvvfiL, 319. 13— Perf., 275, 2—Signif. J30, I.

oyX'-t Comparison of, 203, D.

—

with the Genlt, 415.ayui, 2 Aor., 257—Imper, of i

Aor., 263, D.a3eA,0o!r, Voc. Slug., 129,

aStKe'w, with, the Accus., 396

—

Signif., 486, Obs.

ae (aij) into a, 38; into t],

243, D. 2—into aa, 336, D.

aet into a, 38 — into a, 243,Obs.—into at, 38, Obs.

ae'^to, 312, D. 13.

aea-a, 327, D. 17.

-aîo. Verbs in, 353, 6—Fut.263.

a.7}Butv, Gen. Sing., 163.

afjixL, 313. D. 3.

oLYjp, Masc, 140.

at, in the Compar. for o or o),

195—into 77, 235.

-at, Elided, '64, D.—Short inregard to the Accent, 83,

Obs. 2 ; 108 ; 229 ; 268, Obs. i.

at, al6e, see el, et$e.

atSeojuat, alSofxai, 301, 1 ; 326,JO—Piiss. Depon., 328, 2—with the Accus. 399.

'AtSijs, 177, D. 19— €1/, €ts

'Atfiou, 411-atS(09, i6j.

-aiv, in the Dual, 173, 4.

-atva, Fein, ending, 115, i b.

alveia, 301, 3-

atvviJiti.1, 319, D. 27.

-aivaj, Verbs in, 353, 7.

at|, of both genders, 140.

atpe'o), 327> 1—Perf., 275, D. I

—Distinct, between Act. andMid., 481 b.—Pass, meaning,

483. 3-

atpio, Aor., 270, Obs.-ats, Subst. in, 172.

-at?, in the Dat. PI., 119.aladd.vofji.aL, 322, II—with the

Gen., 420—with the Partic,

aia^poi;. Comparison of, 198.

attrviji'oiu.at, with Ace, 399

—

with Dat., 439, Obs.—withPartic., 592—with the Inf.,

594

—

alaxuvio, Perf., 286, D.aiTe'ti), with double Ace, 402.aKaxt'^w, 319, D, 30.

aKeojuat, 30I1 !•

aicqKoa., 275, I ; 280, ObsaKvjxefittTO, 287, D.aKovji, Perf. Act, 27,, I

—

Perf. Mid., 288— with theNom., 392, Obs.—with Gen.,


afJi€vai.

420, and Obs.—with Partic.

591.

aKparos, Comparison of, 196 5.

CLKpoaof'.ai, rut., 261— witUGen., 420.

aKoiv, Gen. Abs., 585, b.

oXaKKov, 326, D. II.

aKa>a]p.at, 275, D.dAao/iot, Pass. Uepon., 328, 2

—Perf., 275, D. I,

a.\yeiv6<;. Comparative of,

, 199.8.aAS^CTKto, 324> D- 30.

aAe'ao-ât, 269, D.aX.et4>ap, 176.

aAei'îu, Perf, 27$, I.

okeKTpvcov, of both genders,

140.

aX€v, aX-^fjLevat, 325, ^- d.

aki^tii, 326, II.

akibi, 301, r.

oX-f\Qe<;, 165.

oASo/iat, 326, D. 39.aAty, with Gen., 414, 2.

okia-KOfiaL, 327, 17— Perf.,

275. 2—Aor., 316, 12—withthe Genit., 422.

aKiTaCvtii, 323, D. 37.aAK:)7, Dat Sing., 175, D.oAAo, 629 — a/Aa yap, 636,

6, d. ; aXX' Jj, 629, Obs. 3

—

aXX.' ofiv, 637, 2.

aAAao-o-o), I Aor. Pass., 294,

_Obs.

oAA-Âotv, etc., 211.

oAAo/i-at, I Aor., 270, Obs.

—

2 Aor., 316, D. 32.

oAAos, 211—oAAo Tt ^ ; aAAoTt ; 608.

oAAo); TE Ka.i, 624. 4-

oAs, 150.

dAu'tTK-to, 324. 27, Obs.aA(/)dva>, 323, D. 38.

dAtii'at, 324. ITdAwTnj^, irreg. Nom. Sing., 14^.

a/ia, with Dat., 43b c—withPart, 587, I.

VLfxap-TOLvui, 322, 12 — withGenit, 419 e.

a.fx^\i<TK(a, 324, 18.

ajLtet'ô/iiat, with Ace., 398.d/xetV(ui', Signif., 109, r, Obs,djLLeAe'ti), with Genit., 420.djLieiât, 312, D. 13.

OEEEK INDEX. 357

aju.iAAdo|U.aL.

bepon. Pass.ajU-iAXdojULai.

J 28, 2.

ativriixuiv, 'withGenit., 414, 5.

aiLLotpoy, witli Genit,, 414, 5.

a/ji6?,-aftds, 208, D.

ajLtTTfixo), 5J, d.

ijitTrtiTxvou/iai, 32J, 36.

ajLiTrXaKLO'KCdi 324, 2j.

aii.irvvvQr\t 298, D.

—

afj-irwro,

:Jl6, D. 29.

ajuffit, 462 — without Ana-strophe, 90.

afiÛvvuiiL, 319, 5—Augra.,240—with double Ace, 402.

afiÛ}, afJ-ffiOTepoi, afitfiOTepov,

221 — atLÔTepuiOev, withGenlt., 415.

•av-, affixed to form the Pre-

sent Stem, 322.

av privative, 360.

'dv, see kav.

'av, 639, 3—with particles of

time, 557—in the Apodosisof Conditional Sentences,

535; 5J7;54i;Comp. 542;546—with Aor., 494, Obs. i

—with SubJ., 51;— withPut. Ind., 500, Obs.—withImperf., 494, Obs. i—withInd., 5j6, etc.—with Int.,

575, etc.—with Opt., 516;546_with Part., 595—withRelatives, 554; 555. Obs. 2.

'avt Nom. Mas. and Neut.,

172.

-av for a.<av. Gen. Plur. of

a-Decl., 118, D.

ava, see ava^.

ai/d, 461—Apocope, 64, D.

—

without Anastrophe, 90.

ova)3dAAo/xai, with Inf., 560, 3.

arajSiMO-KOjLiai, 324, ir.

cLvayKoios ei/xt, construed per-

sonally, 571.

avakCaKOi, avaKuxrto, 324. 19*

avaixifivâ-Ktii, With double

Ace., 402.

S.va^, Voc. Shig., 148, D.

ard|tos, with Genit., 414, 4.

av8av(o, 322, 23—Augm., 237.

avSpdiroSov, Dat. PL, 175, D-

aveyvbiv, a.v4yK<ii(ra, DifF. of

Slgnif., 329. I^-

av€v, 445 ; 455, 5,

dvÔjuat, double Augm., 240—with Part., 590.

avetoya, ave(px°-> 3^9> ^9—Distinction, 279.

avrjvoBev, 275i D>

awJii, 153; 177. 1—Genit., 51,

Obs. 2.

omJp, 65, Obs. I.

av9' &v,6oi.avoCyio, Augm., 237— Perf.,

275. 2; 279- .

avopBooi, double Augm., 240.

avra, avrqv, avTiKpii, seej^

avTi. -

avrexofitu, with Gemt-, 419 0.

apxvv.

avri, 451— without Ana-strophe, 90.

oi/ti), Compar. 204 — withGenit,, 415.

avtaya, 3 17, D. 1 1 — Plup.,

283, D.a^tos. With Genit., 414, 4

—

with inf., 562.

aftdxpetos, 184.

00 into a, 37, D J ; 122, D. 2.

—into w, 37; 122, 13. 3 c

—

intoew, 37, D. 2; 122, D. 3 b;132; 243, D. 3.

ao, Genit. Sing., 1 22, Obs., etc.,

D. 3 y.

aot, into w, 37.

aou, into Eta, 24J, D. 3 h.

airayopopeuta, with Part., 59'^*

aTravToib}, Fut. Mid. with Act,meaning, 266.

aTraxj)L(rK(o, 324, D. JJ.aireiTTOV, 327, 12.

aTretpos, with Genit., 414, 3.

aTTCxâvo/xai, 322, J6.

airexofxai, with Genlt., 419 e.

iird, 452—Apocope, 64, D.

;

Compar., 204.

atroSCSofiaL, with Genit., 421.airoSiSpaa-Kui, with Ace, 398.aTTOEpcra, 270, D.a.7roA.auw, Fut. Mid.'with Act.

meaning, 266—with Genit.,

419. d.

'AnoWtJiv, A CO., 171; Voc,148, Obs.

oLTroa-repeia, with Double Acc.,

402.aTTorvyxo-vta, with Genit.,

(MToupa?, 316, D, 18.

airoâCvta, with Part., 593.

airoxpV' 512, 6.

aTTTO/Ltat, with Genit., 419, &.

-ap, Subst. in, 172.

apa and Spa, Distinction, 99.

dpa (ap'), Apocope, 64, D.

;

637. I.

5pa, in questions, 607, &—in-

direct, 610; 5p* ov, Spa jlitJ,

607, Obs.

dpapla-K(o, 324, D. 34—Perf.,

275. D.J.apeCuiv, dpnTTOff, 199, i, and

Ôbs.

apetrKta, 324, 10.

dpTjpws, 280, D.

'Api]?, 177. 2-.

-apLOF, Neuters m, 3 47, Obs . 1

.

apK4(a, Aor., 301, 1.

apjuoTTto, 250, Obs.—Filt.,

260, 3-

apveofiai, Depon. Pass., 328, 2.

api'de, etc., 177, 3.

apW^Lai, Aor., 319. I*- 29.

apdw, 3or, I—Perf. Pass., 27 J,

D.I.

apX^»'» 4°5. Obs z.

/3ao"tA.€Uff.

dpxop-aL and ap^d), Distinction,

481, 6.

opxop.ot, with Genit., 419, b—with inf., 560, 1 —with Part,,

590—with Inf. and Part.

594-dpxf^, with Genit., 423—DifF.

of Pres. and Aor., 498.-a?, Ending of the Acc. PL,

141.

-d9, Fem. in, 138.

-a5, Neut, in, 139.

-a?, Subst. in, 172.

ao-jLievo?, 319, i).— Compar,,

196, h.

Sâov, atrcroTipoi, 203, D.

afTTTJp, Dat. PI., 151.

d<TTv, 158—Gend,, IJ9.

-arat, -aro, 3 PI- Mid., 226, D.

;

233, D. 6; 287, and D.drdp, avrdp, 630, 4.

are, with lârt., 587, 6.

arep, 45S, 5.

drra, ana, 214.

aS, aSre, 6jp, 3.

av^dvo}, avîoy 322, 13.

-avy, Fem. in, 172.

avTiKa, with lârt., 587, 3.

auTo?, 200—position with theArt., 389—with Dat., 441,Obs.—in the Genit. withi'ossess., 474—for the Relat.,

605, Obs.—6 avT6<;f withDat. 4 J 6, b.

aiâtpe'op.at, with double Acc,402.

a^da-ata, 250, D.a0tv)/xt,, 3U. I—Augm. 240.

d<f>' o5, 556; 601.

a^vtrcria, i Aor,, 269, D,

dxapis, compar. 19 j, D.

dxBofjiai, 326, 12 — Depon.Pass., 328, 2—with Part.,

592.

dxwfj,ai, 319. D. 30— Plup.

287. D.

aXpt(0. 69, Obs. 3; 445;455, & ; without Elision, 64,

Obs. I—dxpi.o5, 556.

-aw. Verbs In, 353. 2, andObs. 2—lengthening, 24J,

D.J.-aw, P'ut. iO, 263, D.

p, inserted between p. and p,

51, Obs. 2, andD.; )3 for /x,

see ft.

pa&tû}, Fut. Mid. with Act.

meaning, 266.

PatVw, 321, I, andD.—Perf,

317, I — 2 Aor., 316, I —X Aor. Mid., 268, D.—meaning, 329, 2 — of the

Perf., 50 J.

^dAAw, Aor., jif), D. 19—Perf., 282—Signif., 476, 2.

^dpStoTos, 198, D.âo-iAeta and âo'tA.eta, Il7<

PflwtAevs, i6r, D.

358 GREEK INDEX.

âcrtXevta, with Genit., 42 J

—

Dlff. of Pves. and Aor„ 498.ê^ftiaOa}, J24, D. I J.

iSeiofiat, /Seo/j-at, 265, D.

Pet'u, ^^T), etc., ^16, D. I.

êKTLoiv, j3e'A,Ti(rros, 199, I.

^Ldôixai, Pass, meaning,

48J> 3-

^Lâq, }11, D. 14.

pCfikoq, Fern., 127, 5.

fii^pJia-Kio, ^24, ij — Aor.,

J 1 6, D. 23— Perf. Piirt.,

J 17, D. 16.

3id(i>, Aor., ii6, ij.

Â, Redup., 274, Kx.)3Aa(3eTat., Horn. Pres., 249, D.^KdiTTio, Aor. Pass., 299 —with Ace, J96.

^kaerrdvto, 522, I4-

/SAô-flat, etc., Jl6, 19.

(SAiTTO), 250, Obs,

|8A«iTKu, 324, 12; 51, D./Socitoj, Fut. Mid. with Act.

Meaning, 2j6.

^dAeTa^, j66, D. 14.

ôppdq, Genit. Sing., 122, Obs.ôtr/co), J26, 13-

(SoTpug, ilasc, r4o.

j3ouAo/j.a[, J26, 14— Augm.,2?4, Obs. — 2 Sing. Pros.

Mid., 233, J—Depon. Pass.,

J28, 2.

|3ou?, 159; 160; 35, Obs.—oftwo Genders, 140.

^pdcra-ti}, 250, Obs.

^pdrrtTiav, 198, D.

Ppaxv<;, with Inf., 562.

fiporos, $1, D.^vâ^, 32J, J2jSutras. J5. U- I-

y, Pronunt., 4 — Char, of

Verb.s, 251, Obs. — their

Fut., 260, J—Perf., 279.

yafidii), J25, I.

ydmifiat, I19. D. JI.

yap, 6j6, 6—yap oSi/, 6j7, i.

yoo-TTip, 151— Fern., 140.

yv, Ohar. of Verbal Stems,

251, Obs.

y4, 641, I—Affix, ibid.

ye'yoftt, Jl'], 14-

yeyioviia, J 25. 0. tt.

yeicojuat, Signif., J29, 8.

yeAoto, joi, I—Aor. Pass., 298— Fut. Mid. with Act.meaning, 266.

yeAws, 169, D.yejiAui, with Genit, 418.

•vei/4o-6aLt yei'ô'o/i.ai, etc., J27,

^wfTC, 316, D. 3J.yepaids. Compar., 194.yevuj, with Genit., 419, D.yijfle'u), 325, 2.

yijpaffKw, 324, 1—Aor., J16, 2.

yi into ^, 58; 251.yt'yi/ojaat, 32"', 14—Perf., 317,

2—with Genit., 417—withDat., 4 J 2.

ytyi/wo-Kw, J24, 14—Aor., 316,14—with I'art, 591.

yA, yv, Redupl. with, 274, Ex.yoao), 325, D. n.

ydvu, I77> 4-

yovv, 641, 2.

ypauy, 159.

ypdôfiat, with Genit., 422.

ypd<ôfi.a.i and ypaîo, Diff.,

481, &.

S inserted betw, v and p, 51,

Obs. 2; 287, D.; 612—Cha-racter, 251. See Dentals.

Sat, 642, 8.

Saotwc, of two Genders, 140.

SiaLvvixL, 319. U. 32— Opt.,

318, D.

8a.u>i, Meaning, 330, D. 9.

SdKviii, 321, 8.

SdKpvov, 175*

SdiJ-ap, 147, I, Ex.SdjULi^p.t, 312. I'- a — Aor.

Subj. Pass., 293, D.Savei^di, DifF. of Act. and

Mid., 481, b.

BapBdvui, 322, 15.

5^9, Accent, of Genit. Pi. and'Dual, 142, J.

SariofiaL, 325, D. b— I Aor.Inf., 269, D.

-Se, affixed, 94; 212; 216—Enclitic, 92, 5—]iOcal Sufiix,

178.

5e, 628—5' oSc, 637, a.

Searo, 269, D.

Se'yjaat, 312, D., T4, b.

Se'Saoc, 324, D. 28; 326, D.40.

SeSeyfj-ai, Seû>, etc., 318, D.

SeSia, SehoLKo., 317, 5, and D.

Set (see Se'cu), with Ace. andInf., 567, Obs. I—I5et, 490.

&€iS(o, forms Position, 77, D.

—

Doubling of the 5, 254, D.

6etK»T;/xt, 318 — with Part.,

593-

Selua, Indef. Pronoun, 215.

Snivoq, with Inf., 562.Setpv), 115.

SeVfipoi*, l'}ly.

S4ofj.aL, Depon. Pass., 328, 2.

See Seia.

Seov, 586.

aeiray, Dat. PI., 169, D.BepKOfxai, Depon. Pass., 328, 2—2 Aor., 257, D. ; 59, D.—with Ace,, 400, c.

Bea-fios, Nom. and Ace. PI.,

J7?, D.SecnroTTK, Voc. Sing., 121

—

Ace. Sing., 174, D.

5evoju.ai, 326, D. 15.

SeuVaros, 199, ^' (Defectives).

SevTEpos , with Genit., 416,

bi^^-esd by Microsoft®

SpOTOS.

dixo/J-ai, Perf., 273, D.—2 Aor.,

316, D. 34 — Aor. Pass.

Signif., 328, 4.

Setu (I bind), 301, 2— Con-traction, 244, 1.

Sd(o, SeofjLai, (I am in want of),

326, 15— with Genii., 418.St}, 642, 4—Affix, 218.

S^flef, 642, 7.

S-Âof oTt, 633, I, a,

StjAow, Meaning, 476, i —6t7Aoco and SijAds eifii, withPart., 590,

A>j^tJtt)p, 153.

St^v, makes position, 77, D.5T77roT6, afBx, 218.

SrJTTov, S-qirovOev, 642, 5.

-5»]s, Masc. in, 348.Sâ-a, J 26, D. 15.

S^To, 642, 6.

5t into ^, 58; 251.

5ta, 448 ;458—without Ana-

strophe, 90—with Inf. andArticle, 574, 2, 3.

Sta, 181, D.Stayto, StaAetTTto, BiareXeta,

with Part., 590.Siatra, IiJ.

fiiatTow, With double Augm.,240.

Siojcoveai, with double Augm.,240.

5iaA€yop.ai, Depon. Pass., 328,

2—Redupl., 274, Ex.—withDat., 436, a.

SioAeKTos, Fem., 127, 5*.

SLa<f)epofLa.i, 43î '^

Steufiepbi, 423 ; 440.Bidifyopoi, 476, b.

SiSda-Kb), 324, 28, Obs,-Aor.,326, D. 40— with doubleAce., 402

—

StSda-KOfxai, 4S1.

SCSr}fjit. 3tl. 2.

StSojjLLt,Compounds—Mcaning

476, 2—with Inf., 561.

StSpao-Kti), 324, 2—Aor.,316,3SUcrav, etc., 313, D. 4.

Sifij/iat, fii'^Qj, 3i;3. D. 5.

SLKf£ôp.at, Meaning, 481.St'icatd? ei/xt, construed p<ir

sonally, 571.fitiojr, free Ace,, 404, Obs.

fitoTt, 636, 2.

SiTrAatrtos, Sttrtro?, etc., 223

—

with Genit., 416, Obs. 3,

Si'xa. 445-fiti//o(o, Contr., 244, 2.

StuKto, with Genit., 422.5jLtu5, Gen. PI. and Dual, 142. j.

Soiio, etc., 220, D.SoKcM, 325, 3—witb Inf., 560.

1

—Construed personally, 571.

SoKos, Kem., 127, 5.

Soâvt Ace. Abs., 586.

Sopv, 177. 6.

SoUTre'ttf, 32y, D. C.

SpojLieti/, Spa/xov/xat, etc., ]27tII,

fipaTOS, 300, D.

GREEK INDEX. 359

5paa>.

SpoMj Aor. Pass., 298.

fipotros, Fem., ii'j, 5.

6vvafxait 512,9— Angm,, 254,Obs.—Subj., Opt., Accent.,

309—Depou. Pass., j28, 2—with Inf., 560, I.

Su's, Compounds with, j6o,

Obs.—Augm., 241.

fiiiftj, fiwoi, J2I, T ; 301, 4

—

I Aor. Mid., z68, D.—2 Aor.,

J 16, 16—Meaning, ^29, 4.

e for a, 268, D.—bee. a, 257

;

282; 285; 295; 298.

e bee. 7}, 40; 147, 2; 151;161, D.; 2JJ, 4; 23S; 29J.

e bee. et, 24, D. j ; 42 ; 147, i

;

236 ; 24J, D. B ; 270 ; 29?, D.

e bee. o, 165 ; 278 ; J40, Obs. 3—bee. oj, 278.

€ for digamma, 34, D. 4;237. D-

e inserted, 264; 269, D.

€ rejected, 153; 24J, D. B;257, D.—in Synizeais, 59, D.

£ eontr. with preceding vowel,

166, D.e affixed to tbe Stem, 322,

Obs.; j24,Obs.; J25, etc.—considered as Stem-vowel,

4ê in the Augm., 236; 275.

See Syllabic Augm.e inRedupl., 275—asliedupl.,

274* h 4-

e conneqtlng vowel, 133, hand D, J, 6; 262; 336, D.

;

m, D.-e in Nom. Ace. and Voc.

Dual, 141.

ea bee. d, 130—bee. 17, 38.

-ea for eta, 185, D.—for vv in

Ace. Sing., 185— In t andû Stems, 157— in Diphth.

Stems, 161—bee. ij and a,

ibid.—bee. ij in the Ace,

VI., ibid.—bee. a or 77 in

Fem. of Adj., rSj—Endingof the Plup., 283. D.

eava, 275, 2; 319, 13.

ecu, bee. t/, 38—bee. ei, ibid.,

Obs. *

edv, 639, 2—in Condit. Sent.,

5i5; 545; 548—"Whether,"610—Comp. €1.

edi/re-eavre, 627.€a$a,3t9' U--eas bee. -et5 in Acc. PI., 157—from Tjaff, 161, Obs.

earai, etc., 315, D. 2.

eauToi), 2io—used as a pos-

sessive, 472, a.

edta, Angm., 236.

eyyus, Compar., 204— withfeenit., 415,

,

eyfiovirqcra, 325, D. c.

ryetpw, 2 Aor,, 275. D.~-Perf.,

275,1 ; 3I7,D. 12—Meaning,3iO, 2.

eliTov.

{ypvyopa^ 275.e-yveXus, 158.

eyo), Synizesis, 66— eytuye,

641, I.

eSêt-at, 31?. D. 3* J27, D. 4.

efiojitai, Fut,, 265. See eo-fltw.

ee bee. ei, 36—bee. et and 77,

243, D. B— bee. i} in theDual. See -tj.

eepxo-TO, 287, D.-ees bee. €is in Nom. PL, 157

—

bee. ew and tjs, 161, d.

-CT) for -eia, 185, D.ei]"5, 213, D.eeC^ta, Augm., 236,

et for e, 24, D, 3—for ai, 267,etc,—from e, t, see «, i.

et, Redupl., 274, etc.—in thePlup., 283.

-et in the Dat, Sing., 157

;

161, &—connecting vowel,

233. 1—3 Sing. Ind. Act,233. 2—2 Sing. Ind, Mid.,

233. 3.

et, 639, I— Atonon, 97, 3 —in Cond. Sent., 535—withInd., 536—with Opt., 546,etc,—for edv, 545, Obs. 2.

£t, etde, et yap, In a wish, 514—" whether " in Depend.Interr, Sent., 525 ; 610.

et-^, 611—€t Kev, see edv—ei apa, 637, I—et yap, 637,6, dr—el KaC, 640, I—et firj,

639. I-

-eta, Fem. in, 185—Quantity,

117 ; 341, Obs,; 342, Obs.

ei'aTO, 3i5r D. 2,

eUov, 327, 8,

-etTj, Fem, in, 115, D. z,

el/ce, etKTOi', 317, D, 7.

eiKoo-t(i'), 68, 3 ; 220.

etKu, with Genit., 419, e.

e'lKuv, Genit., 163.

dKioi, 625, D. d.

€L\T]\ovea., 40, D.; 317, D. 13.

elKT}<pa, eiATjya, 274, Ex.elAo;£a, 274, Ex.; 279.

elKov, etc., 327, I.

elKoi, 253, D.—1 Aor., 270, D.

et/iat, 3I9> D. 5.

eiiLiaprat, 274* ^'^'

eifii. 315. I— EncIIt., 92, 3;

315, Obs. 2 — with Part.,

287; 289; 291; 505; 59o>

Obs.— with Genit., 417—with Dat., 432—Accent of

compounds of eip-L, 31$,

Obs. 3—&V, 428, Obs,; 580;

585, 6

—

Tf^ ovTi, 441.

eV, 314. I— Meaning, 314.

Obs.

EtVeKa, see eVe/co,

elvvov, 319- D- 5-

elâtri, 317, 7.

-etov, Neuters in, 345, 2.

etTrep, 639, I.

etTTOv, 327, 13—Aor, Imper.

pig^sff^bpMhrosoft®

efxireipoi,

-etp, Subs, in, 172.eipyiofjixt, 319, 15.

etpyto, Perf, and Plup., 287, D.^—with Genit., 419, e

eipTjKa, 274, Ex.; 327, 13.eipop,at, 326, D, 16.

etpto, I Aor., 270, D.—Perf.

and Plup,, 275, D. 2.

elff, 2 Sing, of etp.t, 92, D.els, h, 448 ; 449 — Atonon,

97, 2—with Inf. and Art.,

574. 2—ets 6, 556,-et9, Kom. PI., 157; i6r, d.

-eis, Mas. and Fem, in, 172.•sts, 2 Sing, Ind. Act., 233, 2.

-eis-etro-a-ei/, AdJ, in, J52, 5;187— Dat. Pl„ 50, Obs. 1;

149.elo-o, def. Aor., 269, D.eta-Kta, 324, D. 35-ettJOjuat, etc., 314, D. I.

ettrw, with Genit., 415.etro, with Part, 587, 4*.

etT€, 94—etre-eire. Oil ; 627,ettofla, 275, 2; 278,

€K, ef, 69, Obs, 2; 448; 453—with Augm., 238—Atonon.

97, 2—with Inf. and Art,

574< 3—unaltered, 45, Obs.

;

47, Ex.—eô{l, 556; 601.

eKas, Compar., 203, D.eKeti'Off, 212.

eKc'/cAero, 257, D.; 6t, DeK£;êtptoL, 53, TO, d.

eKKkncrLdîa, Augm., 239,

eKAeiTro), with Acc, 398.eK\r]$dvio, 322, D. 26.

eKTrA'^TTOjuat, with Ace., 399.eKTOS, 327. 6.

eKTog, witii Genit, 415.eKiav, Genit Abs., 585, 6.

—

eKtav etvai, 570, Obs,

e\d<rcr(av, iKdx'-o'TOS, I99t 4—eAoTToi', without «, 626,Obs

Âavcw, 321, 2—Fut., 263—Perf., 275, I—Plup., 287, D.—Meaning, 476, i.

eAe'yYO), Perf, Mid., 275, I

;

286, Obs.

eKeiv, 327, I.

eAeuflepdfa), with Genit., 419, e.

eKOeZv, iKeverop-aL, 3 27. 2.

eAvjAaSaro, 287, D.

eAto-ffO), 236.

eAicufa), eAxo), JOt, I—AugDl.,

236.

'iKpiv?, 50, Obs. 2.

eATTifw, with inf., 569.

eAiroj, Perf., 275, D. 2—Mean*in& 330, D. 10.

eA(ra,27o, D.; 325, D. d.

ep.avTOu, 210—Poss., 472, a.

ep.ip7\KQV, 283, D.ep.4bi, 301, I.

ejLtjLtei/at, 3^5i ^' ^^

enixopa, 274, I).

eiJ.irqp.VKCL, 275, D. I.

ifjLireipoi, with Genit., 414, j

360 GREEK INDEX.

ejLiTrXews, with Genlt, 414, 2.

ifJiirpoa-Oey, with Genit., 415.

ev (evC), 448 ; 456—unalteredIn compounds, 49, Oba. i

—

bef. p, 51, Obs. 2—Atonon,

g^, 2—with Inf. and Art.,

574. 4—ev (S, 556.-e(j/), J Sing , 68, 4.

•€v, Nom, of Neuters, 2';2.

-ev, 3 PI. Aor. Pass,, 293, D.-eVai, Inf., 27'J.

ei'ttipo), Augm., 239.ei'ttVTtdo/i.at, Depon. Pass.,

328, 2—Augm., 239.evavTLOs, with Dat., 436, b.

ivatrcra, meaning 3 29, D.

evSe^s, with Genlt., 414, 2.

evSvto, with double Ace, 402

—

Meaning, 329, 4.

ipsCKai (êveiKoi), Jl'], T). 12.

eVeKo, 445 ; 448 ; 445, 8—withJnf. and Art., 574, 5.

efeVw, " evvGTTe, ei/iUTra), etc.,

J27, D. 13.

evepTcpot, 199, D. (Defect.)

ev^voOsv, 275, D. 2.

lirqvoxo; 327, 12.

ei-i, 90.

ei'tTTTO), 2 Aor., 257( D.evLdO'di, 250, D.

evvvfiL, 319, ;.

ei'DvAe'co, double Augm., 240.

ecTo?, with Genlt, 415.ei^peVo/ittt, with Genit., 420.

eêKiyxûi, With Part., 593.

e^LKvovfjiai, with Genit., 419,0.tôi^, 586,

elw, Compar., 204— withGenit., 415.

eo bee. ov, in — bee, ev, 17,D. i; 165, D ; 233, D. 4;

_24?, D, B, C.

eo, efi, eXo, etc., 205, D.€0t bee, ot, 37.

eotKo, 317, 7; 275, 2— con-strued personally, 571 —with Part., 590,

eokira, 275, D, 2.

eopya, 327, D. 3.

eopTdifo), Augtn., 237.

edy, 208, D.-eo?, Genit. in, i6r, D.

-eos, Aty. in, 352,4; i8j—for-e(<)5, 184, D.

eov bee, ou, 37—hec, eu, 37,

^ D, I ; 243. D. B.

îravpi<rKOfJ.a.i, 324, 24-

etreC, ^$6êireciv, iirriv, eirdv,

557 ; 6J5. 5—in Synizesis,

66—with Aor. Ind., 493

—

"whenever," 558, Oos. i.

en-eiS^, 556; 635,6.eTTetra, with Part., 587, 4.

eiTL, 448 ; 463—with Inf. and

_Art. 574, 2,4, ^

^

eTTtfiogoy, eTTt/caipto? et/At, con-strued personally, 571,

enUcraa-Oai., 319. 5-

iTTiBvixed}, with Genit., 420.

eiri.AajU/Sai'OjLiat, eTrtAarflavo-

juai, with Genit,, 419, 6 ; 420.

eTTiAetTrw, with Part., 590,eTTt/xeAojUAt, Depon. Pass,,

328, 2—with Genit., 420,

eTTioraiaat, 312, 10—Accent.of Subj. and Opt,, 309—Depon. Pass., 328, 2.

inLo-T-qiJuov, with Genit., 414,

3

iirLTrjSeLo^ eijai, construedpersonally, 571.

eTriTpeVw, with Inf,, 560, I,

eirKrjTO, 312, D.,/.

€7ro/iat, 327, 5—Augm., 236.

epafe, 178, D,

epafJ-ai, 312, II.

epaw, Aor. Mid,, joi, D.—withGenlt., 420.

epyaÔjuat, Augm., 236.

epyaOoi/, 319, D, 15.

epSw, 527, 3.

epeVuo), 250, Obs.—Fut., 260, 3,

epevyofj.ai, 322, D, 40.

ip-npiSaraty 287, D,

ept^Wj with Dat., 436, a,

epiTjpo?, Nom. Pi., 175, D.

epTToj, epTTu^d), Augm,, 236,

eppaSaraL, 287, D.e^^w, 526. 17,

epptaya, 278; 319, 24.

eppujueVo?, Compar., 196, &.

epoT], 115.

epcn)v, 189, D.epuyyai/u), 323, D. 40.

eûKO), 2 Aor., 257, D.eputrât, etc., 314, D,

kpvia, Aor,, 3or, D.epycurai, etc., 319, D. 15.

epxoât, 327, 2.

epai, 327, 13, and ObS,

epbig, 177, D, 20,

epcuTooi, with double Ace, 402.-e?, Nom, of Neuters, 172.

-e^, Knding of Nom. PL, 141

;

173. 8, 2.

6(701(0,315. D, 3 (ecr0ti>); 327,4—with Genit., 419, d,

etTKov, 337, D,ecTTreitr/xai, 286, T, Obs,ecnrd^T)!', etc., 327, 5,

eoTTOv, 327, U, IJ.

-eo-o-a, Fcm. of Adj., 187.

ecra-ai. etc., 269, D.-eo-<ri(v), Dat. PL, 141, D,;

^ 153, D.; 158, D,; 165, D.etrcrup-ai, 274. D.ea-cuiv, 199, D. 2,

eo-re, " until," 556.-ecrrepoff, -eoTaro?, Compar.

Ending, 196,

ecmjfu), jli, 291,

ea-H, Accented, 96 ; 31$, Obs. 2—edTiv 01, 06, etc., 603.

eo-Ttato, Augm., 236— withAce., 400, c—with Genit.,

419, d.

e(rxp-T0<5, 200; 391.ea-ui, CompojT., 204.—See e'lata.

eTaOiqVf 298.


^WVVUfXl.

£Tai/)i)v, see dawrta,

eVepoff, wi th Genit,, 416, Obs, j.

enqtrCai, Genit. PL, 123.

eropov, 3 26, D. 44,eu bee. ef, 35, D. 2; 248, Obs.—from eOj eov, S. eo, eou,

eS, 202 — Augm. in Com-pounds, 241—eS TTOtew, withAce., 396.

evaSov, 322, D, 23.

euSto?, Compar., 195,eiiepyertbi, with Ace., 396-euû, with Genit., 415—eu5i/s,

with Part., 587, 3.

euKTi/xeJ'os, 3t6, D. 25.

6vAa)3e'oju,ai, Depon. Pass.,

328, 2—with Ace,, 399.evvov?, Accent, 183—Compar.,

196, c.

evpCa-Koi, 324, 25—^with Part.,

591-evpv's, Acc. Sing., 157, D,-ev<;, Genit. in, 161, D, ; 165, D.-eiis, Nom. Sing., 341, i

;

349, i;_i37; 172.

eSre, see ore.

ev<j)pa.Cvm, Meaning of theAor. Pass., 328, 3.

euu. Verbs in, 353, 4.

£<|)ayor, 3 27, 4.

€0' c3, €(/>' (are, 601.

cêo^ 269.

ex^pos, Compar., 198.

exto, 327, 6—Augm., 236—Meaning, 476, 1— DifF. ofPres. and Aor., 498—withInf., 560, 1—with Part., 590—eX*^"* 580

—

expiJ.aL, withGenit., 419, b.

ei//oj, 326, 19,

eo* for ao, see ao—in the AtticDeclens., i?2, etc.—in Con-tracted Verbs, 243, D.,

Herod.—as one SylL, 121,

D. 3, &; 131. i; 157-6to, Genit. Sing., 121, D. 3, 6;

177, II — Verbs in, 248;253, 3—Fut., 260, 2; 264;263.

e<ada, 275, D. 2,

etaii-ev, etc., 312, D. 13.

-etav, Genit. of a-Decl., 118, D.ewff ("till"), 556; 635, 7.

6(09, DecL, 163.

eiDs, Genit., i6i, Obs.

f, Pronunt., 5—Pres. StemsIn, 251, Obs.

ôM, contract,, 244, 2.

-fe, Local Suffix, 178.

feuyimp-i, 319, 16.

Zeu<r, 177, 7.

ê'to, 301, I.

^TjAdta, with Acc, 398.

<u, Cbar. of Verbs, 251, Obs,

and D. — Fut., 260, 3-—Comp. 263.

^(«lvin<ju.t, 319, 9.

GREEK INDEX. 361

H for a, 24, D. I ; 1 15, D. 2

;

180, U. ; 244, 2; 161, D.;

270, Obs.—See e.

I) after o, 180, Ex.—bee. w, 45.

jj, Syll. Augm., 234, Obs.

-)j, Voc. Sing., 121—in AcCmPI., 157—in the Dual, 158;166—in the Ace. Sing., 161,

I).; 166—Conn, vowel, 133,

I—Ending of i and 3 Pi.

Plup., 283.

-ij, 2 Sing. Ind. and SubJ. Mid.,

23h h 4-

5 and ^, Synizesis, 66—Diff.,

09 ; 64 J. 9-

V (M)-^ (?i«)' ^^^' Obs.

^, in Indir. questions, 6ro

—

^ and ij-n, 626, a, and Obs.—n and T] SitTTe, with Inf.,

566.

7}, Interr., 607, 6—"really?"643, 9—^ yap, ^ TTou, 608;636, 6, d—4 ^^v, 643, g.

fi, "he spoke, 312, i.

â,7Jen/, 314'

jSatTKh), 324) 3.

nyayov, 257.^Se, 624, b, I.

^Sojuat, Depon. Pass., 328, 2

—

with Dat., 439, Obs.—withPart., 592.

nSus, Fern., 185, D.netpa, 270, D.

jJKO, 313.

ijKtCTTa. 199, 2.

nKw, meaning, 486, Obs.

nAiKos, Attr. in, 600.

^KiTov, 323,0.37.nKvOov, 327, 2.

^(xjSpOTOi', 322, D. 12.

nfi4u-i}Se, 624, &,- 2.

Bjiit, ijv, ^, 312, I.

jftos, 556; 634.4-qixiTHTxov, 323, 36-

qfin\aKov, 324, 23.

7}fi<l}Ce<ra, 319, 5.

-171/, Nom., 172.

ni/, see eaf.

nveyKOi', ni'eiKa, 327i ^2.

^viKa, 556; 634. J-

•nvCirairov , 257> J^-

7JWT0, 319. D. 28.

7)0 bee. ti), 37— 1JOS, -rjo, -Tjaj,

161, Obs.—Tjov bee. u, 37.

'^Trap, 176.

r)ira<f)OV, 324, D. 3J.

->)p, Nom., 172.

^p, 142, 4.

HpaxA^S, 167, D.npapov, 3 24, D. 34.

iqpiirov, meaning, 329, D.

ijpofLTnv, 326, 16.

•^q, Nom. PI., 161, d.

-7j?, Nom. Sing., 172; 174, D.

-yjff, Prop, names in, 174.

-ns, Adj. in, 355—Compar., 197.

ô-i(i/), Dat. PI. <jf a-DecL.

11*0.

n(r(rajy, 199, 2,

Mtruxos. Compar., 195.IJTOt, 94.; 643, H— ^Tot- ^,

626, a.

^Top, Gender, 139.

TiTTdofiaL, with Genit., 423.ibTTtoi/, 199, 2.

T^rire, 632, 5.

iniiîEi, 240; 313, 1.

ix<^ 279.flvt, 217, D.Tjojs, 163, D.

e, Pronunt., 7—in the Perf.,

286, 4—in the Weak Pass.

Stem, 298—Nom. Sing, ofStems in, 147, Obs. 2 —Affixed to Pres. and 2 Aor.Stems, 338, P.—bee. a, 307.—See also Dentals.

Oavelv, 324, 4.

Qanruif 54, c ; 298.

flappe'w, with Ace, 399.flatrtroi', see raxvS'OcLTEpov, 65, Obs. I.

davfid^bj, With Genit., 417,Obs.; 422, Obs.

9avp.aa-T0<: oct-o?, etc., 6o2.

Bsd, 115, D. 2; 117.

9e\tti, ede'Au, 326, 20.

eifjLLS, 177, D. 21.

-0e(v), Sufifix, 178, 2; 68, IX—for the Genit., 205, D.

;

178, D.6e6<;, Voc. Sing., 129, D.fiepeio?, 350.0epoju,at, Fut., 262, D.deio, 248—Fut., 260, 2.

0Â.us, as Fem., 185, Obs.

e-rjv, Euclit., 92, 5; 643, 17.

Bjipaw, with Accus., 398.

01 bee. (TO-, 57.

-61, Loc. Suif., 178, I—Endingof 2 P. Imper., 228 ; 302, 5

;

307.Oiyyavia, 3 22, 24.

0A.aw, 301, I.

evYiCTKbi, 324, 4—Perf., 317. 1—Perf. Part., 276, D.—3 Fut.,

291—Slgnif., 486, Obs.

9oip,dTLov, 65, Obs, I

.

dopvufiat, 324, D. 15.

^p^^, 54. «; 145.OpVITTbi, 54) c-

flpWO-KO), 59; 324- ^5-

Qvy6.T^p, 153.

ev- irpo- Bvp.iop.ai, Depon.

Pass., 328, 2.

0upa<7t(i'), 179.

0ufti, 301, 2—Aor. Pass., 53,

10, &.'

0WS, Genit., PI. and Du., 142, 3.

t, Pronunt., 4—Long by Nat.,

83, Obs. I — Lengthened,

253, Obs.— t bee. I, ei, 01,

40 ; 278—t of the Stem bee.

6, 157— Changes, 55; 168;

bigM&^y Microsoft®

-I, Locative Ending, 179—Demonst., 212— Nent. in,

139; 172.

-t, !Nom. Ending in the PL,

134, 9 — Dat, Sing,, 141

;

173, 2.

I, Sign of the Opt., 228—Re-dupl., 308: 327,1). ^—Con-nect, vowel, 348; 351 —Affixed to the Stem in theDat. PI., 119; 134,8.

t. Subscribed, 8 ; 12; 27; 65,Obs, 2—Dat. Sing., 134, 3

;

169; 173, 2.

t. Verbs in the Pres. with,

250, etc.; 322, Obs.—theirFut., 260, 3 ; 262,

la for 10, 348.-La, Fem. in, J46, 3 ; 185,

etc,

la, iT}<3, in, Ito, 220, D, I.

ia.Qu.aL, Meaning of the AorPass., 3 28, 4.

lavM, 327, D. 17.

-taw. Verbs in, 353, Obs, 2.

ISe (ConJ.),.624, b, i—(Imper.)

327,8; 333.12--lSlov, Neut. in, 347, i, Obs,

tfitoff, with Genit,, 414, i—withDat., 436, &.

tSpts, 158 ; i8g, 3.

ISpvui, Aor, Pass,, 298, D.

iSpMs, 169, D.cepds, with Genit., 414, i.

L^dvoi, 322, I7>

lôpai, 3z6, 21.

-tffti, Verbs in, 353, 5— Fut,,

263.

LT}, Char, of the Opt, 293

;

302, 4.

tTjjLit, 313, 1.

I6vs, Superl., 193, D,LKp.evo9,3 16, D.; 323,0.33.LKviop.ai, LKvovp.ai, 323. 33—

I Aor., 268, D.-iKog, Adj. in, 351 — with

Genit., 414, 6.

l\d<rKou.at, 324, 5 — Imper.,3i2,D. 15.

iXeo)?, 184.

iju.acro'w, 250, D.

-IV, Subs, in, 172 Lv, Du.Ending in Genit. and Dat.,

134.6; 175.4-Lva, 638, I—in Sentences of

Purpose, 530.

-iro?, Adj. in, 352, 3, 4. Obs.

-to, Genit, Ending, 128, D.-top, Neut. in, 347, i.

-to?, A^. in, 350.

tôv, 323, D.3J.tpM, 35. O. I,

-ts, Nom, of Fem. in, 138; 172—Barytones In A.ce, Shig.

156.tO-KE, 324, D. 36.

-tffKOff, -tcTKij, Subs, in, J4'7> 2.

la-OS, Compar,, 19S—with i^l,

4i^ &.

362 GEEEK INDEX.

Compar.,itTTepoy,

197.

i.(mjju.i, Perf., 3 17,4—Meaning,

529, I—of the Perf., 503.

icTXT^w, Diff. of Pres. and Aor.,

498.Ix'Sv^f Dat. Sing., 158, D.—

Ace. PI., 158—Masc, 140.

t^wp, Ace. Sing., 17?, D.-twf, Nom, of Masc. in, 348,

Obs.

-itov, -LOTOS, Compar., 198.

K, in ovK, 6g, Obs. i—New.Ion. for IT, 216, D.—Asp. in

the Perf., 279.-866 also

Gutturals.

-Ka, I Aor. in, jio,

Kade&0VlJi.aL, J26, 21,

KadevSui, 326. 18—Augm., 240.

KaOrifiai, J 1 5. 2—Augm., 240.

KoBCûi, Fut., etc., 326. 21

—

Augm., 240.

Kttt, 624, b— Crasis, 6;— withNumbers, 222—with IVrt.,

587* 5

—

>^<^'- 05, /cat Tov, 369,2—zeal 5e, 624* i

—

KaC-KaC,

624, 2) 3—Kal Si) Kat, 624, 4—Kctl ei, 640, 2—Kal t6t€

Si], 642, 4, a.

KaCvv{J.ai, 319' I^- ^J-KaCirep, with Part., 587, 5.

KaiToi, 630, 6; 94.

Kauu, 35» Obs.; 253, Obs.—Fut., 260, 2—I Aor., 269, D.

KaKov \4y(o, KaKus TTOieu, withAce., 402; 396.

KOKos, Compar., 199, 2.

koAeoj, 3oi> 3*

KoXoff, Compar., 199, 6.

KdiJivto, jzi, 9— Pei-f., 282—with Ace., 400, &— withPart., 590.

KO-veov, Kavovv, lii, 3-

Kapa, 177, D. 22.

KapTepeu), with Part., jqo.

Kara, 448 ;459Âpocope, 64,

D. — with Inf. and Art.,

574. 2;

/caTaTrXijTTOjUiai, With Acc.,

599-Kanjyope'ttf, Augm., 2J9-KttTto, Compar., 204.KeltLL, etc., 269, D.

K€ijLiai, 3i4> 2.

KCtl/O?, see €K€lVO^.

KeCpo}, f'ut^ 262, D.KEKacT/iai, 320, D. J J.

K€K\7tfj,ai, Meaning, 50J.

KeKTYfftai, 274, Ex.— Moods,289—Meaaing, 503.

KsKaSebi, 325, D. e.

Kekevta, Perf., 288.

Ke'AAcu, Fut., 266, Ex.KeKofjLCLi., Aor., 257, D.

«e(v), 68, D.—Enclit., 92, 5.—See af.

KevTcw, 325, D./.

Kepa.wvu.1, 319- I—Sub. Mid.

312, D. 16.

KepSaCvtii, Aor., 270. Obs.—Perf., 322, Obs.

KeaKBTo, 33 7» ^Kâi, etc., 269, D.

KYJSu}, 326, D. 41.

KVjpvi, 8 J, Obs. r; 145.

KtK\-qaK(a, 324t t). ?!.

KLWfJiai,, 319, D. 34.Kipvy\}i.i, 312, D. 6.

Kivavta, 321, 18.

KL^-qfii, 313. I>. 6; 322, 18.

Ktvpyj/Ai, 312, 7.

(cieoi', etc., 319, D. 34.

KKa^ta, 251, Obs.—Meaning ofthe Perf. Act., 276, D.

KAat'tt), 253, Obs.; 326, 22

—

Fut., 260, 2.

KAaw, 301, I.

KAct's, Acc,, 156.

KAet'w, Kk-mi, Perf. Mid., 288.

KAe'jTTTjs, Compar., 197.KAeTTToj, Perf., 279—Aor. Pass.,

295.

-kAiJs, Proper Names in, 167

;

174.

KXivui, Perf., 282.

kA-u'w, Aor., 316, D. 27.

Kvona, Contr., 244, 2.

KvCtray], 115, D. 2.

Kotfdy, KOLi/ufEu, with Genit.,

414, i; 419, a—with Dat.,

436, a, &.

fcoio?, Kocro?. etc., 216, D.

KoKoKevio, with Acc, 396.KOTTTw and cJDmpounds, Mean-

ing, 476, 2.

Kopdvwf±L, 319, 6.

KOpe'o), Aor., 301, D.

KOpiJ, KOppT}, Hy.Kopv<rcru}, 250, D. — Perf.,

286, D.

-Kos, Adj. in, 351.Koreta, Aor., 301, D. •— Perf.

Part., 277, D.(cpaffa), 251—Perf., 317, 8.

Kparsiii, with Genit., 423.Kpdrog, etc., see Kapa.Kparu's, Positive, 199, D. I.

Kpeitrcrmv, KparnTTOs, 199, I.

Obs.

KpefxavvvfU., Kpefxafiai, 3 ig, 2 ;

312, 12—Acc. Of Sub. andOpt., 309.

KpeiJ.6u), 319, D. 2.

Kpi(T<r(av, 199, D. I.

Kp-jfjiva/jiaL, 312, D. c.

icpii/o), 253, Obs.—Perf., 282;286, Obs.

jcpoiiio, Perf. Mid., 288.KpvTTTbi, with double Acc., 402.KTcCvia, Aor., 316, 4,

KrCvwfu., 319' '7-

KTUTreo), 325. D-ff.

kulVko), 324, 21.

KVKSMv, Acc. sing., 171, D.KuAt'w. Perf. Mid., 288.Kvveui, J 23, 34.


fLOJcpav.

Kvvrepo^, 199. D.Kvpeio, Kvpto, 325, 4 — Fut,,

262, Ex.—with Part., 59c.

Kvirai, Kvaa-a, 323, D. 34.Kvu)V, 177, 8.

K(a\vu}, with Inf., 560, 3.

A doubled after the Syll.

Augm., 234, D,—Char., 252.

K p., V, p. Metathesis, 59

—

Position, 77, /, and D.—Redupl., 274, 2— Fut. oi

Stems in, 262—Aor., 270—Perf., 280.

K, V, p, Monoa. Stems in, Perf.282—Aor. Pass., 298.

KoLyxavfo, 322, 27—with Genit.and Acc., 419, Obs.

Xayios, 174-

KaBpa, with Genit., 415.ka.Ko';, Compar., 197.Aa/A^di/oi, 322, 25—Perf, 274,Ex.-^with Genit., 419, &—Mean., 480.

K6.p.\\iop.ai, 322, U. 25.

kavOdvia, 322, 26—with Acc.,

398—with Part., 590.Aas, 177, 9.

AauKtfj, 324, 29, and Obs,keyopLai, constr. personally,

571.Aeyw (collect), Perf., 279—

2 Aor. M., 316, D. 35.AetTTOjuat, with Genit., 423.AeKTO, Aey/xevos, etc., 316,

D. 36; 268, D.Ae'AijKa, 324, 29.

Kdkoyva, ill, 1). 27.Aeu'to, Perf. Mid., 288.A^5w, 322, 26.

AijKeu, 324, D, 29.

A^fojLtat, 322, 27.

AîÔjLLat, 322, 25.Ai bee. AA, 56; 252.

At'trcrofiat, 250, D.AA, Pres. Stems in, 252.Aoe, 244, D. 4.

Aoetrtra, 269, D.TO AotTTOi', 405, Obs. 2.

AoioÔff, AoiVflioy, 199, D.-Ao?, Acjj. in, 352, Obs.Aov'ti), Constr., 244, 4—i Aor,

269,0.AvTTouftat, with Dat., 439, Obs.Aval, 301, 2— Perf. Opt. Mid.,

289, D.—Aor., 316, D. 28—with Genit., 419, e.

\<atiov, AucTTO;, 199, I

p. bef. p, 51, Obs. 2—bef. A bee.

j3, 51, D.—Change of pre-

ceding Cons., 47 ; 286, I

—

doubled after the Syll.

Augm, 2J4, D.

fto, 64J, 16.

p.a, Nom. of Neuters, 343, i

;

1^9;/LLUKpaf, 405, Obs. 2.

GEEEK INDEX. 363

ILoXa, jUftWov, jLtdXtOTO, 202

—

jU.oXiO'Ta Srj, 642, a.

fidv, see fn^f.

navOdvo}, J22, 28—with Part.,

591.

/idi'Tis, of both Genders, 140.

fxdpvafiaL, ImpeL'., ji2, D. d.

fiaprvpiit}, 325, 5-

H-oprus, ITJ. 10,

fi.o.(ra-u)V, ju.^Kio-T09, 198, D.

fxaurrLâi, 251, Obs. — Fut.

260, J.

ftda^L^, 177, D. 23.

fiaxofJ-atf jLtaxe'ofiai, 326, 2J,

and D.—with Dat., 436, a.

/A€7as, 191—Compar., 198—jLLeya, 401.

jU,e5ojU.at, 326, D. 42.

jU.e0uc7KW, 3 24, 22.

{jLetpoixaL, Perf., 274, D.

jitei5, 177, D. 24.

jueiW, see jwikoos— /utetov

without ^, 626, Obs.

iu.e'\as, 186.

/xe'Aet, 326, 24—with Genit.,

42afi.i\>Mi, 326, 25—Augm., 234,

Obs.—as Fut., 501—iruff, Ti

oil jLieAAw, 50T, Obs. 2.

fietutTov, etc., 317, D. 9.

fiefi^\tTaL, etc., J26, I). 24.

(*e>ÂuKa, 51. D.; 282, D.;

324, D. 12.

fiefieTifxevo^, JiJ, D. I.

fj.efj.vr}fj.at, 274, Ex.—Sub. Opt.,

289, D.— meaning, 50; —with Part., 591.

jLte'c, coinp. fivv—fj-ev- Si, 628

—ftey oSv, 037, 2.

-/xei', I Pers. Dual and PI. Act,226.

-fievaL, -ju.ev, Inf. Act,, 2J3,

I). 3 ; 255, D.— A.or, Pass.,

29J, 1).— in Verbs in fit,

J02, D.fiii/TOLt 6 JO, 5,

fAfiW, J 26, 26.

fj-eoTitippia, 5(, Obs. 2.

iu.e'o-0?, C3ompar., 195—mean-ing, 301.

ju-ecTTOs, with Genlt., 414, 2.

fterd, 448; 464—Adverb, 446.

êTa6t5a)/j.t, fxerakafi^dvia,

with Genit., 419, a.

lxeTati,4\ofj.at, Dep. Pass., 528, 2

—with Part., 592.

Heraiv, 445; 448; 455, 7—with Part., 587, 2.

fi.e7aTrifi.iT0fxa.it Pass, mean.,

48J, 3—Indir. Mid., 479.

êrexci), /ac'toyos, with Genit.,

4T9, a, and Obs. ; 414, 5.

fjîxp'-(s), 69, Obs. 3; 445;448 ; 455, 6 ; 556—without

Elision, 64, Obs. i.

fiT}, Synizesis, 66—Neg., 6r2,

etc.—in sentences of pur-

pose, 5JO—with Verbs of

prohibiting, 518 ;51" ""*^

Verba of fearing, 512; 533;616, Obs. i — with Fut.and Perf. Ind., 533, Obs,—with Hypoth. Partic, 583—ln'(luestions, 608—" whetherperchance," 6ro— /atj ov,

621; 512; 5ii—M Sti,

622, 4.

fi.Tj&ei^, fjuijiTta, etc., see ouSei's,

ovTTOi, etc.

jU.i)Kdo/Li,aL, 325, D. 0.

fi.-ffv, 64J, 12.

M-Tj-njp, 150, lyj,

-ju.1,, I Pers. Sing, Act., 226

;

302, I — Subj., 233. D. 1;

^255. afi.lywp.1, 3191 18.

fiLKpo?, Gompar., 199, 3.

fi-LfLeofiat, meaning, 328, 4

—

with Ace., J98.

fLtflir/ja-Kto, 274, Ex.; 324,6—li.i.ii.v7j(rK0iJ.at., with Genit.,

420.

jutV, 205, D.MtVcu?, Ace. Sing,, 163, D.

;

1 74, afi.C<Ty(o, 327, 7—Aor. Mid. 316,

D.37-fjLv, in divis, of Syll., 72, i.

fivd, Genit, Sing., ti6, c.

fivijfjLtov, with Genit., 414, 3.

fio\ovp.aL, 324, 12.

fiovov ov, oiixh ^^2, 5-

fi.ovo<fia.yost comp. 197,

-ju-os, Masc. in, 342. 2—Ad).in, 352, Obs.

^v'fw. ^26- 27.

juvfcdo/xai, 325, D p.iu.{is, Masc, 140.

I/, before <t (and ^ dropped,

49; 147, r; 149; 187—bef.

other Oonson,, 51—bee. 7,

51; 282—Pres. Stems in,

253— dropped in Perf.

Stems, 282; 286, I, Obs.—inserted in i Aor. Pass.,

298, D.—affixed to Verb.-

Stem, 321— doubled after

the Syll. Augm., 234, D.—doubled hi the Pres. Stem,

318, 3—moveable, 68.

-V, in the Ace. Sing., 134.45141; 155, etc.; 173, 3—in

Neuters, 125—i Pers. Sing,

in Hist. Tenses Act., 226—3 PI. in Hist. Tenses, 226

;

302, D.

-va, affixed to Verb.-Stems,

312, D.-vat, Inf., 302, 6; 33i, 1.

vaC, 643, 14'

vaterdb), Contr., 24J, D. I.

vavs, 177. ^\-, , .

vS, v6, VT, dropped before a-,

50—147, 1 ; 149-

-ve, afOxed to Verb.-Stems,

323.

°-î^/bf5?fgfe(y^ Microsoft®

vifitii, 326, 28.

veto, 248—fut. 260, 2.

vri, 64^, 15.

vlîa, 251, Obs.VLKOna 'OKvfi.iTt.oL, 400, c—

mean., 486, Obs.etc, 205, D.aTTo-, Sta-, kv-, irpo- voioftai,

Dep. Pass., 328, 2.

vofi-Lûi, with Genit, 417—with Inf., 569.

-cos, Adj in, 352. Obs.vofxiia, Diff. of Pres, and Aor.,

498.POO-OS, Fem., 127, 5.

-vTt, 3 PL of Prlnc. TensesAct., 226.

-I'Twi/, 3 PL Iraper. Act., 228.-w affixed to Verb. Stems,

304, 2; 318, I.

vvfuiâ, Voc. Sing., 117, D. 3.

vv{y\ 68, D.—EncL, 92, 5

—

Diff. of vvv and wv, 99;637, 3

—

vvv Srj, 642. 4 &wwiTepos, 208, D.

f, 34 ; 48 ; 260.

-^, Masc. and Fem. in, 172.|eai,3oi, 1.

^vpdfii, 325, 6.

$via, Perf. Mid., 288.

o, bee. ou, 24, D 3 ; 42; 147, 1.

bee. 01, 24, D, 3—bee. to,

40; 147,2; 151; 193; 233,4—bee. e, 243, D. c—droppedafter at, 194—for a, 268, D.

;

354 — Conn. Vowel, 178 ;

233.1; 354--0, Genit Endfng, 122, Obs.;

128; 131, D.o, for OS, 213, D.—Neut for

oTt, 633, I—Crasis, 65,

6 fi.iv-0 Si, 369, 1

—

Tov Koi. Tov

369, 2. See TO.

oa bee. ftj, 3*7—1)60. a, 183.

ohe, 212 ; 475. See also

Demonst. Pron.bSvpetrQai, with Acc^ 400, c.

oSioSa, I'JS, D. I.

oe bee. OU, 37-

oet bee. ot or ov, 37 ; 243, Obs.

-oeiSrjs, Adj. in, 359. 2, Obs.

6^10, 326, 29—Perf. 275, D. I.

oTj bee, CO, 37.

ofli, Trd0t, t69i, 217, D,69ovveKa, 636, j.

ot from t, 40—bee. <a, 235.

-ot, dropped, 64, D.—Short in

regard to Ace., 83, Obs, 2

;

108—Voc. ending 163.

olywp.1, 319. 19*

otSo, 317, 6—with Part, 591.oiSdvto, olSita, 322, I9.

OiStVous, 1 74, D.

-0117, ending for -ota, 115, D. 2

-ottf, Genit. and Dat Dual128, D.; 141, D.

otKoSe, 94; 178.

364 GREEK INDEX.

o'lKiio?, with Genit,, 414, i

—

with Dat., 436,6.oiKOL, 179.

ot/crpos, Compar., 198.

oljuai, 244-

oi/Awôj, 251, Obs.—Fut, 260,3—Mean, of Fut. Mid., 266.

-otf, ending of Genit. and Dat,Dual, 141; i-jj, 4.

olvoxodo, Augra., 237, D.-OLo, in the Genit., 128, D.

—

2 Pers. Sing. Opt. Mid.,

233, 5.

oTo. 21J, D.

olofAai, OLO/xai, 326, JO—2 Pers.

Sing. Prea., 233, 3—Dep.Pass,, J 28, 2.

olos, Attr. and Article, 600—with Inf., 601—otdsre, 94

—

oTof, ola Si], with Part.,

587. 6.

olff, r6o.

oto-e, 268, D.—OLO-et, 327, 12.

-oto-iCi'), Dat. PI., 128, D.oitrw, etc., ^27, 12.

OLvpjLLati ot;^ve'tjj, 326, jl, andD.—Meaning, 486, Obs.

—

with Part., 590.oXeKo), }i% D. 20.

oKCyos, Compar., 199, 4.

oAtyupe'to, with Genit., 420.oKicrddvoi, 322, 20.

oAAu/Lit, 319, 20— Mean, ofPerf., 329,9; 503—Iterative,337. D.

o\os, Position, 390.'OA.u/j.7rta, 40O1 C.

6ju.t\e'a), with Dat., 436, a.

ofAWfJ-L, J19, 21— with theAce, 399.

ofioios, bfj-oioofjiai, o/ioAoYeo),

ofjuov, etc., with Dat. 4j6,a, b, c.

61u.oA07eoju.a1, conatr. person-ally, 571.

Q^6pywiJ.i, 3T9. 22.

o(i.ij}wis.o<;, with Dat., 436, &.

6^(05, 630, 7 — after Part.,

587. 5.

-ov, Kom. of Neuters, 172,oi'eipo?, 175-

bvCvT]fj.i, 3x2, 2—Ace. of Aor.Sub. and Opt. Mid., 309—with Accus., 396.

Oi/O/J-ai, 114, D.ofuvw, Perf. Mid., 286, Obs.00 bee. ov, 36; 130.-00?, Adj. in, 183.

Sou, 213, D.onrfVtKa, 634, 3.

OTTia-Oev, with Genit., 415.OTTOTe, birorav, 55^; 634, I

—

"as often a.s," 558, Obs. i.

orrtoTra, 275, D. I.

oTTto?, 632, 3—in sentences ofpurpose, 5J0 — with av,

531. h; Obs.— with Fut.Ind., 500; 553— in Clial-

lenges and Warnings, 553,

Obs.—OTTOJS ju.^, with Verbsof Fearing, 533, Obs.

opaio, 327, 8—Double Augm.,2J7—Perf., 327, 8; 275, D.i—with Part., 591.

opyaiVw, Aor., 270, Obs.hpiywfj.L, 319' "-*• 36.

opiyofj-ai, with Genit., 419, c.

hpiovTo, 320, D. 37.

opvL?, 177, 12—Ace. Sing., 1 56.

Qpwfj.1, 319, D. 37— 2 Aor.Mid., 316, D. 38.

opoi'Tat, 327, D. 8.

Dpdta), 243, B. 3. a.

opcreo, 268. D.opvo-trw, Perf., 275, T.

opbipa, 320, D, 37.-OS, Neuters in, 243, 2, and

Obs.; 139; 172—Ending ofGenit., 141; 157, D. ; 173,8, I.

OS, Relative, 21 j—Demonst.,212, D; 213. Obs. and D.~for the Possessive of i and 2

Pers., 471, Obs. c, ; 208, D.oo-os. Attr., 600—0(701', 601

—

oo-oi" ov, 622, 5.

6o"o"aTto?, 216, D.oo-o-e, 177, D. 25.

oo-Tts, 94—214, Obs, 2—oo-Tts

and 60-T19 ovv, meaning, 6do.

00-^paiVojU.a.t, 322, 21, andObs.ore, OTav, 556; 634, i—with

Aor. Ind., 493—"as oftenas," 558, Obs. I.

oTi and o Ti, 214, Obs. 2,

oTi, 633, I—without Elision,

64, Obs. I—in DependentDeclarative Sentences, 525—OTt JU.1J, 633, 1, &.

ori-q, 218.

OTIS, 2I4j D,ov from o,—See o,

-ov, Genit, ending, 122, 2; 128;I34t 2—Conn, Vowel, 233, i—2 Pers, Sing. Imper. andImperf. Mid. 2j3. 5-

ov, ovK, ovx, 69, Obs. 1 ^ 52, D.—Atonous, 97, 4; 612, etc.— with Prohibitives, 499,Obs.—in questions, 608—ovyap, ov yap aWa, 636, 6, d.

—ou &r)Ta, 642, 6

—

OVK apa,

637, I ou fJi.Yj, 620—011 fJLTJV

(jaeVTOt) ccAAo, 622, 6--ûjU.di/oi'-aAAa Kaii 624, 6.

o5, ol, e, etc, meaning, 471,Obs. &.

ovSe, 625, I

.

ovSei's, 221—Attr., 602—ovSeVi622, I.

OVK€Tt, 622, 2.

ouKoOi' and ovkovv, DifF. 99;,637,2.

ovK6fj.evo^, 3 19, D, 20o^v, 637, 2—Affixed, 218.-ovv, Ace. Sing., 1^3, D.oiVcKo, 636, J.

ouf, 65; D.


TTaO^W,

OUJTtu, 622, 2.

oupe'ti), Augm.i 237.-ous, Adj. in, 183; 352, 4—Nom. of Subs., 172,

oSs, 177. 13; 142. 3— Neui.,140.

ovrdd}, Aor., 316, 20, DouTei94—oure-ouTe, ouTC-ovSe,

625, 2, and Obs.ouTi, 622, 1,

ovTOt, 643, 10,

oStos, 212; 475;—in address-

ingi 393—ouToo-h 212.

oi;Tw(s), 69, Obs, 3—with Part.,

,587.4-ovx^ 97, Obs.

ovx OTt, ox'x ojTw?, 622, 3, 4-

bêCKia and bipiWdi, Diff, 253,Obs.

o0eiAw, 326, 32.

oê'Mo), I Aor., 270, D,b^Kta-Kavo), 322, 22,

oi^pa, 556; 6?5, 10.—See Iva.

o^piis, Ace. PI., 158.

oxos, PI. 174, D.

o^wKa, 327, D. 6.

oi^tos, Comp, 195.d)ô/xai, 327, 8-

01^000.705, Compar., 197.

-0(0, Length, in Contr. Verb,

243, D. A. 3—Attic Fut,263, D.—Verbs in, 353, i,

and Obs. i.

TT, doubled, 217, D. (62, D.)

—

Aspir. in Perf., 279.

TTats, Genit. PI. and Du..

142, 3—Voc. Sing., 148—oftwo Genders, 140.

iraiui, Perf. Mid., 288.

TToAaios, Compar., i94'

irdXiv, in Compos, before a;

49, Obs. I,

irdWxo, Aor. 257, D.—2 Aor.

Mid., 316. D. 40.

jTav, 142, &—in Compos, before

0-, 49, Obs. I.

iravTd.ira(rL(y), 68, J,

irapd, TTopai, Trdp, 4481 Hl-i465—Apoc, 64, t>.

irdpa, 90.Trapavo/ieu), irreg. Augm., -239,

7rapa7rA.Tjo"t.os, with Dat., 436, 6—Compar. 195.

TrapariBefxai,, ^Sx.

Trapaxwpe'tij.with Genit., 419. £irapeyiii and Trapevoiitai, 480.

Trapex*^, with Ini,, 561.irapoLi/eu, double Augm. 240.

irap6v, 586,

Trapos, 565; 635, 12

irappTqo'LdÔfiai, Augm., 239-

jtSsj Genit. and Dat. Accent.,

142, 2—meaning with andwithout Art., 390, and Obs.

Trdo-o-u), 250, Obs.—Fu^2(io, 3.

irda-iTiav, 198, D.irda-xto, 327, 9—Perf. 317, D.

14.

GREEK INDEX. 365

irariofjLaL,

irareoftai, ;25t 7>

irarrjp, l5i-iTa.voiJ.ai, Aor., 298 — with

Genit., 419, e— with Part.mean., 590.

7rei9io, Aor., 257, D.— Perf.,

J17, D. 15—Fut, and Aor.Part., 326, D. 43—meaning,iio,i\ $03.

Treivdo), Contr,, 244> ^^

ireitro/xou, 527, 9.

ireXa^ti), I Aor. Imper., 268, D.ire\eKv<s, Masc, 140; 157.mfiTTOi, Perf., 279.

nevT]^, Compar. 192 — withGenit,, 414, 2.

ireJroL9tL, 317, D. 15.

TTerrovOa, J17, D. 14.

TTerrpaya. and Trdwpaxa, diff.,

330.Trerrpwrai, 285, D.irdnTOfiaL, 274, Ex.TreTTTWKa, 274, Ex. ; 527, 15.

TreTTUKo, 527, 10.

TreiTfiiv, Compar., 196, a.

trip, 641, 3—Ênclit, 92, 5

—

AflBx, 218.

irepo, with Genit., 415—Com-par., 200.

irepSti), J26, 33.

Tripdbi, 2 Aor., 257, D. ; 59, D.—Aor. Inf. Mid., 316, D. 41.

wept, 448, III. ; 466—withoutElision, 64, Obs. i—Anastr.,

446— Adverb, iftid.—withAugm., 238.

jrepij3aAAo|U.at, With doubleAce., 402.

ireptyCyi'op.ai, TrepCeifii, withGenit., 423.

•iTipirqp.1, Part., 312, D. e.

vepv(rt(y\ 68, 3.

•iTe<reiv, 3^7. i?-

ire{r<T<ai 250, Obs.

ireTomnjfjLL, 319, I-

Hercw?, (aenit. Sing., iji, P.iriTOfiat, 3 26, 34—2 Aor., 61, C ;

257. D.; ?>6, 5.

jrevôjLMLt, 322, 29.

iri<f>vov, 257t D-Tre^yfoTCS, 277, D.

TT^, IlSlclit., 92, 4.

jnjwuiitt, 319. 23— 2 Aor.

Mid., 316, D. 39—Meaning,530,4.

irnvLKa, with Genit., 415.

jnjxvy, Masc, 140; 154.

TTtcê'w, TTte'^w, 3 25( -D- ^TTtflt, 316, 15.

jrtA,paju.at, Aor., 3 1 2, D./.

TTi/i-TrAij/ii, 3 12, 3—with Genit.,

418.7rtJLtirpT7ju,i, 312, 4-

irtVw, 321, 4; ?27, 10—P^lt,

265—Aor.,32T, 4; 316, 15—Meaning, 329, 7 — îtb

Genit., 4r9, d, and Obs.

—

-rrCofJLaL, 265 ; 327, i°'

irtTTto-Kw, 324, 20.

TrtirpaffKW, 324» 7-

irtiTTOi, 327, 15—Perf. Part.,

317. !>• 17-

fft'trupes, 220, D. 4.

TTLTviui, 323, 35-

iriTTrqp.i, 312, D. gf.

n-i.0aua'K(t>, 324, 1'- 32.

TTWdi', Compar., ig6, a.

irXdôi, 251, Obfl.

7rAao-(7w, 250, Obs. — Fut.

260,3.irKeCoiv, irAeioTO?, 199. ?

—

TrAe'of, without Tj, 626, Obs.

—

n\evv, 199, D. 5.

TrAeKu, Aor. Pass., 295.ttX&m, 248—Fut. 260, 2; 264—Perf. Mid., 288.

TrAe'w?, 184— with Genit.,

414. 2.

Tr\r}$(j>, 312, 3—with Genit.,

418.n-K-qu, 445 ; 4?5. 9-

ir\rjpTjs, ttXtjpoiii, with Genit.,

414,2; 418.jrXTjtrtoc, Compar., 195—with

Genit, 415-irKrjcra-u, 1 Aor. and Fut. Paes,,

295.ttA^to, 316, D, 22.

-TrAouff, in Multiplicat., 223.

TrAoucrtoy, with Genit., 414, 2.

ttAww, Perf, 282.

ttAww, Aor., 316, D. 24.

m/ew, 248—Fut., 260,2; 264—Perf., 285, D,—with Ace,400, c.

IXz^Jf, 177, 14.

TTofios, see TTous.

TToOiv, Encl,, 92, 4.

TToOeui, 301, 4,

7ro5^ see wou.JTO^ End., 92, 4.

TToie'oj and 7roteoju.ati 4^°—with Genit-, 417.

irtJAts, 157, D.—Gender, 138, 6

Compos., 189, 3.

TToAtreuw and n-oAireuojitat,

480. Obs.TroAAaKt(s), 69, Obs. 3 ; 224.

iroAuV, I9X—Compar., 199, _5—TToAu, 404, Obs. TTOAA^,

with Comp., 440.

TToveo), 30T, 4-<

iroppu), with Genit., 415.

IXoo-eLfiwi', Ace. Sing., 171

—

Vac., 148, Obs.

TTore, End., 92, 4.

irorepov ij, 611—in depend.

interr. sentences, 525.

TTOTL, see TTOO?.

Ti-ov, Encl., 92, 4—with Genit.,

415.irovAu'?, Fem., 185, D.

iTovs, 142. ^; 147. i» y-^.—

Dat. PI., 49, D.; 141, D.;

149, D.—in Compos., 160

—

Masc., 140.

, Trpaos, 191.

npoTTOfiai, with doableAce., 402.

wpeV/3us, 177, 15.

TrpnObi, 312, 4.

irpiaâty 2 Aor., 316, 8 —Accent, of Aor. Sub. C^t.,

309.TTptV, 556; 635, II—with Inf^

565, and Obs, i, 2.

irpCto, Perf. Mid., 288.

trpo, 448, B ; 454—Crasis, 65—with Augm., In Compos.,238—with Inf. and Art.,

574» J

—

T^po Toi), 369, 3.

TTpoff (ttoti, irpoTt), 448, Til.

;

467—Adv., 446—with Inf.

and Art., 574, 2, 4.

TTpoffflei/, TTpomo, with Genit.,

Trpos^Koi', 586,irpo^toTTov, Nom. Ace. Pl„

175. D.TTpOTepOff, TTpWTOff, 200.

irpovpyov, Compar., 195,TTpwioy, Compar., 195.TTTntrwoj, 316, D. 2I.

jTrttrerw, 250, Obs. — Fut-,

260,3.TTTUft), 301, I.

irTwxos, Compar., 197.TTvOifrQai, 322, 29.

UvKvS^, 177, 14.

n-u/iaros, 190, D. (Defect,).

nvvOdvoiMii, 322, 29— withGenit., 420.

TTvp, 142, b; 151 ; 175—Neut..140.

jr«, 7rt6(s), Encl., 92, 4.

TTus, with Genit., 415—^wsydp oil, 636, 6, d,

p, doubled, 62 — after theAugm., 234^-after Kedupl.,

274, 4—Metathesis, 59—in

2 Aor,, 257, O—p. pp, 13,

pa. End., 92, 5.—See apa.pa/3So9, Fem., 127, 5.

paSios, Compar., 199, 7.

poLLvoi, Plup. 287, D.^€^£d, 327. 3-

pepUTTtojLteVos, 274, D.ê'w, 248; 326.35—Fut. 260,2.

p^Vi/ufLt, 319, 24; 278—mean-ing, 330, 5.

pr]9^(rop.ai, etc., 327, 13.

piyeto, 325, D. i.

pCyiov, T99, p.piyota, Contr,, 244, 3.

plTTTeb), ptTTTW, 315, 8.

pva-Bai, etc., 314, D.piawufii, 3x9, 10.

o", 2; 33, c—effect on pre-cedii^ Vow. and Cons., 46,etc, ; 260, etc, ; 286 —Cora-bin., 48—Assim. to p, 50, 6

—to A, jit, r, p, 270, D.—bee.Spir, A^,, 60, b ; jo8; 3275 Obs.—from t, see t.

366 GREEK INDEX.

ff, dropped, 6i, a, h—in SigmaStems, i66—in Pres. Stems,

233. J, 4, 5—In the Fut.,

262, Obs., etc.— in the i

Aor., 268 ; 269, D. ; 270—in the 2 Aor. Mid., 307—In

the Perf. and Plup. Mid.,

284, D.

(T, inserted in the Perf,, 288

—

in the Weak Pass. Stem,298—in the Verb. A^J, jooin deriv., 340, Obs. 2—inCompos., 358, 2.

ff, doubled in the Dat. PI.,

158, D.—in the Fut., 261, D.in the 1 Aor., 269, D.—after

Syl. Augm., 234, D.b, dropped, 69, Obs. j

Compar., 204.

s, ending of Norn. Sing, 173, i

;

113; 122, I ; IJ4, i; 141;145; 147, i; 155; 160—wanting, 122, D. i ; 147, 2

;

151; 163.

s, ending of Dat. PI, 119134, 8—of Ace. PL, IJ4, loj

173. 7—of 2 Pers, Sing, in

Hist. Tenses Act., 226

—

Nom. of Fem., 348; J49,Obs.

-o-d, Fem, ending, 187.

o-aATTt'ôj, 251, Obs.-a-av, 3 PI, in Preter., 302, 7.

SapTTTyfiwi', 174, D.

a-êvvviXL, 319, 7—2 Aor., 316,

9j 3 1 3, 5—meaning, 329, 5.

-o-e, Local Suffix, 178.

<reavTov, 2ro—Poss., 472, a.

o-eôfLaL, Dep. Pass., J 28, 2.

-o-et'w, Verbs in, 3$i, Obs. 2.

treiui, Perf, Mid., 288,

o-euw, 248, D.—I Aor., 269, D,—Perf. Mid., 274, D., 285, D.—2 Aor,, 316, 1). 30.

CT^TTfa), meaning of Perf., 3 jo, 6.

0^9, Genit., PL and Du., 142, 3,

0-0, after Cons., 61, a; 286, 4.itrfla, in the 2, Pers. Sing, Sub,and Opt, 233, D, i; 255,D, 1—Ind. 302, D,—in theI Pers. Plur. Pres, Mid.,

23i, D. 5-

-o-fle, 2 Pers. PL, Imper. Mid.,228.

-a-9ov, I Pers, Du. Pres, Mid.,'2J J, D. s ~ J Pers. Du.

Imperf., 233, D. 7—2 Pera.

Uu. Imper. Mid., 228,

-trdio, -a-Qiiiv, -cTf)io<Tav, 3 Pers.

Sing. Du. PL Imper. Mid.,228,

-crt, 2 Pers. Sing, of PriucTenses Act., 226; 302, 2,

trtCi/), Dat. PL, 68, i; 119;134.8; 141; 160; 173,6--J Pers, Sing. Pres, Subj.,

23?, D. i; 255, D. I—Loc.ending, 179; 68, 2—3 Pers.

PL and Sing,, 68, 5.

cr0e'.

-crto, -aiq, Fem, in, 342, i.

triyaw, Difif, of Pres. and Aor,,

498—meaning of Fut. Mid.,

266,

-criju,og, AdJ, in, 352, Obs.

o-iwTTcu.), meaning of Fut, Mid.,

266,

o-K, in forming Inchoatives,

324—Iteratives, 334, D,, etc.

(TKeSdvvvfLL, 319, 4,

o-Ke'AAu, Aor, 316, 10—mean-ing, 329, 6.

crKiBvr}fj.i, 3i2,T>.h; 319.4.CKOTriia and eoftai, 480,(TKOTOg, 174*2kuAAi7, 115, D. 2.

CTKtop, 176.

ufLOM, Contr., 244, 2,

-o-o, 2 Pers, Smg, Imper,M id,,

228,

o-Traw, 301, I—Perf, Mid., 288.

oTTeuSo), Fut., 260, I— Perf.

Mid., 286, Obs,UTreos, 166, D.(Tir4(r&a.t, etc., 327. 5-

(nreuSw, with Inf., 560, 3.

o-JTovSaô), meaning of Fut,Mid., 266.

o-c. 57 ; 250,

-CTo-w, Verbs in, 250—Fut.,,

260, 3.

-OTO, 307,araôi, 251, Obs.—Fut,, 260,3.

<rTaxv^, Masc, 140.

oTet'iSco, 326, 36.

(TTeWoi, Perf., 282—Aor, Pass,,

295.arei/d^to, 25 1, Obs. — Fut.,

260, 3.

(rT£V(inr6s, Masc, 127, 2,

arepyui, with Dat, 4^9, Obs.

<TTepL<TK<ii, 324, 26 — withGenit, 419, e.

cTTtfw, 251, Obs.—Fut.. 260, 3.

o-Too, 115 (Ex.).

(TTOpivWlLL, JI9, 8.

OTopi^/xt, 3 19, 25.

ffTOâô/xat, with Genit.1

419. c.

<jTpe'^{o, Perf., 285—meaningof Aor. Pass., 328, 3.

<TTpiavwiJ.Lt 319, II,

a-TVyeui, 325, D. fc.

(Tvjii.(3atVM, Constr. personally,

571.

irvix(l}tiiv4(o, (TvvtfSbi, with Dat,4j6, a.

(HJi', ^lif, in Compos, bef. o-

and ^,.49, Obs. 1— In Dis-tributives, 22?.

-iruvTjt Fem., 346, 2.

trvvoiSa. /aoi, with Part, 591,Obs,

<Tvv(owp.o^, with Dat, 4j6, b.

oT/s, 142, 6—of two Genders,140.

<T^d\kofj.at, with Genit, 419, e.

trê, 205, D.—cr^fcTepos, 472, b—aôs, 208, D.


a^^S, Masc, 140,

(TxeOeetv, 338, D.

(Txe?, etc, 316, II ; 327, 6.

a-voKaloi, Compar., 194.

(Tw^w, I Aor. Pass,, 298.StuKpa-nj?, 174.(Tois, 184.

crwT^p, Voc Sing,, 152.

T, Pronunt, 4—bee. 0, 54

—

bee, a, 60, a; 67; 187

—

Dropped, 147, 2 ; 169—in

the Perf,, 281 — changesbefore, 286, 3 — affixed to

Verb. Stem, 249—moveable,169, D.

rdv. Defect., 177, 16.

Taw/iai, 319, D. 38.

jdxa-, 212

—

T7}v TtLxCfmjv, 40$,Obs. 2.

Taxv?j Compar. Qda-tnov, J4, b ;

198.

-re, 2 Pers. PL Act, 226—2 Plm-. Imper. Act, 228,

-T6, 624, b— EncL, 92, 5—AfiBx, 94; 624, 5—re'-Kat,

re'-Se, 624, 2, and Obs,TeQirq^bi, 2QI.

reti', 205, D.TeiVtd, Perf. 282—1 Aor. Pass,

298.

-reipa, Fem., 341, 2.

reK(j.T}pcov 8e, 636, 6, &.

reXew, 301, i— Perf. Mid., 288.

Tefiet, 321, D. 10.

TifiviMf 321, 10.

Te'o, Tei), retu, etc, 214, D.red?, 208, D.-reo?. Verb, AdJ„ 300; 596

—

with Dat., 434,-T6po5, Compar., 192 ; 208,

Obs.; 216,

TepTTOfxat, Aor,, 59, D, ; 257,

D.; 295, D.— with Part,

592-,Teraytav, 257, D.rerajta, 282,

TeVA-Tjica, 317, D. 10.

T4.Tfj.ov, 257, D,TETpaCvdi, Aor., 270, Obs.

TCTpTJXa, 277, D.rervKelv, 322, D. 30,

Teu^w, 322, 30— Perf. Mid,285, D.

T^Kw, Meaning, 330, 7,

TTjAtKoOros, TTjAtKosSe, 212;

475.-TTjv, Ending of the j Pers.

Du, of the Hist. Tenses,

Act, 226— of the 2 Pers.

Du., 233, D. 7.

-njp, Masc in, 141, 2 ; 137.

-T7}piov, Neut in, 345, i.

-T)]q, Nom. of Masc. in, 341, 2

;

349, 2—Voc Sing,, 121—Nom. of Fem. in, 346,1; ij8.

n bee. a-iT, 57— inserted in

derivalîon, 351,

GKBEK INDEX. 367

-Ti, J Pera. Sing. Act. in thePrincip. Tenses, 226.

Tt; why? 404, Obs.—Tt Yap;6j6, 6, d—Tt 61} ; 642, 4, a— Tt fii7Trou ; 042, 5 — Tt

S^ra ; 642, 6—-rt fj-adiav ; TtiraBbiv ; 006, Obs. 2—Tt ju-^c;

641, 12.

Ttl), 218.

Twrjfit, Aor. Pass., 5J, 6.

TiKTw, 249.TtjLiaa), with Genit., 421.Ti/iftjpe'o/xat and -e'o), 481, b

—

-eojitai, with Acc., 396.riw{i.t, 319, D. 35.

TtVtil, 321, 5.

TtTrre, 61, 1),

Ttpw?, 50. ^ Obs. 2.

-Tis, Nom. Fem., 341, 2 ; ?42, r.

Tts, Tt, 214—for osTts, 609,

tW, Tt, 214—Kncl., g2, i

—

rivd,

to be supplied, 568.

TLTpoti), 3271 16'

TVrpuitrKia, J24, 16.

TiTUtTKOjuat, J22, D. 30; J24,

p.i7.•r\y\va.t, etc, Ji6, 6,

Tju.^7w, J2I, D. 10.

TO, 379. Obs.; 104; 559, 6—TO y-iv, TO 6e', 569, Obs.

—

toirptV, 635, II.

Toflt, ToQev, TO)?, 217, r>.

Tot, 64J, 10—End., 92, 5.

Toiyap, Totyapoui/, TOtyapTOt,

043, 10; 6J 7, 5 — ToCvvv,

6J7, 4-

TOto, etc., 212, D.

TotovTOS, TOLOsSe, 212; 475.Totsfieo-t, 212, D.

TO^jLtO, 115 (EXO--Toc, 2 and ; Pers. Ehi. Act.,

226— J Pers. Du. Imperf.,

21J, D. 7—2 Pers. Du, Im-perf., 228.

-Tos. Verbal Adj. tn, joo.

too-oOto9, TotrdsSe, 212; 475.

Tore, with Part., 587, 4.

Tov, Tw, 214, Obs. I.

-Tpa ioT -rep In the Dat. PL,

153-, ^

Tpa, Fern, in, 344, Obs.

rparot, 2 Aor. Act,, 257—2 Aor. Pass., 294— Perf.,

279; 285.

Tpeôi, 54, c—Perf., 279; 285

Aor. Pass., 295—Aor. Act.

Meaning, 329, D.

rpe\w. 54.C; J27, II.

rpô-w, ?27, 16.

-rpto. Fern, in, 341, 2—Quan-tity, 117.

Tpi^pTj?, Genit. Pi., 166.

"Tpts, Fern, in, J4I' 2-

Tptxds, see BpC$

•Tpov, Neut, in, 344.

Tpioyiu, 2 Aor. Act., 257.

Tpcoff, Genit. PI. and Du., 142, j.

Tpdita, 324, D. 16.

TT, TTW) see cro", -o"o-to.

ifisi&Ofiai.

Tvyxdvui, 322, 30, etc.—withLlie Genit,, 419, c — withJ-*art., 590.

Tvvrf, 205, 1>.

TUTTTtO, 326, 37,

TVi})u}, 54i c.

Tu;êii', 322, Jo.

-riu, Tuv, 3 Pers. Sing, andl)u, Imper. Act., 228.

-Tup, Nom. Masc. in, 341, 2;n7-

-Two-ai', 3 Pers. PI. Imper.Act., 228.

V bea p, 3^, J->. 2; 160; 248,Obs.—beu V, 4o^bec. e.v,

40; 278—bee. ov, 40, 0.

—

of the Stem bee. e, 157

—

Long by nature, 83, Obs. i— lengthened, 253, Obs.

—

dropped, 253—not dropped,64.

-V, Neut. in, 139; 172.

v^piîa, with Acc., 396.ujBptcTT^?, Compar., 197.

-vSptof, Neut. in, 347, Obs, i.

v&tap, 176—Neut., 140.

ve bee. v, 158.

vt, Dlphth., 28.

-uta, Fem. of Perf. Part., 188.

vlo'i, 177, 17.

vp.iv, SjLLti', etc., 207— vfi.6^,

203, D.

•vv, Nom. of Masc. and Neut,in, 172.

vvui. Verbs in, 353, 8.

virai, see vir6.

UTToiTO?, 200.

virip (u7retp),448, II., A.; 460'—with Inf. and Art,, 574, 3-

viTia-xvovp.0.1, 323, 36— with

Inf., 569.

vTTo, 448, III.; 468— Apoc,64, D.

vn-OTTTevo), Augm., 2^.-us, Nom. Masc. and Fem., 172

—Barytones in Acc. Sing.,

156.

va-fLLVT}, Dat. Sing., 175, D.

v<rrepo^, vararoSf vo'TaTtos,

200; 199, D.

v(TT€pos, ixTTepita, with Genit,,

416, Obs, 3 ; 423.

^, Pronunt., 6.

âavBrfV, 321, D.

âetvds, SuperL, 193 » D.

âtVo), 0aetVw, 321, D,—Perf.,

282—Meaning,' 330, 8—Aor.

Pass., 298, D.— Meaning,

328, 3—Diff. of Pres. andAor., 498.

<âtvoât, if>avep6^ eifil, WithPart, 590,

(ftda-Kio, 324, 8.

êiSofiai, 326, D. 45—Aor. andFut., 257, D.—with Genit.,

I 419, e.


Xpioi.

(fiepTe, 315, D. 4.

ijiepTepos. <t>epTaTOi, êpt(7T0S,

199, D. I.

êpM, 327, 12— Imperat. ol

I Aor. Act., 268, D.—Mean-ing, 476, 2—(}}epoiV, 580.

^Gvyiii, 322, J I—Fut. Mid., 264—Perf. Mid., 285, D.—withAcc, 398—with Genit. 422,—Meaning, 486, Obs.

<fyY}i/,C, 312, 5—Pres. Ind. End.,

92, i.

Ôdvta, 321,3 —2 Aor., 316. 7— with Acc, 398 — withPart., 590.

^Beiptii, Perf., 282—Meaning,330, D. II.

tbOCvia, ill, 6—Aor. Mid., 316,D. 26. .*

4>i\iui, 325, D. 1,

0tA.o?, Compar., 195.(jytKoTifxeopâi, Dep. Pass.,

328, 2.

•^t(y}, 178, D.ô/Sou/iat, Mean, of Aor., 328,

3—with Inf., 560, J.

<ôti/tf, 83, Obs. i; 145.ôpîfat, see Adpiii.

4>pdywfj.t, âpytnjfJLL, 3l9i 26.

0pafa>, Aor., 257, D.

(ftpeap, 176.

4>p-'}V, Fem., 140.

ûyotSe, 178, D.iûyyaj'to, 322, 3T, and Obs.

-</)u^?, Adj. in, Acc. Sing., ib6.

0uAaTTo/xat, with Acc, 399.(/>upu), Fut, 262, D. .

ipvia, Aor., 316, 17—Meaning,

329. 3-

<jim, ^(jls, Genit. PI. and Du.,

I {2, 3-

Xo-Cpoif 326, 38 — with Dat,,

439, Obs.—with Part., 592.

;âAaw, 30I> I-

XaXeiraCvu}, with Dat., 439, Obs.

XoXeiro^, with Inf., 562.

XaKeiTti}^ êpoi,vfith Part., ^02.

XO-vBdvui, 323, D. 41-

XavovfiaL, 324, 9.

xdpiv, 404, Obs.

xcipt?, Compar. of compoundswitti, 197.

Xda-Kio, 324, 9.

xeip, i77> )8—Fem., 140

XeLpwv, x^^P^(^°^> ^99» ^•

XîcrofAaL, 323, D.-4I.

Xep7)s, etc., 199, D. 2.

X6W, 248— Fut., 265— Perf.

28i~i Aor., 269—2 Aor.316, D. 31.

Xpo-to'P-eoi, 325, D. in.

Xpaofxai, XP°^' Contr., 244, 2

—Fut,, 261—with Dat., 438.

Obs.

Xp-n, ?I2, 6—xpflp,49o—withAcc. and Inf., 567, Obs. i.

Xpijo-TTjs, Genit. Pi., 123.

xpt'w, Perf. Mid., 288.

368 GREEK INDEX.

Xpoo, 115 (Ex.).

Xp<ovwfJ.i, 3I9j 12.

Xwptgo), with Genit, 419, e.

XwptV, 455. 5-

i/f, J4 ; 48 ; 260.

-i^, Subs, in, i-jz.

i//au(u, Perf. Mid., 288—withGenit., 419, b.

\pdiii, Gontr., 244, 2.

^6u5oju,ai., with Genit., 419, e.

(u, for o, 276, D.— See Att.Declens.—from o, see o

—

from 7j, see ij.

•o), Fem. in, ij8—Nom., 172— Adv. in, 204 — Prop.JiTames in Ace. Sing., 16 j, D.— in the Genit, 122, D. 3, c— Conn. Vowel, 2jj, i—I Pers. Sing. Ind. Act, 2 jj, 2.

Syyt^-aL, J27, D. 6.

wfiTjs, Adj. in, ^59, 2 Obs.

w9iia, J 25, 9— SylL Augm.,

2n*SAAol, 65, D.&jU)/LLaL, J 27, 8.

-wi/, Nom. of Masc. and I'em.,

172; J45, 3—Genit, 118;

_134.7; 141; 175. 5-

d)i/ajLt7jF, etc., 314, D.

Siva4, 65, D.toi/e'o/xai, Syll. Augm., 2J7

—

Perf., 275, ^—with Genit,

421.

ui^vfiaai, j86, I, Obs.

-wp, Subs. In, 172.

u>pa(ri(y), 179*-wff, Nom. 172—Adj., 184—

Perf. Part, 276 ; 188—Fem.,ij8 — Adv. 201 ; 203 —Ending of Genit Sing, in,

161—with I- and v- Stems,

157—in -eu Stems, i6t, a.

W9 and<5s, 217.wgand m, Diff., 99; 217 D.

631.

(1)9, Atonon, 97, 3 ; 98—withCompar. 6ji, a—with Inf.,

lis enrelv, dis to vvv eli/at,

etc, 564—" as though," etc.,

with Part, 588—" when,""as," 556—with Aor. Ind.,

493—"that," in DependentDeclarative Sentences, 525—" in order that," in Sen-tences of Purpose, 530 —with av, 631, 6, Obs.—inexpressing a wish, 514.

w?, Prep., 445; 448, A.;450.

wsTrep, 632—with Part, 588.

wsre, 94; 566; 632, 4—withInf., ;66—Joined with fjn^

617, Obs. 2.

oiTos, see oS?.

uiv, IJiphth., 26, D.

tovTo?, etc., 209, D.

a)0eA.e'w, with Acc., 396u)if>e\ov, 326, 32—in exprasfi

ing a wish, 515

THE END.

XONUON : PEIHTKD BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS

AND CHABINQ CEOSS.

8TA1IFOKD Si'rttKT

STANDARDPUBLISHEB

SCHOOLBY ME.

BOOKS,MURRAY.

DR. WM. SMITH'S DICTIONARIES.A LATIN-ENGLISH DICTIONARY. (1200 pp.) Medium

8vo. 21s.

"Of Latin and English Dictionaries, tlio best representation gf the

scholarship of the day is uudoubtsdly that of Dr. Wm. Smith."—Rev. Dr. DoNALDSox.

A SMALLER LATIN-ENGLISH DICTIONARY. WithProper Names, Calendar, Weights and 3lEASl)Kii:s. Abridgedfrom the above. Square 12mo. 7s. tSd.

AN ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY. Compiled fromoriginal sources. By Wm. Smith, LL.D., and Theopuilus D.

Hall, M.A. (040 pp.) Medium Svo. 21t.

A SMALLER ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY. Abridgedfrom the .ibove. Square 12mo. 7s. 6d.

A CLASSIC.iL DICTIONARY OF MYTHOLOGY,BIOGEAPHV, and GEOGRAPHY. For the Higher FormsIN Schools. Compiled from the larger Dictionaries. With 750

Woodcuts. Svo. ISs.

A SMALLER CLASSICAL DICTIONARY OF MYTHO-LOGY, BIOGEAPHY, and GEOGRAPHY. Abridged fromthe above. With 200 Woodcuts. Crown Svo. 7s. Cd.

A SMALLER DICTIONARY OF GREEK AND ROMANANTIQUITIES. Abridged from the larger Dictionary. With200 Woodcuts. Crown Svo. 7s. 6d.

A CONCISE BIBLE DICTIONARY: its Antiquities,Biography, Geography, and Natural History. With Illustra-

tions. Medium Svo. 21s.

A SMALLER BIBLE DICTIONARY: ita Antiquities,Biography, Geography, and Natural History. With 40 Mapsand Illustrations. Crown Svo,

, 7s. tjd.

DR. WM. SMITH'S GREEK COURSE.INITIA GRJ5CA. Part I. A First Gbkbk Course.

Containing a Delectus, Exercise Book, and Vocabularies.12mo. 3s. ijd.

INITIA GR^CA. Part II. A Greek Reading Book.'Containing shortTales, Anecdotes, Fables, Mythology, and Gre-cian History. Arranged in a systematic Progression. With aLexicon. 3s. Gd.

INITIA QR^CA. Part IIL Gbeek Pbose Composition.Containing the Bules of Si'ntax, with Copious Examples andExercises. 12mo. 3s. iid.

THE STUDENT'S GREEK GRAMMAR Fob the UseOF Colleges and the Upper Forms in Schools. By ProfessorClrtids. Post Svo. Cs.

ELUCIDATIONS of the STUDENT'S GREEK GRAMMAR.Translated from the German of ERNEST CURTIUS, with theAuthor's aid and sanction, by EVELYN ABBOT.

A SMALLER GREEK GRAMMAR. Fob the Use opthe Middle and Lowep. Forms, Abridged ii'ora the above12mo. 8s. 6d.

MATTHI^'S GREEK GRAMMAR FOR SCHOOLS.Abridged by the late BISHOP BLOJtFIELD. An entirriynew and enlarged Edition. By E. S. CROOKE. B.A, formerlyAssistant-Matter in M-irlbQTOUf?h Cclkge. Post Svo, 4s.

ICoiUinued,

cu31924021601046

Documents

Transcript of cu31924021601046